Cbc University of Cbicatjo
KUbraries
Gift of
ct
THE
GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE.
fr0w
THE BASIS OF THE COMMON" ENGLISH VERSION.
avvovs Iv vfj a
WITH NOTES.
aov 6 boyoe 6 oos alij&eid lati. JOHN 17:17.
NEW YOKE:
AMEEICAN BIBLE UNION.
LOUISVILLE : BIBLE EEVISION ASSOCIATION.
LONDON: TEUBNEE & CO., No. 60 PATEENOSTEE EOW.
1860.
Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1860, by
THE AMERICAN BIBLE UNION,
In the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District of New York.
THOMAS HOLMAN, PBINTKB AND STEREOTYPES, NEW TOBK.
548073
I 5 T E D TI C T I If ,
"GENERAL RULES FOB THE DIRECTION OF TRANSLATORS AND REVISERS EMPLOYED BY THE AMERICAN BIBLE UNION.
" 1. THE exact meaning of the 'inspired text, as that text expressed it to those -who understood the original Scriptures at
the time they were first written, must be translated by corresponding words and phrases, so far as they can be found, in the
vernacular tongue of those for whom the version is designed, with the least possible obscurity or indefiniteness,
" 2. Wherever there is a version in common ,use, it shall be made the basis of revision, and all unnecessary interference with
the established phraseology shall be avoided; and only such alterations shall be made, as the exact meaning of the inspired
text and the existing state of the language may require.
" 3. Translations or revisions of the New Testament shall be made from the received Greek text, critically edited, with
known errors corrected."
"SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS .TO THE REVISERS OP THE ENGLISH NEW TESTAMENT.
"1. The common English version must be the basis of the revision: the Greek Text, Bagster & Sons' octavo edition
of 1851.
" 2. Whenever an alteration from that version is made on any authority additional to that of the reviser, such authority
must be cited in the manuscript, either on the same page or in an appendix.
" 3. Every Greek word or phrase, in the translation of which the phraseology of the common version is changed, must
be carefully examined in every other place in which it occurs in the New Testament, and the views of the reviser be given as
to its proper translation in each place."
The leading principles -which, have been kept in view in revising the Gospel of Luke, will be
found in the Introductions to the Eevisions of Bphesians, Hebrews, and Mark. As these have been
published by the American Bible Union, repetition is unnecessary.
IV INTRODUCTION.
The toil and anxiety attendant on the work of translation or revision, can be properly appreciated
only by experience. Some errors will elude the most careful examination. Candid readers will recollect
that the task of the Reviser who must go through with the whole, search, compare, reflect and remember,
is quite different from that of the critic, who, while he looks to detect inaccuracies, as he "enters
into the labor of others," often takes no comprehensive view of the whole ground. It is in the work
of translation, that the imperfection of language, as the vehicle of thought, makes itself thoroughly
felt. The translator finds himself constantly perplexed by the want of exact correspondence in the
signification of words, difference of idiom, the obscurity of terms, and the necessity to which he is reduced
of making an approximate rendering. Hence he learns that no exertion can produce a result, which
will meet his ideal of perfection. Like every other science and art, which has tasked human thought
and activity, translation is imperfect in its results. So it must be, while words fail to present our
ideas in their full force and vividness. The laws of thought and language are among the proofs,
that "here we see through a glass darkly." Still, for the practical purposes of life, instruments
imperfect as sounds and their written signs, meet the wants of our race. From the beginning,
Jehovah employed language the language of man to reveal his own glorious character, his claims
on the human family, his own agency, his Providence, his law and "in due season" his plan of
redemption, and " the glorious appearing of the great God, ' even our Saviour Jesus Christ." As
his communications were made in languages, which in his purpose, were to pass away with the genera-
tions who had spoken them, he made it the duty of his children to preserve the deposit of his truth,
and transfer the thoughts in which it was embodied, into every spoken or written tongue, with all
possible exactness, that men might know and do the will of their Heavenly Father. Hence, we are
met by the obvious thought, that religious instruction should be given in terms as intelligible, as the
capacity of the hearer or reader will allow. To effect this end, no labor, no expense should be
spared, where the great end is to communicate truth, which will make men free from sin, and present
them "faultless before the throne with exceeding joy." All must admit, that clearness in terms used
to convey thought, is a primary element for enlightening the soul. Words are valuable not as mere
modifications of sound, but as signs of ideas. Hence, if from lapse of time, they become obsolete,
if they fail to call up the ideas with which they were once associated, they are worthless, except to
the philologist, who traces the history of languages, for scientific purposes. The Divine plan for the
diffusion of the word of life demanded, that it should take the shape of a written record. In its
earliest form, that record could be useful to none who did not speak its language. Others must be
able to hear, understand, speak, and read in their own tongue "the wonderful works of God." So
they must be enabled " to search the scriptures every man in his own tongue," or still continue to
sit in darkness and the shadow of death. Hence, the natural inference, that while the great mass
INTRODUCTION.
of men, in all nations, must remain strangers to the inspired originals, there is no effectual plan to
meet their spiritual necessities, except that furnished by faithful translations.
I have hinted at the obstacles, which stand in the way of translators. Still their work may be
faithfully done, though in some instances these obstacles are insurmountable, and they may feel
that after weary days, the finished work is in some parts "a shadow of the good things" which
"the Lord hath spoken, rather than "the very image of the things." A version, which shall perfectly
represent all the shades of thought found in the original, can never be produced, while languages
preserve their distinctive features, and the laws of thought are unchanged. Those who love the
cause of truth, and regard the welfare of man, are still required to work while the day lasts, that
the world may learn the whole counsel of God. The duty will be imperative while we dwell in
a world where modes of thought, languages, and generations of men must yield to that law of
change, stamped on all things below the skies. If this duty is performed, with integrity, industry,
and in the spirit of humble dependence on the Father of lights, the great end will be secured. His
word will be presented to all kindreds and tongues in such purity, that they may learn the will of
the Most High, the way of life and peace, and the good news that " the Son of man came to seek
and save that which was lost." All admit that faithfulness is required at the hands of the minister
of the Word, when he speaks to his fellow-men in the name of God. He is expected to use great
plainness of speech, to forego rhetorical ornament, that the common people may understand. So
faithfulness is required, when we present the word of God through the medium of translations, to
" the great congregation " of the unlearned. In order that this class the majority in all lands
may understand what they read, we are bound to sacrifice cherished terms, which have ceased to be
" household words." The lover of gray antiquity must be content to let some of his old acquaintances
slumber in their dusky tombs. On the other hand, he who will act faithfully, must take heed that no
itching for " some new thing " shall lead him to employ recently adopted terms, whose meaning is
familiar only to the learned. If words have become obscure by time, if they are no longer a part of
the spoken language, they should be exchanged for others, which are in general use. Truth is a
quality of thought. In reference to Divine revelation, we give men that which is true, just as far
as we enable them to seize the thought, whether we speak or write. This principle is ever to be
kept in view. Whether we use the tongue, or the pen and the press, the great problem to be
solved is Shall I be easily understood by all classes, by the multitude, as well as by the few who possess
the advantages of education?
Seasonable emendation of versions which have been long current, not only meets the ordinary
wants of readers, but it does more; it prevents the necessity of contests in defense of some of the
yi INTEODUCTION.
most important principles of truth. Countless disputes have arisen from imperfections in versions,
which continued to be used without change, long after their phraseology had become obsolete and unintelli-
gible. The history of the Greek and Latin Churches furnishes a sad practical commentary on this
truth. That timid policy which defers to a remote and still a remoter period, changes in civil
institutions and laws, which an altered condition of society demanded, has shaken more than one
throne to dust. Procrastination in needful reform, is as dangerous as rash innovation. But I must
close, leaving these suggestions for my reader's consideration. The Revision is submitted to the public
in the hope that a work, begun and carried on, as I humbly trust, in the fear of the Great Author
of truth, may aid in the cause of giving the Bible faithfully translated to all the world. He has
upheld me in my labor, to him be the praise for all his mercy.
AUTHORITIES QUOTED.
VERSIONS OTHER THAN ENGLISH.
Vulgate, edition of Van Ess, 1824
N. Test., Fleck, Leipsic, 1840.
Beza's N. Test., 1624 and 1814.
Montanus' N. Test, New York, 1831.
Erasmus' N. Test, Frankfort, 1653.
Oastalio's N. Test., London, 1776.
Peshito Syriac, Buchanan and "Watts Editors, London, 1816.
Luther's Bible, Frankfort, 1838.
Belgic (Low Dutch), Dortrecht, 1737, and London, 1817, cited as
"Belg."
French Genevan, 1839, cited as " G. Fr."
Swiss French, Lausanne, cited as " S. Fr."
Vatablus' Biblia, Basle, 1564.
De Wette's (Germ.) Bible, Heidelberg, 1839.
Hebrew N. Test, British and For. Bib. Soc., Bagster.
De Valera's Spanish N. Test, New York, 1850, cited as
" Span."
Spanish N. Test., translated for A. B. TL, cited as " Iber."
(Iberian).
Diodati (Ital.), London, 1855.
(" Ital."), revised by Achilli, 1854.
Murdock's Trans, of Peshito Text, New York, 1855.
Danish Bible of American Bible Society, New York, 1856, cited
as Dan."
De Saey's N. Test, Paris, 1838.
ENGLISH VERSIONS.
"Wiclif s, Oranmer's, Geneva, Ehemish N. Test, as in " English
Hexapla."
"Wakefield's N. Test, Cambridge, 1820.
Dickinson's N. T., Boston, 1833.
Geo. Campbell's Four Gospels, Philadelphia, 1799, cited aa
" Camp."
A. Campbell's N. Test., Bethany, Ya., 1832, cited as "A. Camp."
Chas. Thomson's Synopsis of Evangelists, Philadelphia, 1815,
cited as " Thorn."
L. Tomson's N. Test, London, 1579, cited as " L. Tom."
Norton's Translation of four Gospels, Boston, 1855.
Scarlett's N. Test., London, 1798.
Sharpe's N. T., London, 1844.
Kendrick's N. Test, Philadelphia.
Sawyer's N. Test, 1558.
MANUSCRIPT VERSIONS OF LTJKE
in Library of A. B. TJ.
Angus.
Thelwall.
One marked and cited " Q."
One marked and cited " M."
CRITICAL EDITIONS OF GREEK TEXT.
Griesbach's, Cambridge, 1809.
Knapp's, Leipsic, 1820.
Scholz's, in English Hexapla.
Lachmann's, Berlin, 1846.
] Tittmann's, edited by Prof. Eobinson, New York, 1842.
Tischendorf's, Leipsic, 1850.
Theile's, Leipsic, 1856.
Goschen's, Leipsic (with Lat Translation).
Schott's, Leipsic, 1839 (with Lat. Translation).
Vater's, Halle, 1824.
nil
AUTHORITIES QUOTED.
EDITIONS 03? TEXTUS BECEJTTTS.
Bagster's.
Elzevir's, 1624, repub. by Mill, 1707.
Prof. Wilson's, Philadelphia, 1831.
LEXICONS AlH) DICTIONAEIES.
Greenfield's Lex. N. Test., London, 1829.
Bretschneider's Lex. N. Test., cited as " Bretsch."
'Stockius' Heb. Lex., Jena, 1739.
Pasor's Lex. N. Test, Leipsio, 1735.
Liddell and Scott's Greek Lex., New York, 1840, cited as
"Liddell."
Eobinson's Lex. N. Test., 1855.
Heidericus' Greek Lex., Leipsie, 1767.
Scapula's Greek Lex., Basle.
Leverett's Lat. Dictionary, Boston, 1839.
Johnson's Eng. Dictionary, Philadelphia, 1805.
Webster's Eng. Dictionary, 1848.
GRAMMARS, etc.
Matthise's Greek Grammar, translated by Bloomfield, London
1824.
Buttmann's Greek Gram., trans, by Prof. Eobinson, New York,
1851.
Anthon's Greek Gram., New York, 1844.
Kuhner's Gr. Gram., trans, by Edwards and Taylor, New York,
1853.
Winer's Gr. Gram, of N. Test., trans, by Stuart and Eobinson,
1825.
Stuart's Gr. Gram, of N. Test., Andover, 1841.
Trollope's Gr. Gram, of N. Test., London, 1842.
Crosby's Gr. Gram., Boston, 1855.
Goodrich's Gr. Gram., Hartford, 1831.
Port Eoyal Gr. Gram., London, 1758.
Eost's Gr. Gr., London, 1829.
Green's Gr. N. Test. Dialect, London, 1842.
Hoogeveen's Gr. Particles, abridged by Seager, 1829.
Noshden's Germ. Gram., Andover, 1842.
Bullion's Eng. Gram., New York,. 1849.
Viger, de Idiotismis, Leipsie, 1832.
L. Bos' Ellipses, London, 1825.
Weiske's Pleonasmi Grseci, London, 1825.
Josephus' Antiq. et Bel. Jud., Leipsie, 1850.
Diodorus Siculus, Leipsie, 1829.
COMMENTARIES, etc.
Trollope's Analecta, London, 1842, cited as " Trollops, Analect."
Bloomfield's Notes on N. Test., 1826, supplementary Vol. 1851
London, cited as " Bloomf. N. T."
Scholefield's Hints for an Improved Version of N. Test 1842.
Trench on Bible Eevision, New York, 1859.
Jahn's- Archeology, trans, by TJpham, New York, 1856. i
Kuinoel's Com. on Hist. Books, of N. Test, London, 1827. >
Sengel's Gnomon, London, 1850. .
THE
GOSPEL AOCOEDIM TO LUKE/
KING JAMES' VERSION, .
CHAP. I.
FORASMUCH as many have taken
in hand to set forth in order a
GREEK TEXT,
CHAP. I.
'EIIEIAHIIEP TToXXol eVe-
avaT(ia.<r6ai Str/yr/criv
REVISED VERSION.
CHAP. I.
"SiNCE many "have under- l
taken c to compose d a narrative
* The title of this book is no part of the inspired text.
Hence the variety in the form of the" inscription as exhibited by
different manuscripts. The earliest of these documents have
simply TO Kara Aovxav Evayy&.iov. This simple form is
deemed most appropriate. " In some of the less esteemed MSS.
and Edd. the epithet ayiov is joined with Evayyehov, which is
evidently a refinement, and not in good taste, of a recent date.
The word EvayyeUov occurs in the N. Test, upwards of seventy
times, and never with this epithet attached to it." Trollope,
Analecta. I have retained the common rendering of xara,
" according to," though in strictness it is not equivalent to juxta,
as we find it in the early Latin versions, which were followed by
the first English, translators. The exact rendering is that of
Castalio, "Evangelium anthore Luca." This corresponds to
" The Gospel written by Luke ; " or, more, concisely, " The
Gospel by Luke." On this subject Kuincel remarks thus:
" Evayyihov Kara. Ma.rd-a.Zov est idem quod iav Mar&aiov, h. e.
Matthcei commentarii de dictis, factis, et fatis ChristL Prceposi-
tio enim y.a-ca. a Gratis scriptoribus, ut Hebraornm }> in pluribus
Psalmorum inscriptionibus, ssepius ita usurpatur, ut indicet aucto-
rem, ut ap. Platon. Cratyl. 4, xaff Evd^Srifiov, auctore Euthy-
demo, etc., et haac gehitivi periphrasis adhibita est, ad evitandum
genitivi repetitionem cum post Evayyefaov supplendum sit 'Ljaov
Xgtarov, coll. Marc. 1 : 1." As the phrase " according to
Luke" has been long familiar, and as the titles of the book
rests on human authority, it is perhaps best that it should be
retained. The title Evayyehov xara Aovxav is adopted by
Gr., Scholz, Lacb., Tisch., Tittm., Schott, Knapp, Theile.
"Since;" 'ErreiSfae?. Norton, M., Murdock. Yulgate,
Mont., Erasmus, Beza, "quoniam;" Castal., Schott, " quando-
quidem ; " Syr., j ^^io (Junius, quoniam). The rendering of the
B. V. was copied from Tyndale ; it is obsolescent and cumbrous.
Heb. N. T., lids v^rix (after that = since) ; Luther and De
Wette, "sintemal;""ileig., "nademaal;" Ital., " poiche ; " Dan.,
" efterde ; " Kuincel, " insiSrjnc^ id quod knsiSrj interprete
Hesychio, Palairetus et Albertius ad h. 1." As an alternative
rendering, " Now since."
b " have undertaken ; " ite%Eig>joav. Rob. (in verbo), " to
undertake ; " Bretsch., " aggredior alicui operi, i. e. tento, sus-
cipio, Luc. 1 : 1." So Campbell, Thorn., Kend., Penn, "Wesley,
Scarlett, A. Camp., M. De Wette, " unternommen ; " S. Fr.,
" ont entrepris ; " Iber., " han emprenido ordenar ; " Ital., " hanno
impreso ; Eras., Castal., Beza, Schott, " aggressi sunt." The
word occurs in two other places in the N. Test, Acts 9 : 29, and
19 : 13, where this rendering would be the proper one.
e " to compose ; " avardgao&ai. Wesley, Campbell, Thom.,
Scarlett, M. Beza, " componere ; " Greenf., Lex. (in verbo), " to
arrange, hence, to compose, Luke 1 : 1 ; " Bretsch., " compono;"
Scapula, " compono et literis mando ; " Heidericus, " compono."
Compare xa&etsrjs y^dyai, v. 4. Kuincel :
significat ordinare, componere, atque adeo avaiaaacaS-cu
oiv, narrationem, historian ordinare, contexere, et cum h. 1. v. 4
permutetur hasc formula cum verbo y^&yuv, ea reddi debet,
historiam conscribere, literis consignare." Bloomfield .makes the
following judicious remark on this word: "It is not to "be
understood in the sense of rearranging -what is already written.
For- the sense of repetition in the word, though frequent, is not
perpetual. Nor need we, with some, suppose that the preposi-
tion here loses its proper force. It is better to take it to denote,
not indeed repetition,, but succession, as of one thing after
another, which implies setting in order. Thus avarajaod'ai will
be equivalent to ovvragaod-ai ; and that, in a figurative sense,
may very well denote contexere, componere."
d "a narrative:" Sirjytjaiv. Wesley, Campbell, Scarlett, M.,
Norton. "Vulg., Mont, Eras., Beza, Castal., Schott, " narratio-
nem;" De Wette, "Erzahlung;" Belgic, ".verhaal;" Italien,
" narrazione." Heb. N. T., IB&JJ. Syr., \h^\-iit/- (narratives).
. l <) 4
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING- TO LUKE. CHAP. I.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
declaration of those things "which
are most surely believed among
us,
2 Even as they delivered them
unto us, which from the beginning
were eye-witnesses, and ministers
of the word ;
3 It seemed good to. me also,
having had perfect understanding
of all things from the very first,
to write unto thee in order, most
excellent Theophilus,
4 That thou mightest know the
certainty of those tilings wherein
thou hast been instructed.
5 There was in the days of
Herod the king of Judea, a cer-
tain priest named Zacharias, of
the course of Abia : and his wife
was of the daughters of Aaron,
and her name was Elisabeth.
6 And they were both righteous
before God walking in all the
commandments and ordinances of
the Lord blameless.
GREEK TEXT.
TO>V
/ca#cbp Trape-
8oo~av rjjjuv ol air dpffls avroVrat
/cat VTrr/peTcu yez/o/zei/ot TOV Ao-
yov, 3 e'fio^e Ka.p.ol, TraprjitoXov-
avoodev Tracriv a/cpi/Sott 1 ,
o-oi -ypd-^rai, KpdricrTe
Oeo(j)i\, 4 Iva. eiri-yvcps Trepl d>v
K.a.Tt]yT}Q-r]s Xoyoov rrjv do-(j)dXetai>.
5 'ErENETO tv rals
pans 'HpcoSov TOV /SacTtAeii)?
iepzvs r*y oVo/tart Za.-
e(j)T}fiepiaf 'Aftta- /cat
q avTov IK TU>V 6vyaTepa>v
'Aaptav, /cat TO OVO/JLO. avrrjs
'-EAicra/3er. 6 rjcrav 8e oY/catot
d[jL(f)OTpOt tVWTTLOV TOV 06OV,
TropevofJ-evoi ei> Tracrat? rat? CVTO-
Aat? /cat 5t/cat(Myuacrt TOV Kvpiov
REVISED VERSION.
e of the things .which r are fully
believed among us, even as 2
g those, ''who from the beginning
were eye-witnesses and minis-
ters of the word, delivered them
to us ; it seemed . good to me 3
also, 'having accurately traced
all things 'from the first, to
write to thee in order, most
excellent Theophilus, "that thou 4
mayest know 'the certainty of
the things m in which thou hast
been instructed. There was 5
in the days of Herod, the king
of Judea, a certain priest
named Zachariah, of the course
of Abijah ; and his wife was
of the daughters of Aaron,
and her name was Elizabeth.
And they were righteous be- 6
fore God, walking in all the
commandments and ordinances
of the Lord blameless. And 7
" of the things ; " ttov ttfjay/idrcov. The use of the demon-
strative as an equivalent for the article here, is unnecessary.
The article is properly employed by Penn, Wesley, Sharpe, M.,
Kheims. S. Fr., " des choses ; " Iber., " las cosas ; " Diodati,
" delle cose ; " Belg., " de dingen."
f " are fully believed ; " neTiirj^oyo^ifisvcai'. M. The S. Fr.
presents the thought periphrastically thus : " Qui. ont ete reQues
parmi nous avec une pleine certitude." So Ital. : " Che sono
ricevute da noi con piena certezza." Eobinson (in loco), "fidly
assured among us, fully believed ; " Liddell (in verbo), " to be
fully believed;" Scapula (in loco), "res quarum plena nobis est
facta fides ; " Kuincal, " yr^dyfcara Tcsn^^oyo^fteva sunt res de
quibus inter omnes constat, quarum certa est et indubitaia fides,
quse sunt compertissimffi." BloomSeld, " Spoken of things which
are thus said to be fully confirmed and established, and are there-
fore received as certain truths, with full assurance of faith.
Accordingly, the expression is nearly equivalent to rcentoTtvfte-
vtov, as at Joseph, antiq., xvii. 6. 3." ZTAiJ^/s in composition,
where this word occurs in N. Test., Bom. 4 : 21 ; 14 : 5. 2 Tim.
4 : 5, 17, is properly rendered in the E. V. by " full," or " fully."
Hence ni^oyo^ia, Bob., " full assurance."
* " those." The demonstrative in constructions like this (before
a relative) is, by present usage, employed instead of " they." So
Norton, Kend., M. S. Fr. " ceux qui ; " Iber., " los que."
k " who from the beginning delivered." This is the arrange-
ment of Thorn., Wakef., Penn, Campbell, Kend., and M. As
" eye-witnesses and ministers of the word " is exegetic of " those,"
perspicuity demands that the sentence should stand in close con-
nection with that pronoun.
' " having accurately traced ; " na^rjy.oiov&ijxon ax(>i/3coi.
M., "Wesley, Thorn., " had accurately traced ; " M., Dick., Camp-
bell, "exactly traced;" Bloomf. (N. Test.), Kend., "having
traced ; " Angus, " traced out ; " Schott, " diligenter ^perse-
qunto ; " Belg., " Hebbende neerstelijlc onderzocht ; " Bob. (in
verbo migaxohov&eco), Bretschneider, " metaphorice imiestigo ; "
S. Fr., " qui ai suivi avec soin." Heb. N. Test., aiairt ifl'ipli.
Bloomf. : " Has>axo).ov9-eZv signifies properly to follow up, exactly
trace." Kuinoel (in loco) : Ua^axolovd-av, per metaphorum
significat, inquirere in aliquid, examinare, perscutari, atque hinc,
post accuratum indagationem assequi et intelligere aliquid." Hxjit-
fiias, Bob., " accurately ; " Bretsch., " accurate."
i " from the first ; " avia&cv. "Wakefield, Campbell, Sharpe,
Penn, Bob. (in verbo}. Kuincel : " Hoc verbum avco&sv, prima
ab origine, a principio inde id. quod mf agxrjs, v. 2." Luther,
" vom Acfang ; " De Wette, " von Anbeginn ; " Danish, " fra
Begyndelsen ; " Iber., " desde origen ; " Schott, " a principio."
There is no emphasis here which demands " very." Heb. N. Test.
k " that thou mayest know ; " Iva Imyviys. "Wakef., Wesley,
Thorn., Campbell, Penn. Norton, " that you may know ; "
Eras., " quo agnoscas ; " Mont., Beza, " ut agnoscas." The aorist
subj. is here equivalent to the present subj.
i " the things ; " },6ycov. Penn, Angus, M. The definite
article is employed by Norton, De Wette, Belg., G. Fr., S. Fr.,
Diodati.
" " in which ; " ite^l a>v. Thorn., Kend., Wakef., Scarlett.
Dick., Penn.
THE GOSPEL ACCOKDING TO LUKE. CHAP. I.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
7 And they had no child, be-
cause, that Elisabeth was barren ;
and they both were now well
stricken, in years.
8 And it carne to pass, that,
while he executed the priest's
office before God in the order of
his course,
9 According to the custom of
the priest's office, his lot was to
burn incense when he went 'into
the temple of the Lord.
10 And the whole multitude of
the people were praying without,
at the time of incense.
11 And there appeared unto
him an angel of the Lord, stand-
GBEEK TEXT.
7 Kal OVK fjv auroi?
doTi r\ ' E\io-a.$T rjv
, KOI d/J.(f)OTepoi 7rpo(3e/3i]-
KOTf GV TCUS qfJ.epO.lf O.VT&V r)CTO.V.
8 * EyiveTO Se ev rep iepaTevetv
avrov ev rrj ra^Zi TTJS e(f)r)jj.epta?
avTOv tvavTi TOV Oeov, 9 /cara
TO edo? rrjy iepaTfla?, eXa^e TOV
dvp.La.frai eicreXdcav ety rov vaov
" 7^" f \Ql ^ " *> \ ~
TOV JiVplOW KOLL 7TO.V TO TTArj'
Oos TOV \aov ffv Trpocr^vyfOjj.e.vov
e^ca Trj copa TOV 0v/J.ta/J.aTOf.
11 oo(j)@7} Se ai>T(S ayyeXos Kv-
plov, ecrTaif SK de^cav TOV 0vcna-
REVISED VERSION.
they had no child, "because
Elizabeth was barren ; and
both "were advanced in years.
And it came to pass, while he 8
executed the priest's office ^in
the order of his course before
God, 'that, according to the 9
custom r of the priesthood, 'it
fell to him by lot 'to go into
the "sanctuary of the Lord to
burn incense. And the whole 10
multitude of the people "was
praying without at the time "of
the incense. And there appear- 11
ed to him an angel of the Lord,
standing *at the right side of
The particle " that " (after because) is omitted
So "Wesley, Sharpe, Scarlett, Campbell, Kend.,
n " because."
as superfluous.
Norton, M.
" were advanced ; " itoopeptpcoTes. "Wesley, Kend., Camp-
bell, Thomson, Thel., Penn, Norton, Angus, M. It is not
necessary to insert the pronoun " they " before. " both," according
to present usage. It is dropped by "Wakef., Kend., Penn, M.
"Now" is unnecessary as a supplement. It -was introduced by
Cranmer, but afterwards dropped from the Genevan. It has been
omitted by Wesley, Thorn., Wakef., Scarlett, Penn, Sharpe,
Camp., Kend., Norton, Angus, Thel., M.
f " in the order of his course before God." This is the order
of the text. It has been followed 'by the Vulg., Eras., Beza,
Castal., Schott, Tyndale, Wakef., M., De Wette, Syriac.
3 " that." This particle is transferred from the preceding
verse of the E. V. for the sake of perspicuity. Kuincel places
" cum aliquando " at the beginning of this verse. So M., Penn.
S. Fr., " que selon," etc.
' " of the priesthood ; " Tfjs hoarsias. Campbell, Sharpe,
Penn, Wakefield, Dick., Scarlett, Norton, M., Bob. (in verbo).
Bretsch., " sacerdot inm ; " Vulg., Castal., Schott, "sacerdotii;"
Diodati, " del sacerdozio ; " S. Fr., " de la sacrificature ; " Luther,
" des Priesterthums." Heb. N. Test,, nsns. Syr., |ZoJaisj.
Murdock, " of the priesthood." " ' ' *
"it fell to him by lot;" slay f . Norton M., Campbell.
Kuinrel : " Scilicet tbv xf.fjgov, quse plena formula legitur Act.
1 : 17, varia autem erant in templo sacerdotum munera, eaque
omnia sorte assignari solebant." S. Fr., " il lui echut par le
sort ; " Iber., " le toco por suerte ; " De Wette, " traf ihn durchs
Loos ; " Belg., hem te lote was gevallen." This rendering brings
out distinctly the act by which the office of entering the sanctuary
was assigned to Zachariah.
"to go into ;" doMcay. Penn, M., Kend., Wakef., Thorn.,
Angus. This rendering and arrangement of the sentence is that i
of the Iber., '' entrar en el templo del Senor, a ofirecir el
incenso." This arrangement presents the action, which preceded
the incense offering, in its proper place.
" " sanctuary ; " vadv. Campbell, Angus, M. This word is
sometimes used genetically for the whole temple, and is then
equivalent to tybv. Here it evidently indicates the fane.
" This," says Robinson, (Lex.) " was divided into two parts, viz.,
the outer sanctuary (TO ayiov) with the candelabra, the altar
of incense, and the table of show-bread ; and the inner sanctuary
(ayia ayicai>}, separated from the former by a vail, and contain-
ing the ark. Into the first, the priests entered daily to burn
incense, Luke 1 : 9, Heb. 9 : 6, while into the Holy of holies
only the high priest entered once in a year, Heb. 9 : 7." Bret-
schneider. (in verbo) : " Dicitur autem non ut hqov de toto
templo, sed de interior! parte, -videlicet turn de sancto, turn de
sancto sanctorum." See Gr. text, Matt. 23 : 16, 17, 21, 35.
Luke 23 : 45. Sept., 2 Chron. 15 : 8, TO &vainar^otov xvqiov,
o j/v 'eftn^ood'sv rov vaov miotov. Kuinoal : " Per TOV vaov
TOV xvoioy intelligitur sanctum samtuarium, TO aytov solis sacer-
dotibus patens, vid. Exod. 30 : 7, quod etiam 1 Eegg. 6 : 5, voca-
tur 'bs^rt, nam in ipso vay erat altare suffitus, vid. Exod.
40 : 2l, sqq.
T " was praying ; " xoooevzo/tsvov. Norton, Wakef. The
verb " to be " is used with " multitude " in the singular (E. V.)
Isa. 31 : 4. Jer. 10 : 13. Nahum 3 : 3.
w " of the incense ; " TOV &vfiiafiatog. The article is retained
here by Norton, Sharpe, Penn, Campbell, Dick., Wesley, Thel.,-
Iber., De Wette, Ital., Belg., Dan. As an alternative rendering,
" incense offering." This seems to be the sense of the noun in
this place. So Thorn., Sharpe, " incense burning ;" Belg., " reuk
offers;" Dan., " Bogelsen offredes;" Campbell (paraphrastically),
" while the incense was burning." So de Sacy, " on offrait lea
parfums ; " Norton, " the burning of the incense ; " L. Tomson,
" while the incense was burning."
M " at the right side ; " in Set-uov. This preposition, ut
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. I.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
ing on the right side of the altar
of incense.
12 And when Zacharias saw
him, he was troubled, and fear
fell upon him.
13 But the angel said unto
him, Fear not, Zacharias : for thy
prayer is heard ; and thy wife
Elisabeth shall bear thee a son,
and thou shalt call his name
John.
14 'And thou shalt have joy and
gladness, and many shall rejoice
at his birth.
15 For he shall be great in the
sight of the Lord, and shall drink
neither wine nor strong drink ;
and he shall be filled wilh the
Holy Ghost, even from his mo-
ther's womb.
16 And many of the children
of Israel shall he turn to the Lord
their God.
17 And he shall go before him
in the spirit and power of Elias,
to turn the hearts of the fathers
GREEK TEXT.
(rrrjpiov rov 0vfj.iafJ.arof 12 KCU
iSay, KCU (j)o-
rt ' ' >?/ is 7-19
poy 67T7recrez> CTT avrov. J&nre
Se Trpos avrov 6 ayyeAoy, Mrj
<f>o{3ov, Zayapia.' Stori elcrrjKOV"
cr0T] TI Sevens (rov, KCU r) yvvr)
crov JE\io~af3er yevvrjarei viov
croi, /cat KaXecreis TQ ovofj,a av*
rov 'Icoavvrjv. /cat carat X a P a
crot, /cat ayaAAtao"ty, /cat TrqAAot
e?rt ry yevvr)<Ti avrov
rai. . 15 earai yap fjityas evca-
TTLOV TOV KvplOV Kal o'lVQV /Cat
<TiKpa ov fj,r/ Trirj) /cat Hvevp.a~
TOS 'Aylov TrX-rja-d^a-eraL en e/c
/cotA/ay p.t]Tpos avrov. 16 /cat
TToAAouy T>V vliov 'IcrparjX eVt-
crrptyei eVt ' Kvpiov rov Oeov
avrcov 17 /cat auroy Tr/ooeAeJcre-
rai fvcoTTtov avrov eV Trvf.vp.art
/cat 8vvd/j.ft 'HXiov, eVto-r/jei^at
KapSias irarepcav eVt re'/cra, /cat
REVISED VERSION.
the altar of incense : y and 12
when Zachariah saw him, 'he
was agitated, and fear fell on
him. But the angel said to 13
him, Fear not, Zachariah ; for
thy prayer is heard ; and thy
wife Elizabeth 'will bear thee
a son, and thou shalt call his
name John. And b thou wilt 14
have joy and gladness, and
many will rejoice at his birth.
For he will be great in the is
sight of the Lord, and will
drink 'neither wine or strong
drink ; and he will be filled
with the Holy ""Spirit from his
mother's womb. And many e of 16
the sons of Israel will he turn
to the Lord their God. And 17
he will go before him in the
spirit and power of Elijah, to
turn the hearts f of fathers to
similar constructions, is rendered by "at" (E. V.) Heb. 12 : 2.
Eom. 8 : 34. Eph. 1 : 20. It is so rendered in all cases of this
kind in this Revision.
i In conformity with the text, a colon is placed after " in-
cense."
* " he was agitated ; " ha^&tj. Syr., u_^2*.J . Murdock,
" he was agitated j " Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza; " turbatus est."
Ta.Qa.aata is genetically employed to indicate agitation or disturb-
ance by any emotion proceeding from astonishment, fear, or
grief. The nature of the emotion is always determined by the
adjuncts. " To be troubled " is now usually applied to indicate
the effect of grief. It is obvious that the emotion in this instance
was not produced by grief. The next member of the sentence
shows that it was fear, " and fear fell upon him." Heidericus,
" commoveo, turbo, perterreo." In the instance before us, it is well
rendered by the Syriac, and also by the Heb. N. Test., ta-ii.
Vulg., Mont., Eras, Beza, " turbatus est ; " Schott, " perturbatus'
est ; " Belg., " wierdt ontroerd ; " Iber., " se turbo ; " Span.,
" turbose ; " Ital., " turbossi ; " Camp., " was discomposed ; "
Thorn.. " was greatly discomposed ; " Tremellius, " conturbatus
est." Heb. N. Test., tai;;
* " will bear." Wakefield, Sharpe, Kendrick, M. "Where
prediction occurs without any thing like command or strong
affirmation, "will" is the proper auxiliary. In the sense of
command, xaiiaeis, in the next member, is rendered " shalt call."
* "wilt have joy and gladness;" xal sarat xa^a aot xal
See last note. As au alternative rendering (and
one fully equal to that of the E. V.), " he will be to thee joy and
exultation." Thelwell. So "Wakef., " he will be to thee joy and
great gladness"; " Norton and M., " he shall be to thee jdy and
gladness." It is true, however, that while this is literal, it does
not accord as well with the English idiom, as the language of the
E.Y.
c " nor." " Neither," in the first, part of a negative sentence,
applies also to the subsequent member. See "Webster, " Neither."
d " Spirit." " Ghost," according to present usage, is equivalent
to apparition, or spectre. It should be dropped throughout the
Eevision.
" of the sons ; " tdiv vloiv. Norton, Kend., G-. and A. Camp.,
Sharpe. Syr., .'ji * _iS. Tremellius, " filiorum." Heb. N. Test.,
i?aa Vulg., Mont, Eras., Schott, Beza, " iiliorum ;" De "Wette,
"'dei- Sohne ; " S. Fr., " des fils ; " Iber., " de los hijos ; " Diodati,
de' figliuoli."
f ". of fathers ; " narepcov. Thom., "Wakef., Campbell, Thel.,
M. As both, this word and TSXVK, in this passage are anarthrous,
they seem to be used generically. In other words, the theory of
some commentators, that there is an especial reference to "the
fathers " of the Hebrews and their posterity, is not sustained by the
language of the text. In Mai. 4 : 6 (Heb. 3 : 24), which is here
quoted, the Hebrew is anarthrous, aija-^S JYiasj-aii. So the
Sept., xagSiav Ttaxgbs itfos vlor.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. I.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
to the children, and the disobe-
dient to the wisdom of the just ;
to make ready a people prepared
for the Lord.
18 And Zacharias said unto the
angel, Whereby shall I know this?
for I am an old man, and my wife
well stricken in years.
19 And the angel answering,
said unto him, I am Gabriel, that
stand in the presence of God ; and
am sent to speak unto thee, and
to show thee these glad lidings.
20 And behold, thou shalt be
dumb, and not able to spsak, until
the day that these things shall be
performed, because thou believest
GREEK TEXT.
i> (frpovrjtret, Sixaicov,
TOijj.d(rai Kvpiw Xaov
acr/nevov. 18 Kai elire Za^apias
TOV ayyeXov, Kara, TL yvd>-
TOVTO; kyca yap elju
KCU TI yvvrj /j,ov
a. fjs ras rm-epais avrrjs.
19 Kcu a.iroKpi6tis 6 ayyeXos
eiTTeis avTCp., Eyco elfju rafipLrjX
o irapea-TrjKcas evcomov TOV Oeov-
Kal a'7r(rTa\r]v ' XaXfj(rai Trpos
(re, Kal evayyeXla-aadai croi rav-
in \ > 5> ^ V
TO.. K.O.L LOOV, eery
Kal fj.rj 8vvd/j.evo? XaXijcrat,
f)S r/fAepa? yevr/Tai ravra' avff
OVK 7rt(TTvcra$ TOIS Xoyois
REVISED VERSION.
children, and s the disobedient
to the wisdom 5f the righteous,
to make ready 'for the Lord a
'prepared people. And Zacha- 18
riah said to the angel, 'How
shall I know this ? for I am an
old man, and my wife 'w "ad-
vanced in years. And the 19
angel answering, said to him,
I am Gabriel, who stand in the
presence of God ; and am sent
to speak to thee, and "to bring
thee this good news. And be- 20
hold thou wilt be dumb, and
not able to speak, "till the day
pwhen these things "shall come
to pass, because thou r didst not
' g " the disobedient ; " aizei&ezs. Like the words noticed
above, this term is anarthrous. The idiom of our language, how-
ever, does not permit us to use " disobedient " as a noun, unless
we place the before it. This remark applies to other words, such
righteous, just, good, etc. If the noun person, man, etc., is
expressed, then no article is necessary. Hence the article in this
instance is supplied, and italicized to indicate its character.
' h " of the righteous ; " Swaicov. The supplied article is itali-
cized, for the reason given in the last note. As Scy.atcov is
obviously antithetic to anei&sis, the generic sense of " righte-
ous" seems more appropriate than a specific one, such as "just."
It is the .more usual rendering of the word in the E. V. So
Camploell, Thel., M., Angus, Norton.
1 "for the Lord." The Greek arrangement is followed, as
KvqUit is connected with irotfidaai, and not with y.aTeoxevaofie-
vov. So Kendrick, M., Norton, " to prepare a fit people for
the Lord ; " Vulgate and Erasmus, " parare Domino plebem
perfectam ; " Beza, " ut paret Domino populum instiractum ; "
Schott, " quo populum compositum Domino instruat." Syriac,
Ij^icL \^~ }fjC,V u-oLjJo (" and will prepare for the Lord
a perfect people.") De Wette, " um dem Herrn em bereitetes
Tolk zuzuriehten ; " Belg., " om den Heere te bereiden een
toegerust volk ; " Danish, " at berede Herren et velskikket
Folk ; " G. French and S. French, " pour preparer au Seigneur
un penple bien dispose ; " Iberian, " para preparar al Serior un
pueblo dispuesto ; " Italian, " per prepare al Signore un popolo
ben disposto."
J " prepared ; " aarsaxevaaftevov. Kend., M. This word is j
retained as a participial adjective qualifying iaov.
k " How ; " Kara. -rl. Wakef., Dick., Thorn., Norton, M.
'Vulg., Castal, Schott, " unde." " Whereby " is obsolete. See
Eob. (ii).
i " is." Our idiom demands this supplement. Kendrick, M.,
Angus, Norton, Geneva, Rheims.
m " advanced in years." See v. 7, note.
" " to bring thee this good news ; " vay/e).ioaad-ai ooi tavia.
Eob. (in verbo, svayycitgco) : "Mid. in earlier writers and in N. T.,
to bring good news, to announce, or publish glad tidings." In the
E. V. this verb is rendered by preach, declare, show, bring, as
connected with a message or intelligence. I rendered it here by
" bring," rather than " announce," because the term is found in
the E. V., and the phrase, " to bring news," is familiar to all who
speak our language. So " news " is employed rather than the
.obsolescent word " tidings." Tavrcc here refers to the single
message to be delivered, and, as in numerous other instances, has
the force of a singular demonstrative. "Webster remarks oh
" news : " " This word has a plural form, but is almost always
united with a verb in the singular." Norton, " to declare this
glad news to thee."
" till." " Until " is now generally dropped, and " till " sub-
stituted for it. Webster.
P " when." The phrase ys y/iepas may be concisely rendered
" the day when."
1 " shall come to pass ; " yi-tvjrai ravra. Penn, Sharpe. Sc
M., Thorn., Wakef., Campbell. The usual rendering of this verb
in the N. Test, is appropriate here. " To be performed " occurs
in no other instance (in the E. V.) as the rendering. It was
taken originally from Tyndale. Vulg., Eras., Beza, " fiant , "
Castalio, " evenerint ; " De Wette, " geschehen wird."
' " didst not believe." This form of the verb is adapted to
avoid the harshness of " believedst." 'Enio-ievoas is rendered by
a past tense by Scholefield (" believedst.") Wakef., Kend., M.,
" didst not believe." There is a general agreement in Versions
as to the propriety of rendering this word either as an norist
(Eng. imperf.), or a preterperfect.
THE GOSPEL ACCOEDING TO LUKE. CHAP. I.
KING JAKES' VERSION.
not my -words, which shall be ful-
filled in their season.
21 And the people waited for
Zacharias, and marvelled that he
tarried so long in the temple.
22 And when he came out, he
could not speak unto them : and
they perceived that he had seen
a vision in the temple ; for he
beckoned unto them, and remain-
ed speechless.
23 And it came to pass, that as
soon as the days of his ministra-
tion were accomplished, he de-
parted to his own house.
24 And after those days his
wife Elisabeth conceived, and hid
herself five months, saying,
25 Thus hath the Lord dealt
with me in the days wherein he
looked on me, to take away my
reproach among men.
26 And in the sixth month the
I
GREEK TEXT.
fj-ov, otrtvep TrXrjpcod^trovTai els
TOV Koupov avTu>v. 21 Kai r)V 6
Aaoy Trpo&SoKcov TOV Zayap'iav
/cat edavfia^ov i> TW
avrov eV T(p va<a. 2
8e OVK 7)8vva.TO XaArjcrai O.VTOLS
/cat fTre-yvwcrav OTI oTTTacriav co-
pa.Kv eV T< va.w- /cat O.VTOS r/v
8iavevcov avrols, /cat Sie/ieve KCO'
<pof, /cat eyevero u>$ eirXria'dr)-
crav at r/nepai TYJS Aetroypy/a?
O.VTOV, aTrrjXdev elf TOV OLKOV av-
TOV.
8e
TO.VTO.S TO.S
yvvr/
O.VTOV, /cat
firjvas TreWe, Aeyoucra,
o
ev
a(f)e\lv TO
25 " n
UTL
Kvpios
TreTroir/Kev
als
fj.ov
av-
26
S>\
oe
TO> H.TIVL TO> e/crw
REVISED VERSIOIf.
believe my words, which will be
fulfilled in their season. And 21
the people "were waiting for
Zachariah, and wondering that
-he delayed in the "sanctuary.
And when he came out, he 22
could not speak to them : and
they perceived that he had
seen a vision in the w sanctu-
ary ; for ^he made signs to
them, and remained speechless.
And it came to pass, >"when the 23
days of his ministration "were
completed, he departed to his
own house. And after "these 24
days, his wife Elizabeth con-
ceived, and hid herself five
months, saying, Thus hath the 25
Lord dealt with me in the days
b when he looked on me to take
away my reproach among men.
And in the sixth month the 2fi
' " were waiting 1 ; " r^v ngooSozcav. A literal rendering is
most appropriate. It expresses the continued state or action of
the people. So Kend., Angus, Thel., M. Norton has, " were
expecting."
1 " and wondering ; " efravfia&v (= " were wondering.")
Norton. " "Wonder " is substituted for " marvel " on the ground
that the -latter is seldom heard or written, unless in quotations
from the E. V. The imperfect (proper) indicates continuance of
action or condition like the periphrastic form of that tense (f,v
itfoaSoy.caf) ; hence the rendering " were waiting, and wonder-
ing " (i. e. " were wondering ") gives the sense of the text with
accuracy. But if we follow the punctuation of the Greek, which
places a colon after Za%a(>iat>, then this form may be appro-
priate, " the people were waiting for Zachariah : and they
wondered," etc. After the colon it is necessary to express the
pronoun.
u " he delayed ; " ?^ovX,Etv nvror. So this verb is rendered
(E. V.) 24 : 48 ; Luke 12 : 45. In three other cases, Matt.
25 : 5, the present instance, and Heb. 10 : 37, it is rendered
tarry." As " tarry " is made the equivalent
to
flco, Imftevto, itfoofisvco, ngooSoxaco, etc., while to delay " is
the representative of one other verb oxviio, which occurs but
once (Acts 9 : 38), the above rendering is not only appropriate
here, but in all other cases where
Bob , Liddell (in vcrbo).
" " sanctnarv." Sec v. 9, note.
is found. So M.
w " sanctuary." See last note.
1 "he made signs;" alros yv Siarsvcav. Thorn., Penn, M.
"Wakef., " he kept making signs ; " Sharpe, " he was making
signs." The verb is generic in signification. See Liddell and
Eob. " To beckon " is to make signs with the hands, or arms.
" To nod," to do so by moving the head, sometimes including the
idea of bowing or bending forward." " To wink " is a third
mode of making signs, by using the eyes. As r)v Sia.ve.vtov has
no adjuncts to indicate in what way the signs were made, the
ubove rendering is deemed appropriate.
r " when ; " cos. Thorn., Dick., "Wakefield, Sharpe, Norton,
Kend., M. Kob. (cos), " before a clause implying time, as wJien,
like htsi (= ore}.
i " were completed ; " ejttya&qoav. M. "We do not apply
" accomplish " to time, according to present usage. " Fulfill " is
obsolescent. Eob. (in verbo), " of time, to be fulfilled, completed,
to be fully past."
a " these ; " ravras. Kend., M., Wesley, Thorn., "Wakefield,
Gray (note on Angus).
b " when ; " als. See v. 20, note. As in the former instance,
while " when " is exact in giving the sense, it accords with our
usual modes of speaking and writing. The advantage of concise-
ness has led those who speak the languages of the "West, to'
employ the adverbs of time, in place of the relative phrases.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. I.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
angel Gabriel was sent from God
unto a city of Galilee, named
Nazareth,
27 To a virgin espoused to a
man whose name was Joseph, of
the house of David ; and the vir-
gin's name was Mary.
28 And the angel came in unto
her, and said, Hail, thou that art
highly favoured, the Lord is with
thec : blessed art thou among
women.
29 And when she saw him, she
was troubled at his saying, and
cast in her mind what manner of
salutation this should be.
30 And the angel said unto
her, Fear not, Mary : for thou
hast found favour with God.
GREEK TEXT.
aTrecrraA?; o ayyeAoy
VTTO TOV Oeov ely iroXiv rrjs
FaXiXaLas, y ovo^a Natju.pe.T,
2( Trpoy Trapdevov
vr\v avSpl, a> oi>ofj.a '.
O'IKOV /Ia/3/5* /cat TO ovo/j.a TTJS
irapdevov Ufapidfj,. 28 /cat etcreA-
6cav o ayyeXos Trpoy avrrjv etTre,
Xalpe, Ke-)(api.T(o/j.i>r/- o Kvpios
fjLtra crov
yvvaii^iv.
) \ v / > V
TTL TU> Aoyro aurou, /cat
TroTaTroy el'?; 6 danra-
30 JTa v t
cry e
29 'H 8e \8oixra Sie-
o-fj.of OVTOS.
ayyeAoy
Mr) 0o/3ou, Ma-
evpts yap yapiv irapa
.EEVISED YEKSION.
angel Gabriel was sent c by God
to a city of Galilee, named
Nazareth, to a virgin d betroth- 27
ed to a man. whose name was
Joseph, of the house of David ;
and the virgin's name was
Mary. And the angel 'coming 28
in to her, said, Hail, 'highly
favored! the Lord is with
thee : blessed art thou among
women. And when she saw 29
him, she s was greatly agitated
h at his words, and 'w as con "
sidering 'what this salutation
k could mean. And the angel 3
said to her, Fear not, Mary :
for thou hast found favor with
" by God ; " vjtb TOV Qeov. With the genitive of causation,
agency, etc., the appropriate rendering of vno is "by," "through."
Prom," in this instance, is ambiguous. So Norton, Angus, M.,
Wesley, Sharpe, Thel. Iber., '' por Dios : " S. Fr., " de Dieu."
d " betrothed ; " fcsfivriarEVftevrjv. Campbell, Penn, Norton,
M. The sense of ftv^orsvca here is obviously that of Lidd. (II.),
"to promise in marriage, betroth." Mary was promised, or
contracted to Joseph. "Betroth" presents the thought with
accuracy, while, on the other hand, " espouse " properly signifies
to marry, to wsd. See (B. V.) Deut. 20 : 7. In that passage, the
Sept. employs the above noticed verb, " Saris ftefcv^aT
ywazxa, x. r. L * Webster ("betroth"), "to contract to any
one in order to a future marriage." As an alternative rendering,
" promised in marriage."
' " coming in ; " slaei&cov. The participial construction is
adopted by Kend., Norton, Penn, Wesley, Dick. It is concise
and agreeable to our usus loquendi. As the comma is placed
after avtrfv, in the Polymicrian Text of Mill (taken from the
Elzevir of 1624), that of Erasmus (Frankfort, 1653), Griesbach,
Knapp, -Kuinoel, and Wilson, the comma in the Eevised Text is
placed after " her."
f " highly favored ! " The supplement of the E. V., " thou,
iliat art," is unnecessary, as the thought is sufficiently distinct,
If we imitate the conciseness of the Greek. So Dickinson,
Sharpe, M. Iberian, " favorecida ! " S. French, "regue en
grace ; " Erasmus, " gratiosa ; " Beza, " gratia dilecta ; " Castal.,
"accepta." Heb. N. Test, -jn nuJx- Syriac,
Kend., Penn, and Wesley, " thou highly favored ! "
8 "was greatly agitated;" SiTai>d x 9y. This verb occurs
only here. The simple form signifies " to agitate," " to disturb."
See v. 12, note. 4ia in composition is intensive, = throughout,
tliorougldy, completely, etc. See Bob., 4ia. Iber., " se turbo ; "
Italian, "fa tutta turbata;" Beza, "perturbata est;" Norton,
"was greatly moved." I submit this last as an alternative
rendering.
h " at his words ; " irii rcy loytp avrov. Keud., Campbell.
G. Fr., " do ses paroles ; " Iber., " de sus palabras." " Saying," in
the sense demanded here, is no longer in use. Alternative, " at
his speech."
1 " was considering ; " Si^.oyl^To. Norton, M. The impertect
should be rendered here according to its usual force of continued
action. So Yulg., Eras., Beza, Castal., " cogitabat ; " Mont.,
" ratiocina-batur ; " Kend., Wesley, " reasoned ; " Wakef., " was
reasoning ; " Bob. (in verbo), " to consider, to reason with." The
verb is rendered in the N. Test, with more variety than seems
necessary, as "to reason," " to consider" (John 11 : 50), " to
dispute," " cast in mind," " muse," " think."
J " what ; " noranbs. M., Wakefield, Campbell, Sharpe.
So Kuinoel: " Hota.no s id quod KOTOS, ut Luc. 7 : 38, 39.
2 Petri 3 : 11." So one of the definitions of this word used by
Rob., is " what." In other words, it is sometimes employed for
notot.
k " could mean ; " sHv. Wakef., Norton, M., Kend., " might
mean." Kuinosl : " Qualis hoec salutatio esset." Eob. (elfi'i) :
" Trop. and meton. the subst. of the predicate often expresses,
not what the subject actually is, but what it. is like, or is accounted
to be, or signifies, so that elfti may be rendered " to be account-
ed," " to signify." So (E. V.) Luke 15 : 26, " what these things
meant," ri lj? ravra. Luke 18 : 36, ri ety rovro (E. V.), " what
it meant." Bloomfield remarks on the phrase noranos etij,
x. r. L, " a popular form of expression equivalent to ' what these
remarkable things might mean.' " Bretsch., " ri Ian quid sibi
vult, quid significat." The sense of the word is here obviously
" to signify or mean." " May" or " might be" presents an idea
foreign to the truth. Many knew what the salutation was, but
did not comprehend the meaning of the words.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKEf CHAP. I.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
31 And behold, thou shalt con-
ceive in thy -womb, and bring
forth a son, and shalt call his
name JESUS.
32 He shall be great, and shall
be called the Son of the Highest ;
and the Lord God shall give
unto him the throne of his father
.David.
33 And lie shall reign over the
house of Jacob for ever ; and of
his kingdom there shall be no
end.
34 Then said Mary unto the
angel, How shall this be, seeing
I know not a man?
35 And the angel answered and
said unto her, The Holy Ghost
shall come upon thee, and the
power of the Highest shall over-
shadow thee : therefore also that
holy thing which shall be born of
thee, shall be called the Son of
God. '
36 And behold, thy cousin Elis :
abeth, she hath also conceived a
GREEK TEXT.
OeaS.
31
l I8ov }
v'iov,
ev
/cAe-
cmy TO ovofjLa avrov 'Irjo~ovv.
32 f " ' \ '^
ovTOf eorat /xeyay, /cat vios
v\l/i(rTov K\r)dii<rTaf /cat Scacret
ai>T(S Kvpios o 0eo? TOV dpovov
Aaf3i8 TOV Trar/joy avTOv, 33 /cat
eVt TOV ot/coz/ '/a/ceb/3
ety TOVS acanas, /cat TYJS fiacn-
Ae/ay avrov OVK earai re'Aoy.
Ehre Se JMTapiafJ. Trpos TOV
ayyeXov, II&s lorat TOVTO, e?ret
avdpa ov yiva>o-Ka>; 35 Kal OLTTO-
KpL0els o ayyeXos ebrev avrfj,
Hvev/J-a. Ayiov eVeAeucrerat CTTI
ere, Kal dvva/jus V^LCTTOV eVtcr/aa-
cret crof 810 Kal TO yevva>fjt.evov
ayiov KXij0r/o~Tai Yio? Otov.
36 Kal 18011, '_Z?Atcra/3er 77 crvyye-
crov, Kal avrrj o~vveiXTj(j)via
EEVISED VERSION.
God. And behold, thou 'wilt 31
conceive, and bring forth a son,
and '"thou shalt call his name
Jesus. He will be great, and 32
will be called the Son "of the
Most High ; and the Lord God
will "give him the throne of
his father David. And he will 33
reign over the house of Jacob
for ever ; and -of his kingdom
there will be no end. Then 34
said Mary to the angel, ?How
shall this be, 'since I know not
a man ? And the angel, answer- 35
ing, said to her, The Holy Spirit
will come on thee ; and the
power of ''the Most High will
overshadow thee ; therefore 'the
offspring, being holy, will be
called the Son of God. And 36
aehold, thy 'kinswoman Eliza-
aeth, she also hath conceived a
i " wilt conceive." Here, as in other instances, where there is
no particular emphasis, or a command;- " will " is used instead of
" shall.". " To conceive " expresses the force of the phrase ovMyi/ig
if yaoroc. Rendered by the simple verb " to conceive," by
Kend., M., Thorn., Wakef., Campbell, Norton. The passage
Isa. 7 : 14, which is here quoted, has only the fern. adj. ,11?
(prssgnans). We thus have an euphemism.
m " thou shalt call ; " xaleasis. The future here is regarded
as having the force of an imperative, hence " thou shalt " is
placed before " call." This use of the future is a Hellenism.
Green, Gram., p. 27. Stuart's Gr. N. Test., 141.
n " of the Most High ; " vytarov. This adjective joined with
0eos is rendered by "Most High" (E. V.) Mark 5 : 7, Luke
8 : 28, Acts 16 : 17, Heb. 7:1. It is thus rendered in the
instance where it stands independent, Acts 7 : 48. " The Most
High " occurs frequently in the 0. Test. (E. V.) as the translation
of lii^SJ (Sept. vyicrros). For the sake of uniformity in
translation, this should be the rendering of the word when
applied to God, in all cases. So Thorn., Eheims, Murdock. Syr.,
f?v Heb. N. Test., p'is. Vulg., " Altissimi ; " S. Fr., " du
Tre's-Haut ; " Iber., " del Altissimo."
o " give him." The preposition " to," after " given," is super-
fluous according to present usage. Omitted by Wesley, Thorn.,
Camp., Norton, Eheims.
t " How shall this be ? " I have retained the rendering Of
the E. V., and yet as the future Of dpi (i.-& &<*, fufc m'id.j
is often used with the force of the subjunctive (from a defect in
the verb), I submit as an alternative rendering, " How can this
be ? " So Wakef., Norton.
J "since;" btsl. So (E. V.) 2 Cor. 13 : 3. Rob., Wakef.,
Penn, Sharpe, Dick., Campbell, Kend., Norton, Angus, M.
r " the Most High." See v. 32, note.
" the offspring being holy ; " TO ysvvcoftevov ayiov. Some
interpreters have rendered this passage by connecting ayiov with
the subject as though the text were to ysvvcoftevov -to ayiov.
They, therefore, translate " the holy offspring." Such is the view
of Kuincel. Bloomf., after Rosenmuller, supposes that there is an
ellipsis of ov. In the above rendering TO yewio/ievov is regarded
as used substantively for TO yevvrjpa, offspring, progeny. As an
alternative rendering that of M., " the child (TO ricuSiov under-
stood) begotten holy will be," etc. If we translate yevvcapevov
as a participle, then " begotten " should be employed instead of
born." The fact that it is in the present tense, shows this
is its signification. 'Ex aov, which is found in some few MSS.
after ysvvcoftevov, is of no authority. Though followed by the"
E. V., it is not in harmony with the Text. Eecept.
' " kinswoman ; " avyytrtjs. The generic sense of this word
(a relation one of the same family) is most appropriate. So
Norton, Wakefield, Penn, Angus, JL Iber., " parienta ; " De
Wette, " Verwandte." 'Avtyta is the proper term for a cousin
fern.,- though this is sometimes used in the wider sense of rela-
tion, ovyyeirfs is rendered in the E. V. usually by kinsmen, kin,
and kinsfolk. " Cousin" Occurs" only here, and in V. 58.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. I.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
son in her old age ; and this is
the sixth month with her who was
called barren :
37 For with God nothing shall
be impossible.
38 And Mary said, Behold the
handmaid of the Lord, be it unto
me according to thy word. And
the angel departed from her.
39 And Mary arose in those
days, and went into the hill-
country with haste, into a city
of Juda,
40 And entered into the house
of Zacharias, and saluted Elis-
abeth.
41 And it came to pass, that
when Elisabeth heard the salu-
tation of Mary, the babe leaped
in her womb : and Elisabeth was
filled -nth the.Holy Ghost.
42 And she spake out with a
loud Toice and said, Blessed art
thou among women, and blessed
is the fruit of thy womb.
43 And whence is this to me,
that the mother of my Lord should
come to me ?
44 For lo, as soon as the voice
of thy salutation sounded in mine
GREEK TEXT.
vlov eV yfjpa, avTr/s' /cat OVTOS
fj.r/v CKTOS eVrtz> avTrj rff KaXov-
fjievr) o~Teipa.' 37 OTC OVK aSvva-
Tycrei Trapa. T @<p TTO.V prjfj.a
38 Elm Se Ma.pia.iJL, 'ISov, r,
SovXrf Kvpiov yevoiTO /JLOI Kara
TO prj/j.0. o~ov. KOLI a.7rrjX6ev air
avTrjs 6 ayyeXos.
39 'Ava.a-Ta.cra. 8
Tals Ttfjiepais TO.VTO.IS
els TT]v opeivrjv //era
elf TroXiv 'Iov8a, 40 /cat ei
6ev els TOV OLKOV Za^aplov, /cat
' f ^ ' T~*\ ' n 41 ^
?7<T7racraro TTJV JbAicrapeT. /cat
r/KOVo~ei> 77
TOV a.o-7rao-fjt.ov TTJS Mapias, eo~Kip-
TO @pe(f)os eV Trj /cotA/a av-
TTJS' /cat eTrXrjo-flrj Hvev[j.aTos
'Ayiov T) '-SAtcra/Ser, 42 /cat az/e-
r) [j,ya\r], /cat etVej',
o~v
evXoyrj fj.evos o KapTros TTJS KOL-
af crou. 43 /cat -rroOev \JLOL
TOVTO, 'iva, eXdrj 77 ^Trjp TOV
ICvpiov fjt.ov TTpos fJ.e; 4 * ISov
yap, as eyevtTo 77 (froovTJ TOV
do~7ra.o~fj.ov o~ov els TO. COTO. fj.ov,
REVISED VERSIOlf.
child in her old age ; and this
is the sixth month with her
who was called barren : for 37
with God nothing u is impossi-
ble. And Mary said, 'Behold, 38
the handmaid of the Lord ; be
it to me according to thy word.
And the angel departed from
her. And Mary "rose in those 39
days, and went into the hill-
country with haste, into a city
of Judah, and entered into the 40
house of Zachariah, and saluted
Elizabeth. And it came to 41
pass, *when Elizabeth heard the
salutation of Mary, the babe
leaped in her womb : and Eliza-
beth was filled with the Holy
Spirit. And she spoke out 42
with a loud voice and said,
Blessed art thou among women,
and blessed is the fruit of thy
womb. And 'how hath this 43
happened, to me, that the mother
of my Lord should come to
me? for 'behold, "when the 44
voice of thy salutation b came
to my ears, the babe leaped in
" is impossible ; " aSvvartjasi. Kend., M., Angus, Camp.,
Dick., Wakef., Thorn. This 'future (by Hellenism) has the force
of the present tense. Kuinoel: "HSwarijasi vim prsesentis
habet, aSwatet verbum autem dSwarc'v respondet Hebraec-
rum ttbart cui copulavi solet particula a, qu cum significet
etiam penes, Alexandri verbo aSwarelv junxerunt prsepositio-
uem na$a, ut Gen. XVIII. 14, -^ tTi!-ra, ubi ubi ol 6, habent
ftr] aSvvarjjaet itagii T(5 &eca Qrjfta."
* '' Behold ! " The pointing of the critical editions places a
comma after 18ov. It is an interjection.
" " rose." This is according to our present mode of speaking.
* " when ;" <Js. See v. 23, note.
y " How hath, this happened to me ; " ito&sv pot TOVTO. The
language of the E.'V. is so literal, that it presents us with an
idiom quite remote from our usus loquendi. I translate on the
principle, that Tto&eir has sometimes the signification of " how "
(Rob., Lex. Bretsch., " quo tandem, modo, qua ratione,") as in
Mark 8 : 4 ; 12 : 37. This is the signification assigned to it in
this place- by Bretschneider ; there is an ellipsis of ytyovs, or,
more fully, TO ngayfia yeyove. Bloomf. We may, however,
regard ftot as pleonastic, in translation, and then render. more
concisely and in harmony with our idiom, " how hath this happen-
ed." In this phrase, the thought is preserved. So De "Wette,
" wie widerfahret mir das ; " Ital. is nearly the same, " donde mi
avviene ; " Dan., " hvorfra kommer mig det ; " S. Fr., d'ou me
vient ceci ; " Belg., " van -waar [komt] mij dit."
= " behold ; " ISaii. Dick., Angus, M. In conformity with
the punctuation of the text, a comma is placed after " behold,"
thus indicating it as an exclamatory particle, and distinguishing
it from the imperative behold. " Lo ! " is obsolete, at least in
prose.
* " when ; " <5s. Wesley, Dick., M. See v. 23, note.
b " came ; " lyiveto. Angus, M., Thel. This verb is frequent-
ly rendered in the past tenses by " came," in the sense of " came
to pass," in the E. V. = fieri. " Sounded " is an unnecessary
departure from the text. Schott, " pervenisset ; " Oastalio,
" pervenit."
c "to my ears;" ekra. arta ftov. Norton, Thel. Thispreposi-
10
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. I.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
ears, the babe leaped in my womb
for joy.
45 And blessed is she that
believed : for there shall be a
performance of those things which
were told her from the Lord.
46 And Mary said, My soul
doth magnify the Lord,
47 And my spirit hath rejoiced
in God my Saviour.
48 For he hath regarded the
low estate of his handmaiden : for
behold, from henceforth all gener-
ations shall call me blessed.
49 For he that is mighty hath
done to me great things ; and
holy is his name.
50 And his mercy is on them
GREEK TEXT.
ev ayaAAtacm TO
/3j060o? ev Trj KOiXla fj.ov. 45 /cat
fj.a.KapLa rj mcrTevcracra, OTL earrat
reAa'(B<ny TOIS AeAaA^/xeVot? avrfj
Trapa Kvpiov.
46 Kal elm Mapia/j., Meya-
Xvvei rj yt>x?7 fj.ov TOV Kvpiov,
47 /cat ?7yaAA/acre TO Trvevfwi JJLOV
eVt TO> 0ea> TU> (rcoTrjpL fj.ov
JR ff s f rt\ 1 ' ^ ^ '
OTL eTrepAeyev em TTJV raTret-
VKXTIV Tr]$ 8ov\rjf avrov. ISov
yap, O.TTO TOV vvv fJ-aKapiovcr
" < ' 49 a > /
Tracrat at yevear OTL
fj.01 /ieyaAeta 6 dvva.ro?, /cat ayiov
REVISED VEESION.
my -womb for joy. And J happy 45
is she who believed 'that there
will be a 'fulfillment of "the
things which were told her
from the Lord. And Mary 45
'said, My soul doth magnify the
Lord, and my spirit ""rejoiceth 47
in God my Saviour. For he 48
hath regarded 'the humble con-
dition of his 'handmaid : for
k behokl ! 'henceforth all genera-
tions "will call me happy : for 49
the "Mighty One hath done
great things "for me ; and holy
tion sometimes lias the sense of " to " and " towards " as well as of
" into." See Bob., Lex., and Mark 11 : 1, sis 'le^ovunf.rjfi, tig
Brj&yayr;. Acts 11 : 22, 'By.ovad'i} Se 6 },6yos els ra. corn rfjs
Ixxirjoias. V~ulg., Eras., Beza, " in auribus meis ; " Castalio,
Schott, " ad aures meas." To render the passage " comes into
my ears," would violate the idiom of our language.
a " happy ; " fcazttfla. "Wesley, Thorn., Kend., Wakef., Dick.,
Campbell, M. So (B. V.) John 13 : 17. Eom. 14 : 22. 1 Cor.
7 : 40. 1 Pet, 3 : 14, and 4 : 14. Bretsch., " beatws, felix, beatus
prast-icandus." This adjective is frequently confounded with evlo-
yr/ros and its cognates in the E. V. The proper distinction
between these words is preserved in the Vulgate, Mont, Beza (
Schott, and most modern translations.
" that ; " on. This word is a demonstrative conjunction
here. After motevio, on is naturally referred to that verb.
This is agreeable to the usage of Luke in other instances. See
Acts 27 : 25, mtarevco yas> icy &cco on ovros earat. See the
same construction Matt. 9 : 28. Mark 9 : 23, 24. Jno. 11 : 27,
42 ; 13 : 19 : 14 : 10, 11. So Thorn., Wakef., Sharpe, Dickinson,
Campbell, Angus, Norton, M. Bloomfield, Troll. (N.T.), Kend.,
and Perm, " for there will be," etc. ; Iber., " ella que ha tenido fe
en que se coinpliran," etc. ; De "Wette, " du geglaubt hast, dass
das dir vom Herrn Verkiindigte in Erfiillung gehen wird ; ''
Schott, " qufe confisa est, rata fore per Dominum ipsi nuutiata."
' "fulfillment;" feleiaiots. 'Rob. (in loco, article rekeicoots},
Kend., Penn. As " the things " were announced in the prophetic
form, and as this noun is applied to the accomplishment of
prophetic annunciations, it is more appropriate than "perform-
ance."
s " the ; " roTs. This is not one of the very few cases where
perspicuity demands that the article should be rendered as a
demonstrative pronoun. So Kend., Thomson, Wakef., Sharpe,
Campbell.'
b " rejoiceth ; " qyaMlaos. The aorist stands closely con-
nected with a present tense peyaivvet, and has itself the force
of the present. Stuart (note on "Winer, \ 34) : " The aorist
moreover is often used in the sense of the -present, e. g. when
connected with a present, Mark 1 : 3, 1 John 2 : 14, 21, 26,
'sygaya, compared with v. 13, where it is yqayta." The verb
is rendered "rejoiceth" by Tyndale, Geneva, "Wakef., Camp-
bell. Norton, " rejoices ; " Thorn., Kend., Dick., " exultcth," or
" exults ; " Beza, Castal., Schott, " exultat ; " De Wette, " froh-
locket ; " Belg., " verheught ; " Dan., " fryder sig."
1 " the humble condition." The word here refers to the
external state of Mary. She was one of " the common people,"
comp. v. 52, taneivovs (E. V., " them of low degree.") The
expression " low estate " is obsolete. Bretschneider, " humilis
conditio." Used intransitively by the Sept. for ijy. So M.
I " handmaid ; " Sovlrjs. Wesley, M., Thomson, Campbell.
" Handmaiden " is used only in very few cases in the E. V. For
the sake of uniformity, it should be changed 10 "handmaid."
The same word, Sovlrj, is rendered " handmaid " (E. V.) v. 38.
Kuincel : " Taneivioois trjs SovKrjs positum est ex Hebraismo
pro Soviy raneivij." Trollope (N.T.) : " Not humility of mind,
but humility of station, as Sept., Gen. 2D : 32. 2 Kings 14 : 26.
Ps. 25 : 18, Phil. 3 : 21.
k " behold ! " I8ov .' M. See v. 44, note.
i " henceforth ; " iato TOV vvv. Thorn., Sharpe, Campbell, M.
" Prom " with " henceforth " is pleonastic, as the latter word
signifies " from this time."
m " will call me happy ; " ftaxaotoval fie. Scholefield, Thorn.,
Wakef., M., Rob. So Jas. 5 : 11, to count happy. Bretsch.,
" beatwm pradico ; " De Sacy, " je serai appelee bien heureuse ; "
Iber., " me tendran por feliz todas las generaciones."
II " the Mighty One ; " 6 tSvva-rbs. Norton, Thorn., Sharpe,
Wakef., M. This term is used to indicate God in (E. V.) Isa.
1 : 24 ; 30 : 29, etc. " Almighty " is less appropriate, as it ia
the equivalent of ytavronoaTca^. See 2 Cor. 6 : 18. Eev.
1 : 8 ; 4 : 8, etc.
" for me ; " (ioi~ Thorn., Penn, Wakef., Dick., Campbell
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. I.
11
KING JAMES' VERSION.
that fear him, from generation to
generation.
51 He Lath shewed strength
with Ins arm ; he hath scattered
the proud in the imagination of
their hearts.
52 He hath put down the
mighty from their seats, and ex-
alted them of low degree.
53 He hath filled the hungry
with good things, and the rich he
hath sent empty away.
54 He hath holpen his servant
Israel, in remembrance of his
mercy ;
GREEK TEXT.
\ V 3 50 V N 3A
TO ovo/jia O.VTOV /cat TO eAeo?
avTov elf yeveas yeveSw TO?? 0o-
/3ovfj.evoi? OLVTOV. 51 eTToirjore Kpd-
TOS ev ^pa\iovL OLVTOV- ieo-Kop-
Tricrev i>7repri(j)avovy Siavoia KCtp-
8ia$ avTotv. 52 /ca^eiAe Swd-
O-TO.S OTTO dpovcov, KaL
' "
Ta.7rei.vovs.
crev dyaOuiV) KaL
54
KCVOVS.
/3eTO ' ' Itrpar/X Traidos KVTOV,
e'Aa-
REVISED VERSION.-
is his name. And his mercy is 50
on those who fear him, from
generation to generation. 'He 51
doeth 'mighty deeds with his
arm : r he scattereth 'those proud
in the dispositionof their hearts.
'He casteth down "potentates 52
from 'thrones, and exalteth w the
low. He nlleth the hungry 53
with good things, and the rich
he sendeth away empty. He 54
helpeth his servant Israel, "re-
membering mercy (as he spoke 55
M., Angus. S. Fr., " pour moi ; " Ital., " per -me. This is the
most appropriate rendering of the dativus commodi here. The
slight transposition gives the sentence a natural arrangement, for
English readers.
P " he doeth ; " Inoirjas. Norton, " does ; " M., Wakefield,
" showeth ; " Castal., " qui fortia patrat." This aorist expresses
what is customary with God. In such cases, that tense is to be
rendered by the present in English. Buttm. (| 137, note 5) :
" Wherever any thing customary, or of ordinary occurrence in the
world, is mentioned elsewhere than in narration, instead of the
present by which this is expressed in other languages, and usually
in Greek, we often find by a special Grecism the aorist, which is
then in the fullest sense indefinite." Trollope (Analecta, in loco) :
" The aorist is used in this and the following verses in the sense
of to be wont, as the Hebrews employed the Hiphil voice to
express general truths and observations which have no reference
to any particular time." Bloomf. (Annotat) : "All these aorists
(i. e. Ittoiqae, Stsay.ooTtiae, za&izie, eveniijoe, it-catsorethe,
<WeA/ter0) must be rendered by sold and the infinitive." Tyn-
dale, Campbell, Wakef., Kendrick have employed the present in
rendering all these verbs. Compare 1 Sam. 2 : 1-10, in Sept.
' "mighty deeds;" x^aros. Norton, M. Bob. (in verbo),
" collectively, mighty deeds, Luke 1 : 51." The adverbial form
adopted by some translators, " he worketh mightily," would,
according to ordinary usage, require xara ZQKTOS, as- in Acts
19 : 20. Castal., " fortia." Heb. N. T., niiw?.
r " he scattereth." See note on Inoif/os, supra.
" those proud in the disposition ; " vitsftrjyavovs Siavoiq.
Bob. (in loco.) Trollope (N. Test.) : " The words Siavoia xu$-
Slas must be construed with vnsgrjyavovs. I regard this as a
Hellenistic idiom in which the idea is equivalent to the common
phrase " proud-hearted." diavoia, often thought, purpose, is by
metonomy used for the mind, for the mode of thinking, and
feeling, disposition of mind, the feelings. Bob., Lex. De "Wette,
" zerstreuet die hoffartig sind in ihres Herzens Gesinnung." As
the adjective is anarthrous, I place the supplement those before it.
This may be properly employed, as it is obviously demanded by
the sense. Should it be deemed best to retain the construction
of the E. V., I suggest the propriety of substituting " device "
for " imagination." The latter word has lost one of its leading
significations since 1611. Trollope (N. Test.) : " It is clear that
these words (TR> 'Afiftaafi /.. r. L] connect with fivr l oO'r l vat. iif-
ovs." See Ps. 98 : 3.
' " he casteth down ; " y.ad-a).e. IE. Pcnn, " hath cast down."
(See v. 51, note.) So Bob. (xad-ifea>). So (E. V.) 2 Cor.
10 : 5. Syriac, vSjla). Heb. N. Test., 11*11;-;. So Murdock.
" Put down " is too feeble. Kend., " hurleth ; " Casta,lio, " de-
turbat."
u " potentates ; " Swaaras. Bob., Thorn. So (E. V.) 1 Tim.
6 : 15.
v " thrones ; " &QOVIDV. The use of Swaatas, potentates or
princes in this sentence, indicates the proper rendering of this
word. So Kendrick, Wesley, Sharpe, Thorn., Dick., Wakefield,
Campbell, M., Thel. Mont, " de thronis ; " Beza, " e thronis ; "
Castal., " de soliis ; " De Wette, " Throne ; " Belg., " throonen ;"
G. Fr. and S. Fr., " trones ; " Iber., " tronos ; " Diodati, " troni;"
Dan., " Throner." The supplementary possessive " their " of the
E. V. is omitted as superfluous.
w " the low ; " ranstvoiie. Bob. (Lex.) As this word is
antithetic to Swaoras, it indicates social position. It is ren-
dered " low," as the present usage of our language demands.
" Low degree " is now antiquated. It was first employed by
Tyndale. Diodati, " i bassi ; " G. Fr. and S. Fr., " les petits ; '
Dan., " de Binge ; " De Wette, " Niedrige." " Lowly," which
has been used by Wakef. and some others, is exceptionable on
the ground that it is now used to indicate moral condition,
persons of humble disposition. As an alternative rendering,
of humble condition." So Iber. and Span., " los de condicion
humilde." As rcatetvovs is anarthrous, " the " is italicised.
1 " remembering mercy ; " fivqad-rjvai &eovs. Kend., Thom^
M. "Vulg., " recordatus misericordite ; " Span., " accordandose
de miserieordia." There is an ellipsis of caats before this verb,
as in v. 72. The supplement " his " is dropped as unwarranted
by the text. In conformity with the Greek, the clause, " as he
spoke to our fathers," is inclosed in a parenthesis. The comma
after " mercy " and " fathers " is dropped in conformity with the
12
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING- TO LUKE. CHAP. I.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
55 As he spake to our fathers,
to Abraham, and to his seed, for
ever.
56 And Mary abode "with her
about three months, and return-
ed to her own house.
57 Now Elisabeth's full time
came that she should be deliver-
ed ; and she brought forth a son.
58 And her neighbours and her
cousins heard how the Lord had
shewed great mercy upon her ;
and they rejoiced with her.
59 And it came to pass, that
on the eighth day they came 'to
circumcise the child ; and they
called him Zacharias, after the
name of his father.
60 And his mother answered
and said, Not so ; but he shall be
called John.
GEEEK TEXT.
A^cre .Trpos TOVS Trarepas T^
T(S 'AfSpaafj. KOL TO)
" ' ^ ' ~ 56
avrov fts TOV anava.
Se Mapt-afJ. aw avrfj aicrei JJ.TJVO.S
KCU vTrearTeev els TOV
OLKOV avrrjs.
67 Tfj Be '
TOV TeKLV aVTTTjV, K.CU
' ' 58 N "
VLOV. /ecu rjKovcrav
ol TreploLKOi Kai ol <rvyyevts av-
TTJf, OTl fJL'ya,\Vl' KvpLOS TO
eAeoy avrov /uer avTrjs, KOU o~vv-
/ J ~ SO -TS~ \ 3 /
fftCLLpov avrrj. J\.ai eyevero
eV Trj 6y8or). rj/j-epa., -f]X6ov irepi-
TO TraiSiov /cat
avro Tr TIM vfj.aTi TOV TraTpos
KOU. ero-
avTOv Za^apiav.
r/ ftr/T^p O.VTOV eirev,
v^l, aAAa KXrjdrjcreTai 'Icaav-
BEVISED VERSION.
to our fathers) to Abraham,
and to his seed for ever. And 58
Mary 'remained with her about
three months ; and returned to
her own house. Now, Eliza- 57
beth's 'time to be delivered was
fulfilled, and she brought forth
a son. And her neighbors and 58
her "kindred heard Hhat the
Lord c had magnified his mercy
towards her ; and they rejoic-
ed with her. And' it came to 59
pass, on the eighth day, they
came to circumcise the child :
and they f were about to call
him Zachariah, after the name
of his father. And his mother, 60
e answering, said, Not so; but
he shall be called John. And 61
punctuation of Tittmann. A more literal rendering of fav;od-fji'ai
would bo " so as to remember." But this involves a violation
of our idiom.
y " remained ; " S/tsevs. Kend., Dick., Norton. So (E. V.)
Luke 10 : 7. John 1 : 33; 15 : 11, 16 ; 19 : 31, etc. Ynlg.,
Mont., Eras., Beza, Castal., Schott, " mansit." The verb, " to
abide " is, to say the least, obsolescent.
* " time to be delivered was fulfilled ; " sittyo&ri 6 zgovos TOV
tev.eTv. Among the different modes by which this passage may
be rendered, this seems to me to preserve the proper medium
between a literality which would be contrary to our usits loquendi,
and a paraphrase, which does not give the proper force to btlriod-ri.
" To fulfill," especially when the idea of time is involved, is the
ordinary rendering of the verb in the E. V. Bob. (Lex., in
verbo) : " Of time, to be fulfilled, completed, to be fully past." So
it is rendered here by The!, and Scarlett. Tov Tcy.etv, the infini-
tive as a noun in the genitive, is employed according to a
common idiom to denote the object or end in view. Stuart,
<i 165. 3. 1. Kiihner, g 308, b. It is best rendered by the infini-
tive, in English. For conciseness and force, this mode is prefera-
ble to the subjunctive.
" " kindred ; " ovyyevezs. See v. 36, note. So Kend-i Penn,
Angus. DeWette, " Verwandten." Heb. N. Test., rr^a'-ij?. Syr.,
aiiooiolj " ^ (sons of her kindred).
b " that ; " OTI. Wesley, Sharpe, Thorn., Dick., Kendrick,
Thel., M.
' " had magnified ; " Iftsya't.vve. Thomson, Penn, Scarlett,
Angus, M. Yulg., " magnificavit ; " S. Fr., " avait magnifie ; "
Span., " habia engrandecido ; " Diod., " aveva magnificata. Syr.,
^.Iio). Heb. N. T., ii'iSfi. I retain the pluperfect of the
E. V., as that tense is sometimes represented by the Gr. imperf.
Trollope, Gram., p. 132. 5. Should it be deemed better to give
the imperfect its usual force, we may render it by " was magnify-
ing." So Angus. See (E. V.) Gen. 19 : 19.
d " towards her ; " per avrfjs. Scarlett, Penn, M. Bob.
(Lex., ftsrnj : " noiBtv it fteia twos, to do with any one, i. e. to
or towards him, corresponding to Heb. DS nbs, also /isya).vvea>
TI fiera rtvos, Luke 1 : 58, for Heb. bs b^Mi-" Eras., Beza,
Castal., " erga illam ; " G. Fr. and S. Fr., " en'vers elle ; " Diod.,
" inverso lei."
" that," before " the eighth day," is omitted, as there is
nothing corresponding to it expressed in the text ; thus it is super-
fluous. So Angus, Wesley, Wakef., Scarlett. Should it be
deemed expedient to introduce a supplement, I recommend that
" when " should be placed after " day," with a comma, immedi-
ately following " day ; " thus, " on the eighth day, when," etc. So
Thorn.
f " were about to call ; " Ixahovv. Kendrick, M. Norton,
" were about to," etc. A literal rendering, " were calling," does
not present the thought with clearness, nor will it here correspond
with our usus loquendi. The obvious sense is, " they were on the
point of naming the child John, but his mother Obje'cted," etc.
The colloquial phrase, " they were going to call," is exact, but
perhaps inadmissible, as colloquial. Scarlett has used it.
s " answering ; " anoK^t&ETaa. Wesley, M., Thelwell. Span,
" respondiendo ; " Vulg., Eras., Beza, " respondens."
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. I.
13
KING JAMES' VERSION.
61 And they said unto her,
There is none of thy kindred that
is called by this name.
62 And they made signs to his
father, -how he would have him
called.
63 And he asked for a writing-
table, and wrote, saying, His
name is John. And they mar-
velled all.
64 And his mouth was opened
immediately, and his tongue loos-
ed, and he spake, and praised
God.
65 And fear came 0:1 all that
dwelt round about them : and all
these sayings were noised abroad
throughout all the hill-country of
Judea.
66 And all they that heard
them, laid them up. in their hearts,
saying, What manner of child !
GREEK TEXT.
fil 7^- '\ 9
7^- '\ 9 \
vr/s. J\.ai. CLTTOV Trpos
Ore ovSely fcrriv eV rfj crwyye-
veia, Q-QV, or KaXeiTai TW ovo/tari
62
ira-
rpi avTov, TO T'L O-V OeXoL KaXet-
n ' ' 63 * > '
croon, OVTOV. KO.I airrjcras TTLVO.-
Kidiov eypa'fye, Xeycav, 'Icaavurjs
ecrrl TO ovo/jta avrov- KOL 0au-
~
TO crroyua avTov 7ra.pa.xpr/ pa /cat
77 yXSxrara. avTov, /cat eAaAet ev-
XoyS>i> TQV 0eoi>. ''' Kai e
TTi TTaVTO.? (j)0/3of TOVS
KOVVTO.S avTOVf /cat eV oXy TTJ
opeivrj TTJS 'lovBaia? SteAaAeiVo
TO, prj/naTa TOVTO.' /cat
7rai>Tf 01 a.KOvo~a.vT$ kv
KapSta avTMf, XeyovTes, Tl
apa TO Traioiov TOVTO Ztrrai;
REVISED VERSION.
they said to her, There is h no
one of thy 'kindred, who is
called by this name. And 62
they made signs to his father 'to
know what he would have him
called. And 'asking for 'a 63
writing-tablet, he wrote, say-
ing, His name is John. And
"they all wondered. And his 64
mouth was opened immediate-
ly, and his tongue loosed, and
he spoke, "blessing God. And 6'5
fear came on all Avho dwelt
"around them ; and all these
pthings q were talked of every-
where r in all the hill-country
of Judea. And all "who heard 66
them, laid them up in their
hearts, saying, 'What then will
this child be ? And the hand
h " no one ; " ovSsls. Norton. Bob. (in verbo), " as substan-
tive, 770 one, no man, no person." " No one " (used as pronoun
in the sense of " no person ") accords with present usage.
1 " kindred." See v. 58, note.
. J "to know what ; " TO ri. Thomson. The article to here
applies to the whole of the following clause, and is not, as has
been supposed by some, pleonastic. Bloomf. (N. Test.) The
passage might be literally rendered, " namely, as to what he
would have him called." By using the supplement " to know,"
we preserve the force of TO, and have a phrase, which presents
the thought in terms accordant to our usus loquendi. The ren-
dering of the E. V. makes TO pleonastic, and gives ri (= KOTO. TI)
the force of TCIOS. It follows Tyndale.
k " asking ; " alrijaas. Wesley, Thel., M. The participial
construction is employed by Thomson and Scarlett. Spanish,
" pidiendo."
i " a writing-tablet ; " mvaxiSiov. Wesley, Scarlett, Angus,
M. De Wette, " ein Tafelchen ; " Belg., " een schrijf-tafelken."
" Writing-table " conveys a wrong idea to the English reader.
See Bob.
" " they all wondered ;" Ifrav/iaoav ndvres. Kend., Norton,
Wakef. " To marvel " is obsolete. There is an unnecessary
inversion of the sentence in the E. V. It was copied from
Tyndale, who followed the Latin of the Yulg., " mirati emit
universi."
u " blessing ; " evloySv. Norton, Kendrick, Wakef. S. Fr.,
"en benissant;" Iber., " bendiciendo ; " Diodati, Ital., "benedi-
cendo." So evkoyeco is rendered " to bless " in all other instances
in the E. V.
" around." Kend., Penn, Scarlett, " round." M. " Eound
about," should be changed to " round " or " around " in all cases,
as " about" is a tautology.
P " things ; " ^rjftata.. Kend., Norton, Angus, Wesley, Thorn.,
Penn, Wakef., Camp. De Wette, " Dinge ; " Belg., " dingen ; "
G. Fr. and S. Fr., "choses;" Iber., "cosas;" Diod. and ItaL
" cose." This signification of Qrjft.a. is derived from the Hebrew,
and is equivalent to 13*1
1 " were talked of every where ; " SieZafatta. M-, Rob. (in
verbo et loco.) The preposition Sin, having the primary significa-
tion of through, throughout, may properly be regarded as giving
the verb this signification in " every where." Liddell defines
St.al.aUco in pass. " to be talked of every where." " To noise "
is no longer used. If Sta. is disregarded, we may render " were
spoken of," or, " talked of in all," etc. So Sharpe.
' " in all the hill-country ; " iv olrj T*J ofsivij (ZIOQO, subaud.)
Wes%, Wakef., M. More literally, " in the whole hill-country."
So Norton, Thel. Beza, " in tota montana regione." This is
submitted as an alternative rendering.
" all' who heard ; " n&vrss ol axovoavres. Thorn., Wakef.,
Scarlett, Dick., Camp., M.
- " What then will this child be ? " Ti aoa TO natSiov TOVTO
toTat; Norton, J[. Thorn, and Penn, "What will this child
be ? " S. Fr., " Que sera done ce petit enfant ? " Iber., " Quien
pues ha de ser cste nino ? " Ital., " Che sara dunque quel fanci-
ullino?" Syriac, JLJn Vlia4 JoaiJ ^a Jlio. Belg.," Wat zal
doch clit kindeken wezen ? " Schott, " Quid tandem hie puer
futurus est?" The force of aoa should not be disregarded ia
rendering this passage. See Eob. (in verbo.) Bloomf. (N. T.) ;
' The pa is ratioemattve."
14
THE GOSPEL AC COBBING TO LUKE. CHAP. I.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
of
shall this be! And the hand
the Lord was with him.
67 And his father Zacharias
was~ filled with the Holy Ghost,
and prophesied, saying,
68 Blessed be the Lord God of
Israel ; for he hath visited and
redeemed his people,
69 And hath raised up an horn
of salvation for us, in the house
of his servant David :
70 As he spake by the mouth
of his holy prophets, which have
been since the world began :
71 That we should be saved
from our enemies, and from the
hand of all that hate us ;
72 To perform the mercy pro-
GREEK TEXT.
TjV fJ.T O.VTOV.
Kai Za^apias o TTO.TTJP avrov
, KOL
, \e-ycov, 68
TOS Kvpios 6 Oeos TOV '
art 7T<rK\lsaTO KOI. eTroitjcre Xv-
" \ ~ 3 -. fiQ \
TpOHTlV TO> ACCCi) ' O.VTOV K.O.L
r/'yeipe Kepas crajTrjpias yiuv, tv
T(S oi'/cct) Aa{$i TOV Traioos O.VTQV-
eAaA^cre 810. crro/j.aroy
TO>V
TU>V air aavos Trpo-
71
)(0pa>v
/cat e/c
-TTO.V-
T>V JJLKTOVVTCOV
rjcrai eAeoy /aera TO>V
' 2
iroi.-
REVISED VERSION.
of the Lord was with him.
And "Zachariah, his father, was ci
filled with the Holy Spirit, and
prophesied, saying, Blessed be 66
"the Lord, the God of Israel ;
for he hath visited and "redeem-
ed Ms people, and hath raised 69
up a horn of salvation for us,
in the house 'of David, his
servant ; as he spoke by the 70
mouth of his holy prophets
''of old : z salvation from our 71
enemies, and from the hand of
all who hate us ; to perform 72
mercy. Howards our fathers,
u " Zachariali, his father ; " Za^a^ias o !tarrj() avrov. Thorn.,
"Wakef., M., Campbell, Dick., Norton. This is the arrangement
of the Vulg., Montanus, Eras., Beza, Castalio. So Schott, who
punctuates thus, " Zacharias, pater ejus." Syriae, ^ULO
(Murdock, " Zachariah his father.") Heb. N. T., -pax
De Wette, " Zacharias, scin Yater ; " Belgic, " Zacharias zijn
vader ; " G. Fr. and S. Fr., " Zacharie son pere ; " Iberian,
" Zacarias, su padre ; " Diodati, " Zaecaria, suo padre ; " Dan.,
" Zacharias hans Fader."
v " the Lord, the God of Israel ; " Kvgtos o 6sos rov 'lagarjL
Norton, Keudrick, Thorn., Sharpe, "Wakef., Scarlett, Campbell.
Luther and De Wette, " der Herr, der Gott Israels ; " Belg., " de
Heere, de God Israels ; " G. Fr. and S. Fr., " le Seigneur, le Dieu
d'Israel ; " Iber., " el Senor, el Dios de Israel ; " Ital., " il Signore,
1'Iddio d'Israele ; " Dan., " Herren, Israel's God." This phrase is
a literal translation of the Hebrew Ixibi "Wix JTiiTj'Wia Ps.
72 : 18 ; 106 : 48, where the Septuagint agrees exactly with this
of Luke. As Evyios is equivalent to rtw (a proper name of
God), it is anarthrous (Kiihner, $244), while 0e6s takes the article
being in apposition to Kvytog. Stuart, Gram., \ 89. 6. A comma
is placed after KVQIOS, because the sentence, " the God of Israel,"
is explanatory.
" " redeemed ; " htoiijae. I have retained the language of the
E. V. At the same time, I suggest the literal rendering of Inol-
rjae Ivrgcoaiv ry lacy aiiTov, " wrought redemption for his
people," as an alternative. So Vulg., Eras., Montanus, ' fecit
redemptionem ; " De AVette, " seinem Volke Erlosung geschafft ; "
Iber., " hecho la redencion, a su pueblo." Svriac, oiio^ . VM
P is , V V
(iojos 31^. fi^.0 (" who hath visited his people, and wrought
redemption for them.") So Thelwall.
1 " of David, his servant ; " 4api TOV xaiSbs aviov. Norton.
This construction is like that of v. 68, Kv^eos a. T. L Tov
naiSoe O.VTOV being in apposition with ^faftlS. The order of the
text should be preserved.
y " of old ; " arf altuvos (= dil'Sa Heb. N. Test. ;
Syriae ; " of old," Murdock.) Thorn., M., Kendrick. This is a
common rendering in the E. V. of 0. Test, where the Hebrew
has t&isa, and the Septuagint an alcavoe, as in Gen. 6 : 4. Ps.
25 : 6. Eob. (aliov. a), " time long past, as in Gr. writers, the
olden time, of old." The sense of tojv ayicov taiv art ahuvos
Ttqoyrjraiv avroii may be expressed freely thus, " of his holy
ones, the ancient prophets." The ^repetition of ituv seems to
give prominence to the thought that the prophets belonged to
" the olden time." " Since the world began " is not sufficiently
literal. Iber., " desde tiempos antiguos ; " Dan., " ved sine hellige
Propheters Mund, som have voret fra fordums Tid ; " De Sacy,
" prophetes, qui ont ete dans tous les siecles passes."
3 " salvation ; " oconjQtav. Angus, The!., Pcnn, M. Sharpe
and "Wakef., " a salvation ; " Vulg., Mont., Schott, " salutem ; "
De Wette, " Kettung ; " Belg., " [Naamlijk] eene verlossinge ; "
S. Fr., " salut ; " Diod., " salvazione ; " Dan., " en Frelse." The
niference of acoTr^lav to acoTtjfias, in v. 69, is obvious. It is
exegetic. Heb. N. Test., h
* " mercy." As efaos is anarthrous, no article is requisite
before "mercy." Article not employed by Geneva, Wiclif,
Eheims, Angus, Thel., M., Kend. As there is nothing in the
text to authorize the supplement "promised," it is dropped, by
Kend., Angus, M., Thel., Perm, Sharpe Thorn.
b " towards ; " fisra. Kendrick, Norton. See v. 58, note.
Hottjaai eUcos ftsTa is a Hebraism, equivalent to 6S ion nias,
" to perform mercy towards or to any one." So the Heb.
N. Test., sijiniasji b? 'ibn ftvas. See Gesen. Lex., bS- I deem
" towards " more" exact 'than " to." The latter, however, is
employed by Wesley, Penn, and M. " Towards " is sanctioned
by Eras, and Beza, " erga patres nostros." So Castal., " erga
majores nostros ; " G. Fr., " envers nos peres ; " Diod., " inverse i
nostri padri." So Kuincel, " erga majores nostros."
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. I.
15
KING JAMES' VERSION.
mised to our fathers, and to
remember his holy covenant ;
73 The oath -which he aware to
our father Abraham,
74 That he -would grant unto
us, that -we, being delivered out
of the hand of our enemies, might
serve him without fear,
75 In holiness and righteous-
ness before him, all the days of
our life.
76 And thou, child, shalt be
called the prophet of the Highest,
for thou shalt go before the face
of the Lord to prepare his ways ;
77 To give, knowledge of sal-
vation unto his people, by the
remission of their sins,
78 Through the tender mercy
of our God ; whereby the day-
spring from on high hath visited
us,
79 To give light to them that
sit in darkness and in the shadow
GREEK TEXT.
/cat jJLvr\ar6r]vai
ayias avrov, 3 opKOv ov <a(j.0(re
Trpos 'A/3paafj, TOV Trarepa rjjji.wi',
TOV Sovvcti THJUV, 74 ao/3cay, e/c
TGJV tyQ
) Xarpeveiv avrco
TTTJTL KCU 8lKaiO(TVVr) evCO
75 e ocrio-
O.V-
TOV Tracrar ra? ?/x,e/oa? rrs
' 6 Kcu, o-v
Trpo-
Trpo-
Tropev(rr) -yap irpo TrpoacDirov Kv-.
plov, eVoijuacrai odovy avrov-
TOV Sovvat yv5>o~iv
TU> Aaa> avrov kv a
Tiav avTKV, 8 Sia
kXkovs Oeov r//j.cav, kv oty
TJsaTO r]fji5.y avaroXr} eg
79
afj.ot.p-
> J,
iri<f>avai TOLS
da.va.rov
K.O.L
TOV
EEVISED VERSION.
and to remember his holy cove-
nant ; the oath which he swore 73
to "Abraham our father, that he 74
would grant to us, that, being
delivered out of the hand of
our enemies, u we might serve
him without fear, in holiness 75
and righteousness before him,
'all our clays. And thou, child, 7fi
shalt be called f a prophet E of
the Most High, for thou shalt
go before the face of the Lord
to prepare his ways ; to give 77
knowledge of salvation to his
people u in l the remission of
their sins, ! on account of Hhe. 78
tender mercy of our God, by
which the clay-spring from on
high hath visited us, to give 79
light "to those sitting in dark-
ness and '"the shadow of death ;
6 "Abraham, our father." Perspicuity demands that the order
of the text should not be deserted. So Wakef., Sharpe, Norton,
De Wette, Belg., <?. Fr. and S. Fr., Iber., Span., Diodati, Syr.,
Heb. N. Test., Vulg., Beza, Eras., Costal.
d "we." The nominative is placed immediately before its
verb, which is its natural place according to our wus loquendi.
So Sharpe, Penn, Scarlett, M., Camp.
e " all our days ; " naoas ras
Sharpe, Penn, A. Camp., Angus, Thel.
Norton, Dick.,
Vulg.,' " omnibus diebus
nostris ; " Schott, " per omnes dies nostros. The rendering of the
Textus Receptus, tijs <ofjs, is not found in many of the best
manuscripts and versions (among the latter is the Syriac). It is
canceled by Griesbach, Knapp, Theile, Lach., Tisch., Schott,
Scholz, and bracketed by Tittmann. It is spurious.
f " a prophet ; " n^oyf,rr;s. As this noun is anarthrous, no
article should be inserted, especially when there is nothing in the
passage to make the signification specific. So M., Wesley, Dick.,
Thorn., Sharpe, Campbell, Norton. Belgic, "een Propheet."
Diodati, S. Fr., and De Wette have no article.
E " of the Most High ; " vyiarov. See v. 32, note.
h " in ; " lv. As " in the remission " is agreeable to our idiom,
and lv has its radical signification, this rendering is appropriate.
So Scarlett, Angus, Dick, Camp., M.
' " the." As ayeaec has no article, " the " is italicized as a
supplement. An alternative rendering is suggested, "in remis-
sion." De Wette has no article.
1 " on account of ; " Sia (cum accusat.) Bob. (Lex.) By this
rendering which gives the primary sense of the preposition, it is
genitive, " through." Tyndale adopted " through," in conformity
with the Vulg., " per (viscera misericordioe)," and was followed
by Cranmer, Geneva, and the E. V. De Wette, " vermoge (der
erbarmenden Gnade) ; " Iber., " por causa (de las entranas de
misericordia)."
k " the tender mercy."
a supplement.
i " to those sittin ;
being anarthrous ; '' the " is
The participial
rendering is adopted, as it harmonizes with the text and is more
concise than that of the E. Y. As an
those dwelling." See the verb
alternative form, " to
in Bob. and Bretsch.
Lexicons. It is equivalent to sis';, which signifies both " to sit,"
and " to dwell."
m in, which is inserted before " the shadow " in the E. Y., is
an unnecessary supplement. When nouns are connected by
conjunctions and a preposition precedes the leading one, ii is not
expressed before the rest, according to the usage of our language.
As to the omission of the article in the text before axia, the
following rule of Trollope's Gram., p. 52, is applicable : " When
two or more nouns are coupled together by conjunctions, or when
the conjunctions are omitted by the figure asyndeton, the article
which would otherwise be inserted, is frequently rejected." See
Greek text of Matt. 10 : 28. Luke 21 : 25. 1 Cor. 13 : 13. I
retain " shadow," though " shade " would perhaps be more strictly
accurate. Webster (" Shade ") makes the following correct
distinction : "Shade differs from shadow, as it implies no particu-
lar form or definite limit ; whereas a shadow represents in form
the object, which intercepts the light." I suggest " shade " as an
distinguished from its proper meaning when followed by a ! alternative rendering. To Thorn., " the shade of death."
16
THE GOSPEL ACCOBDING TO LUKE. CHAP. II.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
of death, to guide our feet into
the way of peace.
80 And the child grew, and
waxed strong in spirit, and was
in the deserts till the day of his
shewing unto Israel.
CHAP. II.
AND it came to pass in those
days, that there went out a decree
from Cesar Augustus, that all the
world should be taxed.
2 (And this taxing was first
made when Cyrenius was gover-
nor of Syria.)
3 And all went to be taxed,
every one into his own city.
4 And Joseph also went up
from Galilee, out of the city of
Nazareth, into Judea, unto the
city of David,^ which is called
Bethlehem, (because he was of the
house and lineage of David,)
GREEK TEXT.
TOVS TroSay rjfJi.S>v els
o8ov eiprjvris. 80 To 8e ircuSiov
rjv^ave /cat eKparaiovTO irvev-
fj.aTL- /cat rjv ev raty e/JT^oty,
ecoy y/jiepa.? avaSei^eoas avrov
irpos TOV ' Io~pa.-f)X'
CHAP. n.
'EFJENETO Se ev rats rjfu-
pais e/cetWty, t^rjXde So-yfjia. Trapa
Kaiaapos Avyovo-rov, a-Troypd-
'(pecrdcu Tracrav rr/v
avTrj rj a,7roypa(j)r) -TrpatTT] eye-
vero rjyefJiovevovTos TTS
3 /cat
vrazrey aTToypacrai, e/cacrroy
ety TTJV i8lav TroAty. 4
8z /cat 'Tcao~rj(j) O.TTO TTJS
Aa/ay, e/c TroAeojy Nc/L^aplr, ety
TTJV 'lovSalav, ety TroXiv Aa/318,
TjTts /caAetrat SrjdXee/jt,, 8ia TO
eivau O.VTOV e' OIKOV /cat Trarptas
REVISED VERSION. .
to guide our feet into the way
of peace. And the child grew 80
and "became strong in spirit :
and ""he was in the deserts till
the day 9 of his manifestation to
Israel.
CHAP. II.
AND it came to pass in those 1
days, that there went out a
decree from Cegar Augustus
that all the world "should be
registered. (This 'registering 2
c first d took place when 'Quiri-
nus was governor of Syria.)
And all went to be registered, 3
each into his own city. And 4
Joseph also went up from Gali-
lee, out of the city of Nazareth,
into Judea, g into the city of
David, which is called Bethle-
hem (because he was of the
house and ""family of David),
" " became 'strong ; " Ex^araiovro. Thorn., Angus, M. To
wax is obsolete.
In conformity with the Greek punctuation, a colon is placed
after " spirit " (tnvevftari').
p " he." The pronoun is inserted, as this clause is separated
from the preceding one by a colon. See last note.
1 " of his manifestation ; " dvaSsl&cos. " His shewing 1 " is
obsolete. So Penn, Angus, M. If it should be deemed proper
to employ Anglo-Saxon terms, we can render the words, " when
he was shown." This is ad sensum, though not ad verbum.
" should be registered ; " axtoyq&yeod'a.i. Norton, M.,
Sharpe, Camp. Kob. (in verbd) : " In N. Test, to write off in a,
register, to inscribe, enroll." Some later translators have used the
phrase " should be enrolled." The verb " to register " is, however,
the more usual one at present for expressing the thought, where
lists are made of, those who are subject to taxation and other
public charges. It is unnecessary to examine the various theo-
ries and renderings which have been adopted to meet the
supposed chronological difficulty, presented by a collation of this
passage with Josephus' Antiq. 18 : 1. 1, ib. 18 : 2. 1. The task
belongs to commentators. See Kob., Lex. (Kv^vios.)
b "registering;" anoygayri. Rob. (Lex.), Norton, M. See
last note.
" first ; " TC^COTT;. This word is used adverbially ; Buttmann,
123. 6, and Trolfope, p. 46 (obs. 15). So John 8 : 7, n^turos,
and 20 : 4. 1 Tim. 2 : 13. The rendering which would treat
n^cortj as an adjective qualifying ayoygarprj, is opposed to the
idiom of the Greek. This first registering would require avrrj y
anoyqatpri ij ftpcoTrj, or canrj r; ic^turrj anoygacpr]. Green's
Gram., p. 187. Trollope, Analecta (in loco). The E. V. properly
treats it^carrj as an adverb. See Septuagint, 1 Sam. 14- : 14.
Dan. 8:21. Joel 2 : 20. Zech. 14:10. Eev. 4 : 1.
d " took place ; " tyevero. Penn, Campbell. Bob. (in verbd],
" to take place." As an alternative rendering, " took effect."
Tyndale, " was first executed."
" Quirinus." The Latin orthography is adopted rather than
the Greek, as appropriate for a Latin name. Norton, M., Hob.
Others, as Camp., Penn, " Quirinius."
f " each ; " &SCCOTOS. Norton, Scarlett, Penh, Thel. " Each
one," used by some translators, requires 'sis exaoTos. Eph. 4 : 16,
Acts 20 : 31. Kob. (exaoros.)
E " into ; " els. There is no necessity for departing from the
radical sense of this word, which is properly used in v. 3, els ir,*
iSiav no* ', " into his own city," and this verse, els TT,V 'lovSai.
av, " into Judea."
. h " family ; " xaTfias. Angus, Thelwall, M. Kob. (Lex., in
verbo), " a family," Heb. tinsiaa, as the subdivision of a Jewish
tribe, ynity, aaa, which family' comprehended several households,
olxot." Heb/''N. Test., inriaiiJHM w r^M- Vulg., Mont,
7) f\~\\= V?-'
-^ T
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. II.
17
KING JAMES' VERSION.
5 To be taxed with Mary his
espoused wife, being great with
child.
6 And so it was, that while
they were there, the days were
accomplished that she should be
delivered.
7 And she brought forth her
first-born son, and wrapped him
in swaddling-clothes, and laid
him in a manger ; because there
was no room for them in the inn.
8 And there were in the same
country shepherds abiding in the
. field, keeping watch over their
flock by night.
9 And lo, the angel of the Lord
came upon them, and the glory of
the Lord shone round about them ;
and they were sore afraid.
10 And the angel said unto
them, Fear not: for behold, I
bring you good tidings of great
joy, which shall be to all people.
GREEK TEXT.
crvv
Mapiafi Trj jue/zi'T/crrey/iej'r; avrco
- \ . v y ' 6 '
yvvaiKi, ovcry e-yKVtp.
vero-8e ev TW eivat avrovs
l7rXrjar6r}(rav ai y/Jt,fpai TOV
3 7 7 X 57 \" 7\
rfitl"mi* tsn t Cfcisc *rmi n/n
KO.I ere/ce TOV viov av-
rrf TOV TrpcaroTOKOV, Kal eo~irap-
yavci)o~ev avTov, KOU dveicXivev
avfov zv Trj (fiaTvy SIOTL OVK rjv
avrols roTTO? ez/ T> KaTa.Xvfj.aTi..
KoH TTOtjue'vey T)<ia.v iv Tr}
XP a T fi avT fi) a-ypa.vXovvTf Kal
(pvXacro~ovTe$ <f)vXa.Kas TTJS VVKTOS
7rl -njv TroiiJivrjv O.VTWV. 9 Kal
I8ov, ayyeXos Kvpiov eirltrrr)
avrols, Kal 8o^a Kvpiov Trepie-
Xa/jttyev avTovs' /cat e(()o^dr]crav
(f)6j3ov fie-yav. 10 Kai e'iTrev av-
Tols 6 ayyeXos, Mrj (j)of3ei(rde-
iSov 'yap, euayyeA/^b/uai v[uv
)(apa.v fJi,e-ydXr)j/ } TJTIS e'crrat
REVISED VERSION.
'to be registered with Mary 6
his ] betrothed wife, k being
with child. And it came to G
pass, while they were there,
the days 'for her delivery wore
accomplished. And she brought 7
forth her first-born son, and
"swathed him, and laid him in
"the manger ; because there was
no room for them in the inn.
And there were "shepherds in 8
the same country, abiding in
the fields, keeping watch over
their flock by night. Andr p be- 9
hold, 'an angel of the Lord
r stood by them, and the glory
of the Lord 'shone round them,
and they feared greatly. And 10
the angel said to them, Fear
not, for behold, I bring you
good 'news of great joy, which
Erasmus, Beza, " familia ; " G. Pr., S. Fr., De Sacy, " de la
famille '; " Iber., Span., " familia ; " Ital., " famiglia." " Lineage "
is at least obsolescent; "lineal descendant" having taken its
place.
1 " to be registered." See v. 1, note.
5 " betrothed ; " fte/ivqarsvpsv};. There is an obvious refer-
ence to -what the Evangelist wrote in ch. 1 : 27, where this
participle occurs in the same tense. Hence the equivalent word
should be employed in both instances.
* " being with child ; " ovar\ tyxvcp- Wesley, Eob. (in verbo.)
I have adopted a literal rendering here. Several late translators
have, " who was with child." By dropping " great," we preserve
the phraseology of the E. V. with the least change.
1 " for her delivery ; " TOV rey.av avrrjv. This infinitive has
the force of a noun, and with rov indicates object. Kuhner,
? 308. 2. b. According to our idiom, " for " is used rather than
" of." Eras., " completi sunt dies pariendi ; " Beza, " explerentur
dies ad pariendum ; " Castal., " exacto ad pariendum tempore."
m " swathed ; " lana^y&vcaasu. Wesley, Thorn., Dickinson,
Campbell, Scarlett, Kend., Norton, Eob. (Lex.) " To swaddle,"
as in (E. V.) Ezek. 16 : 4, or " to wrap in swaddling-clothes " (as
here), are terms no longer in use.
" the manger ; " TTJ yarvrj. The article should not be
dropped, a: rfj _y>drt^ stands contrasted with no xifraiv,ua.n,
" the iiK." The article is retained by Sharpe, Wakef., Scarlett,
Campbell (in v. 12). De Wette, "die Krippe;" Belg., "de
Kribbe ; " S. Fr., " la creche ; " Iber., " el pesebre ; " Span., " el
portal." Heb. N. Test, Dsa. As an alternative rendering,
" the stable." .
" shepherds." This location has been given to the noun, as
more in accordance with our usual arrangement of words, than
that of the E. V. The sentence is thus more easily enunciated.
f " behold ; " ISov. See ch. 1 : 44, note.
' " an angel ; " ayyefos. No definite article is demanded
here by the text. So Norton, Kend., Thorn., Dick, Sharpe,
Penn, Angus, Wakef., Scarlett, Camp., M. De Wette, " ein
Engel ; " Belg., " een Engel ; " S. Fr., " un ange ; " Span., " un
angel ; " Iberian, " un mensagero ; " Diodati and Italian, " un
angelo."
r " stood by them ; " iitecny avrots. M., Thel. So Eob. (in
verbo), " to stand upon, by, near:" Camp., Thorn., Tyndale, and
Cranmer, "stood hard by them." Vulg., "stetit juxta illos;"
Eras., " astitit illis ; " Mont., " adstitit eis ; " Schott, " adstitit
iis;" Bretsch. (in loco, tylcmifu), "loquitur de iis, qui subito
adstant nobis ; " Belg., " stpnd bij haar ; " Dan., " stod for dem."
The rendering of the E. V. was taken from the Geneva, as that
was from Beza's " supervenit ipsis." The Heb. N. Test, coincides
with the above rendering, fcrt^S SBJ/'fei-,.^ jg: ^
"shone round ;" itegi&afiysv. " Bound about" is a tautolo- 2
gy which should be rejected in all cases. '
t "news." This is substituted for the antiquated term
" tidings."
y Y
1?
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE.--CHAP. II.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
11 For unto you is born this
day, in the city of David, a Sa-
viour, -which is Christ the Lord.
12 And this shall be a sign unto
you ; Ye shall find the babe wrap-
ped in swaddling-clothes, lying in
a manger.
13 And suddenly there was
with the angel a multitude of the
heavenly host praising God, and
saying,
14 G-lory to God in the highest,
and on earth peace, good will
toward men.
15 And it came to pass, as the
angels were gone away from
them into heaven, the shepherds
said one to another, Let us now
go even unto Bethlehem, and see
this thing which is come to pass,
GREEK TEXT.
rcS AacS- n ori fTe^drj v/uiis o-f]-
a-coTTjp, os eon Xpio~Tos
iv TroAet Aa/StS. 12 /cat
TOVTO vfj.iv TO o-rjfjLclov evprjo~T
j3p(f)os eo~7rapyavcofjivoi>, Kifj.e-
vov ei> TTJ (paTvr). 13 Kcu e-
ai^vr/s eyeveTo o~vv T(o ayyeXcp
Tr\TJ0of o~TpaTia? ovpavtov, al-
VOVVTGOV TOV Oeov, KCU XeyovTCov,
liX A ' f- ' ' I ' />~ V
Zlog-a i> VWLO~TOL? c/eo), Kai
> \ " , / i > /i' '
CTTi yris eipr}i>rj' ev avuptaTrois
15 v. r^" N ' ' '
A at eyet/ero, cos
avr' avTcov els TOV ovpa-
vov ol ayyeXoi, KCU ol avOpanroL
ol iroifjiei'es elirov irpos ciXXr/Xovs,
AieX9a}[j.ev Br/ IW JBydXeefj., /cat
TO pfj/JLa TOVTO TO yeyo-
REVISED VERSION.
will be to all "the people. For n
there is born to you this day,
in the city of David, a Saviour,
who is Christ, the Lord. And 12
this "will be "the sign to you ;
ye will find "a babe r swathed,
lying in z a manger. And sud- is
denly there was with the angel
a multitude of the heavenly
host, praising God, and saying,
Glory to God in the highest, 14
and on earth peace ;" good will
towards men. And it came to 15
pass, b when the angels c had
gone from them into heaven,
d the men, the shepherds, said
to one another, Let us now go
even to Bethlehem, and see
this thing, which hath come to
" the people ; " rip f.a f p. Angus, Kend., Thelwall, Tyndale,
Geneva, Bheims, Thorn., P^nn, Sharpe, Camp. Norton, "the
whole people." Compare vv^32, 33. As an alternative render-
ing, " the whole people." So Green, Gr. N. Test,, p. 195.
T " will be." Sharpe, Scarlett, Penn.
w " the sign ; " TO aijfisTov. Thomson, M., Kend., Thelwall.
De Wette, " das Zeichen ; " Belg., " het teeken ; " G. Pr., " la
marque;" S. Pr., " le signe;" Iber. and Span., la senal;"
Diodati, " il segno ; " Ital., " il segnale." Heb. N. Test., rvixrt.
In the. use of the definite article here, the usus loquendi of the
Greek and English is the same.
1 " a tabe ; " fiftcpos. Thorn., "VVakef., Sharpe, Penn, Angus,
M., Campbell. Scarlett and Kendrick, " an infant ; " De Wette,
" ein Kind ; " S. Pr., " un petit enfant ; " Iber., " una criatura ; "
Ital., " un fanciulliuo." Compare TO /3fsy>os, v. 16.
y " swathed ; " kanayyavcafievov. Norton, Thorn., Scarlett,
Kend., M., Bob. (onafyavoco.) The paraphrastic rendering of
the E. V. originated in that of Erasmus, " fasciis involutum."
See v. 7, note.
1 " a manger." The article r-rj before yarvrj is canceled by
Knapp, Theile, Lach., Tisch., Schott, Scholz. Griesbach places
it in the margin. Schott says : "Artie, rfj, qui vulgo ante parv^
additar (ex v. 7) delevimus cam Griesb. aliisque auctoritate
multorum codd. (decem unc.)."
A semicolon is placed after " peace," in conformity with the
colon of the Greek (<%>;). Trollope (Analecta) remarks,
"That it (i. e. the verse) consists of two (clauses) only is evident
to demonstration from the apposition of lv vyloTois and Qciy in
the one, to snl yrje and Avfrgtanots in the other." The above
punctuation is that of Wesley and Kend. Thorn., " on earth
peace. I good will," etc.; S. Pr., "paix! dans les hommes," etc. ;
Iber., "en la tierra paz; entre los hombres," etc.; Ital., "sulla
terra, pace ! fra gli uomini," etc. ; Dan., " Fred paa Jorden ! og i
Menneskene," etc.
b " when ; " cas. M., Norton, Scarlett, Campbell, Kob. (in
verbo.)
" " had gone ; " a.nrfi.d'ov. The auxiliai-y " to be," with intransi-
tive verbs, involves a violation of correct grammatical usage. It
is a Prench idiom which, was employed by some writers of the
seventeenth century, but which is now justly rejected by all
correct writers. See Webster, Introd., p. Iv. In rendering- the
aorist part, by a finite verb in the pluperfect, by the well known
principle, that in narration, the pluperfect is often an appropriate
form, narrative is adopted. As an alternative rendering, " having
gone away."
' " the men, the shepherds ; " ol avd-gcanot. ol itoifitvss. The).
Constructions, similar to this, in their general features, are com-
mon even in classic as well as in Hebraistic Greek. In such cases
m'&gcoitos is regarded as. pleonastic, or, to speak more correctly,
it can not be retained in translation. The use of the article in
the present case, with each noun, shows that there is no pleonasm,
but, as Bloomf. remarks, " the latter term is in apposition with,
and exegetical of, the former, q. d. ' the men, i. e. the shepherds
(spoken of at v. 8) said to each other.' " Such is the view of
Trollope (Analecta). Kuincel says: "Vorstius de Hebraism
N. T., p. 332, recte monuit, Lucas non scripsit ol ai'd-qtonoi.
yrotfit-ves sed ol av9~fcoitoi. ol noifiives, h. e. homines 1. viri UK,
pastores scilicet, pastores inquam; quo additamento accuratius
definitur nomen av&pcoitoi. Similer fere locus Lxic. 22 : 03
Librarii nonnulli hanc. locutionem non iutelligenter, om;sserunt
vocem ol
* " to one another ; " jr^os aMtjlovs. Norton, M., Thelwall.
Thorn. According to present usage, " one another,'' or " each
other," is the appropriate rendering of this word in all cases.
W
r
,r\
THE GOSPEL ACCOEDING TO LUKE. CHAP. II.
19
KING JAMES' VERSION.
which the Lord hath made known
unto us.
16 And they came with haste,
and found Mary and Joseph, and
the babe lying in a manger.
17. And when they had seen it,
they made known abroad the
saying which was told them con-
cerning this child.
18 And all they that heard it,
wondered at those things which
were told them by the shepherds.
1.9 But Mary kept all these
things, and pondered them in her
heart.
20 And the shepherds returned,
glorifying and praising God for
all the things that they had heard
and seen, as it was told unto
them.
21 And when, eight days were
accomplished for the circumcising
of the child, his name was called
JESUS, which was so named of
the angel before he was conceived
in the womb.
22 And when the days of her
purification according to the law
. GREEK TEXT.
o o Kvpios eyvmpio-ev -r
16 Kal fjXdov o-Trevo-avTZf, KOI
avevpov rr)i> re Ufapia/ji /cat TOV
Kei/j.evov
8e Sie-
Ka TO
v 1T
ev r] (f)a.Ti>r].
yvcopiaav trepi TOV prj/jLaros TOV
XaXr/6evTOs avTOi? irepl TOV
S\/ / IS v '
OiOV TOVTOV. /Cat "JTaVTGS OL
edavfjiacrav Trepi TO>V
VTCO T>V TTOL/JLEVCOV
7T/30? avTOVf. 19 77 5e Mapiafj.
iravTa avvT^pei TO. pr//j.ara TO.V-
Ta, o-vp,flaXA.ov(ra ev rfj
20
Ka
o
avovv-
rey TOV Of.ov eVt Tracrtv 019 rjKOv-
(rav KCU elSov, Kadcas IXaXrjBrj
7T/5OS 1 O.VTOVS.
KAI ore eTrXr)(rdr]a-a.v yfte-
pai OKTCO TOV 7rept.Tefj.eiv TO TTCU-
Siov, t KOU eKXrjdrj TO ovo/j.a OLVTOV
Ir]o~ov$, TO KXr/dev VTTO TOV a-yye-
Aou irpo TOV crvXXrj(p0rjvai O.VTOV
TIJ KOiXia.
2 KAI ore eirXrj<jQricra.v al
TOV Kadapi(r/J.ov
REVISED VERSION.
pass, which the Lord hath made
known to us. And they came 16
with haste, and found f both
Mary and Joseph, and the babe .
lying in s the manger. And 17
h having -seen it, they made
known abroad 'the thing which
'had been told them concern-
ing this child. And all who 18
heard it, wondered at l the
things which were told them
by the shepherds. But Mary 19
kept all these things, 'ponder-
ing them in her heart. And 20
the shepherds returned, glory-
fying and praising God for "all
which they had seen and heard
as "it had been told to them.
And when eight days were 21
accomplished "for circumcising
im, his name was called
Jesus, 'so called by the angel
Before he was conceived in the
womb. And when the days of 22
their purification according to
f " both and ;" rsxnl. Eob. (re), "both aud." Ktihner,
Gram., 321 (a). Comp. TS y.a.1, Luke 21 : 11. Acts 2 : 9, 10.
Rom. 1 : 12. In a stronger sense these particles sometimes are
rendered "not only but also." As the promise made to the
shepherds was, that they should " find the babe in a manger,"
the -writer says, they not only found Joseph and Mary (of whom
they before knew nothing) but also " the babe," whose birth had
been announced by the angel. I deem " both and" sufficiently
exact to express the thought.
g " the manger ; " rj gxirvrj. The article is improperly omitted
in the E. V. There is an obvious reference to ya-cvr;, v. 12. The
article is retained by Genevan, Norton, Thomson, Pcnn, Wakef.,
Sharpe, If., Scarlett, Campbell. G. Fr., S. Fr., Iberian, Spanish,
Diodati, Ital., Belg., Luther, De Wette, Dan., Heb. N. Test,
" " having seen ; " iSorres. Thorn., "Wesley, Scarlett, if.
1 " the thing ; " TOV foftaros. This obviously refers to TO
$>jpa, in v. 15.
1 " had been told ; " rov lafyS-i-vros. The pluperfect is used
by Thorn., Penn, Wakef., Scarlett, Norton, Kend.
k " the ; " rutv. The artiple should not be rendered by a
demonstrative, as in the E. T. It is properly translated- by M.,
Kend., Wesley, Penn, Angus, Camp.
' " pondering ; " ov/i{ld).lovaa. M., Scarlett. The participial
construction is preserved by Camp., Wakef., Wesley, Sharpe.
m " all." It is unnecessary to express " things " here. So
Kend., M., Norton, Sharpe.
" " it had been told ; " llatydy. See v. 17, note.
" for circumcising ; " rov ns^irefistv. M., Penn, Sharpe,
Wakef. If the article " the " is used, then our idiom would
demand, that the verb should be rendered by a noun, thus, " for
his circumcision." The above expression is concise and accurate.
P " him ; " avrov, instead of TO naiSiov, is the reading of
Gr., Scholz, Lack, Tisch., Knapp, Theile, Titt., Schott. " It is
found (says Bloorafield) in almost all the best MSS. and early
versions." The common one (reading) is evidently a correction.
1 " 50 called ; " TO xlrj&sv. By using the supplement " so,"
the sentence is rendered concise, and the thought is brought out
with clearness. In other words, the name of the child -was so
called, i. e. Jesus. As an alternative rendering, " so named."
" their ; " mnav. In this instance, the translators of the
2C
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. II.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
of Moses were accomplished, they
brought him to Jerusalem, to
present him to the Lord ;
23 (As it is written in the law
of the Lord, Every male that
openeth the womb shall be called
holy to the Lord;)
24 And to offer a sacrifice ac-
cording to that which is said in
the law of the Lord, A pair
of turtle-doves, or two young
pigeons.
25 And behold, there was a
man in Jerusalem, whose name
was Simeon ; and the same man
was just and devout, waiting for
the consolation of Israel : and the
Holy Ghost was upon him.
26 And it was revealed unto
him by the Holy Ghost, that he
should not see death, before he
had seen the Lord's Christ.
27 And he came by the Spirit
into the temple ; and when the
parents brought in the child
GREEK TEXT.
Kara TOV vofjiov Maxrecas, avrj-
yayov O.VTOV etp '/e/jocroAujua,
TrapacTTTJo-at ra> Kvp'up, 23 /ca#a>y
yiypaitTai ev vop.cftl^vpiov, On
TTO.V apcrev Siavolyov firjTpav
a-yiov TW Kvpico KX-rjdr/o-eTai'
24 /cat TOV Sovvat 6v<jiav Kara
TO elprifievov ev vofita Kvpiov,
Zevyos Tpvyovcav T) Suo veocrcrovs
25 Kai ISov, r/v avOponros eV
a> oi/0/j.a 2vfJ.ecav,
/cat 6 avdcoTTOs OVTO? SIKIUOS /cat
evXajSrjf, Trpocro'eypu.evos Trapa-
KXrjo'iv TOV 'Icrpar/X, /cat JIvev/j.a
"A 9 >>>/ 9fi v 7
A.yiov r/v eir O.VTOV /cat r/v
avTcS Kexprjfjia.Tio-fJi.evov VTTO TOV
JIvevfj.tx.Tos TOV 'Ayiov, fJt.r) \8eiv
davaTOv Trplv rj 'idrj TOV Xpi&TOV
Kvplov. 27 JKai rjXdev ev TCJ>
Uvevfj.aTL els TO lepov /cat ev
T& eltrayayelv TOVS yovels TO
-rraiSiov 'Ir/crovv, TOV Trot^crat
REVISED VERSION.
the law of Moses were accora-
plished, they 'brought him up
to Jerusalem, to present him to
the Lord ; (as it is written in 23
the law of the Lord, Every
male, 'that is the first-born,
shall be called holy to the
Lord ;) and to offer a sacrifice 24
according to that which is said
in the law of the Lord, A pair
of turtle-doves, or two young
pigeons. And behold, there 25
was a man in Jerusalem, whose
name was Simeon ; and "this
man was "righteous and devout,
waiting for the consolation of
Israel ; and the Holy Spirit
was on him. And w it had been 26
revealed to him by the Holy
Spirit, that he should not see
death, before he had seen the
Lord's ^Anointed. And he came 27
by the Spirit into the temple ;
and when the parents brought
in the child Jesus, to jo for
E. V. followed the Complutensian reading avrjjs. This is no
good reason to question the correctness of the Textus Eeceptus
(Bagster's). Knincel notices avrijs thus : " Lectio haud dubie
originam suam debet superstitione grammatici, nescio cujus ? qui
non intelligebat, quomodo Evangelists Ohristo tribueret posset
impnritatem, neque secum reputabat, esse h. 1. sermonem de
impuritate externa, non vero morali. Itaque lectio avrcov omni-
no vera et genuina esse videtur. X
" brought up ; " avrjyayov. Wesley, Scholefield, Angus,
Thorn., " took up ; " Wakef., " carried up." Bob. (in verbo),
" to lead, or bring up, from a lower to a higher place. Com-
pare Matt. 4 : 1. Luke 4 : 5. 'Bom. 10 : 7." De Wette,
"brachten hinauf." See v. 42, "they went up," av
' " that is the first-born ; " itav agaev SiavoTyov
M., Kend. The thought of the text is presented by this euphe-
mism. Compare Num. 3 : 12 ; 8 : 17 ; 18 : 15. X> S. Fr., " que
male premier ne sera appele saint," etc. "~If 'the phraseology of
the E. 'V. is retained, then a supplement will be necessaiy, thus j
"every male that first opened," etc. (asTyndale), otherwise we
fail in exactness. As an alternative rendering, " every first-born
male." So Norton, and the margin of the Genevan.
"this man;" 6 avfycojeos ovrot. Thorn., Wesley, Scarletti
>v: .,., r ',,.
;_<..t '.'./$ t :.-.! J ! l<L.i-. :]{<': .' , : ,7 :;:.>' .., . ( .- .. ^ ,'t
/? : ''' l> .'.'.-.>..' t'-'Ji .' v -;-.. ( ,
,' } ,?':'"/ -I.'/'/.
Sharpe, Genevan. S. Fr., " cet homme ; " De Wette, " dieser \
Mann." . :
T " righteous ; " Sixutoe. Thorn., Dick., Wakef. The more I
extended signification of this word is deemed appropriate here, i
It applies to all the duties included in " the commandments and ;
ordinances of the Lord." Compare ch. 1 : 6, where this word is j
rendered " righteous " in the E. T.
w " it had been revealed ; " %v Kex^rjft.ctria/tevov. Wesley, \
Norton, Camp., Penn, Kend., M., Thorn. The pluperfect here
employed by Eras., Vulg., Beza, Schott, Wakef., S. Fr., Ibcr.
1 "Anointed;" tov Xqurtbv. With the exception of a few
eases, where this word is anarthrous in the Evangelists, it is not a
proper name but an appellative. I quote the following note
which was inserted in the Eevision of Mark published by the
Am. Bible Union. " This word here (Mark 8 : 29) is evidently
an appellative, like the Hebrew niaart.^% should, therefore, be
translated, not transferred. This is its use generally in the
Evangelists. In the Epistles, on the contrary, it is generally a
proper name. To substitute the Hebrew "Messiah " for " Christ,"
is to introduce a less familiar word, without affording the reader
any light from etymology. Bob., " the Anointed ; " Bretsch.,
" unctus a Deo." See Ps. 2 : 2, in-naa (E. V.), " his Anointed ; "
Sept., ToC XQiorov aii-cov. Acts 10 : 38, Iriaovv TOV cato No.'
cas %qiov KVTOV o 0cos Uvcvfiari 'Ayi<$ v.cu Svvdfiet,
P. -
' it-' -
-i v:o -.
J
f
"V "
^
y^i a*
THE wOSPBL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. II.
21
KING JAMES' VERSION.
Jesus, to do for him after the
custom of the law,
28 Then took he him up in his
arms, and blessed God, and said,
29 Lord, now lettest thou thy
servant depart in. peace, accord-
ing to thy word :
30 For mine eyes hare seen thy
salvation,
31 Which thou hast prepared
before the face of all people ;
32 A light to lighten the Gen-
tiles, and the glory of thy people
Israel.
33 And Joseph and his mother
marvelled at those things which
were spoken of him.
34 And Simeon blessed them,
and said unto Mary his mother,
Behold, this child is set for the
fall and rising again of many in
Israel ; and for a sign which shall
be spoken against ;
35 (Yea, a sword shall pierce
through thy own soul also ;) that
the thoughts of many hearts may
be revealed.
36 And there was one Anna,
a prophetess, the daughter of
Phanuel, of the tribe of Aser :
she was of a great age, and had
GREEK TEXT.
avTovs KO.TO. TO eidio~/J.ei>ov TOV
i \ ~ 28 ^ ' ^
vofi-ov Trept avrov, /cat O.VTOS
eSe^aTO O.VTO els ray ay/caAa?
avTOv, /cat evXoyrjo-e TOV Oeov,
/cat et7re,'S 29 Nvv cwroAuet? TOV
SovXov <TOV, cJeoTrora, /cara TO
* * / 3 > / 30 p/ f^
pr)fjt.a crov, ev eiprjvr}' on eioov
ol bfydaXfJLoi fj.ov TO acoTiqptov
o~ov, 31 o Tjrot/mcra? /caret irpocrca-
7TOV 7TO.VTCOV TCOV XdWV 32 (fr>S
elf a.TTOK.6.Xvfyiv eOvcav, /cat $oj;av
Xaov O-QV 'Io-par/X. 33 KOLL rjv
'Icoo~r/<j) /cat 77 ftf)TT)p avTov Ocw-
jJui^ovTes eVt Tols XaXovfj.evois
Trepi avrov. 34 /cat ev\6yr)o-ev
avTovf vfj.ecov, /cat ehre jrpos
Mapia/j, Trjv p,7jTfpa O.VTOV, I8ov,
OVTOS K61TCU el? TTTUXTLV KCU O.VO.-
o-Tacriv iroXXcov ev TO> 'IcrparjX,
/cat elf trrj/jielov avTiXeyo/jievov-
\ -nv ~. \ i \
i crov oe avnj? rr]v YV^TJ
OTTCO? ai>
a.7TOKa\v(f)&oj(ni' e/c TroXXaiv Kap-
Sicav 5taAoytcr/x.o/.
36 Kcu i)v "Avva.
e'/c
]p' avrrj irpo^e^rjKVia ev
REVISED VERSIOIf.
him ^according to the custom
of the law, then he "took him 28
in his arms, and blessed God,
and said, Lord, now lettest thou 29
thy servant depart in peace,
according to thy word: for so
mine eyes have seen thy salva-
tion, which thou hast prepared 31
before the face of all people ;
a light a to enlighten *the na- 32
tions and "the glory of thy
people Israel. And Joseph 33
and his mother a were wonder-
ing at 'the things spoken 'con-
cerning him. And Simeon 34
blessed them, and said to Mary
his mother, Behold, this child
is set for the fall and g rising
of many in Israel ; and for
a sign which will be spoken
against ; (yea, a sword h will 35
pierce thine own soul also;) that
the thoughts of many hearts may
berevealed. And there was one ll1 ' 36
Anna, a prophetess, 'daughter
of Phanuel, of the tribe .of
Asher ; she was 'far advanced
y "according 1 to;" y.ata. (cum accus) "After," in the sense
of " in conformity with," is obsolete. So Penn, Kend., Thorn.,
"Wakef., Scarlett, M., Thelwall.
1 " took ; " i-SQaro. There is nothing in the text or the
exigentia loci to demand '"up" as a qualifying term with the
verb. It is dropped by Penn, Norton, Thel., M., Dick., Wakef.,
Sharpe, Camp. The word was taken from Tyndale.
* " to .enlighten ; " alg aKoxdlvyiv. Kend., Norton, Thorn.,
Wakef., Scarlett, Angus.
b " the nations ; " e&vtov. Kend., Norton, M., Angus, Thorn.,
Scarlett, Camp. S. Fr., " des nations ; " De Wette, " (fur) die
Volker." As the noun is anarthrous, the article is italicized.
' " the glory ; " 6ai>. See last note.
d " were wondering ; " qvd-avfta&vrns. Thorn., "Wakefield,
Sharpe, M. So S. Fr., " etaieiit dans 1'admiration." " To
marvel " is obsolete.
"the things spoken;" rots Acdov/eevots. Thorn., Sharpe,
G. and A. Camp. The participial construction is concise and
exact.
f " concerning him ; " ite^l avrov. Norton, Thorn., Scarlett,
Penn, Camp. " Of him " is ambiguous, as in scriptural phrase-
ology it is sometimes equivalent to " by him." See (B. V.)
Eph. 5 : 12. Compare 1 Kings 11 : 11. 2 Chron. 11 : 4.
s " rising ; " avnaraaiv. Scholefield, Kendrick, Norton, M.,
Angus, Sharpe, Penn. If " again " is employed here, it makea
the rising refer to the same persons who have fallet Besides
this, it is inaccurate.
h " will pierce ; " Sielsvosrai. Literally, " will go through,"
that is, " pierce." Hence " through " should not be added to
" pierce." Bob. (in Sifyy.ofiat), " to go, or come through, to pass
through." Tyndale and Cranmer, " shall pierce."
hl > " One " is italicised, as a supplement.
' " daughter ; " &vyar>^. As the noun is anarthrous, this
rendering harmonizes with the text. So Norton, Camp. The
rendering of Wakefield, Thomson, and M. is " a daughter." No
article is employed by De Wette, S. Fr., Iber., Diodati, Ital.,
Danish.
' " far advanced in years ; "
;<t ran
^ i
22
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. II.
KING JAMES' VERSIOX.
lived with an husband seven years
from her virginity ;
37 And she was a widow of
about fourscore and four years,
which departed not from the
temple, but served God with fast-
ings and prayers night and day.
38 And she coming in that
instant, gave thanks likewise
unto the Lord, and spake of
him to all them that looked for
redemption in Jerusalem.
39 And when they had per-
formed all things according to
the law of the Lord, they re-
turned into Galilee, to their own
city Nazareth.
40 And the child grew, and
waxed strong in spirit, filled Avith
wisdom; and the grace of God
was upon him.
41 Now his parents went to
Jerusalem every year at the feast
of the passover.
42 And when he was twelve
years old, they went up to Jeru-
salem after the custom of the
feast.
43 And when they had fulfilled
the days, as they returned, the
child Jesus tarried behind in
GREEK TEXT.
TroAAa??,
ftera avdpos eVra aTro r??? Trap-
devias avrrjs' /cat avTrj \fjpa
co? e'rcoz' oyoorjKOVTaT<T(rdpa>v, rj
OVK a^tVraro aTro TOV iepov,
vrjcrTelais /cat Serjcreo-i Xarpev-
ovcra vvKra /cat rjfjilpav 3S /cat
ayr?? avrfj rrj a>pa e'Trtcrracra
di>dcofj.oXoyeiTO rca Kvp'iw, /cat
eAaAet irep\ avrov 7ra<ri TOLS
Trpoo'Se^o/jifi'OLf XvTpaxri.i> eV '/e-
povo~aXrj/jL. d9 JTat a>? e're'Aecrai'
airavra. ra /cara roi' VO^JLOV Kv-
plQV, VTTf.CTTp^a.V 1? T1J2S PotXi-
Xatav, et? r^z/ TroXiv avrcov Na-
5* / 40 rrrV P\ \ c\ r
(,apeT. J. o oe Tratotoz/
/cat e'/cparatouro TrveJ/iart,
pov/j.ei>oi> o~o<pias' /cat ^apts Oeov
TJV e/r avTOi
1 JTat eTropevovTO ol yoz/et?
avTov /car' ero? ets-
42
r eopr TOV Trcr^a. /cat
ore e'yeVero eVojj/ 5co5e/ca, a^a-
vTOiv avrSiv el? 'lepocroXv/JLO.
\ \ )//, J ~ 3 ^
Kara TO eo'oy r?;? eoprj^?, /cat
reAetcocrai/rcoz/ ra? rj/meas, i> T
'Ir)(rovs o Trals ev 'Iepov<TaXr//j.-
REVISED VERSION.
in years, having lived with a
husband seven years from her
virginity ; and she was a widow 31
of about "eighty-four years, who
departed not from the temple,
but served God with fastings
and prayer night and day.
And she 'standing by "'at that 38
very time, also praised the
Lord, and spoke of him to all
who were looking for redemp-
tion in Jerusalem. And when 39
they had performed all things
according to the law of the
Lord, they returned into Gali-
lee, "into their own city Naza-
reth. And the child grew, and 40
"became strong in spirit, and
the grace of God was on him,
Now his parents went to Jeru- 11
salem every year, at the feast
of the passover. And when he 42
was twelve years old, they went
up to Jerusalem ^according to
the custom of the feast. And 43
when they 'had completed the
days, as they returned, the
child Jesus 'remained behind
Wesley, Thorn., Penn, " far advanced in days." See cb. 1
note. This phrass is uniformly rendered in this revision.
fiefirjxvra sv r/fiepais noU.als is, by hypallage, for not-v nq
y.vTa ev r;[ie<>ais. Bloomf.
k " eighty-four." The antiquated phraseology of the E. V.,
" score " and " scores," should be exchanged in all cases for
language, which is now in nse.
i " standing by ; " Ixio-caioa.. Scholefield, " standing near."
Bob. (in verbo), "to stand upon, near, or by." So he renders
this passage, " to stand by, or near." Bretsch. (in verbo), " adst.o,
prcesto, adsum alicui." As an alternative rendering, " coming
up." So Penn. This signification has been more generally
adopted by translators. Scholefield remarks: "Tlie com. tr.
apparently contradicts the statement of the preceding verse, that
she departed not from the temple."
m " at that very time ; " avrrj T g cXpq. Dick., M., Pechy
(note on Angus). Schott and Mont, " hac ipsS, bora ; " S. Pr.,
" en cette meme heure." Alternative rendering, " at that very
hour." So Angus.
" " into;" ets. This preposition .is properly rendered by
" into," as it is in the preceding member of the sentence, sis Tip
rah).aim>, "into Galilee." So Tyndale (original edition of
1526), "Wiclif, Eheims. Tulgate, "in Galilieam in civitateni."
So Eras., Mont, Beza, " in Galiteam in urbem ; " Castal., " in
Galilasam in oppidum ; " Diodati, " in Galilea, in Nazaret, lor
citta."
" became strong ; " E-^araiovro. Kend., Norton, Thorn.,
Scarlett, M. " Waxed" is obsolete.
f " according to ; " V.KIU. (cum accus.) Wakefield, Scarlett,
Penn, Camp., Kend., Norton, II.
' " had completed ; " rdmcoadviiov. Penn, M., Robinson (m
verbo). As an alternative rendering, " had finished."
r "remained behind;" vae/isu>.sv. Kendrick, M. Eheims.
Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, Castalio, Schott, " remansit. Syriac,
(remansit). Heb. N. T., in; 1 ;
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. II.
23
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
Jerusalem; and Joseph and his
mother knew not of it.
44 But they, supposing him to
have been in the company, -went
a clay's journey ; and they sought
him among their kinsfolk and
acquaintance.
45 And when they found him
not, they turned back again to
Jerusalem, seeking him. .
46 And it came to pass, that
after three days they found him
in the temple, sitting in the midst
of the doctors, both hearing them,
and asking them questions.
47 And all that heard him were
astonished at his understanding
and answers.
48 And when they saw him,
they were amazed : and his mother
said unto him, Son, why hast thou
thus dealt with us? behold, thy
father and I have sought thce
sorrowing.
49 And he said unto them,
How is it that ye sought me?
wist ye not that I must be about
my Father's business ?
50 And they understood not
GREEK TEXT.
/cat OVK eyvca
44
/ecu ??
rv \
Trip O.VTOV. voiu<ra.vT$ oe
iv rrj crvvoSla elvai, -fjXOov
oSov, Kal ave^row av-
roif arvyyt.vf.cri KOU, ei> rots
45 /cat fuj evpovres
fls 'Iepov<ra-
4G Kai
TOV
avrov,
A?}/u,
eyevero
O.VTOV i/
ei> fJ.eo~co
avrov.
rpes, evpov
ra>
/cat
/cat
Kcu. I
avrav, /cat
aiirovs. 4< e^icrravTO Se iravrts
OL aKovovre? avrov, em rrj crvve-
airoKp'io~eo-iv O.VTOV.
es avrov,
/cat irpos avrov 17
avTOV etvre, TCKVOV, T'I e
ovTcas; ISov, 6 Trarrjp crov
oBwcojaevot ^rjrov/JLev ere.
f \ i \ rrt' ft
et?re Trpo? O.VTOVS, at on
fj.e; OVK ySeiTe on eV
roty TOV Trarpos JJ.QV del slvai
50 7x*" \ ' \ ^
jtiat avroi ov crvvrjKav
49
REVISED TEBSION.
in Jerusalem ; and Joseph and
his mother "knew it not. But 4.4
supposing him 'to be in the
company, "they went a day's
journey ; and they sought him
among "their "kindred and ac-
quaintances. And "not finding 45
him, ythey returned to Jerusa-
lem, seeking him. And it came 46
to pass, that after three days,
they found him in the temple,
sitting in the midst of 'the
teachers, both hearing them,
and asking them questions.
And all who Jiearcl him, were 47
astonished at his understand-
ing, and "his answers. And 48
when they saw him, they were
amazed ; and his mother said
to him, Child, why hast thou
thus dealt with us? behold,
thy father and I c were seeking
thee sorrowing. And he said 49
to them, a Why did ye seek me?
did ye not know that I must
be about my Father's business ?
And they understood not 'the 50
Keadrick, Wesley, Sharpe,
' " knew it not ; " ova ty
Scarlett, Penn, M.
1 " to be ; " elvat. Kench, Norton, "Wesley, Wakef., Penn,
G. and A. Camp. Vulgate, Mont., Eras., Beza, Castal., Scliott,
" esse."
" " they went ; " %?.&ov. The nominative is properly placed
immediately before the verb by Kend., Norton, Wesley, Sharpe,
Scarlett, Penn, Dick., M., Rheims.
T " their ; " -rofe The article here has the force of the posses-
sive pronoun (Kiihner, 244, 4. Crosby, Gr. Gram., f 482), and
should not be regarded as a supplement. So Keudrick, and
others. See ch. 1 : 6, note.
w " kindred ; " ovyysvfot. Kend., Penn, Angus, M. " Kins-
folk " is obsolete.
1 " not finding ; " fir/ svpovres. Kendrick, Norton, Wesley,
Wakef., Sharpe, Scarlett, Penn, Campbell, M. The participial
construction is exact and concise. So Vulg., Mont., Erasmus,
Diodati, Iber.
y " they returned ; " v7teoT$cy m ,. Kendrick, Campbell, M.,
Sharpe, Scarlett, Thelwall. " To turn back again" implies that
they "had turned back" before this time. See Eobinson, (in
verbo).
* " the teachers ; " i&v SiSaaxc&cov. Norton, Thom., Kend.,
Wakef., Scarlett, Sharpe, Penu, Dick., M. This word should be
uniformly renderd thus.
a " his ; " Trs. Norton, Penu, Thomson. Luther, " (seines
Verstandes und) seiner Antwort ; " De Wette, " (seine Einsicht
und) seine Antworten ; " S. Pr., " (de son intelligence et de) ses
reponses ; " Iber., " (su inteligoncia i de) respuestas ; " Diodati,
" (del suo senno, e delle) sue risposte." This article, like zfj
before awsaei, lias the force of a possessive. See v. 44, note.
" " Child ; " T&.VOV. Sharpe, Thel. S. Pr., " Mon enfant ; "
Belg., "Kind;" De Wette, "Kind." Bob. (c&.vov] : "As a
term of endearing address in the vocative, like Eng. " my child."
Bretsch. : " "Vocativus tixvov semper blandlentis est." Liddell :
"A child, whether son or daughter." There is no necessity for
departing from the literal signification of this word.
" were seeking ;" e^rovfisv. Kend. S. Pr., " cherchions ; "
Iber., " buscabamos ; " Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, Castal., " quce-
rebamus." The literal rendering of the imperfect, implying con-
tinued action, is exact. It accords well with our ttsus loquendi.
d " Why did ye seek me ?" Ti art itfttaxs fie; Kend., Thorn.,
Scarlett, Campbell, M. Castal., " Quorsum me qncerebatis ? "
De Wette, " Warum habt ihr mich gesucht ?" S. Pr., " Pour-
quoi me cherchiez vous ? " Iber., " Por que me buscabais ? "
" the word ; " TO fjfia.. Scarlett, M. Luther, das Wort ; "
THE GOSPEL AC C CEDING TO LUKE. CHAP. HI.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
the saying which he spake unto
them.
51 And he went down with
them, and came to Nazareth, and
was subject unto them : but his
mother kept all these sayings in
her heart.
52 And Jesus increased in wis-
dom and stature, and in favour
with God and man.
CHAP. III.
Now in the fifteenth year of
the reign of Tiberius Cesar, Pon-
tius Pilate being governor of
Judea, and Herod being tetrarch
of Galilee, and his brother Philip
tetrarch of Iturea and of the
region of Trachonitis, and Ly-
sanias the tetrarch of Abilene,
2 Annas and Caiaphas being
the high priests, the word of God
came unto John the son of Zacha-
rias in the wilderness.
3 And he came into all the
country about Jordan, preaching
the baptism of repentance, for the
remission of sins ;
4 As it is written in the book
TO pr]/j.a
51 Kal
GREEK TEXT.
o
eXd\r]crev avrois.
/care/!??; /tier' avrStv, Kal
rjXOev els Na^apeT' KOI rjv VTTO-
Tao-crofj.evos' avrois. Kal 17 (J-^Trjp
avrov Sierrjpei TTOLVTO. TO. prj/JLara
ravra ev rf) KapSla avTrjf. 62 Kal
'Irjcrovs irpoeKOTTTe cro(pia. Kal
rjXiKia, Kal xdpiTi -rrapa @e<p Kal
djsdpCOTTOl?.'
CHAP. III.
fret 8e TrevTeKaiSeKaTcp
Tt/Seplov KOL'L-
crapof, r/yefj.ovevovTOs Uovrlov
TTJS 'lovdaias, Kal
rrjs PaXiXaias
'ffpa>8ov, <PiXi7nrov Se TOV dSeX-
(pov avrov rerpapxpiivTOs
'Irovpaias Kal Tpax&v'iTiSos
pas, Kal Avaraviov TTJS 'AfiiX
2 eV dp^tepecov
eyeveTO prjfj.a
Oeov em 'Icodvvrjv TOV TOV ZOL-
Xapiov vlov tv rfj ep-^ftca- 3
-qX6ev els -jraa-xv TTJV
TOV 'lopSdvOV, Kt]pV(T(TO3V @d-
7rriar/j.a /jLeTavoia? elf d(pe(nv
4 toy yey/xxTrrca ev
Avva
REVISED VERSION.
word which he spoke to them.
And he went down with them 51
and came to Nazareth, and was
subject to them ; f and his
mother kept all these things in
her heart. And Jesus B ad- 52
vanced in wisdom and h agc,
and in favor with God and
man.
CHAP. III.
Now in the fifteenth year of 1
the reign of Tiberius Cesar,
Pontius Pilate being governor
of Judea, and Herod being
tetrarch of Galilee, and his
brother Philip tetrarch of Itu-
rea and of the region of Tra-
chonitis, and Lysanias tetrarch
of Abilene, Annas and Caia- 2
phas being high priests, the
word of God came to John, the
son of Zachariah, "in the desert.
And he came into all the couu- 3
try about b the Jordan, preach-
ing e the immersion of repent-
ance for the remission of sins ;
as it is written in the book of 4
Belg., " het woord ; " S. Fr., " la parole ; " Vulgate, Montanus,
" verbum." So (E. V.) Matt. 4 : 4 ; 12 : 36 ; 26 : 75 ; 27 : 14,
Mark 14 : 72. Luke 1 : 38 ; 2 : 29. Acts 10 : 37 ; 11 : 16.
As ffifca is sometimes used collectively (Rob., Lex.), I suggest
" words " as an alternative rendering. So Kendrick. Erasmus,
"verba."
f " and ; " xal. Norton, M., Thorn., Sharpe, Wakef., Dick.,
Campbell, Geneva. Vulg., Mont, Beza, " et ; " Belg., " ende ; "
Luther and De "Wette, " und ; " G. Fr. and S. Fr., " et ; " Iber.,
" I ; " Diodati and Ital., " e." There is no exigentia loci which
demands that xai should be rendered adversatively.
s "advanced;" n$oexonre. Kend., Norton, M., Thelwall,
Thorn., Penn, Dick. Heb. N. T., Js^si rrftrt. See Bob. (Lex.)
h " age ; " qLxia. Kend., Tyndale, Cranmer, Eheims, Wiclif,
M. Vulg., Eras., Castal,, Schott, " state ; " De Wette, "Alter."
Kuinosl: 'HLxla est atas ut Joh. 12 : 21', Heb, 11 : II, Epb.
4 : 13."
11 " in the desert ; " Iv -cfj Itf/ty. So (E. V.) Luke 1 : 80.
Matt. 24 : 26. John 6 : 31. Norton, Sharpe. In all cases,
"desert" should be substituted for "wilderness," as the latter
word is now used to indicate a wooded, uninhabited region. The
Hebrew ^yra, which is usually rendered fyqfios in the Sept.,
signifies a ^solitude, a waste region, sometimes open, uncultivated
country with few or no inhabitants, like the Spanish despoblado.
b " the Jordan ; " TOV 'logSavov. Norton, Thorn., Kendrick,
Camp., Sharpe, Penn, Thel. The article was improperly omitted
by Tyndale. In this he was followed by the early Eng. versions.
It is found in the Belg., Luther, De Wette, G. Fr. and S. Fr,
De Sacy, Iber., Span., Diodati, Ital., Heb. N. Test.
c " the immersion ; " /Scama/ia. Kend., A. Camp., M. (in
margin.) Luther and De Wette, "die Taufe;" Belg., "den
doop ; " Dan., " Daab." Bretsch. (in verlo) : " Immersio, sub-
mersio; in N. T. tantum de submersio sacra, quam patres baptis-
mitm dicunt." Hedericus (Lex.), "immersio, intinctio;" Schott
. T;), " immersionem." See note on the verb pcazria), v 7.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. III.
25
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
of the words of Esaias the prophet,
saying, The voice of one crying in
the wilderness, Prepare ye the
way of the Lord, make his paths
straight.
5 Every valley shall, be filled,
and every mountain and hill shall
be brought low ; and the crooked
shall be made straight, and the
rough ways shall be made smooth ;
6 And all flesh shall see the
salvation of God.
7 Then said he to the multitude
that came forth to be baptized of
him, generation of vipers, who
GREEK TEST.
(B Xoywv 'JEfcraLqv TQV -jrpo-
Trj eprijj.q>, '-Erotjuacrare
o8ov Kvpiov vdeias Trotetre ray
Tpifiovs avTov. 5 TraVa (pdpa-y^
TrXrjpcodrjcreTai, /cat irav opos
/cat /3oufoy TaTreii/cod^creTat- /cat
earai TO, cr/coXta ety ev9eiav } /cat
at rpa^etat ety 65ouy Ae/ay. 6 /cat
o^reTai Tracra o~ap TO crcoTrjpiov
TQV Oeov. 7 ' JEXeyev ovv roty
oevofj,vois cr^Aoty
vat WTT' aurov,
REVISED VERSION.
the words of Isaiah, the prophet,
saying, The voice of one cry-
ing in the desert, Prepare ye
the way of the Lord, make
his paths straight. Every val- 5
ley shall be filled, and every
mountain and hill a shall be
made low, and the crooked
e shall become straight, and f the
rough ways smooth ; and all 6
flesh shall see the salvation of
God. Then said he e to the 7
crowds that came forth h to be
immersed 'by him, 'Offspring
d " shall be made low." Kend., M., Liddell, " to make low."
So Bob. (in loco.) Vulgate, Montanus, " humiliabitur ; " Beza,
Castal., Sehott, " deprimetur."
* " shall become straight ; " earac. Kend., "Wakef., " wil!
become straight. M. Rob.,(m verbo) : "From the Heb. elva,
els -ci, like Heb. ^ nifi to be for any thing, i. e. to become any
thing ; Luke 3 : 5'. Comp. Isa.40 :4. Acts 13 : 47. Comp. Isa.
49 : 6, etc." Bretsch. : "Evenio, fio, elp.1 s'is 11, (ex hebraismo,
ft^rt seq. ]>) pro elfti, sum, fio aliquid.
1 " the rough ways." Kend., M. Kuinoel : " Post
subaudiendum est oSol, ut 6S6v post tv&elav. Opponitur sibi
invicem rgaxezai 6Sol et ^.siai, ut apud Latinos asper et Itevis,
arduus et planus." 'As " ways" is not expressed in the text, it
should be italicized. " Shall be made" is an unnecessary supple-
ment, which has been dropped by Kend., M., Wesley, Thomson,
Campbell, "Wakef., Angus.
6 "-"to the crowds ; " o^lois. Norton, Sharpe. Vulg., Eras.,
" ad turbas ; " Mont., " turbis ; " Belg., " tot de schaaren ; " De
Wette, " zu dem Volke ; " Dan., ".til Folket ; " G. Fr., " a la
ibule." Liddell (in verbo} : "A throng of people, an irregular
crowd." A special sense of this word is populace, as dis-
tinguished from Srjfcos, "people." It is uniformly rendered
" crowd " in this revision. Hence it is not confounded with
" multitude " (n)>fj&og) , or " people " (Sfj/xog and laos) . Bretsch. :
" Turba hominum, qui aliquo in loco congregati sunt." " The
verb b^Uut signifies " to disturb by a mob," Liddell. Hedericus :
" Turba, multitude hominum, multi simul, ut exercitus, populus,
plebs, wlgus." Syr., }1iW
k " to be immersed ; " /Sajmot^at. Kend., Scarlett, A. Camp-
bell. Ital., " per essere immersa ; " Iber., " para ser sumergidas ; "
Belg., " gedoopt te worden ; " Luther, " taufen." So De Wette.
Sehott, " (ut per eum) immergeretur ; " Dan., " for at dobes."
The reasons for translating rather than transferring this word, I
have stated in the Eevision of Mark, as follows :
" 1. Classic usage. In all instances where an examination has
been made by competent scholars, who were not biased by a
predilection for a creed, the result has been uniformly in favor of
immerse, dip, dip into; and secondarily, drown, sink, overwhelm,
etc. In the process of the scrutiny, it has been settled, that there
is no difference, as to signification, between /Sdxrca and pumi^co.
The latter is merely a later farm of the verb.
" 2. The use of the word and its derivates in the Septuagint
and N. Test., and by the early Greek ecclesiastical writers com-
monly termed " the Fathers," coincides with that of the Classics.
" 3. The very general agreement of Lexicographers, such as
Scapula, Stephens, Suicer, Schrevellius, Hedericus, Greenfield,
Bretsehneider. Even Eobinson though he hazards an opinion
in a note, that " the scarcity of water in certain cases render
it probable that affusion was the act," yet, so far as philology
is concerned, gives his testimony in harmony with other Lexico-
graphers.
" The word, in a large number of versions, has been rendered
by words equivalent to immerse.
" 5. The most distinguished Reformers, such as Luther, Calvin,
Beza, Melancthon, Tyndale, have expressed their unhesitating
belief in favor of the above definition. Many distinguished
scholars, whose denominational connections would naturally have
led to another view, take the position of the Reformers. Among
these may be named Witsius, L'Enfant, Piscator, Zanchius, Abp.
Seeker, Mastricht, Marloratus, Stackhouse, Burkitt, J. Wesley,
Bp. Taylor, Grotius, Castalio, Lampe, Limborch, Vossias, Abp.
Usher, Geo. Campbell, and Macknight.
' 6. The uniform practice of the Greek Church, in all its
branches, from the earliest period to the present time.
" The derivates of this verb, paitnatia, etc., should be rendered
in harmony with its signification."
Throughout this revision, the translation of this word, and
those derived from it, is uniform.
1 " by ; " vrf. Norton, Kend., Angus, Thomson, Wakefield,
Scarlett, Sharpe, Penn, Dick., G. and A. Camp., M. " Of," in
the sense of " by," is obsolete.
" Ofispring ; " rswrjftaitt. Sharpe, Angus, M. Geneva,
' oflsprings." Rob. (in verbo.) Bretsch. (in loco), " progenies
viperina;" Greenf. (Lex.), "offspring;" Eras., Beza, Castalio,
26
THE GOSPEL ACCOEDING TO LUKE. CHAP. III.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
hath warned you to flee from the
wrath to come ?
8 Bring forth therefore fruits
worthy of repentance, and begin
not to say within yourselves, We
have Abraham to our father : for
I say unto you, That G-od is able
of these stones to raise up children
unto Abraham.
9 And now also the axe is laid
unto the root of the trees : every
tree, therefore, which bringeth not
forth good fruit, is hewn down,
and cast into the fire.
10 And the people asked him,
saying, What shall we do then ?
11 He answereth and saith
unto them, He that hath two
coats, let him impart to him that
hath none ; and he that hath meat,
let him do likewise.
12 Then came also publicans
to be baptized, and said unto him,
Master, what shall we do ?
13 And he said unto them,
Exact no more than that which
is appointed you.
GREEK TEXT.
va>v
s; 8 TTOL-
7?(rare oiiv Kapirovs aiovs TTJ?
fj.Tai>oias' KCU firj ap^r/a-de Xe-
yii> ei> eavTOL?, Harepa
TOV A^paafj.- Xe-yco -yap
on SvvaTcu o deos e'/c TWV Xi9cav
TOVTCOV eyeipat TCKVO. rq> 'AfBpa-
' 9 3f< & S*^ \ < J J-/ \
afji. r/dr) de /cat TJ agivrj irpos
TTJV pitfLv TWV SevSpcov /ceirar
irav oitv Sei>Spoi> fj/rj TTOIOVV /cap-
7TOV KaXoV KK07TTeTai KOI ty
Trvp /SaAAerat.
7-7- \ s / > \ f
Jvai fTrr/pcoTcov OVTOV 01
, XeyovTts, TL ofiv Troirjcro-
11 ,' ATTOKpideis Se Xeyei
auro?y, '0 e^cov Svo Dramas fj.e-
TadoTco rw /j.r/ e^ovTf KOU 6
6)(a)i> ftpca/jLara O/JLOLCOS Troieirco.
12 'HXdov 8e KOLL reXcovai /3a-
TTTicrdrjvai, KCU elrrov Trpos O.VTOV,
In
ri
e'nre
8e enre Trpo? avrovs,
trXeov Trapa TO Sia.TeTa.-yfj.evov
REVISED VERSION.
of vipers, k who warned you to
flee from 'the coming wrath?
Bring forth, therefore, "the 8
proper fruits of repentance, and
begin not to say within your-
selves, We have Abraham "for
our father ; for I say to you,
that God is able "from these
stones to raise up children rfor
Abraham. ''And even now the 9
axe is laid at the root of the
trees : every tree, therefore,
which bringeth not forth good
fruit, 'is cut down and cast
into the fire. And the crowds 10
asked Mm, saying, s What then
shall we do ? And he, 'answer- ll
ing, said to them, He that hath
two coats, let him impart to
him, that hath none : and he
that hath food, let him do "the
same. And 'tax-gatherers, also, 12
came to be immersed, and said
to him, Teacher, what shall we
do ? And he said to them, is
Exact no more than that which
Schott, " progenies ; " Kuincel (in Matt. 3 : 7), " viperarum pro-
genies." Syr., ]^ 7 . Heb. N. Test., h'jiv Diodati, " Proge-
nie." Hedericus (in verbo) : " Quod natum seu productum est
progenies." As an alternative rendering, " brood," which has
the same signification, and has been adopted by Norton, and
others.
k " who warned ; " res vnedstgsv. M., Sharpe. The aorist
has its usual force here.
i "the coming wrath?" if/s fesUovotjs oqyrjs; Kend., M.
De "Wette, " dem kommenden Zorne ? " Belg., " den toeltomenden
toorn?" Dan., "den tilkommende Vrede?" Vulg., Montanus,
Erasmus, " ventura ira ? " Ital., " ira ventura ? " This rendering
presents the thought with accuracy and conciseness.
m " the proper fruits of repentance ; " xagrtovs a&ovg trjs
fieravolas. Campbell renders a&ovs by "proper." Beza,
" fructus convenientes resipiscentias ; " De Sacy, " dignes fruits
de penitence ; " Ital., " frutti convenient! alia conversions." As
an alternative rendering, " fruits suitable to repentance." I prefer
the first rendering, as most perspicuous.
11 " for our father ; " mar^a. Norton, Thorn., Wakef., Scar-
lett, Sharpe, Camp., M., Angus. G. Fr., S. Fr., De Sacy, " pour
pere ; " Diodati and Ital., " per padre ; " Iber., " por padre."
" To," in constructions like the present, is obsolete.
" from ; " l. Norton, Kend., Scarlett, Peun.
P " for Abraham ; " rtj> 'Afaadfi. Thomson. Present usage
demands " for," rather than " unto," or " to."
1 " and even now ;" ySij Se xal. Kendrick, Eobinson (rjSti),
Norton.
r " is cut down ; " i-Moitrerai. Thorn., Penn, Kend., M.,
Thel. To " hew down " is no longer, applied to the act of felling
trees. Tet we find " cut down " used, in this sense, in (B. V.)
Deut. 7:5," cut down their groves," Sept., ra a).ar] avr<3v exxo-
yere. Deut. 20 : 20, " cut down," Sept., ey.v.6yus. So 2 Kings
19 : 23. Isa. 37 : 24. Job 14 : 7. Jer. 22 : 7.
" " What then ; " Ti ovv. This order of the text harmonizes
with our sws loquendi. So Norton, Kend., Wesley, Thomson,
Scarlett, Dick., Penn, Sharpe, M. Vulg., Eras., Castal., " Quid
ergo ; " Beza, Schott, " Quid igitur ; " Iber., " Que pues hare-
mos."
" answering ; " anox^c&sts. Kendrick, M. S. Fr., " repon-
dant."
11 " the same ; " Sftoitos. Thorn., Dick., Sharpe, Camp.
v " tax-gatherers ; " -teliovat. Norton, Sharpe, Scarlett, Wake-
field. The Latin " publican!," anglicized as " publicans," is far
less intelligible to common readers, than this rendering. The
word is translated uniformly, in this revision.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. III.
27
KINO JAMES' VERSION.
14 And the soldiers likewise
demanded of Mm, saying, And
what shall we do? And he said
unto them, Do violence to no man,
neither accuse any falsely ; and
be content with your wages,
15 And as the people were in
expectation, and all jnen mused
in their hearts of John, whether
he were the Christ, or not ;
16 John answered, saying unto
them all, I indeed baptize you
with water ; but one mightier
GREEK TEXT.
vfuv Trpacnrere.
de avrov /cat arTpa.Ttv6fj.evoi, Ae-
yovTes, Kai ^jueiy rl
Kou etTre irpos O.VTOVS,
Sia<reia~r)Te, /J.rj8e o
T6- KOL apKeicrde TOIS o^rccviois
VfJLOtV.
15 IIpo(r8oKK>vTos 8e TOV Xaov,
KOL SiaAoyt^byue'iwi/ TravTtov iv
TOUS Kapdiouf OLVTWV Trepl TOV
'looavvov, /j.r}7TOT avros e'lrj o
Ifi / > T
OUJTeKpLVaTO O J.CO-
ajracri, \eycov, ' Eym /j.ev
vdaTi /SaTTTL^o) V/J.5.S' epxeTai Se
REVISED VERSION.
is appointed "for you. And 14
x soldiers, ^also, "asked him, say-
ing, And what shall we do ?
And he said, 'Extort from no
one, neither accuse any falsely ;
and be content with your wages.
And as the people were in 15
expectation, and b all were rea-
soning in their hearts 'concern-
ing John, d whether he were not
"the Anointed, John 'answered 16
them all, saying, I, indeed, im-
merse you g in water, but one
* " for you ; " vpZv. The sentence here, is harsh unless a
preposition is placed before " you." The earlier Eng. translators
perceived this, and -wrote " unto you." So Tyndale, Cranmer,
Geneva. Alternative, " to you."
x " soldiers ; " arqarevoftBvoi. Thorn.. Campbell, Angus, M.
The article is improperly introduced in the E. V. No article in
De Wette, Iber. The S. Pr. renders the word indefinitely by
" des gens de guerre " (" some soldiers ") . Kuincel (in verbo) : " Id
quod ar^aTiaiTas constat enim participia ab IIebra;is, Gracis et
Latinis, loco substantivum poni solere." The opinion of some
commentators, that these were soldiers of Herod Antipas on their
march against the Arabs, does not rest on any solid basis.
Kuincal remarks : " Utrum autem per milites illos, fama Johannis
allectos, ejusque sermonibus perculsos, intelligendi sint Judaei, an
gentiles, sed, ut iy.movia^os ille Matt. 8 : 5, veri Dei cultores,
utrum milites Eomani, an Herodis Antipsc, vel Philippi, ut alii
volunt, definiri nequit."
? " also ; " KOI. Kend., Sharpe, "Wakef.
1 " asked ; " Im-^dmov. Norton, Kend., Camp., Thomson,
Wesley, Wakefield, Thelwall, Sharpe, Penn, Scarlett. S. Ft-.,
" interrogerent ; " Iber., ' " preguntaban ; " "Vulg., Mont, Eras-
mus, " interrogabant ; " Beza, Castal., Schott, " interrogarunt."
" Demand," according to present usage, is too strong, to be
employed as the equivalent of the verb. It was taken from
Tyndale 's version.
* " Extort from no one ; " MijS&va SiKaeltjTS. The primary
signification of this verb is "to shake violently" (Liddell), like
the Latin " concutio," by which it is properly rendered in the
Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, Castal, Schott. By a natural process
of thought, it was applied to acts of violence committed for the
purpose of extorting property, or plundering goods or money.
So De Wette, " Beraubet niemand." Iber., " No despojeis a
nadie. Norton, " Do not spoil any one." " To do violence " is
not in accordance with our idiom, though it was copied from
Tyndale by all the early Eng. translators." " Use no one with
violence" would be a proper substitute for this phrase. This
would, however, fail to bring out the proper force of the text.
Bloomf. : " It is best, as equivalent to, and, indeed, found in the
Latin concutio, " to extort money by dint of threats of vio-
lence."
b " all were reasoning ; " 8ta},oyt,ofieva>v natntov. Thorn.,
M., Wakef., Sharpe. The progressive form of the imperfect is
most accurate here. It has been adopted by Kend. and Thehvall.
As an alternative rendering, " were considering."
" " concerning ; " megl. Kend., M., Thorn., Sharpe, Camp.,
Penn, Thel. " Of," in the sense in which it is here employed, is
obsolete.
d " whether he were not ; " firjTtore efy. Sharpe, Penn,
Wesley, " whether he was not ; " S. Fr., ." si peut-etre il ne serait
point ; " Iber., " si el seria ; " G. Fr., " si Jean n'etait point ; "
Vulg., " ne forte ipse esset ; " De Wette, " ob er nicht seyn
moge ; " Be]g., " of hij niet mogelijk en ware." With this
optative (sty), av is understood. Hoog. (ftfaore.) Some trans-
lators have supposed that ufaore is here equivalent to e'inore.
* " the Anointed." See ch. 2 : 26, note.
f " answered them all, saying ; " aney.^ivaro aTtaai, ?,eycav
Kend., Sharpe, M., Thelwall. The order of the text has been
adopted by Campbell, Thorn., and Dick. The early Eng. trans-
lators followed the arrangement of Tyndale, which was derived
from the Vulgate. Belg., " antwoordde aau alien, zeggende.
8 " in water ; " vSan. G. Camp., Norton, A. Camp., M.,
Thorn., Wakef., Sharpe. Iber., " en aqua ; " De Sacy, " dans
I'eau ; " Span., " en aqua ; " Ital., " nell' acqua." The preposition
iv is obviously understood before vSan. It is expressed in the
parallels, Matt. 3 : 11, Mark 1 : 8, where we have iv vSan, ev
Hirevftati, 'Ayup. In the passage before us, the sentence closes
with ev JTi'Evfiari 'Ayica. Compare Mark 1 : 5, where iv rfj
'lofSavn noTafua is rendered in the E. V. by " in the river of
Jordan." If the verb /Secm'&a signifies " to immerse," which we
28
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. III.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
that I cometh, the latchet of
whose shoes I am not worthy to
unloose : he shall baptize you
with the Holy Ghost, and with
fire:
17 Whose fan is in his hand,
and he will thoroughly purge his
floor, and will gather the wheat
into his garner ; but the chaff he
will burn with fire unquenchable.
18 And many other things in
his exhortation preached he unto
the people.
GREEK TEXT.
o icrxypOTepo? fj.ov } ov OVK el/it
AOVat TOV IfJLavra T>V
v7ro8r)fj.aTG&v avroir avros u/zay
ev Hvevftan 'Ay tea /cat
1 OV TO TTTVOV l> Trj X i /"
avTov, /cat SiaKadapiei TTJV aXcava
avTQV' Kai crvvdf;t TOV alrov eiy
TTJV a.TTo6-f]K.t]V aVTOV, TO Se Ci)(V-
pov KaTcucavo-ei irvpl ao-/3ecrr<2>.
18 > -v v ^ 9 ^ f
TToAAa fjiev ovv /cat erepa irapa-
KaXcov evr-eXisTO TOV Xaov.
REVISED VERSION.
mightier than I cometh, - h the
strap of whose shoes I am not
worthy 'to loose, he will im-
merse you 'in the Holy Spirit,
and *m fire; whose fan .is in 17
his hand, and he 'will thorough-
ly cleanse his "thrashing-floor,
and gather the wheat into his
'granary ; but he will "burn up
the chaff J"with unquenchable
fire. And "exhorting T as to 18
many other things, 'he preached
the good news to the people.
believe is a fact, then, to use the phrase " immerse with water,' :
involves a violation of the idiom of our language.
h "the strap ;" lov 1/j.avra. Eob. (in verbd), "a thong, or
strap of leatlier ; " Liddell, " a leathern strap, or thong." Belg..
" den riem ; " G. Fr. and S. Fr., " la courroie ; " Iber., " la
correa ; " Vulg., Montanus, Beza, Eras., Castal., " corrigiam.' 1
" Latchet " is obsolete.
1 " to loose ; " J.vaat. Eob. (fata), " to loose, loosen, what is
fast bound." So this word is properly rendered in (B. V.) Matt.
16 : 19 ; 21 : 2. Mark 7 : 35. Luke 13 : 15, 16. John 11 : 44.
This phrase is quoted in Acts 13 : 25, and rendered (E. V.)
" whose shoes of his feet I am not worthy to loose ().voai}. The
English prefix " un " has a negative force, as in " unlike," " un-
discovered." Hence the impropriety of the verb " unloose."
1 " in ; " ev The preposition should have its ordinary force
here. So Mark 1 : 5, ev ity 'lo^Sdt'n aora/iri! is rendered
" in the river of Jordan." So Kend., G. and A. Camp., Sharpe,
Wakef., Thorn., M., Angus. Vulg., Montanus, " in ; " S. Fr.,
'' dans ; " Iber., " en; " Ital., " nello."
k "in." The preposition is omitted in the text merely from
the fact, that nvql is closely connected with b> Hvevpart 'Ayiq>.
As it is not expressed, I have italicised " in." So M. S. Fr.,
" dans le feu ; " Iber., " en fuego ; " Ital., " nel fuoco."
i ' will thoroughly cleanse ; " Siana&a^teT. Kend., Norton,
Camp., Scarlett, Wakef., Thorn., " thoroughly clean ; " Eob. (in
verbo), "to cleanse thoroughly;" Beza and Castal., "perpurga-
bit;" Schott, " expurgabit ; " S. Fr., " il nettoiera parfaite-
ment ; " Iberian, " limpiara perfectamente ; " Belgic, " zal
doorzuiveren. " " Purge," in the sense demanded here, is obso-
lescent.
m "thrashing-floor;" a.l<ava. Penn, Sharpe, Dick., Thorn.,
M., Eob. (in verbo.) Kuinrel : "Area, locus terendis frumentis
destinatus subdialis, sub dio enim triturare solebant Hebraei et
etiam nunc solent Orientales." The single word " floor " is too
indefinite.
n " granary ; " cnto&rixriv. Thomson, Dick., Scarlett, Sharpe,
Camp., Angus, M. Kuincel : " Granaria, ano&ffy.ai, erant caver-
Dte subterranese, ubi Orientis cives frumentum, vinum, oleum, etc.,
futuris usibns reservare solebant." The rendering by " barn " is
obviously inexact. " Garner " is now restricted to poetry.
" burn up ; " ttaraxavaei. Kendriek, Sharpy Wakef., M.
Vulg., Eras., Mont, " comburet ; " Beza, " exuret." Eob. (Lex.)
says that one of the uses of Kara, is " to stiengthen the notion
of the simple word, and it is then often simply intensive." He
defines y.aTay.aico " to burn down, to consume utterly, Engl. to
burn up." So (E. V.) parallel, Matt. 3 : 12, " he wiU burn up."
2 Pet. 3 : 10. Eev. 8:7.
P "with unquenchable fire;" miqi aopeora. This is the
natural arrangement of the sentence. It is that of Matt. 3 : 12,
where the text is the same. So Kend., Penn, Sharpe, Wakef.,
Wesley.
" exhorting ; " naqax.tt.liSv. Sharpe. As the act indicated
by 7ta.Qtt.xal.aiv was a part of the preaching, we can not with
propriety use a finite verb, and say, " he exhorted and preached."
Hence the participial construction is necessary. Vnlg., Mont.,
Beza, Erasmus, " exhortans ; " Castalio, " monens ; " Belg., " ver-
maanende."
p " as to." Our idiom will not allow the literal rendering
" exhorting many other things." We make persons and not
things the object of the verb to exhort. The paraphrastic ren-
dering of this verse, " with many other exhortations," as well as
that of Tyndale (followed by the E. V.) involves an unnecessary
departure from the construction of the text. Should it be
deemed better to render na^uxaicuv by the finite verb, the fol-
lowing is suggested as an alternative, "And he exhorted as to
many other things, when he preached," etc.
1 " he preached the good news ; " Evyyyeii^eto. Although
" announce " or " publish " good news would present the thought,
still " to preach " has become the leading term for the act of
publicly declaring religious truth. It is, therefore, deemed most
appropriate. The word is well understood, wherever our language
is spoken. But as svayyfJ.l&fiai has the sense of bringing
good news," the above rendering is deemed accurate. There
are some instances in the N. T. where the character of the
message or news is not kept in view by the writer, and then the
simple term preach, publish, show, or announce will be exact. As
an alternative rendering, " he preached the gospel." So Angus.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. III.
29
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
19 But Herod the tetrarch,
being reproved by him for He-
rodias his brother Philip's wife,
and for all the evils which Herod
had done,
20 Added yet this above all,
that he shut up John in prison.
21 Now when all the people
were baptized, it came to pass,
that Jesus also being baptized,
and praying, the heaven was
opened,
22 And the Holy Ghost de-
scended in a bodily shape like a
dove upon him, and a voice came
from heaven, which said, Thou
art my beloved Son ; in thee I
am well pleased.
23 And Jesus himself began to
be about thirty years of age,
GREEK TEXT.
19 ' Se 'JETpcoSrjs o
VTT avrov Trepl 'ffpca-
8id8os TTJS yvvaiKos
TOV a<5eA0ou avrov, /cat
TrdvTcav a>v eiroirjcre Trovrjpoov o
'Hp&BTjs, 20 7rpoo~edr]Ke /cat TOVTO
eVt Tracrt, /cat /care'/cAeicre TOV
'Icoavvrjv iv rfj 0uAa/C7j.
21 '-EyeWro Se ev TO> /3a.7TTio~-
Orfvcu airavTa TOV Xabv, /cat
'Irjcrov fiaTTTicrdlvTos /cat TT/JOO--
ev^ofjievov, dvea>)(drjvai TOV ov-
* 22 > - rt " v T7~ "
pavov, /cat /carap^rat TO llvzv-
/na TO A.yiov cra/zart/ccS ei<5et
dxret. 7Tpio~Tepav CTT avTov, /cat
(j)covr/i> e ovpavov -yeveo-Ocu, Ae-
yovo~av,
et woy fj.ov o ya-
eV crot 23
avTos r/v o 'Irjo-ov? axret CTCOV
EEVISED VERSION.
And Herod, the tetrarch, being 19
reproved by him 'concerning
Herodias, his brother's" wife,
and 'concerning all the evils
which Herod had done, added 20
"this, also, *to them all, that he
shut up John *in the prison.
'And it came to pass, when all 21
the people were immersed, that
Jesus, also, being immersed, and
praying, the heaven was open-
ed, and the Holy Spirit 'descend- 22
ed upon him in a bodily b form,
like a dove ; and a voice came
from heaven, saying, Thou art
my beloved Son ; in thee I am
well pleased. And e Jesus him- 23
self was about thirty years of
See Bob. and Bretsch. on this verb. " Tidings," in the sense of
" news," is now obsolete.
' " concerning ; " TtEQi. Eob. (Lex.), Kendrick, "Wesley, Penn.
" Of," here, is ambiguous.
" brother's." The Text. Recept. has fPd.ixxov before tov
aSelpov. Schott remarks on this word : " Post yvva.iy.os add.
vulgo (frikhtTtov (ex gloss.), omissimus cum Griesb. et al. auctori-
tate plurimorum codd. (decem unc.) verss. Armeu., Pers. ("Whe-
loc), Goth., Slav., Vulg., It., Sax." It is canceled by Griesbach,
Lachmann, Tisch., Knapp, Theile, and bracketed by Tittmann.
Not recognized by the Vulgate. There is no reasonable doubt
that it is an addition to the text.
T " concerning ; " negl. See note t.
" " this, also ; " v.al TOVTO. Kendrick, Scarlett, M., Angus.
Iber., " este tambien ; " Murdoclc, " added this, also."
* " to them all ; " eitl na.ai. Thorn., Angus, M. Iber., " a
todos [ellos]." The preposition might be rendered " besides,"
though without any especial advantage. When employed to mark
addition or accumulation on or to something already mentioned
or implied, it may be translated upon (on), unto (to), besides.
Rob. (Lex.) "Above" in the B. V. originated in the "super
omnia" of the Vulgate. S. Fr., "a toutes;" De Wette, "zu
allem."
" in the prison ; " ev rfj
Thelwall. Belg., " in de
gevangenisse ; " De "Wette, ins Gefangniss ; " Iberian, " en la
earcel." So Span. The article should not be omitted here, as
rjj tpv&axfj is definite. John was confined in the fortress of
Machajrus, well known to those, who were residents in Palestine.
Joseph., Antiq. 18 : 5, 2, Kal o \Ico&vvrie\ fi?i> vitotfilq rfi
'HgcoSov, Seofttos els TOV 3fa%aioovvTcc Tfefttpd'slg, TO moosiqrj-
ftsvov tpQOvqiov, Tavrrj XTIVVVTUI.
* "And it came to pass ; " Zyacero 8s. Thorn., Angus, Penn,
M. The order of the text is retained here. So Vulg., Eras.,
Beza, Montanus, Castal., Schott, Syr., Heb. N. Test., Luther, De
Wette, Belg., G. Fr. and S. Fr., De Sacy, Iber., Span., Diodati,
ItaL, Dan.
1 " descended upon him," etc. This is the natural arrange-
ment in English. It renders the sentence more perspicuous and
harmonious. So Penn, Dick., M., Camp. S. Fr., " descendit sur
lui comme une colombe."
" form ; " siSei. Penn, Scarlett, Wakef., Wesley, Dick., M.,
Camp. S. Fr., " forme."
c " Jesus himself was about thirty years of age, when he began
his ministry ; " CCVTOS %v 6 "Irjaovs coaei sTeav TOIOXOVTO. ao%6fts-
vos. Wesley. Critics have long been divided as to the proper
rendering of this passage. The translation in the E. V. was
taken almost word for word from Cranmer's version (1539), "And
Jesus himself began to be about thirty years of age." So the
Geneva (1557), "And Jesus himself began to be about thirty
years of age, being as men supposed," etc. Tyndale with better
judgment assuming that the object of the writer was simply to
state the age of the Redeemer at the era to which the narrative
had brought his history rendered the passage, " Jesus himself
was about thirty years of age when he beganne, being as men
supposed," etc. This view has been taken by many later inter-
preters, as Schott, " Et ipse Jesus erat fere triginta annos natus,
quum [publics agere\ inciperet; filius, ut putabatur, Josephi."
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. III.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
being (as was supposed) the son of
Joseph, which, was the son of Heli,
24 'Which was the son of Mat-
that, which was the son of Levi,
which was the. son of Melchi, which
was the son of Janna, which was
the son of Joseph,
25 Which was the son of Mat-
tathias, which was .the son of
Amos, which was the son of Naum,
which was the son of Esli, which
was the son of Nagge,
26 Which was the son of Maath,
which was the son of Mattathias,
which was the son of Semei, which
was the son of Juda.
27 Which was the son of Joan-
na, which was the son of Rhesa,
which was the son of Zorobabel,
which was the son of Salathiel,
which was the son of Neri,
28 Which was the son of Melchi,
which was the son of Addi, which
was the son of Cosam, which was
the son of Elmodam, wich was the
son of Er,
29 Which was the son of Jose,
GREEK TEXT.
24
dp)(6/j.evos, asv, o>y fvo-
, vlos 'Icaar/ip, TOV 'HXi,
TOV MarBar, TOV Aev'l, TOV
eXxi, TOV 'lavva, TOV 'lao-rjfy,
TOV Ma.TTCt.0LOV, TOV 'AfJ,K)S,
TOV Naovp,, TOV 'jEo~\l, TOV
Nay-yea, 2G TOV Maa.6, TOV
J\faTTa0lov, TOV JEJe/uet, TOV 'Ica-
o~r;(j) } TOV 'lovSa, z7 TOV 'Icaavva,
TOV 'Pyo-a, TOV Zopoj3d/3eX, TOV
SaXadirjX, TOV Nr/pl,
tj TOV 'ASSl, TOV
TOV
TOV
TOV '
TOV
TOV 'JEXietep, TOV
TOV
BEVISED VERSION.
age, when he began his ministry,
being, as was supposed, the son
of Joseph, d the son of Eli, the z'i
son of Mattath, the son of Levi,
the son of Malchi, the son of
Janna, the son of Joseph, the 25
son of Mattathiah, the son of
Amos, the son of Nahum, the
son of Hesli, the son of Naggai,
the son of Maath, the son of 2B
Mattathiah, the son of Shimei,
the son of Joseph, the son of
Judah, the son of Johauah, 27
the son of Resa, the son of
Zerubbabel, the son of Shealti-
el, the son of Neri, the son of 28
Malchi, the son of Addi, the
son of Kosam, the son of Al-
modam, the son of Er, the son 2C
of Jose, the son of Elieiier, the
son of Joram, the son of Mat-
Scarlett, "And Jesus was, when beginning his ministry, thirty
years of age, being," etc. Sharps, "And Jesus himself, when he
began, was about thirty years of age, being," etc. Norton, "And
Jesus was about thirty years old when he began his ministry ;
being," etc. Dick., " Jesus himself was about thirty years of age,
when he commenced [his ministry] ; being," etc. In this mode
of rendering the passage, ao%6(ievos has its usual force, being fol-
lowed by something understood as irjv Siaxovelav avrov, " his
ministry." De Wette adopts this mode of interpretation, though
he does not supply the ellipsis, " Jesus war ungefahr dreissig
Jahr alt, als er anfing, und war," etc. Very nearly so the S. Pr.,
" quand Jesus commenga, il etait age d'environ trente ans,
etant," etc. De Sacy, " Jesus avait environ trente ans, lorsqu'il
commen9a a exercer son ministere, etant," etc. Iber., " era Jesus
como de unos treinta anos, al empezar el [su ministerio]." The
theory adopted by some, that apxo/iwos is pleonastic and that
the passage may be rendered " Jesus was about thirty years of
age," is evidently opposed by the use of agga/twos employed by
Luke, Acts 1 : 22, h> itavri %(>6vcp, Iv ca clar/l&s y.al i^rjl&ev
ky vfias 6 Kvotos Irjoovs, ao^afievos ano TOV fSantiafiaTos
'Icoavvov sots Ttjs fyieoas, . r. L Compare Acts 10 : 37, TO
yevoftsvov {/ijfia xaffi o!.tjs Tfjs 'JovSaias, aogaftcvov anb Ttjs
ra.),il,a.iat, fitTa. TO /SdnTiafia S exqpviev 'I<aa.wris. The ren-
dering in the E. V. (Cranmer's) is objectionable, on the ground,
that, by retaining a.o%6/ievos (in its equivalent " beginning "), the
sentence is entirely obscure. If the thought is, that " Jesus was
about thirty years of age," then " beginning " can not be used in
conformity with the English idiom. On the whole, the rendering
given above is deemed preferable to either of those which have
been noticed. M. employs " to teach " as the supplement after
" began." Bob. renders the passage as follows, (aoxta) " and
Jesus himself was about thirty years old as he began, etc., his public
ministry, i. e., by his baptism and the descent of the Spirit upon
him ; so Euthym. Zig., agzo/tevos TfjS els tov ).aov avaSei'l-ecos
av-rov ffToi Ttjs SiSaaxatias." Several writers have endeavored
to adjust the difficulties presented in this passage by a reference
to Numb. 4 : 3, 47, where the service of the Levites is deter-
mined, as continuing from thirty years of age to fifty. The quota-
tion is not at all relevant, for Christ belonged to the tribe of
Judah, not to that of Levi. He was not a priest after the
order of Aaron ; of course, the laws of the priesthood under
the ancient dispensation were not applicable to him. See Heb.
7 : 14-19.
d " the son of Eli ; " TOV 'Hit. As vlbs is employed before
'Icoarjy, it is left to be supplied through all the other instances il;
which the name of a father occurs in this genealogical table.
The phrase " the son," therefore, is not italicized as a supplement
on the same principle, -which inserts in Eoman type the pronoun,
that is necessarily understood, in hundreds of instances, before a
verb. " Which was " (= who was) is superfluous in this table.
It has not been employed by Campbell, Thorn., Wesley, Scarlett,
Sharpe, Penn, Kendrick, M. The orthoga-aphy of the names
has been conformed to that of the 0. Test., as indicated in the
E. V. In a few instances, where a name does not appear in the
0. Test., it has been modified by a comparison with the Heb.
N. Test.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. III.
31
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
which was the son of Eliezer,
which was the son of Jorim, -which
was the son of Matthat, -which was
the son of Levi.
30 Which was the son of Sim-
eon, which was the son of Juda,
which was the son of Joseph, which
was the son of Jonan, which was
the son of Elialdm,
31 Which was the son of Melea,
which was the son of Menan, which
was the son of Mattatha, which was
the son of Nathan, which was the
son of David,
32 Which was the son of Jesse,
which was the son of Obed, which
was the son of Booz, which was
the son of Salmon, which was the
son of Naasson,
33 Which was the son of Amin-
adab, which was the son of Aram,
which was the son of Esrom, which
was the son of Phares, which was
the son of Juda,
34 Which was the son of Jacob,
which was the son of Isaac, which
was the son of Abraham, which
was the son of Thara, which was
the son of Nachor,
35 Which was the son of Sa-
ruch, which was the son of Ragau,
which was the son of Phalec, which
was the son of Heber, which was
the son of Sala,
36 Which was the son of Cai-
nan, which was the son of Ar-
phaxad, which was the son of Sem,
which was the son of Noe, which
was the son of Lamech,
37 Which was the son of Ma-
thusala, which was the son of
Enoch, which was the son of Jared,
which was the son of Maleleel,
which was the son of Cainan,
38 Which was the son of Enos,
which was the son of Seth, which
was the son of Adam, which was
the son of God.
GREEK TEXT.
TOV MaTOaT, TOV Atvi, 30 n
Sv/Jiecov, TOV 'Iov8a, TOV 'Ica-
crij(p } TOV 'Icovav, TOV 'JEXiaKei
31 TOV .MeAea, TOV Ma'iva.v, T>
MaTTaOa, TOV Nadav, TOV Aa-
ft\8, 32 TOV 'lecraai, TOV 'f2fir)0',
TOV
TOV Boo, TOV SaXfJLCOV,
Naao~o-a>v, 33 TOV 'A/JUvauu.^,
QV 'Apap., TOV 'JE&pafJL, TOV
l>apes, TOV 'lovSa, 3 * TOV 'Ia-
/co)/3, TOV 'laaaK, TOV 'Afipaafji,
TOV Odpa, TOV N^axoop, 3o TOV
TOV Payav, TOV <&d-
$ ->- .
Jspep, TOV SaXa.
'is 3
TOV Kaivav, TOV 'Ap<j)aao',
XK, TOV
36
TOV
TOV
3
TOV
Eva>\, TOV '
'lapeS, TOV Ma-
i., TOV Ka'ivav, 38
TOV
TOV
roO '.
ov
REVISED VERSION.
tath, the son of Levi, the son so
of Simeon, the son of Judah,
the son of Joseph, the son of
Jonan, the son of Eliakim, the 3]
son of Malia, the son of Hainan,
the son of Mattethah, the son
of Nathan, the son of David,
the son of Jesse, the son of 32
Obed, the son of Boaz, the son
of Salmon, the son of Nashon,
the son of Amminadab, the son 33
of Earn, the son of Hezron, the
son of Pharez, the son of Judah.
the son of Jacob, the son of 34
Isaac, the son of Abraham, the
son of Terah, the son of Nahor,
the son of Serug, the son of 35
Ben, the son of Peleg, the son
of Eber, the son of Shelah, the 36
son of Cainan, the son of Ar-
phaxad, the son of Shem, the
son of Noah, the son of Lamech,
the son of Methuselah, the son 37
of Enoch, the son of Jared, the
son of Mahalaleel, the son of
Cainaan, the son of Enos, the 38
sou of Seth, the son of Adam,
the son of God.
32
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IV.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
CHAP. IT.
Jesus being full of the
Holy Ghost, returned from Jor-
dan, and was led by the Spirit
into the wilderness,
2 Being forty days tempted of
the devil. And in those days
he did eat nothing : and when
they were ended, he afterward
hungered.
3 And the devil said unto him,
If thou be the Son of God, com-
mand this stone that it be made
bread.
4 And Jesus answered him,
GREEK TEXT.
CHAP. IV.
'IHSOYS &
'Ayiov TrXrjptjs inrecrTpetyev O.TTO
TOV TopSavov /cat r/yeTO eis rep
UveufJ-ari elf TTJV epr]fj.ov z ^fie-
pas T(ro-apaKOVTa, Tretpa^b/xei'Of
VTTO TOV Sia/3oXov. /cat OVK
tv TO.LS yfj.fpa.ts
/cat o'vi>T\O'6eicrciJv av-
TCOV, vcrrepov eVetVacre. 3 /cat
iTTv aura 6 ia/3oAoy, El v'ios
el TOV Oeov, dire TQJ Xi6q> TOVT-CO
"iva. yevTjrcu aproy. 4 jBTat care-
Kpldt] 'Ir]<rovs Trpos O.VTOV, Ae'yaw,
BEVISED VERSION.
CHAP. IV.
AND Jesus, "full of the Holy l
Spirit, returned from "the Jor-
dan, and was led by the Spirit
into the desert, being tried by 2
the devil d forty days. And e he
ate nothing in those days : and
when they were ended, f he was
afterwards hungry. And the 3
devil said to him, s lf thou art
the Son of God, command this
stone Ho become bread. And 4
Jesus answered him, saying, It
" full." The word " being " before " full " in the E. V. is a
supplement, though it is not italicized. It is a superfluous addi-
tion, and, as such, has been omitted by Kend., Norton, Thomson,
Wakef., Thel., Dick, Camp. The simple adjective corresponding
to " full," is employed in Vulg., Montanus, Eras., Beza, Castalio,
Schott, Luther, Belg., G. Fr. and S. Pr., Iber., Span., Diodati,
Ital, Danish.
" " the Jordan." See ch. 3 : 3, note.
c " being tried ; " Tcetfa&pcvos. Penn, " was tried ;" "Wake-
field, " under the trial." In the note on the parallel passage,
Mark 1 : 13, the -Reviser has said, in reference to this -word :
" Bob., to attempt, to assay, to tempt, to prove, to put to the
test. ' To try ' corresponds with nsiq&^co. ' Tempt ' is used
in some cases in the E. V., where from its present sense the
English reader is led to believe that God incites men to sin.
The word is now always understood to convey the idea of an
effort to lead one to violate the Divine law. There may be a
few instances, such as James 1 : 13, -where ' tempt ' would be
most appropriate, still, in general, I would use 'try' as most
exact. In all cases, the reader will (from the context) understand
the nature of the act or trial, without the danger of being misled."
In addition to this, I would observe that while " tempt," in its
ordinary sense, may present the thought in this passage with
accuracy, it is still desirable to follow the principle of uniformity
in rendering, as far as correctness or idiom will allow. There are
many cases, where " tempt " presents difficulties to the common
reader of no ordinary magnitude, especially if he recollects the
declaration James 1 : 13, 14, " Let no man say when he is
tempted, I am tempted of God : for God can not be tempted with
evil, neither tempteth he any man : But every man is tempted,
when he is drawn away of his own lust, and enticed." The terms
used in the German of Luther and De Wette (versucht), and in
the Danish (fristet), correspond with our word " try."
d " forty days." This arrangement harmonizes with the com-
mon, familiar, and therefore perspicuous, usage of the English.
So Penn. The punctuation of this passage in Bagster is incor-
rect. In his edition, a comma is placed after Tcatfa^ay.ovra,
so that the sentence stands thus, els T^V e^jftov fiftegas reaaagd-
KOVTCC, net^ofisvos *. r. L In this case, the rendering (in the
Greek order) would be, " being led by the Spirit into the desert
forty days, being tried," etc. The Elzevir, Stephens (third Edit.),
Erasmus, Mill, Trollope (N. Test.), Griesb., Schott, Knapp, Titt-
mann (Leipsic, 1831), Theile, Kuinoel, place the comma after
egtjftov.
e " he ate ; " epayev. Tyndale, Cranmer, Thomson, Wesley,
Wakef., Kend., Sharpe. M., Scarlett, Penn, Norton. " Did eat "
was first employed in the Geneva. " Did " is superfluous ; there
being no emphasis which requires its use.
f " he was afterwards hungry ; " Zoisqov Inetvaoe. M.,-Kend.,
Gray (note on Angus). The phraseology of the E. V. (taken
from Tyndale's " he afterwards hungered ") is obsolete.
E " If thou art ; " El el. Kendrick, M., Angus, Thomson,
Scarlett, Penn, "Webster (Bible with amendments of the language,
1833). The present usage of our language, in constructions like
this, agrees with that of the Greek in using the indicative mood
of the verb. In other words, a conditional action or state,
belonging to the present time, should be expressed, not by the
subjunctive, but by -the indicative. So the G. Fr. and S. Fr.,' " Si
tu es ; " De Sacy, " Si vous etes." The indicative is the appropri-
ate rendering in the Latin, as may be seen in the Tulg., Mont.,
Eras., Beza, Castal., and Schott.
h " to become ; " Iva. yivrpai. Thorn., Wakef., Scarlett, Penn,
G. and A. Camp., M., Norton. The infinitive here is employed
by later translators, as concise and in harmony with our present
usus loquendi. "To become" is obviously the proper significa-
tion of the verb, like the Latin " fio." So Vnlg., Eras., Beza
" fiat ; " Schott, " fieri." Kuhner, <| 329, Kern. 5. Bob., Lex.
(Sri, 1.3}
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING- TO LUKE. CHAP. IV.
33
KING JAMES' VERSION.
saying, It is written, That man
shall not live by bread alone, but
by every word of God.
5 And the devil, taking him
up into an high mountain, shewed
unto him all the kingdoms of the
world in a moment of time.
6 And the devil said unto him,
All this power will I give thee,
and the glory of them : for that is
delivered unto me, and to whom-
soever I will, I give it.
7 If thou therefore wilt worship
me, all shall be thine.
8 And Jesus answered and said
unto him, Get thee behind me,
Satan : for it is written, Thou
shalt worship the Lord thy God,
and him only shalt thou serve.
9 And he brought him to Jeru-
salem, and set him on a pinnacle of
the temple, and said unto him, If
GREEK TEXT.
Tiypa.TTTa.1, "OTL OVK eV apTtp
P.OVCJ) ffiaeTai 6 avdpamo?, aAA
em TrdvTi prjfiaTi Oeov. 5 Kal
ava.ya.ya>v avTov 6 StdfioXos els
opos v^nqXov eSei^ev aur^3 7rdo~as
ray fiatriXeiaf TIJ? OLKOVfjievrjs ev
crTiyfifj xpovov 6 Kal elirev OUTW
o StaftoXof, JSol Sacra) TTJV egov-
criav Tav-njv airao~av Kal TT/V
Sogav avTu>v OTL e/tot irapaSe-
SoTai, Kal q> eav deXco diScofit
>/7V9>\ /
avTrjV o~v ovv eav Trpoo'KVvrj-
crr/f evamtov fJLOV, eo~Tai crov
' 8 x^ ^ /i ^ ' ^
TravTa. ILai airoKpiueis avTa>
ehrev 6 'Irjcrovs, Yiraye 6m<rco
fj.ov, SaTava' yeypaiTTai yap,
IIpocrKVvrjo-eis Kvpiov TOV Oeov
crov, Kal avT(j> fJ-ova> XaTpevaets.
9 Kal rjyayev avTov elf 'lepov-
(raXrju, Kal ecrTTja-ev avTov em
TO TTTepvyiov TOV lepov, Kal e'arev
REVISED VERSION.
is written, 'Man shall not live
J by bread alone, but by every
word of God. And the devil, o
taking him up into a high
mountain, showed him all the
kingdoms of the world in a
moment of time. And the devil 6
said to him, All this 'authority
will I give thee, and the glory of
them : for it is delivered to me,
and to whomsoever I will, I
give it. If, 'then, thou wilt wor- 7
ship me, all shall be thine.
And Jesus answering, said to 8
him, "It is written, Thou shalt
worship the Lord thy God, and
him only shalt thou serve. And 9
he brought him to Jerusalem,
and set him on "the pinnacle of
the temple, and said to him,
1 " That " has been omitted on the ground that art is a mere
sign of quotation. Bob., Lex. (Sri.) It is dropped by Norton,
Kend., Angus, Thorn., Dick., Wakef., Scarlett, Sharpe, Camp.,
M. "On is not translated by Luther, De Wette, Iber.
1 " by bread ; " M aprqi. I have retained the rendering of
the B. V. with some hesitation. The usual force of rl fvith a
dative, " upon," or " on," seems to sanction this form " on bread "
" on every word." So Eob. (btl) quotes this passage, and adds, " to
live upon, i. e., to sustain or support life upon, quoted from Deut.
8 : 3, where Sept. for is i-pn, etc." We have the same idiom,
as we speak of " living on vegetables," " living on meat," etc. I
suggest " on " as an alternative rendering of inl before Spry and
nAtnl ^rjfian. So Thelwall.
k " authority ; " egovoiav. M., Dick. So (E. V.) Matt. 8:9;
21:23,24,27. Mark 1 : 22, 27 ; 11 : 28. Luke4 : 36 ; 7 : 8.
John 5 :-27. This word is properly distinguished from Svva/us,
" power," in 1 Cor. 15 : 24, naanv &$x>p> xai jta.oa.v ejovolav
xa.1 Svvaftiv, " all rule, and all authority, and power." 4vva-
uts properly signifies inherent ability, physical or intellectual. In
Homer it is almost always applied to strength of body, often in
later writers to force or strength of mind, to the power of things,
to military forces, as especially constituting the might of rulers.
'E^ovoia. (from %eari, it is allowed, it is in one's power, it is possi-
ble) signifies power over persons or things, rule, dominion, the legal
or moral right to do a thing, or to command it to be done. By
Jnetonomy, it is sometimes applied to the magistracy or rulers.
In a looser style of language, these words are sometimes used inter-
changeably. It is, however, desirable to keep their appropriate
significations distinct. See Liddell, Bretsch., Bob.
i " then ; " ovv. M., Angus. S. Fr., G. Fr., and De Sacy,
" done ; " Belg., " dan. ; " Diodati and Ital., " dunque ; " Dan.,
" nu " (now). This word is often used to denote " the mere
sequence of one clause upon another, thus marking transition or
continuation, then, now, thereupon." Bob. (in verbo.) Liddell.
Bretsch., " facit transitum, interdum potest verti : turn, porro."
Schott renders the word here by quod si, " if then."
m The words of the Text. Becept., Tnays oniaco /tov, 2V-
rava yag, are rejected as spurious by Griesbach, Tisch., Knapp,
Theile, Lachm., and bracketed by Tittmann. Kuincel : " Plures
optima^ note libri et versiones omittunt, nempe e Matt. I"V. 10,
in hunc locum translata sunt, unde ea ex ordine ejicienda esse
rectissime judicarunt Grotius, Millius, Bengelius, Griesbachius, et
alii." Schott says, "Ante yfyp. vulgo: vTtaye onlaco pov, aa-
rava (ex Matt. 4 : 10) omissimns cum Griesb. et al. auctoritate
codd. B. D. L. aliorumque minuss. verss. Pesch., Pers., Copt,
(memph.), Sahidic Arm., Arab, (vatic.), Goth., Yulg., It., Sax,
et patrum quorundam. Ib. Post yty(>. vulgo : yog delendum cum
Griesb., et al. proeeuntibus iisdem fere testibus, que illud : vnays
oarava. omittunt, aliisque (A. E. F. G. H. K. M. S. V.)" De
Wette, Wakef., Wesley, Penn, A. Camp., and Sharpe omit these
words in their versions.
n " on the pinnacle ; " fal TO mcqvyiov. Wakef., Penn, Sharpe.
Belg., " op de tinne ; " De Wette, " auf die Zinne ; " S. Fr., " sur
1'aile ; " Iber., " sobre el vuelo pequeno ; " Ital., " sulla sommite. 1 '
64:
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING- TO LUEE. CHAP. IV.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
thou be the Son of God, cast thy-
self down from hence.
10 For it is written, He shall
give his angels charge over thee,
to keep thee :
1 1 And in their hands they shall
bear thee up, lest at any time thou
dash thy foot against a stone.
12 And Jesus answering, said
unto him, It is said, Thou shalt
not tempt the Lord thy God.
13 And when the devil had
ended all the temptation, he de-
parted from him for a season.
14 And Jesus returned in the
power of the Spirit into Galilee :
and there went out a fame of him
through all the region round
about.
GREEK TEXT.
ayr<0, JSl o vlos ei TOV Oeov,
/3aAe aeavTov evTevffev KO.TCO'
10 yeV/ )a7r7 " at y&P> "On Tols ay-
yeXois O.VTOV IvTeXeiTai Trepl o~ov }
TOV 8ia.<pvXa.a.i ere- n /cat on
em xeipcov apovcr ere,
TTDOS Xidov TOV Tro8a
o-ov. 12 Kal aTToicpidels eltrev
ayr<> o 'Ir]o~ov? } ' On etprjTat,
OVK CKTreipacreis Kvpiov TOV
Oeov o-ov. 13 Kai cryj/reAecray
iravTo, ireipa.o-fj.ov o 8ia/3oXos
oareo-Tij air avTov a%pt Kcupov.
14 KAI inrea-Tpf^ev o 'Iijcrov?
iv TJJ 8vva.fj.ei TOV Uvevfj.a.TOs els
TTJV ra.XiXa.iav KOU
Kaff oXrjs TTJS "jrepi^copov
avTov. 15 /cat auroy
EEVJSBD VERSION.
"If thou art the Son of God, cast
thyself down' from hence ; p for 10
it is written, He shall .give
his angels charge 'concern-
ing thee, to keep thee; arid u
r on their hands they shall bear
thee up, 'lest thou dash thy foot
against a stone. And Jesus 12
answering, said to him, It is
said, Thou <shalt not try the
Lord, thy God. And the devil, 13
"having ended all the "trial,
departed from him for a season.
And Jesus returned in the power 14
of the Spirit into Galilee ; and
w a report 'concerning him
spread through ?the whole sur-
rounding region. And he taught is
The omission of the definite article 'in the B. V. (after Tyndale,)
is entirely incorrect. Bob. quotes these words, and says, "The
pinnacle of the temple, referring to the elevation of the middle
portion of the triple portico or colonnade along the southern
wall, which, at its eastern end, impended over the valley of the
Kedron." Josephus, Antiq. 15 : 11. 5, El TIS arf ay.gov tov
rmrrrjs reyovs afiyco aviTt&els fa /Sa&rj SioniEvot, axoroStvtav,
OVK E^iKov/tsi^s ftjs oyiBcos els dftsr^ov TOV PV&OV.
" " If thou art." See v. 3, note.
P A semicolon is placed after " hence," in conformity with the
punctuation of the Greek text. The connection of this sentence
with that which follows it, is too close for the use of the period.
The semicolon is used by Thorn., Dick, Wakef., Sharpe, G. and
A. Camp. So in the Latin of Beza, the semicolon follows " deor-
sum." Luther placed this point after " hinunter." S. EY, " d'ici
en bas ; car " Iber., " de aqui abajo ; porque " Diodati, " di
qui; perciocche ."
t " concerning thee ; " ne^l aov. Norton, Thomson, Wesley,
"Wakef., Scarlett, Penn, Campbell, Kend., Angus, M., Thelwall.
As an alternative, the colloquial form " of thee."
r " on their hands ; " inl %ixq6iv. Wakef., Penn, Sharpe, M.
The Hebrew preposition is signifies " on " in Ps. 91 : 12, from
which this quotation is made b^&3-is. Sept., Inl ZSIQCOV. The
inaccurate rendering " in their hands " was derived from the
Vulgate, " in manibus." So (E. V.) v. 9, " on (inl) a (the)
pinnacle." Matt. 5 : 15, 39 ; 10 : 34. Luke 1 : 65 ; 5 : 12, etc.
" lest ; " fifaore. Penn, Camp., M. In the usage of the
later Greek writers the adverb HOTS (ever, at any time) in this
word lost its force, so that /ufaors had the same signification as
/nj. So Luke 14 : 8. 2 Timo. 2 : 25. Septuagint, Gen. 24 : 5 ;
27 : 12. Compare Gr. and E. V., Matt. 7 : 6 ; 13 : 29 ; 15 : 32 ;
25 : 9; 27 : 64. Luke 12 : 58; 14 : 8. Acts 28 : 27. Heb.
3 : 12 ; 4:1. The phrase " lest at any time " was first employed
by Tyndale.
' " shalt not try ; " OVK cxneiadosis. Sharpe, Wakef., Thorn.
The noun " trial " is used by others. Camp., Dick., Norton,
" shalt not make trial of," etc. See v. 2, note. There does not
seem to be any Distinction made by the N. Test, writers between
3tei(>dco and xnei(>dfo. In this usage they have followed the
Sept., which uses either of these verbs as an equivalent for
nsq.
" " having ended ; " avvrefaaas. Wesley, Scarlett, Thelwall.
The participial construction is also employed by Kend., and M.
De Sacy, " ayant acheve ; " Iber., " habiendo acabado."
T " trial." See v. 2, note.
w " a report ; " yr/ftr;. Penn, Wakef., Kend., Thomson. De
Wette, " ein Euf." The expression " a fame" does not harmonize
with our usus loquendi. " Eeport " is preferable, also, if we
regard accuracy. Bob., " common fame, word, report, rumor."
1 " concerning him ; " Mol avvov. Thorn., Kend., Thelwall.
Vulg., Mont., Eras., " de illo ; " Beza, " de eo ; " Belg., " van
hem ; " De Wette, von ihm ; " Iber., " de el ; " Diodati, " di
esso." Rob. (ne^i, cum genit.).
* " the whole ; " SAys tijg. Angus, Camp., M., Thel. Bob,
(67os.) Liddell, " the whole ; " Belg., " het gaheele ; " De Wette,
" die ganze ; " S. Pr., " toute ; " Iber., " todo." This word should
be distinguished in rendering, from was.
z "surrounding region;" mioixcopov. Kendrick. Belgic,
omliggende land ; " De Wette, " umliegende Gegend ; " G. Fr.,
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IV.
35
KING JAMES 7 VERSION.
15 And he taught in their syna-
gogues, being glorified of all.
16 And he came to Nazareth,
where . he had been brought up :
and, as his custom, was, he -went
into the synagogue on the sabbath-
day, and stood up for to read.
17 And there was delivered
unto him the book of the prophet
Esaias. And when he had opened
the book, he found the place where
it was written,
18 The Spirit of the Lord w
upon me, because he hath anointed
me to preach the gospel to the
poor ; he hath sent me to heal the
broken-hearted, to preach deliver-
ance to the captives, and recover-
GREEK TEXT.
ev ras crurayoyaty avruv,
i \ / Ifi \
oiez/oy viro iravrav. /cat
Oev sis r-f]v Na.aper t ov
T0pafj,/j.vos' /cat etcn/A^e /cara
r/v
TO
aura>, ev r
els
TK>V
/cat vecrrr) avayvavai. 17 /cat
7re8o0r} avT(jS /3t/3AtW 'Ifcratov
TOV 7rpo(prjTov /cat avawTv^as
TO /3t/3AtW, evpe TOV TOTTOV ov
r\v jf.ypa.yni.ivov, Uvevfjux. Kv-
f j > j / ]a f </ v /
piov CTT e/ie- ov eve/ceis
oare-
araA/ce /JLC, iacrao-dai TOVS crvv-
TetpLp.fj.4vovs Trjv KapSlav Krj-
aifJiaXcoTOi? a(j)eo~iv }
REVISED VERSION.
in their synagogues, "being prais-
ed b by all. And he came to 16
Nazareth, where he c was brought
up ; and, -"according to his
custom, he went into the syna-
gogue on the sabbath-day, and
stood up to read. And there 17
was delivered to him the book
of Isaiah, the prophet; and,
^unrolling the book, he found
the place where it was written,
The Spirit of the Lord is on me, 18
because he hath anointed me
h to preach good news to the
poor ; he hath sent me to heal
the broken-hearted, 'to proclaim
deliverance to the captives, and
" le pays d'alentour ; " S. Fr., " ]a contree d'alentour ; " Bretsch.,
(in verbd), " regi circumjaciens." " Bound about" is tautological.
The verb neftxoopeco signifies to go round. Alternative rendering,
" the region around," as Penn.
- " being praised ; " Sojago/tevos. Kend. Belg., " wierd
geprezen ; " De Wette, " gepriesen." This word is rendered
" applauded " by Scarlett and M. Thomson, " with universal
applause." Although "applaud" presents the thought, it is not
more exact than " praise," and the latter has the advantage of
being a biblical word, and one that is more familiar to common
readers. S. Fr., " etant honore ; " Diodati, "essendo onorato ; "
Costal., " celebrabatur ; " Bob. (in verbo), " to honor, to glory, i. e.,
to ascribe honor or glory to any one, to praise, to laud, to magni-
fy." Tynd., Gran., and Geneva use the synonym " commended."
b " by all ; " into n&vrtov. Penn, Kend., Wakef., Sharpe,
Angus, M. The preposition "of," with an objective case, as
instrumental, is no longer in use.
" "was brought up;." qv red'^ttft/tsvos. Norton, Kendriek,
Wesley, M., Bheims. Belg., " opgevoed was ; " Luther and De
Wette, " erzogen war." Heb. N. Test., ynx h^rt. The imperfect
tense is employed by Tyndale, Cranmer, and Genevan. So v. 17
the E. V. renders r,v yeyga/t/tsvov " it was written."
d " according to his custom ; " y.ara TO eicod-bs ccvry. So
Bob. (in loco, ed-co), Thorn., Penn, Scarlett. Vulg., Erasmus,
" secundum consuetudinem suam ; " Belg., " na zijne gewoonte ; "
Luther and De Wette, " nach seiner Gewohnheit ; " Dan., " efter
sin Sodvane." As the participle Elco&bs is used for the substan-
tive (KOTO, to 15-os, Luke 1 : 9), the literal rendering is preferred
for exactness and simplicity.
e " to read." The use of " for," before the infinitive, is obso-
lete and ungrammatical. In this instance, it is omitted by
Norton, Thorn., Wesley, Penn, Wakef., Sharpe, Scarlett, Camp.,
Kend., Angus, M.
f " of Isaiah, the prophet ; " 'Haato TOV rtpopyrov. Norton,
Kend., Wakef., M., Thelw. Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, " Esaiae
prophete;" Schott, Kuincsl, "Isaiss vatis;" De Wette, "Jesa-
ja's, des Propheten ; " S. Fr., d'Esaie le prophete ; " Iber., " de
Isaias el profeta." The Greek order should be retained, as iov
nfoipfjTov is the defining term, distinguishing the author of " the
book " from other men, who might bear the same name. So Syr.,
)-"^i f-VT]: Heb. N. T., xiasn ^frjsuJ^-
B " unrolling ; " avaniv^as. Norton, Kend-, M. Dickinson,
" having unrolled ; " Vulg., " ut revolvit." Kuinosl, " libra evo-
luto, explicate: avaittvaoeiv est evolvere, cxplicare ea, quse sunt
convoluta, ut oppositum mvaauv v. 20, est complicare convolvere;
avaxTvaosiv de libro evoluto legitur quoque 2 Begg. 19 : 14
Libri autem Hebrseorum erant volumina, illigabantur duobus
baculis teretibus, qui capulos habebant, quos manu tenens qui
legebat, convolvere poterat atque evolvere librum prout opus
erat."
h " to preach good news ; " svayysJ.i&a&ae. Norton, " glad
news;" Dickinson, "to publish good news;" Penn, Sharpe,
" to preach good tidings ; " Wakef., " to preach glad tidings ; "
Scarlett, Campbell, "to publish glad tidings;" Castalio, "ad
liEta nuncianda ; " Schott, " ut laeta nuntiarem." In Isaiah
61 : 1, from which this quotation is made, the verb is "NBai, Sept.
txayyel'uy.od'a.i, Syr. owamifllk. The radical idea, "to bring
good news, to announce or publish glad tidings (Bob., Lex.), is
indicated by this verb, as it is employed by the Evangelists.
" Good news " is substituted for " gospel," as it presents the
thought with greater clearness and force. " Tidings " is obsolete.
De Wette, " frohe Botschaft zu bringen ; " S. Fr., " pour annoncer
la bonne nouvelle ; " Iber., " a annunciar buenas nuevas ; " ItaL,
"per annunziare la buona novella." Compare ch. 2 : 10.
1 " to proclaim ; " xri^cu. Norton, Kend., Thorn., "Wesley,
Penn, Angus, Scarlett, M. Vulg., Mont, " prsedicare ; " Eras,
36
THE GOSPEL AC COKDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IT.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
ing of sight to the blind, to set a
liberty them that are bruised,
19 To preach the acceptable
year of the Lord.
20 And he closed the book, and
he gave it again to the minister,
and sat down. And the eyes of
all them that wore in the syna-
gogue Avere fastened on him.
21 And he began to say unto
them, This day is this scripture
fulfilled in your ears.
fiREEK TEXT.
red paver p.4vovs fv a^etrei' KTJ-
eviavTov Kvpiov
20 TV \ '} * n n\ ' '
Kan. TTTV^as TO pipAiov, caro-
8ovs rcS vTrrjpeTri, fKadicre' Kai
rfj crvvay&yjj ol
revifyvTes au-
8e \eyetv irpos
avrovs, OTL a-q/j-epov TreirXypca-
TO.I TI ypa(f)T) avrrj eV TOI? dxrlv
ev
6(pda\/JLol r/crais
REVISED VERSION.
'recovery of sight to the blind,
to set at liberty k the oppressed,
kk to proclaim the acceptable 19
year of the Lord. And 'roll- 20
ing up the book, he gave it
again "to the officer, and sat
down. And the eyes of all in
the synagogue "were fixed on
him. And he began to say 21
to them, This day is fulfilled
this scripture which is in your
Beza,"ut prscdiecm ; " Schott, "ut praedicarem ; " Kob. (Lex.),
" to proclaim ;" Bretsch., " publice annundo." The radical sense
of the verb is most appropriate here. Liddell (in verbo), " to call,
make proclamation as a herald ; " Iber., " a proclamar." Heb.
N. T., jnjsb Syr.; o|^aia^. Murdock., " to proclaim."
> " recovery of sight ; " avdpleyiv. Thorn., "Wesley, Penn,
Wakef., Scarlett, Camp., Angus, M. Liddell (in verbo), "a
seeing again, recovery of sight." Strictly speaking to recover
sight implies that it was formerly possessed. Hence Kuinoel on
Matt. 11 : 5, where the verb avaplenovot occurs, renders it
" cceci visum recipiunt." So E. V., " the blind receive their
sight." On John 9 : 11 (avefteya, E. V., " I received sight"),
Kuincel remarks : " Cum homo ille a nativitate eaecus fuisse dica-
tur, avejileya vim habet verbi simplicis efiAeya quod ipsum
verbum v. 7, et 21, legitur." On this passage, Bloomfield remarks :
" The terra may, indeed, seem rather to denote the recovery of
sight. But it admits of the present sense, i. e., ' I received my
sight,' since ava is often used for ava>, upward, and, consequently,
may mean to look up ; the peculiar faculty of the human race."
Prona cum spectant aaimalia caetera terrain ;
Os homini sublime dedit : coolum tueri
Jussit, et erectos ad sidera tollere vultus. OVID, Met. 1 : 84.
The verb ava/3ifotco has sometimes the sense of looking at, as in
Cyrop. 1, 4, $12, &uo avafihineiv itpos lov namtov ex iov i'aov
en Svvaftae. In view of what has been said, the alternative
rendering is suggested, " receiving of sight to the blind," or, more
concisely (with Valg. and Eras., " ccecis visum "), " sight to the
blind." So De Wette, " den Blinden das Gesicht;" Iber., "la
reception de la vista para los ciegos ; " Span., " a los ciegos
vista ; " Belg., " den blinden het gezichte." Syr.,
Heb. N. Test., fii'iw 1315 nip&b-
k " the oppressed ; " re&gavofisvovs. Norton,
Kend., Angus, M. Castalio, " calamitosos ; " De Wette, " die
Gedriickten ; " S. Fr., '= qui tout foules ; " Iber., " los oprimi-
dos ; " Kob. (Lex.), " oppressed." Bretsch. : " Te&yavaiuevoi,
bello confecti, i. e., victi, oppressi, captivi ; semel Luke 4 : 19,
catoareliat TS&favaftevovs ev apeact, victos captives liberos
demittere, eas vindicare in libertatem ; in Hebr. enim Jes. 58 : 6,
leguntur, enuJBri b^aiSI. nJDia." Kuincel (in loco), Deut. 28 : 33,
"legitur %ori aStxov/ucvos xal Te&<>a.vafieros, oppressi et vexati
tritis (E. V., 'thou shalt be only oppressed and crushed always').
Itaque te&qavfiEvoi h. 1. sunt calamitosi, oppressi, non ut alii
volunt, vulnerati sol. compedibus vincti."
to proclaim." See note i.
i " rolling up ; " nivgas. See v. 17, note. Norton, Kend.,
Thorn., " had rolled up."
m " to the officer ; " tip vitriqetrj. Norton, Wakef., M. This
is the most usual rendering in the E. V. " Minister" tends to
mislead the common reader, who has the idea " minister of the
word," or preacher called up in his mind, by that term. It is not
equivalent to agxiovvayioyos, "the ruler" or "chief director" of
the synagogue, but probably indicates the officer termed by the
Jews Mafflrt "ijti, who had the charge of the sacred books.
Kuinoel and Bloomfield (in loco].
" were fixed ; " rjoav arcvi^ovrss. Camp., Penn, Thomson,
Scarlett. This expression conforms to present usage. It is
equally exact with " fastened," more euphonous, and more easily
enunciated.
" is fulfilled this scripture, which is in your ears ; "
10.1 fj ys>atpT) avri) ev -rors taalv vpiov. Penn. By the position
of " fulfilled," immediately before the sentence " in your ears,"
the common reader is misled as to the sense of the passage. The
thought is, that the declaration of Isaiah which they had just
heard, in reference to the Messiah, was fulfilled. Kuincel : "Hodie
illud oramlvm eventum habet, vobis audientibus, i. e., hoc quo modo
legi, impleri hodie videtis, me audientes, hodie eventn comproba-
tur, quod ibi propheta dixit." This thought is presented with
different degrees of literality in the following versions : Camp.,
the scripture, which ye have just now heard, is fulfilled ; "
Thorn., " there is an accomplishment of this scripture, which you
have just heard ; " Belg., " is deze Schrift in uwe ooren vervuld ;"
S. Fr., " cette ecriture est accomplie, vous 1'entendant ; " De
Sacy, " cette ecriture, que vous venez d'entendre est accomplie ; "
Iber., " se ha cumplido esta Escritura, oyen do [lo] vosotros ; "
Syviac, ,o-iJijVa pin ]^l^s> >oXu*.{ (Junius, " completa est
scriptura haec quae est in auribus vestris"). Bloomfield (N. T.)
remarks on this passage : " It is better with the Syriac, Bengel,
De Dieu, and Campbell to render, ' which ye have just heard,'
literally, ' which is now in your ears.' This, however, involves so
harsh a catachresis, that -we must suppose an ellipsis of %." In
his Analecta he paraphrases the passage : " That which I have
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IV.
37
KING JAMES' VERSION.
22 And all bare him -witness,
and wondered at the gracious
words which proceeded out of his
mouth. And they said, Is not this
Joseph's son ?
23 And he said unto them, Ye
will surely say unto me this pro-
verb, Physician, heal thyself:
whatsoever we have heard done
in Capernaum, do also here in thy
country.
24 And he said, Verily I say
unto you, No prophet is accepted
in his own country.
25 But I tell you of a truth,
many widows were in Israel in
the days of Blias, when the heaven
GREEK TEXT.
~ 22 Tr \ '
vp,<av. K.OLL TravTe?
povv avrca, /cat I0avp.a.tj)v
rots Xoyois TJ?y -)(a,piTos, rots e/c-
7ropevofj.evoLS e/c TOV oro/taroy
O.VTOV, Kal eXeyov, Ov-% OVTOS
' ' '* > T ' J 23 TS" N
eoTtv o vios la>(rr)<p; Kai
core irpof avrovS) HavTcas e/jetre
jj-Qi TTJV jra.pa.^oXrjV TO.VTTJV, 'Ia-
rpe, depoarev&ov creavTov otra
f]KOVo~afJiv yevofJLfva. ei> rfj Ka-
irepvaovfj., iroLr)<rov /cat code
rrj TraTpidi a~ov.
24 Erne. 8e, 'Ap.T)v Xe-yco
vSeis 7rpo(j)rJTr)s 5e/croy COTIV
* /c\ ~ 25 >s \
ry irarpioi avrov. eir aXr)-
Se Xe-yco v[uv, TroAAat %^/oat
Iv raty rjjjLepcus '.Z?A/oy iv
ra> 'Icrpa.rjX, ore eKXeiorfft) o ov-
v
OTI
EEVISED VERSION.
ears. And all 'bore testimony 22
to him, and wondered at the
gracious words 'which came out
of his mouth. And they said,
Is not this r the son of Joseph ?
And he said to them, Ye will 23
surely say to me this proverb,
Physician, heal thyself: what-
ever we have heard done in
Capernaum, do 'here, also, in
thy country. And he said, 24
'Truly I say to you, no prophet
is "acceptable in "Ms own coun-
try. But I tell you of a truth, 25
many widows were in Israel in
the days of Elijah, when the
just now read, ye see this day fulfilled by the event." Penn says,
" This phrase is equivalent to ' which you have just iieard;' and
appears to be an example of what Hoogeven calls ' nova loquendi
genus (in N. T.) pronomen avros adhibens pro relative Ss (i. e.,
fj ys>u<p!j r; EV rots cuolv vficov (earlv).'" The rendering which I
have adopted above, is literal, and yet it may be objected that
there is a strong Hebraistic idiom in the language, I, therefore,
suggest the following, which has been furnished by Campbell,
" which you have just now heard."
P " bore testimony ; " s/ta$rvQovv. "Wakefield, Scarlett, M.
" Witness " is now used for the person who gives testimony, or
testifies. In all cases in which " witness " occurs after " gives," or
" bear," in the E. V., testimony should be its substitute.
' " which came out of ; " toTs emofevo/cevois $x. "Wakefield,
Sharpe. S. Fr., " qui soutaient de sa bouche ; " Iber., " que
salian de su boca ; " De Wette, " die aus seinem Munde gingen."
In nearly every case, where a verb is compounded with a preposi-
tion, and followed by the same preposition, the force of the
compounded verb is the same as the simple form. Hence ixrco-
qsvo/tevois ex = rtogEvoftevots ex. If we retain " proceeded,"
then " proceeded from " would be the proper expression.
' " the son of Joseph ? " 6 vios 'Icoa^y ; Perm, Thorn., Dick.,
Wakef., Scarlett, Kend., Thelwall, M. In most cases of similar
construction, instead of the possessive case, the E. V. employs
" of" with the objective, as " the son of David," rather than
" David's son." A good reason for this practice is found in all
cases, where the hissing s is followed by another s. Euphony
demands attention in the Scriptures, as they are so frequently
read audibly.
* " here, also." Thomson, Penn, Wakefield. This arrange-
ment is grammatically exact, and more harmonious than that of
the E. V., or rather of Tyndale, which it copies. In colloquial
phraseology we say, " do it here, too," and this is good authority
"Usus
Quern penes arbitrium est ct jus et norma loquendi."
' " Truly ; " X/ap>. This is tie Hebrew JBX, which adver-
bially signifies, truly, certainly. Gesenius (Lex.) Hob. (Lex.) :
" Emphatically, at the beginning of a sentence, truly, verily.
Comp. Luke 9 : 27, aH-rjS-cSs." " Verily " is out of use, except in
quotations from the E. V. "Truly" is more intelligible to
common readers than the anglicized Latin word " verily." This
word has never been sanctioned by general use. " Truly " is
uniformly substituted for it, in this Kevision.
" acceptable ; " Sexros. Wesley, Dick., Wakef., Scarlett,
Angus, Norton, M. So (E. V.) v. 19. Philipp. 4 : 18. Hesych.,
Ssxros. ageoros. Heid. (Lex.), " acceptus, gratus ; " Belgic,
! " aangenaam ; " Iber., " acepto." The word occurs in the Sept.,
Isa. 56 : 7, in this sense, al &voiat avrcov saoirai Sexzai enl TO
&vaia.<rtfn>i6v fiov, where it is the equivalent of "paill:. If we
suppose that Sextos lariv (in the passage before us) is used for
Saxsrai to bring out the thought the rendering should be, " is
well received."
T " his own." As the pronoun in Bagster's text is avrov,
this rendering does not harmonize with it, but should be simply
" his." Still, as the rough aspirated avrov stands in the text of
Griesbach, Knapp, Theile, Tittmann, Schott, Kuinrel, Erasmus,
Elzevir, Stephens (third Ed.), the rendering of the E. V. may be
sustained. But with avrov, the rendering would be plausible,
because narols (adj.) signifies one's native place, home, etc., that
city, country, or place, which is one's own. Still, in Matt. 13 : 54,
we find els mar^iSa avrov in Griesbach, Knapp, Tittm., Scholz,
Stephens, Elzevir, Erasmus, Theile.
38
GOSPEL ACCOEDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IV.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
was shut up three years and six
mouths, when great famine was
throughout all the land :
26 But unto none of them was
Elias sent, save unto Sarepta, a
city of Sidon, unto a woman that
was a widow.
27 And many lepers were in
Israel in the time of Eliseus the
prophet ; and none of them was
cleansed, saying Naaman the
Syrian.
GREEK TEXT.
pavos eVt errj rpia KCU /HTJVO.S e,
coy eyei/ero Atftoy p.eyas lirl ira-
^ " 2fi \ \ > s>
crav rr/v yrjv KCU irpos ovoe-
fjiiav avTOtv kiri^Qt] '-EA/ay, ei
firj els Sdpeirra rrjs Ji8a>vos
Trpos yvvaiKa. ^pav. 27 /cat ?roA-
Aoi AfTT/sot fja'ot.v eVt ' EXicra'a.lQv
TOV -jrpo(j)r)rov eV TO> 'IcrparjX-
KCU, ovdelf avrutv eKadapiadrj, el
o Svpos. 28 Kdi
iravres 0v/j.ov iv
rfj crvva-yoa-yf), aKOVovres ravra.
REVISED VERSION.
heaven was shut up three years
and six months, w so that there
was *a great famine ^over all
the land : *and yet, "to no one 26
of them was Elijah sent b but
to "a widow-woman, d at Zare-
phath, a city of Zidon. And 27
many lepers were in Israel, e in
the time of Elishah, and yet,
f no one of them was healed
*but Naaman, the Syrian. And 28
h all in the synagogue, 'hearing
'these words, were filled with
w " so that ; " cog. Bob. (Lex., in verbd) : " Before a clause
expressing result, or consequence, so, so as that, so tliat." S
Norton, Thorn., Penn, ATakef., Sharpe, Scarlett, Camp., Thelw.
M. Here cos = (Sore. Belgic, " zoodat ; " S. Fr., " tellemen
que."
* " a great famine ; " Lftbs /ttyas. Norton, Thorn., Wesley
Diok., Wakef,. Sharpe, Scarlett, Camp., Kend., M. De Wette
" eine grosse Hungersnotk ; " Dan., " en stor Hunger ; " Gr. Fr
and S. Fr., " une grande famine ; " Iber., " una grande hambre."
* " over all the land ; " krii naoav rrjv yrjv. Norton, Thorn.
"Wakef., Sharpe, Angus, M. Belg., " over het geheele land ; '
De Wette, " liber das ganze Land ; " S. Fr., " sur toute la terre ; '
Ital., " sopra tutta la terra." The ordinary signification of htl
(cum coats.) is entirely appropriate here.
* " and yet ; " xal. M. Castal., " et tamen ; " De Sacy, " et
neanmoins." This is an instance of the apparently adversative
use of xai, where the thought is clear in itself without the aic
of an adversative particle, as in Matt. 6 : 26, oti ov oitciyo
. . . xal o Ttarrj^ vfttuv . . . tqecpei avra? 10 : 29, ov%i Svo
ar^ovd'ia aooaglov 7t(o).ettai; xal ei> s!j avroov ov iteoettat,
x. T. L Bob. (Lex., xal) remarks : " In all these passages the
rendering but is admissible, but not necessary ; in others, it woulo
destroy the true sense."
a " to no one ; " itgos ovSefuav. Bob. (Lex., in verbo) : "Ab-
solutely as subst. no one." This rendering, being exact, is
preferred to the contracted form " none," euphonia gratia.
b " but ; " el fir;. "Save " is obsolete. Scholefield remarks on
this : " The mistake in the authorized translation is not an un-
natural one, but the effect of it is most unfortunate. It introduces
a direct blunder by making the passage state, that Elias -was sent
to none of the Israelite widows except to a Sidonian widow. And
so of the lepers. Though the natural and common sense of el /?
is ' except,' it is not uncommonly used, as here proposed, in a
sense not of limitation, but of exclusion." See el fty, Bev.
21 : 27. There is really an ellipsis with el (in, thus, el fty
[Inefiyd'i]} els Sa^enra.
" a widow-woman ; " yvvaTxa. xyqav. Penn, Sharpe. Xrjpav
is an adjective. Liddell (x^os). Bretsch. : "Proprie femin.
adject, -/.rjqos, a, ov orbus [y.aca vacuus sum], quare passim
additur yvvij." Septuagint, yuvrj xn^n eyio slfit. Hcb. N. Test.,
rtsais-Mias. Troll. (Gram., g25, p. 46) : "Xijga is in fact a
feminine adjective, which is used elliptically in Luke 2 : 37.;
7 : 12. 1 Timo. 5:3. So in Latin 0. Nepos, Prsef., c. 4,
' femina vidua ; ' Terentius, Heaut., v. 1 : 80, ' viduiE mttlieri.' "
Bloomf. : " rvvaiKa xfj^av is not so much a pleonasm as a primi-
tive oratio plena." In the arrangement of this sentence, I have
followed Norton, Scarlett, Thorn., Penn, Wakef., " to a widow-
woman at Sarepta." The inverted, nngrammatScal arrangement
of the E. V. is a slavish ad verbum copy of the Vulgate, " in
Sarepta Sidonise, ad mulierem viduam." With better taste G.
Fr., "vers une femme veuve dans Sarepta de Sidon ;" S. Fr.,
" vers une femme veuve a Sarepta de Sidon ; " Iber., " a una
muger viuda en Sarepta [ciudad] de Sidon ; " Ital., " ad una
vedova in Saretta di Sidone."
d " at Zarephath ; " els Sa^cnta. The preposition is rendered
" at" by Thorn., Dick., Penn, Wakef., Scarlett. Beza, ad ;"
Castalio, " ad Zarephtham ; " Schott, " ad Sareptam ; " S. Fr.,
" & Sarepta." Compare Acts 20 : 16, tie 'leooaoivf.a (E. Y.,
"at Jerusalem"), and 21 : 13. Matt. 21 : 1, fyyiaav els
ooivfia, xal ffW-ov els Brj&yayy (E. V., " drew nigh uuto
Jerusalem, and were come to Bethphage.") " Zarephath " is
according to the 0. Test, orthography, 1 Kings 17 : 9. Obad.
v. 20. Heb. N. Test., nijBI^.
" in the time of Elishah ; " eitl 'Ehaaalov. I have retained
the phraseology of the E. T., though " in the days of Elishah "
(as in E. V., Mark 2 : 26, lift, 'Aptad'ao, " in the days of Abia-
thar ") is suggested as an alternative rendering.
f " no one ; " ovSels. See v. 26, note.
6 " but ; " el /tij. See v. 26, note.
" " all ; " navres. Wakef., Keud., M., Angus, Wesley, Dick.,.
Penn, Scarlett, Thelwall, M., Bheims. " They " is superfluous.
1 " hearing ; " axovovceg. Thorn., Wesley, Camp., M., Kend.,
Thelwall.
"these words." Penn, M., "words." This supplement is
adopted rather than " things," as the reference is obviously to the
words, which Jesus had uttered. The use of a neuter for the
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IV.
39
KING JAMES' VERSION.
28 And all they in the syna-
gogue, when they heard these
things, were filled with wrath,
29 And rose up, and thrust him
out of the city, and led him unto
the trow of the hill, (whereon
their city was built,) that they
might cast him down headlong.
30 But he, passing through the
midst of them, went his way,
31 And came down to Caper-
naum, a.city of Galilee, and taught
them oa the sabbath-days.
32 And they were astonished
at his doctrine : for his word was
with power.
33 And in the synagogue there
was a man which had a spirit of
an unclean devil ; and he cried out
with a loud voice,
GREEK TEXT.
9Q \ > f ' }~ f n \ >
KO.I avacrravres e<-epaXov av-
TOV eco TTJS TroXecos, Kcu Tfyayov
avrov ea>s rfjs 6<j)pvos rov opovs,
e(j) ov 77 TToXis avT&v a>KoSo/J,r)-
TO, es TO KaraKprjuvia-at avrov
30
avros 8e SteXdcbv
fj.e(rov
OLVT&V eTTopevero.
31 KAI KxrrjXdev elf Kairep-
vaov/j. TroXiv TTJS PaXiXaias' KOU
i]v 8i8tx,a-Kcav avrovs ev rots crd/3-
/3ct,o~i. 32 KOU e^eTrXrja-crovTO em
rrj diSaxfi avTou., on ev e^ovcria.
i < \ i > " 33 ry \ ' "
r/v o Xo-yos avrov. J.ai ev rj?
avdpcoTro? e^cov
Trvevfj,a BaifJ-ovlov aKadaprov, /cat
4 Ae-
EBVISED VERSION.
.wrath, and, k rising up, 'they 29
drove him out of the city, and
led him to the brow m of the
mountain on which their city
was built, to cast .him down
headlong ; but he, passing 30
through the midst of them,
"went away. And he came 31
down to Capernaum, a city of
Galilee, and taught them on
the sabbaths. And they were 32
astonished at his ^teaching,"
for his word was r with author-
ity. And in the synagogue 33
there was a man, who had a
spirit of an unclean 'demon ;
and he cried out with a loud
masculine, where the adjective, or adjective pronoun stands alone,
is common in the N. Test. Compare John 6 : 39 ; 17 : 2.
k " rising up ; " avaaravrss. Thomson, "Wesley, Scarlett, M.
S. Fr,, " s'etant leves."
i " they drove ; " ejt/Sidov. Thorn., Gamp., M., Eob. (Lex.,
in tierbo, 1. b.) " Thrust " is too specific, as it necessarily implies
"to push or crowd with violence," while "to drive" implies
urging forward either by actual physical force applied to the
object, or often by threats, commands, etc.
m " of the mountain ; " iov ogovs. G. and A. Camp., Dick.,
Kend., M., Thelwall. So rendered in sixty-two cases out of sixty-
five, in E. V. It should be uniformly represented by " mountain."
Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, Castal., Kuinoel, " mentis." " Hill "
was employed by Tyndale, who was copied by the earlier English
translators.
" " went away ; " ixofsvero. Thomson, Wesley, Scarlett,
Camp., Kend. Rob. (Lex., in verbo), " to pass on, to go away, to
depart." In conformity with Bagster's text, as well as that of
Griesbach, Tisch., Lachm., Knapp, Theile, Tittm., Scholz, Eras.,
Stephens (third Ed.), and Elzevir, a period is placed after lito-
qevsro. This is the punctuation of Thorn., Wesley, Campbell,
Dick., Sharpe, Kend., Angus.
" on the sabbaths ; " ev roTs <rafi{3aoiv. Sharpe. " Days " is
superfluous. As this plural sometimes occurs in cases where it is
singular in signification (see Bob., Lex., oa^atov), the alterna-
tive rendering is suggested, " on the sabbath."
" "teaching;" StSaxH. Kendrick, Wesley, Sharpe, Angus,
Wiclif. Iber., " su ensenanza." As StSag^ signifies both the ad
of teaching, and that which is taught, it has an exact equivalent
in^ the English word " teaching." The anglicized Latin " doc-
trine," in present usage, only indicates that which is taught, the
instruction given. Bretsch. (in verbo), "actus docendi, institution
materia institutions, ' doctrina quum dogmata, turn praecepta.' "
In classic usage, 8180.$ seems to be used only as eauivalent to
31 C f-
ioa$tg.
i A comma is placed after " teaching," in conformity with the
Greek text of Bagster, Tiseh., Tittmann, Elzevir. So iu the
versions of Norton, Penn, Sharpe, Wesley. S. Fr., " sa doctrine,
parce que ; " Iber., " ensenanza, porque."
r " with authority ; " ev egovotct. Geneva, Norton, Wesley,
Dick., Wakef., Penn, Scarlett, Sharpe, Campbell. Mont., Beza,
" auctoritate ; " S. Fr., " avec autorite ; " Iber., " con autoritad ; "
Diodati, " con autorita." So in the parallel, Mark 1 : 22, eov-
aia.v, E. V., " authority," and Matt. 7 : 29 ; 8 : 9. Luke 4 : 36.
See v. 6, note.
" demon ; " Saifiovtov. Thomson, Dick., Norton, Sharpe,
Camp., Kend., Angus, Thelwall, M. S. Fr., " demon ; " Iber.,
" demonio." Note on Revision of Mark : " There is no difference
of signification between Salftcov and Satpoviov. These words
are applied to a class of " unclean spirits, who are the servants
of Satan. See Luke 8 : 29, 30. Matt. 9 : 34. Mark 3 : 22-26.
eafioios, when it refers to spiritual existence, is applied in the
singular, to Satan y.ar l^o^. There are many ' demons,' yet
but one ' Devil.' As we have no single term, which is the
equivalent of ' demon,' we are obliged to transfer, when we can
not translate. See Campbell's Dissertations; VI., Part I., where
these words are fully examined." I have employed " demon,"
wherever these words occur. These spirits seem to be the fallen
angels, 2 Pet. 2 : 4, Jude 6, and are subject to Satan, Luke
11 : 15, 'Ev BCE),&{}OV), ayxovri itav Satftovicav Matt. 25 : 41,
TO Ttvg TO alcaviov to qTOtfiaoftsvov tia Sta/3Mea y.al roTs ayye-
is avrov. Yulgate, Beza, " dsemom'um ; " Schott, " dsemonii."
r,f,}^. Heb. N. T., -W5.
40
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IV.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
34 Saying, Let us alone ; what
have we to do with thee, thou
Jesus of Nazareth ? art thou come
to destroy us? I know thee who
thou art, the Holy One of God.
35 And Jesus rebuked him,
saying, Hold thy peace, and come
out of him. And when the devil
had thrown him in the midst, he
caine out of him, and hurt him
not.
36 And they were all amazed,
and spake among themselves, say-
ing, What a word is this 1 for with
authority and power he command-
eth the unclean spirits, and they
come out.
37 And the fame of him went
out into every place of the country
round about.
GREEK TEXT.
ycov, Ea., TI -rjiJ.lv /cat erot, 'Irj~
Nafaprjve; yXGes airoXecrat
9 ' / 9 -t <f .
oioa ere rty et, o aytoy
35 Kal
TOV Oeov.
TcS o 'Irja-ovs, Xe-yoov, $ifji.a>-
/cat e'^eXde el; O.VTOV. Kcu
pi^rav avrov TO Ba.ip.ovt.ov elf TO
fiecrov e^rjXdev O.TT avTOV, fj.rj8ev
rt\ ' I ' Hfi \/
pAayai' O.VTOV. /cat e-yeveTO
6a.fji.ftos eTri iravTas, /cat (rvveXd-
Xovv Trpos aXXrjXov 5 , Xe-yovres,
rrjf c \ ' ? f * ' f*
1 if o Xoyos OVTOS, oTi ev egov-
cr/a /cat 8vva.fj.ei. eVtracrcret roiy
a.Ka.6dpToi$ Trvev/Jiaa-i, /cat e-
37 JKcti
Trep avTov es travTa, TOTTOV
REVISED VERSION.
voice, saying, Ah ! what have 34
we to do with thee, "Jesus of
Nazareth, T hast thou come to
destroy us ? I know thee, who
thou art, the Holy One of
God. And Jesus rebuked him, 35
saying, "Be silent, and come
out of him. And the demon,
throwing him down in the
midst, came out of him, and
hurt him not. And *amaze- 36
ment came on all, and they
spoke 'to one another, saying,
"What a word is this ! for with
authority and power he com-
mandeth the unclean spirits,
and they come out. And a a 37
rumor 'concerning him 'spread
abroad into every place d of the .
' "Ah ! " "Ea. Kend., Dick., Camp., M., Wakef., Norton, and
Scarlett, " Hah ! " Beza, "Ah ! " Castal. and Schott, " Heu ! "
De Wette, " Ha ! " G. Fr. and S. Fr., Ha ! " Iber., " Ea ! "
Diodati, "Ahi!" Rob. (Lex.), "gener. ah! aha!" Bretsch.:
" Particula exclamandi, quse est vel admirantis, vel dolentis ah !
vah ! elieu .' Habetur etiam in lingua hebraica, tifix Jud. 6 : 22,
coll. v. 33. Jer. 1 : 6. Joel 1 : 15." Heb N. Test'l .irtsj. The
E. V. follows the Vulg., which renders this word by sine, as
though it were the imperative (of Idea) sue. -It is probably
derived from that imperative, but should not be confounded with
it. A similar mistake occurs in Syr., v^J-t-oooj* " let me alone"
(sine me).
u " thou," the supplement of the E. V. (copied from Tyndale),
is omitted as superfluous. It is dropped by Thomson, Wesley,
Wakef., Norton, Penn, Sharpe, Dick., Camp., Kendrick, Angus,
Thelwall.
" " hast thou come ; " %A.&es. Norton, Dick. The use of the
auxiliary " to be " with intransitive verbs is a violation of our
idiom, though it is quite common in the E. V. It is a Gallicism.
See Webster's Diet., Introd., p. Iv. If allowable in any case, it
is only where rjy.ta occurs ; this verb in the present having the
sense of the perfect, so that we may say, " I am come," i. e.,
I have come, I am here. Even here in most cases " I have come "
will express the thought ; while the imperfect = to a pluperfect.
Sophocles, Gr. Gram., p. 233. Lidd. (Lex.) Buttm., g 137, note 7.
w "Be silent;" tfificoS-ijTi. Thorn., Norton, Penn, Scarlett,
Camp., Kend., M. The phrase " to hold one's peace" is obsolete.
* " throwing down ; " $iyav. Kendrick, Wesley, M. The
participial construction is retained by Thorn., Scarlett, Mont.,
Beza, Schott.
* "amazement came on all;" iysvsro &<ifipos &rt itdvias.
Wakef., Sharpe, " amazement came on them all ; " Penn (follow-
ing MS. B.), " fear came on them all ; " Vulg, " factus est pavor
in omnibus ; " Eras., " factus est pavor super omnes ; " Belg.,
" daar kwam een verbaasdheid ouer alle ; " De Wette, " alle
iiberfiel Staunen ; " Iber., " les vino asombro a todos." The
E. V. has made no distinction between the rendering of s&a/iftq
fhjoav navres in the parallel, Mark 1 : 27 (" and they were all
amazed "), and that of this passage, where the text is not the
same. It fails, therefore, in exactness. See Rob. on &dfifios.
The literal rendering is appropriate.
* " to one another ; " Ttpog allriiovs. Thomson, Norton,
Scarlett, Sharpe, M. Rob., Liddell (in verbo). Bretsch., " alius
alium, ssepissime ut Matt. 24 : 10. John 13 : 35. Acts 7 : 26, etc."
So (E. V.) Mark 4 : 41 ; 9 : 50. Luke 2 : 15, etc. The arrange-
ment " one to another " is obsolete.
* "a, rumor ; " j^os. Beza, Schott, " rumor ;" Kuincel, " ^os,
h. 1. fama, rumor, respondet Hebr. *>i'p, quod Symmach., Job
39 : 24, Ps. 17 : 14, expressio ^os." Bengel, " %xs, sonus, vox
propagata e voce. Rob. (in verbo), "rumor." There is nothing
in the text to authorize the use of the indefinite article " the." It
is not employed by Wakefield, Penn, Thelwall, Sharpe, or Heb.
N. Test. (saia).
b " concerning him ; " ne^l avrov. Angus, Thelwall. This
is the ordinary rendering of yte^l. So (E. V.) Matt. 16 : 11.
Mark 5 : 16. Luke 24 : 27. Acts 28 : 22. " His fame," which
has been employed by some translators, is incorrect, as that would
require sfoos avrov, thus Mark 1 : 28, fj axofi avrov, E. V., " his
fame."
* " spread abroad ; " l&toQEvKro. So (E. V.) Mark 1 : 28.
Norton and Scarlett, " spread ; " Beza, " dimanavit ; " Castalio,
dimanabat;" Greenf. (Lex., in loco), "to be spread abroad."
A rigidly literal rendering, "went forth" (or abroad), is not
according to the idiom of our language.
d " of the surrounding region ; " rrjs n^iy,ioqov. See ch. 4 : 14,
note.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IV.
41
KING JAMES' VEBSION.
38 And he arose out of the
synagogue, and entered into Si-
mon's house. And Simon's wife's
mother was taken with a great
fever ; and they besought him for
her.
39 And he stood over her, and
rebuked the fever ; and it left her :
and immediately she arose and
ministered unto them.
40 Now when the sun was set-
ting, all they that had any sick
with divers diseases, brought them
unto him : and he laid his hands
on every one of them, and healed
them.
41 And devils also came out of
many, crying out and saying, Thou
art Christ, the Son of God, And
he, rebuking them, suffered them
not to speak : for they knew that
he was Christ.
42 And when it was day, he
departed, and went into a desert
place ; and the people sought him,
GBEEK TEXT.
38 'Av ao-Tas 5e CK rijs vvva.-
yco-yrjs, eiaijXdev els rrjv oiKiav
77 Trevdepa 8e TOV Si
fjv crvvexpfjievr)
/cat rjpcoTrjcrav O.VTOV
~ 30 v> \ j /
avTTjs. /cat emaTap 67ra-
vco avTijs, eTreri/iT^cre TO> Trvperai,
5e aj/aorao-a SirjKovfi avrols.
AVVOVTOS fie TOV rjXiov, TTO.V-
Tf$ ocroi eixpv acrOevovvras VOCTOLS
TTOi/ctAaty rfyayov avTOvs Trpos
avrov o <5e evi fKaarco avT(ov
ray -^eipas emdeis
p^TO 8e /cat
fJLOVUX. OTTO TToXXutV, Kpd^OVTO. KCU
Aeyoira, On o~v et 6 Xpurros
6 vlos TOV Oeov. -STat
OVK eta aura AaAeti/, OTI r
^ -\7- * > \ ? * 42 TT
TOV JLpio~Tov avTov eivai. 1 e-
as e^eAffcov erro-
pevdrj els eprjjjLov TOTTOV, KOI ol
vTov, /cat r]\6ov
EETISED VERSION.
surrounding region. And, e ris- 38
ing up out of the synagogue,
f he entered into the house of
Simon. And e Simon's mother-
in-law was taken with a 'vio-
lent fever ; and they besought
him for her. And, 'standing 39
over her, he rebuked the fever,
and it left her ; and immedi-
ately she rose and ministered
to them. 'And when the sun 40
was setting, all who had any
sick with k various diseases,
brought them to him, and he
laid his hands on 'each one of
them, and healed them. And 41
demons, also, came out of many,
crying out, and saying, Thou
art m the Son of God. And he,
rebuking them, suffered them
not to speak : for they knew
that he was "the Anointed. And, 42
day having come, he departed
and went into a desert place,
and ""the crowds sought him,
' " rising up ; " avaaras. Wesley, Penn, Thehvall, M. Iber.,
" habiendose levantado ; " Span., " levantandose ; " Diodati and
Ital, " levatosi."
f "he entered ;" elorjl&ev. Wesley, Scarlett, Sharpe, Camp.,
Thelwall.
e " Simon's mother-in-law ; " 17 nsv&e^a TOV 2tficovos. Thom-
S9n, Tyndale, Geneva, Cranmer. So (E. V.) Luke 12 : 53. Matt.
10 : 35. This compound term accords with present usage. For
conciseness and easy enunciation, it should be employed uniformly
as the equivalent of 7tev&e(>a. So the cognate masculine, nsv-
&t$6s, is rendered " father-in-law " in (E. V.) John 18 : 13.
h " a violent fever ; " nv^fry fieyd).q>. Thorn., Dick., Camp.,
Kend., Angus, M. Castal., Schott, " gravi febre ; " De Wette,
" mit einem heftigen Fieber ; " Luther, " mit einem harten Fieber."
Mfyus is tropically used to indicate extent of force, intensity,
effect ; hence violent, vehement. Kob. (Les.)
1 "standing;" litunas. Kend., Wesley, Scarlett, Norton,
Dick., Camp., Thelwall, M. Diodati, " stando."
1 "And;" St. So (E. V.) in parallel, Mark 1 : 32. Penn,
Norton, Sharpe, Kend.
k " various ; " TOIM^CUS. Kend., Penn, M., Eobinson, (Lex.)
Divers" is obsolete.
1 " each one ; " ivl iyAarto. Translators have usually rendered
these words by "every one," or "each." The above phrase is
literal, and presents the thought with accuracy. Beza, Castalio,
and Mont, "unicuique." Syr., ^ fL\L De Wette, "einem
jeglichen ; " Belg., " een jegelijk ; " 'Iber., " cada uno."
m The reading of the Text. Eecept, 6 X^iarbg, is canceled by
Gr., Lachm., Tisch., Knapp, Theile, and bracketed by Tittmann.
Schott remarks as follows: " Post av si vulgo add. o X^carot.
Omissimus cum Griesb. et al. (ex glossemate prof.) prieeuntibus
sex codd. une. verss. Copt. (Memph.)i Arnii, Arab, polygl., Vulg.,
Ital., nonnullis patris." Kuincel : " Plures codd. et verss. 6 -3T<p<-
arbs omittunt, nee dubito quin adscripserint illud grammatici,
tanquam interpretamentum verborum Tibs ~rov Qsov." The
reading should be dropped as an interpolation.
* " The Anointed." See ch. 2 : 26, note.
o day having come ; " yevofteviis T/fifyas. Vulg., Montanus,
" facta die ; " Eras., " facto die ; " Beza and Schott, " orta die."
Having rendered oytas yevo/tevqs uniformly by " evening having
come," the above expression is adopted as accurate. The follow-
ing is an extract from the note on Mark 1 : 32 (oy/as yevo/iS-
s) : " There is an unnecessary variety in rendering this phrase
in the E. V." Other things being equal, uniformity of rendering
is important.
P " the crowds ; " ol o^ot. See ch. 3 : 7, note, Kuinod
42
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE; CHAP; V.
KING JAMES' VEKSION.
and came unto him, and stayed
Mm, that he should not depart
from them.
43 And he said unto them, I
must preach the kingdom of God
to other cities also, for therefore
am I sent.
44 And he preached in the
synagogues of Galilee.
CHAP; V;
AND it came to pass, that as
the people pressed upon him to
hear the word of God, he stood by
the lake of Genesaret,
2 And saw two ships standing
GEEEK TEXT.
ecos avTov, KOU Ka.Tel)(pv avrov
TOV JUT) iropevecrOai oaf
43 6 5e ewre Trpos avToiis,
KOI Tctls eTfpais TroXecrtv
Xi(rao'6ai p.6 dei TTJV
TOV Oeov' DTI elf TOVTO aireo'TaX-
/~i
Ort
TCUS (rvvaywyo.is frjs
CHAP. V.
'ErENETO Se
TOV
TOV
IV TOV \OJOV TOV &60V, KCU O.V-
TTOtpa TT]V \HLVT\V
2 KOU i8e Svo
TOf i]V
EETISBD VERSION.
and came to him, and ""would
have detained him, that he
might not depart from them.
And he said to them, I must 43
preach the kingdom of God to
other cities also, 'because for
this "I have been sent. And 44
he preached in the synagogues
of Galilee.
CHAP. y.
AND it came to pass, 1 as the l
crowd pressed on him to hear
the word of God, b he himself
c was standing by the lake of
d Gennesaret ; e and f he saw two 2
makes the following remark on this word (note Luke 3:7):
" Vocabulo ol o'/).oi neutiquam significatur omnis popvlus, qui ad
Johannehi accesserat, ut euni doeentem audiret, ab eoque baptiza-
retur; sed ut e Matth. 1. c. apertissime patet; iutelligendi sunt
Pharisffii ac Saddiicasi. Et satis constat TOVS o%l.ovs nonnun-
quam ndtari, quosdam e turba, e populo, ut John 7 : 20 ; 12 : 32
al. quo sensu etiam infra v. 10, flagitante orationis serie, lioc
ipsum nomen capiendum est. Facile autem est intellectu, qui
factuin sit, ut in archetype Lucoe commeuiorarentur ol 6'j^oe in
Matthaei contra archetypo, Pharisasi et Sadducasi."
" would have detained ; " xareZzov. Penn, " would have
withheld ; " Norton, " would have prevented ; " Wakef., " would
have hindered ; " De Wette, " wollte zuruckhalten." Stuart's
Gram., ?136 (II.), note 6, p. 218 : "From the general nature of
the imperfect, it is adapted to designate action commenced, but not
completed, and often, as we might suppose, it is employed in this
way; e. g., Matt. 3 : 14, 6 S^s'Ita&wTjs Stsxioi.vsv avrov, forbade
him, i. e., at first, but, afterwards, he yielded. So epovioptrir, i. e.,
if it could have been so ; " so Bom. 9 : 3, I wished, i. e., if it
could have been so. To this may be added Acts 25 : 22, efiov-
\6ftrjv xal avros tov av&otonov axovaai, E. V., "I would, also,
hear the man myself."
1 " because ; " on. Eob. (Lex., in verbo) II : 3, Scarlett,
Camp. "Vulg., Mont, " quia." In the parallel, Mark 1 : 38, the
text is els roHro yao. The particle yao is properly rendered in
the E. Y. by " for." In this instance, Sri should not be con-
founded with the rendering of the former word.
k " I have been sent forth ; " aniaralftat. So the perfect is
rendered by the same tense in the E. V., Luke 4 : 18, mtearalv.e,
" he hath sent me " (not, " he sendeth me.") So Luke 7 : 20,
axe<rraHxei> fatas (E. V.), "hath sent us." There is no good
reason for rendering tbe perfect in the passage before us by the
present. In John 3 : 28, the phrase (E. V.) " I am sent " is
represented by axeoraAftsvos clul. John 5 : 36, 6 nanjg fte
, (E. V.)," the Father hath sent me." \Vakefield and
Sharpe, " I was sent ; " Iber., " hi sido enviado ; " Vulg., Mont.,
Eras., Beza, Schott, " missus sum." "A m I sent " was employed
by Tyndale; he was copied by most of the Eng. translators,
though without any exigeniia loci, which demanded a departure
froin the usual force of the perfect.
* " That " (after " came to pass") is omitted as superfluous. So
Thorn., "Wesley, Scarlett, Penn, Wakef., Sharpe, Norton, Thel-
wall, Tyndale, Geneva.
b " he himself (was standing) ; " avros (%v earcos). Thelwall.
This literal rendering is adopted on the ground, that the writer
by the use of aiiros intended to distinguish the position of Christ
from that of the crowd. They had pressed onward, so that he
was brought to the water's edge, and had no longer room to
stand and address the people. Hence, he directly stepped on
board the ship, and made the request noticed in the next verse.
His position oh the shore is indicated by ytaaa rqi> faftvrjvi
literally " beside the lake."
c "was standing,-" %v iarcos. Angus, Thomson, Scarlett,
Sharpe, Dick., M., Thelwall. Syr., ]om >e)J 0010 (" and he was
standing").
d " Gennesaret." This word has become so fully naturalized
in our language, that it is deemed preferable to the 0. T. ortho-
graphy, " Chinnereth," or "Chinneroth" (rviss, ni^Si). Gesen.
remarks : " In the times of the N. T., this lake bore the name of
ibaa " (" Genesar.") Syr., jja
In conformity with the text, a semicolon is placed after
Gennesaret. So the text of Griesb., Knapp, Tittmann, Elzevir,
Stephens (third Edit.) The semicolon is used in S. Fr., Diodati,
Beza.
f " he saw ; "- elSs. Thorn., Penn, Wakef., Sharpe, Campbell,
Thelwall. As a semicolon is placed after " Gennesaret," the
pronoun must be expressed.
THE GOSPEL ACCOEDING TO LUKE. CHAP. V.
KING JAMES'
VERSION.
by the lake : but the fishermen
were gone out of them, and were
washing their nets.
3 And he entered into one of
the ships, which was Simon's, and
prayed him that he would thrust
out a little from the land. And
he sat down, and taught the people
out of the ship:
4 Now when he had left speak-
ing, he said unto Simon, Launch
out into the deep, and let down
your nets for a draught.
5 And Simon answering, said
unto him, Master, we have toiled
all the night, and have taken noth-
ing,- nevertheless, at thy word I
will let down the net.
6 And when they had this done,
they inclosed a great multitude of
fishes: and their net brake.
GREEK TEXT.
TrAota eoTtara irapa rt]v Xip,vrjv
ol 8e aXiels a7ro/3az>rey oaf
a.iriirXvva.v TO. SIKTVO.' 3
5e ety ev TODV irXouav, o rjv TOV
St/jLCovoS} ypcamqo-ev auroz/ ewro
rrj? yys iwavayoyelv oXLyov KOI
KaO'ufas eSiSacncev e/c TOV irXoiov
NV-. 4 '/">&*'
rouy o^Aouy. SJs of C
XaX&v, etTre 7T/>oy TOV
' Eiravdyaye ety TO /3ddo?, KOU.
)(aXAcraT TO, BLKTVO. vfitav els
3/ K .TT7- \ . /I ^ C V'
aypav, - M.O.I mroKpiaeif o ^L-
fj.<ov e'tTrfv avT&, ' JSTrtoraTa, 81
rijy VVKTOS
ov8ev e\a/Sofjt.v em <5e rS prj-
IJLO.TL crov
TO SLKTVOV.
Kou TOVTO TrotqcravTes, trvv-
e/cAetcrav lOvcDV irXrjOos iroXv-
8e TO SIKTVOV av-
KEVISED VERSION.
ships standing by the lake ; but
the fishermen, ^having gone out
of them, were washing Hheir
nets. And, 'entering into one 3
of the ships, which was Simon's,
J he asked him k to put off a little
from the land. And he sat
down, and taught the crowds
out of the ship. And when 'he 4
ceased speaking, he said to
Simon, "Put oft 7 into the deep,
and let down your nets for a
draught. And Simon, answer- .6
ing, said to him, Master, we
have toiled "through the whole
night, and taken nothing ; "yet,
at thy word, I yfall let down the
net. And when they had done 6
this, they inclosed a great mul-
titude of fishes; 11 and their
net 'was breaking. And they 7
e " haying gone out ; " dito/Savres. Thomson, M., Thelwall.
Castalio, " digress! ; " Schott, " degress! ; " Span., " habiendo
salido."
h " tlieir nets : " to. Sixrua. As this is a case, where the
article is used with the force of a possessive pronoun, it is not
necessary to italicize " their," inasmuch as it is not a supplement.
Kuhner, Gram., \ 2^4. 4, " The article very often takes the place
of the possessive pronoun, wlieu it is connected with such sub-
stantives .as naturally belong to a particular person (equally true
of a particular tiling,) mentioned in the sentence. In such cases,
the English uses the possessive pronoun." In cases, where the
article has this force, there is no emphasis; otherwise, the pronoun
is employed.
1 " entering ; " ifc/3a s . Kend., Scanett, Penn, Dick., M. The
participial construction is adopted by Wesley, Norton, and Thel.
Eras, -and Beza, " ingressus ; " S. Fr., " etant monte ; " Span.,
" entrando ; " -Diodati, " essendo montato."
1 "he asked ;" ^><wTi7<7f. "Wakef., Sharpe, Norton, Angus,
Thelwall. So E. V. This word occurs in N. Test, fifty-seven
times. In thirty-five of these, it is rendered " ask," ill E. Y.
"Prayed," in the sense of earnest entreaty, is too intensive, in this
instance.
k "to put off;" lna.vaya.yelv. Thorn., Scarlett, Camp., M.,
Angus. Rob. (Lex.) : "In N. Test, as a nautical term, to lead
(a vessel) up or out upon the sea, to put out." The thought is best
exhibited by " put off," as that is the usual expression among men,
who " do business in great waters." S. Fr., " de Teloigner." The
smiple verb avayea&af is defined by Kuincel (Luke 8 : 22) :
" Verbum nauticum, de iis proprium, qui solvunt e litore vel
portu, et altum petunt." 'Etti (in composition) here has the force
of our English suffix " ward." Bloomf. (in loco.)
i " he ceased ; " eitavoaro. Eendrick, Angus, Wesley, Penn,
Rob. (Lex., in verbo.) Vulg., Mont, Eras., Beza, " cessavit ; "
S. Fr., " il eut cesse ; " Iber., " ceso." As an alternative, the
familiar expression, " when he had done speaking." So Thorn.,
Scarlett, Wakef., Camp.
m " Put off ; " htavdyaye. See v. 3, npte on this word.
11 " through the : whole night ; " ,81 Shys rfjs wxros. Sharpe,
Dick., " during the whole night." Thelwall. This rendering
preserves the appropriate sense of Bui, " through," and Sios,
not " all," but the " whole." Liddell (-Lex.) Schott, " per inte-
gram noctem;" Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, "per tptam noctem;"
Iber., " toda la noche."
" yet ; " Ss. Penn, Kend.
P A semicolon is substituted for the colon of the E. V., after
" fishes," on the ground, that the two members of the sentence
are too closely connected to allow the former point. As the
Greek colon is equivalent to either, the construction must guide
us in punctuation. So Scarlett, Wakef., Penn, Sharpe. The
S. Fr., Iber., and Diodati .have a semicolon.
" was breaking ;" Sie^yvurft. Scarlett, Sharpe, Bloomf.
(N. Test.), Trollope (N. Test.) Vulg. and Erasmus, " rumpeba-
tur;" Beza, " dirumpebatur ; " De Wette, "es zerriss [fast]."
The ordinary signification of the imperfect, continued action, is
appropriate. The literal rendering is preferred to another, which
might present the thought, viz., " began to break." This last is
found in several late versions, and is recommended by Kuincel
44
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LTJKE. CHAP. V.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
7 And they beckoned unto their
partners, which were in the other
Bhip, that they should come and
help them. And they came and
filled both the ships, so that they
began to sink.
8 "When Simon Peter saw it, he
fell down at Jesus' knees, saying,
Depart from me ; for I am a sinful
man, Lord.
9 For he was astonished, and
all that were with him, at the
draught of the fishes which they
had taken.
10 And so was also James and
John, the sons of Zebedee, which
were partners with" Simon. And
Jesus said unto Simon, Fear not :
from henceforth thou shalt catch
men.
11 And when they had brought
their ships to land, they forsook
all, and followed him.
12 And it came to pass, when
GREEK TEXT.
T>V, 7 /cat Karevevcrav rots f*e-
To~xpis rois ev T< Grepcp -irXoico,
TOV tXOovras eruAAajQeo-^at aw-
/cat rjXdoVy /cat en-Xrjcrav
TO, TrXoia, toore f3v6i-
8 ioa>v 8
air
aura.
Jlerpos TTpocreTreo'e TOLS
TOV 'Irj(rov 9 Xe-ycov,
e/j.ov } OTI dvr/p ap,apTa>Xos el
Kvpie. s Odfjifios "yap Trepiear^ev
OLVTOV /cat Trdvras row arvv aurw,
eVt rJ7 a,-ypa T>V l~)(6v(av 17 <rvv-
'\ n 10' ' !> x ^ ' T '
eAapov o/iotcoy oe /cat J.a.KG>-
fiov /cat ' Icodvvijv, viovs Zej3e-
Saiov, ot r/a-av Koivavoi TO> Si-
fjiciivt. Kai eiire irpos TOV SifMcova
o 'Ir)(rovs } MT] (poj3ov f aVo TOV
vvv dvOpcoirovs eery ^coypoov.
11 Kai KccTa-yayovres TO. TrAota
eVt Trjv yijV) a<p4vTes airavra,
12
Tr~ AT 3 *' 3 ~
KA1 e-yeveTO ev TCO
REVISED VERSION.
/
beckoned to their partners, who
were in the other ship, 'to come
and help them. And they came,
and filled both ships, so that
they 'were sinking. And when 8
Simon Peter saw it, he fell
down at Jesus' knees, saying,
Depart from me, for I am a sin-
ful man, Lord. For 'amaze- 9
ment seized him, and all who
were with him, at the draught
of fishes, which they had taken :
and so, also, "it seized James and 16
John the sons of Zebedee, who '
were partners with Simon. An'd
Jesus said to Simon, Fear not,
T henceforth w thou wilt catch
men. And when they had H
brought their ships to "the
land, "they left all, and follow-
ed him. And it came to pass, 12
" Si yere ruptum faisset rete nihil piseiura retinussent ; ergo verti
debent hsec verba : rumpi incipiebat, vel, parum dberat quin rum-
peretur Ita quoqne v. 7 extr. verba taare pv&i&o&ai avra.
rerti debent : wt fere mergerentur, vel mergi inciperent."
' " to come ; " liavras. Thorn., Wesley, Scarlett, "Wakef.,
Perm, Sharpe, Norton, Camp., Kend., M., Thelwall.
" were sinking ; " fivd-fceod-ai. Thelwall, Bloomf. (N. Test.),
Trollope (N. Test.) See note on Sie^^ywro, v. 6.
' " amazement seized ; " &afi@os iteqieazev. Thorn., Sharpe,
Norton, Penn have " amazement." Mont., Beza, " stupor occu-
paverat." Syriac, )oai oi^| JouiaZ ("stupor apprehendebat
eum"). M., "had seized." See note on ch. 4:36. A more
literal rendering than that of the E. V. is desirable. That
revision seems to make no distinction between &d/tfios and
txmaais. It is deemed best in this revision to render the first
" amazement," and the latter " astonishment." The significations
of the words in Hellenistic usage (or that of the latter Greek
writers) seem to be confounded, though classic authors employed
ixaraats to indicate the stronger emotion, as its cognate verb
(" to be distracted," from fear, rage, etc.) shows.
" "it seized." This supplement is introduced because
iteqiioyfv is understood before 'laxcofiov and lio&vvriv, while the
clause " at taken " is so long, that the next member of the sen-
tence becomes obscure, if the verb is not repeated. Common
readers, regarding " James " and " John " as nominatives, can find
no verb with which they are construed. As an illustration, I
quote a late translator : " For astonishment seized him, and all
that were with him, at the draught of fishes, -which they had
taken. And in like manner, also, James and John, the sons of
Zebedee, who were partners with Simon." In this rendering,
there is an obvious failure as to perspicuity.
T " henceforth ; " cato tov vuv. Thorn., Wakefield, Norton,
Camp. See ch. 1 : 48, note.
w " thou wilt catch ; " ion Zioyqcov. Scarlett, " thou wilt be
a captor." M. " Wilt " is employed here on the ground that
the language is prophetic. Literally, "thou wilt be catching."
Montanus, " eris capiens." Kuincel: "Verba autem venandi et
piscandi perquam frequenter ponuntur de iis, qui sibi vel aliis
aliquem conciliant."
1 " the land ; " ir t v yrjv. Thelwall. The article is as properly
retained here as in v. 3, where the E. V. rightly has " from the
land," ana -rijs yrjs. Compare v. 3 (nno -rrjs yfjs), or Mark 6 : 47.
The noun in these cases is definite, as it stands contrasted with
~> " they left ; " ay&nes. Thomson, Wakef., Sharpe, Norton,
Dick., Kend., Angus. In the parallels, Matt. 4 : 22. and Mark
1:20, ay sines is rendered " they left " in the E. T. ' To leave "
is a common equivalent of this verb in the E. T.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. Y.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
he -was in a certain city, behold, a
man full of leprosy : who seeing
Jesus, fell on kis face, and besought
him, saying, Lord, if thou wilt,
thou canst make me clean.
13 And he put forth his hand
and touched him, saying, I will :
Be thou clean. And immediately
the leprosy departed from him.
14 .And he charged him to tell
no man: but go, and shew thyself
to the priest, and offer for thy
cleansing, according as Moses
commanded, for a testimony unto
them.
15 But so much the more went
there a fame abroad of him : and
GREEK TEXT.
avrov ev jjua. r(av TroAecov, /eat
I8ov } avrjp rrXriprjs XtTrpas' /cat
ISoav TOP 'Iij(rovv } 7re<ra>z> em
7rp6a-(i>7rov, eSerjOij avrov, Xeywv,
Kvpie, eav OtXys, Svva<rai fj,e
Kadapicrcu. 13 K(ti e/cretW? rrjv
X^P a ) tftya-To O.VTOV, eiiraiv, Oi-
Aa>, Kadapicrdijn. Kai evOtcos
77 AeTTyOa aTrrjXdev air avTOV.
Kal O.VTOS Traprj'/'yeiXev avrw
/j,r}Sevi eitrelv aAAa cnreXdcbv
TCO lepeif /cat
irepi rov Kadapur/J-ov
, Kadcas irpoa-era^e JSfaocrijf,
els fnaprvpiov avTols. 15 Atrjp^e-
TO 8e /iaAAov o Aoyoy irepl avrov'
REVISED VERSION.
when he was 'in one of the
cities, behold, a man full of
leprosy, "seeing Jesus, fell on
his face, and besought him, say-
ing, Lord, if thou wilt, b thou
canst cleanse me. And c he 13
stretched out his hand and
touched him, saying, I will, ""Be
cleansed. And immediately the
leprosy departed from him.
And he charged him 'to tell no 14
one ; but go, show thyself to
the priest, and offer f on account
of thy cleansing, s as Moses
commanded, for a testimony to
them. But h the report 'con- 15
corning him 'spread abroad "the
1 " in one of the cities ; " ev fitS. tdiv itoiecov. Thorn., Sharpe,
Scarlett, Penn. Norton, " one of the towns." The rendering
of the E. V. is copied from Tyndale, who followed Erasmus, " in
qnadam civitate." The language of the Vulgate is more exact,
" in una civitatum." The miracle was wrought " in one of the
cities " of Galilee. See Matt. 4 : 23, 24 ; 5 : 1 ; 8 : 1-5. If we
regard the article riav as used with the force of a possessive (by
a common idiom, Kiihner, 244), then the rendering " in one of
their cities," that is, of the cities of the Galileans, would be
accurate and perspicuous. So Wakef., Angus. Belg., " in eene
dier steden" (" in one of those cities") ; De Wette, "in einer der
Stadte ; " S. Fr., " dans tine de villes ; " Iber., " en una de las
ciudades ; " Schott, '.' in una illarum urbium."
* " seeing ; " iStov. Sharpe, Scarlett, Penn, Dick. S. Fr.,
" ayant vu." The relative " who " is superfluous.
b " thou canst cleanse ; " Svvaaal xa&agiaac. Thomson,
Scarlett, Camp., Dick. So (E. V.) Matt. 8:2; 9 : 15 ; 12 : 29 ;
16 : 3. As " to cleanse " presents the thought represented by
the verb, it is preferable for the sake of conciseness and force.
Bob. (Lex.)
' " he stretched out ; " Ixteivas. Eob. (Lex., in verbo.) This
word occurs fourteen times in the N. Test. In eleven instances,
it is rendered by " stretch forth" in the E. V. So Wakefield,
Thelwall, Norton, Angus, " stretched forth." Camp., Scarlett,
Thorn., and M. have the participial construction " stretching
out."
d " Be cleansed ;" Ka&afiodyrt. Thorn., Scarlett, " Be thon
cleansed." See v. 12, note.
* "to no one;" /irjSevl. Eob. (Lex., in verbo), Wakefield,
Sharpe, Penn, Scarlett, Norton, Dick., Kend., Angus, Thelwall.
De "Wette, " niemandem ; " Belg., " niemand ; " Iber., " a nadie ; "
Diodati, " ad alcuno."
* " on account of thy cleansing ; " ^>) tov xaS-a^iafiov oov.
" For thy cleansing " was taken from the Vulgate, " pro emenda-
tione sua." The proper signification is given by Castalio, " ob
tni purgationem." So S. Fr., " au sujet de ta purification ; "
Iber., " con respecto a tu limpia." Robinson (ite^l, cum genit.)
remarks that this preposition is employed, when the genitive
indicates the ground, motion, or occasion of the action. Headers
often suppose that " for thy cleansing " means, that the offering
was necessary to effect a complete cleansing, instead of serving as
^notification, that a perfect cure had already taken place.
" as ; " tea&as. "Wesley, Sharpe, Scarlett, Norton, Kend.
"According " seems to add nothing to the ordinary force of " as,"
in this instance. The later Greek writers, in a multitude of cases,
have used xa&cos (" even as," " just as ") in place of cos.
h " the report ; " o ioyos. "Wakef., Angus, Scarlett, Norton,
Belg., " het geruchte." Eob. (Lex., loyog.} As an alternative
rendering the literal one, " the word." De Wette, " die Eede ; "
Dan., " Talen." Vulg., Eras., Mont., and Schott have sermo, in
some of its inflections. "We have familiar expressions which
correspond with this rendering : " He brought word," " What is
the word ? "
1 " concerning him ; " jre^i avrov, Angus, Thel. Norton,
" concerning Jesus." See ch. 4 : 14, note. This is a frequent
rendering of nefii (cum gen) in the E. V.
J " spread abroad ; " 81^^10. Sharpe, Kend., M. Literally,
" went through," with an accusative (rrjv %fuqav, " the region ")
understood. Wakefield, " was spreading abroad ; " Penn, Nor-
ton, " spread." " Went abroad " with " report " for its .nomina-
tion, would not be in harmony with our twtw loqaendi. This ia
true also of " fame," which was copied from the Genevan into the
E. V.
k " the more ; " fiattor. Genevan, Wesley, Penn, Wiclif,
Scarlett, Sharpe, Kend., M. There is nothing in the text to
authorize the words " so much," which were introduced by Tyn-
46
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE CHAP. V.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
great multitudes came together to
hear and to be healed by him of
their infirmities.
16 And he withdrew himself
into the wilderness, and prayed.
17 And it came to pass on a
certain day, as he was teaching,
that there wre Pharisees and
doctors of the law sitting by,
which were come out of every
town of Galilee, and Judea, and
Jerusalem : and the power of the
Lord was present to heal them.
18 And, behold, men brought in
a bed a man which was taken
with a palsy : and they sought
means to bring him in, and to lay
Mm before him.
Kal
GEEEK TEXT.
oyXoi iroXXol
Kal BepcLirevfa-Qai VTT
oaro r5>v
O.VTOS
V7TO-)(captav fv rais
17
Kal
v fua TO>I>
KOU avroy i]v SiScuTKoav
Kal r/aav Kadr/fievot $api(raioi
Kal vofj.o8i8dcrKaXoi } 01 rjorav cXrj-
XvQores IK iraa-r/y Ka>p.rjs rrjs
IJaXtXaias Kal 'lovSalas Kal '/e-
Kal SvvafjLis Kvpiov
'
*
i]v
18 '
/cat
TO iao-oai O.VTOVS.
ISov, avSpes (pepovres firl
avOpanrov oy rjv 7ra/>aAeAvfieVoy,
Kal
avTov
Kal Q&.VO.L fvcomov avrov' 19 Kal
REVISED VERSION.
more ; and great crowds came
together to hear, and to be
healed by him of their infirmi-
ties. And 'he used to with- 16
draw into "solitary places, and
pray. And it came to pass n
on "one of the days, as he was
teaching, that there were Phar-
isees and "teachers of -the law
sitting by, who had come out
of every village of Galilee and
Judea, and ""from Jerusalem;
and the power of the Lord was
present to heal them. And, 18
behold, men brought on a bed,
a man 'who was palsied; and
they were seeking to bring him
in, and lay him before him. And 19
dale, probably as a supplement, though the early Eng. translators
(except Cranmer) omitted to distinguish supplementary words
by the Italic letter. Bob. (fiSttov) : " Intens. the more, the
rather, much more." Rendered by " the more," (E. Y.) Mark
14 : 31. John 5 : 18. Acts 5 : 14, etc.
i "And he used to withdraw;" qv vno%ca$&v. This peri-
phrasis of the verb and participle indicates habitual action;
having the force of the imperfect. Troll., Gram., p. 130, obs. 4.
Kuinoel (in loco) : "Tlv vno^co^av pro v7te%cogec, secedebat, se sub-
ducebat, quo sensu hoc verbum etiam legitur." "Watefield, " he
continued withdrawing himself;" Sharpe, "and he was with-
drawn in the desert ; " Norton, " he often withdrew ; " Thorn.,
" he constantly withdrew ; " Iber., " el se retiraba."
m "solitary places;" lv rats tyy/tots. The expression is
full in the parallel, Mark 1 : 45, h> l^ftois tonots, where it is
properly rendered " solitary places " in the E. V. " In the
wilderness " (singular) was taken from the "Vulg., " in desertum."
More accurately Mont., Eras., Beza, " in desertis." Oastalio, " in
deserta loca." Kuinoel (in loco) : " 'JEv ralg e^ftots scl.
pro slsras egrifiovs, in solitudinem."
" " on one of the days ; " lv ftta rdiv fjftijyiuv. Sharpe, Thel.,
M. Penn and Scarlett, " on one of those days ;" Vulpr., Mont.,
" unJl dierum ; " Schott, " aliquo dierum." Syr., |AiaaI fLo..
Heb. N. Test., ts^n iniO. The phrase "on one "of the days"
is literal, yet we have an expression which presents the thought
more happily, in accordance with our idiom, " one day ; " so that
the passage would be, " and it came to pass, one day, as," etc.
So Wakef., Thorn., Norton. I suggest this as an alternative
rendering.
".teachers of the law;" vofioStSdvxalot.. So (E. V.)
1 Tim. 1 : 7. Penn, M., Sharpe, "Wakef., Norton, Dick. Belg.,
"Leeraars der "Wet;" De Wette, " Gesetzlehrer ; " Iberian,
" maestros de la lei ; " Dan., " Lov-L6rere." Heb, N. Test.,
J-ni'firt '''i.aia. Syr., fjSoioJ . vS.v^ The rendering, according
to etymology, is exact, and it does not mislead the common
reader, who understands " doctor of the law " to be a title which
was once applied to those, who were learned in the Boman or
Canon law, but is now conferred, as a compliment, by literary
institutions.
P "from." "Wakef., M., Norton. Castalio, " ex Galilasae et
Judsea? vicis et ab Hierosolyma ; '' De "Wette, " aus-allen Dorfern "
von Galilaa und Judaa und aus Jerusalem ; " S. Fr., " de toutes les
bourgades de la Galilee, et de la Judee et de Jerasalem ; " Iber.,
" de toda aldea de la Galilea," The insertion of from is neces-
sary, on the .ground that as (he) " from " stands before (naotjs
xcoftqij " every village," the English reader is led to supply
that phrase before "Judea," and, finally, before ''Jerusalem."
The grammatical construction of our language obliges us to
regard the writer as speaking of " every village of Jerusalem ; "
whereas he refers to those, who came out of the villages of Gali-
lee, the villages of Judea,, and from the city of Jerusalem.
i " who was palsied ; " 8s rp> Ttagaiefaifitvos. Penn, Dick.,
Thelwall. Iber., " que estaba paralizado ; " Castalio, " qui erat
sideratus."
r "they were seeking ;" i^row. Thel. Continuance of action
is indicated here by the imperfect. The next sentence shows that
some time elapsed, before the carriers-of the paralytic ascertained
the impossibility of approaching the Saviour from the street-
door ; fa/ ev^ovres rtoias tloeveyxfoaiv avror Sin fov o/).or.
The supplement of the E. V., " means," (derived from Tyndale)
is superfluous. Nothing corresponding to it is found in 'Thorn.,
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. V.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
19 And when they could not
find by what way they might bring
him in, because of the multitude,
they went upon the house-top, and
let him down through the tiling
with his couch, into the midst
before Jesus.
20 And when he saw their faith,
he said unto him, Man, thy sins
are forgiven thee.
21 And the scribes and the
Pharisees began to reason, saying,
Who is this which speaketh blas-
phemies? Who can forgive sins
but God alone?
22 But when Jesus perceived
their thoughts, he answering, said
unto them, What reason ye in your
hearts ?
GEEEK TEXT.
fjarj evpovTes Sia TToias
triv O.VTOV 810. rov o^Aoz/, ara-
err! TO Scofjia, 8ia T&V
avrov o~vv T(p
ico els TO fiecrov efiwpocrdfv
~ > 7- 20 \>c>\ x
rov j[r)o-ov. Kai ioa>v rrjv
-rrivTiv avrwv, elirev avra>, *Av-
flpcoire, axfrtcavTai trot ai a/jLaprlou
<rov.
21
Kai
o ypocfj.fj.a.Tes KOI o
f&apicrcuoi, \eyovres, Tis ianv
OVTOS os AaAet ft\ao~(f)'r)[jLia$; TIS
SvvaTai afyievai a/AapTias, el {J.TJ
/xovos 6 Oeos; 22 'Einyvovs 8e
6 'Irjarovs TOVS 8ia.Xo-yicriJ.oijs av-
TU>V aaroKpideis ewre -Trpos avTovs,
Tl SiaXoyiecr0e ev TCUS Ka.p8ia.is
REVISED VERSION.
when they could not find
'through what way they might
bring him in, "on account of
the crowd, they went upon the
housetop, and let him down
through the tiling with the
little bed, into the midst, before
Jesus. And when he saw their 20
faith, he said, "Man, thy sins
are forgiven thee. And the 21
scribes and the Pharisees began
to reason, saying, Who is this,
that T uttereth revilings? Who
can forgive sins, "except God
*only? But when Jesus perceiv- 22
ed their thoughts, he, answering,
said to them, * Why z do ye reason
Wesley, Perm, Scarlett, Sharpe, Wakefield, Norton, Dickinson,
Camp., Kend., Thelwall, M., Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, Oastalio,
Schott, Belg., Luther, De Wette, Iber., Diodati, or Dan.
" through, what ; " violas. " Through " is italicized, as Sia
of the Textus Receptus is canceled by Griesbach, Tisch., Theile,
Lachm., Scholz, Bloomf.
" "on account of;" Sta (cum accus.). Rob. (Lex.), Kend.,
Norton, Dick., Thelwall. " Because of" is obsolete.
' " with the little bed ; " avv tto xhviSicp. Camp. G. Pr.
and S, Fr., " le petit lit." Rob. (Lex.). Bretsch. (Lex.) : " Eli-
viStov, diminutiv, a sdfrjj, lectulus, i. q. xlivaqtov, Luc. 5 : 19,
24." Liddell :" Diminutive from xUvij." The article on which
the paralytic lay, is termed x^a^ttrov, " coach," in the parallel,
Mark 2:4. At the commencement of the present narrative, Luke
first iises the generic term tcHty, "bed." It is deemed best to
follow the text exactly, and employ " little bed " as the equivalent
of the noun. The article receives its usual rendering. There is
no necessity for supposing it should be rendered by a possessive,
in this instance. The article is retained by "Wakef., Belg., De
Wette, Diodati.
" The reading of the Textus Beceptus, avriy, is canceled by
Griesbach, Lachmann, Tischendorf, Knapp, Theile. Schott says :
" Vulgo post elite* add. avreji retimiit Scholz, deleverunt Griesb.
aliique tanquam glossema, quum in aliquot codd. (B. L.) desidere-
tur Jtemque in Vss. Pers. (Whel.) et Vulg. apud alios obveniat
tcy vtttQakvTixca, sive rip a.v&(>tont$ omisso seq. av&^ajne." It
is highly probable that tania is spurious.
* "uttereth revilings?" iaiet plaoywias ; Dan., "taler
(Guds-)Bespottelser?" De Wette, " Lastei-ungen redet ?" Belg.,
" lasteringe spreekt ? " The verb " to utter " often occurs in the
E. V., Ps. 94 : 4. Prov. 23 : 33. Matt. 13 : 35. 1 Cor. 14 : 9.
Our idiom demands this rather than " to speak," before a comple-
ment like " revilings." Rob. remarks that the sense of i-alito is
often modified by adjuncts. In a note on Mark 2 : 7, the follow-
ing reason has been offered for translating, rather than trans-
ferring pHaoytifiias. " This word and its cognate verb have
acquired, in modern usage, a sense different from that which was
attached to them by the N. Test, writers. Hence, both should be
translated. In ecclesiastical parlance, 'blasphemy' has been
made to comprehend all kinds of verbal irreverence toward God
or his truth, such as wrong opinions clothed in words, mistaken
views and interpretations of the Scriptures. It has been used
as a convenient weapon by angry polemics. The ecdesiastifal
definition of 'blasphemy' is given by Linwood (quoted by N.
Webster) thus: 'Blasphemy is an injury offered to God, by
denying that which is due and belonging to him, or attributing
to him that which is not agreeable to his nature..' " See Rob.
on this word, and Campbell's Dissertations to his Translation of
the Four Gospels. Hebrew N. Test., ta^arr ni'DM. Syriaf ,
; %. vv* ("speaketh reproaches").
w " except ; " tl py. Scarlett, Norton, Campbell, Rob. (Lex.,
el /$.)
1 "only;" ftovos. Wesley, Angus, M., Tyndale, Cranmer,
Geneva, Rheims, Rob. (Lex., in verbo.) So ch. 4 : 8, av-tty ftovty
rfsvoeie, (E. V.) " him only shalt thou serve." This adjective
is sometimes adverbially; solus, i. e., non alius. Bretschneider,
Liddell,
r "Why;" 2V. Thorn., Wesley, Scarlett, Penn, Wakefield,
Dick. So (E. V.) in parallel, Mark 2 : 8. The pronoun is
neuter, and used as an adverb of interrogation. Rob. (Lex., in
verbo, A. 2.) Iber., " porque ? "
> " do ye reason." This arrangement accords with the ordi-
nary usage of our language. Both in conversation and vmting,
48
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. V.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
23 Whether is easier, to say,
Thy sins be forgiven thee ; or to
say, Rise up and walk ?
24 But that ye may know that
the . Son of man hath power upon
earth to forgive sins, (he said unto
the sick of the palsy,) I say unto
thee, Arise, and take up thy couch,
and go unto thine house.
25 And immediately he rose up
before them, and took up that
whereon he lay, and departed to
his own house, glorifying God.
26 And they were all amazed,
and they glorified God, and were
filled with fear, saying, We have
seen strange things to-day.
27 And after these things he
went forth, and saw a publican
named Levi, sitting at the receipt
of custom : and he said unto him,
Follow me.
28 And he left all, rose up, and
followed him.
GREEK TEXT.
, ' Afyeoovrai (rot al ap-ap-
(rov, 77 tiireiv, ' jEyeipai Kai
f 24. ft <**>** ff
iva of eiojyre on
eovo~iav e^et 6 vlos row avdpa>~
TTOU eVt rrjf -yrjf a(f)ievai ap.ap-
Tias, et?re TCO irapaXtX.vp.evcp, Sol
Xeyco, eyetpai, KCU apas TO K.Xwi-
Stov
O-QV.
crra? V&TTLOV avTcov, apas
Kare'/eetro, aTrrjXdzv etr TOV OIKOV
avTov, 8oda>v rov Qeov.
eXafiev anavTas,
TOV Oeov, KOI l
o~av (froftov, XeyovTes, OTI ei
fj.ev TrapaSo^a o~Tj[jiepois
27 Kai /J,Ta TavTa
KOI ededo-aTo TeXavrjv, bvop-aTi
Aeviv, KadrjiAtvov eVi TO TeXca-
viov, Kai ehrev avTm, 'A.KoXovdei
fj,Oi. 28 Kai KOTaXnTcav airav-
, avaarTas rjKoXovdrjcrev avT(p.
(rov, Tropevov ef TOV OLKOV
25 Kai iraana ava ~
26 KOI
REVISED VERSION.
in your hearts? Which is easier, 23
to say, Thy sins are forgiven
thee ; or to say, "Rise and walk ?
But that ye may know that the 24
Son of man hath 'power on
earth to forgive sins, (he saith
to c the paralytic,) Rise, take up
thy ^little bed, and go to thy
house. And immediately he 25
rose before them, and taking up
that on which he 'had been
lying, he departed to his house,
glorifying God. And "astonish- 26
ment seized all, and they glori-
fied God, and were filled with
fear, saying, We have seen
strange things to-day. And 27
*after this he went forth and
saw h a tax-gatherer, named
Levi, sitting at the tax-oflice;
and he said to him, Follow me.
And he left all, 'rose, and fol- 28
we now insert " do," in sentences of this kind. As an alterna^
tive, " -why are you reasoning ? " So Wakef.
" Rise ; " 'Eyei^ai. " Up " is superfluous. So Wakefield,
Thorn., Wesley, Scarlett, Sharpe, Norton, Dick., Camp. "Eise"
is adopted instead of " arise," from regard to present usage.
b " The rendering of the E. V., " power," has been retained,
still it is not without some question whether " authority " would
not be more exact. Compare Matt. 21 : 23, 24, 27; 28 : 18.
Mark 1 : 22, TJV ya(> StSaaxeov OVTOVS fos eiovotav. See Luke
4 : 6, note, and Bob. (Lex.) It seems obvious, however, that
in Hellenistic usage (as has been remarked in a former note,
ch. 4:6), the logical distinction between Svvaftes and etjovola is
often disregarded. Norton and Scarlett, "authority;" Schott,
" auctoritatem." Compare John 5 : 27.
" the paralytic ; " tcy izagcdEhftevty. More exactly (though,
perhaps, the change is not of any importance), " to him who was
palsied." See v. 18, note. Penn, Dick., Camp., " to the palsied
man."
" " little bed." See v. 19, note.
" had been lying ; " xarexeno. M. Schott, " discumbuerat."
The imperfect has sometimes the sense of the pluperfect, as in
Acts 4 : 13, kxeyivtooxov re avrovs on ovv t$ 'Iqoov %oav.
This usage is not limited to el/d, which has no pluperfect. Trol.
Gram., p. 132. (5.) Crosby's Gram., \ 579. (.) " He lay," being
equivalent to " he was lying," implies continuance of condition,
and is, therefore, inaccurate, as his recumbent posture ended before
he took up the couch.
f " astonishment seized all ; " Mafiev Satavtag. See ch. 5 : 9,
note. " Seized " is employed by Wakef., Penn, Sharpe, Norton,
Angus. Tulg., Beza, " stupor apprehendit omnes ; " Mont., " stu-
por cepit omnes ; " Eras., " stupor corripuit omnes ; " De "Wette,
" Staunen ergrhT alle ; " Diodati, " stupore occupo tutti ; " Belg.,
" ontzetlinge heeft [haar] alle bevangen." The force of the text
is brought out by this literal rendering. Thus Heb. N. Test,
bbs~iiK tnx ji'riHft. Syr., \ ti>iS _) ]aioZ.
T \ v ~ T ' T ? ^ *
e " after this ; " /teia. ravra. Thomson, Sharpe, Norton,
Camp., Kend. In expressing general ideas, or those including a
plurality of objects, the neuter plural is very commonly employed,
as in Latin, when in English we, from necessity, use the singular ;
e. g., elite ravra, "he said this." Buttmann, Gram., J128. 1.
Kiihner, $ 241. Eem. 3 : " The Greek very often uses the plurals
ravra, raSs, to express the idea in its whole extent. In the
English, these plurals are generally translated by the singular, as
this, that." The neuter plural refers to a single object, John
15 : 17, ravra evTeM.ofi.at vfitv, Iva ay cat are a)26iove.
h " a tax-gatherer ; " reHcovrjv. Scarlett, 'Sharpe, Wakefield,
Norton. See ch. 3 : 12, note.
1 " rose ; " avaaras. " Up," in the E. V., 13 superfluous. So
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. V.
49
KING JAMES' VERSION.
29 And Levi made him a great
feast in his own house ; and there
was a great company of publicans,
and of others that sat down with
them.
30 But their scribes and Phar-
isees murmured against his dis-
ciples, saying, Why do ye eat and
drink with publicans and sinners?
31 And Jesus answering, said
unto them, They that are whole
need .not a physician ; but they
that are sick.
32 I came not to call the right-
eous, but sinners to repentance.
GKEEK TEXT.
29 Kal eTTofyo-e Soyrjv fj.eyd\r)v 6
jtievis- avT<j> fv rfj OIKIO. aurotr
KOU. yv o%Xos T\03vS>v TroAuy, KOU
<xAA(j/ 01 rjcrav p.f.r avrwv Ka/ra-
KLfJLj/oi. 30 /cat iyoyyvfyv ol
ypaLifjiarels aurtav KOI ol <&api-
irpos Tovf ua0r]Taf O.VTOV,
A / N \ ^
ALO.TL /tera TeXwvcov
KOL aiiapTCoXcav etrdiere KOL irlve-
re; 31 Kail aTTOKpiQels o 'Irjcrovs
eare Trpos aurouy, Ov -^eiav
expvanv. ol vyiaivovres larpov,
aAA' ol KaKOjf expvrey. 32 OVK
', aAAa
EEVISBD YERSION.
lowed him. And Levi made a 29
great feast "for him J in his own
house; and there was a great
crowd of 'tax-gatherers and of
others, iwho reclined with them
at table. And m the scribes and so
Pharisees among them murmur-
ed against his disciples, saying,
Why do ye eat and drink with
tax-gatherers and sinners? And 31
Jesus, answering, said to them,
"Those, who are well, "hare no
need of a physician, but those,
who are sick, I have, not 32
come to call *t he righteous, but
Thorn., Wakef., Norton, Campbell, Dick., M. In the parallel
(B. V.), Matt. 9:9," up" is not employed. The usage of the
E. V. seems entirely arbitrary as to aviorq/tt; In about half the
instances where it occurs, we have no qualifying adverb. Concise-
ness and force (other things being equal) favor the omission of " up."
" "for him;" avrtu. This rendering and arrangement are
demanded by perspicuity. Thorn., Scarlett, Wakef., Norton, Penn.
1 " in his own house .;'.' & rrj oly.ia avrov. The E, V. renders
this passage as though avrov had the spiritus asper (avrov}. It
is quite possible that that copy of the Text. Recept., which the
Revisers of 1611 employed, was thus pointed. There is a great
want of uniformity in the printed Editions, where avrov occurs
in different passages in the N. Test. Thus Bagster, Erasmus,
Lachmann, Tischendorf, Trollope, and Bloomf. have avrov (ejus),
while Elzevir, Mill (Polymircrian Ed.), Stephens (third Ed., by
Wilson), Griesbach, Knapp, Theile, Tittmann have avrov (sua).
" His own " is retained on the authority of the Editions which
have avrov, as the ambiguity, which would result from " his," in
this construction, is avoided. According to our idiom, " his,"
and "him" (which precedes it) would be referred to the same
person, that is, Christ.
k " tax-gatherers." See ch. 3 : 12, note.
i " who reclined at table ; " ol rfoav y.araxcl/ievot. Kend.
Sharpe, "who were lying at meat;" De Wette, "welche bei
Tische lagen ; " Yulg., Mont:, " qui erant discumbentes ; " Eras-
mus, Beza, Schott, " qui accumbebant ; " Iber., " que estaban
recostados [a la mesa] ;" Rob. (Lex., in verbo), "to recline at
table ; " Bretsch., " de aaumbentibus menses, accumbo." 'Avanet-
fttei, when it refers to the position at meals, has the same signifi-
cation. These words are rendered uniformly in this Revision, as
well as in that of Mark.
" " the scribes and the Pharisees among them ; " ol yoafi-
ffarcls avr<5v xal ol 0a^iatttot. M., Scholefield, ^who makes
this remark : " The scribes and Pharisees ' of. them,' or, ' among
them.' Not, as the common version expresses it, the scribes
belonging to them ; but these among them who were scribes and
Pharisees." Kuincel : "Avrcov in nonnullis codd. et verss. deest,
male ac perperam ; nempe omiserunt hoc pronomen librarii, quo-
niam ignorabant, quo illud referendum esset. JToaft/tareZs avrcav
sunt, ut recte statuerunt Lud. De Dieu, Grotius, Rosenmullerus,
Boltenius, Paulvs, alii, legisperiti illtus loci, legisperiti Capernaumi-
tarum, vel Galileeorum, ut Matt. 11 : 1." Campbell presents the
thought accurately, though somewhat paraphrastieally, thus, " the
scribes and Pharisees of that place." The pronoun was employed,
beyond a doubt, to distinguish these men from those of the same
class, who resided at Jerusalem, and yet visited Galilee, when the
Saviour went through its cities and villages, preaching the good
news and working miracles, which excited attention at the capi-
tal. So during the ministry of John, John 1 : 19-24. See this
chapter (5), v. 17.
n " Those, who are well ; " ol vycatvovrcs. Blend., M., Wakef.,
Penn.Dick. Rob. (Lex., in l.,vyiaivea),"olvyiaivovrs, those well."
" have no need ; " ov ygeiav 'exotica*. So parallel (E. V.)
Mark 2 : 17. Scarlett, Angus, Thelwall, M. Belg., " en hebbeu
den Medicijnmeester niet van nooden ; " S. Fr., " ce ne sont pas
ceux qui sont en sante qui ont besoin de medecin 5 " Iber., " no
han menester de medico ; " Diodati, " non han bisogno di medi-
co." The parallels in Matt. (9 ; 12), Mark (2 : 17), and Luke
(5 : 31) agree exactly in the phrase ov %(>ela.v tyovqiv, while the
E. Y. renders Mark literally, as above, but Matthew and Luke,
"need not a physician." In this unnecessary diversity of render-
ing, Tyndale was copied. The Vulgate, with still less exactness,
has three different translations of the sentence in question.
r " I have not come ; " OVK tt,jfoa. Norton, Thel. While
in the parallels (Matt. 9 : 13, and Mark 2 : 17) we have the
aorist r^S-ov, " I came," the verb is here put in the second perf.
act. It should be distinguished in rendering from ril&ov. The
ordinary force of the perfect is exact, and more in accordance
with our usage, than the form which has been : termed a perfect
present, viz., " I am come." The E. V. copied Tyndale.
* " tlie." As dtxaiovs is anarthrous, and an article is necessary
before " righteous," when it stands absolutely, this article should
50
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TQ LUKEr-CHAP, Y,
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
33 And they said unto Mm,
Why do the disciples of John fast
often, and make prayers, and like-
wise the disciples of the Pharisees ;
but thine eat and drink ?
34 And he said unto them, Can
ye make the children of the bride-
chamber fast while the bridegroom
is with them ?
35 But the days will come, when
the bridegroom shall be taken
away from them, and then shall
they fast in those days.
36 And he spake also a parable
unto them : No man putteth a piece
of a new garment upon an old : if
otherwise, then both the new
maketh a rent, and the piece that
was taken out of the new, agreeth
not with the old.
37 And no man putteth new
wine into old bottles ; else the new
wine will burst the bottles, and
be spilled, and the, bottles shall
perish.
GREEK TEXT.
afiapTcaXovs els fieravoiav, ^ 01
8e earov irpos avTov, Atari ol
Tal 'Imavvov vqcrTevavcri
, Kal 8er]<reis iroiovvTai,
O/J.OLCOS KOI oi TG>V 0apio~at<ov ol
fie crol f&diovcn KOI <irlvovo~iv ;
^ '0 fie elire irpoy avTovs, Mrj
SwacrQe TOVS vlovs TOV
vos, ei> G> a WfJL(j)ios per av
ecFTL, Troirja-ai vr)<rTeveiu ; 35 eXev-
o~ovTai SerifJiepai) Kal orav airap-
0rj air avTcav o w patios- j Tore
vrjaTfvcrovo-tv lv eKeivais TOIS
ais. 36 "JEXeye fie Kal Trapa.-
rjv -jrpos avTOVs, On ovdels
fTTiffXTj/jLa ifj-ariov Katvov ewi$aX->
Xet em ifj-ariov iraXaiov el fie
/7ye, Ka TO Kaivov
T(J> iraXaico ov crvfj.(j)o)vei eirt
fj.a TO caro TOV KO.IVOV.
KCU
vSels /SaAAet olvov veov els
vs TraXatovs' el fie
i 6 veos olvos TOVS acr/couy,
avTos eKdrjo-eTai, Kal ol
HETISED VERSION,
sinners to repentance. And 33
they said to him, Why do the
disciples of John fast often,
and 'make prayers, and like-
wise the disciples of the Phari-
sees, but thine eat and drink ?
And he said to them, Can ye 34
make 'the sons of fte bride-
chamber fast while the bride-
groom is with them ? But the 35
days will come/when the bride-
groom will be taken away from
them, and then "they will fast
in those days. And T he also 36
spoke a parable to them ; "No
one putteth a piece of a new
garment on an old one, *else
^the new rendeth it, and 'the .
piece taken from the new,
agreeth not with the old. And 37
no one putteth new wine into
old bottles ; else the new wine
will burst the bottles, and "be
be italicized. The supplementary article may be thrown off by
using another supplement, thus " righteous men." Nothing, how-
ever, would be effected, except a greater departure from the
phraseology of the E. V., without real necessity.
r make prayers ; " Serfages itoiovvrai. As this phrase does
not harmonize with our usus loquendi, I suggest " pray " as an
alternative rendering. So Walcef., Scarlett, Murdoct.
" the sons ; " TOVS vloiig. Eobinson (Lex.), Scarlett, Sharpe,
Kend., Pechy (note on Angus' Manuscript Version), Thelwall, M.
Vulg. and Mont, "filios ; " Beza and Eras., " filii." Some late
translators have paraphrased this passage by " companions." A
literal rendering is preferred, for exactness. " Children " is too
loose.
^ " will be taken away ; " ccnap&fj. Where the language is
that of prediction, " will " is the proper auxiliary. Sq Scarlett,
Sharpe, Penn, Norton, Kend., M.
u " they will fast ; " vqorevaovoiv. This is the natural arrange-
ment. It is that of Kend., Dick., M.. Pechy and Q. (on the
parallel, Mark 2 : 20), Scarlett, Penn, Camp., M. The auxiliary
" will " is employed here on the principle mentioned in the last
note. It is used by Kendrick, Scarlett, Wakef., Penn, Norton,
Camp., Dick.
' " he also." This is the proper position of " also." M.
w " No one ; " ovdets. Norton, Wakef; This word should
be rendered literally. See ch. 1 : 61, note.
1 "else;" el Ss fcrfys, Eobinson (Lex., in loco, ye), Scarlett,
Wesley, Sharpe, Kendrick, Alternate, " otherwise." Kuinpel,
" alioque."
y "the new rendeth it;" to xeuvov a%X>ei. Scarlett, the
new tears it ; " Kend., " the new teareth it." The object of the
verb is expressed by the supplement it, representing l/ianov
na.la.iov. Beza, "illud novum findit veins." The passage is
susceptible of another rendering, which makes ib xtuvov the
object of oxi&i, thus, " he rendeth the new." So Wakef., Penn,
Angus, M. This is deemed less accurate, than the above trans-
lation.
1 " the piece taken from the new ; " iTti/Sitjfia to &jtb tov xat-
vov. Penn, Wakef., M., " the piece from the new." 'Ano should
have its usual force here (" from "), and ought not to be rendered
like EX, " out of." So Thelwall, Angus, M., Norton.
" be spilt ; " Ixxvd^aerat. This form of the part, of " to
spill " is preferred -to " spilled," as harmonizing with the usual
pronunciation, and being grammatically correct. The form
occurs in 2 Sam. 14 : 14 (E. V.), " as water spilt on the ground."
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VL
KING JAMB'S' VEBSiON.
38 But new wine must be put
into new bottles, and both are
preserved.
39 No man also having drunk
old wine, straightway desireth
new : for he saith, The old is
better.
CHIP. VIv
AND it came to pass on the
second sabbath after the first, that
he went through the corn-fields ;
and his disciples plucked the ears
of Corn, and did eat, rubbing t hem
in their hands.
2 And certain of the Pharisees
said unto them, Why do ye that
which is not lawful to do on the
sabbath-days ?
3 And Jesus answering them,
GHEES: TEXT.
atfkdi otiroXovvTai' 38 oAAa olvov
ueov elf dcrKovp kaivovf
6v> kal afJL(j)6tepoi
39 kctl ovSfif iriGiv TraAatoi* cu-
Ae'yei ya/>, '0
ecrftv.
o-/a-
CHAP. YI.
rco
aiirov Sia tS>v (riropifj.K>v kai
oi fjLadrjTal O.VTOV TOVS
Kal ^crBiOv, \jfcoj(ovTes
z rive? 8e TWV
<Papuraicov shrov avrofy> TL TTOI-
etre o OVA: e'^edTi Trotelv fv rols
a-d/B3acft ;
REVISED VEBSION;
spilt, and the bottles "will be
ruined. But new wine must be 38
put into new bottles, and both
are preserved. And no one 39
having drunk old wine, 'imme-
diately desireth new; for he
saith, The-old is better^
CHAP. VI.
AND it came to pass on E the l
first sabbath after the second
day of the passover, that he went
""through the fields of grain;
and his disciples plucked the
ears of grain, and ate, rubbing
them in 'their hands. And 2
some of the Pharisees said to
them, Why do ye that which it
is not lawful to do ''tin the sab-
bath? And Jesus, answering 3
b "will be ruined ;" and'f.ovvrai. Murd. Lidd. (iriverbo,oliHvft<.),
" Mid; IL, to be undongj ruined;" Bretseh. (in verbo, arioAHv/it),
" corrumpor, destruor" This rendering corresponds with present
usage. Though the preposition in composition with oHHv/ui is
often intensive, in other instances, it adds nothing to its force. In
reference to this, Liddell says, " also, simply, to fall into ruin, to
be undone:' Scarlett, and Wakef., " will be destroyed ; " Norton,
" would be spoiled ; " Camp., " be rendered useless;"
' "immediately;" ev&tcas. Rendered uniformly in this Re-
vision. So often in B. V. See Matt. 8 : 3 ; 14 : 31. Mark 1 : 31.
Luke 5 j 13; " Straightway " is obsolete.
* " the first sabbath after the second day of the passover;" Iv
itappaxy SevteQOTtQcorip. Scarlett, Dick., Kend., M. Wesley
and Angus, " the first sabbath after the second day of unleavened
bread ; " Schott, " sabbato primo post diem secundum festipascha-
lis;" D'e Wette, "an einem ersten Sabbath naeh dem zweiten
Tage des Passahs." Bob. (Lex., in verbo) : "Probably, the second-
first sabbath, as pr. n. for the* first sabbath after the second day
of unleavened bread connected with the passover." Bloomfield
remarks that fhe only plausible interpretation of "this obscure ex-
pression," which has any semblance of truth, is that of Theoplylact
and Euthymius among the ancients, and Scaliger, Lightfoot,
Cassa'ub'on, Whitby, Schleusner, Kuincel, etc., of the moderns,
namely, that the sense is the first sabbath after the second day of
unleavened bread; namely, that on which the wave-sheaf was
commanded to be offered up, arid from whidh, arid not the first
day of the passover, the fifty days were to be reckoned to the
pentecost. Hence, it is no wonder that all the sabbaths from the
passover t6 the pentecost should have taken their appellation,
&TCO tfjs Sewctyos rov itao%aros. Kuinoel : " Sabbato primo
post secundum diem Paschatos, hsec enim hujus vocis interpretatio,
que Scaligertfin auctorem habet, quern plurimi interpretes secuti
siirit, reliquis interpretationibus omnino prseferanda videtur, cum
riitatur argumentis historicis." Should it be thought that the
supplement "day of the passover" partakes too much of the
character of a commentary, then this expression is suggested as a
substitute, " on a sabbath named the second-first." In this case,
the following marginal reading would be appropriate, " Probably,
the first sabbath after the second day of the passover."
b " through the fields of grain ; " Sta. tSv onoqifKov. Kend.
Norton, " a field of grain." The following note by the Reviser,
on the parallel, Mark 2 : 21, will explain the ground of this ren-
dering. "The literal sense of this adjective is 'sown,' hence
sometimes ' fit for sowing ; " yfj oitoqlfta, ' seed-land.' Like the
Latin ' sata,' it is also used for the crops growing in the fields,
segetes. Bretseh., ' agri consiti, segetes.' Here it refers to the
crops, the grain standing in the fields. As it is obviously generic,
it is properly rendered by ' grain,' or ' fields of grain.' ' Grain '
being the name of the edible portions Of certain plants, which
constitute the chief food of man and beast, as wheat, rye, barley,
maize, and oats. See Webster on ' Grain.' "
" their hands ; " IO.TS x e ^L The article is here used in the
sense of the possessive pronoun. Crosby, Gram., 482 : "With
substantives which are rendered definitive by the connection, the
article has often the force of a possessive." Hence, in such cases,
it is not necessary to mark the possessive, in translation, as a
supplement. Kuhner, Gram., \ 244. 4.
d "on the sabbath?" iv rois adppaot; So (E. V.) in tha
parallel, Mark 2 : 24. In the parallel, Matt. 12 : 2, the text ia
aajSpdrtp (E. V., " upon the sabbath-day.") " Days," in this
place, is superfluous. In this Revision, " day " is used, in connec-
tion with " sabbath," only where rjftefa. occurs in the text. The
plural form ra. aappaTa is most generally employed as a singu-
lar. Rob. (Lex.) Kuinoel, on Matt 12 : 1, says : " In plnrali
52
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. TL
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
said, Have ye not read so much
as this, what David did when him-
self -was an hungered, and they
which were with him ;
4 How he went into the house
of God, and did take and eat the
shew-bread, and gave also to them
that were with him, which it is
not lawful to eat but for the priests
alone ?
5 And he said unto them, That
the Son of man is Lord also of the
sabbath.
6 And it came to pass also on
another sabbath, that he entered
into the synagogue, and taught :
and there was a man whose right
hand was withered :
GREEK TEXT.
avTOvs eiTrev 6 'Irjcrovy, OvSe
TOVTO ave-yv&Te, o ejrouqo-e Aa~
/8t5, OTTOTC eireivaurfv O.VTOS Kal
ol per avTov ovresj 4 as etcr^A-
Oev els TOV O'IKOV TOV deov,
TOVS apTovs rrjs irpoOecreas
/3e, /cat !<j&aye, KOL ei5a>/ce /cat
TOIS fiT avTov, ovs OVK e^ea-n
0ayeii> et jw) p.ovovs"Tovs iepets;
5 .STal eAeyeu aurots, "On Kvpios
ko~nv b vlos TOV avOpoarov /cat
TOV crafipaTOv.
B ' TZ f ^^
oe
/cat ev
cra$3arG> eto-eA$eti> avTov els
TTJV crvvo.yoyyT]v /cat 8i8d(rKei
l fjv GKCL avdpcoTrog, Kal T] X^i
REVISED VERSION.
them, said, 'Have ye not reau
even that, which David did,
when he 'was hungry, and
those who were with him ;
how he went into the house of *
God, and Hook and 'ate the
'show-bread, and gave also *to
those with him, which it is not
lawful >/or any to eat except
fhe priests m only? And he 5
said to them, "The 'Son of man
is Lord also of the sabbath.
And it came to pass also an 6
another sabbath, that he enter-
ed into the synagogue and
taught : and "there was a man
there whose right hand was
rozs oapfSttoi nulla vis quaerenda est, sed pluralis vim habet sin-
gularis, ut ap. Joseph., Antiq., Ill : 10, 1 xara Ss sfiSoftsv %f
(>av, JJTIS aaftftara xaiclrat. Etiam interpretes Alexandrini pro
nai? nunc oafi/Sator, ut Bxod. 11 : 14 nunc oafifiara, ut Jerem.
17 : 21, 24, ponere solent." The above rendering is adopted by
"Wesley (" on the sabbath-day "), "Wakefield, Norton, Campbell,
Dick;, Kend., Angus, M. Heb. N. Test., naiart bl'ia. Syr.
JiuoLs. De "Wette, " am Sabbath ; " S. Fr., " en un sabbat ; "
Iber., " in el dia de reposo." See Bretsch.
e " Have ye not read even this, which ; " OvSe TOVTO avlyvco-
IE,O. Gray (note on Angus). De Wette, " Habt ihr nicht ein-
mal diess gelesen, "was " ; Iber., " Ni aun aquello habeis leido
que hizo David" . Bob. (Lex., ovSs), "not even." This sen-
tence may be more concisely rendered, " Have ye not read even
what David," etc. Wesley, " Have ye not read even this, what,"
etc.
f " was hungry ; " eitetraaev. Sharpe, M., Kend. So most
of the later English translators. " Was an hungered," introduced
by Tyndale, has long been obsolete.
1 "those who were;" ol ovreg. Present usage demands
" those who," rather than " they which," " they that," or, " they
who." In the parallel, Mark 2 : 25, the text has simply ol (with-
out ovres), hence, in the Eevision, it was rendered " those" (with
him, etc.). But, as in the passage here, the participle is expressed,
the above rendering is adopted as exact. Several later trans-
lators overlook ovreg, and render thus, " those with him." So
Kend., Norton, M. The participle is rendered as a finite verb
by Penn, Scarlett, Sharpe, Angus, Thelwall. De Wette, "die
bei ihm waren;" S. Fr., " ceux qui etaient;" Iber., "los que
con el estaban.
h " took ; " &la/?. There is no emphasis which demands the
auxiliary " did." So Kend., Scarlett, Wesley, Sharpe, Wakef.,
Penn, Norton, Thelwall, M.
1 " ate." As " did " is rejected from the preceding verb, this
imperfect is a matter of course. See last note.
i "show-bread;" Wesley, Norton. This orthography harmon-
izes with the pronunciation, and corresponds with the verb from
which "show " is derived. See Webster (Diet.), " Show-bread."
k "to those with him;" role fiei avrov. In the parallel,
Mark 2 : 26, the participle occurs thus, role avv enrztj' <>&
Hence, in revising that book, the sentence was rendered, "to
those who were with him." In this passage, as the participle is
not expressed, the simple form, " to those with him," is adopted.
See v. 3, note. So Kend., M. Mont, " his cum ipso."
i "for any." Penn, "for any one." Angus, Scarlett, M.
Unless we change the order of the sentence, this, or a similar
supplement is demanded for the sake of perspicuity. So Wesley
and Pechy, in the parallel, Mark 2 : 26, where the text is the
same. It has been suggested in the note on Mark 2 : 26, that
this change in the order would render the supplement unnecessary,
viz., " which none were allowed to eat except the priests," The
introduction of the supplement iSideemed preferable to a new
arrangement of the words. The harshness of the phraseology in
the E. V. requires an amendment here. Compare S. Fr., " quoi-
qu'il ne soit permis qu'aux seuls sacrificateurs d'en manger;"
Iber., " que es licito comer sino a solos los s.acerdotes."
n " only ; " fiovovs. See ch. 5 : 21, note. Thorn., Penn, Angus,
Wesley, Typdale, Geneva, Cranmer, Wiclif, Eheims. De Wette,
" sondern nur den Priestern ; " Belg., " dan alleen den Priesteren."
1 0ri, before xv^ios, is a mere sign indicating that the words
of another are recited. It answers the purpose of our quotation
marks. See Rob. (Lex., in verbo). The word is properly left
untranslated by Scarlett, Wesley, Sharpe, Wakef., Penn, Norton,
Camp., Kend., Angus, M., De Wette, Belg., S. Fr., Iber., Dan.,
Diodati.
" there was a man there ; " TJV ixst av&ftonoe. So the
THE wUSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VI.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
7 And the scribes and Pharisees
watched him, whether he would
heal on the sabbath-day ; that they
might find an accusation against
him. . .
8 But he knew their thoughts,
and said to the man which had
the withered hand, Rise up, and
stand forth in the midst. And he
arose, and stood forth.
9 Then said Jesus unto them, I
will ask you one thing ; Is it law-
ful on the sabbath-days to do good,
or to do evil ? to save life, or to
destroy it?
10 And looking round about
upon them all, he said unto the
man, Stretch forth thy hand. And
he did so : and his hand was
restored whole as the other.
GREEK TEXT.
avrov 77 Se^id TJV rjpd. irape-
rypovv 8e avrov ol y/jaju/zareiy
Kal ol &apt(ra.ioi, d ei> TCJ> <ra/3-
ftdrea OfpairevaeL- iva evpcocri
avrov, 8 O.VTOS 5e
rovy diaXoyia-fJLovf avr&v,
ebre TO> dvOpcoirq) rw
TT/V X e W a > * EytLp
fls TO fjLfcrqv. ' Se dva-
\ Jt/ 9 ' TJ3 ? * T
o~Tas eo~rrj. -Crwrev ovv o Irj-
Q-OVS irpos avTOVS,
vfidf, TL e^Ga-Tt TOIS
r) KaK07roiijo-ai;
oaro\e(rai; w lal
irdvras avrovs,
'
XP 1 * o~ov. '0
/cat dTTOKaTeo'Taffrj 77
OVTCO.
aurov
REVISED VERSION.
withered. ' And the scribes and 7
Pharisees watched, him <&> see
whether he would heal on the
sabbath ; that they might find
an accusation against him. But 8
he knew their thoughts, and
said to the man who had the
withered hand, Rise up and
stand in the midst. And he
rose and 'stood. Then Jesus 9
said to them, I will ask you
"something; Is it lawful T on
the sabbath to 'do good, or to
do evil ? to save life, or to de-
stroy it? And looking "round 10
on them all, he said *to him,
'Stretch out thy hand. And
he did so : and his hand was
the parallel (E. T.) Mark 3 : 1. This arrangement is most
agreeable to our itsus loquendi. In this and similar con-
structions, the first " there " is merely an euphonic particle. So
Sharpe.
f A period is placed after " withered," in conformity with the
text (|<?(>a.) This is the punctuation of Scarlett, "Wesley, Wakef.,
Sharpe, Norton, Camp., Dick., Belg., De Wette, Iber., Dan.,
Diodati, Tyndale, Cranmer, Geneva, E. V. of 1611, Oxford Bible,
Edd. 1802 and 1852, Oxford N. Test, of 1852.
" to see." Tyndale, M., Thorn., Camp., Dick. S. Fr., "pour
wir;" Span., "para ver." This supplement is necessary to avoid
a violation of our idiom. Critics are divided as to the genuine-
ness of avrov. It is found in B, the earliest MS. extant, and in
the Syriac. I should hesitate to cancel it.
* " Forth," after " stand," is not authorized by the text. It
was taken from Beza, who rendered oTtjd-i by " adsta,'' when it
should have been represented simply by " sta," as in the Vulg.
and Eras. " Forth " has been omitted by Thomson, Scarlett,
Wakef., Sharpe, Norton, Camp., Dick., Thelwall, M.
For the omission of " forth," see last note.
" "something;" rl. The punctuation of the different Edi-
tions of the Greek text varies here. Bagster, Erasmus, Scholz,
Lachmann, and Trollope place a comma after vfias, while Gries-
bach, Knapp, Theile, Tittmann put the colon in the same place.
As far as the rendering is concerned, these form one class, and we
might render, " I will ask you, what is lawful on the sabbath? "
But there is another punctuation which places the colon after tl,
which is then regarded as the indefinite pronoun, thus, 'ETtB^cot^-
oa> vftSs w "E&ort y.. r.L So the Editions of Stephens, as pub-
lished by Wilson (1831), Mill (in Polymic.), Schott, Kuinrel,
Bloomf. This punctuation is that which was followed by the
E. V. Kuincel defends it thus : " In multis codd. et verss. con-
jungitur ri cum sequentibus : Ineacotiiaio v/ttas' ti lart rols
oafifiaotv x. T. L interrogabo yos ecquid licet die sabbati bene an
male facere? ut adeo tl sit idem quod nfaeqov sed vulgaris
verba distinguendi ratio, qua ii cum fycorfaca, et post vl plene
interpungitur : quizstionem vobis proponam licetne, etc., utpote
siniplicissima praeferenda videtur, et confirmetur ea loco Matt.
21 : 24, ubi simili praefatione interrogationem exorditur." Bloom-
field remarks : " The usual punctuation is greatly preferable, by
which the rl is construed with the preceding; and that on
account of its greater simplicity, and because it is confirmed by
a similar expression at Matt. 21 : 24, Luke 20 : 3." The literal
signification of ti, "something" (Eob., Lex., in verbo, 3), is most
accurate. De Wette, " Ich will euch etwas fragen."
T " on the sabbath ; " toTs adp/3aaiv. In the parallel, Matt.
12 : 11, the E. V. renders this in the singular, " on the sabbath-
day." See v. 2, note.
w " Bound about," so often used in the E. V., is a tau-
tology.
1 " to him ; " avria. The reading of the Text. Eecept, rep
&v&Q<67tia, is rejected as spurious by Griesb., Knapp, Tisch.,
Theile, Tittm., Scholz, Bloomf., Schott, and Lachm. It is ; an
interpolation taken from Mark 3:5. It is wanting in eight
uncial MSS., the Peshito and Philox, Syr. Memph., and Gothic
versions. Avry is the true reading.
y " Stretch out ; " "Exreivov. Scarlett, Wakef., Penn, Camp.,
M. Liddell (in verbo), " to stretch out."
54
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VI.
KING JAMBS VERSION.
11 And they were filled with
madness ; and communed one with
another -what they might do to
Jesus.
12 And it came to pass in those
days, that he went out into a
mountain to pray, and continued
all night in prayer to God.
13 And when it was day, he
called unto him his disciples : and
of them he chose twelve, whom
also he named apostles ;
14 Simon (whom he also named
Peter) and Andrew his brother,
James and John, Philip and Bar-
tholomew,
15 Matthew and Thomas, James
the son of Alpheus, and Simon
called Zelotes,
16 And Judas the brother of
James, and Judas Iscariot, which
also was the traitor.
17 And he came down with
GREEK TEXT.
f f VN -v 11 \ ft \
(as TJ aXXrj. avTOt be
eTrXrjcrdrjcrav avoids, /cat SteXd-
Xovv Tr/aoy aAA^Aoyy, T'I ctv iroir]-
creiav TO! 'Ir/crov.
1 2 ' 7" > ft ^ s /
Ji-yeveTO oe ef raty t]fj.epous
TavTOus, e^rjXdev elf TO opoy
Trpocrev^acrffcu- KCU rjv SiavvKfe-
pevcav eV Ty irpocfev^y TOV Oeov.
13 /cat ore eyeveto rjp.epa.) jrpocr-
(pa>vr)cre TOVS fJ.adr)Ta? avrov'
/cat eK\^dfifvosf air avrcov Sa>-
SeKa, ouy KCU. aTrotTToXovs covo-
fj-acre, u Si/jLtova. bv /cat covofiacre
HfTpov, KCU 'AvSpeav Tov dSeX-
(pov avrov, 'Ia.KcofSov /cat 'Icodv-
vr/v, <&LXt7nrov /cat JBapdoXo/Jiou-
ov, 15 Ma.r6a.ldv KCU. Ocofj-dv,
TOV Tov 'AXfpaiov /cat
TOV Ka.Xovp.evov 2-rjXco-
Trjv, 16 'lovdais 'laKCoftov, /cat
Iov8ctv IcrKapicoTrjv, by KCU e'ye-
veTO TrpoSoTT)?' ll /cat /caraway
REVISED VERSION.
restored 'sound as the other.
And they were filled with mad- n
ness ; and "consulted b with one
another what e they should do
to Jesiis. And it came to pass 12
in those days, that he went out
into d the mountain to pray, and
continued all night in prayer
to God. And when it was day, 13
'he called to him his disciples ;
and he f chose twelve from
them, whom he also named
apostles ; Simon (whom he also 14
named Peter) and Andrew his
brother, James and John, Philip
and Bartholomew, Matthew and 15
Thomas, James the sou of Al-
pheus, and Simon called B Ze-
lotes, eE Judas the brother of is
James, and Judas Iscariot k who
also became a traitor. And 17
* " sound." Thomson, Scarlett, Campbell, M. 'Tytt;s, in the
Textus Eeceptus, is canceled by Griesbach, Theile, Knapp,
Tischendorf, Lachmann, Schott. But as the sentence is defective
if we say, "restored as the other," "sound" is inserted and
italicized as supplementary. Its use is authorized by the parallel,
Mark 3:5, where vyirje is found in the text.
m " consulted ; " Sieiaiavv. Camp., Kend. Kiiinoel, " con-
sultarupt;" Bretschneider (in loco, Sia).aUco), " consultabant."
Literally, " to talk over a thing." Liddell. " Confer " is obso-
lescent."
b "with one another;" nyos atttflovs. Thomson, Scarlett,
Bob. (Lex., in verbo). So (E. V.) Matt. 24 : 10. John 13 : 34;
15 : 12, 17. Acts 19 : 38. See en. 4 : 36, note.
e " they should do ; " &v notrjoeiar. Thorn., Scarlett, "Wesley,
Sharpe, Camp.
d " the mountain ; " TO o?os. M., Thorn., Wesley, Wakef.,
Sharpe, Penn. Belg., " den berg ; " De Wette, " den Berg ; "
S. French, " la montagne ; " Iberian, " al monte ; " Diodati, " al
monte;" Dan, "Bierget." The article should not be omitted.
The mountain was near Capernaum. Kuinoel : " Posteaquam
Jesus in monte quodam Capernaumo vicino noetem inter preces
transegerat, postridie primo mane," etc.
" he called to him ; " TtQoascpcuvrioe. The preposition " to "
is represented in the text by xfos, in composition with the verb.
Hence it is not a supplement, and is not to be italicized. Com-
pare Mark 3 : 13, in Kev. of Mark's gospel, note.
f " chose twelve from them." This is the natural order, accord-
ing to English idiom. Wesley, " chose twelve of them."
e " Zelotes ; " ZijlfoTifv. In Acts 1 : 13, the article precedes
this word, Siftiav 6 Zijlco-crjs. On the use of this term as indic-
ative of the fact that Simon was one of the sect of Zealots
noted by Josephus in his History of the Jewish War, Kuincel
on Matt. 10 : 4 says : " Cum Luc. 6 : 15, Act. 1 : 13, hie Simon
nominetur 6 Zrjlcarris in promptu est nomen JKararhye respondere
Heb. xsp et accepisse Sirnonem hoc cognomentum a pristine
vivendi genere, ut adeo Siftcav 6 Kavaviiris explicari debeat :
Simon qui fuit antea zclotarum societati adscriptus, ut Mattliasus
6 ic).(ovrft, qui fuit antea portitorum societati adscriptus. 2>ikio-
ittl autem antiquitus dicebantnr, qui acri religionis et patriae
defendendoe studio flagrabant, ut Pinohas Numb. 25 : 9, 1 Maccab.
2 : 54, et Christi et apostolorum aetate, ita nominababuntur homi-
nes privati inter Judseos, societate quadam conjunct! qui omnia
atrociora facta, nominatim ea, quibus templi, numinis, seu gentla
sanctitas violari credebatur, nulla forensis judicii ratione illico
puniebant, zelo, ut jactabant, divino correpti quo nomine ab illis
etiam turpissima facindra patrata sunt, v. Joseph., B., Lib. vi., v. 3. '
As an alternative reading, " the Zealot." So Norton, Scarlett.
BE Kal (= and) not in tlie text.
h " who also became a traitor ; " oe v.a\ lyiveto itpoSoTqe-
Wesley, Scarlett ("who became a traitor "), Kendrick, M., Thel
wall. Belgic, " die ook de verrader geworden is ; " S. Fr.,
" lequel aussi devint traitre ; " Iber., " el cual tambien se hizo
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VI.
55
KING JAMES' VERSION.
them, and stood in the plain ; and
the company of his disciples, and
a great multitude of people out of
all Judea and Jerusalem, and from
the sea-coast of Tyre and Sidon,
which came to hear him, and to be
healed of their diseases ;
}8 And they that were vexed
with unclean spirits : and they
were healed.
19 And the whole multitude
sought to touch him ; for there
went virtue out of him, and healed
them all.
20 And he lifted up his eyes on
GREEK TEXT.
TOTTOU
vou, teal. o^Aoy /Lta0r}Ta>i> avrov,
KOU TT\rj6oS TToXv TOV ActOU OTTO
'fovdalay KOI 'lepov-
, KOU rrjs irapa\iqv Tvpov
Kal SiSStvos, 01 rjXdov a/covcrcu
avTQtt, (cal iafffji'ai airo TO>V vo-
O-CDV O.VTCOV, 18 /ecu ol oyXov/j-tvoi
VTTQ TTVeVJiaTajV OLKaddpTGIV, KCU
19
0epa.7revQVTO. /ecu Tray
e^ret airreardai. avrov' on. dv-
va.fj.is Trap' OVTOV e^r/p^ero, K<U
O.TO iravras.
20 T^- \
jfi.cu
auroy eirapas
\
TOVS
KBVISED VEESION.
he came down with them and
stood 'on a level place, 'with a
crowd of his disciples, and a
great multitude of "the people
'from all Judea and Jerusalem,
and m the sea-coast of Tyre and
Zidon, who came to hear him
and to be healed of their dis-
eases ; and those who were is
vexed "by unclean spirits; and
"they were cured. And the 19
whole crowd sought to touch
him ; for 'power 'went out
from him and healed them all.
And "lifting up his eyes on his 20
traidor ; " Dan., " den, som og blev en Forroder ; " ItaL, " il
quale divienne anehe traditore."
1 " in a level place ; " im timov itediro.v, Angus. Bob.
(Lex., MI loco, neStvos), " tOTtf fat TOTCOV jceStov, he stood upoa a
level place." De Wette, " auf einera ebenen Plate ; " Belg., " op
een vlakke plaatse ; " Vulg., Mont., Bras., Castal., " in loco cam-
pestri ; " Bheims, " in a plain place ; " Ib.er., " en un lugar llano."
There is no necessity for departing from the literal rendering of
this phrase.
J " with a crowd ; " xat ojf.los. Literally, " and a crowd."
But if we adopt this literal rendering, we leave " crowd" (8%i.os}
and " multitude " (ntSj&os} in the nominative, without a verb, as
has been done in the E. V. The thought presented is obviously
this, " He stood on a level place, and with him stood a crowd of
his disciples," etc. In other words, when Christ descended the
mountain, only the twelve were with him. Mark 3 : 13, "And
he goeth up into the mountain, and calleth to him whom he
would : and he appointed twelve." When he reached the level
place, with, the twelve, there was a crowd of other disciples, and
a great multitude of people standing there. By substituting
" with " for " and," the thought presented in the text is brought
out in the most concise manner, and with the least change in the
phraseology of the E. V. So " with " is employed by Thorn.,
Wakef., Camp. Alternative rendering, " and tliere mas a crowd,"
"to. Penn, S. Fr., " avec la foule de ses disciples." The fol-
lowing are specimens of the various renderings given to this pas-
sage. De Wette, " und [rait ihm] der Haufe seiner Jiinger ; "
Belg., "ende [met hem] de. schare zijner Discipelen ; " De Sacy,
" etant accompagne de la. troupe de ses disciples ; " Iber., " i [con
el] una. muchedumbre de sus discipulos." The insertion of the
article " the " before the noun, in the E. V., is without authority.
The rendering of the passage was. copied from the Genevan.
k " the people ; " rov haov. Penn, Thorn., Wakef., Sharpe,
Thelwall. Belg., "des volks;" S, Fr., du peuple;" Iber.,
" del pueblo."
" from ; " ano. Thorn., Wesley, Wakef., Sharpe, Norton,
Penn, Dick., Camp., Kend., M-, Thelwall. Vulg., Mont, " ab."
" Out of" was copied from Tyndale.
m " From," before " sea-coast," is really a supplement. It" is
superfluous. It is properly omitted by Thorn., Wesley, Wakef.,
Norton, Camp., Thelwall. Nothing corresponding to it in Da
Wette, Vulg., Mont., Castal., Schott, Hefa. N. Test.
" " by ; " vno (cum genit.}. Wakef., Dick., Kend., M., Thel-
wall. G. and S. Fr., " par."
" they were cured ; " id-e^anevovro. Thorn., Wakef. (" were
also cured"), Camp., M. Hob. (Lex., in verbo), " to cure." By
rendering thus, we make a distinction (like that of the text)
between la&jjvai, v. 17, and this verb.
P " power ; " Svvafus. Thorn., Wakefield, Sharpe, Norton,
Kend., Angus, Thelwall. Eobinson (Lex., in verbo), " specially,
' miraculous power,' ' tlie power of working miracles.' " " Virtue"
(a mere transfer of the Vulgate virtus) is no longer used in this
sense. S. Fr., "une puissance;." .Iber., " un poder;" Belg.,
" kracht ; " De Wette, " eine Kraft."
s "went out;" IgfiqxsTo. Wesley, Sharpe, Scarlett Norton
Penn. There is an unnecessary transposition of this, sentence in
the E. V., by placing the nominative between " went " and " out."
The influence of the Latin order of words on early English trans-
lations is quite obvious. Numerous obscurities in the E. V. may
be referred to this fact.
r " from ; " Tta^a (cum genit.). Eob. (Lex., itaga) : " In
N. Test, only with a genitive of person, implying a going forth >
or proceeding from the side or presence of any one ; thus taking
the general sense from." So (E. V.) Mark 12 : 2 ; 14 : 43. Luke
1 : 45 ; 2:1; 7 : 49, etc. So (in loco) Thorn., Wakef., Norton,
Penn, Dick., Camp., M. The E. V., in this instance, has followed'
Tyndale, who rendered the passage as if the text had been tjfxero
avrov. Comp. Mark 5 : 30.
" lifting up ; " eitayas. Thorn., Wesley, Sharpe, Penn, M.,
Thel. The participial construction is adopted also by Norton,
Dick., Camp.
56
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE CHAP. VI.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
his disciples, and said, Blessed be
ye poor ; for yours is the kingdom
of God.
21 Blessed are ye that hunger
now : for ye shall be filled. Blessed
are ye that weep now : for ye shall
laugh.
22 Blessed are ye when men
shall hate you, and when they shall
separate you from their company,
and shall reproach you,, and cast
out your name as evil, for the Son
of man's sake.
23 Rejoice ye in that day, and
leap for joy: for behold your
reward is great in heaven : for in
the like manner did their fathers
unto the prophets.
24 But wo unto you that are
rich! for ye have received your
consolation.
25 Wo unto you that are full !
for ye shall hunger. "Wo nnto you
that laugh now ! for ye shall mourn
and weep.
GREEK TEXT.
6(f)0aXfJLOvs O.VTOV ei? row-
Tas avTOv eAeye, Mct.Ka.piot oi
TTTCO^Ot, OTi V/J.Tpa. (TTIV T) /3-
(nAe/a TOV Oeov. 21 [ia.Ka.pioi
ot TreivoJTes vvv, OTL ^
o-eo-6e. fjLa.Ka.pioi ol
f i ' 22 ' '
VW) OTL yeAacrere. ito.KO.pioi
eVre, OTOV fU(rr)0~(ioo~iv vfias ol
avdpayiroL, KOI OTOV a^opicrccxrii'
/cat oveiSlo-coo-t, /cat e/c/3a-
TO OVOfJLO. VfJlCOV 6)S TTOVTJpOV,
TOV VLOV TOV
23 ' * i /
^at/aere " e/cetz/jj TIJ rjfjiepa /cat
(TKipTrjcraTe' I8ov yo.p } b /JLto~0os
VJJLCOJS TroAuy ei/ rm ovpavtp' KOTO.
TOVTO, -jap firoiovv TOLS
TOLS ol irarepts avTcov. 24
ouat vfiiv roty TrAouo'toty, ort
aTre^ere r^v irapa,KXrio~LV vfjicov.
25 ouat u/itf, ot 6fj.7r7r\r)cr/JLevoi,
ort Treti/acrere. oyat u^ttv, ot
yeAcoyrey j/Of, ort 7rej/^o-ere /cat
EEVISED VERSION.
disciples, he said, 'Happy 'are
ye poor; for yours is the king-
dom of God. Happy are ye, 21
who hunger now ; for T ye shall
be satisfied. Happy are ye, who
weep now; for ye shall laugh.
Happy are ye when men shall 22
hate you and shall separate you
"from them, and shall reproach
you, and cast out your name as
evil, for the Son of man's sake.
"Rejoice in that day, and leap 23
for joy; for behold, your re-
ward is great in heaven : for
hus did their fathers to the
prophets. But woe to you who 24
are rich! for 'ye have your
consolation. Woe to you who 25
are full! for ye shall hunger.
Woe to you who laugh now !
for ye shall mourn and weep.
" Happy ; " Maxaoiot. Thorn., "Wesley, Wakef., Scarlett,
Dick., Camp., Kend., M. So (E. T.) John 13 : 17. Acts 26 : 2.
Bom. 14 : 22. 1 Cor. 7 : 40. 1 Pet. 3 : 14; 4 : 14. Belgic,
" Zalig ; " De Wette, " Selig ; " Dan., " Salige ; " G. and S. !Y.,
" Bienheureux ; " Iber., " Felices ; " Syr., JlsuJsa^. In almost
all cases, this word is equivalent to feliz, while " blessed " is the
equivalent of evAoyijTos, benedictus. The word is rendered uni-
formly in this Eevision.
' "are ye." Thorn., Wesley, "Wakef., Sharpe, Scarlett, Penn
Kend., M. Beza, " est is."
r " ye shall be satisfied ; " zopraofrijaca&e. Thorn., Wesley,
Scarlett, and Norton ("will be satisfied"), Penn, Camp., Kend.
S. Fr., " vons serez rassasies." Eob. (Lex., in verbo}. So (B.Y.)
Mark 8 : 4. This verb should not be confounded with efinhij&co.
Comp. John 6 : 12, where Ivsn^ad-tjaav is properly translated
" they were filled."
" " from tliem." The necessity of a supplement after ayo^i-
ff.'ayw is obvious, hence " their company " was employed by Tyn-
dale and Cranmer, "their society" by Campbell; while Penn,
Kend., "Wakef., Norton have adopted the simpler expression
"from them." So M. Iber., "de [si]." "From them" is
deemed preferable.
1 " Kejoice." It is not necessary to express the nominative
"ye." According to present usage, we employ the imperative
alone, leaving the mind of the hearer or reader to supply the
appropriate pronoun. So in the parallel, Matt. 5 : 12, and
versions of Thorn., "Wesley, Wakef., Scarlett, Norton, Dick..
Camp.
i " thus ; " tiara ravra. Thorn., Sharpe, Dick., Camp. S.
Fr., "ainsi;" Belg., " diergelijk ; " Ital.,'" cosi." Eob. (Lex.):
" Neut. ravra, ace. as adv. so, thus, i. q., ovrcog." Buttmann,
128, note 5 : " The neuter of the prononns both sing, and plur.,
is very often used adverbially."
1 " ye have ; " cati%ete. Cranmer, Wesley, Norton, Kend.
Vulg., Mont., Eras., Castal., " habetis." The preposition catb
gives to the simple verb the idea of fullness, completeness, hence
the thought is, "Ye have your whole reward." The rendering
of the E. V. (after the Genevan) by a perfect, was an unskillful
attempt to bring out this thought. The translation of Tyndale,
though slightly paraphrastic, is superior to that, " Ye have
therein your consolation." After all, a literal rendering is quite
perspicuous. Every reader understands from the sense of the
passage and the connection of the words, that the sentiment of
the teacher is that those " who trust in riches " must have them
alone for their portion. This thought is found in Ps. 17 : 14.
*na Spin lina tiiraa. Compare Matt. 6 : 2, lati^ovat TO*
avrcav, (. V.), " they have their reward." Eob. (Lex.,
" act., to liave or receive in full, (aab of compl.), to ha'.'i
all that we can expect."
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VI.
57
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
26 Wp unto you, when all men
shall speak well of you! for so
did their fathers to the false
prophets.
27 But I say unto you "which
hear, Love your enemies, do good
to them which hate you.
28 Bless them that curse you,
and pray for them -which despite-
fully use you.
29 And unto him that siniteth
thee on the one cheek, offer also
the other ; and him that taketh
(7EKEK TEXT.
26
ora.v
o av-
ova.1 vp.iv,
KaAcos V/J.S.S eiirctxri wdi
Bpcoiror Kara TO.VTO. yap eiroiovv
TOW fyev8oTrpo(f>r}Tais oi vraTepes
27 ' A \ \ ' ~ \ / ~ ' it
AAA vjj.iv Aeyco TOIS a/cou-
ovcriv, 'A-yomaTe TOVS fydpovs
KaAcay iroiclre TOI? fturov-
'
'' 28 'i " ^
criv y/xay, euAoyeire TOVS na.ro.-
s VJMV, Kai 7rpoo-(v)(fo~0e
T&V f7rr}pea6vT(ov
90 ~ ' ' I > \
T0> TV7TTOVTI CT6 67TI Tr/V <Tia-
yova., Trapeze /cat TTJV a\Arjv
KOL CtTTO TOV aipOVTOS O-OV TO
REVISED VERSION.
*"Woe, when b men shall speak 26
well of you! for c thus did their
fathers to the false prophets.
But I say to you, who hear 27
d me, Love your enemies ; do
good to those who hate you,
bless those who curse you, 28
"pray for those f who abuse you.
To him who smiteth thee on 29
the one cheek, offer the other
B also ; and h hinder not him, who
" The reading of the Textns Beceptns, v/eiv, after oval, is
canceled by Griesb., Tisch., Lachm., Knapp, Theile, Tittmaim,
Scholz. Schott sajs : " Delev. cum Griesb. aliis v/izv vulgo post
ovdt (ex v. 24, 25) additum, auctoritate multorum cdd. (12 unc.)
verss., Pers. poL, Goth., Slav., Vulg., It. (exceptis. cdd. Cant.,
Veron.)." Bloomfield remarks that vpiv is " omitted by almost
all the best MSS. and several Versions and Fathers, canceled by
nearly all Editors, from Griesbach to Scholz."
1 Udvres, in the Textus Eeceptus (before ol av&gcoTtot}, is
canceled by Griesb., Tisch., Knapp, Scholz, Schott. The latter
says : " Delev. cum Griesb. et aliis navies post elnaiot vulgo (ut
sententia limitibus circumscriberetur) adjectum, in edd. multis
(6 unc.) verss., Pesh., Ar. poL, Pers., JSfb., Vulg. omissum.
Bloomf. says it is " omitted by almost all the best MSS." The
evidence is clearly against its genuineness.
" thus ; " xara ravra. See v. 23, note.
4 " me." So Norton, Scarlett, Penn, M. De Wette, " micJi;"
G. Fr., " qui m'entendez ; " De Sacy, " qui m'ecoutez ; " Ital.,
" che m' ascoltate." The sentence is defective unless the object
of " hear" is expressed. The least change in the phraseology of
the E. V., is made by inserting '" me " as a supplement. Other-
wise, we may render with Thorn., Wakef., and Camp., "my
hearers." The Belgic employs "this" as the supplement, "die
Ldit] hoort."
The conjunction xal of the Textus Receptus (before vtqoo-
evxeafte), is canceled by Griesb., Tisch., Laclim., Knapp, Theile,
Scholz. Schott has this note : "Kal ante rtfoasvzto&e vulgo
additum recte omittitur apud Griesb. aliosque auctoritate 9 edd.
unc. multorum minuscc. verss. Memph., Arm., Goth., Slav, ms.,
Vulg. ms., Sax., It. (insertum ex Matt. 5 : 44)." Bloomf. rejects
it, remarking, that " the asyndeton much increases the gravity of
the injunction."
' " who abuse ; " rcav irtqgea&vrcov. Kendi, Scarlett. Ebb.
, in verbo), " to abuse, insult ; " Liddell (in verbo), " to abuse,
or insult wantonly." So the substantive ktfyeta signifies a
threat, wanton abuse, or insult, amtumelia. Lidd. " Despitefully
use " is quite obsolete, and if modernized into the forms of "spite-
fully use," or. " treat injuriously," the phrase will not present the
thought more accurately, than the simple term " abuse." The
sense of the word as used here is general, being well rendered by
Castalio " vos afficiunt injuria."
E " also ; " xal. Wakefield, Penn. As the equivalent of xdl,
" also," is properly construed with " the 'other," not with " offer,"
it should have this position in the sentence. The phrase is, in
signification, the same as the familiar one " offer the other too,"
" offer also the other." In the very next sentence, the E. V. has
given " also " (xai) a proper place, " to take thy coat also." In a
great number of instances, the position assigned to " also " produces
obscurity in the E. V. Inattention to the location of particles
might naturally be expected, when the Latin had an extensive
influence on the structure of English sentences, as it certainly had
in the age of Tyndale and Coverdale. One fault of the Eevisers
under James I. was that they made so few changes in the arrange-
ment of the earlier translators. In the parallel (E. V.) Matt
5 : 39, where the text is Sorts os yantaei foil rtjv Sejiuv aov
aiayova, <n$k<fov avrcu y.ai ifyv ciUifv, the particle is conectly
treated, " whosoever shall smite thee on thy right cheek, turn to
him the other also."
h " hinder not him who taketh away, thy cloak from taking
away thy coat also;" cino rov aXqovros aov 1:0 Iftdiiov, xal
cov wc&va. ftrj xco&vafis. Wakefield (except "would take").
Norton, "hinder not him who takes away your cloak from taking
your tunic also." Bloomf. says : "At Kcolvarfs subaud. ano tov
eiv." This use of the verb xtaivoi with an accusative of the
person, and mtb with a genitive of the person is Hebraistic. See
Gen. 23 : 6, tjxra rtbir-ift iiiap-n^. Sept., ov /aj xcoMoei TO
tlfietov afaov. 2 Sam. 13 : 13, tjBa Wia"! ' Sept., ou fty
XCOJ.VOTI ftt aato aov. The above arrangement is the natural one,
in our language.
58
THE GOSPEL ACCOKDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VI.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
away thy cloak, forbid not to take
thy coat also.
30 Give to every man that
asketh of thee ; and of him that
taketh away thy goods, ask them
not again.
31 And as ye would that men
should do to you, do ye also to
them likewise.
32 For if ye love them which
love you, what thank have ye ?
for sinners also love those that
love them.
33 And if ye do good to them
which do good to you, what thank
have ye ? for sinners also do even
the same.
34 And if ye lend to them of
whom ye hope to receive, what
thank have ye? for sinners also
lend to sinners, to receive as much
again.
35 But love ye your enemies, i
GEEEK TEXT.
i/xemoi>, KCU rov yj-Ttava pJq KOD-
\ ' 30 v fc^ ~ ' ~ '
Avo"r]f. iravTi oe Tea aiTovvTi
(re, 8l8ov KOI OTTO TOV aipovTos
\ \ \ > / 97 > /j\
TO, era, fir) cmaLTfi. /cat itaucos
tfe'Aere iva iroiaxTtv vjj.lv oi av-
Qpcanroi, KCU. vfiels Trotetre avTols
t / 32 "'v' ' ~ ^
o/j.ota>s. /cat et ayaTrare TOVS
d-yaTTcovfas u/tay, TTOLavp.lv \dpis
ear// /cat -yap ol afJ.apTa>Xoi
TOVS dya-jrcovTas avTovs dyaTrcu-
33 \ > v /) ~ A
<ri. /cat eav ayaooTroirjTG TOVS
dyadoTTOLOvvTas vfjias, Trota vfuy
^ayoty eorty /cat yap ol dfAapTCo-
Aoi TO auro Trotoucrt. 3 * /cat eav
Savel^rjTe Trap d>v e'ATrt^ere aTro-
Aa/3eti', ,7ro/a vfj.lv
KCU yap ol dfj.apTcoXoi d
Aoty Savei^ova-iV) Iva
TO. l<ra. 35 TrXrjv ay aware TOVS
EEVISED VERSION.
taketh away thy cloak, from tak-
ing away thy coat also. Give 'to 30
every one that asketh thee ;
and from him who taketh away
thy goods, 'demand them not.
And as ye would that men .31
should do to you, k so do ye,
also to them. For if. -ye love. 32.
those who love you, what
'thanks have ye? '"for even
sinners love those who love
them. And if ye do good to 33
those who do good to you, what
"thanks have ye? -for even
sinners do the same. And if 34
ye lend to those from whom ye
hope to receive, I'what, thanks
have ye ? "for even, sinners lend
to sinners, to . receive as much
*in return. But 'love your ene- 35
1 " to every one ; " xa-ni. Penn, Thomson, Wakef., Scarlett,
Sharpe, Norton, Camp., Dick., Kend., M. Yulg., Mont, Eras.,
omm;" Belg., " een iegelijk;" Iber., "a todo." "Man" is
superfluous.
1 " demand ; " anairei. Angus, Kendrick, Thomson, Sharpe,
Camp. Bob. (Lex., in verbo), "to demand from." "With this
word, " back," or " again " is superfluous. "Again " would signify
that they had been demanded before. Bloomf. (N. Test.) : " The
difference between ahav and anairav is that the former denotes
to ask as a favor; the latter, to demand as a right." In the only
other instance where this verb occurs (ch. 12 : 20), it is rendered
" shall be required," literally, " they shall require," or " demand."
Liddell (in verbo), " frequently also to demand of one." According
to etymology, aitatrsco being compounded of catb, from, and
aheco would signify "to ask from," i. e., "to demand." Heb.
.N". Test.,. fein && ("do not exact").
k " SO do ye also to them ; " xal v/tsZs notefre avrols oftolcas.
Thorn., Wakef., " even so." 'Opoieos is rendered " so " (E. T.)
Luke 5 : 10. In this instance, " so " gives the exact sense of
ofiolcos with clearness and force. It harmonizes with our present
usus loguendi. Alternative, " do ye also in like manner to them."
i "thanks;" X a^is. Thorn, Penn, Scarlett, Sharpe, Dick.,
Camp., Kend. As "thanks" has no singular form, "thank,"
which the E. V. derived from Tyndale, is incorrect. Xa$ts is
evidently used in the sense of fuo&os, " recompense." So the
parallel, Matt. 5 : 46, tiva. fuo&bv fyere. Compare v. 35 of this
chapter, seal eatat 6 ftto&os vfiSv noivs. Kuincel paraphrases
noia vftzv x<*$ e s iorl; " quid proemii a Deo consequimini ? "
Ag an alternative rendering, " what thanks do ye deserve ? "
though this perhaps is not sufficiently literal. Iber., " i que [don
de] gracia [como recompensa] tendreis ? "
m " for even ;" y.al ya(>. Eob. (Lex., pay). In many instances,
y.ul is intensive, equivalent to " too," " even," etc. This is the
rendering of Thom.j Wesley, Wakef., Scarlett, Dick., Campbell,
Kend., Angus, M., Mnrdock (Syr. j ). Heb. N. Test,
'
" ." thanks." See v. 32, note.
" for even," See v. 32, note.
f " what thanks." See v. 32, note.
1 " for even." See v. 32, note.
r " TO return." Thomson, Penn, Campbell, Kendrick, M.,
Scholefield. As aitol,a.pp&v<o signifies simply to take, or have
from any one (Bob., Lex.), the idea of back, again, or in return
is not found in catb, but it belongs to the circumstances. Hence
"in return" should be italicized, as supplementary. See Kob.
(Lex., uneknl^co). The phrase "as much again" is ambiguous,
as it is often used to convey the idea of double ttie quantity. If
these words are retained, the order should be, " to receive again
as much." In modern phraseology, T laa. would be " an equiva-
lent," or, more literally, "an equal share." Liddell. Kuincel:
" Ta loa eadem, paria Ji. loco significat sortem ipsam, petunias
summam, sine usura et nleovao/icp, sine ullo angmento aut detri-
mento." Bloomf.: "'Anoia^eiv is used for Inpav nno tivos." .
"As much again" originated with Tyndale.
" love." The insertion of the nominative " ye " is umicues-
ary. It is not expressed in the text ; there is no emphasis
which demands its use. So v. 27, where the same phrase occurs,
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VI.
59
KING JAMES' VERSION.
and do good, and lend, hoping for
nothing again ; and your reward
shall be great, and ye shall be the
children of the Highest: for he
is kind unto the unthankful and
to the evil.
36 Be ye therefore merciful, as
your Father also is merciful.
37 Judge not. and ye : shallnbt
be judged : condemn not, and ye
shall not be condemned : forgive,
and ye shall be forgiven :
38 Give, and it shall be given
unto you ; good measure, pressed
down, and shaken together, and
GREEK TEXT.
v/jLtov, kal a-yadorroieiTe,
kal BaveiQre nyo'ev aireXTri^ov-
Kal ecrrat 6 fJ.io-00? v/j.(ov
uy, Kal ecre&de viol TOV jtyi-
CfTOV' OTL aVTOf XpTJO~TOS CTTLV
eVl TOVS a^aplcTTovf Kal -rrovrj-
povs. 3 yiveo-de ovv oiKTipfj.o-
ve?, kaBcas Kal o irarrjp vfj.a>v
6lKTipfJ.a>v ecrfi. 3T kal jurj Kpi-
vere, Kal ov [irj KpiQrJTe. /j,rj
e, Ka ov JJUTJ KO.TO.-
8ikourdrfTe. aTrbAuere, Kal O.TTO-
38 Sidore, /cat 80-
vfuv perpov KaXov,
!re7rif(rfj.evov Kal
REVISED VEBSION,
mies, and do good, and lend,
'hoping for nothing in return;
and your reward "will be great,
and ye will be "sons *of the
Most High, for he is kind to
the unthankful 'and r evil. 'Be 36
therefore "compassionate, "even
as your Father also is 'com-
passionate. Judge not, and 37
d ye will not be judged; con-
demn not, and *ye will not be
condemned ; forgive, and r ye
will be forgiven. Give, and 38
s it will be given to you ; good
measure, pressed down, and
ayana-te TOVS e%froovs vfiair. Kend., Camp., Wakef., Dick.,
Norton, Sharpe, Scarlett, M.
* " hoping for nothing in return;" fu;o"ev curtefatfeovres.
Norton. Bloomf. : "Hitchti&w may be for elxi&a' aato rivoe."
Hence in return is italicized, as in v. 34. See note on that verse.
" " will be ; " Zorai. Thorn., Wakef., Penn, Scarlett, Sharpe,
Norton, Dick, Kend., M.
T "ye will be;" eaea&e. Thorn., Wakef., Penn, Scarlett,
Sharpe, Norton, Dick., Kend., M.
* "sons;" viol. "Wesley, Wakef., Sharpe, Norton, Dick.,
Camp., Kend., Angus, Thelwall, M. Viilg., Mont., Eras., Beza,
Castal., Schott, "filii;" De Wette, "Sohne;" S. Fr., "fils;"
Span, and Iber., " hijos." This word should not be confounded,
as it frequently is, in the E. V., with itcuSla. Heb. N. Test.,
133. Syr.,
" !
1 " of the Most High ; " vyiorov. Thorn., Scarlett, Norton,
Camp., M. This title of God occurs frequently in the E. V. of
the 0. Test., where the Heb. is 'ji^S, and the Sept. vyioros.
See Numb. 24 : 16. Deut. 32 : 8. See Luke 1 : 32, note.
1 " evil ; " novqgovs. Keud., Angus, Thelwall. As itovrj^ovs
is closely connected with rovs axaplorovs by v.ai, the supple-
mentary " to " of the E. V. is superfluous. So with the article
" the," which is really a supplement, though it is not italicised.
"To" is dropped by Thorn., Wesley, Wakef., Sharpe, Norton,
Dick., Camp., M. "The" is dropped by Thorn., Dick., Camp.
No article in Belg., De Wette, Span., Iber.
" " Be ; " yiveo&e. Dick., G. and A. Campbell, Kendrick, M.
11 Ye" is superfluous. See v. 35, note. Compare v. 31, vftcig
toteTre, where the nominative is expressed, as emphatic.
* " compassionate ; " olxrigftoves. Norton, Dick., Gray (note
on Angus). The noun otxriffios signifies compassion, less strong
(says Rob., Lex.) than tteos. The verb olxzei^co signifies " to
fed pity for, or because, of a thing." Liddell. Bretsch. : ("Ab
olxtos, commiseratio) misereor commiseror, seq. accusative Sept.
pro drj^ 2 Eeg. 13 : 23, Ps. 103 : 13." It is distinguished from
showing mercy, Rom. 9 : 15 (quoted verbatim from Sept., Esod.
33 : 19, Heb. &rnx nffi'srnN 'tian'ii "jhs iiBK-nx wsn 1 ;.)
Helena ov av l),eta, aai olxrci^jjaco ov &v oixrft^co, E. V., " I
will have mercy on whom I will have mercy, and I will have com-
passion on whom I will have compassion." In Jus. 5:11, the
adjective olnrloutav is rendered (E. V.) " of tender mercy." The
rendering " compassionate " distinguishes the word from Ufqjuan>,
" merciful," and is appropriate. Olxii^ficov, properly refers to
the feeling produced by the misery of others. Kuinoel: "Sitis
igitur ergo, alias benigni, sicut et Pater vester benignus est. Voca-
bulum Hebraicum o^ani quod Alexandrini reddiderunt nomine
olxrcigftol, non tantum misericordiam iudicat, sed etiam amorem,
benignitatem, cum quamplurimis in locis N. T. respondeat voca-
bulo ibn h. e. favor, benignitas, benevolentia. Ps. 40 : 11 ;
103 : 4. ' Hos. 2 : 19, hinc quoque olxri/o/tcov non tantum notat
misericordiam, sed etiam omnino benignum, ut hoc loco." Bloom
field : " Olxri^fcovEs should be rendered not ' merciful,' but ' com
passionate,' pitying and relieving, according to your power, the
distresses of others."
b " even as ; " y.a&cbs xal. Thorn., Wakef., Dick., Thelwall
Kad-cos is thus rendered (E. V.) Luke 1 : 2 ; 19 : 32 ; 24 : 24.
John 5 : 23, etc. See Rob. (Lex., in verbo}. In this construction
with xal, the latter is regarded as pleonastic in translation
c " compassionate." See note a.
d " ye will not be judged ; " ov ftfj K^iSijre. Wakef.. Penn,
Scarlett, Norton, Dick., M.
" ye will not be condemned ; " ov pf/ xaTaSmaa^re.
Wakef., Penn, Sharpe, Norton, Scarlett, Dick., M.
f " ye will be forgiven ; " aitoj.v&ijosad-e. Wakefield, Penn,
Norton, Dick., M.
" it will be given ; " Sod-^aerat. Wakefield (" there will be
given "), Penn, Scarlett, Kend., M.
60
THE GOSPEL AC COBBING TO LUKE. CHAP. VI.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
running over, shall men give into
your bosom. For with the same
measure that ye mete withal, it
shall be measured to you again.
39 And hie spake a parable un-
to them j Can the blind lead the
blind? shall they not both fall
into the ditch ?
40 The disciple is not above
his master : but every one that is
perfect, shall be as his master.
GREEK TEST.
8cocrov(rti>
ey TOV KoTrov vp.>v. TK> yap
VfUV,
39 Ears 8e TrapaftoXyv avroty,
rjTt Svvarat rv(j)Xos TV<pAov
iv; ov^L afiftorepoi ety fio-
' '
'/! '-i '
ovvov TTf&ovvTai;
virep
' 40
QVK
avrov-
Tray
KEVISED VERSION.
shaken together, and running
over, ''will be given into your
bosom. For 'by the same meas;
ure 'with which k ye measure,
"it will be measured to you
again. And he spoke a para- 39
ble to them, Can 'a blind man
"guide a blind man? "Will
not pboth fall 'into a ditch ?
r A disciple is not abpve hi? 40
'teacher ; but every one, 'fully
h " will be given ; " Scooovotv. Wakef., Penn, Norton. The
plural here is rendered as a singular, the verb being used as an
impersonal. Kuincel : "dcuoovat, dabunt, impersonaliter, et more
Hebrseorum dictum pro Sofrqaerai, dabitur, continget tibi;
Hebrsei enim verba activa, numero plurali posita pro passivis
usnrpant, vide Luc.. 12 : 48." So Luke 16 : 9, Ss^iavrat -v/tas
sis ras altoviove majvas, " ye may be received into everlasting
habitations." The E. V., by employing " shall men give," limits
the thought of the text, and furnishes an improper subject to the
verb. Bloomf. : " Not ' shall men give,' but, as Gataker explains,
' dabitur wbis scilicet a Deo.' " Penn : " This idiomatic phrase-
ology, employed by St. Luke, which he repeats in 0. 16 : 9, signi-
fies only, will, or shall be given. The agent, or agents, to which
the verb pertains, is implied in the context." De "Wette, " wird
man schiitten ; " S. Fr., " en vous donnera ; " Italian, " sara
data ; " Castal., " donabitur."
1 " by." This corresponds with the Eevision of Mark, where
the text has Jy before the dative. So Wiclif.
J "with which;" a>. Thorn., Sharpe, Kend., Thelwall, M.
S. Fr., " dont ; " Iber., " con que."
k " ye measure ; " fier^sTts. Penn, Scarlett, Sharpe. This
verb occurs nine times in the N. Test, and is rendered " measure "
in six of these cases by the E. V. " Mete " is obsolete. It was
first employed by Wiclif in this form, " bi which ye meten : it
shall be meten." So Tyndale, " ye mete shall men mete to you
again ; " Cranmer, " ye mete withall shall other men mete to you
again ; " Genevan, " ye meate shal men, meate to you again."
These versions are consistent in using " mete " in both instances.
" "Will be." Wakef., Kend., Sharpe, Scarlett.
i " a blind man ; " ivyibg. Wakef., Murdock. Belg., " een
blinde ; " De Wette, " ein Blinder ; " Dan., " en Blind ; " G. and
S. Fr., De Sacy, " un aveugle ; " Iber., " un ciego ; " Diodati and
Ital., " un cieco." Heb. N. Test., "iss As no article occurs in
the text, the indefinite is appropriate in English. " The blind "
always indicates that the noun understood is a plural, according
to bur usus loquendi; hence, common readers always suppose that
the noun to be supplied is " persons," or " men." The supple-
mentary " man " is essential to complete the sentence.
" " guide ; " oSrjyctv. Penn, Dickinson, Camp., Angus. De
Wette, "den Weg weisen;" S. Fr.,'"guider ;" Iber., "guiar."
Liddell (in verbo) : " To lead one upon his way, hence to sliow one
the way, guide. Metaph., to guide, teach." So bSyyos is a guide.
Liddell. Bob. (in verbo) : "To lead the way, N. Test., to lead, to
guide." So John 16 : 13 to nvevfta. iris ai.ri&rias, bdyyrjoef
v/e&s els nZoav trjv aly&eiav, E. V., " the spirit of truth he
will guide you into' all truth." Acts 8 : 31, eav fiy rts oSijytfari
ftc; E. V., "except some man should guide me?" Here the
obvious sense is " to teach," as it is in the passage under con-
sideration. The noun oBqyol is rendered " guides," Matt. 23 : 16
(bis) bSqyol Tuykol, E. T., " blind guides." Acts 1 : 16, neql
'lovSa Toy yevopivov oSijyov, E. "V., " concerning Judas, which
was guide." Eom. 2 : 19, Henoi&ds ie aeavrov odr/yov rvyitov,
E. V., "And art confident that thou thyself art a guide of the
blind."
11 " a blind man." See note 1.
" will fall ; " nsaovinai. Kend., Angus, Thorn., Wakef.
Wesley, Penn, Sharpe, Norton, Scarlett, Camp., M.
f " both ; " ctfiyoTEQoi,. Thomson, Wakef;, Scarlett, Sharpe,
Norton, Camp., Kend., Thelwall. According to our usual mode
of speaking and writing, "they" is superfluous. De Wette,
" werden nicht beide fallen ; " Iber., " no caeran entrambos ; "
Span., " no caeran ambos."
" into a ditch ? " tie Pofavov. Wakefield, Penn, Scarlett,
Sharpei Camp., Angus,' Thelwall. Heb. N. Test., >Yta*3. Thorn,
and Dick., "into a pit." The insertion of " the," before " ditch,"
is not authorized by the text. The thought is, " any ditch, or pit,
which may be in the path of the blind men."
r "A disciple ; " fia&iftrjs. As the noun is anarthrous, " the "
was improperly inserted by Tyndale (probably from Luther'a
"Der Junger"), and his rendering was copied by Cranmer, Gene-
van, and the E. V. Wiclif, however, has "a disciple." So
Wakef., Penn, Norton, Thelwall. De Wette, " ein Junger ; "
Iber., " un discipulo ; " Ital., " II discepolo ; " Thorn, and Angus,
" a scholar." It is to bs regretted that " learner " had not been
made the equivalent of fcaS-ifr!;s by the early English translators
instead of the Latin discip-ulus, " disciple." The latter term
however, has become so current, that we must retain it instead
of " learner," or " scholar."
" teacher." See ch. 2 : 46, note. Thorn., Wakef., Sharpe,
Scarlett, Norton, Camp., Dick., Kend., M., Thelwall.
" fully prepared ; " nanifricfiSvoe. Belg., " volmaakt." The
THE GOSPEL AC.CORDIN.G TO LFKE. CHAP.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
41 And why beholdest thou the
mote that is in thy brother's eye,
but perceiy,est not the beam that
is in thine own eye ?
42 Either ho^r canst thou say
to thy brother, Brother, let me
pull out the m,o ; te ;that is in thine
eye, when thou thyself beholdest
not ;the beam that is in thine own
eye? Thou hypocrite, cast out ;
first the beam out of thine own
eye, and then shalt thou see clear-
ly to pull out the mote that is in
thy brother's eye.
43 For a good tree bringeth
GREEK TEXT.
oy p 8i8aQ-Ka\ps ayrpv.
4 * Ti 8e ftXeireis TO Kap(f)pff TP ey
T(j> o(j)da.\fi(j> Toy a8e^(j)oy p~ou,
A t>\ R ' \ V " ) 5>/
Tr/y pe ppKov TTjy ey T%> lo.ico
> " j /I \ ** * ' 4-2 ^ ^
p(f)6aA[JUp pv Kcvraypeis; rj TTWS"
Svvacrai \eyetv T< aea> o~ov }
'ASftye, a<pe? eK/SaAfi) Tp ifap-
(f>ps TO ey T(j> p<pda\[t(S o~pv }
ayrps rr/y cy r&> 6<f)0a\{jup p-py
8oKoy py fiXeiray ; vTroKpiTo.,
e/q3aAe TrpatToy Trjy Spitpy eV rpj)
p$0aA/4pu p-py, Kal TOTC <ta/3A-
v^ety fKJ3a\f'iy TP Ka.p<f>os TO fy
T<g p0#aA/,ia> Toy a8e\(f)ov (rov.
4 ? oy yap fo~Ti 8ev8pov
REVISED VERSION.
prepared, "will be as bis teach-
er. T Now, why beholdest thou <u
the "mote that is in thy
brother's eye, but perceivest
not the beam thaj is in thine
own eye? *or how canst thou 42
say to thy brother, Brother, let
me ?cast out the mote that is
in thine eye, when thou thy-
self beholdest not the beam J in
thine own eye? "Hypocrite!
first cast out the beam out of
thine own eye, and then thou
wilt see clearly to cast out the
mote that is in thy brother's
eye. b For there is no good 43
verb xaTafri^ca has the significations, to prepare, train, or
furnish thoroughly, refit, adjust, restore. Liddell. The significa-
tion of " fully instructed " has been applied to the participle here
by some translators, as Thorn., M.;' others have "complete."
Wakefield, " duly prepared"; " Norton, " properly prepared ; "
Campbell, " every finished disciple ; " De "Wette, t' wird gebildet
seyn ; " G. Fr., " tout disciple accompli ; " S. Fr., " mais forme,
tout disciple sera," etc. ; Iber., " el que ha sido hecho per-
fecto, sera," etc. Comparing this passage with John 15 : 20,
the thought seems to be substantially this, " every disciple
(learner), having been well trained (or disciplined), will be like
his teacher."
Tl)e above rendering is preferred, from a wish to keep near
the text, by conciseness and literafity. To expand the thought,
and render it more perspicuous, belongs to the commentator.
Dr. Burton (as quoted by Penn) says : " If we compare Matt.
10 : 24 (29), John 15 : 20, the whole passage seems to mean
that the disciples were to expect to be treated as their master."
" " will be ; " l<rcai. Thomson, Sharpe, Scarlett, Norton,
Eend., M.
r " Now, ; " Sb. Thorn., Wakef. This particle is regarded as
continuative here ; hence it is properly rendered by " now." Eob.
(Lex., in veroo).
* It is deemed best to retain " mote," although it is not an
exact equivalent of xdoyos. The passage has become a proverb
in our language, and the moral lesson has no less force with
" mote," than it would have with " straw," " chaff," " splinter," or
" twig." Kagyos (from xapyco, " to wither ") signifies a dry
italk (Lat. palea, festuca, stipula), dry twigs, straws, used by birds
if. constructing their nests. Plur. husks, chaff, rubbish, Lat. quisqui- ,
Should it be deemed necessary to drop " mote," " splinter "
be most appropriate.
x " or ; " rj. Thorn., "Wakef., "Wesley, Sharpe, Scarlett, Penn,
Norton, Camp., Dickinson, Kend v M. So parallel (B. V.) Matt.
7:4.
y " cast out ; " sxjSdHca. So rendered below in this verse (E. V.).
Uniformity in translation is certainly possible here, as the same
thought is represented by the verb in three instances. " Cast
out" is etymologically exact, while it is the usual rendering of
this verb in the N. Test. As an alternative, " take out," in the
three instances. So Penn and. Thorn.
1 " in thine own eye ; " Iv r<y oy&aififa qov. "Wakefield,
Sharpe, Scarlett, Norton. The construction here is not the
same as in V. 41, trp> Se Soxov irjv Iv tea iSica oy&aiftcy, where
rr t v (secundo) is properly rendered as a substitute for the relative
and verb (" that is "), but simply, -zfjv Iv rru oyd'alft^ aov
Soxov. Hence the insertion of " that is " is not required by the
text.
a " Hypocrite ! " vnox^ira. " Thou," in the E. V., is super-
fluous. Not used by Kend., Camp., Norton, Dick., "Wakefield,
Thorn., "Wiclif, or Geneva. It was first introduced into Cran-
mer's revision, and from that copied in the E. V. It probably
originated from Luther's rendering, "Du Heuchler." There is
no word equivalent to " Thou" in De Wette, G. Fr., S. Fr., De
Sacy, Span., Iber., Diodati, ltd., Syr., or Heb. N. Test.
" For there is no good tree ; " ov yQ lartv SevS^ov xtdbv.
Wesley, Penn, Dick, ("sound tree"). Belg., "Want het en is
geen gpede boom." Luther and De Wette, " Denn es ist kein
guter Baum." S. Fr., " Car il n'y a point d'arbre bon." Iber.,
" Porque no hai arbol bueno." As an alternative rendering,
" For that is not a good tree." So Bloomf., Camp, (omitting
"for"), M. The above rendering is deemed exact, and more
euphonious than several other modes of expression, which
been adopted by translators.
; 62
THE GOSPEL
TO LUKE. CHAP. YL
KING JAMES' VERSION.
not forth corrupt fruit ; neither
doth a corrupt tree bring forth
good fruit.
44 For. every treeis known by
his own fruit : for of thorns men do
not gather figs, nor of a bramble-
bush gather they grapes.
45 A good man out of the good
treasure of his heart, bringeth
forth that which is good ; and 'an
evil man out of the evil treasure
of his heart, bringeth forth that
which is evil: for of the abund-
GREEK TEXT.
TTQIOVV KdpTTOV
SevSpov
'KdXoV.
IK TOV I8iov kapTTov
iroiovv Kapirov
KOLO~TOV
ov yap e akOLvv crvXX4yovo~L
crvka, ov8e CK fiarov Tpvycacrt
o-Td(f)vX^v. 45 6 ai.yd.6os av6pu>-
iros fK tov ayddov drjcravpov rrjs
KapBtas avTbv -jrpo^epei TO dya-
0ov kai b Trov-irjpos avQ pantos e/c
TOV Trovrjpov 0rj(ravpov TTJ? kap-
Sias avTov 7rpo<j)pet TO Trovypov
IK yap TOV irepio'areviJ.dTos TTJS
REVISED VERSION.
tree 'which bearcth d bad fruit:
nor is there a bad tree which
beareth good fruit. For every 44
tree is known by ''its own fruit.
For f they do not gather figs
from thorns, nor do 'they gather
grapes from e a bramble. h The 45
good man out of the good
treasure of his heart, bringeth
forth that which is good ; and
'the evil man out of the evil
treasure of his heart, bringeth
forth that which is evil, for
! out of the abundance of the
c " which beareth ; " itoiotv. Thorn., Wakef., Norton. This
arrangement belongs also to Penn and some others, who have
employed "brings forth," or "produces," as the verb. The
participial construction might be retained by saying, "nor is
there a bad tree bearing good fruit." Still, according to our
idiom, the finite verb is most familiar and perspicuous. "To
bear " is preferable to " to bring forth," as more familiar, and in
harmony with the- present usage of the English.
d '"bad;" odn^ov. Though this adjective usually has the
sense of -rotten, or decayed; in this case, from the adjuncts, and its
contrast to xaibv, it seems to be used generically as equivalent
to mtvriQos. Bretsch. (in verbo). So it is applied in Matt.
13 : 48 to fishes which have been recently taken, but are naturally
unfit for food. In this instance, they are not supposed to be
"bad" (aciTt^a), because they had become putrid.
" its." Unless in personifications, the application of " his "
to things without life is a violation of grammatical propriety.
t " they do not gather ; " ov avUlyovat. Kend., Scarlett,
Wesley, Thelwall, Penn (" they gather not"). There is nothing
in the text to authorize the use of " men " as a nominative. The
pronoun " they " is therefore literal, and furnishes a good sense.
Still, we may regard ovMfyovot as used impersonally, like Sta-
aovai, in v. 38 (see note eo loco), and Ssgtovrai, ch. 16 : 9. In
this case, the verbs ovtteyovat and rgvycoai should be rendered,
" for figs are not gathered from thorns, nor grapes gathered from
a bramble." These verbs are rendered impersonally by Thorn.,
Wakef., Camp. De Wette, " denn nicht von Dornen lieset man
Feigen, noch von der Hecke herbstet man Trauben." S. Fr.,
" car on ne cueille pas des figues sur des epines, et on ne ven-
dange pas des raisins sur un buisson." This rendering of the
verbs, as impersonals, is submitted as an alternative version.
* " : a bramble;" fiarov. Norton, Wesley, Angus, Dickinson
("the bramble"). Bonos is a generic term applied to any
prickly bush, or shrub. Hob. (Lex.). It is defined " bramble," by
Robinson, Liddell. Bretsehneider, " rubus, sentis." The addition
of "bush" to this word in the E. V. is superfluous. See
Webster (Diet, "Bramble"). As cuiav&tov is rendered simply
by "thorns" (not "thorn-bushes"), this word (fl&rog) should
correspond with that form.
h " the good man ; " 6 aya&bs av&Qtortos. Camp., Norton,
Wakef., Thorn., Kend. Belg., " de goede mensche ; " De Wette,
" Der gute Mensch ; " S. Fr., " 1'homme bon ; " Iber. and Span.,
" el hombre bueno ; " Diodati, " L' uomo buono." The article
was improperly omitted by Tyndale (perhaps from regard to
Luther's version, " ein guter Mensch"), and his mistake was
followed by the subsequent Eug. versions, down to that of 1611.
The phrases, "the good man," and "the evil man," not only
accord with the text, but are in harmony with our idiom. See
E. V., Prov. 11 : 17 ; 16 : 19.
1 " the evil man ; " 6 ytavrjQas av&^toaog. The reasons as-
signed for retaining the definite article in rendering 6 aya&os
avS-oioTtos, are equally applicable here. See last note. Thus
Thorn., Wakef., Norton, Camp., Kend. The article is retained
also by Belgic, Do Wette, G. and S.French, De Sacy, Span., and
Iber.
J "out of;" lx. So this word is properly rendered twice in
this verse, i. e., where it occurs in ex rov aya&ov, and & TOV
novrjqov. So Wesley, Sharpe, Camp. So Matt. 12 : 34, ex ya$
TOV mgiaosvftaTos T?fs xapdias is rendered in the E. V., "for out
of the abundance of the heart," etc. The rendering in the E. V
is an unnecessary departure from the usual signification of ex,
It, however, originated with Wiclif. He was copied verbatim
by Tyndale, Cranmer, Geneva, Rheims, and E. V. As Wiclifs
version was made from the Vulgate, on looking at that, we find
the reason for the rendering (which has been censured) in the
two prepositions by which the Latin translator expressed ex :
" Bonus homo de homo thesauro malus homo de malo thesauro
ex abundantia enim cordis." Erasmus, with better judgment,
has " ex homo thesauro ex malo thesauro ex abundantia enim
cordis." The renderings of Beza, Castalio, and Schott are the
same; ex being the equivalent of ex in the three instances. The
rendering is uniform in Syriac (,_ic), Heb. N. Test, (a), Belg.
("uit"), De Wette ("aus"), S. Fn*("de"), Iber. ("de").
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VI.
63
KING JAMES' VEBSION.
ance of the heart his,mputh speak-
eth.
46 And why call ye me Lord,
Lord, and do not the things which
I say?
47 Whosoever cometh to me,
and heareth my sayings, and
doeth them, I will shew you to
whom he is like.
48 He is like a man which built
an house, and digged deep, and
laid the foundation on a rock :
and: when the flood arose, the
stream beat vehemently upon that
house, and could not shake it : for
it was founded upon a rock.
49 But he that heareth and
doeth not, is like a man that with-
GEEEK TEXT.
p, AaAet TO aroyiia av-
TOV,
6 TL 5,e fie KttXeiTf)
Kypije, KCU ov TToieire a
47 Tray 6 pxp/j.evos Trpos (J.e
p.ov TCOV Xoycov Kal iroitav
avrovs,
ff 48
v/uv rvi ecrrv
OLKiav,. os.
Kal f@advi> e, KCU. edj)
rrjv Trerpq.v TrAij/i/tupccs e
, Trpocrepprj^ev 6 TTOTO.-
fj.os ry OIKIO. Keu>i7, KOI OVK
'ta~)(y<r aaXevaai avTrjV' rede-
/u,eA((TO yap ETTI rrjv irerpav.
49 ' S\v > ' v v r
o oe aKovaras /cat p.r) iroir)(ras
camv avdpcoircp
EEVISED-.VEUSIOX.
heart his mouth speaketh. k N ow 46
why do ye call me Lord, Lord,
and do not the things which I,
say.? Whoever cometh to me, 47
and heareth my 'words, and
doeth them, I will show you
"whom he is like. He is like 48
a man "building a house, who
"dug deep, and laid 'a founda-
tion 'on the rock ; and when
there came a flood, the stream
burst 'against that house, and
could not shake it, for it was
founded on, the rock. But he 49
who heareth and doeth not, is
like a man who built a house
* " Now ; " 8e. See v. 41, note. Thorn.
i " words j " loycav. Thorn., Penn, Norton, Scarlett, Sharpe,
Wakef., Kend., JM., Thelwall. From the frequency with which
the Saviour has used Uyos (in singular and plural) to indicate
his message from heaven to men the commandments from the
Father, which he made known it is desirable to employ " word "
and " words." as an equivalent, as far as the idiom of our language
will allow. This hag been properly done in many cases in
the B. V. It is to be regretted that those, who made that
version, had not been more uniform in their renderings. See
Mark 8 : 38. John 3 : 34 ; 5 : 47 ; 6 : 63 ; 12 : 47, 48 17 8
Acts 5 : 20.
10 " whom." According to present usage, " to " should not be
expressed before " whom." After such verbs as show, bid," etc.,
there is an ellipsis of the preposition, when it would come
immediately before the pronoun. This rale of our language is
observed in the B. V., 1 Sam. 16 : 3. 2 Kings 7 : 12. Dan.
10 : 21. Exod. 25 : 40, The preposition is properly omitted by
Ihom., Wakeneld, Scarlett, Norton, Penn, Campbell, Kendrick,
Angus, M.
" "building;" olxoSpfiovvri. Norton, Kend., Scarlett, M.,
Dick, ("erecting").
" dug deep ; " taxa^e xal epddvve. Wakef., Scarlett, Dick
Kena.,M. " Digged " is obsolete.
" " a foundation ; " "& eft iho v . There is nothing in the text to
warrant the use of ife indefinite article here, any more than in
the next verse, where & efte liw is rendered " a foundation," in the
. V. Thorn., Sharpe. Luther, " ohne Grund ; " G. Fr,, " sans
Im faire de fondement ; " Iber., " un fundamento." Heb. N. Test
" on the rock ; " btl rfv nh 9<af . Thorn., Wakef., Sharpe,
Camp., Dick, Kend., Angus, Thelwall, ; M. Luther, auf
den Fels;" De Wette, "auf den Felsen;" G. Fr., "sur la
roche;" S. Fr., "sur le rpcher;" De Sacy, "sur la pierre;"
Span, and Iber., " sobra la roca." The relation of comparison or
contrast often gives a definite signification to words in Greek (am?,
probably to most languages) which demands a corresponding
particle to indicate that fact. In this case, nh^av is presented
as in contrast to yfjv, v. 49. Each of the words, therefore, has
the article.
r " there came a flood ; " niqftfivgas yevoficvqs. "Arose " is
ambiguous in this construction. Common readers suppose the
thought is that the water increased, or swelled upward, whereas
the idea is simply that an inundation took place. Thus in the
parallel, Matt. 7 : 27, y.arsftr] fj fiqam, *J rfld-ov ol itorafiol,
" the rain came down, and the rivers (streams) came," etc. This
description of a tempest was taken from facts which were
familiar to the hearers. Thunder, hail, tempests of wind and rain
occur during the winter in Palestine. Kivalets swell to torrents,
and the houses of the poorer class, being slightly built, fall in
great numbers. IZlijfi/ivfa is not restricted by the Hellenistic
writers to the Jlovi of the sea, the tide, which is its sense in classic
usage. Kuinoel : "Hhififtv^a quo vocabulo Aquila Deut. 33 : 19
Hebr. saia expressit, dicitur de exundatione aquarum qualibet,
maris, fluniinis, lacus." So JIBIZJ used here, in the Heb. N. Test.
The rendering "a flood" is demanded by the text; the noun,
being anarthrous. Thorn., Sharpe, Wesley.
" burst;" n^oac^>;Sev. Rob. (Lex.), in verbo, "to break, or
'mrst toward, or upon any thing, to dash upon, or against." If
'beat" should be retained, then "vehemently" should by all
means be dropped. This word is now restricted" to mental acts.
' "against;" ngos (in composition}. Thorn., Wakef., Perm,
Dick., M. So rendered (E. V.) in v. 49.
64r
THE GOSPEL ACCOEDING TO LTJKB: OBCA:P. VTI.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
out a foundation built an house
upon the earth, against which the
stream did beat vehemently; and
immediately it fell, and : the ruin
of that house was great;
CHAP. VII.
Now when he had ended all his
sayin'gs in the audience of tlie
people, he entered iato Caper-
naum.
2 And a certain centurion's
servant, who was dear unto him,
was sick, and ready to die.
3 And when he heard of Jesus,
he sent : unto him the elders of 'the
GEEEK TEST.
A
cravri olic'iav em TrjV yr\v
TI irpoa-eppr)ev o iro-
evdecoy Ifretre, /cat
pfyfui TTJS
eiteivrjst
TO
CHAP. vn.
8s eTrXrjpsaore Travrd
T pijfJLara avrov els rajr okoay
TOV Xuov, elarjXdev elf IZcarep-
KUTovTap^ov Be TL-
vos Sov\6f Kdkcoff e'xaiv ^tteAAe
or T\V avrq evn/aoy.
3 aKOvaras 8e irepl TOV 'Iijcrov,
aTrearetAe -jrpos avTov7rpe<rftvTe-
fiEvisED
on the earth, without a founda-
tion ; against which the stream
burst, and immediately it fell,
and "great was the ruin of that
house.
CBtAP.' VII:
Now" when he had 'finished 1
all his sayings b in the hearing
of the people, he entered into
Capernaum. And a certain 2
centurion's servant; e who was*
dear to him',. d being sick; was
about to die. And 'having 3
heard of' Jesus, he' : seht ;s elderr
"and great was the ruin of that house;" v.al lyiveio 1 vo
ifjs olxlas Ixelvris ftsya. Thomson. This arrangement
similar to that of Matt. 7 : 27, is adopted for euphony, and ease
in enunciation. So WakeSeld has, " and the crash of that house
was great;" 'Pfjyfta signifying a rending, breach, or ruin. Bob
(Lex.). It is not to ba confounded with' ^Js, in signification
the latter being active, while the former indicates the \result of the
action, like our terms " a breaking," and " a breach." G. and S
Pr., " la mine ; " Span, and Iber., " la ruina ; " Diodati, " la sua
ruina;" Ital., "larovina."
a " he had finished ; " In^toas. Bob. (Lex., in loco,
Thomson', Norton, Scarlett, G. and A. Campbell. Bras., " con-
Buminasset." Alternative, " had completed."
b " in the hearing ; " els -cas axoas. Thomson, Norton, Penn,
"Wesley, Kend., Thelwall, Angus, M. This is the only instance
where the word is rendered " audience," in the B. V.
occurs Matt. 13 : 14. Eom. 10 : 17 (bis). 1 Cor. 12 : 17 (bis).
Gal. 3 : 2, 5, etc. '.' Audience " originated with Tyndale, and
was copied by Cranmer, Geneva,- and B. V. It is now restricted
to diplomatic language.
* " who was dear to him ;" os rjv avrcji gprifios. The render-
ing of the E. V. is retained, as it affords a good sense ; still ety-
mology (cifa],value,'worth, or price] would authorize the form,
" who was much prized or valued by him."- Tie change' perhaps
maybe of too little moment, to require an alteration in the E. V.
In point of exactness, it may deserve consideration. The sense of
being "honorable," or "honored," which sometimes belongs to
ctnifios, is not appropriate in connection with Sovlosf Sharpe,
"was valuable to him;" Norton, "whom he much valued;"
Scarlett, " who was esteemed by Iiim j " Dick., " who was greatly
esteemed by him;." Vulgate, Beza, " qui illi erat pretiosus;"
Castal., " quern servum ille in pretio habebat." The language of
the E. V; probably originated in the rendering of Erasmus, " qui
illi erat charus." De Wette, " der ihm sehr werth war ; " Thel- ,
wall, " was precious." Heb. N. Test., Ij3*rt-' Compare Zech.
which I was prized by them ").
d " bemg sicky' xasKas &GW. M., Thelwall. The participial
coBstructidn is literal, accurate^ and mo're euphonious than that of
4 "about to die;" J^M^E vehevrav. KendricK, Thelwall.
Yulg., Schott, " erat moriturus ; " Beza, " moribundns erat ; "
G. Fr., " s'en allait mourir" (" was going to die") Iber., " iba
a morir." The radical sense of fieUco is " to be on the point to
do." Bob. (Lex.). Although there are cases where with an
infinitive, it may be rendered by a simple future, there is still, in
strictness, a difference of signification, as jtoirjaco, "I will do,"
t ; fieD.ia noieTv, " I am (now) about to do." So c/tsU.oi> not-
av, " I was (then) about to do." Buttmann, |l37, note 11. The
above rendering is literal, and exact in presenting the thought of
the text. "We have a colloquial phrase which! closely 'corresponds
with the Greek, " he' was going to die."
r "having heard;" axovoae. Angus, Thorn'., Norton, Scar-
lett, Penn, Camp., Dick. By this re'ridering, the 'participial con-
struction of the text is preserved, and, at the same time, an
inaccuracy of the E. V. removed. The' phrase, " when he heard
of Jesus, he sent," implies, according to our idiom, that tJie hear-
ing and the sending took place at the 'same time': This' results
from the form of the adverb " when," equivalent to at the time.
This inaccuracy frequently occurs in the E. V. Our usus. loquendi
demands "having heard," rather than "hearing." The phrase-
ilogy of the B. V., in this instance, is derived from" Tyndale, as
lis was from the Vulg., " cum audisset."
" elders ; " rtpsofivTefovs. The noun is anarthrous. There
s no exigentia loci, which demands the use of "the," before
ciders." No article employed by Sharpe, Scarlett, Kendrick,
"Wesley, Camp., M., Thelwall, De "Wette, 'Iber. '
THE GOSPEL ACCOEDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VII.
65
KINff & VERSION.
Jews, beseeching' him tha't he
would- coine and heal his servant.
4 And wlien they came to Je-
sus, they besougfrt him instantly,
saying, That he was worthy for
whom he should do this :
5 For heldveth our nation, and
he hath Milt us a 1 synagogue;
6 Then Jesus went with them.
And when fie was now not fa'r
GREEK TEXT.
povs Tcoi> 'lovSaliov, epcaiT&v av-
TOV, OTrcbf lX0a)i> 8iacf<x>(rr) TOV
Sov\oi/ avtov. 4 61 Se
-irpbs TO'V 'ir)<rovv irdpe-
avrov cnfovddta)?, Xeypii-
1 r\ US' i> > ...... f
rer, UTL afyos ecrriv to
5 ayoara. yap TO edvos
fffixolij kai TT]V aiivdycoyTjv avros
6 '0 8e 'Ir-
(fovs eTrojoeuefo crvv avTais- r/8r]
KEVISED VERSION.
of the Jews to hint, h tO a ; sk Him
to come and heal his serva'rit 1 .
And when' they cam'e to Jesflis, &
'they besought him earnestly,
saying, 'He is wortlry that tho'ii
shouldest do' this for him : for 5
he loveth our nation, and k he'
himself "built us our synagogue.
And Jesus went with them, arid 6
when he was m now not far from ;
h " to ask ; " ietoriSr; Angus, Wakefield. G. and S. Fr.,
pour le prier ; " Ital., " a pregarlo." As this participle is in
the 'angular, and refers to the centurion, by using the infinitive,
the common rea'der naturally construes it with: " he sent " (a
orsde), in accordance with the text. It is rendered by the
infinitive in the versions of Norton (" to beg") and Camp : . (" to
entreat"). Castalib employs the supine "oratum." De Wette
renders'" the participle by the finite verb, " und ersuchte." The
English : equivalent 1 " he entreated him" is ; submitted as an alter-
native rendering; The suppbsitidn that igcoraiv is used for
tyarcovras; does' not seem necessary to' remove aB apparent diffi-
culty in the constructibri. The c6mmon : maxim,' Qui fa'cit per
alium fa'cit per se, will account for the singular iga-cJiv. "Asli "
is the ordinary sigriification' 6f egta-cato. Ebbi, Liddell:
' "they besought him 1 earnestly ;" Tca^cxaidvii atrov driov-
Saicos. Thorn., KendV Angus, "Wesley, Norton, Campbell, and
Thorn., " earnestly besought'." Siidvdaitos is 'rendered "earnest-
ly" by Wakef., Scarlett, Penri, Dickinson. Rob. (in verbo),
" speedily, i: e., earnestly, diligently." " Instantly'" is' no longer
used 1 in this sfensel
1 "He is wbrttiy that thodi shouldest do this for' him ; " a|>s
Imtv y naget-et -tovro. Sharpe, M., Kend. Tulg. and Eras.,
"dignns : dsti t ut' : hoc illl p'rSstes';" Beza,- " dignus est cui hoc
praebeaV;" Scfrbtt, " dightis ; estj wii Hbcpifastes'i " Nortdii; " lie
is wortlijr that you should 5 do this ; for him ; " De'Wette, "Er
verdie'net; diiss dtf ih'ni' dieses' l gewahrest ; "' Belg'., " Hij is waatd'ig
dat gij hein dat doeli ; " Pen'n, " He' is worthy that'thou slibuldest
grant iim'thisV' XTageS-ei is ; the Attib form of 2nd pers". 1st fut.
indicative, instead' of itafiirj. Buttmanii (Gram., 103; ILt 3) :
"The Attics'' ha(Ith' further 'peculiarity' that instead bf ?i, con-
strued from sat, tlief wr'ote' ." However, the' reading' liaQlgsi
in the case be'fbre us, is probably sp'urious. Sclibtt says : " Pro
vulg. Kapilju (qutB 1 fp'rin'a'' pe'rsona 2. Futuri Medii in hoc verbb
usitata est) curil Knappioi ifeyerb; Lachni. dedimHs" an^^
auctoritate edd: A 1 . Bi D. L. X. plunmum minuscc." The E: V.
render's the verb as though it were' 3rd pers. flit., " he should do,"
mistaking the Attic form of the Textus Receptus (2nd pers. fut.
midd.) for fut. ind. active! None of the earlier Englisli versions
made this mistake] Tyndale, Crarimer, Geneva, and Rhe'ims have
" thoa shouldst ; " Wic'lif,' " that thou grant." "Ori, before Zi6s,
should nbibd'translated"'that,"'as r it is merely the sign of quota-
tion. In' addition 1 to the authorities above cited for regarding the
verb as 2nd pers. fut. midd., we may add Syriac j^asfzj 601 ]&
\ I JCT ai. (Murdock, " He is worthy that thbu shouldest do this
for him ")'. Castalio, Wakefield. Luther, " Er ist es wefth, dass
du ihm das erzeigest."
k " hie himself built ; " avros tyxoSofirjoev. Kend., M., Angus,
Thelwali. Belgl, " heeft zelve gebouwd ; " De f3acy, " il nous a
meme bati ; " S. Fr., " c'est lui qui a edefie ; " Iber., " el m5smo
edefico." These renderings, with greater or less accuracy, bring
out the' emphasis of avros, which is overlooked in the E. V.
Bengel : "Avros, ipse, ultro. Hoc majus quiddam et rarius, sedr-
ficare synagogam, quam diligere nationem; cy>coS6fiijasv, cedijica-
vii, .suo sumtu aut jussu." Vulg., Mont., Eras., Schott, " ipse
aedificavit ; "' Wesley, Wakef., Penn, " hath himself built."
1 " built us our synagogue ; " -ir/v owciycoytjvivxodo/cijosv
rjfiTv. Seholefield, M. Literally, " built for us the'.synagogue."
The article n^ here may properly be rendered by the possessive
pronoun " oiir." Kuhner, 244. 4 : " The article very often' takes'
the place of the possessive pronoun, when ; it is connected with such"
substantives as' naturally belong to a particular person mentioned
in the sentence. In such cases, the English use the possessive
pronoun." See Crosby (Greek Gram., 482). The article was
probably used here, because there was only one synagogue in the
place. Hence the expression was definite. Kend., Angus, " built"
our synagogue." In the following versions,' the article is rendered"
literally by the definite, Belg., Luther, De Wettej G. and'S'.Fr.,
Iber., Ital. The harshness of the rendering,- in' English, " built
us (or " for us") the synagogue," renders the form, given abbv'e,
indispensable.
" "now;" TJSrj. This particle has beeii' retained,' with" some
hesitation. It se'e'ms : obvious that our wsiis loquendi demands^
that "now" (or "already")' should be dropped^ It would 5
require, " and when' Jesus' was not far from tHe house?' Th'oug
?jStj may not be pleonastic, strictly speaking, yet' the r English
equivalent is' so, in' this construction. I' suggest, therefore, that
" now" be omitted. This hds been done by Norton an'd Wake-'
fieldi Murdock (although the Syriac" agrees exactly with the
Gi-eek, ^Ij ,a) renders,'" when he was ! not far frbiri the' house.''
Tlie'Heb/N. Test., in good taite, avoids in'trodiicing th'e Greek"
idiom, by 'saying' ri'i'an 'ja pirTn ri'jij KVx>Vi
66
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING- TO LUKE. CHAP. VII.
JAMBS VERSION.
from the house, the centurion sent
friends to him, saying unto him,
Lord, trouble not thyself: for I
am not worthy that thou shouldest
enter unto my roof ;
7 Wherefore neither thought I
myself "worthy to come unto thee ;
but say in a word, and my servant
shall be healed.
8 For I also am a man set un-
der authority, having under me
soldiers, and I say unto one, Go,
GREEK TEXT.
avrov
iKavos ta vwo rr/v
7 810 ov8e
ov p.a.Kpav
O.TTO Trjf oiKiaSy eirejj.\lse irpos av-
rov o tKarovTapxp? (j)i\ovs } Ae-
ycov avTtS, JZvpie, fj.r/ er/cyAAoir
ov -yap flfji
a-Tyr)v /JLOV
ifiavrov rj^icacra. irpos ere f\0ei
dXXa i7T Xo-ycp, /cat lad^a-erai
o TraFy fiou. 8 /cat 'yap eyco ai>-
Opomos elp.1 VTTO e^ovariav racr-
tro/iei'oy, %a>v vir ffiavrov (rrpa-
Ttcoray, /cat Xe-yca TOVTGI, IJopev-
EEVISED VERSION.
the house, the centurion sent
friends to him, "to say to him,.
Lord, trouble not thyself: for
I am not worthy that thou
shouldst enter under my roof;
"therefore tl did not. think my- 7
self worthy to come to thee ;
but 'speak the word, and my
servant will be healed. "For &
even I, 'who am a man placed
under authority, having 'sol-
diers under me, "even I say to
n " to say ; " feytav. Norton, Camp., Sharpe (" to tell him ").
The construction here is the same as fytorwv av-cov, v. 3. See
note on that verse.
" therefore ;" &o. "Wakef., Bob. (Lex.). "Wherefore" is
obsolescent. The word is rendered " therefore " in E. "V. of Luke
1 : 35. Acts 10 : 29. Bom. 2 : 1 ; 4 : 22. 2 Cor. 12 : 10. Heb.
6:1; 11 :12.
P " I did not think myself worthy ; " ovSe ipavtov rfeitoaa.
Thorn. S. Fr., " C'est pourquoi je ne me suis meme juge digne."
This rendering is preferable for simplicity and euphony. Should
it be deemed important to give ovSs an emphasis (as a negative ;
see v. 9, note), we can render, "I did not think myself even
worthy," etc. In reference to " neither," in constructions like the
present, "Webster (Diet., art. " Neither ") says : " In the last mem-
ber of a negative- sentence, neither is improperly used for nor;
for not, in the first clause, refers only to that clause, and the
second negative refers only to the second clause." OiiSe is ren-
dered "not" (E. V.) Matt. 25 : 45. Mark 12 : 10. Luke 12 : 27
(bis) ; 23 : 40. John 1:3. 1 Cor. 4:3; 14 : 21. Heb. 8 : 4.
1 John 2 : 23.
1 " speak the word ; " eiaze ).6yca. Thorn., Wakef., Norton.
As 16y eg is anarthrous, it seems improper to insert " the," before
" word," as has been done by some late translators, unless it is
italicized as a supplement. The literal rendering " speak by
word " does not accord with our idiom. The thought is exhib-
ited in our language by " speak the word." So in the parallel,
Matt. 8 : 8, dne ),6ya> (Text of Griesb., Kuinoel, Tittm., Knapp,
Theile, Tisch., Lachm., Scholz), E. V., " speak the word." De
Wette, " sprich nur ein Wort ; " S. Fr., " dis une parole ; " De
Sacy, " dites settlement une parole ; " Span., " di una parole ; "
Ital., " di una parola ; " Tyndale, Geneva, Bheims, " say the
word ; " Gran., " say thou the word." Kuincel (on Matt. 8:8):
"Pro loyov legendum est loyt? elite loyy die verbo (Vulg.),
verbo impera, i. e. simpliciter jube. Etiam Grseei scriptores
formula elneiv ioyea utuntur, ita, ut loycp redundet." It is not
probably advisable to make the change, which this would demand
in the language of the E. V., and to say, " command, and my
servant will be healed." We can retain the idiom, as that of our
own language approximates sufficiently to allow the more literal
version. The translator of the Iberian made an ingenious effort
to bring out the idea of commanding, yet to retain the equivalent
of Uyta, " manda con una palabra," etc.
r " For even I ; " xal ya$ fyca. Thorn., Wakef., Norton, Penn,
Camp. See ch. 6 : 32, note. Mont, and Beza, " etenim ego."
So Bob. (Lex.), y.al yac, (in verbo, ya/a). "Also" makes the
language of the centurion equivalent to " I as well as thyself am
set under authority," etc. There is no probability that he
thought of any subordination to the will or control of another,
except in his own case. Kuincel very justly remarks on the
parallel, Matt. 8:9: "Etenim ego homo (miles) imperio subjectus,
si quendam militum meorum mihi subjectorum jubeo ire aliquo,
etc. Comparatio ipsa non justo uterius extend! debet, sed mens
et sententia centurionis, more militum loquentis, haac est ; Tibi
parent leges naturae, tu, utpote insignis propheta, facile, etiam
absens, servum meum sanare potes; etenim mihi, neutiquam
tecum comparando, parent imperio subject!, et faciunt, quascun-
que iis praecipio, quanto magis ergo cum tua potestas plane
eximia sit, tibi parebunt morbi, ita ut sine mora servum meum
sanare possis."
" who am a man placed under authority ; " avfycortos elfu
vno Qovoiav. By using the supplement " who," the thought of
the passage is fully exhibited, and the drift of the centurion's
argument is at once seen. Norton has, " who am a man under
command ; " Wakefield, " that am a man under authority ; "
Thomson, " who am myself under command." Unless y.al, at the
commencement of the sentence, is dropped (as has been done by
Sharpe), an arrangement of the passage like the above seems
necessary, to render the thought clear in English, and avoid the
difficulty mentioned in the last note above. S. Fr., " car moi-
meme je suis un homme place sons autorite, ayant sous moi
des soldats ; et je dis a Tun : va et il va," etc. " Placed " is
deemed a more appropriate rendering of raaaouevos than " set,"
as it is in harmony with present usage. So Bloomf. on Matt.
9-
' " soldiers under me ; " m Ipavrbv. This is the natural
order in our language. Thorn., Wesley, Norton, Sharpe, Scar-
lett, Camp., Penn, and Wakef. have " soldiers."
1 " even ; " y.al. By rendering xal " even," as in the preceding
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VII.
67
KING JAMES' VERSION.
and he goeth; and to another,
Come, and he cometh ; and to my
servant, Do this, and he dooth it.
9 "When Jesus heard these
things, he marvelled at him, and
turned him about and said unto
the people that followed him, I
say unto you, I have not found so
great faith, ho, not in Israel.
10 And they that were sent,
returning to the houss, found the
servant "whole that had been sick.
11 And it came to pass the day
after, that he went into a city
GREEK TEXT.
i Tropeverai' KCU aAAo>,
KOL epxeTCU' KCU. TW
fJ.OV, HoLTJCTOV TOVTOy KCU
TTOtfi. 9 'A.KOV(TOLS 6 TOLVTO. 6
'Ir)(rovs edav/JLatrev avrov KOU
T(S qiKoXovOovvTi aural
, Aeyca vplv, ovde tv
TCJ) 'IcrparjX TO<ravTT)v TTLCTTIV ev-
pov. 10 Kaii vTTo&Tptyavre? ol
7refj.(f)dei>TGp ely rrjv OLKOV i>pov
TOV d<rdevovi>Ta 8ov\ov vyial-
VOVTO..
11 TL7- .IT-*/ > ^
KAI fyei/ero / rg
eVo/jeuero eiy TroXw
BEVISED VERSION.
this one, Go, and he goeth ; and -
to another, Come, and he com-
eth ; and to my servant, Do
this, and he doeth it. And *
Jesus T hearing "this, wonder-
ed at him, and ^turning, said
to the crowd that followed him,
I say to you, 'not even in Israel
have I found "such great faith !
And those, who were sent, re- 10
turning to the house, found the
servant, who had been sick,
b well. And it came to pass n
'the next day, that *he was
going "to a city called Nain ;
member of the sentence, the passage becomes perspicuous, and
the foundation of the centurion's hope, that his servant would be
relieved, is seen at once. It may, however, be objected, that in
this case the English pronoun "I" is emphatic, while the Greek
does not express tyca, as Sa commonly done, when that pronoun has
an emphasis. The answer to this is, that though emphasis in
pronouns is usually indicated by writing them, yet, when the con-
struction of a sentence gives us an emphatic pronoun (which is
expressed), and the following member of the sentence is closely
connected by the conjunction, and its verb has the same nomina-
tive, this nominative is really emphatic, though the emphasis is to
be supplied by the reader's mind. This common-sense principle is
applicable to Greek, Latin, and other languages, which, for the
sake of conciseness, do not express the proaotia, when the omission
would not produce obscurity. If, after this explanation, the ren-
dering of this verse is deemed unsatisfactory, I would suggest the
following, " For even I myself am a man placed under authority,
having soldiers under me, and I say to this one," etc.
"hearing;" axovaas. Thorn., Wesley, Sharpe, Scarlett,
Dick., Camp., Kead., M.
" this ; " wtvra. Norton, Kend. Belg., " dit ; " De Wette,
" difises ; " Span, and Iber., " esto ; " G. Fr., " ce que (Jesus
ayant entender)." See ch. 5 : 27, note.
x " wondered ; " e&avfiaosv. WaksSeld, Norton, Scarlett,
Kend, M. So (E. V.) Matt. 15 : 31. Luke 2 : 18 ; 4 : 22 ;
9 : 43, etc. " Marvelled," at present, is seldom used, except in a
ludicrous sense.
* " turning ; " OTgaipeis. Thorn., Wesley, Sharpe, Campbell,
Angus, M. No qualifying term like " round about " (which is a
tautology), or " round " is necessary here. This participle occurs
Matt. 16 : 23, 6 Se or(>a<pels, and is rendered simply, " but he
turned," in the E. V. So Luke 7 : 44 ; 9 : 55 ; 14 : 25 ; 22 : 61 ;
23 : 28. Nor is it necessary to insert " him " in this or similar
constructions. S-t^iyca is one of those verbs whose 2nd aorist
oass. has a midd. signification. Buttm., \ 130, note. Bob. (Lex.,
Yet, in translating such verbs, we do not express the
pronoun which is the object of the verb. We say, " he turned
and went away," and do not employ the full form, " he turned
himself and went away." In all the above cited passages from
the E. V., " himself" is not expressed.
z "not even;" ovSe. Liddell (Lex.). Kendrick, M. ItaL,
" neppure ; " De Wette, " nicht einmal ; " Iber., " ni aun ; "
Bloomf. (N. Test.), " nedum, not even in Israel, much less among
the Gentiles." Perhaps the language of this note by Bloomfield
would be more correct with this amendment, " not even in Israel,
where God had made himself known through the prophets, and
where his written word was known, and where, of course, more
faith might be anticipated than among Gentiles, who had been
destitute of the word of the Lord, which is a light to the feet of
the children of men." The contrast, introduced by the Saviour,
was a deep and affecting reproof of the unbelief of the Jews,
from whom the kingdom of heaven was soon to be taken. Bob.
(Lex., ovSe) : " Specially, not even, not so muck as." Erasmus,
Beza, Castalio, Schott, " ne quidem." So Bretsch. in loco (Lex.,
ovSs). Beig., "en niet;" S. Fr., "que merne je n'ai pas
(trouve)."
" such great faith ; " roaavTtjv nianv. Penn. " Such "
corresponds more nearly with the present usage of English, than
" so." As modifying " great," " such " has the force of " thus,"
i. e., " thus great," in other words, faith thus, or as great.
b " well ; " vymlvovva. Eob. (Lex., in verbo). See ch. 5 : 31,
note. So Thorn., Wakef., Norton, Scarlett, Penn, Camp., Kend.,
M. The arrangement adopted here, is that of Norton, Wakef.,
Scarlett, Kendrick. It is deemed most perspicuous and familiar.
6 " the next day ; " Iv TJJ et-ijs. Penn, Thelwall. Wakefield,
Scarlett, M., " on the next day." So (E. V.) ch. 9 : 37, Iv if]
e^ljs n^? a > " on tte next <3a y-" A - cts 2 ' : 18 > r $ *&! e ' " tie
next day." When the substantive is readily understood from the
connection, it is often omitted, and the article stands alone before
the adjunct. Buttmann, J 125, 7. This is the ordinary usage in
68
THE G.QSPEL AfOjDOEDWG T,Q LUgE. GHAP.
KING JAJIES' VERSION.
called Nain : and many pf his
disciples went with him, and much
peopleV " ' "'"" '
12 Now when he came nigh to
the gate of the city, behold, there
was a dead man carried out, the
only spn pf his mother, and she
was a ^idow : and much people
of the city was with her. ' '
GREEK IJXT.
o par/Ta aprpv na.vo,
" \ \ ' 32' R\3/'
PXApf TTpAuy. coy pg rj
rrj TTuAy rrjs TrpAfcoy, /cat
bs, vlos
O.VTQV,
I8ov,
BEYISED
and many p.f his .disciples f
gping with him, an^ a grea|
crowd. e An4 h as 'he dreiy la
near 'the gate of the city, faer
hold a dead man was carried
out, k aii only son of his mother,
and 'she was a widow : and a
great crowd from the city
t " -were going with ; " trvveTtogevowo. See note supra,
Wakef. Yulg., Mont, Eras., " ibant cum ; " Beza, " proficisce-
bantur ; ". S. Fr., " allaient ; " Iber., " iban ; " Ital!, " andavano ;'"
De Wette, " zogen.'!
"And ; " Ss. Wesley, Thorn., Wakefield, Scarlett, Norton,
Penn, Sharpe, Kend., M. S. Fr., " et ;" Iber., " i j " Ital. and
Diod., " e."
*! "a? ;" cos. Wesley, Thorn., Wakef., Norton, Sharpe, Penn,
Pampbell, Kendrick. Mont, Be'za, Schott, " ut ; " Belg., "als;"
tutfer and Be Wette, " als ; " G. and S. Fr., " cpmme ; " Dip-
dati and. Ital., ". come."
1 "lie drew near ; " jjyyios, Kend., M. So the B. V. renders
^his verb by " drew near," or ", drew nigh," I^att. 15 : 8 ; 21 : 1, 34-
Luke 15 : 1, 25; 18 : 35; 21 :8; 24 :15, etc. Wesley, "drew
nigh." Bob. (Lex., m yerbo) : " More commonly, and in N. Test
intrans., to draw near, to approach." Heb. N. Test., a'ip. Syr.,
\js^o. " Drew near " is a common expression in the B. V. of the
Q. Test
J "the gate." The preposition "to," in connections of th.is
kind, is, by present usage, omitted before the noun. So Thorn.,
Wesley, Wakef, Scarlett, Norton, Dick., Campbell, Kend. Ip
many instances in the E. Y. of O. T., " to " is not expressed after
"near " and " nigh." See Numb. 26 : 3. Judg. 20 : 34. Prov.
"" "' " "" "'' : '"
1 ',' an only son ; " vlos /tovoytwjs. Wakef., S.flarpe. Belg.,
" een eeniggeboren zone ; " Lutlier, " ein einiger i-john ; " (t)e
Wette, " eingeborner Sohn ;")'G. and "S. Frl, "fils unique;"
Iber., " hijo unigenito ; " Ital., '.' figlio unico." Our idiom will
not allow a literal render|n.g pf ^ovffyevris, etc., '.', an
sqn," Jilius unigenitus.
i " she was a widow." The text p,f Bagster has wrj? %qf$ in
the dative. So that of Wilson, which has on the title page " ad
Esemplar Kpberti Stephani acpuratissime editum," i. e., the 3rd
Edit, pf Stephens, Pans, 1550. With this, agrees the Elzevir, as
printed at Amsterdam, 1633, under the superintendence p.f Leus-
den. On the qther hand, ay-n; yfiqa (nominatiYe) is the reading
of Erasmus, J^ill, (Jriesbach, Theile, Tittmann, Lachmann, Tisch.,
Scliptt, Trpllope. Knapp has ayry yn^a. The reading giyen by
Bagsta 1 uas probably an amendment occasioned by the jfact, that
, the. verb to \vhich $$0. might be a npmi^ative, ppcurred in
yery few MSS. Hence avrri ^a. were marked as datives, and
regarded as in apposition with iffir^l. To get rid of a supppsed
grammatical difficulty, the harshness produced by >u$ with the
newly formed dative was overloo.ked. There is no reasonable
doubt that ayTij gqpa is the proper reading. Npne of- theja/ter
critical editions agree, with Erasmus., in placing yi> in this mem-
ber of the sentence, ex_cept that of Lachmann. As it is not in
Bagster, " was" has been italicized, as. a supplement. BlppmjBeld
remarks : " The xal is very significant ; the full sense being, that
besides her sufferings [losing her son] she was also, a widow,.' ".
reference to tffiega. It is not necessary to insert the preposition
" on " (= iv) before " the next day." By our usus loquendi, " the
time when " omits the preposition, unless the language is emphat-
ic. See " next day," E. Y., Numb. 11 : 32. Jonah 4 : 7. Matt
27 : 62. John 1 : 29. Acts 7 : 26. The rendering of the Vulg.,
" deinceps," and that of " afterwards " in Kheims and some other
Eng. versionSj originated in a mistake of transcription. Through
the incuria scribarum, na was written in place of TTJ. Hence the
eUipsis was supposed, to be. that of y^ovca, or ttai^ra. The read-
ing of -the. Yatican MS. D, agrees \vith. the Textus Eeceptus (rffj.
Satte, Syriach^as i^ji^aj jiool^,.
< "he was going;" Ino^Evsro. Wakefield, Norton, Shavpe.
The radical sense of the imperfect, continuation of action, or
state, is required in the rendering. The Saviour had not entered
the city, but was on the way, and near it, whan he was met by
the funeral' procession. Trollope (Gram., % 50, 2, p. 129), Stuart
(Gram., J 51)'. ' ' The sense of- the aorist belongs to this tense, only
in the case where the writer describes that of which he was an
eye-witness. This was not the case with Luke. See eh. 1 : 2.
The imperfect is used in the Latin versions (haying the same
forca with that of the Greek). -Yulg., Montanus, Erasmus, Beza,
Castalio, Schott, "ut proficiseretur." So G. F.r., f que Jesus
allait;" S. Fr., " qu'il allait;" De Sacy, "Jesus allait;" Span,
and. Iber., " iba ; " Diodati and Ital., "egli andava;" De Wette,
"zpg> ' ' ' '
' " to a city ; " els jt6J.iv. Thorn., Wesiey, Wakef., Norton
(" to a town ") ; Dick. Though the primary idea of sis is " into ; "
with verbs of motion, it often has the, sense of to, towards, on a
place or thing. Hob. (Lex.). Acts 22 : 7, sneaov IE els TO
eSayios, E. Y-, "And I fell to the ground." Compare Acts
26 : 14. Matt. 15 : 24; 16 : 5, 21 ; 20 : 17; 21 : 1. "When
they drew nigh to Jerusalem," "Ore jjyyioav sl s 'Isgooolvfta.
Liddell (m verbo) : " Bad. signification, direction, toward, motion
o, on, or into.
THE
TO
TIL
69
KING JAMES' VEgSION.
13 And when the Lord saw
her, he had compassion, on her,
and said unto her, Weep not.
14 And lie came and touclied
the bier : and they that bare him
stood still. And he said, Young
man, I say unto thee, Arise.
15 And he that was dead sat
up, and began tg spealc : and he
delivered him to his mother.
16 And there came a fear on
all : and they glorified God, say-
ing, That a great prophet is risen
up among us ; and, That God hath
visited his people.
17 And this rumour of him
went forth throughout all Judea,
TEXT.
yos T
\)\
KCU. tocav
b Kvpios e
TQ TTJS &Qpov'- ol Se
KCU eiTre,
Kai
KCU
avrov rr fj.ij-
ip e'Aa/3e fie $ojSoy
oaTa.vjft.Sy Kyi eoaoi> TOV Oeov,
, "On TrpoQyTrj
ei> T\\UV> KOU QTL .
o Beo? TOV Xaov av*
l - Kail e^fjXdev 6 Xoyos
ei/ oXrj TTJ 'IgvSala
REVISED VEBSION.
with her. And the Lord -see- 13
ing her, had compassion on her,
and said to her, Weep not.
And "coming near, he touched 1*
the bier ; and "the bearers stood
stiH. And he said, Young man,
I say to thee, ""Rise. And he 15
who "had been dead, sat up, and
began to speak ; and he deliver-
ed him to his mother. And 16
r fear seized them all 5 and they
glorified God, saying, A great
prophet 'hath risen among us,
and God hath visited his peo-
ple. And "this report 'concern- IT
ing him "spread x in all Judea
* ('seeing;" iScor. Wesley, Scarlett, Kend., Thehvall, M
Beza, '' intuitus ; " Belg., ziende ; '' S. Fr.., " voyant."
n "coming near;" ?CQooe).&cov. Wesley, Scarlett, M. G-,
and S. Fr., s'etant approche ; " Span., " acercandpse." As an
alternative, the collpquial expression " coming up." We use
" come up" as equivaient to " approach," and, with an objective,
" come np to" a person, or thing. Some translators have over-
looked the force of jr^os in composition, here. Webster (Diet.,
art. " Come ") defines, " come up to," " to approach near."
"the bearers;" pi f}aaTaovTes. f^or^., Wakef., Peehy
(note on Angus), Wesley, Scarlett, Norton, Sharpe, Dick., Camp.
Belg., "de dragers;" Luther and De Wette, "die
S. Fr., " les, portenrs ; " pipdati, " i pprtatpri."
P. "Rise;" i/^*>?T*. Norton. So (B. V.) Matt, 26 ;46.
Mark 10 : 49. John 5 : 8. Rev. 11 : 1. According to present
usage, " rise" is more commonly employed than " arise."
1 " had been." This supplement is demanded by the exigentia
loci, as, without it, the phraseology represents the young- man as
being dea$, and, at the same time,m the act of sitting up. In
other words, it fails, to present the thought which the test was
designed to. convey. A similar error may be seen in the B. V.
of John 11 : 44, where elrjl&ev 6. re^vrixcos is rendered, " he that
was dead came forth," instead of " he that had been dead (he
having been dead) came forth."
* ''. fear, seized tltem all;" %Ha/3s cpofios anavras. Wakef.,
Wesley, Eendrick, and M. have, " fear, seized all." Scarlett, " all
were seized with awe ; " Mont., Beza, Schott, " cepit omnes ; "
Danish, "en Frygt betog alle;" De Wette, " Es ergriff alle
Staunen ; " S. Fr., " la cramt les saisit tous ; " Iber., " les sobre-
cogio temor a todos ; " Span., " todos fueron cogidos de temor- ; "
DioJati, f spa,vento gli occupo tutti." Rob.. (Lex., in loco, Aa/i-
ftavca) ; Tropically; (spoken) of any strong affection, or emotion,
to seize, to. come, or fdl upon any one."^ Joseph., Ant., II. 6: 8,
ft'ei> O.M.O-VS HxnUijgis ela^e. As aitavras refers to all
present, the supplement " them " is inserted to remove the harsh-
ness of " fear seized all." By tfiis modification, the sentence
harmonizes with our usus loquendi. See ch. 5 : 26, note.
" hath risen ; " Eyfjys^-cai. Norton, Campbell. " Have,"
instead of " be," is the appropriate auxiliary with intransitive
verbs. See chs. 2 : 15, and 4 : 34, notes. The addition of "up"
is superfluous. The perf. and first aorist pass, of this verb usually
have the signification "to arise." So (B. V.) Ma,tt. 2 : 13,
14, 21 ; 8 : 15 ; 9 : 7, 19, 25, etc. Rob. (Lex., in verbo).
After " and," the B. V. improperly renders Sri by " that."
The particle should not be noticed in the English. It is, as iu
many other instances, merely a sign of quotation. Rob. (Lex.)
says : " Specially on serves also to introduce words quoted
without change, chiefly after verbs implying to say, a.nd the like,
and is then merely a mark of quotation, not to be translated into
English." SeeKuhner, 329, note 3.
" " this report ; " p Ipyos ovros. The noun has been rendered
" report," in this instance, by Wakef., Norton, Scarlett, Penn,
Dick., Camp., Kendrick. Belg., " dit geruchte," See ch. 5 : 15,
note. This is the only instance in which Ao/os is rendered
" rumor," in the E. V. I believe that the paraphrastic version
of De Sacy presents the thought, " Le bruit de ce miracle qu'H
avait fait, se repandit dans toute Judee," etc.
T " concerning him ; " itegi avrnv. Camp., Kend., Angus,
Thelwall. See ch. 4 : 14, note.
spread ; " gftd-sv. Thorn., Norton, Scarlett, Campbell.
Rob. (Lex., in verbo), " to go forth, to spread abroad." " To go
Forth," when predicate of a report, news, etc., is not according to
our unus loqusndi. Bretsch. (in verbo) : " Metaphori.ee tribuatur
rebus ut fams, ubi est divulgor, Matth. 9 : 26, Marc, 1 : 28,
Luc, 4 : 14, 7 : 17, etc." Compare Matt. 9 : 31, Ql 3k tS$l&6*+
res Stepqfetoav ccvrov ev Sir) "cfj yfj sxeivrj.
" iuto all J.udea ;" & 31$ -rfj TovSala. In a passage where
70
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING- TO LUKE. CHAP; VII.
KING JAMES' VEBSIOIT.
and throughout all the region
round about.
18 And the disciples of John
shewed him of all these things.
19 And John, calling -unto him
two of his disciples, sent them to
Jesus, saying, Art thou he that
should come ? or look we for an-
other?
20 When the men were come
unto him, they said, John Baptist
has sent us unto thee, saying, Art
thou he that should come? or
look we for another ?
21 And in that same hour he
cured many of their infirmities,
GREEK TEXT.
avrov, Kal ev n-darrj ry
PV-
ls JAI aTrrjyyeihav 'Icodvvy-ol
fj.a0r}TCu avrov Trepl iravrcav TOV-
TG>V. 19 KOL TrpocTKaXecrd/jLevof 8vo
rivas TCOV fj.a6r]T>v avTov o 'Ico-
dvvrjf erre/J^e irpos rov 'Irjcrovv,
\ ' v v 9 < ' * \ \
Aeycov, 2<v a o fpxojjievo?, TJ aAAov
voi 8e irpos avrov O'L avSpes ehrov,
'Icodvvrjs 6 Ba-imcrTrjs aTreVraA-
KCV -fjnas irpos ere, \ey&v, Sv el
o epj(piJtvos, T] aAAoi/ 7rpocr5oK<5-
21 ' T"T " Cv\ rf
pep, Jbv avry be ry (opa
e6epdirev(re TroAAouy CLTTO voarcav
BEVISED VERSION.
and all ^the surrounding re-
gion. And the disciples of 18
John "told him of all these
things. And John, calling 'to 19
him two of his disciples, sent
them to Jesus, saying, Art thou
a he that cometh, or h do we look -
for another ? And when the 20
men c came to him, they said,
John, d the Immerser, hath sent
us to thee, saying, Art thdu he
that cometh, or f do we look
for another ? And 6 in that 21
very hour he cured many b of
this preposition occurs (Matt. 9 : 31, lv Sig r'fj yfj) the rendering
of the E. V. is, " in all that country." In the present case, some
interpreters have contended that lv is equivalent to 8ta,
" through." This is far less probable than that lv SUg is used for
els olijv. This is the view taken by Kuincel, who observes:
"Duse praepositiones (lv et elg) ssepius inter se permutantur,
etiam a scriptoribus exteris, ut apud Thucyd. IV. 14, tacts Se
),omals ev rfj yfj xarcnxegievyviag lvefial.ov." In ch. 4 : 14,
where the E. V. has " through all the region round about," the
text is, a&" oh]s T!JS Tts^to^ov. Now it seems obvious, that
if Luke, in the case before us, intended to convey the idea which
we attach to " through all the region," etc., he would have said
as before, Had* Slrjs v.. r. L Compare Matt. 9 : 26, el-ijid-sv a?
yrjfirj avtr; els oi.i;v rrjv yijv exeivjjf, E. V., " the fame hereof
went abroad into all that land." As an alternative rendering for
" all Judea," " the whole of Judea." We can distinguish olos
from yeas, at close of this sentence. So in ch. 4 : 14.
* " the surrounding region ; " rfj m>Qi%coQco. Seo ch.. 4 : 14,
note.
" " told ; " catwyedav. So (E. V) Mark 6:30; 16 : 10, 13.
Luke 7 : 22 ; 8 : 20, 34 ; 9 : 36, etc. Norton, Penn, "Wakefield,
Sharpe, Angus, M.
1 " to him." The following remark made in the Eevision of
Mark's gospel, ch. 3 : 13, is applicable here. "As JT^OS in com-
position corresponds with ' to,' this word should not be italicized.
It is not a supplement. So in all cases, where this verb occurs
with, a supplementary pronoun."
* " he that cometh ; " 6 i^o/ievas. Wesley and Wakef., " that
is to come ; " A. Camp, and Dick., " he who comes ; " G. Camp.,
" he who cometh." The article and participle have here the force
of a substantive ; the thought is, "Art thou the coming one ?."
that is, the Messiah, whose advent was announced by the prophets.
In Matt. 23 : 39, o e$%6ftevos is rendered " he that cometh."
Possibly this literal rendering may not be deemed sufficiently per-
spicuous. In that case, this form is recommended, " who was to
come." So Norton, Scarlett, Penn. There is some diversity iu
the rendering given to o IQXO/J.EVOS, in this instance, by trans-
lators. Thorn., " THE ONE COMING ; " Sharpe, " he that was com-
ing." The rendering of the S. Fr. coincides with that given
above, " cclui qui vient." So Ital, " colui che viene." Kuincel
(Matt. 11 : 3) : "Interrogari jubebat (Johannes) suo nomine
Jesum, ov el 6 t^ofievos; y ere^ov ngooSoy.cS/tsv ; num tu 63
Mcssias ? num tu personam Messise agis ? facile in earn cogitatio-
com venire possumus, te non esse Messiam, sed alium expectau-
dum."
b " do we look ; " rtgoodoxeu/tcv. So in parallel (E. V.) Matt.
11 : 3. The thought might be expressed with a nearer approach
to our present phraseology by " are we to look." Still, the
above expression seems sufficiently perspicuous. By a peculiar
idiom, the present indie, is sometimes used to indicate not what
is done, but what is to be done. Bloomfield (N. T., Supplement,
Matt. 11:3).
came ; " Ttagayevoftevot. Thorn., Wakef., Norton, Penu.
See ch. 2 : 15, note.
d " the Immerser ; " o JBnnnar^s. A. Camp., Q. (on Mark
6 : 14). Iber., " el Sumergidor ; " Luther and De Wette, " der
Tiiufer ; " Belg., " de Dooper ; " Dan., " den Dober."
signifies " to immerse," this noun is rendered " Immerser."
See ch. 3 : 7, note. So in all cases, in this Eevision.
" that cometh." See v. 19, note.
' " do we look." See v. 19, note.
B " in that very hour ; " ev avrfi rij coga. Dick., Kend.
(" at that very hour "), Camp., Scarlett. So Rob. (Lex., av?6e),
" emphatically, in that very day, or time (hour)." See ch. 2 : 38,
note.
h of " diseases ; " aito voocov. Thorn., Wes., Norton (" of their
diseases"), Sharpe, Scarlett ("of their diseases"), Penn, Dick.
of their diseases "), Camp, ("from discuses"), M., Murdock.
The supplement " their, used in the E. V., is unnecessary. There
is nothing in the test to authorize its use. Nooos occurs twelve
THE GOSPEL AC COBBING TO LUKE. CHAP. VII
71
KING JAMBS' VBBSION.
and plagues, and Of evil spirits ;
and unto many that were blind he
gave sight.
22 Then Jesus answering, said
unto them, Go. your way, and tell
John what things ye have seen
and heard ; how that the blind
see, the lame walk, the lepers are
cleansed, the 'deaf hear, the dead
are raised, to the poor the gospel
is preached.
23 And blessed is he, whosoever
shall not be offended in me.
24 And when the messengers
of John were departed, he began
22
GEEEK TEST.
naa-Tiycav /cat
KCtl TV<f)\OLS
> ' N /T\'
eXpi.picra.TO TO pAzTTftv. /cat
aTTOKpidfis 6 'Irjcrovs flirev av-
roty, HopevdevT
'Itaawrj a eidere KOI fj
on TV(f)\ol aVaj
TrepiiraTovcri, Xerrpol
TO.I, KOHj&Oi O.KOVQVO'l)
povTO.1,
23 v tit A >\ \
/cat fj.aKa.pios ecmv, os fav /z?)
&OVTCOV Se T>V
'Icodv-
REVISED VERSION.
diseases, and plagues, and of
evil spirits, and to many who
were blind he gave sight. 'And 22
Jesus, answering, said to them,
Go, and -tell John what things
ye have seen and heard ; 'that
the blind "receive sight, the
lame walk, the lepers are
cleansed, the deaf hear, the
dead are raised, and to the
poor 'the good news is preach-
ed ; and ""happy is he "who 23
shall not reject me. And the 24
messengers of John "having
times in the N. T. In nine instances, it is rendered in the E. V.
by " diseases" (the Greek being plural), twice by " sickness," and
once (in the passage before us) by " infirmities." The rendering
should be uniformly " disease." There is no instance, in -which
this word will not afford a good sense. Bob. (Lex.). Bretsch.,
" morbus, cegfiludo."
' "And ; " xai. Thorn., Wakefield, Wesley, Norton, Sharpe,
Scarlett, Penn, Campbell. Vulg., Mont., Erasmus, Beza, " et ; "
Belg., " ende ; " Luther and De Wette, " und ; " Span, and Iber,,
" i ; " Diodati, " e ; " Dan., " og ; " Tyndale, Cranmer, Geneva,
L. Totnson, " and." " Then," in the E. T., originated in Beza's
rendering, " deinde," as did that of the G. Fr., " ensuite." There
is no good reason for departing from the more usual signification
Of Jw.
l " that ; " oit. Thorn., Norton, Sharpe, Dick., Kendrick, M.,
Hielwall. Belg., " dat ; " De Wette, " dass ; " G. Pr., " que ; "
Diodati, " che." " How that" (taken from Tyndale) is antiquat-
ed, and has become, by lapse of time, a vulgarism. E. g., " Tell
him how that he must come here."
* "receive sight;" uvafaeaovoi. See ch. 4 : 18, note.
Wakef., Norton, Sharpe, Dick., Keud., M. (" receive their sight").
Belg., " worden ziende ; " Iber., " los ciegos reciben la vista ; "
Diodati, "ricoverano la vista." Although, from its etymology,
avapfajtio would seem to convey the idea of " seeing again," or re-
covering sight, it is here used as equivalent to " being made to see."
So in John 9 : 11, cateld-Av 8e xal viycifisvos, avefaeya, E. V.,
" and I went and washed, and I received sight." The subject here
was blind from his birth. The verb has both significations, to see
again, and to receive sight, in cases where it had never been
enjoyed before. Compare v. 21, rvyl.ois nottozs l^a^iaaio to
pitnetv, csecis multis, visum donabat, E. V., " to many that were
blind he gave sight." Isa. 35 : 5, 61715) ip$ rKHijBPi. Sept.,
avot%9'ijaovTat 6y>&alfcoi rvyAcov. Matt. 11 : 5, Tvyiiol ava-
pkktovoi, E. V., " the blind receive their sight."
1 " the good news is preached ;" evayyet-i^ovrai. Seech. 4:18.
Norton, " good news is make known." Webster (Diet, art.
" News ") remarks : " This word has a plural form, but is almost
always united with a verb in ths singular."
m " happy ; " paxdfios. Thorn., Wakefield, Wesley, Norton,
Scarlett, Dick., Camp., Kend., M. See ch. 1 : 45, note.
n " who shall not reject me ; " as EO.V ftrj oxai'Scdta&fj lv Ipoi.
Rob. (Lex., in verbo) : " Pass. oxavScd.i&o&ai %v nvi, to be
offended in, or at any one, to take offense at his character, words,
conduct, so as to desert and reject him." As this word does not
admit a uniform rendering', without producing great obscnrity, we
are compelled to seek equivalents adapted to the signification
which it has in different passages. Neither "stumble," nor its
Anglo-Latin equivalent " offend" would be appropriate in many
instances. In a note on Mark 4 : 17 (Eevision) I have said :
" This word is not found in classic writers. In the Septuagint
it is used actively, for ' causing one to stumble,' and passively, for
' stumbling.' In the N. Test, its use is tropical. 1. In a moral
sense, to offend, vex ; passively, be offended, or vexed, with a dative
of the person ; sv tivt, to take offense at one, so as to desert, revolt,
or fall away from him. 2. To cause one to offend, to entice into
sin, lead astray; and, passively, to be enticed into sin, led astray, to
fall away from the truth.
" In the sense of vexing, or irritating, this verb is by no means
used as frequently as many have supposed. ' To disgust,' and ' to
be disgusted' would often be an exact rendering. The recent
origin of ' disgust ' must, however, render it exceptionable. By
substituting it for ' offend,' in many cases where the latter occurs,
the reader will see its appropriateness. In short, ' offend ' is used
in the E. V. with a latitude of signification, which is not allowed
by the present usage of our language."
Compare John 12 : 48, where the thought of rejecting Christ is
thus expressed, 6 aS-ercov efce xai ftr; i.aft/3aveav to. ^rjfictTa ftov,
ei tbv XQLVOVTO. avrov x. t. L A literal rendering of the word
in the present instance would be, " who is not stumbled at me,"
or (as this phrase is hardly good English), "who does not stumble
at me," that is, " to whom I shall not prove a stumbling-block."
Instead of " whosoever," Wakef., Thorn., Norton, Scarlett have
who."
" having departed ; " cntel&ovrcov. Kendrick, M. Iberian,
habiendo retirado ; " Castalio, " digressis." If it is deemed best
to render the participle by a finite verb, then, " When the
TSJ0
f <3 LUKE.
KING
to spealt unto tM people" conce"f fl-
ing John, What went ye out into
the wilderness for to see ? A reed
shaken with, the wind ?
25 But what went ye out for
to see? A man clothed in soft
raiment? Behold, they which are
gorgeously apparelled, arid live
delicately,. are' in kings' courts.
GBEJ3K TEXT.
oVy -rfpi^afo Xeyeiv irpos TOVS
y irepi 'Icodvvov, TL eeXr)-
Xv&are ety rrjv Zpy/Jiov Qedcrd-
(r&ai; kaXa.fji.6v VTTO aWjuou
cfctkevofjifvov ; aXAa fit e^eX??-
XvOafe ISew; avffpcaTrov zv }ia-
XaKois ip.dtiois r/fj,(f)iecrij.evoi' ;
ibi>, 01 Iv ifidfio-fjup evSo^co KCU
Tpv(f)rj vTta.p-)(pvTes tv TOIS /Sacri-
HEVISED VK2SION.
departed, he began to say" to.
the crowd concerning Joun,
What went ye out into Hue
desert "'to see? A reed shaken
p by the wind ? But what weat 25-
ye out 'to see? A man clothed
'in soft garments? Behold,
those- "who wear 'splendid w ap-
parel, and 1 live in "luxury, are
in kings' ^palaces. But wbat'28
sengers of John' had departed," asYulg., "discessissent," arid Span. ;
" hubieron ido."
f " the desert." See Luke 3 : 2, note.
i "to see." "For," before the infinitive "to see," is un-
grammatical. So all later Eng. versions.
* " by ; " fab (cutti g~em(.}. Sharpe, Wafef., Pcnn, TJibmson,
"Wesley, Norton, Scarlett, Dick., Camp:, Kendrick, Angus; if.
Thelwall.
"to see." See note q.
* "in soft garments 1 ;" h> firtfrtxHTs Iftarfots. Wesley, 51.,
Thelwall, Dick, ("rich garment's") 1 . This wor^ occurs- six"ty-one
times iri'theN.Tesfc In thirty of thesej-it is rendered'" garment;"
or " garments;" It is : believed tliat : there are very few cases
occur, in which this' would riot be the appropriate translation.
Luke 6 : 29 is one of these, where it is used with a special signifi-
cation" for the outer garrhent, mantle', or' tunic. See Jahrfs- Arche-
ology, g 122. Ebb. (Lex., Iftaitov) : "Ta l^arltf, the' garments,
clothing, fdiWerif, included the outer and inner garment^ mantle,
and tunic."
"who wear." The participle vna^otneg, with- a preposition
and its case as predicate, signifies "to be," "remain," or "live" in
any state, or place. Here it has sv 1/tan.ff/ty and r^vyrj, datives
of condition. In rendering, the exigency of the- case obliges
us to accomodate it to the substantives, as it has reference to
both. Hence instead of the literal phraseology, " being in
splendid apparel and- luxury," finite verbs appropriate to each
of the conditions indicated by those substantives, are " employed,"
"wear," and "live." Eob. (Lex., vita^ta). Bloomfield : " The
vxa<>%. must be accommodated in sense to each of the nouns
with which it is connected." " Who wear " is the rendering of
Thomson, Norton, Campbell, Eendrick. A literal rendering was
adopted in the Belg., "die in heerlijke kleedinge ende wellust
zijn." So nearly De Wette, " die in prachtiger Kleidung und in
Ueppigkeit Lebenden sind in den koniglichen Palasten." G. Fr.,
" c'est dans les palais des rois que se trouvent ceux qui sont
magnifiquement vetus, et qui vivent dans les delices;" S. Fr.,
" ecus qui sont magnifiquement vetus et dans les delices, sont
dans lea maisons des- rois ; " De Saty, " c'est -dans les palaia'des
toia qne se- trouvent ceux qui sont v6sus magnifiquement, et qui \
vivent dans les delices ; " Iber., " Ids 1 que pleva'n] rbp'a suntnos'aV i
viven en delicias, en loa ; palaciqs dfe 16s ; reyes esfari-." Sharpe
furih'shes the following" literal rendering, lir those iff gorgeous- rai-
ment, and delicate living, are in Kings' couris." Nowy sucli
phraseology violates the propriety of our language, as we never
say, " are in delicate living." I suggest as a compromise between
the paraphrastic and the literal rendering, this expression, " those
who are in splendid apparel, and line in luxury." The phrase
" are in splendid apparel " is allowable, like " he was in citizen's
clothing," " they were in long robes>" etc.
T " splendid ; " &86y. Norton 1 , Canipbell," Murdock, ; Mi
Kob. (Lex;, in- low, art %v8ogos], Bretseh: (in- ojerfeo}',' " splendi-'
dus, nitidvs, prcestans." Erasmusi Castalioj Schott, " spleiidido."
Bloomfield (Anriotat.) :" " 'SvSogas signifies' glorious, splendid."
" Gorgeous," which signifies shdViij, fine, splendid, glittering with
gay colors (Webster, Diet!), is obsolescent. It 5s- seldom, or
never heard in conversation. It has been superseded by its Latin
rival; this is less to be regretted, as it is not a Saxon word; but
a modification of the old' French gorgids.
* "apparel;" i/idriafiy. "Wakefielcl, Penri; TJionii 1 , NorldnV
Camp., Send., M: So (E; V.) Acts 20 : 33.
1 "luxury;" rgvyfj. Kend., Scarlett, Campbell, Ji. Ebb.
(Lex., in verbo). Trbllope' (Analecfa) : " This word properly
signifies luxury." Bloomf. : " There is" no" reasbh'for abandoning'
the general sense luxury, i. e., a luxurious life."
* " palaces ; " fiaodeiois^ Penn, Wesley, Wakefield, Norton,-
Murdock, Scarlett, Dick., Campbell, Kend. This adjective has
xms (houses), or Sco/idai (buildings) understoodi-as seems clear
from the parallel; Matt. 11 : 8, &> foZs oixots TCOV ftaadetav.
The rendering " royal places " would be exact, still the change is
so slight, that it may not be expedient to deviate so much from
the phraseology of the E. V. Kob. (Lex., in' verbo\: "Plural
za pa.ail.eia.,- a royal mansion, palace." Tulg., Mont, " domibus
regum;" Beza, "in palatiis regis ; " Schott, " in palatiis regiis."
Heb. N. T., tTiJa^if ^aij. Syriac, \ "^^ Zu. De Wctte,-
in den koniglichen Palasten;" G-. Fr.* " les ' palais des rois;'"
S. Fr., "les maisons des rois;" Iberian; "los palacios de-los
reyes ; " Diodati; " ne' palazzi dei re." The rendering of- Tyn :
dale, "kings' courts," adopted-by the E.-V.,- was probably 'derived
rom Erasmus, "aulis reguci/' or tiiat of- Lutli^"'kd'nigKcheii t;
Hofen."
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VII.
73
JAMES' VERSION.
26 Bufc what went ye out for
to see? A prophet? Tea, I say
nnto you, and much mox-e than a
prophet.
27 This is he, of whom it is
vrritten, Behold, I send my mes-
senger befdre thy face, which shall
prepare thy way before thee.
28 For I say unto you, Among
those that are born of woman,
there is not a greater prophet
than John' the Baptist: but he
that is least in the kingdom of
God, is greater than he.
29 And all the people that
heard him, and the publicans, jus-
tified God, being baptized with
the baptism of John.
30 But the Pharisees and law-
yers rejected the counsel of God
GEEKK TEXT.
Ae/ow ela-tvt 2S aAAa ri e
Av^are iSeiv; "jrpofftrjTrjv ; val,
\4ya> vfuv, KOL "jrepia-croTcpov
JfpO(j)T]TOV. 27 OVTOS fCTTl 7TC/H
ov yeypawTai) 'ISov, lya> airo-
areAAoj TOV ayyeXov p.ov TTDO
irpoo-ayirov erou, oy Karaovceuacret
rrjv oSov (TOV ffnrpocrOev <rov.
28 A f \ /> '
A.eya> -yap vfuv, fjieiyov ez/
yevvrjTols yvva.iK.5tv irpofyrjTrjs
'I&avvov TOV BaTmcrTov ovSeis
-Tiv. 6 Se fJLikpoTepos ei> ry
ficuriXcia TOV Oeov fieifav O.VTOV
J 9Q T7~ "*> *% C S \ t /
eari. JLai Tray o Aaoy a/cou-
cras Kal ol TfXavai
Tov Oeov, ftaimo-devTes TO /3a-
oyiia 'laavvov 30 61 Se <&api-
(raiot KOI ol vo/u/coi Trjv fiovXrjv
TOV Oeov r]6eTTj(rav elf eavrovp,
BEVISED VERSION.
went ye on ' to see ? A prophet ?
Yea, I say to you, and 'some-
thing more .than a prophet.
This is he of whom it is written, 27
Behold, I send my messenger
before thy face, who shall pre-
pare thy way before thee. For 28
I say to you, Among those born
of women, there is 'no greater
prophet than John the Im-
merser ; c but the least in the
kingdom of God, is greater
than he. (And all the people 29
who heard him, and the tax-
gatherers, justified God, lay-
ing been immersed with the
immersion of John. But the so
Pharisees and lawyers rejected
the counsel of God 'with regard
" to see." See this verb, v. 24, note.
"something more;" ne^iaaote^ov. Thomson, Wakefield,
"something even better;" Camp., "something superior." This
rendering is adopted on the view generally taken by critics, that
negtaaoregov is a neuter construed with -tl understood, so that it
is equivalent to rl jtEgiaaors^ov. Jleptooorsfov is regarded by
most interpreters as equivalent to iteftiaobv and n'Letov, Matt.
12 : 41, 42. Hence no word like "much" is required to give
force to the adjective.
* " no greater prophet ; " ftslgcov MQoyfrqs ovSets. Nor-
ton, M., Wakef. (" no greater teacher "), Kend., Genevan. This
adjective with itgoy>JT>]s, is properly rendered by " no." Bob.
(in loco, ovSslsj. De Wette, " kein grosserer Prophet ; " S. Fr.,
" il n'y a nul prophete plus grand."
" but the least ; " o Ss ftix^ori^os. Thorn., Sharpe, Scar-
lett ("yet the least"), Wakef., Camp, ("yet the least"), Kend.,
M. MiXQoreQos, the comparative, is used for the superlative
uatgoratos, as in Matt. 11 : 11 ; 13 : 32. Mark 9 : 34. Luke
9 : 46, 48. Trollope (Gram., 1 43, p. 106).
* " having been immersed ; " /HcutTid&svTeg. This form of the
participle is employed by Sharpe, M. As ^aanad-evrce refers
to an action that was past, this rendering is demanded. The
rendering of the E. "V. was probably founded on the assumption
that vv. 29, 30 were a part of the Saviour's discourse, whereas
the obvious and natural solution of the apparent obscurity is
that they are a parenthetical remark of Luke. We should other-
wise have expected that 'Icodwrjv would have followed axovaae,
while instead of the aorist pamio&Evres, the present /3ct7tTt6-
aevot would have been employed. S. Fr., " ayant etc baptises ; "
Iber., habiendo recibido la inmersion." Knapp, Tittm., Lach-
mann, Penn, and Eobinson (Harmony) include vv. 29, 30 in a
parenthesis. Penn, in a note on v. 31, says: "The clause
'And .the Lord said ' of the Constantinopolitan, or received text,
is not contained in any of the most ancient MSS. and versions ;
yet it is an unobjectionable supplement, if distinguished by a
diflerent character in the context. The absence of this clause, in
all the earlier authorities, shows that it should be included in the
parenthesis with the two preceding verses.
" with regard to themselves ; " els EOVTOVS. Thorn., Camp.,
Scarlett, " respecting themselves ; " M., " towards themselves."
Norton presents the thought, though paraphrastically, " what
God purposed for them ; " and Wakefield, " this intention of God
toward them." Els is used to indicate a direction of mind as
marking an object of desire, good will, and also of emotion. In
a good sense, towards, for, in behalf of. Rob. (Lex., els). So
Matt. 26 : 10, fyyov y.alov styyaoaio els ifte. So after nouns,
fyanri eig iiva, Eom. 5:8. 2 Cor. 2 : 4, 8. On this passage,
Bloomf. (Analecta) says : " Grotius, Camerarius, Whitby, Ham-
mond, Eosenmuller, Kuincel, Homberg, Wolf, Doddridge, and
Campbell maintain that there is a slight trajectio, and they con-
nect the words els iavrovs with povti[v rov OEOV, and interpret
in regard to themselves." Upon the whole, I can not but
regard the last (i. e. this) interpretation- as the most rational, and
most suitable to the context. This, too, seems to have been the
opinion of Wetstein, who cites Prov. 1 : 25, and Bemidbar
12, 16, " Omne bonum, quod destinaveram vobis, vilipendistis et
rejecistis." The thought is presented in the affecting language of
the Saviour, Luke 13 : 34. De Wette, " den Eathschluss Gottea
fiir sich ; " De Sacy, " oat meprise le dessein de Dieu sur eux ; "
Iber., " el consejo de Dios con relacion a si mismos."
74:
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VII.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
against themselves, being not bap-
tized of him.
31 And the Lord said, Where-
unto then shall I liken the men.
of this generation? and to what
are they like ?
32 They are like imto children
sitting in the market-place, and
calling one to another, and say-
ing, We have piped unto you, and
ye have not danced; we have
mourned to you, and ye have not
wept.
33 For John the Baptist came
neither eating bread, nor drink-
ing wine ; and' ye say, He hath a
devil.
34 The Son of man is come
eating and drinking ; and ye say,
Behold a gluttonous man, and a
GBEBK TEXT.
fjaj f3aTTTi(r0evTes VTT O.VTOV.
81 ewre 5e 6 Kvpios, Tivi o$v
6fjLOitt>arc>) TOW avOpdnrovs "njs
yeveas TO.VT-TJS; Kal TLVI tlcriv
ff 32 f f / - > ft /
OfJLOlOlj OjJiOlOL L(Tt TTaiOiOtS
roif iv dyopa Ka0i]fj,evoc$, Kal
irpo(r<f)a>vov(riv aAA^Aoty, Kal Ae-
yov&iV) HvAyaafAev vfuv, KCU
OVK a>pxr)o~ao-dc
\ > -. /
vfjiiv, /cat OVK tKAavcrare.
Av0e -yap 'Icodvvrjs o JBoarTtarrrjs
/MTJTC aprov eo~0ia>v /i^re oivov
iriva)v, Kal Aeyere, Aaijjioviov
tf <M. > \ > \ /i ' ^ ~
e%. fArjAvaev o vtos TOV
dvffpanrov ecr#iW Kal irtvav, /cat
Aeyere, 'Idov, avOpcarrros (pdyos
REVISED VERSION.
to themselves, 'not having been
immersed by him.) * "To what 31
then shall I compare the men.
of this generation ? and h what
are they like? They are like 33
children sitting in the market-
place, and calling J to one an-
other, and saying, "We have
piped 'for .you, and ye have not
danced ; we have mourned k for
you, and ye have not wept.
For John the Immerser 'hath 33
come neither eating bread, nor
drinking wine, and ye say, He
hath a demon. The Son of 34
man "hath come eating and
drinking ; and ye say, Behold, "a
* "not having 1 been immersed." Iber., "no habieudo sido
Bumergidos." See v. 29, note.
* The reading of the Textus Ueceptus, tine Se 6 JSvpcos, is
deemed spurious by most critics. Schott remarks : " Cum Gries-
bach. aliisque delevimus auctoritate plurimorum cdd. (13 unc.)
Terss., Pesch., Philox., Arr., Pers. pol. Memph., ^thiop., Arm.,
Goth., Sax., Vnlg. (ms.), It. (esceptis cdd. Brix. Germ. 1)." It
is supposed that this addition originated from the lectionaries,
since the verse commenced a church lesson, or avayvcoois, which
required some introductory sentence, to indicate tbe speaker.
Canceled by Griesbach, Knapp, TheSIe, Tittm., Tisch., Lachmann,
Kuincel, Scholz.
* " To what ; " TIVI. Thomson, Perm, Dick., Scarlett, Camp.,
"Wakef., Kend., Angus, M.
h " what ; " ilvt. Penn, Scarlett, "Wakef., M. According to
our vsus loquendi, there is an ellipsis of the preposition " to," in
constructions of this kind. The sentence is awkward, if " to " is
expressed.
1 " to one another ; " &U.^iois. See ch. 2 : 15, note.
J " for you ; " f/tiv. Thorn., Norton, Scarlett, Wakef., Kend.,
M. The acts expressed by yv).qaaftev and IS-^rjv^aafiev are
represented as the pastimes of the children performed for the
diversion of their associates. They were imitations of the joys
and sorrows of men which the young actors witnessed in the real
drama of life. Hence vffiv, in these instances, is properly ren-
dered by " for you." Suincel (on Matt. 11 : 17) : " Tibiis cane-
batur, ut apnd Gnscos ct Eomanos, non tantum in faneribns,
vide 9, 23, sed etiam in nuptiis et choreis. Jam quod loci
sensum attinet, ndaginm dcsumptum est a pneris, qui iu plateis
ludendo imitantur, quss a majoribus natu, serio ag-i vWernnt, qui i
cum viderint in nuptiis et cl>or<s tibiis 1 cani, in funoribus noenias i
cani, eadem ludentes faciunt ; sed pueris morosis, qui nullis asqua-
lium snorum studiis, neque Isetis, neque tristibus carminibus, mo-
ventnr, ut et ipsi talibus operam navent, hanc morositatem et
inhumanitatem exprobrant. Cum his morosioribus pueris com-
parat Christus Pharisseos et legisperitos, qui neque Johannis
austeritate et vita severa, neque Christi lenitate et vita humana
et atque trita eo redigi potuerint, ut vitam animumque emenda-
rent, ut Jesnm Messiam faterentur, ejusqne prascepta sequerentur."
k " for you ; " vfiTv. See last note. So Kend., M.
i "hath come;" etylv&e. The ordinary rendering of this
perfect by its corresponding English tense is accurate, and affords
a good sense. The perfect sometimes covers the period from
which an act or condition originated in the past, and extending
to the present, to express what is continued, or abiding in its
consequences, or operation. It is on this common ground, that
the present and perfect so often meet. Strictly speaking, how-
ever, these tenses are never identical in their force. There are
cases where we can render the Greek perfect by an English
present tense, yet the peculiarity belongs to our own language, in
which our present (unless in what is turned the progressive form,
e. g., I am writing) is not the exact equivalent of the Greek
present. Stuart, Gram., g51, 5, p. 72. We can translate the
Greek perfect by our present, according to Kuhrier (255, E. 5),
only when the present condition is more prominent than the past
act.
m " hath come." See last note.
" " a glutton ; " av&gconos ynyoe. Norton, Scarlett, Wakef.,
Kendrick, Robinson (in loco, av&gioitos). In this, and many
similar constructions, av&qcaitos is pleonastic. See Matt. 18 :23,
&gcmcp patfar ("to a king"). So Tlraeyd. III. 29, aty?
fcea-ris. ./Elian. V. H.. 14 : 20, }<> natScr/iayos. See Weiske,
P]conasmi Groeci Com. (articles &VTJQ and
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. TIL
75
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
vine-bibber, a friend of publicans
and sinners !
35 But Wisdom is justified of
all her children.
36 And one of the Pharisees
desired him that he -would eat
with him. And he went into the
Pharisee's house, and sat down to
meat.
37 And behold, a woman in the
city, which was a sinner, when
she knew that Jesus sat at meat
in the Pharisee's house, brought
an alabaster-box of ointment.
GREEK TEXT.
Kdt
\ t \ 35 v PI r
KO.I apM.pTa)Aa>Js. KO.L ZOIKCUCO-
07} 77 <ro(j){a OLTTO TK>V TZKVCOV av-
rrjs TrdvTcav.
36 ' TT ' S> ' ' x "
JzpcoTa oe rt? avrov TCOV
<&api(ra.ic0i' > 'Lva. (frayy per av-
TOV' KOL ticreXdav els TTJV oiKiav
TOV HJapiaaLov aveKXidt], 37 Kai
ISov, yvvrj ev rfj -jroXei, TJTLS rjv
afJLapTcaXos, ermyvova-a on dva,-
KUTOU iv Trj olnia TOV ^apuraiov,
/j.vpov,
REVISED VERSION.
glutton, and "a wine-drinker,
a friend of tax-gatherers and
sinners ! But wisdom is justi- 35
fied i>by all her children. And 36
one of the Pharisees Basked him
'to eat with him. And he went
into the Pharisee's house, and
reclined at table. And, be- 37
hold, a woman <of the city, who
was a sinner, "learning that T he
reclined at table in the Phar-
isee's house, bought an "ala-
baster-box of ointment, and 38
" a -wine-drinker ; " olvonoTjjs. Norton, Thorn., Kobinson
(Lex.), Kend., Murdock, Tynd., Geneva, and Kheims, " a drinker
of wine." As olvcntorrjs is contrasted with pyre olvov nivcav,
it should receive this translation. " Bibber " for " drinker " has
never heen a naturalized word in our language. Unless in quot-
ing this passage from- the-E. V., it is neither written, nor spoken.
It originated in the language of the Vulgate, " bibens rinura."
Eras., Beza, " vini potor;" Castalio, "viuosum" ("addicted to
wine"). Should it be supposed that " wine-drinker" is not suffi-
ciently energetic to express the thought, then " wine-toper " might
possibly answer as its substitute.
P " by ;" anb. Tliom., "Wesley, Penn, Norton, Dick., Murd.,
Scarlett, Camp., Kend., M., Angus. See (E. V.) Matt. Y : 16,
" by their fruits," onto taiv v.a^itcov. Bretsch. remarks on one
of the significations of anb thus: "Pro vno junctum verbis
passivis, et in locutionibus passivis ; ut anoSoxtftaad'^'ac 6.710
TWOS, feprobari ab aliquo. Marc. 8 : 31. Luc. 9 : 22 ; 17 : 25.
Matt. 11 : 19. Luke 7 : 35." This use of aitb for vnb is peculiar
to the later Greek writers. G. and S. 2?r., " par tous ses enfants ; "
Iber. and Span., " por todos sus hijos ; " De Wette, " von alien
ihren Kindern."
' " asked ; " ^cortc. "Wesley, Penn, Sharpe, Norton, Scarlett,
Wakef., Camp., Kend., Angus, Thelwall, M. " To desire," in the
sense of requesting, or inviting; is obsolete.
* to eat ; " tva y>ayg. Thorn., Wesley, Penn, Sharpe, Nor-
ton, Dick., Scarlett, Wakef., Camp., Kend., M. In constructions
of this kind, we can employ that with the indicative, or the infin-
itive alone. In most cases, the latter form is appropriate as con-
cise, forcible, and in harmony with ordinary usage. In the later
Greek, Iva was used after -various classes of words, not as mark-
ing purpose, or event, but simply as a demonstrative particle
like the English that, merely indicative of what was referred
to in the preceding words, or introducing something already
implied in the preceding words. In this way, tva with the sub-
junction was often employed (and twice with the optative) where
earlier writers used the infinitive, or other particles. Kob. (Lex.,
if a, and art). S. Pr. and De Sacy, " de manger;" Iber., "a
comer."
" " reclined at table; " aveyMfrrj. Kend., M., Murd. (" reclined "),
Angus. Vulg., Mont., Beza, Eras., Castalio, Schott, " accubuit."
Heb. N. T., isisx De "Wette, " legte sich zu Tische ; " Iber., " se
reclino [a la mesa]." Rob. (Lex., in verbo], " to make lean lack,
or recline, in order to take a meal ; midd. to lean, or lie back,
to recline at table, i. q., avaxeiftat." Bretschneider, " ad camam
accumbo." " In the time of Christ, the Persian custom prevailed
of reclining at table. The guests reclined upon the left side, with
their faces towards the table, so that the head of the second
approached the breast of the first, and the head of the third
approached the breast of the second." Jahn's Archeology, <!146.
" of the city ; " Ir rjj noiei. Dick, Wakef., Norton (" of
the place "). S. Fr., " de'la ville ; " Iber., " de la ciudad ; " Ital.,
" della citta ; " Bloomf. (N. Test., Suppl.), " of the city." This
being a common Greek idiom for ex T!JS icolecas. See ch. 8 : 27,
note.
u " learning ; " Imyvovaa. Kendrick, Norton. 'En\, in this
word, is intensive ; in many cases it can not be well rendered ill
English. When, however, it signifies to obtain knowledge from
others, it is equivalent to " learn," " to find out." So, according
to Bob. (Lex., iitty.}, in this instance. Penn, "having learned;"
Liddell (Lex., tmy. II.), "to find out, discover, detect;" Bretsch.
(Lex.), " bene intelligo, bene disco." It is well rendered in Vulg.,
Montanus, Beza, Eras., and Schott by some form of cognosce; so
often employed in Latin writers for to learn, to receive informa-
tion. See Leverett (Diet.).
T " he reclined at table ; " avaxcirai. Rob. (Lex.), " to recline
at table." Sharpe, " he was lying at meat ; " Vulg., Erasmus,
" accubuisset ; " Beza, " eum accubuisse ; " Mont., " accubuit ; "
Schott, " eum accumbere." This word has obviously the same
force with avaxU&ri, v. 36. See note.
w " alabaster-box ; " aJ.dpaorpov. Perfume vases were made
of alabaster by the ancients. They were sometimes shaped like
our vials, in other instances the form was varied ; in all, however,
it seems that a neck or pointed projection was a part always
added for the sake of pouring out the unguent. This was sealed;
hence the reference to breaking it, in Mark 14 : 3.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE.-^CEAP. VII.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
38 And stood at his feet behind
him weeping, and began to wash
tiia feet with tears, and did wipe
them with the hairs of her headj
and kissed his feet, and anointed
them with the ointment.
39 Now when the Pharisee
which had bidden him, saw it, he
spake within himself, saying, This
man, if he were a prophet, would
have known who, and what man-
ner of woman this is that toucheth
him.: for she is a sinner .
40 And Jesus answering, said
unto him, Simon, I have somewhat
to say unto thee. And he saith,
Master, say on.
GREEK TEXT.
38 \ \ \ 'a,
KO.L cTTaaa irapa TOVS Trooas
avrpv piricra) KXaiovaa,
TOVS 7To8as avrov TOIS
SaKpvon, /cat rat? 6ptl rrjs /ce-
avrrjs e^efiacrcre, KOI KOT-
TOVS iroo'as avTov, /cat
TO> fJ-vpa). 39 ISebv 8e o
0api.a~a.iof o /caAeVay avTov ehrev
zv lavTfS, Aeyojz/, OVTOS, et r/v
irpo<j)r)Tr)s } eyivto<rKev av T'IS Kai
TTOTairrj.r) yuw?, jyrty airTerai av-
TOV' OTI afJLaprcoXos eort.
40 Kai airoKpiOtls o 'IrjO'ovs
ewre irpos O.VTOV, Si/MOV) e^co croi
'O 8e (pr/cri, Ai8dcrKa-
REVISED VERSION.
stood at his feet behind him
weeping, and began -"to wet
his feet rwith her tears, and
"wiped them "with the hair of
her head, and kissed his feet,
and anointed them with the
ointment. *But the Pharisee, 3p
c who had invited him, a seeing
it, spoke within himself, saying,
This c man,if he were a prophet,
f would know who and *what
the woman is, that toucheth
him ; for she is a sinner. And *0
Jesus, answering, said to him,
Simon, I have ""something to
say to thee. And he saith,
I have retained the rendering of the E. "V., although if we were
to employ a word which is generic, and in use at present, viz.
" vase " (which has been recommended by some interpreters), it
would, perhaps, be more exact, as signifying jngjsly a receptacle
of any form. See Rob. and Liddell (Lexx., in verbo). Still
" vase " is by - no means a familiar word with the multitude, anc
1'nis would be a serious objection to its use. Kuincel (Mark
14 : 3) : " Est autem lagenulse illius confractio, ut intelligenter
observavit Ernestius in Instit. interpret. N. T. Ill : 10, 89, de
refracta superiore parte colli intelligenda, orificio obsignato, quoc
signum erat genuini unguenti foris advecti, auctore Plinio." De
Sacy, S. Pr., " un vase ; " Iber., " un vaso ; " Ital., " un vaso ; "
De Wette, " ein Flaschchen."
1 " to wet ; " faexstr. Norton. Liddell thus defines this
word, " to wet, moisten, sprinkle, rain on, metaphorically to shower
down blessings on any one ; " Bobinson, " to wet, to moisten, to
sprinkle." Bretsch. : "Irrigo, madefacio, Luc. 7 : 38, 44. Apoc.
11 : 6, fva. ftr t verbs Pfsxti, ne pluvia irrigat, intellige rijv yr;v.
Apud poetas atticos et seniores scriptores, i. q. vsiv, pluo, plu-
iiiam demitto, pluvia irrigo." Vulg., Mont, Eras., Beza, Castal.,
" rigare ; " S. Fr., " d. arroser ; " Iber., " a humedecerlos."
J " with her tears ; " rots day.gvai. Norton, Penn, Angus,
Thelwall, Thorn. Iber, " con [sus] lagrimas ; " G. Pr., " de ses
larmes." The article here (torg) has, as in many other instances,
"the force of a possessive pronoun. See ch. 5 : 3, note. Schole-
field, " with her tears."
* "wiped;" l&paooe. Wesley, Sharpe, Norton, Penn, Dick.,
Scarlett, Campbell, Kend. There is no emphasis which demands
'the use of the phrase did wipe." It was copied from Tyndale.
" with the hair ; " -cars &$. So (E. V., in a parallel) John
12: : 3. Eev. 9:8. Sharpe, Norton, Penn, Kendrick, M. Our
usus loquendi requires that we should treat ( as a collecti-ae.
We never say, " lie lost his hairs," or, " he had his hairs cut off."
In this passage, "hairs" was the literal rendering of Tyndale,
and was copied by theearlier English versions.
11 " Sut ; " 8e. Wesley, Norton, Penn, Dick., Scarlett, Angus,
M., Thel. Yulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, Castal., autem ; " G. Fr.,
" mais." As the thought and action of the woman and the Pharisee
were in marked contrast, it is proper to regard Se as adversative.
" who had invited ; " 6 xaieaas. This participle is thus
rendered in the versions of Wesley, Norton, Penn, Diet., Scar-
lett, Wakef., Campbell, Angus. " To invite " is a scriptural -word.
See 1 Sam. 9 : 24, E. T. (Heb., inx 1 ^} ; 2 Sam. 13 : 23 (Heb.,
Xlj:)^; Sept.,exafeffi'). Esther 5: 12 (Heb., tt-n-} ; Sept., y.ey.lr..
/tat). So in the apocryphal book, Eccles. 13 : 9. " To bid," in
the sense of asking, or requesting, is antiquated. (See Webster
Diet, art. "bid").
d " seeing ; " IScav. Wesley, Scarlett, Kendrick, Thelwall, M.
The participial construction is adopted also by Dick., A. and G.
Campbell. So Vulg., Mont., Eras., " videns ; " Belg., " ziende ; "
G. Fr. and -De Sacy, "voyant;" S. Fr., "ayant vu;" Diodati,
" avendo veduto."
" man." As there is nothing expressed in the text equivalent
to " man," it is italicized, as a supplement. So Scarlett.
f "would know;" lyiviomtEV av. Kend., Norton, Thomson,
Murdock, M. Hob. (Lex., Sr) : " [used] with the indie, imperf
to express the idea : J would, or might do, Luke 7 ; 39, OVTOH
. t. L, if this man were a prophet, he would Jcnow, etc." See
Trollope (Gram., g 51, p. 137). Vulg., Mont., Eras., " sciret nti-
que;" Bern and Schott, "nSsset;" Belg., "zoude wel weten;"
De Wette, " so wiirde er wohl erkennen ; " S. F. r., " il. saurait bien."
e " what the woman is ; " no-taitrj r) yvvq. Norton, Sharpe,
M. See ch. 1:29, note. De Wette, " welch ein Weib das ist .; "
S. Fr., "ce qu'elle est;" G. Fr., " qu'elle est cette femme.;"
Iber., "cual [es] la muger ; ;" Diodati, " quale^ia questa donna."
H is rendered by its equivalent article.
k "something;" T. Wiclif, Thorn., Norton, Penn,
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VII.
77
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
41 There was a certain credi-
tor, -which had two debtors : the
one owed five hundred pence, and
the other fifty.
42 And when they had nothing
to pay, he frankly forgave them
both. Tell me therefore, which
of them will love him most?
43 Simon answered and said,
I suppose that fie, to whom he
GBEEK TEXT,
Ae, elm. 41 Avo
fjcrav 8<x.veia-Tfj nisi' 6 ely
Srjvapia Trevra/cocria, 6 de
f 42 \ > /
TreVTTJKOVTO.. /M]
avrcov ajroSovvai, dfj,(
p[<raTo. r/y
TrAetof O.VTOV
KpL0els 5e o SL/JLWV
Xa.fj./3avct> on cj> TO
cv\
oe
etTre,
'Aw-
'TTTO-
EEVISED VERSION.
Teacher, 'say it. A certain 41
creditor had two debtors : 'one
owed five hundred 'pence, and
the other fifty. And 'as they 42
had nothing to pay, m he free-
ly forgave "both. "Tell me
then, which of them will love
him most ? And Simon, "an- 43
Bwering, said, I suppose p he, to
whom "he freely forgave 'the
Dick., Scarlett, Camp., Kend., M. So (E. V.) ch, 11 : 54. John
13 : 29. Acts 3:5. " Somewhat " ia Obsolete.
1 "say it,-" shci. Tliom., Penn, Scarlett, Campbell. Belg.,
" zegt het ; " G. Pr., " dis-la." This accords with present usage.
The phrase, of the E. V. was copied from Tyndale, who, in his
turn, had followed Luther, " sage an." Syriac, fie] . Murdock,
" say it."
J " one ; " 6 els. In conformity with our usus loquendi, the
article is not translated (by " the."). So Norton, Wakef., Dick.,
Camp., M.
* " pence ; " SrjvA^ia. As I have retained the language of the
E. V. in all cases, where weights, measures, coins, etc., are
noticed, I transcribe part of the following' note inserted in the
Revision of Mark, at ch. 4:21: " Various plans have been
suggested or adopted in reference to the mode of expressing the
weights, measures, and coins of the text of the Scriptures. It is
difficult to see that any thing would be gained, in passages like
the present, by substituting ' measure ' or ' corn-measure ' for
'bushel.' The subject becomes really more indefinite by the
change. Many later translators transfer the original word,
slightly altered, so as to harmonize with the vernacular in termi-
nation, and place a note in the margin indicating the capacity
distance, space, or value. Now, in this case, we have some serious
difficulties. For instance, it is impossible to determine, with
any considerable accuracy, the length of many lineal measures
noticed in the Scriptures ; an approximation is all we can reach.
It is well known that the value of the coins noticed in the N. T.
varied greatly at different periods, as the precious metals were
more or less abundant. In the 0. T. the earlier translators gen-
erally transferred the Hebrew terms. It would have been well
if this course had been adopted in the N. T., at tlie proper time.
As this was not done, however, and English readers have become
familiarized with the ' pound,' ' penny,' ' bushel,' etc., by whicla
the original words have been long represented, the propriety
of changing them for the original words which must sound
strangely in the ears of common readers may be questionable.
On the whole, we are not in the same position as we should be,
were we now engaged in making the first English translation.
We are restricted by the phraseology of the Common Version,
which has become familiar by usage. I take the liberty of
suggesting that a set of marginal notes, drawn up with more
accuracy than those found in our common quarto editions of the
Common Version, should be inserted in the margin, giving a
concise explanation of the value of coins, the extent of measures,
etc. In reference to coins, the value should be stated according
to the ' sterling ' standard of Britain, and the decimal reckoning
of dollars and cents, in the United States."
i " as they had nothing ; " firj IZOVTCOV Ss mntav. Sharpe,
Pechy (on Angus). S. Fr., " comme ils n'avaient pas de quoi
payer." " When" has been changed to " as," on the ground, that
there is no reference to time, in the language of the text.
m " he freely forgave ; " txaqiomo. "Wakef., Scarlett, Camp.,
Angus, M". " Frankly," in the sense demanded here, is obsolete.
Iber., " perdono gratuitamente ; " S. Fr., " il leur fit grace ; "
Vulg., Mont., " donavit ; " . Erasmus and Castalio, " condonavit ; "
Beza, " gratificatns est." As an alternative rendering, " he for-
gave."
" " both ; " afiyote^ats- Norton, Vulg., Eras., Beza, " utris-
que ; " Castal. and Sehott, " utrique." " Them " (of the E. V.) is
omitted, as superfluous. A literal rendering of the text furnishes
an expression which accords with the present usage of the
English.
" Tell me ; " sins. As the pronoun is not expressed in the
text, it should be italicized, as a supplement. The pronoun is not
placed in the text of Eras., Mont., Beza, Castalio, Sehott, Belgic,
Luther, De Wette, G. Fr., Iber., Diodati. Scarlett has properly
inserted " me " in italic.
r " then ; " ovv. So (E. V.) ch. 7 : 31. Norton, Campbell.
S. Fr., " done ; " Iberian, " pues ; " Belgic, " dan." The particle
here denotes the mere sequence of one clause on another, or the
consequence of one clause on another. See Rob. (Lex., in verbo).
1 " answering ; " axox$i&ius. Wesley, Sharpe, Kendrick, M.,
Thelwall.
r The particle on (E. V., " that ") after vno).afi/3avca is super-
fluous in translation. If it is expressed by an equivalent, a
supplement must properly be employed, e. g., " I suppose that he
will love most, to whom," etc. In the text it merely seems to
indicate the ellipsis of nleZov ayanqast. "Ort is disregarded by-
Thorn., Wesley, Sharpe, Penn, Norton, Wakef., Dick., G. and A.
Camp., Beza, Castalio, Sehott, Luther, De Wette, Iber., Diodatj,
Ital., Dan. In the following versions the ellipsis is supplied, and
on is, therefore, properly retained in translation. Belgic, " Ik
achte dat hij 't [is], dien," etc.; G. Fr., " j'estime que [c'est] celui
78
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VII.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
forgave most. And he said unto
him, Thou hast rightly judged.
44 And he turned to the wo-
man, and said unto Simon, Seest
"ihou this woman ? I entered into
thine house, thou gavest me no
water for my feet : but she hath
washed my feet with tears, and
wiped them with the hairs of her
head.
45 Thou gavest me no kiss :
but this woman, since the time I
came in, hath not ceased to kiss
my feet.
46 Mine head with oil thou
OREEK TEXT.
* S\ C\ N 9 9 f\ 9 /~\ /i f\
O-OTO. u oe eiTTfv avTco, Upuco?
44 Kai o-rpa(f)fls Trpof
-BAeVety Tavrrjv rrjv
elo~TJX6ov crov elf rrjv oi/aaz>,
vScop eiri TOVS Tro8as fJ-ov OVK
' avrr) Se TOLS Sa.Kpv<rtv
fjLOV TOVS 7ro5a?, K<U TOLS
Trjs K
45
fj.01 OVK
' avrr/
8e, a(j> rjs do-rjXdov, ov
Ka.Ta(j)iXovord fj-ov TOVS
46 eAa/o) TTJV KcfyaXrjv p.ov OVK
REVISED VERSION.
most. And he said to him,
"Thou hast judged rightly.
And 'turning to the woman, 44
he said to Simon, Seest thou
this woman ? *I came into thy
house, thou gavest me no water
for my feet ; but 'she wet my
feet with J her tears, and wiped
them with 'her hair. "Thou 45
gavest me no kiss; but 'she,
; from the time I came in, hath
not ceased to kiss my feet.
d Thou didst not anoint my
" Thou hast judged rightly ; " ''Oo&cos extras. Kendrick,
Thorn., Sharps, Penn, Wakef., Camp., M. There is no good
reason why the natural arrangement of words in our own lan-
guage should not be adopted here. Norton, " You have judged
correctly."
T " turning ; " oToaysis. Thorn., Wesley, Sharpe, Norton,
Penn, Wakef., Dick., Scarlett, Camp., Kendrick, Angus, Thel-
wall, M.
" " I came ; " tlorj&ov. So E. V. renders
Thorn., Wakef., Scarlett, Camp., Kend., Angus, M.
in v. 45.
1 " she wet ; " 'efcege. Norton, Hob. (Lex.), Liddell. Diod.,
Siculus, B. Ill, 25, tas Soyas tiov n^orepov elhjfifteviov /&$-
iavres, Inid'iitaiv htl nv;> AnnUv, " having wet the skins of
the [beasts] formerly taken, they place them over a gentle fire."
The renderings " watered," " washed," and " bathed," which have
been given to the word in this passage, are poetic approximations
to the true sense. See v. 37, note.
" her ; " rots. Article as a possessive pronoun. See cb.
6:1, note. So Kend., Angus, Norton, Thorn.
1 " her hair ; " Tars i9-^tJJ. Sharpe, Penn, Norton, Campbell.
Bob (Lex.) : " Dative fygt, the hair." See v. 38, note.
a Tf/g xeyafcjs of the Text. Recept. is a reading canceled by
Griesbach, Knapp, Theile, Lachmann, Tischendorf, Scholz, and
bracketed by Tittmann. Schott says : " Tbb. rijs xsyalijs post
fytgiv vulgo addita (ex v. 38) delevimus cum Griesb. aliisque,
praseuntibus haud paucis cdd. (6 unc.) verss., Pesch., Pers.
Memph., ^Ethiop., Arm., Goth. Vulg., Ital."
b " she ; " avrtj. So this word is rendered (E. V.) v. 44.
Thomson, Wesley, Sharpe, Norton, Wakef., Dick., Camp., Kend.,
Tyndale, Cranmer, Geneva, Rheims. Angus. Luther and De
Wette, " sie ; " G. and S. Pr., " elle ; " Ital., " ella." Heb. N. T.,
Xifi When emphatic, OUTOS may be rendered by fie, she, etc.
c " from the time ; " ay ^s. Kend., Penn, Sharpe.
d " Thou didst not anoint my head with oil." This is the
natural order for English readers. " Mine " is allowable only
before a vowel, or silent h. This arrangement is that of Wesley,
Penn, Dick., Scarlett, Camp., Kend., Murdock. De Wette, " Du
salbtest mein Haupt nicht mit Oel ; " S. Fr., " tu n'as pas oint
ma tete d'huile ; " Span., " No ungiste mi cabeza con oleo ; "
Diodati, " Tu non mi hai unto il capo d' olio."
& qui," etc. ; De Sacy, " que [ce sera] celni auquel," etc. ; S. Fr.,
" qne [c'est] celui a qui," etc. The more concise rendering har-
monizes with our idiom.
" he freely forgave ; " e%aqioato. Angus, Thelwall. So
" frankly forgave," in v. 42. It is obvious that the translation
in these verses should be uniform. The earlier English versions,
Wiclif, Tyndale, Cranmer, Geneva render the word in the same
manner w. 42, 43, " forgave ; " while the E. V. is inconsistent in
saying "frankly forgave" (v. 42), and then "forgave" (v. 43).
The following are specimens of the mode of rendering fyapioaro
(in these verses), which occur in other languages than English.
Vulg. and Mont, " donavit donavit ; " Erasmus, Castalio, and
Schott, "condonavit condonavit;" Beza, "gratiflcatus est
gratificatua est ; " De Wette, " scLenkete schenkete ; " G. Fr.,
" il quitta la dette il a quitte ; " S. Fr., " il lenr nt grace 51 a
fait la plus grande grace ; " De Sacy, " il leur remit il a
remis;" Iberian, " perdono gratuitamente perdono gratuita-
mente ; " Diodati, " egli rimise egli ha rimesso ; " Ital., " fece
grazia , ha fatta grazia ; " Dan., " eftergav eftergav." Syriac,
y n-q v^elwfc.). Heb. N. T., -jjn IJrtJI. As an alternative
rendering, " he forgave."
1 "the most;" TO itleTov. Norton, Dick., M. Belg., "het
meeste ; " De Wette, " das meiste." In v. 42, nfarov is used
adverbially, and modifies the signification of ayaTtnaet. In the
present instance, it has the force of a substantive with the article
TO. Rob. (Lex., itletcov) cites this passage thus: "To niaov,
the more, i. e., the greater debt." The article should be trans-
lated.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VII.
79
KING JAMES' VERSION.
GREEK TEXT.
didst not anoint : but this woman ' rfXettyas' avrij 5e P-^pco
hath anointed my feet with oint-j ^ ^ 47 n $
jjient. ^
47 Wherefore, I say unto thee,
Her sins, which are many, are for-
given': for she loved much : but
to whom little is forgiven, the.
same loveth little.
48 And he said unto her, Thy
sins are forgiven.
49 And they that sat at meat
Xeyca . croi, acj&eWrat ai
avrfjs ai TroAAai, OTL
oAt-
" 48 T7' S>\
yov aycwra. Jaiire oe
'A(f)ea>VTai 0-ov ai ap.apTiai.
-
-r;r
K.
O.L
01
REVISED VERSION.
head with oil ; but c she f anoint-
ed my feet with ointment.
^Therefore, I say to thee, b her 47
many sins are forgiven ; 'for
she loved much ; 'but he to
whom little is forgiven, loveth
little. And he said to her, 48
Thy sins are forgiven. And 49
those, k who reclined at table
" she ; " avTTj. Kendriok, Angus, Thomson, Wesley, Shavpe
Norton, Wakef., Dick., Camp. See v. 45, note.
' " anointed ; " rjAenpe. The aorist should have its proper
force here, as well as in the preceding member of the sentence
where we have ^Ay/as. So Wakef., M., De Wette.
e "Therefore;" ov %<iotv. Norton, Scarlett. Webster (Diet.
art. " therefore ") : " For that ; for that, or this reason, referring
to something previously stated." " Therefore " often occurs in
the B. V. " Wherefore " is obsolescent.
h " her many sins ; " at afiaoTtat avifji al Ttottal. Norton, M. :
Kend., Tbelwall. Scarlett and Dick., " her numerous sins ; " De
"Wette, " ihre vielen Siinden ; " S. Fr., " ses nombreux peches ; "
Ital., " i suoi molti peccati." Murdock. The emphasis belongs
to " many," and this is clearly exhibited by this arrangement.
Wiclif, Tyndale, Cranmer, Genevan have " many sins." They,
however, mistake by using " to her," thus following the Vulgate,
which has ei, the dative, as though the Greek was avrfj, instead
of avrijs. On the construction which occurs in this passage,
Green (Gram, of N. Test. Dialect, p. 165) remarks : " Of the two
modes of collocation for the words in combination with the noun,
namely that of placing them between the article and the noun,
and that of postfixing them with the article repeated, the latter
seems to be preferred when they embrace a more prominent part
of the complex idea than the noun itself, or when, at least, some
prominence is intended to be given to them." In many instances,
however, this prominence can not be indicated by any arrange-
ments of words in our language without a violation of its idiom,
for instance, John 10 : 11, eyca sl/ti 6 noifajv 6 xaiog. We can
not with propriety say, " I am the shepherd, who is good ; " but,
"I am the good shepherd." The judgment of the reader must,
then, indicate the emphasis, " I am the good shepherd." So
2 Tim. 4 : 7, TOV ayoiva. tbv xa),b
' " for she loved much ; " on yydmjoe no?.v. I have retained
the rendering of the E. V., which has been followed by most of
the later translators in our language. This rendering is adopted
also by De Wette, Belg., S. Pr. Now the sense of the expres-
sion " for she loved much " is such, that it makes the forgiveness
of l)3r many sins the desert of loving much; in other words, it is
as if the sentence were this, " she loved much because her many
sins were forgiven." And this is a sense, which makes the
Saviour's reasoning inconsequential, and the illustration drawn
ftom the two debtors useless. Besides this, it contradicts the
declaration made by Christ in the fiftieth verse, " Thy faith hath
saved thee." The question then arises : When the usual render-
ing of a word gives a sense which is antagonistic to the thought
presented in the context and scope of the passage, are we not
required to seek one which will be in harmony with that
thought ? The answer must be in the affirmative. But philologists
regard it as a fact that authority is wanting for regarding on as
illative rather than causal in this passage. Yet there is an ellipti-
cal use of Srt (Hoogeveen, on, III : 1, p. 138) when the full
form is Sia tovro on, " on this account that," referring to what
precedes. Let us proceed another step, and suppose the full form
to be 8i& TOUT ,> sort, art, " on this account it is that she loved
much." We now have a sentence in perfect harmony with the
Saviour's argument, with the illustration drawn from the case of
the debtors, and with v. 50. By some such analysis of this pas-
sage, I presume the authors of the admirable Spanish Version
which I have noted as " Iberian," wrought out the result, which
they have expressed in this form, "Digote que por motive de
que [le] estan perdonados sus pecados, muchos, ha amado mu-
cho." I, therefore, submit as an alternative rendering, " on this
account it is that she loved much." Kuinrel has the following 1
note on this passage : " Haud pauci interpretes opinati sunt, his
verbis ostendi, foeminam illam pietatis ac reverentise suse erga
Christum declaratione, delictorum veniam promeritam esse, adeo-
que ea interpretoti sunt : remiss sunt ei multa peccata, qua com-
missit, quoniam multa pietatis ac reverentia signa mihi exhibuit.
Huic vero interpretation! primo i-epugnat parabola ipsa panic
ante proposita, in ea enim debitoris erga creditorem pietas et
benevolentia memoratur, postquam notatum est creditorem ei
debitum remisisse. Deinde si verba Christ! eo sensa accipienda
issent, quern iis interpretes illi subjiciunt, sequi deberet : " Ss SB
hiyov ayana, oHfyov avry ayiercu, sed verba textus memorant
primo peccatorum remissionem, deinde amoris ac pietatis declara-
tionem."
' " but he to whom little is forgiven loveth little ; " < Ss bU-
ynv apterai, bliyov ayartq. By expressing the nominative of
aytata, " he," in its proper place, we are freed from an unneces-
sary and antiquated supplement, " the same." The expression is
thus harmonized with present usage. So Thorn., Wesley, Penn
Norton, Scarlett, Dick., Camp.
k " who reclined at table with him ; " ol ffvvaxelftevoe. Bob.
Lex., in verbo), " to recline with any one at table,-" BretseL, " una
accumbo." If we except the force of the preposition aw, this
THE GOSPEL ACCOBDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VIII.
KING .TAJIKS' VERSION.
with him, began to say within
themselves, Who is this that for-
giveth sins also ?
50 And he said to the woman,
Thy faith hath saved thee ; go in
peace.
CHAP. VIII.
AND it came to pass afterward,
that he went throughout every
city and village, preaching and
shewing the glad tidings of the
kingdom of God : and the twelve
were with him ;
2 And certain women, which
had been healed of evil spirits
and infirmities, Mary called Mag-
dalene, out of whom went seven
devils,
3 And Joanna the wife of
Chuza, Herod's steward, and Su-
sanna, and many others, which
ministered unto him of their sub-
stance.
Xeyetv
ouroy
GBEEK TEXT.
> t ~ fTTf
ev eavroty, 1 is
by /cat dfjiaprias d(j)
50 Ears Se TTyooy r^v ywat/ca, '-?
TT'UTTIS (rov <re(rcoKe ere- Tropevov
els
CHAP. VIII.
ev r<
/cat avrof SicoSeve Kara
/cat KCO/J.TJV, Krjpv(rcr<ov /cat euay-
y\t^6fjLvos rrjv @acriXf{a.v rov
Oeov- Kal ol 8co8eKa crvv aura,
2 /cat yvvaLKes rives at rjcrav reffe-
pairev[J.evaL dtro Trvfv/j.a.Tow TTO-
vrjpcov Kal d(r0ei>icov ) Mapia 77
aXijvr), d(f) rj$
eVra e^eA^Av^et, 3 /cat
'Itadvva yvvrj Xovtjx. ziriTpoltov
'ffpcoSov, /cat Sova-avva, KOI ere-
pai TroAAai, atrtvey SirjKovovv
aura! d-rro TK>V virapyovraiv av-
rais.
REVISED VERSION.
with him, began to say within
themselves, Who is this 'that
even forgiveth sins ? And he so
said to the woman, Thy faith
hath saved thee ; go in peace.
CHAP. VIII.
AND it came to pass "after- l
wards that "he traveled through
c cities and villages d proclaiming
and "preaching the good news
of the kingdom of God ; and
the twelve were with him, and 2
certain women, who had been
healed of evil spirits and in-
firmities, Mary called Magda-
lene, f from whom g had gone
out seven demons, and Joanna. h 3
^the wife of Chuza, Herod's stew-
ard, and Susanna, and many
others, who ministered to him
J from their ^possessions. And 4
verb has the same signification with av&xhvco, in v. 36. See
note on that verse. Him, in this passage, is a supplement, and
should be italicised. Iber., " los que estaban recostados con [el a
la mesa]." I render the word uniformly in ch. 14 : 10, 15.
i " that even ; " os xal. Sharps, Penn, Norton, Wakefield,
Scarlett, Dick., Camp., Kend. ("who even forgives"); S. Fr.,
" qui meme ; " Iber., " que ann ; " Ital., " che anche ; " De "Wette,
" er auch." In this instance, xal is intensive, as in Matt. 10 : 30,
v/zdiv Ss xa.1 at tgi^es. See Rob. (Lex., xal}.
" " afterwards ; " h> tio xaS-e^ijs. In the E. T. both forms
of this word occur, " afterward," and " afterwards." The latter is
employed uniformly in this Revision, as it is that which is now
generally used. See (E. V.) Exdd. 11 : 1. 1 Sam. 9 : 13. Job
18 : 2. Prov. 20 : 17. Gal. 3 : 23. So Sharpe, Norton, Wakef.,
Dick., Camp., M.
b "he traveled through;" SicoSeve. Rob. (Lex.), Liddell,
Them., Norton, Scarlett, Dick., G-. and A. Camp., M.
" " cities and villages ; " xara. nohv xai xa>ftr}t>. Kendrick,
Thorn., Campbell. Norton, " the cities and villages ; " Sharpe,
" city and village ; " Tyndale, " cities and towns." The rendering
of the E. Y. (taken from the Genevan) is too indefinite. " Every
city and village " would require a supplement like that adopted
by Dick., " every city and village of Galilee." A more literal
rendering, such as Sharpe's, " through city and village," does not
harmonize with our siw loquendi. Kara is- distributive. Rob.
(Lex., v.rera). As an alternative rendering of SuoScve xara ito-
iiv xal xtafirjv, " he traveled throughout cities and villages."
* " proclaiming ; " Kij^vaatav. Thorn., Norton, Dick., Camp.,
Kend., Angus, M. Syr., jjlaio. (Murd., " proclaimed.") Iber..
" proclamando." Heb. N. T., tfyf\ See ch. 4 : 18, note.
" preaching the good news ; " svayyeL&ftsvos. See ch.
4 : 18, note.
f " from whom ) " ay qs. M. In the E. V. iutb is disre-
garded, and &, in composition with tyxopai (tgftyM&tt), is
made to take its place, while that verb is rendered as though it
bad the simple form lA/yA^st. This incorrect rendering was
copied from Tyndale. Kuincel, ^'e qua septem genii mali exie-
rant ; " Schott, " e qua ; " Vulg., Mont, Eras., " de qua ; " Belg.,
" van welke ; " De Wette, " von welcher ; " 8. Pr., " de laquelle ; "
Iber., " de la cual ; " Ital., " dalla quale."
e " had gone out ; " egetyM&et. M., Thorn., "Wesley. Vulg.,
Mont, Eras., Beza, Castalio, "exierant" This verb is properly
rendered in the pluperfect by Norton, Angus, Camp., and Wakef.
See last note.
h A comma is placed after " Joanna," as that name is followed
by a defining clause. .So Wakef., M., Norton, Thomson, Wesley,
Campbell, Kend.
' " the." The article is demanded here by our idiom ; but as
ri is anarthrous, the article is italicized, as a supplement.
" from ; " ano (cum genit.). Kend., Penn, Dick., Norton,
"from possessions;" aito ta>v ina^ovrcov. Kend., Thorn.,
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VIII.
81
KING FAMES' VERSION.
4 , And when much people were
gathered together, and were come
to him out of every .city, he spake
by a iparable :
5 A sower went out to sow his
seed : and as he : sowed, some fell
by the way-side ; and it was
trodden down, and the fowls of
the air deyoured it.
6 And some fell -upon a rock ;
and as soon as it was sprung -up,
it withered aw.ay, because it lack-
ed moisture.
7 And some fell among thorns ;
and .the thorns sprang .up with it,
and ;ohoked it.
8 And other fell ongood ground,
and sprang up, and bare fruit an
GREEK TEXT.
* SVVLOVTOS Be &x\
/cat r&v /cora irp\iv e
TTpps avTov, etvre di.a irapa.-
'E.^ri\6sv 6 (TTTtipcov
TOV fTTreipai TOV auropov avrov-
/cat eV ra> p-7reipeii> OLVTOV, o jj.ev
errea.e Trapa rrjv oSov, /cat /care-
./cat TO Treraz/a TOV
ovpavpj
TpOV
Kal (f)Vv
avrp.
KCU
,Sia TO
7 KCU Zrepov erre-
cr.i> ev
TG>V ,aKQ,v t )V) .KCU
<rvjJ.(j)Vi(ra.[..ai OKavOcu. ajrlirvL^av
/cat ereppv ejr.e<rei> eVt
TTJV ayadrjv, /cat (j)vev
avrp.
TTJV
REVISED VERSION.
when a great crowd "was as-
sembling and ".those "from .the
cities were coming to him, he
spoke by ,a parable : "The sower
went out to sow his seed ; and
as he sowed, some fell by the
way-side ; and it was trodden
down, and the birds of the air
devoured it. And some fell on
; pthe rock ; and 'when it sprung
up, it withered away, 'because
it had no moisture. And some
fell among "the thorns; and the
thorns springing up with it
choked it. And <spme fell .?into
the good ground, and "spring-
Dick., M. Robinson (Lex.) : "Participle, as substantive, things
present, things in hand, to any one, possessions."
i " .was assembling^; " ovviovtos. M. Bretsch. (in verbo],
" congregor, comi.enip ; " Liddell, " to go, .or come together, hence
to assemble." Camp, renders this word by " assemble." S. Fr.,
" s'assemblait."
P " those were coming ; " paivlxeito.geyofievcov. M. The
participial construction is adopted by Thorn., Camp., Wakefield,
Dick.
" -from the cities ; " xara it61.iv. Kend., M., Sharpe (" of
the cities"), Camp, ("out of the cities"). Vulg., "de civitati-
bus;" Castal.,-"ex oppidis;" >De Wette, " aus den Stadten."
See v. 1, note c.
"The sower;" o OTtd^tav. Thomson, Sharpe, Campbell,
Dickinson, Norton, Kendrick, M., Thelwall. De Wette, "der
Samann ; " S. Fr., " le semeur ; " Iber., " el sembrador ; " Ital.,
" il seminatore." Heb. N. T., yyn. Beza, " quidam sator ; "
Castalid, " sator quidam."
P " the , rock ;" .Trjv.aer^av. .Kend., ^"esley, Sharpe, Scarlett,
Wakefieid, Angus, Thelwall, M. Luther, " auf den Fels ; " De
"Wette, " auf den Felsen ; " S. French." le rocher ; ," Iberian, ".la
rpca ; " Diodati, " la.pietra ; " Ital., " sullp scpguo." As there is
a marked distinction .between the places .where the seed fell,
"rpek," "thorns,", and "good ground," the article. js.prefixed to
each of the Greek words to render this distinction prominent.
Hence the articles shpuld be retained, in each case.
5 " when it sprung up ; " .yvsv. Sharpe. -This 2nd apr. part,
though, of the, passive for-m (as if from.yiv/ii), is. active. intransitive
in its force, to, spring, up, to grow. Bob. (Lex.), Liddell. .Iber.,
"habiendp nacido." The phrase ".as. soon, as it. was sprung up"
is inaccurate,. as, it introduces fhe idea that <Ae.wiVienng.occurred
ft the very time, when the springing up.took place. If the parti-
cipial construction is adopted, then " having sprung up " (like -the
Iber.) would be appropriate.
' "because it had .no moisture;" Sta ro fir; fyttv jxftaSa.
Penn, M., Scarlett, Angus ("had not"). Iber., "por causa.de
no tener humedad ; " Span., " porque .no tenia humor ; " Diodati
and Ital, "perciocche non aveva iimore;" De Wette, " well ea
keine Feuchtigkeit hatte."
"the ; thorns ; " teSv axv&div. Kendrick, Penn, Wakefieid,
Gray (note on Angus), M., Thelwall. Belgic, " de doornen;?'
Luther and De Wette, "die Dornen;!' ; G. and S. Fr., " des
epines ; " Iberian, " Ips espinps ; " Diodati and Ital., " le .spine."
For/the use of the .article see.v. 6, .note.
' " some ; " eteqov. ,So in vv. 6, 7. "Other," without a sub-
stantive expressed, violates the usage of our language. "JEre^ov
should .be rendered uniformly in vv. 6, 7, and .8. As an alterna-
tive rendering in these three instances I suggest " another part ; "
feefos being supposed to be understood. So Scarlett. The
change may .perhaps, be too unimportant to demand attention.
. "into." Instead of tnl ..of the Textus JReceptus, -Griesbach,
Tittmann, Bloomf., : Lachmann, Tiseh., Knapp, JTheile .have sis.
Schott says: "Pro vulgari Jwl.ante r^v yijv (ex Matt. 13.: 8)
cum.Griesb. aliisque auctoritate .plnrimorum.cdd. ; (10.tinc.) dedi-
mus els." The weight of testimony is.decidedly in.fav.pr of sis.
A similar use of sis occurs eh. 14 : 10, .ito$ev9jEls .av.ansaov sis
rov epxarov tonov. So (parallel) Mark 4 : 8, .'sjteaev eis rrjv
yrjv ,ir,v xalriv. .In the passage under consideration, the S. Fr-
has " daps la bonne terre." Angus " into .the good ground."
SO.M. '" ' ' -.. '. -
r ".the good ground ; " rjjv .y.ijv ,tqv nyv.&Tiv. F^nd., AngflS,
Penn, Wakefieid, .M., Thelwall. .Belg., '" ^e gpedt aarde ;'" Dp
Wette, " das ,g.ute .Land ;" .S.,Er.,' la ; .bpnne .terre.; " Ital., ",sul
buon terreno." .See v. 6,. note.
w " springing up ;" ,yruev. .M., Kend. Belg., ," ppgewesschen
82
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VIII.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
hundredfold. And when lie had
said these things, he cried, He
that hath ears to hear, let him
hear.
9 And his disciples asked him,
saying, What might this parable
be?
10 And he said, Unto yon it is
given to know the mysteries of the
kingdom of God : but to others in
parables ; that seeing they might
not see, and hearing they might
not understand.
11 Now the parable is this :
The seed is the word of God.
12 Those by the way-side, are
they that hear ; then cometh the
devil, and taketh away the word
GREEK TEXT.
etroiTjcre Kaprrov
criova,. Tavra. Aeyaw
'0 e~)(cav cora arcoveiv
9 *E7rripa>Toov 8e avrov O'L
ral avrov, Aeyoj/re?, Tis ei?) "f]
irapafioXr] CWTTJ ; 10 'O Se elirev,
' Y[uv SeSorai yvrnvai TO. fj.v(TTr)-
pia TTjy /SacriAe/a? rod Oeov-
roty e AoiTTOty ev TrapafioXais,
iva /3Xe7rovTe? firj fiXeiraxn, KCU
$ pJfj (TVVLSxTLV. 11 "jE(TTl
17 7ra/>a/3oA?7' 6 cnropos
(rr\v o Xoyog TOV Oeov- 12 ol
Se Trapu, rrjv o8ov flcrlv ol CCKOU-
ovres, eira l^erat 6 &a/3oAoy
REVISED VERSION.
ing up, bore fruit a hundred-
fold. And ^having said these
things, y he called out, He who
hath ears to hear, let him hear.
And his disciples asked him, 9
saying, What 'may this parable
mean? And he said, To you 10
it is given to know 'the secrets
of the kingdom of God : but
b to the rest I speak in parables ;
that seeing d they may not see,
and hearing 'they may not un-
derstand. Now the parable is n
this : The seed is the word of
God. Those by the way-side, 12
are they who hear ; then com-
eth the devil and taketh away
zijnde ; " De Wette, " aufgewachsen." The participial form is
concise, and most forcible.
* " having said ; " l&ytov. Thorn., Scarlett, Camp., M., Mmv
dock, Norton ("having spoken"), Dick, ("having uttered").
The participial construction is employed by Wesley, Wakef., and
Thelwall. Belg., " zeggende ; " G. Fr., " en disant ; " S. Fr., " en
parlant-; " Iber., " diciendo ; " Diodati, " dicendo."
i " he called out ; " lytovt*. Angus, M. Kobinson (Lex., in
verbo), " to call, to call out. to any one ; " Bretsch., " clamo, voci-
feror." This word occurs forty-two times in the N. Test. In
twelve of these, it is applied to the crowing of a cock. In the
remaining thirty, it is rendered in the E. V. by " call " in twenty-
five instances. As xqa^co, y.^avyu^co, fioaco, and several other
words must be rendered by " cry," or " cry out," it is desirable to
distinguish ytavlco in all cases (where consistency will permit) by
an appropriate equivalent. In ch. 16 : 24, and 23 : 46, where
it is employed in cases of distress, " cry out " is a proper ren-
dering.
* "may mean?" eiy. Scarlett. Sehott, " cujusnam signifi-
cationis esset iiaec similitude ? " This optative should, in conformi-
ty with our ss loquendi, be rendered with the auxiliary " may,"
rather thaa "might." So Sharpe. On the particular force of
elpi, in this and similar cases, see ch. 1 : 29, note, where Kuinoel
has " quid sibi hsec salutatio vellet ? " Norton renders / here
by " the meaning " (of this parable).
" " the secrets ; " -co. /ivar^ia. Kendrick, Thorn., Campbell,
Dickinson. Castalio, " arcana." Kuinrel on the parallel, Matt.
13 : 11, remarks : "Mvar^iov dicitur res arcana quselibet, homi-
nibus hactenus ignota. Quonam sensu imm^iov loco quoque
capiendum sit, definire debet orationis series. Sic h. 1. ftvartfyea
rfjs fiaodctas taiv ovgavaiv sunt doctrinas hactenus arcanas et
incognita?, regni Messiani naturam et indolem, costumque Christia-
norum spectantes." I quote the following note from the Eevision
of Mark's gospel (published by the Am. B. U.) ch. 4 : 11.
" Bob. (jcuaTriqiov) : ' In N. Test, spoken of facts, doctrines,
and principles, not fully revealed. Specially, Hit mystery of the
gospel, the Christian dispensation, as having been long hidden
and first revealed in later times.' The signification of the word
as employed in this passage, may be seen by reference to Coloss.
1 : 26, 27. The word should be translated, not transferred, in all
cases. Every truth contained in the Scriptures, was a mystery,
or secret to man, previous to the period, when it was revealed.
' Mystery,' in biblical usage, does not signify something which is
incomprehensible in its own nature, but simply what was unre-
vealed. See 1 Cor. 2 : 7-13, aud 15 : 51. Rom. 16 : 25, 26. See
an able examination of this word in G-. Campbell's Prelim. Dis-
sertations, Dissert. IX."
b "to the rest ; " -tots hontoTs. Penn, "Wakefield, Kendrick,
Angus, M., Thelwall, Eheims. Beza, " reliquis." Heb. N. T.,
tji'ixewi. Syr., j^j^j (Tremell., "his qui reliqui surit"). So
(B. V.) Matt. 27 : 49. Lnke 12 : 26 ; 24 : 9. Acts 2 : 37;
27 : 44. 1 Cor. 7 : 12. De Wette, " den ubrigen ; " Iber., " a los
demas."
c " I speak." Wakefield, M. It is necessary to supply the
ellipsis by some supplementary phrase. This one is deemed
most concise and appropriate. See Matt. 13 : 10, 4i<xii tv Ttapa-
jSoAaZs bakers avrois ; (B. V.), " Why speakest thou to them in
parables?" Luke 12 :41, Rvqie, TC^OS riftas TIJV itapa/}oi>p>
cavtijv feyecs, n xa.1 JT^OS TtajTag; (K. V.), " Lord, speakest
thou this parable unto us, or even to all ? " This supplement is
found in Belgic, " spreek ik ; " Iberian, " haMo." Syriac, j^o]i^2
("dicitur").
d " they may not see ; " foj pUntooi. Camp., Sharpe, Kend.,
M., Murdock, Rheims. Iber., " no vean ; " Vulg., Mont., Eras.,
Beza, Castal., Sehott, " non videant." As " I speak " (Afyco sub-
auditur,) is in the present .tense, " may " is the proper auxiliary.
" they way not understand ; " /ur; awtaatv. Camp., Sharpe,
Kend., M., Murdock. Iber., " no entiendan ; " Vulg., Montanus,
Eras., Beza, Castalio, Sehott, " intelligant." See last note.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VIII.
83
KING JAMES' VERSION.
out of their hearts, lest: they
should believe and be saved.
13 They on the rock are
which, when they hear, receive
the word with joy ; and these
have no root, which for a while
believe, and in time of temptation
fall away.
14 And that which fell among
thorns, are they, which, when they
have heard, go forth, and are
choked with cares, and riches,
and pleasures of this life, and
bring no fruit to perfection.
15 But that on the good ground
are they, which in an honest and
good heart, having heard the word,
GREEK TEXT.
KCU cupei TOV Xoyov airo TTJS Kctp-
8ia? O.VTUJV, 'iva fj.r/ Trtoreutraz/re?
crcodtao-tv. 13 Oi <5e eVt Trjf Tre-
Tpas, ot oTav aKovcraxn, fiera
Capets SexpvTcu TOV Xoyov, KCU
ovTOi piav OVK )(ovcrt.v, ot rrpos
Kcupov TTicrTevova-i, KCU e.v Katp<
Tm/jaoyiou a(f)i<rTa.vTai. u TO Se
eh TO.! ct.Ka.v0af Trecrov, OUTOL eicriv
oi dfcovcrai'Tf?, KCU VTTO fji.eptfj.vaiv
KOL TrXovTOv KCU. r/8ova)v TOV jSt'ou
7TOp6VOfJ.VOl CrVfJ.TrVl'yOVTCU, KCU.
ov TeAeGT<j&o/5o>0Y. 15 TO Se v
Trj KaXrj yfj, OVTOL clcriv arrives
Ka\rj Kcti ayady O.KOV-
REVISED VERSION.
the word f from their hearts,
lest they should believe and be
saved. Those on the rock are. 13
they, who, when they hear, re-
ceive the word with joy ; s and
yet these have no root, who for
a while believe, and in time
h of trial fall away. And that 14
which fell among 'the thorns
are 'those, who, 'having heard,
go forth, and are choked 'by
"anxieties, and riches, and
pleasures "of life, and bring no
fruit to perfection. But that 15
"in the good ground are those,
who, in an honest and good
heart, having heard the word,
"from;" &nb. Kend., Angus, Dick., Norton, M. Vulg.
Mont., Erasmus, " de ; " G. and S. Fr., " de ; " Span, and Iber.
" de ; " Diodati and Ital., " de ; " Dan., " af." This is the proper
signification of anb. A few cases occur, where, from the influ-
ence of the Hebrew ft, the Hellenistic writers nse axb as
equivalent to l. This passage is not one of that kind. See
Kob. (Lex., anb).
E " and yet ; " v.at. There is an obvious antithesis here. The
thought is, " though they receive the word with joy, still, as they
have no root, they wither away." The note (i) on the Eevision
of Mark 4 : 31 is in point. " This conjunction (xal) sometimes
closely connects two opposed clauses. Hoogeveen (xal). It thus
performs the office of ftsv and Se, as in John 9 : 30, ow o^
mod-ev earl, xal avecpj-e, a. r. L, E. V., ' ye know not whence he
is, and yet he hath opened,' etc. In cases of this kind, the con-
junction has not, in itself, an adversative sense, but, as Hoogeveen
remarks, takes it from the nature of the opposed clauses, or mem-
bers. Kobirison (xal). Kuincel- (in loco) : 'Kal h. 1. valet sed
tamen.' "
k " of trial ; " ateipaofiov. Scarlett, Camp., Norton, Wakef.,
Kendrick. De Wette, " Versuchung." Rob. (Lex., in verbo) :
" Trial, proof, a putting to the test ; only of persons." See ch.
4 : 2, note.
1 " the thorns ; " els ras o.xavd'as, Wesley, Sharpe, Penn,
Walcefield, Kendrick, M. Belg., " de doornen ; " Luther and De
Wette, " die Dornen ; " S.Pr. and De Sacy, " les epines ; " Iber.,
los espinos ; " Diodati and Ital., " le spine," As there is an
obvious reference to raw axav&aiv, in v. 7, the omission of the
article in the E. Y. (which follows Tyndale) is entirely incorrect.
See vv. 6, 7, notes.
1 " those." In most cases (where there would not be a repeti-
tion of "those"), the proper antecedent to "who" is "those."
In v. 12, as the repetition of "those" would otherwise occur,
" they " is employed. This principle is adopted throughout the
Eevision.
k " having heard ;" axovaavres. "Wesley, Sharpe, Campbell,
Kend., M. So the E. V. renders axovaavres in v. IS. G. Fr.,
" ayant onl ; " S. Fr., " ayant entendu ; " Iber., " habiendo vido ; "
Diodati, " hanno udito ; " Ital., " avendo udito."
i " by ; " vTtb. Sharpe, Norton, Dick., Kend., M., Murdock.
In using " with," the E. V. copies Tyndale.
m " anxieties ; " fiegtfivcor. Dickinson. De Sacy, " les solli
citudes ; " Iber., " los afanes ; " Diodati and Ital., " sollecitudini ; "
De Wette, " Sorgen ; " Vulg., Mont, Eras., " solicitudinibus." The
following note on this word occurs in the Revision of Mark 4 : 19 :
" This word is well defined by Robinson ' anxious thought,' as
dividing {ffe^m) up and distracting the mind. So the verb
fivaio , to be anxious, troubled, take anxious thought. In the
sense in which ' care ' is now used, ' men ' may have ' care,' with-
out ' anxiety.' All the duties of life demand ' care ' (as we now
employ the word), but ' anxiety ' is morally wrong. The antique
phrase ' carking care ' is an equivalent to fieglfiva, and expresses
the thought we now convey by ' anxiety.' Comp. Matt. 6 : 25.
Eras., Beza, ' solicitudines ; ' Bloomf. (N. T., on Matt. 13 : 22),
anxious care.' "
" " of life ; " -roil piov. The supplement this of the E. V. is
dropped by Sharpe, Penn, Scarlett, Camp., "Wakefield, Dickinson,
Kend., Angus, M. Green (Gram. N. Test. Dialect, p. 203, gv)
says : " The article is never used in the N. Test, as a demonstra-
tive or relative pronoun." The use of the article with {lion fall
under the principle of its employment with nouns, which are
abstracts, as in John 4 : 22, 17 acor^ta. Rom. II : 11. Eev.
7 : 10. 1 Cor. 15 : 21, 6 9'avaros. Gal. 2 : 5, TJJ iatorayfj.
tfatt. 11 : 19, fj aoyia.
" in ; " If. Norton, Angus, M., Tyndale, Cranmer, Genevan-
The E. T. renders this " on," as though the passage was like the
mrallel, Mark 4 : 20, Irii. ttfv yrjv. Belg., " in de goede aarde ; "
!ber., " en la buena tierra ; " Diodati, " nella buona terra."
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE.-CHAP. Till.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
seep it, and bring forth fruit with
patience.
16 No man when he hath light-
ed a candle, covereth it with a
vessel, or putteth it under a bed ;
but setteth it on a candlestick,
that they which enter in may see
the light.
17 For nothing is secret, that
shall not be made manifest ; nei-
GEEEK TEXT.
creci/re? rov Xoyov,
Koi Kapiro<f)opovo~iv &
16 Ov8ei? Se Xv%vov mj/as KOL-
XvTrrei avTov (ritevei, rj inroKarca
kXivrjs riffijcriv dXX' eirt Xv^vias
'iva ol l<nropfv6fjt.evoi
0t3y. 17 ov -yap ecrri
ov, b ov (frdvepov
rat' ovBf airoKpvfyov, b ov
EEVISED VEBSIOK.
keep it, and bear fruit
ly. 'No one 'having lighted 16
a lamp covereth with a : vessel,
or putteth it under a table-
seat, but serteth it on "a lamp-
stand, ihat those who enter in,
may see the light. For 'there IT
is nothing w hidden, which "will-
not become manifest, *nor z con-
f " steadily ; " ev vitoftovfj. The persons noticed in this verse,
are exhibited in contrast to those of v. 13, who, having no root,
for a while believe (itpbs xaiqov marevovoi), and " in time of
trial fall away." The seed springs up, and then withers away
(v. 6). On the contrary, those who receive in an honest and
good heart, having heard the word, keep it, and continue bearing
fruit. 'JSv vnoftovfj presents the idea of continuance, persever-
ance, constancy. Knincel : "Kal xaonoyogovotv lv vaoftovfj,
ita ut constanter fructus ferant." The phrase is rendered " with
perseverance " by Kend., "Wakef., "Wes., and M. S. Fr., " avec per-
severance ; " Ital., " con perseveranza ; " Sehott, " fructusque con-
sta'nter fernnt." 'Tnopovri is strictly distinguishable as an active
virtue from " long-suffering," fiavgofrvfiia (patient endurance).
use the word " steadily," as it presents the thought with exact-
ness, and is in harmony with our ttsus loquendi, while " with per-
severance " is not a iamiliar phrase. The adverbial sense of
with a dative often occurs in the N. Test. See Matt. 22 : 16.
Mark 9 : 1. Kav. 19 : 11. Webster defines " steadily," " with-
out wavering, inconstancy, or irregularity, without deviating."
Bloomfield (Annot.) : " The phrase lv vnoftovfj may be rendered
constanter."
4 "No one;" OvMs, Sharpe, Penn, Scarlett, Norton,
Wakef., Dick., Kend;, Thelwall, M. Bobinson (Lex., in verbo) :
"Absol. S3 siibst. no one."
* "having lighted ; " eyas. Wesley, Dickinson, Thelwall, M.
G. an3 S. Fr., " apres avoir allume ; " Iberian, " habiendo encen-
'
" a lamp ; " l.vy.vov. Thom., Sharpe, Penn, Scarlett, Camp.,
Norton, Wake, Dick., Angus, M'. Belg., " een kaarse ; " S. Fr.
and De Sacy, " uue lampe ; " Iber., " una larapara ; " Diodati and
ital., " una lampana ; " Vulg., Montanus, Erasmus, Beza, Sehott,
"lucernain." This word is improperly -rendered " candle " in the
E. V. Candles were unknown until long after the time of the
Saviour's advent.
" a table-seat ;" vUvqs. Bretsch. (in verbo, b) : " Dicitur
de lecto triciinari Mark 4 : 21 ; 7:4. Luc. B : 16. Ezek. 23 : 41."
In this last, the Sept. has xnl sxad-ov Irii xkivys iar^cafteytje, v.al
fQ<htea. xexoafirjjuevij npo ttpooconov mrirjs, " and satest on a
. cushioned table-seat, and before it was a table set out." The fol-
lowing is the note on Mark 4 : 21 (Revision), where this word
occurs: "The table-seat;" r^v tdivqv. Fritz., ' lecto triciinari.'
This -word, liere, designates the so/a, or seat, on which persons
reclined at meals. See Bbbirisbn. So it is used eh. 7 : 4, Luke'
8 : 16. The seat was cushioned, and usually contained three
persons. Trollope (Analecta,) remarks that * xkbij does riot
signify a bed, but a couch, on which they reclined at meals, and
which sebms to have been frequently used as a hiding place.'
Suetonius (Caligula) : ' Proripere se e strato sub lectum cbndere
solebat.' When this word is used for an article on which the
sick lay, as it is in a few instances, it probably refers to a mere
cushion, or stuffed quilt. Bedsteads are unknown in the East."
Hence it will be seen, that the rendering of the E. "V., " under
a bed," misleads common readers, who very naturally think of the
bed of the West, with its frame and furniture. Kuinod (on
Mark 4 : 21) : " Per Kiivrjv non lectus cubicularis, in quo segroti
et dormientes decumbunt, sed lectus triclinaris, in quo comedentes
ad mensem accumbere (avad.ivsaD'ai) solebant, intelligi debet, ut
VII : 4. Luc. 17 : 34."
u " a lamp-stand ; " iv/.vias. Sharpe, Bob. (Lex.). Liddell,
"lamp-stand." Ecclesiasticus 26 : 17, i.v%vos ly^.a.ftnitoi' tn\
Ivxvias ayiag. Sept., for hni'ja Exodus 25 : 31-33. Josephus,
Antiq., Ill : 6, \ 7, xara ityooioitov Se rijs c^ans^rjs, ry rigos
fieai]ft/3olai> 'lOTarai l.vypia. ex zgvoov x^iavevfteinj Siaxcvos
. i. )..
T " there." This adverb (which, in this use, is merely euphonic)
is demanded by our urns loquendi.
* "hidden ;" stfvxiw. Angus, Kend., Thorn:, M. This, and
not " hid," is the preterit participle of the verb '' to hide." The
E. V. uses both " hid," and " hidden," apparently without any
distinction. In this, it followed the earlier Eng. versions. In all
cases, the orthography of the participle should distinguish it from!
the verb.
1 " will not become manifest ;" ov yaveqbv yenjaerdi. Penn,
Scarlett, Kendrick, Thelwall. Mont., " non manifestum fiet ; "
Belgic, " dat niet openbaar enzal worden ; " De Wette, " was
nicht offenbar werden wird." The radical sense of this verb
(= fieri, to come to be) is appropriate here.
J " nor ; " ove. Scarlett, Sharpe, Camp., Norton, Wakef.,
Dick., Kend., M. In the last member of a negative sentence,
neither " is improperly used for " nor," as the first negative be-
.ongs only to the first clause. See Webster (Diet., art. "neither").
Bob. (Lex., in verbo). So (E. T.) ch. 6 : 20 ; 10 : 24.
' " nor concealed ; " ovSe &n6^vy6v. (See last note for
THE tfOSPBL AGCOK0IN& TO LffEfi. 0SAF-- VIIL
KING JAKES' VERSION.
ther any thing hid, tliat shall not
be known, and come abroad.
18 Take heed therefore how ye
hear : for whosoever hath, to him
shall be given ; and whosoever
hath not, from him shall be taken
even that which he seemeth to
have.
19 Then caine to him his mother
and his brethren, and could not
come at him for the press.
20 And it was told him by
certain, which said, Thy mother
and thy brethren stand without,
desiring to see thee.
21 And he answered and said
unto them, My mother and my
brethren are these which hear the
word of God, and do ik
22 Now it came to pass on a
certain day, that he went into a
ship with. Ms disciples : and he
said unto them, Let us go over
unto the other side of the lake.
And they launched forth.
23 But as they sailed, lie fell
aov
GREEK 1EXT.
crdrfcretai /cat ety (f>avepov e\0rj.
18 fiheiifeff ovv Tf&s a/couere- oy
yap av fXO,- dodrjo-efat. aufar
. \ ft * * \ V \Ac> 4 "
Kott OS av fir) ex#j /cat o oo/cet
, apdrjcfeTai aft' avrov.
10 -r-r ' *\ v ^ * ^
Jlapfyevovto de irpos avrov
fj fJt-r/frjp /cat ol aSe\(f)ol avrov,
/cat OVK ySvtfttvfo &vvftr)(ei1r avfcp
8ta tov ox\ov. 20 /cat
avTijij Xeyovtcav, 'If
/cat ol a5eA0ot crov
cfe deAovres. 21 'O
8k dirokpideis e'nre irpos avrovs,
fiov /cat aSe\<poi fj-ov ov-
) ol tov Xoyov TOV Oeov
otKOvovte? KOI iroiovvres O.VTOV.
22 7?" \ > ' > -
Jvat eyei/ero ev /ua TCOV
r]fj.epv i /cat awroy evefBrj ty
irKolov /cat ol fj.adr/fai avrov,
/cat etTfe Tfpof avfov?, dceAdafjiev
els TO irepav rrjs XifJLvrjs' /cat
23 e av-
toi
BEflSED VERSION.
cealed, which will not be known
and -come to light. Take heed, 18
therefore, how ye hear ; for
whoever hath, to him will be
given ; and whoever hath not,
from him will be taken even
b what lie seemeth to have.
'Now Ms mother and his'breth- 19
ren came to him, and "could
not get near him 'on account
of the crowd. And it was told 20
him f by some, who said, Thy
mother and thy brethren stand
without, desiring to see thee.
And he. answering, said to 21
them, My mother and my breth-
ren are these who hear the
word of God, and do it. And 22
it came to pass r on a certain
day, that h he entered into a
ship with his. disciples : and he
said to them, 'Let us pass over
to the other side of the lake :
and 'they put off. And as they 23
, Wesley, Camp;, Kend., M. Tulg., Mont., Eras., Schott,
" abscondituin ; " De Wette, " versteckt ; " Iber., " escondito."
* " come to light ; " els cpavegbv el&ji. Tyndale, Oranmer,
Genevan, Wesley, Penn, iSend., Angus, M. Of the varied ren-
derings given to these words, that furnished by the earlier English
versions is idiomatic, forcible, and exact in presenting the thought.
It has the great advantage of being a conversational phrase, intelli-
gible to all who speak English;
" " what ; " S. Wesley, Scarlett, Sharpe, Norton, Wakefield,
Kend. Vulg., Eras., Beza, Schott, " quod."
" Now ; " $s. JBob. (Lex., Sty : " Coiitinuative, but, now,
fwtlier, or the like." Wakef. has "how." "Then" is under-
stood by English readers to mark a point of time, tune temporis,
which is not the thought presented in the text. We often use
" now " especially at the beginning of a sentence as a mere con-
nective, and this is the force of s, in the passage before us.
a " could not get near him ; " ovx ySvvavio awvuf.tscv avitf.
Thorn., Scarlett, Camp., Norton (" could not get to him"), Kend.
Heb. N. Test., vis fiifisi ^bs >.
"on account of the crowd ; " Sia. tbv o%).ov. Vulg-., Eras.,
Oastalio, " pras turba ; " Montanns and Beza, " propter turbam ; "
Belg., " van wegen de schare ; " G. and S. French, " a cause de la
foule." See ch. 3 : 7, note.
' " by some." Wesley^ Scarlett, Sharpe, Norton. Beza and
Schott, "nonnullis;" Belg., "van eenige;" Diodati, " alcuni."
Bloomf. (in loco) : " Supply rtvcov, or avrcov." Kuinosl : " Sub-
audiendum iivmv, ut sit genitivus absolute."
E As an alternative rendering of lv ftia itav fjfie^div,, " on one
of the days." So Sharpe, Angus. De Wette, " an einem der
Tage ; " Belg., " in een van die dagen ; " Iber., " en uno de los
dias." The propriety of rendering ttov by the demonstrative
pronoun " of those," as has been done in some versions, is question-
able, as in strictness, the article is never used for a demonstra*
tive. See Green's Grammar, p. 203* Some commentators (e. g.
Kuincel) have maintained that in a few cases we may take the
liberty of rendering the article as a demonstrative, for the sake
of perspicuity. If this position be well taken, it is evident, that
much caution should be employed, when we take a liberty of thia
kind.
h " he entered ; " ivs/St;. Dick., M. Iber., " entraron el." Bob.
(Lex;, in verbo), " to enter" See ch. 5 : 3, note.
1 " Let us pass over ; " ^itf.&cojucv. So, same word (E. T.),
Mark 4 : 35. Rob. (Lex., in verbo) : " Spoken of those who pass
over a river, lake, sea ; Mark 4 : 35, Luke 8 : 22." Bretsch. :
"Dicitur de trajicientibus ; trajicio." Hesychius (quoted by
Bretsch.), " ditt&cofiev, 3iaxeqao<o ( uev." By copying 1 Tyndale,
the E. V. has rendered this word in the first instance, "Let us
pass over," and in the second, " Let us go over."
' "they put off;" avfix&rjoav. Norton, Angus. Bretsch,
86
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VIII.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
asleep : and there came down a
storm of wind on the lake ; and
they were filled with water, and
were in jeopardy.
24 And they came to Mm, and
awoke him, saying, Master, Mas-
ter, we perish. Then he arose,
and rebuked the wind, and the
raging of the water : and they
ceased, and there was a calm.
25 And he said unto them,
"Where is your faith ? And they
being afraid, wondered, saying
one to another, What manner of
man is this! for he commandeth
even the winds and water, and
they obey him.
26 And they arrived at the
country of the Gadarenes, which
is over against Galilee.
27 And when he went forth to
GREEK TEXT.
rG>v a.(f)virv(acre. KCU /care/3^ Aat-
Xaty avefj.ov ay rr/v \i/ui.i>r]i> ) /cat
crweTrXrjpovvTO, KOL iKivSvvtvov.
24 TrpocreXdovTe? Be 8iqyeipa.v ay-
TQV, Xeyovres, 'jETnaraYa, erri-
arara, aTroXAvfteda. ' 5e eyep-
TOV vSarog- KCU. eVau-
craz/ro, KO.I eyeWro -yaXqvr}.
25 ewre Se avrois, Hov tarnv 97
Tr/crn? vfj.5>v> ^o^r/devres Sf
t9avfj.a<rai', Xeyovres irpos aXXrj-
Aouy, Tis apa OVTOS farTiv, on
KCU TOIS avejttot? eVicrTao'o-ei KCU
TOJ vBan, KCU viraKOVovcrw avrco;
26 KAI KaT67rAeu(rai> ety TTJV
Xcapav TCOV raSapr/vtav,
<TTLV avrnrepav TTJ
5> N * n t \ \
oe avrca tiri rrjv
27
KEVISED VERSION.
were sailing, he fell asleep : and
there came down *a storm of
wind on the lake, and 'they
were filling with water, and
"were in danger. And they 24
came to n him and awoke him,
saying, Master! 3f aster! we
are perishing. Then he rose,
and rebuked the wind and the
raging of the water ; and they
ceased, and there was a calm.
And he said to them, Where is 25
your faith ? And being afraid,
pthey wondered, saying to one
another, Who then is this ? for
he commandeth even the winds
and the water, and they obey
him. And "they sailed to the 26
country of the Gadarenes, which
is over against Galilee. And 27
as r he came 'out to land, <a cer-
(Lex.) :- " Utuntur Gneci hoc composite ubique, cum motum
quendam ex inferior! in altiorem locum indicave volunt, ubi Latini
vel simplici cZuco, vel compositis educo, adduco, abduco utuntur
LXX. pro fbsr\, ascendere fecit. Qvayctv trjv vavv, navem in
maris altitudinein (surgere enim videntur aquae, Luke 5 : 4, Job
26,: 12) dueere, navem solvere, et avayea&ca, intellige sv Ttiol
ut plene legitur, Act. 28 : 11." As a technical term, " to put
off" is an accurate equivalent of the verb. " To launch" is at
present restricted unless in poetry to the process of removing
a vessel into the water from the spot where it was constructed.
Hob. (Lex.), " to put out to sea." De Wette, " sie stiessen ab ;"
Luther, " sie stiessen vom Lande." Bloomfield (Annot.) : " This
(avtfx&qaav, supply vavv) is a nautical term, and signifies to
loose cables, weigh anchor^ move to seaward."
1 " a storm of wind ; " icaiay. The note on Revision of
Mark 4 : 37 is repeated here, as applicable to ),az).ay.
" Though I retain the rendering of the E. VJ, it is not without
a conviction that the sense of ' storm ' has changed since 1611, so
that we now apply it to a fall of rain, hail, or snow. I, therefore,
suggest ' gust ' as a substitute. See Webster on ' storm.' The
definition of ' gust,' ' a blast of wind of short duration,' presents
the idea here conveyed by lazlay."
i " they were filling ; " avvenbjpovwo. Scarlett, Sharpe, Nor-
ton (" was filling "), "Wakefield, Kendrick, Angus, M. Vulgate,
Mont, Beza, Erasmus, " complebantur." The usual force of the
imperfect should be retained, in rendering it by what is termed
' the progressive form " of the Eng. verb.
m " were in danger ; " ixivtivvevov. Thomson, Wesley, Penn,
Sharpe, Norton, Wakefield. Eob. (Lex, in verbo), "to be in
danger." Belg., " waren in nood ; " S. Fr., " etaient en peril ; "
Iber., " estaban en peligro." "Jeopardy" is much less familiar
than " danger." But for the fact that " endanger " is obsolescent,
I should prefer " were endangered." This verb occurs (E. V.)
Eecles. 10 : 9, where the Sept. has a%K,cov gvla y.tvStvevoei lv
avroTs, " he that cleaveth wood will be endangered by it." The
verb irb which occurs in Eecles. 10 : 9, is employed in rendering
txivSvirsvov, in the Heb. Test, sus&i So Camp.
" " him." As there is nothing expressed in the test, answering
to this pronoun, it should have been italicized in the E. V., as a
supplement.
" we are perishing ; " aitottxfit&a. Penn, Scarlett, Norton,
Dick. This rendering meets the condition of exactness, as it cor-
responds perfectly with the present tense of the Greek.
P " they wondered ; " e&avftaaar. Sharpe, M. There is no
necessity for separating the pronoun from its ;verb here. The
early English versions indicate clearly the influence of the Latin
order of the Vulgate, in their arrangements of words.
' " they sailed ; " xazenievaav. Tyndale, Cranmer, Genevan,
Wesley, Sharpe, ' Norton, Dick. (Wakef., "sailed down to.")
Rob. (Lex., in verbo), " to sail to any place ; " Liddell, " to sail
from the high sea to shore ; " Bretsch., " xa.ia.7tl.eca> i. e. itUa>
Kara %a>f>a.v, navigo ad locum." Vulg., Montanus, Eras., Beza,
Castal., Schott, " navigaverunt (or, contrasted, navigarunt) ; "
De Wette, " sie fuhren an ; " Luther, " sie schifiten fort ; " G. Fr.,
"ils naviguerent ;" Iberian and Spanish, "navegaron ;" Diodati,
" navigarono."
' " as he came ; " It-el&ovti avry. 'E\sk&dvit. avrca, in the
parallel, Mark 5 : 2, is rendered in E. V., " when he was come
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VIII.
87
KING JAMES' VERSION.
land, there met him out of the
city a certain man, which had
devils long time, and ware no
clothes, neither abode in any
house, but in the tombs.
28 When he saw Jesus, he cried
out, and fell down before him,
and with a loud voice said, What
have I to do with thee, Jesus,
thm son of God most high? I
beseech thee, torment me not.
29 (For he had commanded the
unclean spirit to come out of the
man. For oftentimes it had caught
him : and he was kept bound with
GREEK TEXT.
avTcp avrjp rty e/c Trjs
TroAe&jy, oy et^e Saifiovta e/c XP~
vcav LKavSiv, /cat ip.a.Tiov OVK
eve8i8va~KTO } /cat eV OLKLO. OVK
GfJ-evev, aAA' eV roty p.vf]fj.ao-LV.
28 s> v s^ x ' r - v '
foftw oe TOJ> lr)o-ovv } /cat ava-
Kpagaf) 7r/jpcre7re<rer avrcS, /cat
(j)coufj /JLeyaXy elm, Tl e/iot /cat
'lycrov, vie TOV Otov TOV
Vo/iat crou, /i^ ^e
29 JZa/OT^yyetAe ya/>
ro) Trz/eu/xari rco aKadapTa> e^eA-
^etj/ GOTO roO avdpatirov TroAAoFy
yap xpovois crw^jOvra/cet avTov,
REVISED VERSION.
tain man "of .the city met him,
"who had had demons w for a
long time, and "wore no clothes,
y nor remained in a house, but
'dwelt in the tombs. And "see- 28
ing Jesus, he cried out, and fell
down before him, and "said,
with a loud voice, What have
I to do with thee, Jesus, Son
"of the Most High God ? I be-
seech thee, torment me not.
(For he had commanded the 29
unclean spirit to come out of
the man. For 'it had seized
him f during a long time, and
" of the city ; " fe -rrjs nofacos. Thorn., Camp., Wakefield,
Dick., Bloomf. (Annot.), Angus, M., Norton ("of the town"),
Murdock. Hob. (Lex.) notices one of the uses of the preposition
&, thus : " (Spoken) of the place, circle, community, whence one
is, where one resides. Luke 8 : 27." Common readers are mis-
led by the language of the E. V., " out of the city," inasmuch as
that phrase, according to our usus loquendi, implies that the
demoniac had left the city, directly before he met the Saviour,
while, in fact, his abode was in the tombs. Compare Mark 5 : 2,
xal et-tAfrovTi avtry lx TOV nl-oiov, tv&ecos amjvrijoev avtco Ix
rcav fivr)[iei<ov av&^tanos Iv itvevfitni axa&a^riy, os rrjv xaroi-
y.tjatv e1%sv Iv rots fivq/ieiois. The man, therefore, came not
" out of the city," but " out of the tombs," when he met Christ.
Kuincel: "'Avf t f> its lx rrjs jroAeos, homo quidam ex ilia urbe
oriundus, non enim ex urbe homo ille Jesu occurrebat, nee in ea
tune temporis habita, nam v. extr. legitur, Iv olxia ovx epevev."
1 Maccabees 6 : 3, eyvcaa&tj 6 ioyog lols IK rijs Ttohews.
" " who had had ; " os il%e. Angus. The imperfect here has
the force of the pluperfect. Pechy (on Angus' Version). Troll.
(Gram., \ 50, p. 132). See ch. 5 : 25, note.
w "for a long time;" Ix x?6vcov ixavcav. Kendrick, Penn,
Sharpe, Norton. The phrase in the E. V. is a violation of our
Wiom. :jg ,
1 " wore ; " IveStSvaxero. Thorn., Wesley, Scarlett, Camp.,
Dick., Norton, Kend., M.
* " nor." See v. 17, note. So Penn, Scarlett, Sharpe, Kend.
1 "dwelt;" tyevsv. Penn, Norton ("did not dwell"). So
(E. V.) John 1 : 38, 39 (Gr. 3D, 40) ; 6 : 56 ; 14 : 10, 17. Acts
28:16. 1 Jno. 3 : 17, etc. "Abide," " abode," etc., are, to say
the least, obsolescent. As an alternative, " remained." So Kend.
Kuincel (in loco) : "Mivsiv, h. 1. habitare, ut Joh. 1 : 39."
" seeing ; " iScav. Thorn., Wesley, Scarlett, Wakef., Dick.,
Penn, Kend., Thelwall, M.
b " said, -with a loud voice ; " ycovfj fteyd).^ elite. This is the
natural order of the sentence in our language. So Wesley,
Wakef., Dick., Penn, Kend., Murdock, M.
* The supplement " thou " of the E. T. is superfluous. It is
omitted by Kend., Sharpe, Camp., Wakef., Dickinson, Norton,
Angus. It was copied from Cranmer'a Version. Wiclif, Tynd.,
and Genevan have "the Son." It is probable that the trans-
lators of Cranmer followed Luther, whose text is, " du Sohn
Gottes des Allerhochsten." De Wette has dropped du. No
pronoun is employed in G-. or S. Fr., Span.. Iber., Diodati, Ital.,
Dan., Heb. N. Test., Syr.
d "of the Most High God?" rov Ocov iov vyiorov ; So
(E. V.) Acts 16 : 17. Heb. 7 : 1. Thorn., Wesley, Sharpe,
Camp., Wakef., Dick., Norton, Kend , M. The rendering should
be uniform. See ch. 1 : 32, note. Heb. N. Test., piV:* is.
e " it had seized ; " ya$ avvtj^nay.ei. The E. V. has followed
the incorrect rendering of Tyndale, who rendered notto?! %po-
vois as though it had been equivalent to nof.My.ts, " often," or, in
earlier parlance, " oftentimes." Hence the adverb was placed
before the verb and its nominative. This verb (equivalent to the
Latin corripio, to seize, or grasp together, grasp hastily, etc.) is
rendered " seize " by Scarlett, Wakefield, Dick., Penn, Camp., M.
This is preferable to " caught," as it conforms to present usage.
We say, " a man is seized with insanity," " seized with spasms,"
or, " a fever seized him." Eras., Beza, Schott, " corripuerat."
f "during a long time;" noUois %$6vois. Norton, M.,
Wakef. (" for a long time "), Scarlett (" a long time ") . Kuincel :
oUois yc %(>ovois awtjonnxsi avrov, inde a pluribus autem
annis eum corripuerat. Uo^ois y.oovots Grotius idem putat
out ; " Eevision of Mark, " as he came out." Eobinson (Lex., in
verbo) : " The forms from tt&erv more frequently signify to come,
BO that e. g. rfl&sv is rarely used of one who goes away from a
place." Camp, " being come."
" out ; " Int. This is adopted rather than " forth," as much
more familiar, from constant use. So Angus, M.
t " a certain man ; " ait/jo TIC. This is the natural order in
our language. Camp., Dick., Scarlett, M., Kend. Wakef.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. Till.
KING JAMES VERSION.
chains, and in fetters ; and he
brake the bands, and was driven
of the devil in the wilderness.)
30 And Jesus asked him, say-
ing, What is thy name ? And he
said, Legion : because many devils
were entered into him.
31 And they besought him, that
he would not command them to
go out into the deep.
32 And there was there an^
herd of many swine feeding on
GREEK TEXT.
/ecu cSep-fJieiTo aXvcrefrt /cat
<j&uAacrcro/zei/os', KCU
TO. eayza yXavvero viro rov 8ai-
t \ > / an >
fiovof eis ray eprj/Jiovp. ejrr)-
pcoTrjcre 8e avrov 6 'lycrovs, Ae-
ycov, Ti (rot e<TTiv ovo/j,a; 'O 8e
e'nre, Atyecov on SaijAovia iroX-
Xa elcrrjXdev elf O.VTOV.
-ptKoXei avrov Iva. fjJrj
avrots elf rr/v oySucrcroy
" R2 *? ^v J ~ > f \
iv. rjv oe e/cei ayeArj
3I
KCU
REVISED VERSION.
?he was bound with chains and
fetters, and *guarded ; and
'breaking the bands, he was
driven by the demon 'into the
deserts.) And Jesus asked him, so
saying, What is thy name? And
he said, Legion : for many de-
mons k had entered into "him.
And ihe besought him -that he si
would not command them to go
out into m the abyss. And there 32
was there "a herd .of many
quod itMaxis, male, prseeessit enim v. 27, lx xgovcov ixavdiv, e
%o6vot suut h. 1. anni ut ap. Plutarch de Puer. Educ. 14 : 26,'
etc. Eob. (L3x., in verbo) : "Dat. t^ovc?. %o6vois marking time
when, in, during which. Luke 8 : 29, nollois x. i. L, i. e. in
during, since long time." In Acts 8 : 11, ixavqi xqovcp is ren
dered in E. V. " of long time." Beza, " a multo tempore ; '
Schott, " ex longo tempore." De Wette renders lx xgovcov ly.a
v<Sv, v. 27, and noMoZs XQOVOIS, here, .by " seit langer Zeit.'
S. Fr., "il.y avait Iong4emps,;" Iber., "porque [hubia] much
tiempo ;" Diodati (w. 27, 29), " gia lungo tempo ;" Dan. (both
verses), ".i lang Tid." Compare .ansSqfojae y^ovovs Ixavovg,
Luke 20 : 9. The passages which have been quoted from thi
Septuagint for the purpose of showing, that, in Hellenistic usage
yjovos is equivalent to year (as in the classics) rdo not seem to
be decisive.
8 "he was bound;" ISsafieTro. Kendrick, Scarlett, M. De
Wette, "er ward gebunden."
h " guarded ; " yv^aaaofievos. Kendrick, M. De Wette,
".und 'bewachet." -From the language of this passage, and the
precautions which are always taken with men whose violence i
feared, two acts are here described. The demoniac was chained,
and dsO'teatcJied, or guarded. Hence the natural remark in the
parallel passage, Mark 5 : 4, refers, as it would seem, to those who
guarded him, xal -ovSetis avrav 'io%ve Saftaaae, "nor could any-
one .tame (= overpower, .subdue) him." The above renderin:
brings out the -two .ideas .of the text with proper distinctness.
1 ".breaking ;" .Stagyr/ootov. 'The ; participial construction is
that of Wesley, Scarlett, Kendrick, Thelwall, M., Eheims, S. : Fr.
) '" into the deserts ; " els ras tyy/uovs. Wesley, Dick., Kend.,
Thelwall, M. G. and S. Fr., "dans les deserts ;" Iber., "a los
desp^oblados;" Diodati, "ne'deserti." Heb.N..T., n^a^an. Syr.,
l^i^yV ("into, or to the desert"). See ch. 3 : 2, note.
" " had entered into ; " slarjK9ev sis. Thorn., Wesley, Scar-
lett, Dick, ("had entered"), Camp., M. Vulg., Eras., Castalio,
":intraverant in ; " Schott ("intraverunt"). The aorist .here, is
equivalent to the pluperfect. Button., Gram.,. 1 137, 3: "When
the relation of :time ; is .sufficiently clear from the. context, the
aorist can be .employed; instead, of the pluperfect in narration."
See ch. 5 : 25, note.
i "he besought;" 7tagex&).et,. Sharpe, Norton, Angus. .So
in the parallel (E. Y.) Mark 5 : 10. De Wette, " er bat ihn ; "
Iber., "le rogaba [el hombre]." daifioyia., .as a neuter, might
be 'regarded as the subject, or nominative of this yerb .(in the
singular), still, as in the next verse we have rtagexaloyv (plural),
which has Saiftoves understood for its subject, and as in the
parallel, Matt. 8 : 31, we have ol Se 8ai/tov$ jtafexa^.ovvj and
in, the parallel, Mark 5 : 12, vtaqexahsaav rai 'Saifiov.es, fi'om
these conditions, there is the highest probability .that o OV&QCO-
itos is the .nominative to the verb here,. as well as in Mar.k 5 : 9.
As translators have been .divided in their views,of the grammati-
cal analysis of this passage, I would place this note -in .the margin:
"Or, according to some, they."
* "the abyss;" tijv. apvaoov. Thomson, Wesley, Scarlett,
Dick., Kend,, Angus, Thelwall, Murdock, M. Vulg., Montanus,
Beza, " in abyssnm." Syr., ,]^aomZ. :Heb. N". Test., bl'.IFi. As
we have the word'' : ;deep" (Gx.fia&os) applied to ,the sea, or lake
of .Galilee, it is desirable io distinguish a/Svaaos from a word
which indicates .deep water. .So 2 Cor. 11 : 25, where "deep"
(Gr. pv&($). occurs (E. V., " a-night and .a day I have. been .in the
deep"), it evidently jefers to the sea, as it is Connected with r^k
tvavdyrjaa, "thrice I suffered shipwreck;" This word occurs
nine times in the N. Test. Two cases have. been already noticed.
In Eev. 9 : 1, >it is preceded by $$<*$, a pit, -well, ;or cistern 'for
water, and rendered in the E. V. "bottomless .pit." ;In .other
places in that book, i. e., 11 : 7 ; 17 : 8 ; 20 : 1,JI, afivaaos stands
alone, and .is still improperly .rendered "bottomless p?t." ,From
this last remark, however, must be excepted-9 : 2, where,we.have
TO ytgeap irjs a/Svaaov rendered " the bottomless .pit," : and again,
IK iov ipQeatos, " of the pit." In all these renderings the .E. T.
followed Tyndale verbatim. "Abyss " is .naturalised ; in our lan-
guage. There is no dispute as ,to its signification. .1 deem ,it the
most appropriate term in all cases where afivqoos occurs. G. and
S. Fr., "1'abime;" Iber. and Span., " al abismo ;" Diodati .and
Ital., " nell' abisso." From 2 Pet. 2 : 4, oetpats gopov rafTafco-
aas Tta^sStoxcv -fls xpiacv ierr]i>r]{ivovs, jit .wpuld -Seem .that
afivoaosis equivalent to : Ta^Ta^o?^when,there,is reference to tiie
abode of demons, or evil spirits.
1 "a." "An" is proper only when : the next- -wprd Commences
with a vowel sound.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VIII.
89
KING JAMES' VERSION.
the mountain : and they besought
hire that he would suffer them to
enter into them. And he suffered
them.
33 Then went the devils out of
the man, and entered into the
swine : and the herd ran violently
down a steep place into the lake,
and were choked.
34 When they that fed them
saw what was done, they fled, and
went and told it in the city and in
the country.
35 Then they went out to see
what was done ; and came to Je-
sus, and found the man out of
GREEK TEXT.
iKavtav /So&KOfJievoiJv ev TO> oper
/cat TrapeKaXovv avTOv tva eVt-
Tpe\lrri avTols els eKeivovs elcreX-
Qelv. /cat eireTpefyev auroty.
33 * 5~ \ f\ f *s\ ** 5* ' * v
egeXVovTa oe ra oaifj-ovia amo
TOV avOpanrov elo~rjX6ev els TOVS
)(pipovs' /cat copfjurjo-ev 17 d-yeXrj
/cara roy Kpr/pvov elf TTJV XI/JLVTJI>,
/cat oareTrviyiq. ISovTes Se ol
Boo~KovTes TO yeyevriu,evov e(bv-
I I I 1 1 t
yoV) /cat aireXOovTes airriyyei-
Xav els Tr)V TroXiv /cat ety TOVS
* / *$/) > ?"* \ /I C\ \ > ^ " ^
aypovs. egr/Auov oe loeiv TO
yeyovos' /cat rjXOov irpos TOV
'Irjo-ovv, /cat evpov Ka.6rnj.evov
REVISED VERSION. v
swine feeding on the mountain ;
and they besought him "to per-
mit them to enter into them.
And 'he permitted them. Then 33
11 the demons went out of the
man, and entered into the
swine ; and the herd 'rushed
'down the steep into the lake,
and was choked. And those 34
who fed them, seeing what was
done, fled, "and "reported it in
the city and in the country.
Then they went out to see 35
w what had been done ; and
*they came to Jesus, and found
" to permit ; " "iva. Inn^l-^. So (B. V.) Acts 26 : 1. 1 Cor.
14 : 34 ; 16 : 7. Heb. 6 : 3. Kendrick, Scarlett, Dick., Camp.,
Thorn., Murdock, Bheims. G. and S. Fr., " permettre ; " Iber.,
" que les permitiese ; " Diodati, " che permettese." Bob. (Lex.
" Permit " accords with present usage, being much more frequent-
ly employed to express the thought of allowing, than " suffer."
P " he permitted ; "
See last note.
' " the demons went ; " l&l&ovta ra. Saifiovta. Scarlet^
Murdock. The inversion of this sentence in the E. V. is unneces-
sary. In the parallel (E. V.) Mark 5 : 13, the same word, l|eyl-
frovra ra itvevfiara, is rendered so as to preserve the natural
order, " the unclean spirits went out," etc. The nominative is
placed before the verb (or participle) by Thorn., "Wesley, Sharpei
Dick., Wakef., Pemi, Camp., Kendrick, Thelwall, M., Wiclif,
Bheims, Belg., -De Wette, G. and S. Fr., Dan., Diodati, Ital.
The inverted form of the sentence may be traced back to Tyn-
dale, from him to Luther, and then to the Vulg., " Exierunt ergo
dasmonia ; " though in the Latin, there is, strictly speaking, no
inversion, as the order is the ordinary one in that language.
r " rushed ; " Spfajaev. Wesley, Thomson, Scarlett, Sharpe,
Norton., Wake, Penn, Camp., Angus, Thel., M. Bob. (Lex., in
oerbo], " to rush on, move forward impetuously." Bretsch. : "Dici-
tur de eo qui fertur cum impetu, feror." So Acts 19 : 29, aip-
fiijodv re opiofhj/taSbv els to &ear(>ov, E. V., " they rushed with
one accord into the theatre." De Wette, " es stiirzte die Heerde ; "
Belg., "de herdde stortede." The verb copftdca occurs in six
instances in the N. Test. In all, it should be rendered by " rush."
" down the steep ; " y.ara rov v.^rjfivov. Kendrick, Norton,
Penn, Pechy (on the parallel, Mark 5 : 13). The article should
by all means be retained in translating this word. " Steep," as a
noun, signifies any precipitous place, hill, mountain, rock, precipice.
See Webster and Johnson, Dictionaries, art. " Steep."
1 " was choked ; " aitsnviyij. In the parallel, Mark 5 : 13, the
nominative is the same, ayslrj, yet there the verb is plural, htvi-
yovro. As the noun is collective, we may use either the singular,
or plural, in rendering the verb. For accuracy, the form of the
text is preserved by " was choked." Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza,
Castalio, " grex suffocates est ; " Belg., " de herdde versmoor-
de " (in Mark 5 : 13, " versmoorden ") ; De Wette, " die Heerde
ertrank " (Mark 5 : 13, " sie ertranken ").
u The reading of the Text Becept., aitsl&ovTtg (before a.nr,y-
yedav), is canceled by Gfriesb., Knapp, Lachmann, Tischendorf,
Theile, Tittmann, Scholz. Schott remarks : " Quod vulgo ante
amjyy. additur aTtei&ovres. (ex Matt. 8 : 33) Griesb. aliique
recte delent auctoritate plurimorum cdd. (13 unc.) verss., Pesch.,
Philox., An-., Pers. Memph., Arm., Goth., Slav., Vulg., Ital."
Bloomfield : " lAjieid-ovrcs, before anriyy^ikav, is rightly canceled
by all Editors, as being absent from almost all MSS., and, no
doubt, introduced from Matt. 8 : 33."
v " reported ; " aitfiyyedav. So (E. V.) Acts 4 : 23. 1 Cor.
14 : 25. The verb signifies to bear news, or a message from one
person, or place, to another. Bob. (Lex.), "to report;" Liddell,
" to carry back tidings of a thing, report, Latin renunciare."
Vulg., Mont., Erasmus, Castalio, Schott, " nunciaverunt ; " Beza,
" annunciarunt." " To tell " has been made the equivalent of so
many verbs in the E. V., such as oTtayyKkl.oi, StTjysoftai, JxAtx-
ieca, e&jyeofiai, ertco, kaheco, Uy<a, ftijvvto, etc., that it is desira-
ble to restrict its wide application, as far as accuracy will
permit.
w " what had been done ; " TO ysyov6s. Norton, Penn, M.
Eras., Beza, " quod factum erat." The pluperf. is employed also
by Camp., Kend., and Dick. Schott, " quod evenerat ; " Iber.,
que habia sucedio." Alternative rendering, " what had come to
pass."
x "they." There is some obscurity in this sentence, if the
pronoun is not expressed before " came," especially as e, semicolon
90
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VIII.
, KING JAMES' VERSION.
whom the devils were departed,
sitting at the feet of Jesus, clothed,
and in his right mind : and they
were afraid.
36 They also which saw it, told
them by what means he that was
' possessed of the devils was healed.
37 Then the whole multitude
of the country of the Gadarenes
round about, besought him to de-
part from them ; for they were
taken with great fear. And he
went up into the ship, and return-
ed back again.
38 Now the man out of whom
the devils were departed, besought
him that he might be with him.
But Jesus sent him away, saying,
VLO.
GREEK TEXT.
TOV avdpcoirov a(j) ou ra
, tjuartcrjueVoy /cat
:, Trapa TOVS Troftas
TOV 'Irjcrov- /cat efyofirjOrja-av.
36 a7r??yyeiAaz' Se avro?s /cat ot
ISovTes, Trcas ecrcadrj 6 Sai/Jt.oi>i-
cr9eis. s /cat rjpcoTrjcrav avTov
ajrav TO -irXrjOos Trj?
TCOI> T'o.^o.pnv&v
(XUTCOy. OTL u)OJOC(> LlCVaAfO O~VV m
eiYOVTO- O.VTOS Se e/^/3ay els TO
\ f* t / i QQ
TrXoiov UTreoTyoeyei/.
5e avTov o avrjp a0' .06 e,_
^et ra SaifJ.ovia } elvai crw avTco.
onreXvcre Se avrov 6 ^Irjcrovs, Xe-
KING JAMES' VERSION.
the man from whom the demons
?had gone out, sitting at the
feet of Jcsns, clothed, and in
his right mind ; and they were
afraid. 'Then those also who 36
had seen it, ^reported to them
'how 'the demoniac was heal-
ed. And the whole multitude 37
d of the surrounding region of
the Gadarenes 'asked him to
depart from them ; for 'they
were seized with great fear;
and e he went' into the ship, and
"returned. Now the man 'from 38
whom the demons ] had gone
out, k begged him that he 'might
remain with him. But Jesus
sent him away, saying, Eeturn 39
follows " done." It has therefore been properly inserted by
Norton and M.
y " had gone out ; " Igelijlvd'ti. Norton, M. Kendrick and
Sharpe, " had gone forth ; " Wakef. and Dick., " had gone." See
ch. 4 : 34, note. Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, Castalio, " exierant ; "
Iber., " habian salido."
1 " Then ; " Se. M., Wakef., Dick. Vulg., Mont, Erasmus,
Beza, " autem ; " Schott, " vero ; " Belg., " Ende ; " De Wette,
" und ; " S. Fr., " et ; " Iber., " I." The particle is here simply
continuative. Bob. (Lex., Se).
" reported ; " dnfiyyeilav. See v. 34, note.
b " how ; " 7t<3s. "Wesley, "Wakefield, Sharpe, Norton, Penn,
Dick., Kend., Angus, Thelwall, M. So (E. V.) in the parallel
(mas) Mark 5 : 16. This particle is frequently used iu oblique
discourse after verbs of considering, finding out, making known,
etc. In this case, it loses its interrogative force, and is equivalent
to its correlative OTTOS, how, in what -way. Bob. (Lex., TCCOS).
"the demoniac;" 6 Satftovio&ets. Thom., Scarlett, Nor-
ton, Camp., Dick., Kend., M., Murdock. Syr., JjiL.? on i-i- 2 -!
(homo ilk damoniacus). As Salfceov is transferred in this Bevi-
sion, for the reasons stated in ch. 4 : 33, note, " demoniac " is the
proper representative of 8at/u.oi>t.o&eis.
d " of the surrounding region ; " -rijs ne^i^eo^ov. See ch.
4 : 14, note.
" asked ; " jjgcorrjoar. Kendrick, Sharpe, Angus, Thelwall.
Vulg., Mont., Erasmus, " rogaverunt ; " Beza, Castalio, Schott,
" rogavit ; " Iber., " rogo." See ch. 7 : 36, note. So often in
E. V., as ch. 19 : 31 ; 20 : 3 ; 22 : 68. This word should be
distinguished from na(>axcd.ta>, which occurs in the parallels,
Matt. 8 : 31. Mark 5 : 17.
f " they were seized ; " owei%ovro. Bobinson (Lex.), " to be
seized." Thomson, Wakef., Norton, Penn, Scarlett. De "Wette,
" sie waren ergriffen." " "Were taken with " is now used only in
conversation.
e " he went into ; " e/t/3as els. Wesley, Sharpe, Penn. Bret-
Schneider (in verbo), " wgredior." ' So (E. V.) Matt. 13 : 2.
Luke 8 : 22. " Up " is superfluous ; there is nothing in the text
to authorize this adverb.
h " returned ; " imear^eipev. Wesley, Sharpe, Norton, Penn,
Camp., Dick., Kend., Angus, Thelwall. See ch. 2 : 45, note,
"Back again" is superfluous. This word occurs thirty-five times
in the E. V. In twenty-six of these, it is properly rendered
simply by " return." So in the next verse (39).
1 " from whom ; " ay ov. Norton, Angus, Kend., Thelwall,
M. Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, " a quo."
l " had gone out ; " se).rj).vS-ce. Norton, Kend. Sharpe and
Thelwall, " had gone forth ; " Vulg., Mont, Eras., Beza, Castalio,
" exierant ; " Iber., " habian salido." See v. 35, note. On the
erroneous employment of " to be " as an auxiliary with intransi-
tive verbs, see ch. 4 : 34, note.
" " begged ;" sSesro. Thom., Norton. Liddell (Seoftni), "to
beg ; " Belg., " bad ; " De Wette, " bat ; " Dan., " bad ; " Iber.,
" supplicaba ; " S. Fr., " suppliait ; " Ital., " supplicava." The
E. V. (copying Tyndale, as he followed the Vulgate) does not
distinguish Sso/iai from c^cardca, in v. 37.
i " might remain ; " ilva.i. Kendrick, Murdock. Diodati,
" stare ; " De Wette, " bleiben." Beza (note in loco) : " Ut liceret
apud eum esse, sive cum ipso versari." Schott, " ut ei comes
esset." The sentence eStero Se avrov eJvac ovv avry, if ren-
dered literally, is ambiguous, " and begged him to remain with
him." If, however, we leave avrey, " him," to be supplied by the
reader's mind, then the literal rendering is entirely clear, "and
begged to remain with him." This is submitted as an alter-
native.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VIII.
91
KING JAMES' VERSION.
39 Return to thine own house,
and shew how great things God
hath done unto thee. And he
went his way and published
throughout the whole city, how
great things Jesus had done unto
him.
40 And it came to pass, that,
when Jesus was returned, the peo-
ple gladly received him : for they
were all waiting for him.
41 And behold, there came a
man named Jairus, and he was a
ruler of the synagogue : and he
fell down at Jesus' feet, and be-
sought him that he would come
into his house :
42 For he had one only daugh-
ter, about twelve years of age,
and she lay a dying. But as he
went, the people thronged him.
GREEK TEXT.
QO C <>/! / I > \ ?/
yutv, JTroorrpefpe eis rov OLKOV
crou, Kai 8irj~yov ocra eTronjcre trot
6 Oeos. Kail onrTJXde, Kaff oXrjv
TTJI>
crev ai>T<S o
Kijpv(rcrcov o(ra.
'EFENETO 8t. eV r<
rov 'Ir/o~ovv, oVe-
avTov 6 o^Aoy -rjcrav yap
TroWey 7rpoo-8oKoavTs avTov.
14 Kai I8ov, r)X6ev avrjp a>
ovo/j.a 'Ideipoy, KOL avTos ap^cov
Trjf crvvaycayrjs VTrrjp-^e, KOL ?re-
'O-CQV Trapa TOVS TroSay TOV 'Irj-
croi), wapeKaXei avTov eio-eXdelv
5 \ 3 * f* 4-9! </ /i /
ety TOJ/ ot/coz^ avrov on ovya-
Trjp . fjt,ovoyvr]s TJV aurra a>y ercSf
;, /cat avTr/ a7redvr]o~Kv.
Ev 8e TO> inraytiv avrov ol o^-
Aoi crvveKViyov avTov. 43 Kal
REVISED VERSION.
to m thy house, and "tell "how
much God hath done p for thee.
And 'he went away and pub-
lished 'through the whole city,
how much Jesus had done 'for
him. And it came to pass," 40
"when Jesus returned, the crowd
^gladly received him : for they
were all waiting for him. And, 41
behold, there came a man nam-
ed Jairus, and he was a ruler
of the synagogue : and *he fell
at Jesus' feet, and besought him
to come into his house : for he 42
had ran only daughter about
twelve years of age, and "she
was dying. "And as he went,
the crowds 'pressed on him.
m " thy house ; " rov oly.ov aov. Thomson, Wiclif, Perm,
Sharpe, Scarlett, Kend., Thelwall, M. " Own " is superfluous.
" " tell ; " Sajyov. Wesley, Thorn., Penn, Angus. So (E. V.)
Mark 9 : 9. Luke 9 : 10. Heb. 11 : 32. I suggest that " relate,"
though not found in the E. V., might be employed as ah equiva-
lent for this verb, in all cases. The change, however, is one of
those, in reference to which its importance should be well consid-
ered, when we contemplate an alteration in the phraseology of
the Scriptures. " Relate " is the rendering, in this instance, of
Scarlett, Wakef., Camp., Dick. So Vulg., Mont, Eras., Beza,
Schott, " narra ; " Castalio, " narrato ; " De "Wette, " erzahle ; "
G. and S. Fr., " raconte ; " Dan., " fortcel ; " Diodati, " racconta."
Heb. N. Test., ian. Syr., ]L&*\. "
" " ^
" how much ; " Sao. Dickinson. Schott, " quantum ; " De
Wette, " wie viel." So Sao. in the parallel, Mark 5 : 19, is ren-
dered " how much " by Kendrick, Wakefleld, Dick. See Crosby
(Gram., \ 336) : " The use of the plural for the singular is partic-
ularly frequent in Greek, in adjectives used substantively, in the
names of things composed of distinct parts, and in vague expres-
sion for persons, or things."
f " for thee ; " aot. So (E. T.) in the parallel, Mark 5 : 19.
Kend., Angus, Thorn., Wesley, Penn, Sharpe, Scarlett, Wakef.,
M. " For you." in Norton, Camp., Dick.
' " he went away ; " anrjld'e. Penn, Sharpe, Wakef., Kend.,
Thelwall, M.
r " through ; " #'. According to present usage, " through "
is the proper equivalent. So Thomson, Wesley, Penn, Norton,
Sharpe, Scarlett, Camp., Wakef., Dick., Kend., M., Murdock.
Bob. (Lex., Kara).
' " how much ; " Saa. See first clause of this verse, note.
" for him ; " avrai. The construction is the same as that of
aoi, in the first clause of the verse ; dativus commodi. Thomson,
Wesley, Penn, Norton, Sharpe, Scarlett, Wakef., Camp., Dick.,
Kend., Angus, M.
u " that," in the E. V., is superfluous. It is omitted by Kend.,
Dick., M., and most of the later English translators.
v " when Jesus returned ; " lv ry wtoar^ei/jai. TOV lyaovv.
Wesley, Scarlett, Kendrick, Thelwall, M., Murdock. This is the
proper rendering, as the verb is in the first aorist active.
w ' gladly received ; " ansS^aro. In this instance, " gladly "
should not be regarded as a supplement. The verb, in its com-
pound form (ana, Se'/,oftai] signifies " to receive gladly," " to wel-
come." Bloomfield (N. Test., note), " to receive joyfully." So
2 Maccab. 3:9, anoS^d-eis (E. V.), " being courteously receiv-
ed." Kuinoel : "'AjtoSfyEad-at, libenter, gratanter aliquem exci-
pere, ut Act. 15 : 4." See Robinson (Lex., in verbd). S. Fr.,
" accueillit ; " Schott (2nd Edit), " multitudq laetabunda excipit."
1 " he fell ; " m-aiuv. " Down " is superfluous. Omitted by
Norton, Sharpe, Dick., Kend,, Thelwall, M.
* " an only daughter ; " &vydrtj^ ftovoyevfjs. Wesley, Sharpe,
Scarlett, Camp., Dick., Kend., Angus, M.
1 " she was dying ; " avrtj cated-vrjoxtv. Penn, Norton, Sharpe,
Scarlett, Thehvall, M., Wakefl, Camp. {" who was dying 1 "). Bob.
(Lex., in loco, ajto&vyoxco), " she was dying."
- "And as he went ; " 'Ev Be iia vitayeiv avrov. Tyndale,
Sharpe, Wakef., Dick., M. " But " was copied from Cramner.
b " pressed on him ; " aweitvtyov. Norton, M. Rob. (Lex.),
92
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING- TO LUKE. CHAP. VIII.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
43 And a woman having an
issue of blood twelve years, which
had spent all her living upon phy-
sicians, neither could be healed
of any,
44 Came behind him and touch-
ed the border of his garment :
and immediately her issue of blood
stanched.
45 And Jesus said, Who touch-
ed me ? When all denied, Peter,
and they that were with him, said,
Master, the multitude throng thee,
GREEK TEXT.
ovcra eV pvera oujj-aros OLTTO
SooSe/ca, TJTIS el? larpovs
Trpoo-avaXaxraaa oXov TOV fiiov
OVK io~^y(rev VTT ovBevos 6epa-
Trevdrjisai, 4 " 4 TrpocreXdovcra. OTTI-
(r6ev, i]\l/a.TO TOV KpacnreSov TOV
ijj.a.Tiov avTOv- /cat
pv(ris TOV 0,'ifj.aTOS
s 9 < > T " T" '
K.O.L wrez> o J.rjcrovs, J.LS o
fJLOv; 'Apvov/J-zvoov Se
, e'nrev o HeTpos KCU oi
'EiricrTaTa, oi
art KOLL
45
fj.eT
, REVISED VERSION.
And a woman "having had an 43
issue of blood twelve years,
who had spent her d whole liv-
ing on 'physicians, and . 'could
not be healed e by any one,
h came up 'behind and touched 44
'the fringe of his garment ; and
immediately her issue of blood
Stopped. And Jesus said, Who 45
touched me? 'And when all
denied, Peter, and "those with
him, said, Master, the crowds
"press and "shove thee, and
" to press upon." Laying aside the sense of pressing together so
as to suffocate, this word seems to have the same force with
ovv&tiflio, -which occurs in the parallel, Mark 5 : 24. To throng
is no longer used as a transitive verb, nor is it applied to persons,
even in the passive form.
e " having had an issue of blood ; " ovoa lv {nioet a'i/iaios.
Dick, ("having had"). As elfil is defective, having no preterit
forms for the participle, the present is here used aoristically. In
narration, the aorist in verbs often has the force of the specific
perfect and pluperfect. Crosby (Grammar, 580). This author
remarks : " The use of the aorist for the perfect is especially
common in the participle." Hence ovoa tv (" having been in ")
may be rendered " having had." Stuart (note on Winer, \ 34, 4,
a, note 2) says : " If there is any fact in regard to the use of the
tenses in the New Testament, which is capable of demonstration,
it is this, viz., that the aorist and perfect are often used for each
other, and often in connection, and in the same sense." See
Kiihner, 256, 2, Hem. 1. This participle is rendered by a finite
verb, in the pluperfect, by Norton, Wesley, Penn, and Angus.
If we use the participial construction, the usus loqumdi of the
English demands " having had,"Tather than " having."
d " whole ; " oiov. Norton, Scarlett, Thelwall. Bob. (Lex.),
and Liddell (zn verbo). Beza, Schott ("toto victu hnpenso").
See ch. 5 : 5, note. So often in E. V. In the parallel, Mark
5 : 26, where " all " is properly used in the E. V., we have T
" physicians." The reading of the Textus receptns, els la-
is canceled by Griesbach, Tittm., Lachm., Knapp, Theile,
Scholz, Bloomfield. Instead of this, these critical Editors read
larfozs. Schott says : " 'Jar^oTs pro vulg. sis Icctfiovs, quod vel
correctionem vel interpretationem constrnctionis minus usitatse
prodit, recte Griesb. cum pluribus recepit prseeuntt. cdd. plurimis,
i2 unc."
f " could not be healed ; " om io%vosv 9 l ga7tv&ijvai. Sharpe,
Dick., Angus, M., Penn.
' " by any one ; " iin ovSevos- Bob. (Lex., ovSsls) : "Aa a
substantive, no one." Hence the double negative gives the word
the signification " any one." "Any," standing alone, is always a
plural, in English.
h " came up ; " jt^ooe),&ovaa. Wakef., Murdock. As nqoo-
i-QZOfiai literally signifies " to come to," it may properly be ren-
dered by our idiomatic phrase " to come up," which has the same
signification. In this case, the mind of the reader supplies the
word " him," and it is unnecessary to express that pronoun, as a
supplement.
* " behind ; " oitto&sv. Wakef. By rendering itfoaeH&ovoa
" came up," we can dispense with the supplement " htm." See
last note. H^oasl&ovaa ojtia&ev is rendered by "Vulgate aud
Erasmus " accessit retro ; " Mont, " accedens retro ; " Castalio,
" accessit a tergo ; " Beza and Schott, " quum accessisset a
tergo."
J " the fringe ; " rov xpaoneSov. Norton, Scarlett, Kendrick,
Kuincel (on Mark 6 : 56, rov x^aoiteSov). Heb. N. Test,
ns^s. The Saviour was " made under the law," and observed its
precepts. Numb. 15 : 38, " Speak unto the children of Israel,
and bid them that they make them fringes (ns^a, Sept. v.$ aon&>
So) in the borders (iSJ3-i>9, Sept. enl ra mc^vyia) of their
garments throughout their generations, and that they put upon
the fringe of the borders (S)3Srt ns^S-i)?, Sept. Inl ra v.qaansSa
v nreQvyitov) a ribband (bins, Sept. xlaafia, a thread, or
cord) of blue." Bob. (Lex., in ver'bo) : " In N. Test, a fringe."
k " stopped ; " IODJ. Scarlett, Wakef., Penn, Kend., Angus,
M. Bob. (Lex., in verbo) : " In the aorists eonjv and latd&^v,
to stand still, to stop of things to cease." Sharpe, Norton, and
Camp, render the word passively, " was stopped."
1 "And ; " Se. Angus, M., Penn, Norton, Sharpe, Mardock.
Heb N. Test., i. Syr., j (" and when ").
" those with him ; " oi per avrov. Camp., Norton, Kend,
M.
"press;" avvc%oval. Bob. (Lex., in iierbo), Bretschneider:
''Premo ab omni parte, Luc. 8 : 45."
"shove;" ano&Mpovoi. Webster (Diet., art. "Shove," "to
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING- TO LUKE. CHAP. VIII.
93
KING JAMES' VERSION.
and press thee, and sayest thou,
Who touched me ?
46 And Jesus said, Somebody
hath touched me : for I perceive
that virtue is gone out of me.
47 And when the woman saw
that she was not hid, she came
trembling, and falling down be-
fore him, she declared unto him
before all the people for what
cause she had touched him, and
how she was healed immediately.
48 And he said unto her, Daugh-
ter, be of good comfort : thy faith
hath made thee whole ; go in
peace.
49 While he yet spake, there
GREEK TEXT.
KCU Aeyety, Tis o a
4fi e /~\ &> ' T ~ *?
U oe 2r)<rovs fiTrev,
IJLOV Tts' ej/o> yap eyvcav 8vvafj.iv
air
de T] yvvrj on OVK eXade,
<ra rjXde, /cat 7r^o(T7recroucra av-
T<J 81 TJV airiav rffyo.ro avrov
airrj'yyeiXev ai>Tc evayiriov travTos
TOV AaoG, KOI a>? laOrj TrapaYpTJ-
48 ' R\ ? ' ~ s\ /
IJLO,. o oe ujrv avTrj) Uapcrei,
dvyarep, 77 TTLQ-TLS o~ov treirw/ce
' > / 49 tf TT
<? Tropevov ety ipr)vt]v. Jbn
avTov AaXowTOs; ep^erai TIS
EEVISED VERSION.
sayest thou, Who touched me ?
And Jesus said, ^Some one 46
'touched me ; for r l know that
the power 'went out from me.
And the woman, "seeing that 47
she T was not unknown, came
trembling, and falling down
before him, declared to him be-
fore all the people, for what
cause she had touched him, and
how she was healed immediate-
ly. And he said to her, w Take 48
courage, daughter, thy faith
'hath healed thee ; go in peace,
y While he was still speaking, 49
pack, to press against"). QUpca is defined by Rob. " to press
upon a person in a crowd, to crowd," and ovv&iifico, " to press
together, to press closely on all sides, as a crowd upon a person."
Bretsch. : "Comprimo, ab omni parte premo." As an alternative
rendering, " crowd."
P " Some one ; " vis. Thorn., "Wesley, Sharpe, Penn, Norton,
M., Kend. This pronoun is not marked with the accute accent
in Griesb., Tittm., Tisch., Mill, Lacmn., Knapp, Schott, Blooraf.,
Kuincel.
* " touched ; tfyaro. This aorist is properly rendered thus in
E. V. of v. A4. Rendered by " touched," in both verses, by Tyn-
dale, Cranmer, Geneva, Sharpe, Norton, Kendrick, Thelwall, M.
Rendered uniformly (vv. 44, 46) in Vulg., Mont., Erasmus, Beza,
Castalio, Schott. The perfect tense." hath touched" was proba-
bly introduced by the Revisers of the E. V. for the sake of
emphasis, like the rendering of Wakefield, " Somebody did touch
me." The text, however, has nothing to indicate any greater
emphasis in the verb here, than in the forty-fourth verse.
r " I know ; " fyca syvcov. Wesley, Sharpe, M., Rheims.
Vulg., Mont., Eras., " novi." So in the parallel, Mark 5 : 30,
(E. V.) , " knowing." Syr., &,J )j] . Heb. N. Test.,
" " the power ; " Svvafiiv. ^fwceuis, here, indicates that power
by which the Saviour wrought miracles. Luke 4 : 14, Kai vnc-
arqeycv o *Irjaovs Iv tjj Svdftei TOV Hvevftaros . r. L 6 : 19,
Svvuftts ?t? avz-ov l^r^cro, xai laro it&vras. This power was
communicated to the apostles by Christ, ch. 9 : 1. Rob. (Lex.,
m verbo) : " Specially, miraculous power, the power of working
miracles." The article is inserted here (as in Rev. of Mark 5 : 30)
on the ground, that the noun is really definite in signification. It
refers to that particular divine energy by which the woman was
healed. Penn, Camp., Norton, Wakef., Kend., Angus, Thelwall,
M., have " power ; " S. Fr., " une puissance ; " Iber., " un poder."
" Virtue," which, was transferred from the Vulgate (virtus) by
Tyndale, and copied from him by subsequent translators, is obso-
lete.
' " went out from me ; " Svvctfiir Qd.d'ovaav an eftov. Penn,
Norton, M. The prepositions If. (ej-ci&ovaav) and anb should
have their proper force, " out of," and " from." Vulg., " de me
exiisse ; " Eras., " a me exiisse ; " Mont, " exeuntem de me ; ''
Belg., " van mij uitgegaan is."
" " seeing ; " iSovaa. "Wesley, "Wiclif, Rheims, Sharpe, Nor-
ton, Kend., Thelwall, M. The participial construction is adopted
by Scarlett, Campbell, and Dickinson. Belg., " ziende ; " S. Fr.,
" voyant ; " Ital., " vedendo."
v " was not unknown ; " ovx eiad-e. Kendrick. Liddell and
Rob. (Lex.) give " to be unknown " as one of the definitions of
this word. The obvious thought is, that she knew she had not
escaped the notice of the Saviour.
w " Take courage ; " Oaqoei. Thorn. ."Wesley, Camp., Wakef.,
Kend. The E. V. (copying Tyndale) fluctuates in rendering this
verb between " Be of good comfort," and " Be of good cheer."
Neither of these expressions is accurate; both are, to say the
least, obsolescent. Qaqoos signifies courage, boldness, readiness,
confidence. Liddell. He renders tfagoei " take courage." Bret-
schueid?r: " Qaqast, bono sis animo."
1 " hath healed ; " otacoxe. Kendrick, Sharpe (oiaioxe, Mark
5 : 34). Rob. (Lex., oco^co, 2) " to heal, to restore to health."
As the radical signification of " heal " is " to make whole," this
term is appropriate, and has the advantage of being in ordinary
use, which can not be affirmed of " to make whole." See Webster
(Diet., art. " Heal "). Bretsch. (in verbo) : " Usurpatur universe
de iis, qui in periculis, servantur, incolumes prcestantur. De iis
qui a morbo liberantur, quorum vita servatur, ubi ssepius verti
potest : sano, sanor." G. Fr., " ta foi t'a guerie."
y " While he was still speaking ; " TEn avrov Haiovvros.
Kendrick, Pechy (on same phrase, Mark 5 : 35), Wakefield, Dick.,
G. and A. Camp. Rob., Liddell (Lex., ), "still;" Iberian,
" estando el aun hablando ; " Vulg., Mont., Erasmus, " adhuc illo
loquente ; " Beza, " adhuc eo loquente." IJeb. N. Test,
94
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. VIII.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
cometli one from the ruler of the
synagogue's house, saying to him,
Thy daughter is dead : trouble
not the Master.
50 But when Jesus heard it, he
answered him, saying, Fear not :
believe only, and she shall be
made whole.
51 And when he came into the
house, he suffered no man to go
in, save Peter, and James, and
John, and the father and the
mother of the maiden.
52 And all wept and bewailed
her : but he said, Weep not : she
is not dead, but sleepeth.
53 And they laughed him to
scorn, knowing that she was dead.
54 And he put them all out, i
GREEK TEXT.
Trocpa TOV dpxKrvvaycoyov, Xeycov
On
crov fj.r/ cr/cuAAe TOV
Xov. 50 '0 Se 'Ir/crovf aKOvcras
aTTCKpiffr] O.VTW, Xeycav, Mr) (j)o-
/3ov p.ovov 7r/crreue, KOU <rca6r)cre-
TOU. 51 JElo-eXdcav de els TTJV
oiKiav, OVK d(j)r/Ki> elcreXdeiv ov-
Seva, el /j,rj Herpov KCU 'Ia.KC0(3oi>
KCU 'Icadvvr/v, KOLL TOV TraTepa
TTJS TraiSos KCU. TT/V fj.r/Tepa.
52 " > o\ ' \ > /
CKACILOV 7TaVTS, KO.L. 6/CO-
TTTOVTO avTr/v. 6 Se etTre, Mr)
/cAcu'ere' OVK mreOavev, aAAa
devSet. 53 Kal /careye'Atoi' av-
TOV, elSoTef OTI aTredavev. 5i au-
Kpa.Tr)(ras TTS
TTO.VTO.S,
'
EEVISED VERSION.
some one came "from the house
of the ruler of the synagogue,
who said to him, Thy daughter
is dead, b do not trouble the
"Teacher. But when Jesus heard SG
if, he answered him, saying,
Fear not, d only believe, and
"she will be healed. And when 5j .
he f came into the house, he
suffered no one to go in, except
Peter, and E John, and James,
and the father and mother of
the maiden. And all h were 52
weeping and 'bewailing her.
But he said, Weep not, she is
not dead, but sleepeth. And 53
! they laughed at him, knowing
that she was dead. "But he put 54
them all out, and "taking her
1 " some one ; " rig. Doddridge, M. See v. 46, note. Bob,
(Lex., TJS), "some one;" S. Fr., " quelq'un."
a " from the house of the ruler of the synagogue ; " naoa TOV
ao%iovvaycoyov. Thorn., Norton, M. As the language of the
text is idiomatic, the insertion of the house, as a supplement, is
is necessary. The ruler was with Jesus at this time. Kuinosl
(on the parallel, Mark 5 : 35) : " Sic anb legitur quoque Joh.
18 : 28, Zyovotv TOV 'Itjaovv anb TOV Ka'Caya, ex cedibus Caia-
pha. Terent. Phorm. IV : 6, 5, nam quse hsec anus est examinata,
a fratre quze egressa est meo, i. e. a domo patris." The above
arrangement is perspicuous, and more harmonious than that of
Tyndale, which was copied in the B. V. Camp., " from the house
of the director of the synagogue."
b " do not trouble ; " /a/ oxvM,e. Norton. This accords with
present usage..
" " Teacher." See ch. 2 : 46, note.
d " only believe ; " ftovov niarevs. So E. V. of the parallel,
Mark 5 : 36. Thorn., "Wesley, Sharpe, Wakef., Scarlett, Dick.,
Camp., Kend., Angus, M. The proper order of these words is
the same, as in the Greek.
" she will be healed ; aco&jjoerai. Thelwall. See v. 48,
note. Instead of " shall," "Wakefield, Sharpe, and Penu have the
auxiliary " will."
f " came." Instead of tloeH&cav of the Text. Eecepi, &9~cav
is the reading of Griesbach, Tittmann, Knapp, Theile, Tischend.,
Lachm., Scholz, Bloomfleld. Schott says : " D.&IUV cum Griesb.
aliisque ex cdd. plurimis (8 unc.) verss., Pesch. Philox., Pers.,
ed. Whel., Ar., Goth., Slav., Vulg., It. dedimus pro vulg.
&cav ex vbb. sqq. oriundo."
* " John and James." Instead of " 'laxcoflov ttal
(Text. Eecept.) the reading of Griesb., Lachmaun, Tischendorf,
Knapp, Theile, Schott, and Bloomfield is 'Icoawtjv v.al 'laxcoftor.
In favor of this reading are eight uncial MSS., and the Philox-
enian and Jerusalem Syriac, Slavonian, eight MSS. of Vulgate.
See Schott, and Bloomf. (N. Test.).
h " were weeping ; " txlaiov. Norton, Sharpe, Kend., Angus,
Penn, M. S. Fr., " tous pleuraient ; " Iber. and Span., " llorabau
todos ; " Ital., " tutti piangevano." The imperfect here, shows
continued action, and is accurately rendered by the English pro-
gressive form. So the next verb Iv.omotno.
1 " bewailing ; " exomovro. See last note. Sharpe, Penn,
M., Kend. Iber., "planian." Bloomfield remarks : "Komead-at.
properly signifies to beat, or strike oneself, and then, to bewail,
grieve for any one."
' " they laughed at him ; " xaTsysAfov UVTOV, Thorn., Kend.,
Scarlett, Norton, Wakef., Sharpe, Angus, Thelwall. This verb
occurs only in Matt. 9 : 24, Mark 5 : 40, and in this instance,
and is rendered in the E. V. by " laugh to scorn." This phrase
is obsolete. The preposition xara, in composition with this verb,
is not intensive, but has rather as iu many other instances the
force of " against," and this may be well expressed by " at." See
Liddell (**). " To laugh at " is equivalent to " deride." This
!ast is, however, less familiar and intelligible to common readers.
11 " But ; " Se. So (E. V.) in the parallels, Mark 5 : 40, Matt.
) : 25. Scarlett, Norton, Camp., Angus. G. and S. French,
' mais ; " Iber. and Span., " mas ; " Diodati and Ital., " ma ; " De
Wette, " aber ; " Belg., " maar ; " Dun., " men."
"taking;" xoarfoas. Wesley, Sharpe, Thelwall. Although
Trjoas has been rendered in the Revision of Mark at 5 : 41
1 he took," the participial construction (the sense being the same)
THE GOSPEL ACCOKDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IX.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
and
and took her by the hand,
called, saying, Maid, arise.
55 And her spirit came again,-
and she arose straightway : and
he commanded to give her meat.
56 And her parents were as-
tonished : but he charged them
that they should tell no man what
was done.
CHAP. IX.
THEN he called his twelve dis-
ciples together, and gave them
power and authority over all dev-
ils, and to cure diseases.
GREEK TEXT.
\eycov, 'If TTOLS,
65 Iou eVearpei^e TO irvevfj-a, av-
KOii avecrTrj irapa^prj/jia.' KCU
56 \ >>' ' "
/cat e^ecTT7]crav OL -yoveif
6 Se TraprjyyeiXev avTols
2 And he sent them to preach | crreiAey
tirev TO
CHAP. IX.
SYTKAA E2AMEN02
Se Tovf ScadeKa p.a0rjTctf avrov,
avTols 8vva.fj.iv KOLL (ov-
criav ejrl Travra TO. daijjLOi'ia, KCU
IIOCTOVF
oare-
Kijpvcro-eiv Trjv
REVISED VERSION.
by the hand, "called out, say-
ing, "Maiden, "rise. And her 55.
spirit Preturned, and she 'rose
'immediately ; and he command-
ed 'that something should be
given her to eat. And her &s
parents were astonished, but
he charged them to tell 'no oue
"what had been done.
CHAP. IX.
AND "calling together the 1
twelve, b he gave them power
and authority over all 'the de-
mons, and to cure diseases.
And he sent them forth to 2
is adopted here for the sake of euphony. In Mark, the verse
commences with y.a.1 xoanjaas, while here it begins, avros
tx^akuiv 'egco ndvras xrti xoarqaas. As lv.(ta}.tuv is rendered by
the finite verb " he put out," the next participle (y.oaif,aas)
may be most properly rendered by its English equivalent.
m "called out;" sycovrjas. So Rob. (Lex., in loco, yaiveto),
" to call out, cry out, exclaim." Penn, M. See v. 8, note.
" Maiden ; " 'H nais. So (B. V.) v. 51. Bob. (Lex.), " a
girl, maiden." Camp., Penn, Angus, Kend. Euphony renders
this preferable to " maid."
" rise ; " fyeioov. " Bise," instead of " arise," is the render-
ing of this verb (E. V.) Matt. 24 : 7, 11 ; 26 : 46. Mark 4:27;
10 : 49. John 5 : 8. 1 Cor. 15 : 32. Eev. 11 : 1.
" returned ; " IneoTgeys. Thorn., "Wesley, Norton, Camp.,
Scarlett, Dick., Penn, Kend., Thelwall, M. Eobinson (Lex., in
verbo).
9 " rose ; " areaTrj. Thelwall, M. See note on " rise," in this
verse.
* " immediately ; " naon^ofjfta. Kend., Norton, Campbell,
Scarlett, Dickinson, Angus, Thelwall, M. In the parallel, Mark
5 : 42, the adverb cvd-ecos is placed before the verb, thus, sv&ecas
avTJa-rri, " immediately rose."
1 " that something should be given her to eat ; " avrfj So&f/vaf
yayeTv. So E. V. of Mark 5 : 43 (So&rjvni avrfj yayelv}.
Angus, Penn, "Wakefleld, Norton. As "something" is really a
supplement (rl subaudtiur), it has been italicized, as in Wakef.
It should be so distinguished in the parallel, Mark 5 : 43. See
Bevision of Mark 6 : 37, note.
1 " no one ; " m Ssvl. Thorn., Norton, Scarlett, Wakefield,
Sharpe, Penn, Kend., Thelwall, M.
" what had been done ; " to ysyovos. Wakef., Penn, Angus,
M. See v. 35, note. The perfect is sometimes used for the plu-
Trollope, Gram., ji50,
perfect, as in Luke 1 : 22. John 20 : 18.
p. 133. Wiuer, g 34, 3, note by Stuart.
a " calling together ; " ovyxaleociftevos. Wesley, Penn, Kend.,
Thelwall, M. The participial construction (" being called ") is
adopted by Camp., Dick., Scarlett, Angus.
b The reading of the Textus Eeceptus, /ua&ijras mnov, is
canceled by Griesb., Knapp, Theile, Tiscliend., Kuiuoel. Schott
remarks : " Quae vnlgo post S<6Sey.a adduntur, find'rjras avroii
desunt in cdd. multis (6 unc.) verss., Pesch., Sahid, Arm., Slav.,
eorumque loco cdd. IS minusc. plures et versiones habent cato-
oToiovg, glossema agnovimus cum Griesb. aliisque." Bloomf.:
" These words, not found in very many of the best MSS., several
Versions, and some Fathers, are canceled by almost every Editor
from Wetstein to Scholz. Some MSS., too, and those Versions,
which have not fia&. avrov, have &rco<n6).ovs avrov. Nothing,
therefore, can be plainer than that both are from the margin. It
may be said, indeed, that these words are confirmed by Matt.
10 : 1. But it is more probable that they have been introduced
from thence, since better reasons may be imagined for their
insertion than for their omission." In addition, it is worthy of
remark, that ol ScoSsxa simply occurs at v. 12, ch. 8 : 1 ; 18 : 31,
and in other instances. Syriac, oiZjjal^j^ (" his twelve"). The
usual custom of the Syriac translator being to suffix the pronoun,
when the article occurs with a noun in the Greek text, his ren-
dering is really equivalent to " the twelve." Tyndale, Cranmer,
Wesley, Camp., Norton, " the twelve ; " De Wette, " die Zwolfe."
Eobinson (Harmony) brackets /la&qras avrov.
" " the demons ; " jta.tna. to, Sai/tovca. Norton, Kendrick,
Camp., Sharpe, Wesley, Thelwall. G. Fr., S. Fr., and De Sacy,
" tons les demons ; " Iber. and Span., " todos los demonios ; "
Diodati and Ital., "tutti i demoni." The Belgic retains the
article, " de Duivelen." In the parallel, Matt. 10 : 1, the article
is omitted before nviv/ia-tcov axa&aprcov ; but it is inserted in
Mark 6 : 7, icav nveuiiatiav rcov axa&aorcov.
96
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IX.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
the kingdom of God, and to heal
the sick.
3 And he said unto them. Take
nothing for your journey, neither
staves, nor scrip, neither bread,
neither money ; neither have two
coats apiece.
4 And whatsoever house ye
enter into, there abide, and thence
depart.
5 And whosoever will not re-
ceive you, when ye go out of that
city, shake off the very dust from
your feet for a testimony against
them.
GREEK TEXT.
TOV Oeov, /cat i
TOVS acrdevovvTas. 3 KOU etVe
Trpos avrovs, yev aipere es
rrjv odov fJ-r/Te pa/38ovs, /J.r/Te
aprov, fj.r)re ap-yv-
a Svo xiravas e'^etv.
piov, [j.r]Te ava
4 /cat els rjv av O'IKLCHV
e'/cet yueVere, /cat eKtlOev ee
/i 5 v */ * ^ & '/*
aoe. /cat OCTOL av /nrj oegcovrou
oaro Trs TTO-
Xecos eKeivr/s, /cat rov Kovioprov
oaro TUIV TroSStv vp.S)v a
re, es fj-aprvpiov eir O.VTOVS.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
preach the kingdom of God,
and to heal the sick. And he 3
said to them, Take nothing for
"the journey, neither 'staff, f nor
*bag, nor bread, nor money,
nor have two coats apiece.
And ""whatever house ye enter, 1 4
there remain, and thence de-
part. And 'whoever 'shall not 5
receive you, when ye go out
'from that city, shake off ra even
the dust from your feet for a
testimony against them. And 6
d " the journey ; " -cijv 6S6v. It is not necessary to regard
irp> as a substitute for the possessive pronoun here. In the
parallel, Mark 6 : 8, the language is simply sis 6Scv, where, in
rendering, the supplement " their " is necessary before " journey,"
and is, therefore, properly employed in the E. V. In the passage
beforj us, the article is used by Sharpe, Wakef., Penn. Syriac,
jliojl. (Murd.," for the journey"). Heb. N. Test., <qv&. Belg.,
" den weg ; " Luther and De "Wette, " den Weg ; " Danish;
" Beien ; " G. Fr., " pour le voyage ; " S. Fr., " le chemin ; "
Iber. and Span., " el camino ; " Diodati, " lo cammino ; " Ital,
" pel viaggio."
" staff." Instead of dpSovs of the Text. Recept, $d/3Sov is
the reading adopted by Griesbach, Tischendorf, Knapp, Theile,
Tittmann, Lachmann, Scholz. Kuinoel : " 'PapSov, ita cum codd.
prastantissimis h. 1. ut Matt. 10 : 10 pro dfiovs legendum est."
Schott : " Pro vulg. $afl8ovs (quod correctionem sapit, qua verba
Christi cum Marc. 6 : 8 prorsus componerentur) cum Griesb.
aliisque recepp. a^Sov ex codd. permultis (7 unc.) verss., Pesch.,
Arr., Pers. Sahid., JBth., Arm., Slav., Vulg., It." Bloomfield :
" Many MSS. have ^a/SSov, which is preferred by almost all the
recent Editors. By the way, it may be remarked that in Matt.
10 : 10, the best Editors have adopted ^d/3Sov." See Bloomf. (in
loco citato).
' " nor ; " /eyre. This word occurs five times in this passage.
It is appropriately rendered by " neither " in E. V., in the first
instance. In the others, it should be rendered uniformly by
"nor." Norton, Camp.. Sharpe, Scarlett, "Wakef., Kend., M.,
Angus render this word " nor " in all those instances, except the
first. Bob. (Lex., in verbo) : " Repeated, /tyre . . . /ajrs, neither
. . . nor, before different parts of the same clause."
f " bag ; " nriQav. Norton, Campbell, Angus, Pechy, Eob.
(Lex., on Mark 6 : 8). Kuinoel (on Matt. 10 : 10) : "ITfaa. sac-
cus coriaceus, quo pastores et viatores panem atque cibos gestare
solebant." So Judith 13 : 10, Kal h>e/3alct> avrriv sis frjv n-fj^av
rear ^(Oftarcav caiTijs (E. V.), "And she put it in her bag of
meal." Ammonius (cited by Kuinoel) : "xij
qov 6 Ini itav aifuov tps^ovaiv ol izotfieves"
pouch for victuals," etc.
a(tg> Sftotaiv aetxsa pdAAezo
nvxva ycoyaAeijv' iv Se orqoyos TJSV
a.- Ssfta i\
Liddell, " a leathern
Odyss. 18 : 108.
" Scrip " is obsolete.
h " whatever." Thomson, Norton, Campbell, Sharpe, Scarlett,
Penn, Kend., Angus, M. " Whatsoever " is obsolete.
1 " Into," after " enter," is superfluous. It is omitted by
Wesley, Norton, Scarlett, Dick., Penn, Kend., Angus, M. It
was retained in Mark 6 : 10, where the arrangement of the sen-
tence (as revised) is different.
I " whoever." Present usage demands this orthography of the
pronoun.
fc " shall not receive ; " fir/ Segtovrai (first aorist subj.). Dick.,
Wakef. So properly rendered in the parallel (E. V.) Mark 6 : 11.
" Will not" conveys the idea of determination; while mere future
action is the thought in the text. This is one of the instances in
wliich the E. ~V~. is faulty by giving a different rendering, where
the Greek is the same. The aorist subjunctive, here, has the force
of the fut. indicative. Stuart, Gram., 142, p. 232 : " The aorist
subj. is employed when possible future action is designated."
Troll., Gram., 53, p. 143 : " In negative prepositions, the con-
junctive (subj.) is used with ov (ty instead of the future; as
Matt. 16 : 28, ov firj yevacavrai &avdrov."
i "from that city;" coco rrjs itoietas exetvqs. This is the
usual sense of onto. It should not be confounded with &t. So
Tyndale (1562). Vulg., Erasmus, Mont., "de civitate ilia;"
Iber., " de aquella ciudad."
even ; " ai. Camp., Dick., Kend., M. Vulg., Erasmus,
Mont., Beza, Castalio, " etiam ; " Schott, " vel ; " Belg., " ook ; "
S. Fr., " meme ; " Iber., " hasta ; " Diodati, " eziandio ; " Dan.,
" endog." Heb. N. Test., na. Syr., ^a] (" even," Murdock).
THE GOSPEL AC COBBING TO LUKE. CHAP. IX.
97
KING JAMES' VERSION.
6 And they departed, and went
through the towns, preaching the
gospel, and healing every where.
7 Now Herod the tetrarch
heard of all that was done by
him : ; and .he was perplexed, be-
cause that it was said of some,
that John was risen from the
dead;
8 And of some, that Elias had
appeared ; and of others, that
one of the old .prophets was risen
again.
9 And Herod said, John have
J beheaded; but who is this of
whom I .hear such things? And
he desired to see him.
GREEK TEXT.
o Kara
ras Koalas, evayyeAt^ojuei'Oi /cat
7 "HKovae 8e 'JfpcoSrjf o re-
- TO, yivofjieva vw avrov
' Kai dirjTropei, Sid TO Ae-
yecrdat viro TIVCOV, "On 'Icodvvrjs
qypTOU K VCKpCOV 8 V7TO TWCOV
e, OTI S\ia.s tydvr)' aAAajv
f, OTI irpo^Ttjs elf T>V dp-
dvecrTrj. 9 Kcu dirtv o
, ^Icodvvrjv eyto a?re/ce-
(f)aAi(ra' TLS Se ecrnv OVTOS, irepi
ov eyco O.KOVCO rotavTa;
avTov.
REVISED VERSION.
they departed, and "went
through tlie country "from vil-
lage to village, ^preaching the
good news, and healing every-
where. Now Herod, 1 " the te-
trarch, heard of all that was
done by him ; and he was per-
plexed, because it was said 'by
some, 'John hath risen from the
dead ; and 'by some, "Elijah
hath appeared, and by others,
One of the old prophets "hath,
risen up. And Herod said,
John X I beheaded ; but who
is this of whom I hear such
things ? And y he sought to see
" went through the country ; " Sifiqiotno. This is a case
where the accusative is implied and governed by Sia, in composi
tion with eg%o/tai. Rob.. (Lex., Scs^xoftai) : "Absol. with accus
impl. as TTJV yijv, trjv nof.iv, trjv %d>(iav, i. e., through the
adjacent country, the region round about (around) ; Acts 8 : 4
40, Siepxo/tsvos evayysfa&To ras Ttoleis naoae (E. V., ' passing
through, he preached in all the cities ') ; with xaTaxco/t
Luke 9 : 6." This verb is often followed by an accusative of
place, as in Lube 19 : 1. Acts 12 : 10 ; 13 : 6 ; 15 : 3, 41.
Beza and Castalio, " obierant ; " Schott, " obierunt." Leverett :
"Obeo, to visit by passing from place to place, travel through:
As Sia does not refer to ncofias, it is obvious that the supplement
representing the object of Sia, should be inserted. As an alter-
native rendering, " they went on." So the Dan., " droge frem."
" from village to village ; " xata tag xcopag. Angus. Beza
and Schott, " singulos vices ; " De Wette, " Dorf fur Dorf ; " G.
and S. Fr., " de bourgade en bourgade ; " De Sacy, " de village
en village ; " Iber., .".de aldea en aldea ; " Eheims, " from town to
town." Kara is here used distributively, as in Acts 20 : 20.
Bretschneider (y.aia) : " De tempore ac de loco dicitur distribu-
tion, ita ut ordinem et vices indicet; de loco y.aTa. ronovs in
singulis tocis, Matt. 24 : 7. Luc. 8 : 1, xaia. noliv, per singulos
urbes, oppidatim, Stadt fur Stadt, xara y.iofirjv, vicqtim." The
rendering of some translators, " all the villages," or, " every
village," is less accurate than " from village to village." Rob.
(Lex., xcofiij), "a village, hamlet."
P " preaching the good news ; " evayyeL6/tevoi. See ch.
4: 18,. note.
' As "the tetrarch" seems to delne " Herod," a comma is
inserted after the proper name.
' " by some ; " vno iivtov. Wesley, Shai-pe, Scarjett, Penn,
Dick., Kend., Angus, Thelwall, M. So often in N. Test. " Of,"
in the sense demanded here, is obsolete.
" " John hath risen ; " "Ort 'Icaavvrjs tyr/ye^rai. The particle
on. is used here simply as a sign of quotation. For the render-
ing of eyr/yey-tai, see ch. 7 : 16, note on this verb. Robinsou
(Lex.) says : " Pass. perf. eyqyegftat, and aor. 1. rjyei>&?iv, to have
been roused, and hence to arise, to Iiave risen." Hence both
these tenses are usually active in signification. So in Rev. of
Mark 6 : 14, ijys^&r] is rendered " hath risen."
' "bysome." See.noter.
u " Elijah hath appeared ; " "On 'Silas eyavrj. On the use
of STI. see note s. The aorist icpavrj has here the force of a
perfect. Buttmann, Gram., 137, 3: "When the reference or
relation of time is sufficiently clear from the context, the aorist
can be employed instead of the perfect." Kuhner, f 256, 2,
Rem. 1 : " The aorist is often employed even instead of the per-
fect, when the relation of the past to the present need not be
expressed emphatically." Winer, \ 34, 4, a, note 2. The specifi-
cation of the time is made by the perf. fyjjye^rai, v. 7.
r "On, before jt^oyujr^s, is used as in v. 7. See note on that
verse, supra.
w "hath risen up;" avearri. See note, supra, on
Up " may perhaps be pleonastic here ; still it makes a distinc-
tion between the verbs, analogous to .that of iyrjyeg-cai, and
1 " I beheaded ; " aitey.eyahoa. Thorn., Camp., Wakefield,
Kend., M. So this word is properly rendered in the parallel
(E. V.) Mark 6 : 16. The aorist, thus rendered by the English
imperfect (its usual equivalent), corresponds with our <usus lo-
quendi.
' " he sought ; " Kfytci. Wesley, Sharpe, Kend., Angus, M.,
JThelwall (" was seeking"). This verb occurs in some of its ra-
lections one hundred and eighteen times in the N. T. It is render-
ed in the E. T. by " seek," one hundred and seven times. In six
of the eleven exceptions, " seek " is the more appropriate equiva-
ent. Vulg., Mont., Eras., " qucerebat ; " Belg., " hij zocht ; "
De Wette, " er suchte ; " G. and S. Fr., " il eherchajt ; " Daa.,
98
THE GOSPEL ACCOKDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IX.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
10 And the apostles, when they
were returned, told him all that
they had done. And he took
them, and went aside privately
into a desert place, belonging to
the city called Bethsaida.
11 And the people, when they
knew it, followed him : and he
received them, and spake unto
them of the kingdom of God, and
healed them that had need of
healing.
12 And when the day began to
wear away, then came the twelve,
and said unto him. Send the multi-
tude away, that they may go into
the towns and country round
10
GREEK TEXT.
Kai. VTrocrTptyavTZs ol O.TTO-
diT)yrj<ravTO aiiTcS ocra
Kai 7ra/jaAa/3o>z> av-
TOVS, vTre^coprjcre K.O.T iSlav etr
TOTTOV eprjjjiov TroAew?
11 ol
ijKoXovdrfarav aurcp* KCLL
avrovs, e'AaAef avrols
irepL Tijf fiacriXeias TOV Oeov,
KCLI TOVS xpeiav ^ovras 0epa-
' ' ~ 12 e TT S> r ' '
Tretay iaro. L oe
r/pa.TO
8e ol
Xvaov TOV o%\.ov, u/a
els ray /cu/cAa) /ceo/uay KOLL TOVS
aypovs Ka.TaXv(rco(ri, /cat
eltrov
REVISED VERSION.
him. 'And the apostles return- 10
ed, and "they related to him
b what great things they had
done. And he took them and
'withdrew privately into a des-
ert place belonging to d a city
called Bethsaida. And the 11
crowds, when they knew it, fol-
lowed him: and he received
them, and spoke to them 'con-
cerning the kingdom of God,
and healed those who had need
of healing. 'Now the day be- 12
gan g to decline ; and the twelve
''came near and said to him,
Send the crowd away, that they
may go into the villages and
country 'around, and lodge, and
" han sogte ; " Diodati, " cercava." " He desired " (copied in the
E. V. from Tyndale) originated in the rendering of Luther, " be-
gehrte."
1 "And the apostles returned ; " vaoaroc\pavrss ol ctnootohoi.
Thorn., Norton, Tyndale, Cran., Geneva. Luther, " Und die
Apostel kamen wieder." De Wette, " Und es kehreten die Apo-
stel zuriick." Alternative rendering, "having returned." So
Iber., " I habiendose vuelto los enviados."
* " they related ; " Strjyyaavro. Scarlett, Thelwall. Tulg.,
Mont., Eras., Beza, Schott, " narraverunt ; " Costal., " narra-
runt ; " Belg., " verhaalden ; " Luther and De "Wette, " erzahl-
ten ; " G. and S. 3?r., " raconterent ; " Iber., " contaron ; " Dan.,
"fortolte." Liddell (in verbo), "to set out in detail, describe,
narrate." Bretsch. : " Proprius ad finem rem perduco narrando ;
LXX sjepras pro 130, enarro, expono et quidem rem oimiem,
Marc. 5 : 16. Luc. 9 ao. Act. 8 : 33, etc." This verb should
be distinguished, in translation, from several others, as a.va.ye.'U.ta,
ixlaAico, eitto, leyco, Aaieio, which are rendered by " tell," in
the E. V. Syr., o_JL2>-fc,j (related, or narrated).
b " -what great things ; " oaa. Angus, M. So (E. V.) Mark
3 : 8. Bob. (Lex.) : " Neut. oaa sometimes expresses also ad-
miration, how many and great things, as in Eng. what things,
q. d., what great things ! So generally of great or unusual deeds,
Luke 9:10." Bretsch.: " Dicitur de qwntitate interna: ita
neutrum oaa quam inaqua, quanta, Marc. 3 : 8.
"withdrew;" vmxeopqoe. Norton, Sharpe, Wakef., Thel-
wall, M. See ch. 5 : 16, note. Bretsch. (in loco], "me subduco,
secedo." Hob. (Lex.).
d " a city." Holciog being anarthrous, this is the proper
rendering. So Tyndale. The definite article first appeared in
Oanmer's Yersion. Norton, Wakef., Thelwall, M.
" concerning ; " ite(il (cum genii.). Thorn., Camp., Wakef.,
Thelwall, M.
f " Now ; " St. The particle is merely continuative here, like
" now " in English. See Bob. (Lex.).
E " decline ; " xlivstv. "Wesley, Norton, Scarlett, Penn, Dick.,
Keud., Thelwall, M. Rob. (Lex., m verbo), " to decline, spoken
of the day." There is an ellipsis of sis ioTti^av after this verb,
when thus used. Compare Judges 19 : 9 (Sept.), qad-cvijoev
f/fiega sis rffv soxeqav. Amian. Exped. Alex. Ill : 4, lyxli-
vavros 8e TOV rjkiov Is eanegav. Luke 24 : 29. Jer. 6 : 4
(Septuagint), xe-Alxe fj fjfis^a. Lidd. : " Later, in trans, in act. a
rfl.ios xl.ivei, rj fjfteqa tiUvsi, the sun, the day declines." Vulg.,
Eras., " declinare." Syr., )1 C^V (Tnf. PinI, "to decline"). Heb.
N. Test, m'o3. Iber., " a declinar ; " Ital., " a declinare."
h " came near ; " nftoael&ovtes. Murdock. Syriac, oo^j.
Heb. N. Test, SIBSI In the parallel, Mark 6 : 35, the pronoun
follows the participle, thus, npooeid-ovTss avrra ol fta&tjTai ai-
rov ifyovaiv, " his disciples came to him, and said." In the
passage before us, the arrangement is different, itgoael&ovres Se
ol SioSsxa eljcov avrai. To avoid the disagreeable repetition
of " him," and yet retain the force of noog, the rendering "came
near " is adopted instead of " came near to him." Hob. (Lex.,
in verbo), "to come to, or near to any place, or person, to ap-
proach." See ch. 7 : 18, note. So this verb is rendered (E. V.)
Acts 7 : 31, " he drew near," it^oac^oftivov 3s O.VTOV. Acts
8 : 29, " Go near," 2T ? 6ffsl&s. Heb. 10 : 22, " Let us draw
near,"
1 " around ;" xv-Ay. Penn, Scarlett ("round"), Sharpe. Rob.
(Lex.), " as adv. around." 'JEv and xst/tsvos are understood here.
" Round about," by which this word is rendered, when used thus,
in the E. V., is a tautology.
THE GOSPEL ACCOBDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IX.
99
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
about, and lodge, and get victuals :
for we are here in a desert place.
13 But he said unto them, Give
ye them to eat. And they said,
We have no more but five loaves
and two fishes ; except we should
go and buy meat for all this peo-
ple.
14 (For they were about five
thousand men.) And he said to
his disciples, Make them sit down
by fifties in a company.
15 And they did so, and made
them all sit down.
16 Then he took the five loaves,
and the two fishes, and looking up
to heaven, he blessed them, and
GREEK TEXT,
f
OTL o>5e ev
13 77? \
MjlTT O6
TOTTCj) (rfJLV. MjlTT O6 7T/3O?
aVTOVS, AoT O.VTOLS VfJL^LS (f>O.-
yelv* 01 Be elTrov, OVK el<rii>
irXelov 77 irevre aprot
Svo i-^dves, el PJTJTL TTOpevGevres
Tqfj.eTs d-yopaaca/JLev elf irdvTa rov
Xaov TOVTOV
yap axrel avSpes
Eirre Se Trpoy rovs /xa^ras- aii-
TOV, Ka.ra.KXiva.re. avrov? t<Xi<rias
> \ r 15 77- \ > /
ava TrevT-qKOvra. H.O.L eiroi-
ovrca, KOU aveKXivav a
16 A.a.fi(av Se TOVF
aprovs KOU rovy Svo l-^dvas, ava-
fiXtyaf els TOV ovpavbv, evXo-yrj-
crev avTOVs, KCU Kare/cAacre, KOU
EEVISED VERSION.
'find 'provisions ; 'for here, we
are in a desert place. But he 13
said to them, Give ye them
"something to eat. And they
said, "We have no more "than
five loaves and two fishes ; "un-
less we should go and buy
pfood for all this people. (For 14
they were about five thousand
men.) And lie said to his dis-
ciples, 'Make them recline r in
companies "of fifty= And they 15
did so, and made them all 're-
cline. And "when he had taken 16
the five loaves and the two
fishes, Y he looked up to heaven,
w and blessed them, and broke,
I "find;" evfcoaiv. "Wesley, Norton ("to find"), Penn,
"Wakef., Angus, Thelwall, M. Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, Schott,
" inveniant ; " Belg., " vinden ; " Luther and De "Wette, " finden ; "
G. Pr., " pour trouver ; " S. Pr., " trouvent ; " Iber. and Span.,
" hallen ; " Diodati and Ital., " trovino ; " Kuinoel, " reperiant."
Heb. N. Test., KiSiA. Syr., ^^-.Ti
k " provisions ; " emaiTiopov. Kend., M. This word occurs
only in this instance. It is desirable to distinguish it from flpca-
/tara, which is sometimes rendered " victuals," and sometimes
" meat," in the E. V. Bloomf. says : " This word is properly a
military term, and literally signifies a provisioning."
i "for here." Sharpe. The thought demands this arrange-
ment of the words, according to our ttsus loqucndi. So De
Wette, " denn Her sind wir an einem wiisten Orte ; " Iberian,
" porque aqui estamos en un lugar despoblado ; " Ital., " poiche
qui noi siamo in luogo deserto ; " Beza, " nam hie in loco deserto
sumus ; " "Vulg. and Erasmus, " quia hie in loco deserto sumus."
The E. V. follows the arrangement of Tyndale, as he did Luther's,
" denn wir sind hier in der "Wiiste."
m " something." " Give ye them to eat " is an imperfect sen-
tence. Our usus loquendi demands that the object of "give"
should be expressed. This object is, therefore, indicated as a
supplement. There is an ellipsis of rt. Compare 2 Kings 4 : 42,
Sept., y.al elite dors rep ^.ncijJ y.al sa&isrcaaav, XKi flitev 6 ?.et-
rovpyos ftvrov Ti 8d> rovro Ivamiov cxarbv avSgaiv ; xoi elite
^fos tea ).acS y.al eaS'ienaociv. In the Geneva translation of
this passage, the ellipsis has been supplied thus, " Give it unto
the people, that they may eat." In the parallel, Mark 6 : 36, rl
is expressed, rl yiitg yaytoaiv OVK e%ovotr.
* " than ; " ^. Wesley, Sharpe, Norton, Scarlett, Penn, Dick.,
Wakefield, Kend., Thelwall, M. So often in E. V., where this
particle is comparative. Eob. (Lex.).
" unless ; " el ftjjre. Norton, Sharpe, Camp., Scarlett, Penn,
Dick., "Wakef., Kendrick, M. Strictly speaking, these words are
equivalent to nisi fortasse, " unless perhaps." This phrase, how-
ever, is not consonant with our idiom. See Hob. and Bretsch.
(Lexx.).
i" " food ; " pgcofiaTa. Norton, Kend., Dick., Thelwall, M.
" Meat " is no longer used as a generic term for all that is eaten.
Bob. (Lex., pQtofia), " eatables, food."
' " Make them recline ; " KaTaxtivars avrovs. See ch. 7 : 36,
note.
r " in companies ; " xhatas. Wakef., Kendrick, M., Angus,
Norton, Sharpe, Penn. This is an accusative of manner, and haa
the force of an adverb. Kuinoel (in loco) : "Ad xhaias subau-
dieudum v.ara., sed xhaia. est discubitus, ordo discubentium."
Kiihimr, Gram., g 278, 3, Eem. 1. Trollope, Gram., p. 94, g40, 5,
Obs. 16, Bos. xara.
* " of fifty ; " ava trtevrijxovra. Norton, Wakef., Kendrick,
Angus. Bretsclmeider (Lex., ava) : " Vocabulis numeri junctum
distributive dicitur et per nomina numeralia distributiva expli-
candum est." S. Fr., " de cinquante ; " Ital., " di cinquanta ; "
Belg., " elite van vijftig."
" recline." See v. 14, note.
" when he had taken ; " la.p<av. So (E. V.) Mark 8 : 41.
In narration, the aorist often has the force of the pluperfect.
Buttmann, Gram., g!37, 3. Kiihner, Gram., 256, 2, Eem. 1.
Crosby, Gram., 580.
T " he looked up ; " ava/tteyas. So (E. V.) Mark 6 : 41.
Kendrick. Belgic, " zag hij op ; " Yulg., " respexit." Syr., j^
("intuitusest").
w " and blessed them ; " evloytjaev avrovs. As " he " occurs
before " looked up," it is not necessary to express it here, the
100
THE UOSPEL AC CORDING- TO LUKE. CHAP. IX.
KING JAMES' YERSION.
brake, and gave to the disciples
to set before the multitude.
17 And they did eat, and were
all filled : and there was taken
up of fragments that remained to
them twelve baskets.
18 And it came to pass, as he
was alone praying, his disciples
were with him ; and lie asked
them, saying, Whom say the peo-
ple that I am ?
GREEK TEXT.
TOO
17 KCU
rot? p,adTf)Tals irapUTidevat
e'0ayoz> KCU
irdvTes- KOU rjpdrf
TO 7reptar(rV(rav O.VTOIS KX.aa-fJ.0.-
TCOV. Kcxbtvoi S<a8cKa.
,
18
KAI eyeWro
TW evai
O.VTOV 7rpoo-ev^o/j,evov Ka.Tttp.ovas,
<TWTJ(rav avTCp ol fJLO.drjTai' KOU
eirrjpa>T'r)o~ev OVTOVS, Xeycav, Tiva
EEVISED YEESION.
and gave "them to the disciples
to set before the crowd. And IT
"they ate and 'were all satis-
fied ; and there "were taken up
of fragments, b which were left
to them, twelve baskets. And 18
it came to pass, as he was pray-
ing 'apart, liis disciples were
with him ; and he asked them,
saying, a Who do the crowds
verbs being connected by " and." This rendering is literal
("blessed them"), yet it is believed that the thought may be
expressed by this rendering, "he blessed God for them," or,
" thanked God for them." In this case, " them " (avrovs) refers
to "bread" and "fishes" (aorot xal Svo i%&vcs). Kuinoel (in
loco) : " Deo pro iis egit : avrovs pro Irf avrovs, refertur ad
afTovs et iX&vas. Nempe apud Hebneos moris erat, cum cibum
capere vellent, ut recitarent antea precationem, cujus initum erat
JTirn rmx t]1"i2 quibus verbis Deum laudabant, et pro potu cibo-
que gratias agebant. Hinc factnm est, ut -rpa et svloyelv, quod
ei respondet, ad ipsum cibum potumque transferrentur, ita, ut
addito casu nominum rei quarto, significarent Leo gratias agere
pro cibo et potu, atque idem valerent quod SV^KOWTSIV, ut 1 Sam.
9 :13 (ovros i&l.oyel tijv &valm'), Sept. Heb. (mftt Tili^ iMfl).
1 Cor. 10 :16 (TO noir^qiov rifs svloylas 5 sv).oyovftv}." Bloom-
fleld approves this view of Kuincel. In. the parallel, John 6 : 11,
svzaoiarrjoas ("giving thanks") is used instead of nvloyrjoe
("he blessed"). It seems from this, that the words were used
by the Evangelists as synonymous. So in Matt. 26 : 26, the
same act is indicated by cv-/,notar^oas, thus, iaficov b 'Jqaovs
tov a^rov, y.a.1 svioyr/aas, t.y."l.aas xai iSiSov roTs fitt&tjTals.
Trollops (Analecta) on Matt. 14 : 19, has this note : " Evioyrjae
scil. tov S-sov, not roiis a^covs." In the other miracle of the
same kind, related in the next chapter (v. 36), instead of svkoyti-
aas, we have Evxa^iarrjaas. See also Mark 8 : 6. Luke 1 : 64
(sv),oyiov lov @sof) ; 2 : 28. John 6 : 11, 23 (evzagtoTqoaVTos
cov xuolovj. Acts 27 : 35 ().afiiov Sorov, fv'^a^iorrjas nji Qeqi).
James 3:9 (iv avrfj evioyovftei* tov Osov y.ou sraTepa). In the
accounts of the Last Supper also, the act is indicated by one
Evangelist by evinystv, another uses tv%apioTeTv. The two
words are, therefore, plainly synonymous. "With regard to the
objection, that tv),oytiv is applied in Luke 9 : 16, and 1 Cor.
10 : 16, to the things distributed, it is replied, that the expression
in those places is elliptical, more Hebrasorum. Thus in 1 Sam.
9 : 13. LXX. evloynZ ir t v &voiav, for evhoyeT tbv d'eov vite^
tf/v -d-valav. Comp. Heb. 2 : 17. In Luke 9 : 16, indeed, some
MSS. read evloycae fa" avrovg. The " cup of blessing," 1 Cor.
10 : 16, is the cup for which we give thanks, according to the
custom of the Jews, etc. In view of these facts, the alternative
reading is submitted, " he blessed God for them." Bob. (Lex.,
evloysco) : " With ace. of thing ; in N. Test, only of food, a meal,
a cup (o bless, i. e., to ask God's blessing upon, gener. e. g. a(>-
itrvs, Luke 9 : 16 ; ace. implied Matt. 14 : 19. Mark 6 : 41 ;
8 : 7." Bretsch. (Lex., in -verbo, eodem) : " De laudibus Dei cum
gratiarum actione conjuncta, ad usum Hebr. ^p*, in epulis,
potissimum sacris, Matt. 14 : 19 ; 26 : 26. Marc. 6 : 41 ; 8 : 7,
14, 22. Luc. 24 : 30. 1 Cor. 10 : 16, TO itorfoiov 6 cvioyov-
fiev, super quod Deum laudamus, formulam benedictionis effamur."
1 " them." Wakefield, Penn, Scarlett, Camp., Norton. This
supplement is necessary to render the sentence complete. So
in the parallel (E. V.) Mark 6 : 41. In Matt. 14 : 19, the ellipsis
(of this passage) is supplied by TOVS avrovs.
7 " they ate ; " syayov. Sharpe, Kend. The verb is rendered
in the imperfect, without " did," by Norton, "Wakefield, Scarlett.
There is no emphasis here, which demands the form " did eut."
* " were satisfied ; " exogtaod-rjoav. Thorn., Wesley, Nor-
ton, Scarlett, Camp., Penn, Dick., Kend. So (B. V.) Mark 8 : 4.
De "Wette, " wurden gesattigt ; " Belg., " wierden ^verzaddigt ; "
S. Pr., " fnrent rassasies ; " Diodati, " furon saziati." See ch.
6 : 21, note. In the parallel, John 6 : 12, the E. V. properly
has " were filled," but there the verb is h/en).f l a3'iioav.
" " were taken up ; " %$&]. Wesley, Wakef. (" taken away"),
Dick., Gray (note on Angus). The idiom of our language obliges
us to render the verb in the plural, as "baskets" is its nominative.
b " which were left ; " to nfataoevaav. So in the parallel,
Mark 8 : 8, E. V. (neotaaevftara), and Matt. 15 : 37 (10 acoio-
aevov). Uniformity of rendering demands this phrase. I suggest,
as a more harmonious and familiar expression, this form of the
entire sentence, "And twelve baskets of the fragments which
they left, were taken up." This is hardly more free than that in
the text, and a change in the order affords a sentence more agree-
able to our usus loquendi. Nearly like this, Norton, " and twelve
baskets full of the fragments that were left, were collected."
Wakefield, " twelve baskets of remaining fragments were taken
away."
* " apart ; " xaraftovag. Thomson, Wesley, Penn, Camp., M.
Liddell (Lex.). The verbal contradiction produced by " alone,"
followed by the declaration " his disciples were with him," strikes
every reader. " Apart " suggests the thought, that he was
separated from the-crowds which usually attended him.
d " Who." " Whom " is ungrammatical. The error has been
corrected by Scarlett, Norton, Dick., A. and G. Camp., Kend.,
Angus, M.
THE tfOSPBL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IX.
101
KING JAMES' VERSION".
19 They answering, said, John
the Baptist ; but some say, Elias ;
and others say, that one of the
old prophets is risen again.
20 He said unto them, But
whom say ye that I am ? Peter
answering, said, The Christ of
God.
21 And lie straitly charged
them, and commanded them to
tell no man that thing,
22 Saying, The Son of man
must suffer many things, and be
rejected of the elders, and chief
priests, and scribes, and be slain,
and be raised the third day.
GREEK TEXT.
fj. Xeyowiv ol oj^Xoi elvai; 19 01
Se onroKpidevres zlirov, 'Icoavvyv
TOV BotfjrTicrTr]v aXXoL oe 'HXi-
av. a'AAoi 8e } OTI Trpo^rjTrjs rty
^ ' / > / 20 Tn 1 ?
TO>V ap-^a.L(av avecrrrj. Jlarz
e,\ > < <V> i\ / i /
oe avTOis, I fj.ei$ oe TWO. /tie Ae-
yere elvcu; 'ATTOKideis oe o
elvcu;
cure, Tov Xpio-Tov TOV
Oeov. 21 'O 8e
av-
roty jra.pyyyeiXe fit^oevi eiirelv
22 ' v a S~i S> ~ v
---" (Jrt, oei TOV
TOVTO,
viov TOV av6pa>irov TroXXa TTOL-
deiv, Kal a.TroSoKi.fJ.ao'B^vat O.TTO
T>V Trpeo-fivTepcov /cat ap^iepecov
V / \ J
KCU
BEVISED VERSION.
say that I am ? 'And they, 19
answering, said, John the f ln>
merser ; but Bothers, h Elijah ;
and others say that one of the
old prophets 'hath risen. And 20
he said to them, But who say
ye that I am? "And Peter,
answering, said, "The Anointed
of God. And m he charged and 21
commanded "them to tell "this
"to no one, saying, The Son of 22
man must suffer many things,
and be rejected ^by the elders,
and chief priests, and scribes,
and r be put to death, and
"And ; " Se. Sharps, Norton, Dick., Wakefield. Belgic,
" ende ; " De Wette, " und ; " S. Fr., " et ; " Iber. and Spanish,
" i ; " Diodati and Ital., " ed." So (E. V.) in the parallels, Matt.
16 : 14, and Mark 8 : 29.
f " Immerser ; " Bamiorfv. See ch, 7 : 20, note. Kuinoel
(on Matt. 3:1): " Icadvvys 6 sMxaiovftevos fiaitTiomjs' accepit
hoc nomen inde, quod Judasos ita in aqua demergere instituit, ut
eos hoc ritv Messise venture obstringeret, v. Act. 19 : 4.
6 " others ; " a'AAot. Scarlett, Norton, A. Camp., Dickinson,
Kend., Thelwall, M., Wiclif. Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, Costal.,
Schott, " alii ; " Belg., " andere ; " De Wette, " andere ; " Dan.,
"andre;" G. Fr., " les autres;" S. Fr,, "d'autres;" Iberian,
" otros ; " Diodati and Ital, " altri." So the E. V. has rendered
aUoi in the next member of the sentence, AA<M Se, " and others."
" Some " requires ztvsg, indefinite.
h The supplement " say " is superfluous. It is not inserted
by the E..V. in .the parallel, Matt. 16 : 14, where the text is the
same (attot. Se *H).la.v). Not employed by Sharpe, Scarlett,
Norton, Dick., Kend., Thelwall, M. No supplement in Belgic,
De Wette, Dan., G. or S. Fr., Iber., Diodati, Ital. It was first
introduced by Wiclif, and copied from his version by Tyndale
and other early translators.
1 "hath risen;" avsart]. Norton ("has risen up"), Dick,
Bob. (Lex., in verbo) : " Intransitive, in the active perf., pluperf.,
and second aorist ; also in mid., to stand up, to rise up, to arise."
On the erroneous use of the auxiliary " to be," instead of " have,"
with intransitives, see ch. 4 : 34, and 7 : 16, notes. On the use
of the aorist for the perfect, Buttm., Gram., g!37 : 3. Kuhner,
Gram., 256, 2, Bern. 1. Crosby, Gram., g 580.
1 " who." See v. 18, note.
" "And ;" Se. So (E. V.) in the parallels, Matt. 16 : 16.
Mark 8 : 29. So also Sharpe, Norton, Penn, Dickinson. Belg.,
" ende ; " Castalio, " et ; " G. and S. Fr., " et ; " Iberian, " i ; "
Diodati and Ital., " e."
i " The Anointed." See ch. 2 : 26, note.
m " he charged ; " b litirt/ttjaas. Sharpe, Wakefield, Penn,
Angus, Murdock. So E. V. in the parallel (caerif^aEv), Mark
8 : 30, and in Matt. 16 : 20. Mark 10 : 48. The adverb " strait-
ly" occurs as a qualifying term with this verb only in this pas-
sage, and Mark 3 : 12. In this latter case, rtoAAa is joined to
the verb (noll.a. enerifta). Hence the adverb "strictly" (E. V.,
" straitly ") should be used. Where the verb is emphatic, its force
is properly expressed, as in the E. V., by " rebuke."
n " them ; " aviois. Penn, M. By this arrangement, the sup-
plement " them " is rendered unnecessary.
" this ; " rov-co. Thorn., Wesley, Scarlett, Norton, Camp.,
Wakef., Dick., Kend., Thelwall, M.
P " to no one ; " ftqSfvi. Thorn., Sharpe, Scarlett, Norton,
Wakef., Penn, Kend., Thelwall, M. Beza, " nulli ; " Schott, " ne
cuiquam ; " Belg., " niemant ; " De Wette, " iiiemandem ; " Dan.,
" Ingen ; " Iber. and Span., " a nadie."
" by ; " anb. Sharpe, Scarlett, Norton, Camp., Wakefield,
Penn, Dick., Kend., Angus, Thelwall, M., Murdock. Kuinoel, on
the parallel, Mark 8 : 31, says : "'Ano positum est pro vito, ut
Matt. 11 : 19." So (E. V.) Matt. 7 : 16. Acts 9 : 13. 2 Cor.
3 : 18 ; 7 : 13. Jude 23. The influence of the Hebrew preposi-
tion -pa, as used for the author of efficient cause whence any thing
proceeds, is obvious, in modifying the usual force of mtb. Gesen.
(Lex., JB). Hos. 7 : 4, rta'tfa i"Hsa llSin, E. V., " an oven heated
by the baker." Tnlg., " clibanus succensus a coquente."
r " be put to death ; " oTtoxiav^vcti. Thorn., Norton. Rob.
(Lex., aitoxreivco) : " Spoken of death as a punishment, to put
to death. Matt. 14 : 5. Mark 8 : 31. Luke 9 : 22. John 5 : 18.
Acts 3 : 15, etc." So (E. V.) Luke 18 : 33. John 11 : 53 ;
12 : 10 ; 18 : 31. Matt. 14 : 5. Liddell (in verbo) : " Of judges
to condemn to death, frequently in Xenophou ; also of the accuser,
Id. Hell., 2, 3, 21 (iroAAois ftsv fy&gas evey.a. omixteivov, itoi-
iov, ' they (i. e. the Thirty Tyrants) put many to
102
THE GOSPEL AC COBBING TO LUKE. CHAP. IX.
KING JAMES' VEBSIOJT.
23 And he said to them all, If
any man will come after me, let
him deny himself, and take up his
cross daily, and follow me.
24 For whosoever will save his
life, shall lose it : but whosoever
will lose his life for my sake, the
same shall save it.
25 For what is a man advan-
taged, if he gain the whole world,
and lose himself, or be cast away ?
26 For whosoever shall be
ashamed of me, and of my words,
of him shall the Son of man be
ashamed, when he shall come in
GREEK TEXT.
yvou, Ka rrj rprr] rjfJ-fpa tyep-
Brivai.
23 "iZXeye Se Trpo? iravras, El
TLS deXei oiTLcrca fj.ov e Xdzlv, airap-
vrjO~acr6(o eavrov, KOI aparco rov
aravpov avrov KaO rnj,fpai>) KOU.
a/c0Aoy#emo fj.oi. 24 os yap av
rrji>
avrov
ewroAecrei avrrjv bs 8 av airo-
rr}v
avrov eveicev
' r 25 /
ovros crcocret avryv. TL
yap ax^eAeirai av9pa>iros,
cras TOV KOcrp-Ov oXov, eavrov 8e
aTroXecras 77
av
26 oy yap
KCU TOV$ euovs
Xoyovs, TOVTOV b v'ios TOV avdpco-
TTOV eTraicr-vdrcreTai, orav
BBVISBD VERSION,
rise 'on the. third day. And 23
he said "to all, If "any one will
come after me, let him deny
himself, and take up his cross
daily, and follow me. For who- 24
ever w would save his life, *shall
lose it, but whoever shall lose
his life, J he will save it. For 25
what'isamanprofitedjifhegain
the whole world, and lose him-
self, or "be condemned ? For 26
whoever shall be ashamed of
me, and of my words, of him
the Son of man "will be asham-
death from enmity, and many because they were rich') ; of the
executioner, to put to death, Herod. 6 : 4 (rovrscav Se ysvofisviav
yaveqcuv, aTCKKtutve iv&avTa itohkovs Heqaeaiv 6 ^Aaraysovris,
' so they being discovered, Artaphernes thereupon put many of
the Persians to death')."
" rise ; " eyef&yvcu. A. and G-. Camp, ("rise again"). The
pass, pert and first aorist have usually an active signification.
Bob. (Lex.), "to arise," "to have risen." See ch. 7 : 16, note.
So (B. V.) Acts 9 : 8. 2 Cor. 5 : 15.
' "on the third day;" 777 r^ltrj fjft^ct. Sharpe, Norton,
"Wakef., Dick., Kend. De "Wette, am dritten Tage ;" Belgic,
" ten derden dage ; " Iber., " al tercer.dia."
u " to all ; " Kfos xdvrag. Wesley, Dick., Thelwall. Belgie,
" tot alien ; " De Wette, " zu alien ; " G. and S. Pr., " a tons ; "
Iber. and Span., " a todos ; " Diodati and Ital., " a tutti." In
the parallel, Matt. 16 : 24, we find 6 "I^aovs sins rots fta&ijrazs
OVTOV" El its . T. L, " Jesus said to his disciples, If any one,"
etc. The narration of Mark is more full, Ttfooxafaodftevos rov
ofyov avv tols fta&qrats avrov, slrtsv avroZs, "Oans &sfei
n.r.L, " when he had called the crowd to him, with his disciples,
he said to them, Whoever will," etc. In the passage before us,
itgbs navras is used to indicate the fact that the crowd was
addressed with, the, disciples. At all events, a literal rendering
(omitting Tyndale's supplement "them") is deemed most accu-
rate. Vulg., Mont., Eras., Castal., " ad omnes ; " Beza, " dicebat
omnibus." Syr., yiV" >oo (" before all men "). Kuincel
(in loco) : "Allocutus est omnes sectatores suos, tune temporis
praesentes advenerant enirn et alii."
T " any one ; " ns. Sharpe, Wakef., Penn, Kend., Thelwall,
M. Yulg., Mont., Eras., Schott, Beza, Castal., " quis " (for ali-
quis, after si).
w " would save ; " &tfy] oiSaai, Pecby and Dickinson (in
parallel, Mark 8': 35), Sharpe.
1 " shall lose ; " anollan. Kend., Wesley, Wakef., M. So
(E. V.) ill parallel, Mark 8 : 35.
y " he ; " ovros. Sharpe, Kend., Wesley, Wakef., Dick., M.
This pronoun is often rendered " he," when emphatic, in E. V.
See Matt. 13 : 22, 23 ; 27 : 58. Luke 1 : 32. Acts 3 : 10 ; 4 : 9 ;
9 : 15; 10 : 6.
1 " is profited ; " coydeZrac. So (totpslarai) iu parallel
(E. V.) Matt. 16 : 26. Mark 8 : 36 (d><ptU t oei), " shall profit."
Scarlett, Wesley, Wakef., Penn, Dick., Thehvall, M.
* "be condemned?" &i/uico&eis ; Sharpe. Liddell (in verbo),
" to cause toss, do damage to any one, hence usually to punish." As
a forensic term, it is used for amercing or mulcting one in a sum
of money, as a penalty for some misdemeanor. Herod. 6 : 21,
et-vfticaoav /av y,iUrjai, S^ax/ufjai, " they (the Athenians) fined
him a thousand drachms." It is also used where life is the for-
feiture for a real or pretended wrong. Herod. 3 : 27, lyrj yev-
Sea&at aysas r.ai as yevSofeevovs &avaroio i&i/tlov, "he
(Cambyses) said they lied, and as liars punished them with death."
The verb is used absolutely, Thucyd. Ill : 42, ovy. oncas &jfitov>;
atta fitjS" artftaeu> (where &avarco is understood). So the
noun &fiia signifies loss, but usually a penalty, a fine. Thucyd.
II : 24, -d-Avarov fyjftiav Itce&svro, " they imposed the penalty
of death." In view of these facts, the rendering " be condemned"
is deemed appropriate, as the thought obviously is that of being
sentenced to the severest penalty which justice demands. Comp.
Matt. 16 : 27. ' .
b " will be ashamed ; " ktatozwd-qaerai. Scarlett, Sharpe,
Norton, Camp., Wakef., Penn, Dick., Kend., M.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IX.
103
KING JAMES' VERSION.
his own glory, and in his Father's,
and of the holy angels.
27 But I tell you of a truth,
there be some standing here which
shall not taste of death till they
see the kingdom of God.
28 And it came to pass, about
an eight days after these sayings,
lie took Peter, and John, and
James, and went up into a moun-
tain to pray.
GREEK TEXT.
iv ry So^rj avTov KOL TOV Trarpos
\ ~ e / > '\ 9,7 j f
KCU TCDV ayicov cryyeAcov. A.eyto
8e vfj.lv dXrjdcos, fieri rives TCOV
coSe ecrTr)KoT(ov, 01 ov /XT? yevcrov-
TCU OavctTOV) ecoy av 'ISccxn TTJV
fiacriXeiav TOV Oeov.
28 ' TJ ' s> * < \ \ f
jByevero oe /zera TOVS Ao-
yovs TOVTOV: cocrel ^fj.epai OKTCO,
KCU TrapaXa/Bcov TOV Herpov KCU
'Icadvvrjv KCU. 'IctKcofiov, dve{3rj
els TO opos 7rpoo-evt;acr6ai. 29 KCU
REVISED VERSION.
ed, when "he cometh in d his
glory and "in that - f of the Fa-
ther, and of the holy angels.
But I tell you s truly, there h are 27
some 'of those standing here
who will not taste of death till
they see the kingdom of God.
And it came to pass, about 28
J eight days after these words,
k that he 'took with him Peter,
and John, and James, and went
up into "the mountain to pray.
" "lie cometh;" n&rj. Kend., Scarlett ("comes"), Norton
(" comes"), "Wakef., Perm. So parallel (E. V.) Mark 8 : 38.
d " his ; " aiiTov. As the text of Bagster, Lachmann, and
Tischendorf have avrov, not avrov, this rendering is demanded
instead of " his own." Sharpe, But as Griesb., Knapp, Theile,
and Scholz have avrov, the alternative rendering " of his own "
is submitted.
"in that." Scarlett, Camp., Dick., Kendrick, Thelwall, M.
G. Fr., " dans celle ; " S. Fr., " en la." As the ellipsis demands a
supplement, that has been adopted to avoid the hissing sound,
which occurs in enunciating 1 the passage, as it stands in the E. V.,
and also the repetition of the word " glory," which must take
place, if it is used as a supplement.
{ " of the Father ; " TOV JTOT^OS. Sharpe, Camp., Wakefield,
Thelwall, M. There is no reason for departing from the usual
rendering of the article, and giving it the force of the possessive
pronoun, in this instance. Belgic, " des Vaders ; " De Wette,
" des raters ; " S. Pr., " du Pere ; " Span., " del Padre ; " Ital.,
" del Padre.."
B "truly;" alq&ais. Kend., Thelwall, M., Eob. (Lex., in
verbo). The phrase " of a truth " is the proper equivalent of &n?
Mrj&eias, as in E. V., Luke 4 : 25 ; 22 : 59. Acts 4 : 27;
10 : 34, etc.
h " are ; " slat. Scarlett, "Wesley, Norton, Campbell, Penn,
Dick., Kend., Angus. " Be," in the indicative, is obsolete.
1 " of those standing ; " tSv-^im^xorcov. Thomson, Sharpe,
Angus. Mont, " sunt aliqui hie stantium ; " Beza, " sunt quidem
exiis qui hie adstant ; " Castalio, " esse quosdam eorum qui Me
adsunt ; " Schott, " esse aliquos eorum qui hie adstant." In the
parallel, Mark 9 : 1, the E. V. has " of them that stand." The
E. Y. has followed the Vulgate, which inconsistently renders the
same words in Matt. 16 : 28, and Mark 9:1 (8 : 39) by " sunt
quidam de hie stantibus," and in the passage before us, " sunt ali-
qui hie stantes." Belg., " der gene die hier staan ; " S. Pr.,
" quelques-uns de ceux qui ; " Iber., " hai algunos de los que
estan ; " Dan., " nogle af dem, som her staae."
1 "An," which is placed before " eight days," in the E. V., is
ungrammatical. It was introduced by Tyndale, and copied by
Cranmer, Geneva, and E. V. It is omitted in all the later
English versions.
1 " that ; " xa'i. M. So (E. V.) Luke 8 : 1, aai alros Stco-
Seve, " that he went." Mark 9 : 39. Luke 5 : 17 ; 10 : 38.
S. Fr., " qu'ayant- pris ; " Iber., " que llevo ; " Ital., " ch' egli
presi ; " Belgic, " dat ; " Beza and Schott, " ut." Bob. (.Lex.,
y.al) : " The simple v.cu is put very frequently in N. Test., parti-
cularly in the narrative style, where classic writers either put
nothing, or use some other particle, as Ss, aV.a, -core, and the
like; so especially in Matthew, Mark, Luke, and Eevelation."
This usage is derived from the Hebrew. See Stockii Clavis
Linguae Sancta? (i) ; and Heb. of Numb. 23 : 19. Gen. 4 : 8.
As an alternative rendering, " then." So De Wette, " da."
1 "took with him;" itagcda/Seor. "Wakef.. Norton, Camp.
So E. V- of the parallel, Mark 9 : 2, itapalafipdvet. is rendered
taketh with him." As naya, in composition, conveys the idea
of " with," or " to," the equivalent of naqa, should not be itali-
cized. See ch. 7 : 18, note. Kob. (Lex., na^aiaft^dvca) : " To
take to, or -with oneself, as an associate, companion. In composi-
tion, jtct(>a implies nearness, proximity, alongside of, beside, near
by." Bretsch. (na^aL) : " Transitive, sumo mihi aliquid, assvmo,
mecum duco, socium mihi, adjungo." Matt. 26 : 37, jra
, E. V., " he took with him Peter," etc.
m " the mountain ; " 10 OQOS. "Wesley, Sharpe, Norton, "Wake-
field, Penn, Angus, Thelwall, M. ' Belg., " den berg ; " De "Wette,
11 den Berg ; " Dan., " Bierget ; " S. Fr., " la montagne ; " Iber.,
' al monte ; " Diodati and Italian, " sul monte." Heb. N. Test.,
Greene (Gr. N. Test. Dial., p. 158) says : " By a very natural
process of thought, and one which is continually exemplified,
writers are apt unconsciously to presume the same familiarity
with certain localities on the part of their readers, as is possessed
by themselves ; and this is the cause of the occurrence of the
article, in some cases, where it appears at first sight strange. This
is the reason of the article being always prefixed to o^os by the
Evangelists, when intending the mountains embosoming the lake
of Galilee ; a form of expression most natural to persons familiar
with the country, but strictly correct on their part only when
addressing others who were so too. This is evidently the intend-
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IX.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
29 And as he prayed, tlie fashion
of his countenance was altered,
and his raiment was white and
glistering.
30 And behold, there talked
with him two men, which were
Moses and Elias :
31 "Who appeared in glory, and
spake of his decease which he
should accomplish at Jerusalem.
32 But Peter and tney that
were with him were heavy with
sleep : and when they were awake,
they saw his glory, and the two
men that stood with him.
GREEK TEXT.
eyeVero ev r< jrpo(rev)(e(rdat. av-
TOV, TO elSos TOV irpocrcoTrov av-
TOV TpOV, KOI l{Jl.a.TLCrfJ.OS ttVTOV
Aewcoy l^aa'Tpoarrcov. 30 Kai
ISov, avBpes 8vo awtXaXovv av-
T(p, oinves r](rct.v Maxrrj
31 ot o0#eVrey ez>
\ a}- & j -.
njv fgooois avrov,
KCU
irXrjpovv ev '
32 e ^ \ TT f \ f X if.
o oe Jt/er/jo? KCU OL <rvv aurcp
fjcrav /3e/3apr)/j,VOiV7rva>-
yopr)cra.vTe$ 8e eldov rrjv
ai/TOv, KCU TOVS
'
8vo
CLVTCO.
33
TOVS
KCU eyez/e-
REVISED VERSION.
And as he prayed, "the appear- 29
ance of his countenance was
altered, and his "apparel was
white and ^glittering. And so
behold, two men 'were talking
with him, who were Moses and
Elijah; who appeared in glory, 31
and spoke of r his departure
which "he was about io accom-
plish at Jerusalem. But Peter 32
and those with him l had been
heavy with sleep ; "but awak-
ing, they saw his glory and the
the two men 'standing with
ed meaning of o#os, Matt. 14 : 23 ; 15 : 29. Mark 3 : 13. Luke
6 : 12. Mark 6 : 46. Luke 9 : 28." I would add that the
soundness of these remarks will be appreciated by all, who are
conversant with the forms of speech current among those who have
received little mental cultivation. They frequently speak as
though the houses, mountains, woods, and streams, where their
days are spent, must be well known to all. See ch. 6 : 12, note.
n " the appearance ;" TO slSos. Robinson (Lex.), G. and A.
Camp., Wakef., Penn, Kend., Angus. Vulgate, Erasmus, Beza,
Castalio, Schott, "Species;" De Wette, "Ansehen;" S. TV.,
1'aspect ; " Diodati and Ital., " il sembiante." So (E. V.) 1 Thess.
5 : 22. Xenophon, Cyrop. I, 2, 1, <Puvai Ss o Kvgos Hyerai,-
slSos f&v y.alhaTos. Liddell (elSos), "that which is seen, also
of the appearance, look." Bretsch. : " Proprie id quod oculis
cerni potest in aliquo vel aliqua re, species externa." Sept.,
Exod. 24 : 17, TO elSos tijs So^rjs rov xv^iov caael JTVJO. Levit.
13 : 34, sTSoe isngas. Ezek. 1 : 26, cos elSos av&^canov avco-
S-sv.
" apparel ;" l/tarea/tos. M. See ch. 7 : 25, note. So E. V.,
Acts 20 : 33.
P " glittering ;" l^aat^mtrcov. Penn. "Glistening" is obso-
lete. As an alternative, "glittering white." So De Wette
(" weissstrahlend"), Sharpe. The word occurs only in this in-
stance in N. Test. 2?| is intensive. The thought is well expressed
by Schott, " album ita ut fulguraret," or, as we may say, " it
flashed with whiteness." Bretsch. (in loco), "pallium candore
micans." So Sept., Ezek. 1 : 4, itvQ l^aar^Amtav, " fire flashing
out " (i. e., from the cloud) ; 1 : 7, anivd^jfits cas l^aar^amcov
%aJ.y.os, " sparks like glittering brass." S. Fr., " sa robe d'une
blancheur etincelante ; " Diodati, " la sua veste divenne Candida
folgorente ; " Ital., " suo vestimento divenne d' un candore sfolgo-
rante."
i "were talking with ;" avvskalow. So (E. V.) Mark 9 : 4.
Kend., Norton, Wakef., Murdock, M. Vulg. and Eras., " loque-
bantnr -cum ;" Beza, " colloquebantur cum ;" Mont., "collo-
quebantur ;" Castalio and Schott, " cum eo colloquebantur;"
G. Fr., "parlaient avec ;" S. Fr., " s'entretenaierit avec ;"
Iber., " hablaban con ." Continued action is indicated by the
Greek imperfect. With this, our progressive form of the imper-
fect corresponds. The verb is placed after its nominative " two
men," according to the Greek order.
r "his departure;" ity el-odov avrov. Norton, Penn, Sharpe,
Kend., Angus, Thelwall, M. V"ulg., Eras., "excessum ejus."
Syriac, oiiaaio. (Murdock, "departure.") Heb. N. Test., ixjja.
Eob. (Lex., in verbo) : " Tropically, departure from life." Heb.
11 : 22 (E. V.), " departing." Sept, Wisdom of Solomon, 3 : 2,
eSo^av Iv otp&a&fiols aygovcov ced'vavat, xdi ct.oyiad'rj zaxcoats
r t e^oSog aiiTcov, E. V., " in the sight of the unwise they seemed
to die; and their departure is taken from misery." Josephus,
Antiq. IV, 8 : 2, M l^oSov TOV Zfiv . In the use of this word,
our idiom corresponds with that of the Greek. We use " de-
parture " for " death." Kuinoel : "T/jv eo8ov iti.rj^ovv est, vita
exitum haberc, mortem subire."
* " he was about to accomplish ; " efiette nl^ovv. Scarlett,
Wesley, Kend., Norton ("about to take place"), Wakef., Penn,
Sharpe (" about to fulfill"), Angus, M. The radical signification
of fi.ellca, " to be on the point of doing," or, " to be about to
do," is appropriate here. See Liddell. Antbon, Gram., p. 481.
There is a periphrastic future, made up of fiettca and the infini-
tive of the present, the aorist, or the Mure, and corresponding to
the Latin periphrastic future of the participle, in nsus and the
verb sum. It answers to the English "being about to do any
thing," " intending to do any thing," etc. See ch. 7 : 2, note.
< "had been heavy;" yoav jSe^d^fesvot. M., Penn ("had
been weighed down"), Norton ("had been overcome"), Kend.
'" had been, oppressed "). Schott, " gravati fuerant ;'" Vulgate,
Eras., Beza, " gravati erant." The pluperfect here should have
its usual force.
u " but awaking ; " Scay^yo^aavres Ss. M., Wakef., Penn.
Scholefield, " and when they awake."
v " standing ; " avveorcavas. Tyndale, Cranmer, Geneva,
Sharpe.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IX.
105
KING JAMES' VERSION.
33 And it came to pass, as
they departed from him, Peter
said unto Jesus, Master, it is good
for us to be here : and let us make
three tabernacles ; one for thee,
and one for Moses, and one for
Elias : not knowing what he said.
34 While he thus spake, there
came a cloud, and overshadowed
them : and they feared as they
entered into the cloud.
35 And there came a voice out
GREEK TEXT.
TO ev TO> ia^copcrai O.VTOVS
cm avrov, e'arev 6 Herpo? irpos
TOV 'fr/crovv, '
r)p.as c
ei
cra/iez/
evai' KCU
rpes, fJ.av <roi }
KCU Maxrei fiiav, KOL IJLLO.V 'HXia-
\ >R\ & \ ' 34. ~ 0, \
fj,rj eiocos o Aeyei. TO.VTO. oe
avTov Aeyoj/roy, eyez/ero i>e0eA?;
Kai eTrea-Kiacrev avrouy tyoft-fj-
0i}(rav 8e ev raJ e/cet'z/ouy etcreA-
els TVJV ve(f)eXr)v. 35 KCU
eyez/ero e/c rr)s
REVISED VERSION.
him. And it came to pass, "as 33
they were departing from him,
Peter said to Jesus, Master, it
is good for us *to remain here ;
and let us make three ^booths ;
one for thee, and s one for Moses,
and one for Elijah : not know-
ing what he said. "And while 34
b he was saying this, there came
a cloud and overshadowed
them : and they feared as c those
men entered into the cloud.
And d a voice came out of the 35
w " as they were departing ; " iv rrjJ Staxca^sa&ai. avrovs.
Scarlett, Penn, Dick., Sawyer. The participial construction is
employed by Norton, Thomson, Wesley. This verb occurs only
in this instance, in the N. Test. Bretschneider : " Medium : se-
paro me, separo me ab alio, discedo." Sept., Gen. 13 : 9, Sia^co-
Qla&rpi aif avrov. Ibidem w. 11, 14. Ecclus. 6 : 13.
1 " to remain ; " elvcu. Bretsch. (in verbo) : "Maneo, Act.
17 : 28, iauev, manemus in vita, versor, commoror." Matt. 2 : 15,
xai r t v ixeZ Seas Tys fslevr^s 'HgcoSov. Matt. 17 : 4. Bloomf.
(N. Test.) on Matt. 17 : 4. The verb is used here in the sense
of abiding, remaining, or residing, as the adjuncts plainly show.
Scarlett, Wakef., " to continue ; " Camp., " to stay ; " Dick.,
" that we remain." Kuincel (in parallel, Matt. 17 : 4) : "Knfav
lanv caSs elvcu, placet, juvat nos hie remanere, elvat id. quod.
fiivuv, manere, commorari, nam alexandrini verbum aiai non
modo verbum ftevetv, Gen. 24 : 55, sed etiam slvat, Jos. 24 : 7.
Ezech. 3 : 15."
' "booths;" axrjvas. Thorn., G. and A. Camp., Murdock.
Luther and De Wette, " Hiitten.". Iber., "pabellones." Kuincel
(on Matt. 17 : 4) : "2ia;vij est tentorinm e frondibus arborum,
qualia Judaei festo tabernaculatorum flgere solebant." Bloomf.
on Matt. 17 : 4 : " Booths composed of branches of trees, such
as were hastily raised for temporary purposes by travelers, and
such as were raised at the feast of tabernacles." "Booths"
occurs in (E. V.) Gen. 33 : 17. Levit. 23 : 42, 43. Neh. 8 : 14,
16. In all these cases, the Sept. has oxyvfj. Eob. :" Booths, as
built of green boughs and the like, a booth," The anglicized
Latin word " tabernacle " is inaccurate, as that was restricted to
a movable shelter composed of skins. Hence the phrase " sub
pellibus " in tents. The English " tent," as indicating a similar
shelter composed of cloth, fails to give the proper sense of OXT^,
which is entirely equivalent to the Heb. nss. Heb. N. Test.,
nfeo. Syr., ^ySSjjje (ab ^ " to shade, overshadow ").
" " one for Moses." Instead of the reading of Text. Eecept.,
Afmaei ftiav, Griesbach, Lachmann, Tischendorf, Enapp, Theile,
Scholz have uiav Mcoact. Schott says : " Ordinem inversum
wictoritate cdd. plurimorum (12 unc.) rerss., Pesch. Philox.,
Pers. Memph., Arm., Goth., Slav., Tulg., Ital. exhibuiiaus cum
Griesb. aliisque." This rendering justifies the order of the words
in the E. V., and shows that a change (" one for Moses ") should
not be made, as the Text. Kecept. of Bagster is erroneous. Con-
trary to what is usual in Bagster, there are no marks (" ") em-
ployed to indicate this incorrect reading.
* "And ; " Se. Sharpe, Penn, Sawyer. G. and S. Fr., " Et.
Iber. and Span., " I." Ital., " E."
b " he was saying this ; " ravta avrov Uyovroe. Kendrick.
Tavra is often used to indicate the singular, though its farm is
plural. See eh. 5 : 27, note. Sawyer has " this." Scarlett,
Norton, "Wakef., Angus, Thelwall have employed the progressive
form, " he was speaking." The above rendering is deemed
equally exact with that of the E. V., while it is more in accord-
ance with present usage. Heb. N. Test, njsx-nx la'ro IS?)*.
Vulg., Mont., Eras., " hsec illo loquente ; " Beza, " haec ipso
dicente ; " Castalio, " hsec eo loquente ; " Schott, " hsec dum dice-
bat ; " Iber., " estando el diciendo esto."
"those men;'" Ixeivovs. Norton, Dick., Scarlett ("these
men"). This pronoun is antithetic to avrove, and refers to
Moses and Elijah, avSgss Svo, v. 30. To bring out the thought,
and harmonize the phraseology to our MSMS loquendi, the supple-
ment " men " is inserted. The language of the E. V. is ambigu-
ous. Trollope (Analecta, in loco) remarks: "In v. 34, some
understand the pronouns avrovs and ixeivovs of the same persons ;
but the former is more properly referred to the apostles, and the
latter to Moses and Elias. Campbell [Le Clerc], M., "those ;"
S. Fr., " ceux-la ; " Iber., " aquellos ; " De Wette, " jene." The
passage is thus rendered by Schott : " Hsec dum dicebat nubes
exstitit et illos (tres) obumbravit; metuebant autem (discipuli)
quum illi nubem ingrederentur." " While he was saying this,
there was a cloud which overshadowed the three (i. e., Christ,
Moses, and Elijah), and they (the disciples) were afraid, when
those (Christ, Moses, and Elijah) entered the cloud. Bengel {in
loco) : " 'Exeivovs ref. ad Mosen et Eliam." I deem the reference
of this pronoun to Moses and Elijah alone, correct.
A " a voice came out of ; " ycavri ly&veto Ix, Wakef., Scarlett,
Penn. This is more concise than the rendering of the E. V. The
106
THE GOSPEL ACCOEDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IX.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
of the cloud; saying, This is my
beloved Son : hear him.
36 And -when the voice was
past, Jesus was found alone. And
they kept it close, and told no
man in those days any of those
things which, they had seen.
37 And it came to pass, that
on the nest day, when they were
come down from the hill, much
people met him.
38 And behold, a man of the
company cried out, saying, Mas-
a-yaTrrjTos'
36
GREEK TEXT.
Aeyovcra, OIJTOS e&Ttv o.vios JJLOV
avrov aKovere*
r< yevea~0a.L rrjv <<-
6 'lT)(rovs fJLOVO$.
Kai avToi eVty^cray, KCU
iv e/cetVaty rat?
ovSev a>v eoopaKacriv.
S>^ " '#" ' '
oe ev TTJ egrjs r/fj.e-
pa, KareXOovTcov O.VTCOV mrb TOV
(rvvr)VTr)(rev aura) o^Xos
38 Kcti ISov, avrjp mro
TOV oj(Xov avefiorjcrc, Xiywv, Ai-
crov, e
37
EEVISBD VERSION.
cloud, saying, This is my be-
loved Son : hear him. And 3D
'when the voice had ceased,
Jesus was found alone. And
'they were silent, and told g no
one in those days any of those
things which they had seen.
And it came to pass h the next 37
day, 'as they came down from
J the mountain, a great crowd
met him. And behold, a man 38
of the crowd l cried loudly,
saying, 'Teacher, I beseech
eupJionic adverb " there" is unnecessary in this instance. Some
translators have preferred to render iyevsro by " was," on the
ground, that its past tenses are often used as substitutes for the
tenses which are wanting- in el/cl. Bob. (Lex., ytvofiai). In this
case, however, if we say, " there was a voice," we are compelled
by our idiom to render in rfjs veyelris, " from the cloud," instead
of giving bt its proper force, " out of." rivoficu is often rendered
in the E. V. by " come," not in the sense of ef>%o/tai., " to move,"
or " pass " in some direction, but , in that of coming into same
condition, to becoming, = fieri. Bob. (Lex.), " to begin to be,
come into existence, i. q., to arise, etc."
c " when the voice had ceased ; " lv r$ yevea&at. TTJV tptavrjv.
Bloomf. (N. Test.). The aorist here by a usage common in nar-
ration (Buttmann, 137, 3) has the force of the pluperfect.
Giving the verb the signification which it has in v. 34, we might
say, " when the voice had come." This, however, would not pre-
sent the thought which is, that the voice " had taken place," or,
according to our idiom, " had ceased," or, more freely, " after the
voice had been heard." There is much diversity in the views of
translators as to the proper rendering of the text here, not be-
cause they differ as to the thought, which is obvious enough, but
when that thought is to be clothed in words ; hoc opus, hiclabor est.
Thorn., " at the time the voice was uttered ; " Scarlett, " while
this -voice was uttering ; " Norton, Wakef., " after the voice ; "
Camp., " while the voice was uttered ; " Sharpe, " when the voice
came ;" Sawyer, " when the voice had passed ;" Kend., " as the
voice came ; " M., " when the voice had come .- " S. Fr.. " pendant
que la voix se fasait entendre ; " De Sacy, " pendant qu'on euten-
dait cette voix ; " Iber., " despues de haber veuido ]a voz ; " Ital.,
" mentre la voce si faceva udire ; " De Wette, " iudem die Stimme
erscholl ; " Belg., " als de stenran geschiedde."
' " they were silent ; " afoot eolyr/oav. Thomson, Scarlett,
Dick. Liddell remarks on this word : " The distinction that
at)'Sv is properly intransitive, like the Latin silere, (and) aioj-aav
properly transitive, to keep secret, Lat. tacere, may have been
originally correct, but was little observed ; for we find oiynv cum
acens. rei, Herodot 7 : 104; Pindari Frag.; ^Bsehyl. Prome-
theus, 106, 441 ; Sophocles, etc., and the passive, to be passed over
in silence, taceri, is very common, etc."
E "no one;" ovSevl. Thorn., Scarlett, Norton, Wakefield,
Penn, Sharpe, Dick., Kend., Thelwall, M. De "Wette, "nie-
mandem ; " Iber., " a nadie." See ch. 9 : 21, note.
h " the next day ; " iv rjj tt-rjstifctya. The preposition " on"
is omitted in conformity with our usws hquendi. So Scarlett,
Wesley, Norton, Wakef., Camp. If " on "is dropped, the supple-
ment "that" (inserted in the E. V., but not italicized) should
share its fate. Both are superfluous. They lengthen the sentence
without adding any thing to its force, perspicuity, or harmony.
1 " as." Thomson, Scarlett, Wesley, Norton, Sharpe, Dick.,
Kend.
' " the mountain ; " tov oyovs. So parallels (E. V.) Mark
9 : 9. Matt. 17 : 9. See v. 28 of this chapter, note. Scarlett,
Wesley, Norton, Wakef., Camp., Sharpe, Penn, Dick, Kendrick,
Angus, Thelwall, M., Sawyer. Vulg., Mont., Erasmus, Castalio,
Schott, " de monte ; " Beza, " e monte." Syriac, | j^. Heb.
N. Test., inrt. Belg., "berg;" De Wette, "Berge;" S. Fr.,
" la montagne ; " Iberian, " del monte ; " Diodati, " dal monte ; "
Dan., "Bierget." "Hill" was copied from,Wiclif, by Tyndale
and Cranmer. The Genevan correctly rendered " mountain," but
" the forty-five " went back to Wiclif. See ch. 4 : 29, note.
k " cried loudly ; " di's/Sdqae. This verb signifies ' to utter a
loud cry, to shout." Liddell, " vociferor." Bretsch. It should
be distinguished from y.$a,io, which is usually rendered in the
N. Test. " to cry out," or sometimes simply " to cry." Mont.,
Beza, Eras., Schott, " exclamavit." Syr., \o. In the Sept., this
verb is the equivalent of pyt Ezek. 11 : 13. Zech. 6 : 8. 2 Kings
4 : 40. Josephus, Antiq. IX, 1, 2, n,s itgoyTiTrjs yrafsi&cov tls
orjv ?tjv EXXJ.Tjolav avafioTioe tta TS Tthff-d'et y.al TW fiaffd.eZ.
i " Teacher ; " 4iSaxu).e. See ch. 2 : 46, note. See Eob.
Bretsch., "Qui docet, monet alias doctor, munus 'docendi habens.
Ka-c igoyijv autem ita appellabantuv ii, qui discipulos collige-
bant, et scholam erudiendorum regebant, magistri adjuncta no-
tione auctoritatis, qua de causa et simul xvgioi dicebantnr, vide
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IX.
107
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
ter, I beseech thee look upon my
son : for he is mine only child.
39 And lo, a spirit taketh him,
and he suddenly crieth out ; and
it teareth him that he foameth
again, and bruising him, hardly
departeth from him.
40 And I besought thy disci-
ples to cast him out, and they,
could not.
41 And Jesus answering said,
faithless and perverse genera-
tion, how long shall I be with
GEBEK TEXT.
eVt TOV vlov JJ.OV, OTI
>/ 39^'S*^
0Ti fJLOL* KO.L IOOV }
KCU e
KCU, OTra/jacnrei avrov
fj.Ta oKppov, KCU poyis d-jro'xcope'i
O.TT avrov, arvvTpiftov avrov.
40 /cat lSer/0r)i> r5>v /u.adrjTaiv crov,
iVa e/c/SaAAcocrtj' avro, KOL OVK
6 'Iri&ovs eiTrez/,
(TTOf KCU 8i(TTpafJ.p.Vrj, eW TTOTf
' yevea a,7rt-
KOU
EEVISED VERSION.
thee m to look on my son, for he
is mine only child. And "be- 39
hold, a spirit "seizeth him, and
he suddenly crieth out, and it
pconvulseth him 'so that he
foameth, and bruising him,
hardly departeth from him.
And I besought thy disciples 40
to cast him out, and they could
not. And Jesus, answering, 41
said, 'unbelieving and 'per-
verted generation, how long
shall I be with you, and 'bear
Jo. 13 : 13, 14. Hoc sensu 8i.SaaxaJ.os convenit Hebraico Rabbi
Jo. 1 : 39. Ssepius ita appellatur Jesus, non solum ubi discipuli
sed etiam ubi Juckei euro adloquentur, Matt. 8 : 19. Marc. 4 : 38
et passim." Thomson, Scarlett, Norton, Wakef., Sharpe,.Camp.
Kendrick, Thelwall, Sawyer, M. Beza, " Preceptor ; " Sehott
" Doctor ; " De Wette, " Lehrer ; " S. Tr., " Doctenr." In this
Bevision, the rendering is uniformly " Teacher."
m " to look." The reading of the Text. Recept,
is rejected by nearly all the critical Editors, as Griesbach, Knapp,
Tischendorf, Theile, Titttnann. These Editors have substituted
tnipteyai in its place. Still they differ in the accentuation of
this word. Thus Griesb., Knapp, Tittm. (Leips. 1831), Tischend.,
Scholz have entpfayai (1st aorist imperat. midd.), while, on the
other Land, Theile, Bloomf., and Sehott adopt InipHycu (1st aor.
infin. active). The verb occurs in the N. Test, only three times,
Luke 1 : 48, biifl).eyer (1st aor. ind. act.) ; James 2 : 3,
yrfie (1st aor. subj. act.), and in the passage before us. The
probability is, that the correct reading is Inmieijiai (infinitive).
Meyer says that Eicipleyai (1st aor. imperative) does not occur.
Sehott has the following note : " Lectio eiti/iUyai (sic enim, si
hsec lectio in cdd. permultis, 9 unc. expressa cum Griesb. aliisque
praeferatur, accenta instruenda est, ut hie infinitivus act. aor. a
vb. Seouat pendeat, non enipfawat, quaj forma esset imper. med.
hominis praecibus Jesum implorantis minus accommodata quam
Vulgata btiphyov." The verb is rendered as an infinitive (" to
look") by Norton, Sharpe, Dick., Sawyer. De Wette, "anzu-
nehmen."
* " behold ; " iSoi,. See ch. 1 : 44, note.
" seizeth ; " lafi^avei. See ch. 5 : 26, and 7 : 16, notes. So
Thorn., Scarlett, Norton, "Wakef., Camp., Dick., Penn, Angus,
Thelwall. Beza, " arripit ; " Castalio and Sehott, " corripuit ; "
De Wette, " es ergreift ein Geist ; " G. and S. Pr., " saissit."
Heb. N. Test., nmx.
p " convulseth ; " aitagaoaet. Thorn., Scarlett, Norton, Dick.,
Kend., Angus, M., Sawyer. Sehott, " distorquet." Kuinosl (on
Mark 1 : 26) : "Kcu oitagal-av avrov cum corpus hominis con-
torsisset. Verbum oitaqaaoetv non tantum adhibetur de belluis j
corpora immaniter lacerantibus, ita ut sit, lacerare, discerpere
sed interdum etiam notat, vekementer concutere, commovere, respon-
det Hebr. fiart, quod Grseco verbo oitagaoaeiv explicuerunt
alexandrini. Jer. 4 : 19." The following extract from the note
on the Revision of Mark 1 : 26, is quoted as apposite : " The verb
literally signifies ' to tear, or lacerate,' but here, and Luke 9 : 39,
' to throw into violent convulsions, or spasms,' such as accompany
epilepsy, which are sometimes called ana^ay/tol, though usually
anaofiol by the Greek medical writers. See Bloomfield (N. T.,
in loco). Bretsch., ' distorqueo, concutio. In N. T. non nisi de
ffigrotis, quorum membra a genio malo vehementer distorqueban-
tur.' Rob., ' in N. T., to convulse, to throw into spasms.' ' The
root of the verb anaco is used by medical writers to signify caus-
sing convulsion or spasm, and in the passive, to be convulsed,' Lid-
dell. The literal sense, to rend, is inconsistent with the parallel
narrative, Luke 4 : 33-36, y.di $iyav avrov TO Saifiovtov els fte-
aov, i!;jj),&v aif avroii, fttjdev pkayav avtov ' he came out of
him and hurt him not.' "
i " so that." Norton, Camp., Penn, M. Our usus loquendi
demands " so that," instead of " that."
' " unbelieving ; " amaros. Norton, Sharpe, Penn, Murdock.
So (E. V.) 1 Cor. 7 : 14 (bis), 15. Titus 1 : 15. Rev. 21 : 8.
Belg., " ongeloovig ; " De Wette, " unglaubiges." "Faithless"
is ambiguous, as it signifies unworthy of confidence, treacherous,
as well as destitute of faith.
' " perverted ; " Sieinoafifj.^. Rob. (Lex., in verbo) : " Pass.
perf. part., perverted." The participial construction is exact.
The people were led astray by their blind guides, or, in other
words, turned aside, perverted from " the good and right way."
Compare Acts 13 : 10, ov Ttavarj Staar^eycov ras oSovs XVQIOV
TUS ev&eias;
t " bear with ; " avet-o/uat. Kend., Pechy (on parallel avego-
i, Mark 9 : 19), Scarlett, Norton, Angus, M. Rob. (Lex.,
in verbo), " to bear with, have patience with the errors and weak-
nesses of others." Kuinosl (on parallel, Matt. 17 :17) : "Ecos
ito-ce avegoftai vftcav ; quousque vos, mores vestros pravos perfe-
ram? 'ivs^sad'ai ra>a, patienter ferre alicujus contumaeiam,
108
THE GOSPEL ACCOKDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IX.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
you, and suffer you? Bring thy
son hither.
42 And as he was yet a com-
ing, the devil threw him down,
and tare him. And Jesus rebuk-
ed the unclean spirit, and healed
the child, and delivered him again
to his father.
43 And they were all amazed
at the mighty power of God. But
while they wondered every one at
all things which Jesus did, he said
unto his disciples,
GREEK TEXT.
/ Trpotrdyaye code TOV vlov
(Tov. jETi de 7rpoo~epYp/jievov
avTov, epptj^ev O.VTOV TO Sai/j.6-
viov KCU (rvveo-irdpa.ev
fj.ijo'e de o 'lyo-ov? TCO
T<2> a.KadapTa>) Kal
Kal aTreScoKev avTov rco
43
la.cra.TO TOV
8e TrdvTes em
TOV @OV.
8f OaVfJiO.'
eVi Trao~iv ois eiroiijo'ev 6
, e'nre irpos TOVS fj-adr/Tas
BEVISED VERSION.
with you ? "Lead thy son hither.
And T while he was coming near, 42
the demon "dashed him down,
and ^violently convulsed him.
And Jesus rebuked the unclean
spirit, and healed the child, and
^delivered Mm to his father.
And they "were all astonished 43
at the mighty power of God.
But 'while all were wondering
b at every thing which Jesus
did, he said to his disciples;
Hebr., Isa. 46 : 4, VsbX &'&:* Isa. 1 : 14, K1B5." Heb N. Test.,
" " Lead ; " n^oo&yays. Rob. (Lex., itgooayto, and in loco)..
" to lead, or conduct to any one." Bretscb. : " LXS. pro ifan, el
sjepissime pro \a53 et a'lp in Kal et Hiphil. 1. transitive adduce.
Luke 9 : 41, X3tt." Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, Castalio, Schott,
" adduc." In the parallels, Matt. 17 : 17, and Mark 9 : 19, the
verb is yfyete, properly rendered " bring," in the E. V. Here.
however, the radical signification of itgooayays is presented by
using " lead." As an alternative, " lead to me." This rendering
retains the force of TC^OS. Diodati, " Mena."
T "And while he was coming ;" "En e Tcoooegxofilvov. Scar-
lett, Norton, Penn, "Wakef. Should ngos be regarded as modi-
fying the signification of the verb, its force may be expressed
thus, " while he was coming to kirn," or, more concisely, " coming
near." Many cases occur in the Septuagint and N. Test, where
the signification of the verb, compounded with a preposition, is
obviously the same with that of the simple form.
w " dashed down ; " I^^lej/. Thomson, Camp., "Wakefield
(" dashed to the ground "), Kend. (parallel, Mark 9 : 18, ffioo
"dashed to the ground"). Heb. N. Test., si.'tisa'ntrn. Beza,
" alKsit." Kuinoel (Mark 9 : 18) : " Significat, grjaaetv, solo alli-
dere, in terram dejicere. Alexandri Judsei hoc verbo expresse-
runt Hebr. isa; Jer. 23 : 33, 39. Isa. 33 : 23, sed Ez. 29 : 5 ;
31 : 22, hoc idem verbum iidem interpretes reddiderunt y.ara-
/Ja/Uew/, et Amos 5. : 6, ayallsiv ln\ yijs. Hesychius, $iiar
xcrzaflaleZv. Idem ^f e 1 y.arej3at.e. Artemidor. 1 : 62 (60), $ij-
|t TOV avriita),ov, de luctatore adversarium humi prosternente.
Id., V. 78, de lagena ; ^rj^at ts v.al y.arsd^et to xegafiiov, in ter-
ram dejicere et confringere lagenam." Rob. (Lex., in verbo) :
" To dash to the ground, as a demon one possessed." Euthymius
(quoted by Fritzsche), TO pev ovv Qrjoati avrl rov y.ccie^aUei.
tis ytjv. Bloomf. (N. Test., Mark 9 : 18) : " The true sense is
that of the ancient versions and commentators, and most modern
ones, " dashes him on the ground." " To dash down " will express
the sense of the verb most concisely and accurately. Wisd. 4:19,
ott i7 aiirovs aycovovs itgyveTg, " he shall dash them dowil-
headlong aiid speechless."
" violently convulsed ; " ovveana^ev. See v. 39, note on
The preposition ovv is intensive, in composition with
the verb. Bloomfield (N. Test.). Rob. (Lex., in verbo) : "In
N. Test, intens., to convulse together, to ihrmo into strong spasms."
Bretsch. : " Totun, i. e. vehementer distorqueo, Luc. 9 : 42." This
verb should be distinguished from the simple form ajca/aaaaco,
v. 39 (Mark 9 : 26, arta$aav, part.) by the use of the adverb
" violently." Schott, " vehementer distorsit ; " De "Wette, schut-
telte ihn hin und'her ; " De Sacy, "1'agita par de grandes convul-
sions."
delivered ; " ansScoxEv. Tyndale, Cranmer, Geneva, Thorn.,
Norton, Camp., "Wakef., Murdock; M. "Again " should not be
used here with " deliver." The etymology of the Greek verb,
aab SlSofii (to give from), shows that " deliver," "give back,"
or " restore," are its equivalents. Heb. N. Test., sinai-il. Tulg.,
Mont., Eras., Beza, Castal., " reddidit ; " Belg., " gaf weder ; '>
De Wette, " gab wieder ; " Dan., " gav ^igien ; " S. Fr., " ren-
dit ; " Iber. and Span., " volvio ; " Diodati, " rende."
were astonished ; " sjentyaamvo. So (E. V.) Matt. 7 : 28 ;
13 : 54 ; 22 : 33. Mark 1 : 22 ; 6 : 2 ; 7 : 37 ; 10 : 26 ; 11 : 18.
Luke 4 : 32, etc. Norton, Sawyer. Rob. (Lex., in verbo) : " In
N. Test, only passive, to be struck with astonishment, admiration,
etc., i. q., to be astonished, etc."
1 " while all were wondering ; " Ttavraiv &a.vfia6vriov. Scar-
lett, Norton, M., Penn, "Wakef. ("while they were all wondering").
So Gray (note on Angus) and Kendrick. Iber., "maravillandose
todos." The progressive form of the Eng. verb is most appropri-
ate. As we can imitate the conciseness of the Greek, without
any violation of our idiom, it is unnecessary to introduce " they,"
in this sentence.
" at every thing which ; " In't jraaw ois. Kend., Camp., M.
The more literal rendering, " at all things which," does not exhibit
the thought with any greater accuracy, while it presents an asso-
nance, which our usus loquendi forbids, " all were wondering at
all things which." This note may be placed in the margin : " Gr.
at all things."
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING- TO LUKE. CHAP. IX.
109
KING JAMES' VERSION.
44 Let these sayings sink down
into your ears : for the Sou of
man shall be delivered into the
hands of men.
45 But they understood not this
saying, and it -was hid from them,
that they perceived it not : and
they feared to ask hinf of that
saying.
46 Then there arose a reason-
GBEEK TEXT.
3 * 44 r\* /\ * ~ ' \ 9
avTOv, krecroe vfteip eif TO. cora
VfJLWV TQVS \OJOVS TOVTOVS'
ja.p ulos TOV avOpcairov fj.eXAei
7rapa8t$oa~0cu eiy ^etpay avOpdt-
45 /"< !> x ' ' \ r
TTCDV. Ui be -rjyvoovv TO p
TOVTO, KCLLIJV Trapa.KKaXviJi:p.evov
car avrSiv, iva [jur) alcr6coi>Tai
ai>TO' KOI e(/)oj3ovvro epwTTJcrat
O.VTOV Trepi TOV pr}/j.a.TO$ TOVTOV.
46 Jicrr/\0 fie 8iaXo-yicr/j.of eV
REVISED VERSION.
Let these 'words sink down 44
into your ears ; for the Son of
man d is about to be delivered
up into the hands of men. But 45
e they did not understand this
saying, and it f was hidden from
them, e so that they did not per-
ceive it, and they feared to ask
him ""concerning 'this saying.
'And there arose k a dispute 46
" words ; " loyove. Kend., Norton, Camp., Penn, Dick.
Wakef., Sawyer, Angus, M. In this passage, Uyo-vs refers to
the following sentence, o vibs TOV avd-gconov fiiUei x. i. I
Bloomf. (N. Test., in loco), after remarking that most recent com
mentators suppose ).6yove refers to the commendations bestowec
on Jesus by the multitude who had witnessed his miracles, says
"The expression, however, is not TO. ffi/taTa, but rove koyovs
And no such words have occurred in the preceding context ; am
to suppose them implied in l^eniriaaovto and &avfiat,6vrcov
would be extremely harsh. Hence it is better to suppose TOVS
idyovs to mean the words just about to be said. Thus the ya$
will here, as often, serve for explanation, and have the sense
nempe, namely that." The thought is well expressed by Wakef.
" Let the words which I am speaking, sink down into your ears ;
for the Son of man," etc.
d " is about to be delivered up ; " (itttni. TtaoaSLSoad-ai.
Wakef., Sharps, Kend., Thorn., Scarlett, Norton, Penn, M.,
Angus, Sawyer. See Luke 7 : 2, note on petta. As to the
rendering of TtagaSiSoa&ai, the following extract from a note in
the Revision of Mark 1 : 14, is in point : " Was delivered up ;
TO nafn$o&-r?vai. Sharpe, Pechy, Q., "Wakefield. This verb
signifies to deliver up, give over to any one. The object for which
the act is performed must be ascertained from other words ex-
pressed or understood. Should it be necessary to indicate more
than the verb implies, the ellipsis must be filled by a supplement.
See Eob. on naoaSiSofii. De Wette, ' uberliefert war ; ' Belg.,
' overgeleverd was ; ' S. Fr., ' eut ete livre ; ' Iber., ' despues de
ser entf egado ; ' Vulg., < traditus est ; ' Beza, ' traditus fuit.' The
verb is rendered as above in (E. V.) Matt. 10 : 17, 19, 21 ; 24 : 9.
Mark 13 : 9, 11. Luke 21 : 12. Rom. 8 : 32. 1 Cor. 15 : 24."
e " they did not understand ; " ol tyvoow. "Wakef., Dick.
By the insertion of " did," the language is made to accord with
present usage, and is rendered more harmonious. This construc-
tion is adopted by Norton, " they did not know," and Thomson,
" they did not comprehend."
f " was hidden ; " ^v ma$axexal.v{ip.lvov. This form of the
participle (from " to hide ") is adopted as more euphonous than
" hid." So Norton, Penn, Wakef., Kend.
6 " so that they did not perceive j " Iva fir; aiad-tavrai. Nor-
ton. In this rendering, iva is regarded as. ecbatic in which case
it merely indicates the event or result of the action, and has the i
force of MOTE, adeo ut, " so that," " so as that." See Eob. (Lex.),
Bloomf. (N. Test., in loco). Aia&dvo/tat (mid. dep.) has the
primary signification Jo perceive, apprehend, or notice by the
external senses, tropically, to perceive mentally, understand. Lid-
dell. The verb, in this instance, is rendered by the Eng. imperf.
indicative. "Wesley ("so that they perceived it not"), Wakef.,
Kendrick, Sharpe, "Wiclif, Tyndale, Cranmer, Geneva, Bheims.
'Iva. is rendered " to that," by Thelwall, Sharpe. If iva is re-
garded as telic, then the appropriate rendering would be, "in
order that they might not perceive." De Wette, " auf dass sie
nicht fasseten ; " S. Fr., " afin qu'ils ne la sentisseut pas." Bloomf.
(N. Test.) : " The best commentators are agreed that iva is used
for COOTS, adeo ut, inasmuch that; the sense being, 'And it was
hidden (i. e. obscure to them, so that they did not understand it).' "
Kuincel: "Verba Christi iis obscure eraut, non videbant, quo-
modo prsedictionem hanc componerent cum prseconceptis opiuio-
nibus, quas de Messia ejusque dignitate foverent."
h "concerning;" iteyl (cum genit.). Kend., Camp., Penn,
Sawyer, M., Thelwall.
' " this ; " TOVTOV. Wesley, Wakef., Sharpe, Sawyer, Gray
(on Angus), M. De Wette, " dieser ; " G. and S. Fr., cette."
J "And ; " Se. Wesley, Campbell, Penn, Sawyer, Kendrick.
Belg., "ende;" Luther, "auch;" S. Fr., "et;" Iber., "i;"
Ital., " e." As Se is continuative here, " and " is'more appropri-
ate than " then," which, as it is often an adverb of time, would be
ambiguous.
k " a dispute ; " S<,a).oyio/tbs. Eob. (Lex., in loco,
], Wakef., Angus, M. Beza, " disceptatio." Penn and Dick.,
" a controversy ; " G. Fr., " ils entrerent in dispute." Compare
Mark 9 : 33, 34, Tl ev ifj 6Sca nfos cavrovg Stef.oyt&a&s ; E. V.,
What was it that ye disputed among yourselves by the way ? "
fos aUftovs ya$ Ste^xd-rjaav Iv ifi oSf?, ris fieicoi>, "For by
the way they had disputed among themselves who should be the
greatest." 4iaAoyco/ibs is rendered by " dispute" (E. V.), Phil.
: 14 ; " disputation," Bom. 14 : 1. So it should be in 1 Tim. 2 : 8,
where the E. V. has " doubting." From the parallel, Mark 9 : 33,
and the narration of Matt. 18 : 1, it seems quite probable that a
liscussion as to superiority occurred among the apostles. The last
cited passage presents an affecting rebuke of their ambitious
pint, and is worthy of " everlasting remembrance."
110
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING- TO LUKE. CHAP. IX.
I
GREEK TEXT.
,\
TCOV.
TO, TLS av f'lrj jueto>z> av*
47 o * r ** '^^ x
o oe Irjcrov? ioa>v TOV
8ia\o'yio-/jiov TTJS Kapdias avrcov,
e<rrr](rev
avro
Trap
, "Os iav
48
/cat eiirev
TOUTO TO
iraio'iov eVt TCO 6v6fjLa.Tt. JJLOV, ejj.e
KING JAMES' VEESION.
ing among them, which of them
should be greatest.
47 And Jesus perceiving the
thought of their heart, took a
child, and set him by him,
48 And said unto them, "Who-
soever shall receive this child in
my name, receiveth me ; and who-
soever shall receive .me. receiveth
him that sent me : for he that is
least among you all, the same
shall be great. j^ jg^^ e * Soft fr TLVa
49 And John answered and tVi T cj> 6z/6>art' aov e'/c/SaAAo^ra
said, Master, we saw one casting Ta Saipwia- /cat e'/oAuW/xei/
out devils in thy name ; and we
/cat o? eav /j.e
TOV aTrocrre/AaiTa p,. b
yap fUKpoTepos tv 7rao-iv
OVTOS 0~Tai
8e b
49 '
forbade him, because he followeth
not with us.
50 And Jesus said unto him,
Forbid him not : for he that is
not against us, is for us.
51 And it came to pass, when
the time was come that he should
O.VTOV, OTI OVK aKoAovdei
50
Ka\
t7T TTpOS aVTOV
b 'Irjcrovs, Mr] /oaAuere' oy 'yap
OVK ecrTi Kaff fjp.av, inrep
51 'EFENETO Se i v
ray ?;/ie/jay Tr]s
aurov, Kat auro? TO
EEVISBD VEESION-.
among them, "which of them
would be greatest. And Jesus, 47
perceiving the thought of their
heart, took n a little child, and
set "it by him, and said to them, 48
Whoever shall receive this "lit-
tle child in my name, receiveth
me, and whoever receiveth me,
receiveth him that sent me ; for
he who is -least among you all,
?he shall be great. And John, 49
answering, said, Master, we saw
one casting out "the demons in
thy name ; and we forbade him,
because he followeth not wi th us.
And Jesus said to him, Forbid 50
him not; for he that is not
against us, is for us. And it 51
came to pass q when the time for
his being taken up had come,
' " which of them would be greatest ; " tie &v iiri fi^cav av-
rtSv. Present usage demands " would," as the auxiliary, rather
than " should."
m " a little child ;" naiSiov. Genevan, Thorn., "Wesley, Dick.,
"Wakef., Sawyer. Beza, " puerulum ; " Goschen, " pusionem ; "
Belg., " kindeken ; " G. and S. Fr., " un petit enfant ; " Ital., " un
pieciol fanciullo." So (parallels) Matt. 18 : 2, 3, 4, 5 ; 19 : 13.
Mark 10 : 14, 15. 1 John 2 : 13. Bob. (Les.) : "A little child,
cither male, or female." Compare ch. 18 : 16, with 18 : 15.
* " it ; " avrb. "Wakef., Penn, Sharpe, Sawyer, Angus, M.
So Kend. and Pechy in the parallel, Mark 9 : 36 (avro). Our
idiom agrees with that of the Greek. "We use the neuter pro-
noun " it," where we do not indicate the sex of a child.
" little child ; " itaidiov. So in the parallel (E. V.) Matt.
18 : 3. Genevan, "Wakef., Scarlett, Sawyer. Beza, " puerulum ; "
Goschen, "pusionem ;" Belg., "kindeken ;" G. and S. Fr., "petit
enfant ; " Ital., " pieciol fanciullo ; " Dan., " lidet Barn." See
v. 47, note.
P " he ; " ovros. Thorn., Sharpe, Sawyer. So often in E. V.,
as Luke 1 : 32 ; 20 : 28.
PP " the ; " ?a. See ch. 9 : 1, note.
" when the time for his being taken up had come ; " Iv -to?
ovfmkijgova&at ras fjfiegas -tys avairjijjscas avrov. This render-
ing is adopted as holding the proper medium between one so
literal as to violate the propriety of our language, and another so
free as to involve a departure from that simplicity of style, which
forms a marked feature in the E. V. In favor of the correctness
of the phrase " his being taken up," it may be remarked that we
have no single word which corresponds accurately with avaAqyis.
" Eeception," " withdrawing," and " ascension," instead of being
its equivalents, are. mere approximates. Bob. (Lex.) defines it " a
taking up into heaven." On referring to Mark 16 : 19, we find
the cognate verb applied to the act denoted by this noun ; avt-
irjy&Tj els tov ovqavbv, " he was taken up into heaven."
KUUKE! : "Qvalrfyis proprie significat elationem ad locum supcn'o-
rem, et avalafipaveo&ai proprie est sursum ferri; hoc vero
idem verbum in N. T. libris saepius adhibitum legitur de Christi
ex his term abitu et reditu ad Patrem, de ascensione ipsius in
Cffilum ; vide Act. 1 : 11, 22. Marc. 16 : 19. 1 Tim. 3 : 16, de
Elia in cesium translate extat Sir. 48 : 9 (o ara}j]y&els if iai-
1,0.711 nvfos lv a^fiaii imtair itvqlvcov). 2 Kegg. 2 : 11 (xai
a.vak-ii<p\h] 'HHov Iv ovaaecofiip tog els lov ov(>av6v),~ ubi He-
braico verbo hbs> respondet. Etiam h. 1. avdhiyis significat :
Christi ex his te'rris abitum et reditum ejus ad patrem in ccelum."
So dvcda/ifidvco is simply in its radical sense "to take up."
" Had come " is used instead of " was come " on the ground that
" have " is the proper auxiliary, with intransitive verbs, instead
of " be." See ch. 2 : 15, and 4 : 34, notes. As an alternative
rendering, " when the days for his being taken up were com-
pleted."
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. IX.
Ill
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
be received up, he steadfastly set
his face to go to Jerusalem,
52 And sent messengers before
his face : and they went and en-
tered into a village of the Samari-
tans, to make ready for him.
53 And they did not receive
him, because his face was as
though he would go to Jerusalem.
54 And when his disciples
James and John saw this, they
said, Lord, wilt thou that we
command fire to come down from
heaven, and consume them, even
as Elias did ?
55 But he turned, and rebuked
them, and said, Ye know not what
manner of spirit ye are of.
56 For the Son of man is not
GREEK TEXT.
avTov ecTTijpif^e rod
TTOpeveo-0ai els 'lepovo-aXr/fj..
52 KOL a-rrea-reiXev ayyeXov? irpo
Trpoo-coTTtiv .avrov' /cat iropevdev-
rey elo~rjX8oi> ety
petTatv, cacrre erotfj,acrai cuvrw.
53 \ > e* /*- N tt
/cat JOVK. eoe^avTo avrov, on
TO irpoo~a)Trov avrov i]v Tropevo-
l^evov elf *Iepovo~aXr)iJL. 5i IBov-
rey 8e ol fj.adrjTa.1 avrov '/a/ca)/3oy
/cat 'Ia>a.vvt)s elirov, ICvpie, (de-
Xeis e'i7ra)fj.ej^l7rvp KaTafirjvai OTTO
TOV ovpavov, -/cat avaXwaai au-
roiif) toy /cat 'HXias eTrolrjae;
55 VT JL v S^ ' ' '
2jTpa(pei$ oe eTreTifjLycreir av-
TOIS, /cat elirev, OVK ot'Sare otou
' ' ' ' ~ 56 < ^
ecrre u/^ety; o yap
EEVISED VERSION.
r he firmly set his face to go to
Jerusalem. And 'he sent mes- 52
sengers "before him ; and they
went and entered into a village
of the Samaritans, to make
ready for him. And they did 53
not receive him, because 'his
face was turned w towards Jeru-
salem. "And his disciples 54
James and John seeing this,
said, Lprd, wilt thou that we
command fire to come down
from heaven, and consume them,
even as Elijah did ? But he 55
turned and rebuked them, and
said, ^Yeknownotof whatspirit
ye are. For the Son of man 56
' " lie firmly set ; " sorijoige. Sawyer. This verb occurs
thirteen times in the N. Test., and is rendered in the E. V. by
" to fix," " establish," " strengthen," and in the present instance,
only, by " steadfastly set." As " steadfastly " is now obsolescent,
" firmly " is adopted as its substitute. It is accurate, and more
euplionoiis.
* In conformity with the punctuation of the text, a period is
placed after "Jerusalem." So Kend., Norton. The punctuation
of Griesb., Knapp, Theile, Tittm., Schott, Goschen, and Scholz
agrees with Baxter's Text. Kecept.
' " he sent ; " aitearetiev. Kend., M., Sawyer, Penn. The
punctuation (see preceding note) requires that the nominative of
the verb should be expressed.
u " before him ; " jr^o n^oaeonov avrov. Tyndale, Cranmer,
Geneva, Kend., Thorn., Norton, Scarlett, Dick., Wakef., M.,
Sawyer. The text presents a Hellenism, which, though intelligi-
ble, is not in harmony with our idiom. Eob. (Lex., ngoocoztov) :
" "With prepositions, and followed by a genitive of the person, it
(nqoocaitov) forms, like the the Heb. ftijs, a periphrasis for a
simple preposition." In other words, in the case before us, the
literal phrase " before his face " has the same signification as " be-
fore him." As the expression " he firmly set his face " occurs
very near this sentence, our usus loquendi demands that " face "
should not be repeated. Such a repetition strikes the ear as
harsh and unnatural. When there is no repetition, a cliange
from the literal rendering of the E. V. may not be necessary,
though much might be said in its favor, as a matter of taste. It
way be laid down as a general truth, that in ancient languages,
especially those of the East, closely connected repetition of
kindred or identical sounds was deemed as beauty, Iput it is far
different with the English. Luther and De Wette, " vor sich ; "
Dan., " for sig ; " G. and S. Fr., " devant lui ; " Iber., " delante
de si ; " Diodati, " davanti a e ; " Ital., " innanzi a se ; " Castalio
and Schott, " ante se."
r " his face was turned ; " TO ttqoaeoitov rjv itogsvopevov
(literally, "his face was going;" so Sharpe). Kend., M. Do
Wette, "sein Angesicht gewandt war;" S. Fr., "sa face etait
dirigee." But Scarlett and Dickinson, " his face was directed ; "
Wakef., " he was going with his face turned." The E. T. Las
copied Tyndale, who probably derived his rendering from Eras.,
" facies ejus erat euntis." The participle Ttoqevopevov not being
in the genitive, but in the nominative, this rendering is inaccu-
rate. But if we drop the Hebrew idiomatic expression, we can
say, " he was going," as Norton and Sawyer. I submit this as
an alternative rendering. Rob. (Lex.) remarks that nqoacoTtov,
the face, is put for the presence, person of any one. So 2 Cor.
1 : 11, ix KoU.cov nqoaconcov TO els y/ias %a(>iafia, E. V., " the
gift bestowed upon us by means of many persons." See ftijs, Ge-
senius's Lex. Bretsch. (nqoaionov) : "Ex hebraismo inservit
periphrasi turn personarum quum rerum."
v "towards;" els. Kend., M. Eob. (Lex., in verbo] : "After
verbs implying direction upon, or towards any place, or object.
See Acts 24 : 15, 16, sis iov Qeov jrpos TOV Gtov.
1 "And his disciples seeing ; " ISovrcs Se ol fia-fri/rcti avrov.
Kend., Wesley, Scarlett, Sawyer, Thelwall, M. S. Fr., " Et ses
disciples 1'ayant vu." The adverb " when " is not necessary.
i " ye know not of what spirit ye are ; " OVK otSars o'iov nvev-
fiaTos eare vfi&s. Kend., Wakef., Campbell, M. The Textus
Eeceptus points this passage as interrogative, " Do ye not know
what spirit ye are?" So Griesbach, Knapp, Theile, Scholz,
Schott. Translators, who have followed this punctuation, sup-
112
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP: IX.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
come to destroy men's lives, but
to save them. And .they went to
another village.
57 And it came to pass, that as
they -went in the way, a certain
man said unto him, Lord, I will
follow thee whithersoever thou
goest.
58 And Jesus said unto him,
Foxes have holes, and birds of
the air have nests ; but the Son
of man hath not where to lay his
head.
GEEEK TEXT.
VIOS TOV a.V0p(OTTOV OVK r/X0e
tyv)(a$ di>0pa>Tro)v aTroAecrai, aA-
Aa (rcocrcu. Kal Tropevdrjo~av
1$
57
avTotv i> rjj 6Sa>, eiTre'Ti? irpos
OLVTOV, ' AKoXovdrjorco croi OTTOV
* ' ' ' 58 -TT" ^
av carepxr), Kvpiz. K.O.L
avT< o 'Irj&ovs, Al aAffl
(fiaiXeovs Covert, KCU TO.
TOV ovpavov KaTao-Kr/vcoo-eif 6
8e vlos TOV avdpanrov OVK
TTOV TT]V 69
Eiire
KEVISED VERSION'.
'came not to destroy men's
lives, but to save them. And
they went to another village.
And it came to pass, a b as they 57
were going "on the way, a cer-
tain man said to him, Lord, I
will follow thee d wherever thou
goest. And Jesus said to him, 58
"The foxes have holes, and the
birds of the air have 'shelters :
but the' Son of man hath not
where to lay his head.. And 59
pose that the sense is, Do ye not know of what spirit ye should
be as my disciples? However, as there does not seem to be
sufficient authority for taking lore in the sense of " ye ought to
be," the view taken by all the early commentators, that the sen-
tence is declarative, is deemed correct. Bloorofield (N. Test.)
remarks: "It is no small objection to the interrogative mode,
that not one of the ancient commentators so understood the
words." In his " Supplemental Volume " he says : " I still, as
formerly, prefer to assign to them (i. e., the words) a declarative
sense, as having (with less of SewoTtjs, than the interrogative
form) more of simplicity and earnest inculcation of a weighty
truth, in setting before his hearers their want of self-knowledge,
' ye know not by what spirit and disposition ye are actuated in
saying this, and how much at variance with the spirit of the
gospel of love promulgated by Him, who came not to destroy
mens bodies, but to save their souls.' "
' "came;" $5*. Kend., Scarlett, Wakef., Thelwall, M.
The aorist should have its usual equivalent, the Engish imperfect.
* " that " (in E. V.) is dropped as superfluous. So Norton,
Wesley, Penn, Sharpe, Dick., Scarlett, Wakef., Camp., Sawyer,
Kend., Thelwall, M.
b " as they were going ; " itofevofiercov mnaiv. "Wakef.,
Penn, Kend., Angus, M. In Bagster's text, the comma is incor-
rectly placed after aiirtov, instead of 6 Sep. The same error occurs
in the Polymicrian.
* " on the way ; " ei> rfj 6S(j>. Sharpe, Camp., Sawyer, Kend.,
M., Norton ("on their way"), Scarlett ("on the road"). This
corresponds with our usus loquendi more nearly than "in the
way."
1 " wherever ; " oitov (with av). Liddell (in verbo) : "Wher-
ever with the subjunctive." Bob. (Lex.). Norton, Sharpe, Dick.,
Kend., Sawyer, M. " Whithersoever " is obsolete.
dd The article should be retained here, and in the next member
of the sentence.
" shelters ; " xonamajvwoets. Sawyer and Camp., " places
of shelter." The appropriate equivalent of " nest " is voaaia.
See Sept., Numb.. 24 : 21. Deut. 22 : 6 ; 32 :11. Kcnaoxrjviaois is
defined by Bretsch. : "Locus commorationis, domicilium, liabitatio."
In Sept., Ezek. 37 : 27, xdl coral 17 xaTaoxijvaiois ftov ev avrole
is the rendering of bfi^S *HVn fTTrt, where it refers to the
sacred tent, or tabernacle. Tobit 1 : 4, o vabs Tifsxaraoxrivea.
asms, "the temple of the habitation." Liddell: "A place in
which one takes up quarters." In classic writers, it is used for
the act of pitching tents, encamping, taking up one's quarters.
Bloomf. (in parallel, Matt. .8 : 20) remarks that the word does
not signify nests, " but simply places of shelter, roosts, such as
those where birds settle and perch." The verb Karaaxtjvota
(Rob., Lex.) signifies " to fix dawn a tent, to pitch tent, to encamp.
In N. Test, generally, to sojourn, to dwell, and, spoken of birds,
to haunt. So Iv -cols xiaSois (Matt. 13 : 32) ; T iteieiva.
xoxeaxfivcoatv Iv tols xidSots (Luke 13 : 19) ; vao -cr,v oxiav
avTov ra ncrctva TOV ovgavov y.araaxrjvovv (Mark 4 : 32)."
Ps. 104 : 12, 'JSi? avra ta itersiva. ?ov ovqavov xaraaxjjvmasi,
" Upon them (i. e., the trees) shall the birds of the air dwell."
Kuincel (on Matt. 8 : 20) : " Per araa}trjvc6aei.s non nidi, sed
latibula significantur, loca ubi volucres consident et quiescunt,
tecti ab injuria cceli." Sic verbum xaraax^vovv de avibus in
ramis arborum considentibus et quiescentibus legitur Matt. 13 :32.
Luc. 13 : 19, neque vMtaax^vovv respondet Heb. ^ sed verbo
"p'SBJ, quod ,de avibus ita usurpatur, ut sit commorari, quiescere,
versari, considere ut Dan. 4 : 18 ubi Thepdot. ita .adhibuit xa.ra-
jvovv." As "dwelling," "habitation," and "lodging" are
necessary for rendering other Greek words, "shelters" is deemed
most appropriate. It is defined by Webster : " That which
covers or defends from injury or annoyance. A house ia&.shelter
from rain and other inclemencies of the weather ; the foliage of a
tree is a shelter from the rays of, the sun."
" The healing plant shall aid,
. "From storms a skelter, and from heat a shade-" POPE.
Compare Ps. 104 : 17, aijia tnujiia (rpbri, E. V., "As for the
stork, the fir-trees are her house." Kaiaaxrivcaaeie is rendered
Wohnungen" by De Wette. S.Fr., "habitations;" Iberian,
" sitios donde habitar" ("places where they dwell, i.e., dweUing-
places ") ; Dick., " places of rest ; " Wakef., " roosts."
THE GOSPEL AC CORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. X.
113
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
59 And lie said unto another :
Follow me. But he said, Loi'd,
sufier me first to go and bury my
lather.
60 Jesus said unto him, Let
the dead bury their dead : but go
thou and preach the kingdom of
God.
61 And another also said, Lord,
I will follow thee ; but let me
first go bid them farewell which
are at home at my house.
62 And Jesus said unto him,
'No man having put his hand to
the plough, and looking back, is
fit for the kingdom of God.
CHAP. x.
AFTER these things, the Lord
appointed other seventy also, and
sent them two and two before his
face into every city, and place,
whither he himself would come.
2 Therefore said he unto them,
GREEK TEXT.
8e wpos eTepov, 'AKoXovOsL pot.
'0 8e etTre, Kvpie, emTpetyov
fj-OL mreXdovTt, TrptoTov Qatyai TOV
TraTepa fj.ov. 60 Elm 8e avTqi o
' A^e? TOVS vfKpovs
TOVS eavTcov veKpovf cry
&'
Xeiav TOV Oeov. 61 E'are Se KOU
erepos, ' ' A.KoXov9r)o~a> croi,
fj.oi airo-
TOI? flf TOV OLKOV /JLOV.
7715 fc* v ^ ' T
M<nre oe irpos O.VTOV o 2r)(Tov?,
OvSeis
62
' rrjv X e V a av ~
TOV 7T apOTpOV, KCU /SAeTTWI' CIS
TO. OTTiVfi), fvdeTOf COTTIV CIS Tr/V
/SacriAetai/ TOV Oeov.
CHAP. X.
MET A Se TavTa aveSetgev o
KvplOS KOU TpOVf f/3So^1JKOVTa,
/cat a,Treo~TeiXev OLVTOVS ova. Suo
irpo 7rpoo~coirov O.VTOV, ely Tracrav
iroXtv KOI TOTTOV ov e/^cAAez/ au-
2
TO?
ovv
BEVISED VERSION.
he said to another, Follow me.
But he said, Lord, f permit me
first to go and bury my father.
g And Jesus said to him, h Leave 60
the dead to bury 'their own
dead : but go thou and publish
the kingdom of God. And an- 61
other also said, Lord, I will
follow thee ; but 'permit me
first to bid farewell to those in
my house. And Jesus said to 62
him, No one, having put his
hand to the plough, and. look-
ing back, is fit for the kingdom
of God
CHAP. X.
AFTER these things, the Lord 1
appointed seventy others "also,
and b sent'them forth, "two by
two, into every city and place,
where d he himself was about
e to go. f Then he said to them, 2
' " permit ; " btir^stjiov. Scarlett, Dick., Campbell, Sawyer,
Kend., M. See ch. 8 : 32, note.
1 "And;" Se. Sharpe, Penn, Dick., Rheuns. So at the
commencement of v. 59 (Elite Se). Vulg., " dixitque ;" G. and
S. Fr., " et ; " Iber., " I ; " ItaL, " E ; " Heb. N. Test., v The
particle is translated by Eras., Beza, Castalio, Goschen, Belgic,
Luther, De Wette, Danish. The E. V. followed Tyndale, in
omitting it.
h " Leave ; " 'Ayes. Scarlett, Sharpe, Dick., Angus. Eob,
(Lex., -in iierld) : " With an ace. and predicate to leave, or let
remain in any state." So (E. V.) Matt. 5 : 24 ; 8 : 15 ; 18 : 12 ;
22 : 22. Mark 12 : 12. Luke 4 : 39 ; 11 : 42 ; 18 : 29, etc.
' " their own ; " iavraiv. Thorn., Sharpe, Dick., Wakefield,
Kend. So Eph. 5 : 28, ra eavrtSv oeaftctra, E. V., " their own
bodies ; " and v. 29, njv eavrov oa/ixa, E. V., " his own flesh.''
Philipp. 2 : 4, ra iavriSv, E. V., " his own things ; " and v. 12,
rffv envriov ocorijpiar, E. V., " your own salvation ; " v. 21, ra.
eavTi&v, E. V., " their own." 1 Thess. 2 : 8, ras eavreov ii>v%ag,
E. V., " our own souls."
1 " permit." See ch. 9 : 59, note.
* " also ; " y.ai. This position is given to " also " on the ground,
that there is an obscurity in the E. V. by the location of this
word after " seventy," as it implies that lie had sent forth
" seventy " on a former occasion. 'Ert-govs (" others ") refers to
the twelve apostles whose mission is recorded in cb. 9 : 1. The
sentence is elliptical, as Kuinosl remarks (in loco) : "'EjSSoftij.
xovra est formula elliptica, post facpovs comma ponendum, et
subaudiendum : fiad'tjrci.s olrives tfidofiijxovTa, alios discipulos
numeros septuaginta ; " i. e., " other disciples also, who were
seventy in number." See ch. 23 : 32, al hepot Svo xay.ovgyoi,
i. e., " two others who were malefactors," or, more concisely, " two
others, .malefactors." Camp., Norton, Bloomf. (N. T.), Penn,
Angus, M., Sawyer, Dick., and Sharpe have "seventy others
also."
b " sent forth ; " aitearedev. So (E. V.) in v. 3, and Matt
10 : 5 ; 13 : 41. Mark 3 : 14 ; 6:7, etc. Angus.
" " two by two ; " ava. Svo. Scarlett, Sharpe, Sawyer, Kend
S. Fr., " deux a deux ; " Iber., " de dos en dos." The Hebraistic
form Svo Svo is properly rendered thus, as in Mark 6:7. " Two
and two " accords with our twus loquendi.
d " he was about ; " ejueUev. Norton, Penn, Wakef., Sawyer
Kend., Thelwall, Angus, M. See ch. 7 : 2, and 9 : 31, notes.
" to go ; " epzeo&ai. Penn, Camp., M., Murdock. G. and
S. Fr., " aller ; " Iber., " a ir."
' "Then;" ovv. Kendrick, M. Angus. This particle often
114
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. X.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
The harvest truly is great, but
the labourers are few : pray ye
therefore the Lord of the harvest,
that he would send forth labourers
into his harvest.
3 Go your 'ways: behold, I
send you forth as lambs among
wolves.
4 Carry neither purse, nor scrip,
nor shoes : and salute no man by
the way.
5 And into whatsoever house
ye enter, first say, Peace le to this
house.
6 And if the son of peace be
there, your peace shall rest upon
it : if not, it shall turn to you
again.
GREEK TEXT.
7r/joy avrovf, '0 {JLCV 0epicrfi.o?
TroAuy, 01 dt ipyarai 6A/yor
deijdrjre oSv rov Kvpwv TOV Be-
OTTCOS K/3aXXr) epydras
yere- Idov, eyco aTrocrreAAcw vfj.as
a>s apvas ev fjL<ra> AU/C&H/. 4 /IT)
/Qacrra<*ere fiaXavriov, fjnj. Trrjpav,
e VTroBr/fjiaTa' /cat fj.r)8eva
8ovucnrd(F>r)ar6e. 5 JEis
r)v ft av oiKiav elcrep^cr&e, TrpSt-
TOV Ae'yere, Elprjvrj ra> ot'/ca> TOV-
TO>. 6 KOU feus fjiev y e/cet o vlo?
eipr/vTys, eVai/aTraucreTew. eV au-
TOV 17 flpr/vij i>[j.a>v el 8e fj-rj-ye,
EETJSED VERSION.
The harvest ^indeed ; is great,
but the laborers are few ; b pray
therefore the Lord of the har-
vest, 'to send forth laborers
into his harvest. 3 Go; behold, 3
I send you forth as lambs among
wolves. Carry neither purse, 4
nor k bag, nor shoes : and salute
'no one by the way. And into 5
"whatever house ye enter, first
say, Peace be -to this house. And 6
if "a son of peace "is there, your -
peace shall rest on fhim : 'but
denotes not the consequence, but the sequence of one clause on
another, having- the force of " then," " now." Bob. (Lex.). So
(E. V.) Matt. 7 : 11 ; 12 : 12 ; 13 : 27. Luke 3 : 7, 10 ; 6 : 9 ;
10 : 37, etc.
* " indeed ; " /tev. Scarlett, Dick., Wakef., Sawyer, Kend.,
Angus, Thelwall, M. " Truly" 5s required for other words, and
often receives an improper empliasis, as used in this passage in the
E. V.
h " pray ; " Sajd-rfre. There is no necessity for introducing
" ye " in this instance, as the pronoun it not emphatic. It is not
inserted by Scarlett, Norton, Dick, "Wakef., Camp., Angus,
Sawyer, Kendrick, M., Tyndale, Geneva. The E. V. copied
Cranmer.
1 " to send forth ; " oncos ex/Sdtty. Instead ofix/JaJUi? (prest.
subj.), Griesbach, Knapp, Tittm., Goschen, Schott, Bloomf., and
Kuinoel have txpaky. On the contrary, Lachmann, Tischendorf,
Theile agree with the Text. Eecept. Schott has the following
note : " Scripturam vulg. IxpaUy cum Lachm. tenuimus. Altera
in codd. quidem permultis (9 unc.) expressa IxySaAi? ex Matt.
9 : 38 profecta." The rendering by the infinitive instead of the
Eng. subjunctive, is more concise, and equally correct. So Scar-
lett, Norton, Wakef., Kendrick, Sawyer. See Kiihner, <|329,
Bern. 5.
1 G O; " Tnciyeie. Scarlett, Wesley, Sawyer, Kend., Mur-
doch So (E. V.) Matt. 5 : 41 ; 9 : 6 ; 13 : 44 ; 18 : 15 ; 19 : 21 ;
20 : 4, 7 ; 21 : 28 ; 26 : 18. Mark 5 : 19. Bob. (Lex., in verbo) :
" Gener. i. q. to go, go away to a place." Bretschneider, " abeo,
discedo." When used intransitively, this verb signifies "to de-
part," and often simply " to go." " To go ones way " is obsolete.
Vulg., Eras., Mont., "Ite;" Castal., Vadite ; " G. and S. Fr,
"Allez;" Iberian, "Idos." Heb. N. Test., siab. Syriac, o^f.
Alternative rendering, " depart."
* "bag.;" mj ? av. See ch. 9 : 3, note. So Norton, Camp.,
Angus. The E. V. took " scrip " (now obsolete) from the
Genevan Version.
' " no one ; " [triSsva.. Sharpe, Thorn., Norton, Penn, Dick.,
Scarlett, Wakef., Sawyer, Kend., Angus, Thelwall, M. S. Fr.,
" ne-^personne ; " Iber., " nadie ; " Belg., " niemant ; " De Wette,
" niemanden ; " Dan., " ingen ; " Vulg., Moui, Erasmus, Beza,
Schott, Goschen, " neminem."
m "whatever." Thorn., Sharpe, Norton, Penn, Dick., Scar-
lett, Kend., Camp., Angus, Sawyer, M.
" " a son ; " vloe. The article is canceled by Griesb., Knapp,
Theile, Tittm., Lachm., Tischend., Schott, Scholz, Bloomf. The
latter remarks : " The article 6 is omitted in almost all the best
MSS., some Fathers, and nearly all the early Editions." " The
sense is, one deserving your blessing." The article is properly
omitted in the translations of Sharpe, Norton, Wesley, Dick.,
Camp., Kend., Sawyer.
"is;"s- Penn, Angus. This accords with present usage.
P " him ; " canov. Norton, Scarlett, Camp., Kend., M., Tyn-
dale, Cvanmer, Geneva, Bheims, Wiclif. Vulgate, "ilium"
(referring, as muscul., to filius; domi being feminine). Erasmus,
Mont., Schott, Beza, Goschen, " super eum ; " Castal., " in eo ; "
Belg., " hem ; " De Wette, " ihm ; " Iber., " el." As a masculine,
mitbv refers to vlbs ; although olurf is masculine, it is the mere
remote antecedent. In the parallel, Matt. 10 : 13, the pronoun
is feminine, aimjv, and must be rendered " it," as its antecedent
is oixia (feminine). In this instance, the idea conveyed by olv.ia,
is rather " family," than " house." Worthiness is predicated not
of the house, but its inhabitants. Compare Matt. 10 : 11, 12,
agios iorf els TTJV olxiav, atmaoaad'e avrf t v.
but if not ; " tl Ss firjys. Thorn., Penn, Norton, Thelwall,
Sawyer. Mont., " si vero non ; " Eras., Beza, Castal., Schott,
Goschen, " sin minus " (see Leverett, Diet, " sin minus "). Rob
(Lex., ye) : "El 8e wye, i. q. el Ss fir,, but stronger, but if not
so indeed, it otherwise, Luke 10 : 6, but- if not, otherwise." This
THE GOSPEL ACCOKDING TO LUKE. CHAP. X.
115
KING JAMES' VERSION.
7 And in the same house re-
main, eating and drinking such
things as they give : for the la-
bour,er is worthy of his hire. Go
not from house to house.
8 And into whatsoever city ye
enter, and they receive you, eac
such things as are set before you.
9 And heal the sick that are
therein, and say unto them, The
kingdom of God is come nigh
unto you.
10 But into whatsoever city ye
enter, and they receive yon not,
go' your ways out into the streets
of the same, and say,
11 Even the very dust of your
city which cleaveth on us, we do
wipe off against you: nothwith-
GREEK TEXT.
ev avrr
8e rfj oiKia /severe, ecrdlovres Kal
TTIVOVTCS TO, -Trap avTcov a^ios
yap 6 p-ya.Tr]s TOV p.icr6ov avrov
ecrTi'" /tir) /zera/3a/fere e oiK/ay
1 1 / R \ * Rf * '
eis OLKIO.V. /cat ety ijv o av TTO-
Xtv flfrep^frde, KOL de^covrat
vfMas, <r0LTe TO. Tra.paTi9ffj.eva
V/JUV, 9 Kal 0pa7rVfTf: TOV? l>
dcrdeveis, Kal Ae'yere
77
TOV Oeov. 10 elf
eicrep)(r](rde, Kal
v/j.as, ^eX06vTf els TOLS irXa-
reta? ayrijr, enrare, u Kau. TOV
KOviopTOV TOV KoXXr)0evTa rj/juv
K Trjs TroAecoy vfj-cov a.Trofj.aara'o-
8' av
REVISED TERSIOlSr.
if not, it shall return to r you.
And in 'that house remain, eat- 7
ing and drinking 'what they
have : for the laborer is worthy
of his "wages. Go not from
house to house. And into 'what- 8
ever city ye enter, and they
receive you, eat w what is set
before you. And heal the sick 9
"in it, and say to them, The
kingdom of God y draweth near
to you. But into "whatever 10
city ye enter, and they receive
you not, 'go out into b its streets,
and say, Even the c dust of your 11
city which cleaveth d to us, "we
phrase is often rendered by " otherwise " in the B. Y., or, with
more exactness (as in 2 Cor. 11 : 16), " if otherwise," equivalent
in sense to " but if not."
r " again," in the E. V., is superfluous after " return," as
it implies more than one act of returning. Compare Matt.
2:12. Hebrews 11 : 15. "Again" is omitted by Thomson,
Sharpe, Penn, Norton, Scarlett, Camp., Sawyer, Kendrick, Thel-
wall, M.
1 " that house ; " avrfj rjj olxia. "Wakefield, M., Murdoch.
Sohott, Groscheo, " in ilia domo ; " S. Fr., " cette maison la ; "
Ital., " quella casa." The rendering of the E. V. would require
tv Se Tfj O.VTTJ oixiix.
' " what they have ; " to. ita.f> avrcav. Sharpe, Penn, Thel-
wall ("whatever"), Norton, Angus. "They have" is used also
by Wesley, Wakef., and Thorn. Bretsch. (na^a. cum Genit.) :
" In N. T. vero etiam ica^a cum genitivo ita dicitur, ut idem sit
quod apud profanes ztaga cum dativo. Sic to. itaya tivos (quod
apud prol'anos est vel dona, vel mandata alicujus) Marc. 5 : 26
indicat : bona, facilitates (Luc. 8 : 43, S).ov iov piov) ; et ol
napd twos (apnd profanos, missi ab aliquo), Marc. 3 : 21, sunt:
qui aliquem comitantur," etc. Rob. (Lex., (> with genit.) :
"Generally to come, be derived or possessed from any one." Tyn-
dale, " such as they have ; " Luther and De "VVette, " was sie
haben ; " Iber., lo .que tengan ; " Diodati, " cio che vi sara ; "
OJoschen, " qu illis sunt ; " Vulg., " qua apud illos sunt." Heb.
N. Test., &rta im-
illorum"). The E. V. copied Cranmer.
u " wages ; " (tea&ov. Thomson, Norton, Camp. So (E. V.)
John 4 : 36. 2 Pet, 2 : 15. The word is used here in the sense
f a recompense for services performed, and, in conformity with
Syr., .oBi-? ,-io (" ex eo quod est
*
present usage, has an exact equivalent in " wages." " Hire " is
no longer used, in this sense.
T " whatever." See v. 5, note.
w " what is set before ; " ia TtagaTi&e/tfva. Kend., Angus,
Norton, Sawyer. See eh. 5 : 27, note. Crosby, Gram., 336.
1 " in it ; " & avTjj. Peun, Scarlett, Sawyer, Kendrick, M.,
Murdock. Beza, Castal., Schott, Goschen, "in e&;" Iber., "en
elk ; " Diodati, " in essa." " Therein " is obsolete.
y " draweth near ; " rjyywev. Scarlett, " is near ; " Wakef.,
" is nigh ; " Kendricb, " is come near ; " Camp., " comes (upon
you)." So (E. V.) Luke 21 : 8. Jas. 5 : 8 ("draweth nigh").
The verb in this tense is often rendered in the E. V. " at hand."
'Hyyixa has the sense of adsum. Bretsch., Lex. Liddell : " In-
transitive, to be near, come near." Compare Deut. 31 : 14. Sept.
'jSov riyyixaaw al rjfifyai TOV &avdrov aov, E. V., " Behold, thy
days approach that thou must die."
1 " whatever." See v. 5, note.
a " go out ; " ei-sA&dvTcs. Thorn., Sharpe, Penn, Norton
Dick., Scarlett, Camp., Kend., Angus, M.
b " its ; " avrijs. Sharpe, Penn, Norton, Sawyer.
c There is nothing in the text to authorize "very" before
"dust." It was copied from Tyndale. Omitted by Sharpe,
Penn, "Wesley, Norton, Dick., Sawyer, Kend., Angus. Nothing
equivalent to it in Yulg., Mont., Beza, Castal., Schott, Goschen,
Belg., Luther, De Wette, Dan., Diodati, Ital.
d " to us ; " v/av. Thorn., Sharpe, Dick., Scarlett, Wakef.,
Camp., Angus, Kend., M. Lat. verss,. " nobis ; " G. and S. Fr,,
" a nous ; " Iber., " nos ; " Diodati, " a noi."
"we wipe offj" attofiaaaofiE&a. There is no reason for
inserting "do" before "wipe," as there is no emphasis which
116
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. -X.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
standing, be ye sure of this, that
the kingdom of God is come nigh
uiito you.
12 But I say unto you, That it
shall be more tolerable in that
day for Sodom than for that city.
13 Wo unto thee, Chorazin !
wo unto thee, Bethsaida! for if
the mighty works had been done
in Tyre and Sidon, which have
been done in you, they had a great
while ago repented, sitting in
sackcloth and ashes.
14 But it shall be more tolera-
ble for Tyre and Sidon at the
judgment, than for you.
15 And thou, Capernaum, which
art exalted to heaven, shalt be
thrust down to hell. '
GREEK TEXT.
fj.fda vp.lv irXr/v TOVTO yivw-
cr/cere, on riyyiKtv e(p' vp.as rj
fiaa-iXela TOV Oeov. 12 Aeyw Se
vjj.lv, OTI SoSo/AOis ev Trj r]p.epa
dveKTorepov ecrTai, rj rfj
Keivy. 13 OvaL <TOI, Xo-
paf^iv, oval crot, JBr)6(ra.'i8a' OTI
t eV Tvpco KCU SiScoi>i eyej/ozro
al 8vvdp.i$ a.1 yevop.V(u kv vp.lv,
TraAat av (.v <ra;cK<a KOL cnro(
Ka.6-fjp.evai
Tvpa> ' Kat
ecrrai ev rrj Kpicret, r) vp.lv. /ecu
crv, Ka.Trepva.ovp,, rj ecos TOV ov-
pavov v\lfcodei(ra } cas a8ov KO.TO.-
15
RETISED VERSION.
wipe off against you : .notwith-
standing, 'know .this, that the
kingdom of God e draweth near
to you. But I say to you, That 12
h it will be more tolerable in
that day for Sodom, than for
that city. Woe to thee, Chora- 13
zin! woe to thee, Bethsaida!
for if the mighty works had
been done in Tyre and Zi-
don, which have been done in
you, 'they would have repent-
ed 'long ago, sitting in sack-
cloth and ashes. But k it will 14
be more tolerable for Tyre and
Zidon 'in the judgment, than
for you. And thou, Capernaum, 15
m that art exalted to heaven,
"shalt be brought down "to the
demands it " Do " is not employed by Thorn., Sbarpe, Kend.,
Penn, Dick., Norton, Scarlett, Wakef., Camp., Angus, Sawyer,
Tyndale, Geneva. It first appeared in Coverdale's Version.
' " know ; " yivcooxsts. Thomson, Sharpe, Penn, Wesley,
Norton, Scarlett, Camp., Sawyer, Kend., Angus, M., Thelwall,
Murdock, Elieims. Syr., oi>5. Heb. N. Test., !|$*i. Vulg., Mont.,
Beza, Bras., Costal., " scitote ; " De "Wette, " wisset ; " G. and
S. French, " sachez ; " Dan., " dog skulle I vide dette ; " Iber.,
" sabed ; " Diodati and Ital., " sappiate." " Be ye sure of this "
was taken from Coverdale's rendering, " of this ye shall be sure."
Tyndale has, " mark this."
* " draweth near." See v. 9, note.
11 " it will be ; " Harai. Thorn., Sharpe, Penn, Dick., Norton,
Scarlett, Wakef., Kend., M.
1 "they would have repented;" avfuxevorjoav. Norton,
Gray (note on Angus), Thorn., Penn, Wesley, Scarlett, Wakef.,
Kend., Dick, ("would have reformed"), Sawyer ("would have
changed their minds").
J " long ago ; " italai. Thomson, Sharpe, Wesley, Scarlett,
Camp., Sawyer, Kend., Angus, M., Thelwall, Eheims, Murdock.
The natural position for " long ago " is after " repeated." So
Thorn., Wesley, Camp., Angus.
k " it will be ; " eorcu. Thorn., Sharpe, Penn, Dick., Norton,
Scarlett, Wakef., Kend., M.
i "in the judgment ; " &> Tf t * fleet. Wesley, Scarlett, Wake-
field, Camp., Sawyer, Eheims. De Wette, " im Gerichte ; " Iber.,
" en el juicio ; " Belg., " in het oordeel ; " Dan., " i Dommen ; "
Diodati, " nel giudicio." The B. V. copied " at " from Tyndale.
" that ; " 57. Thelwall, Kend. ,
" " shalt be brought down ; " xara/St/Saad-ijat]. Murdock,
Norton (" will be brought down "), Wakef. and Kend. (" will be
brought down "). De Wette, " wirst du erniedriget werden." So
in parallel (E. V.) Matt. II : 23, " shall be brought down." Bob.
(Lex., xa.Ta/3i/3aco), "to cause to go down, to bring down;"
Liddell, " to make to go down, put or bring down." The verb
occurs only here, and in Matt. 11 : 23. S. Fr., " tu seras abais-
see ; " Iber., " seras abajada."
" to the under-world ; " teas aSov. This word ci3qs (in
classic Greek aZStjs and utS^s) occurs eleven times in the N. T.
Matt. 11 : 23 (B. V., " hell ") ; 16 : 18 (B. T., " hell "). Luke
10 : 15 (E. V., " hell") ; 16 : 23 (E. V., " hell "). Acts 2 : 27
(E. V., " hell "). 1 Cor. 15 : 55 (E. V., grave "). Eev. 1 : 18
(E. V., "hell"); 20 : 13 (E. V., "hell"). In classic Greek
writers it is used to signify the world, or region inhabited by the
shades or spirits of the dead. The deepest part of this world or
region was supposed to be tbe abode of the wicked, who were
there punished forever. This was named Tartarus. See Hesiod.,
Theog. 721-733. Odyssea, B. XI. ^Eneis, B. VI. In the
Sept., it is the term most frequently employed for translating
tixiu (sheol). Tet it seems obvious that the Hebrews did not
regard Hx\a as a locality, where any distinction of character
was recognized. It was the common receptacle of all the dead.
It has been a question whether iixia, as used in the 0. Test,
was not used to indicate the tomb regarded as one common
receptacle for the bodies of all the dead, the image being taken
from the deep sepulchral caverns used in ancient times, as places
of interment. Thus in Ecclesiastes 9 : 10, " for there is no work,
nor device, nor knowledge, nor wisdom in the grave (Heb.
^Hiaa, ' in sheol ; ' Septuagint,' h aSg, ' in Hades '), whither
thou'goest." Isa. 14 : 11, in allusion to the death of the king of
Babylon, the prophet says, " Thy pomp is brought down to the
grave (Heb. in'xtt), 'sheol;' Septuag., sis aSov, 'to Hades'),
and the noise of thy viols : the worm is spread under thee, and
the worms cover thee." Similar imagery is employed in describ-
ing the overthrow and death of Pharaoh and other kings, Ezek.
32 : 17-32. On the other hand, it may be urged, that the ap-
pearance of Samuel at Endor, 1 Sam. 28 : 7-20, proved that the
spirits of the departed had their abode in a region beneath the
THE ttOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. X.
117
KING JAMES' VERSION.
16 He that heareth yon, hear-
eth me ; and he that despiseth
you, despiseth me ; and lie that
despiseth me, despiseth him that
sent me.
17 And the seventy returned
again with joy, saying, Lord, even
the devils are subject unto us
through thy name.
18 And he said unto them, I be-
held Satan as lightning fall from
heaven.
19 Behold, I give unto you
I
/j,e
GREEK TEST.
16 '0 OLKOVCOV VJJLCOV
KCU 6 a6eTa>i> v/j.ds
6 5e e/ze
TOV
17
KOVTO.
Be ol e/38oju.r)-
crercci
8
nail TO. Ba.Lfj.ovLa virordcr-
iiv f.v ro> 6vofJt.ot.TL (rov.
Se aurofy, 'JSOecapow
TOV a.Tavav a>s acrrpa-jr^v (K
> ~ i ~\<$ ><*. ^
rov ovpavov TTfarovTa. ioov,
8iS(ojj.i V/J.LV TT]v ef^ovcriav TOV
REVISED VERSION.
under-world. He that heareth 16
you, heareth me ; and he i>that
rejecteth yon, rejecteth me ; and
he that rejecteth me, rejeeteth
him, who sent me. And the 17
seventy 'returned with joy, say-
ing, Lord, even r the demons
are subject to us "by thy name.
And lie said to them, I beheld 18
Satan 'falling from heaven like
lightning. Behold, I give -you 13
'authority to tread on serpents
earth. Not to dwell longer on this question, it may be remarked
that " hell " has no longer the sense in -which it was once used to
indicate an unseen, or hidden place, but that it now conveys the
idea of the region of punishment " prepared for the devil and
his angels." In other words, " hell " ia the proper equivalent of
yiewa, Gehenna, Heb. t&ti N^S, " valley of the son of Hinriom."
See 2 Kings 23 : 10. Jer. 7 : 31 ; 32 : 35. Compare Jer.
2 : 23 ; 19 : 6, 13. The later Jews employed this name to denote
the place of future punishment. So in Arabic Jehdnnam is used
in the same sense, to this day. Although there are cases where
" grave " will afford a good sense, as a translation of *>iXl!J and
aSijs, yet, in strictness, we have no equivalent for these terms in
oar language. Of the terms, which approximate most nearly to
fliem, that of De "Wette, " under-world " (' Unterwelt ') is deemed
most appropriate. In all cases, however, " Hades " should be
placed in the margin. I should have preferred "pit," as most
familiar to English readers, but for the fact that in Isa. 14 (cited
above) it is needed for the rendering of isia (bor), which is ren-
dered " pit " in the 0. Test. In the Bevision of Job, published
by the A. B. TJ., " under-world " (from De Wette) is used for ren-
dering " sheol." See Bob. (Lix., uSrjs, and yeevva). G. Camp.
(Prelim. Dissertat. to Gospels, VI, on "ASrjs and rcsvva). Kend.,
Norton, Dick., Campbell, and Scarlett have transferred Hades
into their versions. Wakef., "grave;" S. Fr., "le lieu invisi-
ble ; " Iber., " el mundo invisible ; " Diodati, " inferno ; " Ital.,
" luogo invisible ; " M., " the regions of the dead."
P " that rejecteth ; " 6 ad-eriov. So (E. V.) ch. 7 : 30. Mark
6 : 26. John 12 : 48. Bob. (Lex., in verbo). Bretsch., " reji-
cio." So Thomson, Wesley, Wakef., Camp., Scarlett, Norton,
Kend., Sawyer, Thelwall, M. Beza, " rejicit ; " Castalio and
Schott, " repudiat ; " Goschen, " repudians ; " Belg., " wie ver-
werpt ; " De Wette, " wer verwirft ; " G. and S. Fr., " qui
rejette ; " Iber., " quien desecha ; " Ital., " chi respinge." So
the word is rendered in the three other instances, in which it
occurs in this verse.
i " returned ; " vitearQsyav. "Again " is omitted as super-
fluous and inaccurate, as it implies that there had been a previous
return. It is not employed by Thorn., Sharpe, Wesley, Dick.,
Penn, Wakef., Camp., Scarlett, Kend., Norton, Sawyer, Angus,
Thelwall, M., Bheims. "Again " was first placed after " return-
ed" by Tyndale. It is a curious fact that Wiclif, who used
" turned again," avoided a mistake into which all the other early
English translators fell.
r " the demons ; " ra. Satftovia. Thorn., Sharpe, Dickinson,
Wakef., Camp., Scarlett, Norton, Sawyer, Kend., Thelwall., M.
See ch. 4 : 33, note.
8 " by thy name ; " ct> -rej> bvofiari aov. Penn, Sawyer.
" Through " is the appropriate rendering of Sia, with the genitive.
The thought here is, that by the authority of Jesus the demons
were subjected to the command of the apostles, and were com-
pelled to go out of those whom they possessed. Thus in v. 19.
He Says, SiSoifit eovaiav snl naaav rrff Svra/ztv rov ez&jiov.
Sehott renders iv icy bvofiari aov " tuo nomine," with the ex-
planation, " tua auctoritate." Goschen has " tuo nomine." The
primany sense of lv, in, might be used, but in this connection, it
seems to be deficient in perspicuity. Compare Acts 4 : 9, 10, ev
tivi ovros aeaeorat' yrcoaiov iorca Sri lv no ovo/cari Ytjoov
XQIOTOV sv rovrcp ovros ^ta^iarrjy.sv Ivcoitiov vftiav vyirjs,
E. V., " by what means he is made whole ; be it known that
by the name of Jesus Christ by him doth this man stand here
before you whole." See Bob. (Lex., iv). Acts 4 : 7, 'Ev noiq
Svvaftei rj sv Tcoiy ovofian litoifjoars tovro vfisis; E. \ r ., "By
what power, or by what name have ye done this ? " See Bob.
(Lex., ovofia).
' "falling from heaven, like lightning;" cos a.arqa7cr t v exroi
OVQO.VOV neaovra. The participle nsaovra. belongs to Saravav.
To obviate the ambiguity in the E. V., this arrangement is
adopted. Bloomfield (N. Test, Supplementary Vol.) notices the
construction: "It seems that we have here a condensed brevity
of expression for sd'scogovv rov Saravav sx rov ovpavov neaov-
ra, eos aor^anrjv lit rov ovqavov Tteoovaav." The above
arrangement is the most familiar and natural for English readers.
S. Pr., "Je contemplais le Satan tombe du ciel, comme un
eclair."
" "you;" vftiv. The preposition "unto," after "give," is
superfluous. It is properly omitted by Thorn., Wesley, Sharpe,
Wakef., Scarlett, Norton, Angus, Kend., Thelwall, Sawyer, M.
T ," authority ; " Qovolav. Pechy (note on Angus), AJford
118
THE GOSPEL ACCOEDING TO LUKE. CHAP. X.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
power to tread on serpents and
scorpions, and over all the power
of the enemy : and nothing shall
by any means hurt you.
20 Notwithstanding, in this re-
joice not, that the spirits are sub-
ject unto you ; but rather rejoice,
because your names are written
in heaven.
21 In that hour Jesus rejoiced
in spirit, and said, I thank thee,
Father, Lord of heaven and
earth, that thou hast hid these
things from the wise and prudent,
and hast revealed them unto
babes : even so, Father ; for so it
seemed good in thy sight.
GBEEK TEXT.
ITTOLVCO o(peow KCU crKop-
, Kal em Traa-av Trjv Swa.fj.iv
TOV f-ftOpov' KCU ovdev vfias ov
* fc ' 20 ^ > '
fir/ a.OiKT}O"f). TrArjJS fV TOVTCO
on TO,
de xa
vfj.v
2i ' Ev
UTroraenrerar
OTL TO. ovofJiCL
TOif oupavoL?. v aur]7 r
copa rjyaXXLa.a-a.ro T& wvfVfJLari. b
'Ir/o~ovs, KOU e'nrev, 'JE^ofioXo-
yovfJLal <TOL, Trdrep, Kvpie TOV ov-
pavov KaLTrfs yySjOTi aTreKpv\jsa?
TUVTa OTTO O~0(j)(OV KOU (TVVeT&V,
Kal aTTfKaXv^as avra vr/Triois'
val, 6 Trariyp, OTL OVTOJS eyivero
evSoKia efJLTrpoo-dfv crov. 22 Kal
o~Tpa(j)eis irpos TOVS
REVISED VERSION.
and scorpions, and over all the
power of the enemy ; and, noth-
ing shall by any means hurt
you. Notwithstanding, w rejoice 20
not in this, that the spirits are
subject to you ; but ^rejoice
7 that your names are written
*in the heavens. In that hour 21
Jesus' rejoiced in spirit, and
said, I thank thee, Father,
Lord of heaven and earth, that
thou hast "hidden these things
from the wise and ''discerning,
and hast revealed them to
babes : even so, Father ; for
so it seemed good in thy sight.
(quoted by JVL), M., Wakef., Penn, Murdook. A distinction
should be made between i^ovaiav and Svvaftw, in the next
clause of this verse. See ch. 4 : 6, note. See Eob. (Lex.).
Should it be deemed advisable to retain " power," then I would
render Svva/uiv (here) by " might." All the early Eng. transla-
tors, except Wiclif (who has power virtue), have confounded the
words in this passage; in other words, they copied Tyndale.
Translators in other languages have pursued a more judicious
course, e. g. Vulg., Mont., Eras., " potestatem virtutem ; " Beza,
Sehott, " potestatem vim ; " Castalio, " potestatem vires ; "
Goschen, " auctoritatem vires ; " Belgic, " macht kracht ; "
Luther and De Wette, " Macht Gewalt ; " Danish, " Magt
kraft; " U. Fr., " puissance ^force ;" S. Fr. and De Sacy, " pou-
Toir puissance ; " Iber., " potestad ^poder ; " Diodati, " podesta
^potenza ; " Ital., " podestda possa."
" " rejoice not in this, that ; " lv tovtcp p
Norton, Penn, Wakef., Thorn., Scarlett (" at this "), Dickinson,
Eheims, Murdoek. This slight change in the order of the sen-
tence renders it more accordant with our twus loquendi, and more
easy to be understood. So the S. Pr., " rejouissez-vos plutot de
ce que," etc. ; Iber., " no os gozeis [solamente] de esto, de que,"
etc.
1 MaUov, in the Testus Beceptus, after Se, is canceled by
Griesb., Lachm., Knapp, Theile, Goschen, Scholz, Bloomf., aud
bracketed by Tittmann, Not noticed in the Peseh. Syriac, or
Vulgate. Sehott says : " Vocula ficdlov (a librariis addita post
St, hiec partic. adversat. magis illusti'aretur) recte omissa apud
Griesb. aliosque auctoritate multorum cdd. (10 unc.) verss.,
Pesch. Philox., Arr., Pers. Memph., JEth., Arm., Goth., Slav.,
Vulg., It., quibus patres plures Gr. et Lat. consentiunt." Beyond
a doubt, the word is spurious.
y "that;" Sri. So'(B. V.) in the first clause of the verse.
Sharpe, "Wesley, Dick., Scarlett, "Wakef., Camp., Penn, Norton,
Sawyer, Kendrick, Cranmer, Coverdale, "Wiclif, Eheims, Mur-
dock.
* " in the heavens ; " lv vote ovqavots. Thelwall, "Wiclif (" b
heavens ") ; Vnlg., Mont, Eras., Beza, Castalio, Goschen, Sehott,
"cosies;" Belg., "in de Hemelen;" G. and S. Fr., "dans les
cieux ; " Iber. and Span., " en los cielos ; " Diodati and Ital., " ne'
cieli." The following note from the Eevision of Mark (1 : 11),
published by the A. B. IT., is in point : " from the heavens ; &
TCOV ovgavcov. So in v. 10 (E. "V".). In all cases, I would make
the number correspond with that of the text, where ovpavos
occurs. It is true, that the singular and plural may often be
coincident, according to Hebrew usage, still, as either form is
used in our language, exactness will sustain a literal rendering.
So Wakef., Dick., Wiclif. Vulg., Eras., Mont, Beza, ' crelis ; '
G. Fr. and S. Fr., ' cieux ; ' Span, and Iber., ' cielos ; ' Syriac,
" hidden ; " anexfv^as. Penn, Norton, Kend. This form
of the participle often occurs in the E. V. See Levit 5 : 2.
Deut 30:11. Job 15 -.20; 24 :1. Prov. 28:12. Acts 26: 26.
For the sake of euphony, it should be uniformly employed.
b " discerning ; " mirtxiuv. This word occurs four times in
the N. T., and is uniformly rendered " prudent." As " prudence,"
however, implies " caution in deliberating on the most suitable
means to accomplish valuable purposes, and the exercise of sagaci-
ty in discerning and selecting them " (Webster, Diet.), and is
especially applicable to the idea of perceiving and avoiding evil,
it is not the proper equivalent of owezos. This, word is defined
by Eob., " discerning, intelligent, sagacious." De Wette, " Ein-
siehtsvollen."
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. 2.
119
KING JAMES' VERSION.
22 All things are delivered to
me of my Father : and no man
knoweth who the Son is, but the
Father; and who the Father is.
hut the Son, and he to whom the
Son will reveal him.
23 And he turned, him unto
Ms disciples, and said privately,
Blessed are the eyes which see the
tilings that ye see.
24 For I tell you that many
prophets and kings have desired
to see those things which ye see,
and have not seen them; and to
hear those things which ye hear,,
and have not heard them.
25 And behold, a certain law-
yer stood up, and tempted him,
saying, Master, what shall I do to
inherit eternal life ?
GREEK TEXT.
, Jlavra, rrapedodij /j.oi VTTO
TOV Tra.T,pos p.ov Ka ovSeif -yt-
TLS eO~TLV 6 VLOS, 61 /J.T) 6
/cat TLS ecmv o TraTr/p, el
p,r) 6 vlos, /cat <j> ecus ^SovA^rat 6
via? aTTOKaXvrai. 23 Kcu crrpa-
fj.o
24
(j&ety "jrpos TOVS [ia.6-r]Tas /car'
I8iav erne, MaKaptoi ol 6<pdaX-
ol (3Xe7rovTes a ySAe?rere.
^ e ~ </ \ -v V
yap vp.iv, OTI TroAAot
KOI /SatriAeiy fjOeXija'av
Idelv a v.fj.eis ySAerrere, /cat OVK
KOU aKovcrai a. aKOvere,
/cat OVK rjKOvcra.v.
25 IT- \ >s> v ' > /
jflLat toov, VO/J.LKOS T.IS ave-
j, eKTreipdfav O.VTOV, /cat Ae-
-diSaavcaAe, T'I Troirjcras
BEVISED VERSION.
'All things, are delivered to me 22
d by my Father, and c no one
knoweth who the Son is, 'ex-
cept the Father ; and who the
Father is, s except the Son, and
he to whom the Son h wisheth to
reveal him. And 'turning to 23
his disciples, he said 'privately,
'Happy are the eyes which see
the things that ye see. For I 24
tell you that many prophets
and kings 'desired to see the
things which ye see, and "saw
them not ; and to hear the
things which ye hear, and
"heard them not. And, behold, 25
a certain lawyer "rose, and *try-
ing him, said, 'Teacher, what
c At the beginning of v. 22nS, the Textus Keceptus of Bagster
has the sentence, Knl orgacpeis itgos roiis /la&qras sine. The
B. V. omits this, as do Erasmus, Griesbacb, Knapp, Bloomfield,
Goschen, Scholz, Vulg. On ; the other hand, it is found in the
Syriac, and is retained by Lachmann, Tisch., Theile, Tittmann.
I deem ; the remark of Schott Correct: "Ante mcarru /tol vulgo :
al OToa<pEls -rcfibg rove fia&r;Tas sine. Recte hsec vbb. Griesb.
ct al. eliminarunt prseeunit. cdd. D. L. minusc. hand paucis verss.
cd. Whel., Memph., JEtih., Arm., Vulg., It. Glossemati debeban-
tnr (ex v. 23 desnmto) quo indicantur sequentia non amplius ad
preeea Christi pertinere."
d " by my Father ; " vno roii nar^as. " Of," indicating the
author, agent, or instrument, is obsolete. Present usage requires
' by." So Thorn.; Sharpe, Dick., Scarlett, Wakef., Penn, Nor-
ton, Sawyer, Kend., Angus, Thelwall, M.
" no one ; " ovSels. Sharpe, Wesley, Dick., Scarlett, "Wake-
field, Camp., Norton, .Sawyer, Angus, M., Thelwall. Belgic,
" niemand ; " De Wette, " niemand ; " Iber., " nadie ; " Diodati
and Ital, " niuno."
1 "except ; " ft ^. M. Bob. (Lex., el prj) on Matt. H : 27.
Hoogeveen, p. 55.
s " except." See last note.
h " wisheth ; " fiovfyrac. Sharpe, Thelwall. Buttm. (Lexilog.
1, p. 26, quoted by Bob., Lex., /Sov&ofiat) says, that the distinc-
tion between poviofiai and &J.a> is, that the latter expresses an
active choice and purpose, the former a mere passive inclination,
or willingness. As " will " is so often used as an auxiliary verb,
expressive sometimes of future time, and at others of determina-
tion, it produces an ambiguity, if used in this passage. As an
Alternative Tendering, " may wish." So Thelwall (in note). Eob.
gives to be witting, to be disposed or minded to desire, as defini-
tions of fiovlofiat. Wesley, " is pleased ; " Thomson, " will
please."
' "turning;" orQayels. Sharpe, Wesley, Dick., Scarlett,
Camp., Penn, Kend., M., Thelwall. See Luke 7 : 9, note.
! "privately;" iSiav. As an alternative rendering, " he said
to them apart."
k " Happy ;" May.a^ioi. See ch. 1 : 45, note. So Thomson,
Dick., Wakef., Kend., M., Tyndale, Cranmer, Geneva. S. Fr.,
" bienhenreux ; " Iber., " felices."
i " desired ; " r,d-&r]0av. Wakef. The aorist should have its
usual force here. So Sharpe ("wished"), Dick, ("were desir-
ous"). Kuinoel : " Optabant, cupiebant idem quod bte&vfaioav,
Matt. 13 : 16, quern quidem verbi significatum confirmat inter-
pretum Alexandrinum actoritas."
m " saw tltem not ; " ow. elSov. Thelwall. See last note.
" " heard them not ;" fy.ovaav. Thelwall. See note supra on
" "rose;" avsanj. Kend. ("arose"), Dick., Wakef. ("rose
up"). Eob. (Lex., aviarrifit,) : "Often rendered by rise and
arise in B. V., Matt. 9:9; 26 : 62. Mark 2 : 14 ; 5 : 42 ;
9 : 27 ; 10 : 1, 50. Luke 5 : 25 ; 22 : 45.
J> " trying ; " sxnet^a^cov. See ch. 4 : 2, and 4 : 12, notes. So
Wesley, Campbell, Kend. As the infinitive -would better accord
with our usus loquendi, the rendering of Sharpe, Wakef., Penn,
and Norton, " to try," is proposed as an alternative. Numerous
cases occur, in which the participle after a verb expresses the
design, or object, and in such, cases it may be properly rendered
by the infinitive.
i " Teacher ; " ^ftSaoxals. Kend., Thomson, Sharpe, Dick.,
Scarlett, Wakef., Norton, Sawyer, M., Thelwall, Murdock. So
120
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. X.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
26 He said unto him, "What is
written in the law ? how readest
thou?
27 And he answering, said,
Thou shalt love the Lord thy
God with all thy heart, and with
all thy soul, and with all thy
strength, and with all thy mind ;
and thy neighbour as thyself.
28 And he said unto him, Thou
hast answered right : this do, and
thou shalt live.
29 But he, willing to justify
himself, said unto Jesus, And who
is my neighbour ?
30 And Jesus answering, said,
A certain man went down from
GREEK TEXT.
aiaviov KXrjp
2G'y^i>V'j V v '77
U oe LTT irpos O.VTOV, Ji>v
rcS v'ojJUp'Ti yfypaTTTai; TTtSy ava-
yiixocrKei? ; 27 '0 Se a
,
et7rei>
Kvpiov TOV
Osov crov, e oXrjs TTJS KapBias
o~ov, KOI e oXrj? TTJS ^fv^jf crov,
KCU e oXrjS TTJS Icr^yos crov, /cat
e oXrjs Trjf c>iavoia.s crov /cat
TOV "irXr)crlov crov coy <reavroV.
8e avTcS, 'Opd>s car-
TOVTO TTOiei, /cat r/a~rj.
29 'O 8e deXcov SIKCLIOVV eavTov
etTre irpos TOV 'Irjcrovv, JsTat TLS
ecrTL {lav TrXrjo-iov; 30 'TTroAa-
ficov 8e o 'Ir/crovs tlrrev, "AvOpca-
TTOS TLS Kareficuvev oaro 'lepov-
28
BEVISED VEESION.
shall I do r to inherit eternal
life? And he said to him, 26
What is written in the law?
how readest thou? And he, 27
answering, said, Thou shalt
love the Lord, thy God, with
all thy heart, and with all thy
soul, and' with all thy mind ;
and thy neighbor as thyself.
And he said to him, Thou hast 28
answered 'rightly : 'do this,
and thou shalt live. But he 29
"choosing to justify himself,
said to Jesus, Who, T then, is my
neighbor? Jesus "replied, A so
certain ww man x was going down
(E. V) John 3 : 2. Acts 13 : 1. 1 Cor. 12 : 28. Eph. 4 : 11.
Heb. 5 : 12. See ch. 2 : 46, note. De TVette, " Lehrer ; " S.
Fr., "Docteur." Heb. N. Test., 13-3. Syr., fiV<J[ (ab ws^
"lie taught").
r " to inherit ; " xhigovofiriato. As an alternative, " to ob-
tain." Kuinrel: "Id quod $%en>, cUinere, consequi, v. Matt.
5 : 5."
" rightly ;" 6f9-c5s. Wakef., Norton, Kend. So (E. V.)
eh. 7 : 43 ; 20 : 21. By this orthography, we distinguish the
adverb from the noun, and the adjective " right."
' " do this ; " rovto noiei. Thorn., Dick., Scarlett, Wakef.,
Penn, Camp., Norton, Sawyer. The inverted order of these
words was copied from Tyndale.
u choosing ; " &elcov. Kob. (Lex., &&ca) : " Generally to
will, i. q. to wish, to desire, to choose." As " to wish" is used as
the equivalent of {Sovkoftai, in v. 22, it is desirable to employ a
term which will be appropriate for &s%co, and, at the same time,
distinguish it from the former word. It is obvious, that deter-
mination is not the idea conveyed by the verb in this instance,
but preference. Bather than obey the divine rule, the law of
love, he chose to narrow its requirements to a point, where he
might stand justified as a righteous man. Kuinoel : " Legisperi-
tus, qui Jesum quaestione sua in invidiam adducere voluerat, cum
spe excidisset : &&cov Stxaiofv eavrbv cine v.. t. L se purgatu-
rus, interrogabat Jesum : ecquis vero est mihi proximus ? Sixat-
ovv eavrov notat insontem, re aut argumentis se declarare, hine
excusare, purgare se, ut h. 1. et Gen. 44 : 16, ubi legitur lais-fia
p'TOSS-nai quas verba Alexandrini reddiderunt: rl ).a).^ad/tsv,
rj 11 Sutaua&difiEv ; cur excusemus nos?" (E. V., "what shall
we speak ? or how shall we clear ourselves ? ")
T "then;" xo.1. Bob. (Lex., xal, e) : "Before interrogatives,
where in strictness ttal is simply copulative, but serves to add
strength and vivacity to the question, and, and then, then." So
E. V., Mark 10 : 26 (Kai vis Svvarae ocod-jjvKi;) " Who then
can be saved ? " Bob. cites the passage before us, as an illustra-
tion of this use of xal. 2 Cor. 2 : 2, xal rig eariv 6 Evrpgaivtov
fie E. "V., " who is he then that maketh me glad? " Kuinosl :
" Particula xal h. 1. reddi debet, igitw, tandem."
w "replied;" vnolaptov Hm-v. Norton, Sawyer, Scarlett
("replying"). By this rendering a verbal distinction between
" answer " and " reply " is made, similar to that in the Greek
between anox^td-els sitter ("answering said"), and vnola-
PK>V elnev. The classic and Hellenistic usages in this phrase
are not the same. According to the former, vnoiaj3a>v is not
pleonastic. Kuincel (in loco) : " In libris scriptorum proborum
exterorum vnolaptov jungitur %t/nj -cum aliquis dicentem inter-
pellat, cum aliquis ita respondet, ut aliquid excipiat et reprehen-
dat, circumscribat et corrigat in iis, qua? dicta sunt ab altero, ut
adeo tune vnolajituv non redundet." On the other hand, he thus
notices the Hellenistic usage : " Verbo wtolctppaveiv in versione
septuaginta virali exprimitur Hebr. fiss ita, ut significat respon-
dere, et idem valeat quod anov.^lva9ai, vid. Job. 2:4; 4:1,
etc."
ww Man" is not a supplement.
* " was going down ; " xa.Tspat.vsv. Thorn. (" going down "),
Kend., Murdock. Syr., |ooi xLS. "Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza,
Goschen, Schott, " descendebat ; " Castal., " descendens." As in
German the imperfect tense represents continued, or repeated past
action (Ncehden's Germ. Gram., p. 310), we find this tense em-
ployed here by Luther ("ging"), and De Wette ("zog"). As
an ordinary use of the Greek imperfect is to represent action
begun but not completed, it is properly rendered by the English
progressive form of imperfect. Trpllope (Grami., p. 129) : " 11
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. X.
121
KING JAMES 7 "VERSION.
Jerusalem to Jericho, and fell
among thieves, which stripped
him of his raiment, and wounded
Aim, and departed, leaving him
half dead.
31 And by chance there came
down a certain priest- that way;
and. when he saw him, he passed
by on the other side.
32 And likewise a Levite, when
he was at the place, came and
looked O7i him, and passed by on
the other side.
33 But a certain Samaritan, as
he journeyed, came where he was :
and when he saw him, he had
compassion on him.
34 And went to him, and bound
up his wounds, pouring in oil and
GREEK TEXT.
(raXrjfJi. els 'lepi^G), /cat
Trepteirecrev, 01 /cat e/c5ucraz>rer
aiiTov, /cat TrA^yay e
aTrrjXddv, a(f>evT? r/fudavij
/ Ml \ / s>v
yavovTa, Kara (rv/KVpiav oe
ifpevs TLS KaTeftaivev ev rfj oSqi
KCU lScav O.VTOV O.VTL-
ofj-oieaf
fc \
oe
JTOV,
33
Kai
yevoftevos KO.TCL TOV TO-
/cat I8a)v avTi7rapf)X-
Se TLS odevcov
r/Xde /car O.VTOV, /cat I8(ov avrov
e(T7rXa.-yxyicr6r)- 3 * /cat TrpocreX-
6cav KaTeSrjcre ra Tpa.vp.aTa av-
(fXaiov /cat olvov
TOV
REVISED VERSION.
from Jerusalem to Jericho, and
fell among ^robbers, who "both
stripped and beat him, and de-
parted, leaving him half dead.
And by chance a a certain priest 31
b was going down that way, and
'seeing him, he passed by on
the other side. And so "also a 32
Levite, d being at the place,
came, and 'seeing him, passed
by on the other side. But a 33
a certain Samaritan, f as he was
journeying, came e to him, and
'seeing him, he had compassion
on him; and 'going to him, 34
bound up his wounds, 'pouring
on oil and wine ; and k he set
denotes art ion continued and not completed while something else
took place." Stuart (Gram., 2 51, p. 71). "Went down" im-
plies, contrary to the narration, the traveler actually reached
Jericho. (Jr. and S. Fr., " descendait ; " Iber., " bajaba."
* " robbers ; " IrjoraZg. Thorn., Scarlett, "Wesley, Dickinson,
Campbell, Norton, Sawyer, Kend., Angus, M. Vulg., Mont.,
Eras., Beza, Casta!., Goschen, Schott, " latrones ; " De Wette,
"Banter;" S. Fr., "brigands;" Iber. and Span., "ladrones;"
Diodati and Ital., " ladroni ; " Dan., " Rovere." Bob and Liddell
(Lexx., IJIOT^S), " a robber." Bretsch. : " (Dicitur) de latronibus,
qni vi adgrediuntur itinera facientes, Luc. 10 : 30, 36. 2 Cor.
11 : 26. Matt. 27 : 38, 44, etc." This word occurs fifteen times
in E. V. of N. Test., and is rendered by "robber" four times,
and by "thief" eleven times. In all cases, "robber" is the
proper rendering. The E. V. and other early Eng. translations
have copied "Wiclif.
* " both and ; " y.al y.al. Scarlett, Sawyer, Angus. Vulg.,
Mont., " etiam ^et ;'" Eras., " etiam ac." Eob. (Lex., xi) :
" It has an intensive, or cumulative force xal y.al, Eng. both
and." Bost's Greek Gram., <! 134, p. 503. Hoogeveen, p. 85 :
"Wherever xal is repeated in the same clause, or member, it is in
one place superadditory."
* "a certain priest;" legevs its. The natural order of the
English is the same witli that of the Greek. There is not the
slightest necessity for transferring the sentence. So Thomson,
Scarlett, Sharpe, Wesley, Dick., Penn, Wakef., Norton, Sawyer,
Send., M.
b " was going down ; " Kare/Saivsv. Kend. -See note on this
word, v. 30. Penn, Thomson, Norton, Wakefield combine xara.
ovyxvqinv with this verb, and render, "happened to be going
down."
" " seeing ; " lSa>v. Scarlett, Sharpe, Wesley, Camp., Sawyer,
Kend., Thelwall, M. Belg., " ziende."
" Je. Thus (E. V.) Matt. 23 : 35 ; 27 : 41, etc.
a " being at, etc. ;" yevo/tevos *..*. L The language of the
E. V. is retained here. As yivoftai with prepositions and ad-
verbs implying motion, marks a change, or transition to another
place, or state and is often used in the sense of come, arrive,
etc., as in Acts 21 : 17, a different rendering is suggested
as an alternative. It is, "approaching the place." Eobin-
son (Lex., yivofcai, b, e) says : " Cum ace. of place, to come
upon, near to, towards, Luke 10 : 32. Acts 27 : 7." Iberian,
'' que llegose cerca del lugar" ("who approached the place");
S. Fr., " qui arrivait en ce lieu ; " Ital., " ehe giungeva in qtiel
luogo " (" who arrived at that place ") ; Diodati, " essendo venuto
presso di quel luogo ; " De Wette, " der gegen den Ort hiu kam."
" seeing ; " iScov. See v. 31, note. The same word should
receive the same rendering.
f " as he was journeying ; " oSevcav. The progressive form of
the imperfect is substituted for the ordinary one (used in the E.
V.), as exact and familiar. See (E. V.) Luke 13 : 22. S. Fr.,
" qui voyageait ; " Iber., " que caminaba."
6 " to him ; " v.cri avrov. Tyndale (" unto him "), Cranmer,
Geneva. De Wette, " zu ihm ; " Ital., " a lui ; " Vulg., secua
eum ; " Eras., Castal., Goschen, " ad eum ;" S. Fr., " vers lui ; "
Belg., " omtrent hem " (" near him ") ; Diodati, " presso di lui."
Heb. N. Test., -iiis.
h " seeing ; " IScov. See v. 31, note. Thelwall, M. S. Fr.,
" ayant vu."
1 "going to;" x$oadd-a>v. Wesley, M. S, Fr, " s'etant
approche."
J " pouring on ; " em^ecav. Thomson, Wakefield, Norton,
Angus (" upon them"), Sawyer. Rob. (Lex., in iierbo), " to pour
upon." Sept., Levit, 5 : 11, ovx eTtizstz In OVTO eiatov (" he
shall not pour oil on it"). Gen; 28 : 18, %ne%ev titt TO ax^ov
a.vrijs (" poured oil on the top of it ")'. 2 Kings 9 : 6, Jm^eE -co
ehatov tni -cr t v xsipalrjv avrov, Liddell, " to pour over, or
upon."
k he." The pronoun is expressed for the sake of dividing the
122
THE GOSPEL ACCOEDING TO LUKE. CHAP. X.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
wine, and set him on his own
beast, and brought him to an inn,
and took care of him.
35 And on the morrow, -when
he departed, he took out two
pence, and gave them to the host,
and said unto him, Take care of
him ; and whatsoever thou spend-
est more, when I come again, I
will repay thee.
36 Which now of these three,
thinkest thou, was neighbour unto
him that fell among the thieves?
31 And he said, He that shewed
mercy on him. Then said Jesus
unto him, Go, and do thou like-
wise.
38 Now it came to pass, as they
went, that he entered into a cer-
tain village : and a certain wo-
man, named Martha, received him
into her house.
39 And she had a sister called
Mary, which also sat at Jesus'
feet, and heard his word.
GREEK TEXT.
rt n f r^ > x a \ \ ye*
eTTipipacras oe OVTOV em TO loiov
KTrjvos, yyayev avTOV els irav-
} KOU eTrefj-eXr/drj avTov.
35 \ > v \
KO.L 67Tt TT/V aVplOV
Svo Sr/vapia e'ScoKe T<
, /cat e'nrev avTca, 'JZm-
avTov' /cat o n av
rrpocrSaTravr/args, eyai ev TcS err-
avep-^eo-dai /xe dTroSaxro) croi.
36 TLs OVV TOVTCOV TWV TpltoV
8oKel oroi TrXtjo-lov yeyovivai TOV
efjLrrea-ovTOs els TOVS Xyo-Tasj
37 ' /"l S> ^ 9 /~\ ' ^
U oe emev, U Troirjcras TO
eXeos fj.eT avTov. Elirev ovv
aura) 6 'Irjo-ovs, Hopevov, KCU
(TV TTO/et 0/JLOlCaS'
38 'ETENETO Se ev T<
TTOpeveo-ffat avTOvs, /cat avros
elcrrjXOev els KCO/J.TJV rivat.' yrvvrj
Se TLS OVO/J.O.TI Mdpdct v7reSea.TO
\ j-\ 9 > Qq \
avrov eis TOV OLKOV avTr]s. K.O.L
TrjSe fjv adeX([)r} KaXovfJ-evrj Ma.-
pia, rj KOL 7ra.pa.Ka.dla-a.cra irapa
TOVS rroSas TOV 'Ir)o~ov rjKOve TOV
REVISED VERSION.
him on his own beast, "brought
him to an inn, and took care
of him. And on the next day,' 35
when he departed, he took out
two pence, and gave them m to
the innkeeper, and said to him,
Take care of him, and "what-
ever thou spendest more, I will
repay thee, when I come again.
Which now of these three, 36
thinkest thou, was neighbor to
him who fell among "the rob-
bers? And he said, He who 37
showed him mercy. Then said
Jesus to him, Go, and do thou
likewise. Now it came to pass 38
pas they went on, that he enter-
ed into a certain village : and
a certain woman, named Mar-
tha, received him into her
liouse. And she had a sister 39
ailed Mary, who 'also, 'sitting
at 'the feet of Jesus, heard his
sentence into its appropriate members, according to the division
indicated by the semicolon.
i "And," in the E. "V., before " brought," is not authorized by
the text, and unnecessarily encumbers the sentence.
m " to the innkeeper ; " ty nav8o%eT. Eob. (Lex.) : " The
keeper of an inn." Thorn., Scarlett, Pecliy (note on Angus).
"Host" is obsolescent. It is no longer heard in conversation, is
ambiguous, as it signifies " one who entertains another at his own
house without reward," " one who entertains another at his house
for reward," and again " one who is entertained at the house of
another" (a guest). "Webster, Diet. To these significations may
be added that of the Latin "hostia" ^'victim, sacrifice"), Anglice
" host," the wafer used in the service of the Kornan Catholics.
n " whatever ; " o n av. Sharpe, Scarlett, Dickinson, Camp.,
Penn, Kend., M., Sawyer. " Whatsoever" is obsolete.
" the robbers ? " TOVS Igorus; See v. 30, note.
f " as they -root on ; " iv via nogeveod'ai, avroys. Bob. (Lex.,
in. verbo) : "lo pass, to go, implying motion from the place where
one is ; hence < : /ten i. q. to pass on, to go away, to depart." Penn,
" as they wa 4 forward ; " Norton, " as they -were journeying ; "
Sawyer, " . i 17 T?ere pursuing their journey ; " Angus, as they
journeyed ' ? trlett, " when they were on their journey ; " Dick.,
" as they were proceeding." It is obvious that these renderings
are all based on the fundamental idea of going on, or going for-
ward. So Syriac, paraphrasticalty, \*io[a _. >jj ^oJoi gsi
("as they were going on the way"). Goschen, " proflcisceren-
tur ; " Schott, " profiscentibus iis ; " Belgic, " als zij reisden ; "
De Wette, " als sie reiseten ; " S. Fr., " comme ils marchaient ; "
Iber., " mientras prpcedian ellos."
q " also ; " ttoi. Many late translators have dropped v.ai, sup-
posing it redundant, or, to speak more accurately, a word not to
be represented by an equivalent, in our language. Kuincel, how-
ever, gives the following good reason for retaining oi, in transla-
tion : " Particula xal ex nonnullorum interpretum sententia, h. 1.
redundat. Sed ea referenda est ad verbum TJKOVE, et includit
Christi discipulos aliosque convivas ; " i. e. Mary heard the word
of Jesus, as well as his disciples and others who were present.
This thought is presented by xai, " also."
r " sitting ; " na^ay.a&laaffa. "Wesley, Scarlett, Thelwall, and
M. The participial construction is adopted also by Dick., Wake-
field, Camp. Heb. N. Test., naiui. Erasmus, Beza, Castalio,
"assidens;" Goschen, " considens';" S. Fr., "s'etant assise;"
Iber., " habiendose sentado ; " Ital., " essendosi seduta."
" the feet of Jesus ; " rove noSas tot 'ftjoov. M. This con-
struction is adopted on the ground that the possessive case of
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING- TO LUKE. CHAP. X.
123
KING JAMES' VEESION.
40 But Martha was cumbered
about much serving, and came to
him, and said, Lord, dost thou
not care that my sister hath left
me to serve alone ? bid her there-
fore that she help me.
41 And Jesus answered, and
said unto her, Martha, Martha,
thou art careful, and troubled
about many tilings :
42 But one thing is needful :
and Mary hath chosen that good
part, which shall not be taken
away from her.
GREEK TEXT.
Xoyov OLVTOV. 40 r) 5e MdpOa.
TrtyOteorraro Trepi
/ > -> &
VIQ.V' 7rtO"TCCO"OC
ou /ieAei croi ori ?} d8e\<j)r} fj.ov
SIO.KO-
tyre o^^ aur^ iVa /ioj <rvvav-
41 'AiroKpiGeif fie
avry o 'lycrovf, Mdpda,
MdpOa., fjLeptfJLvas KOU Tvpfidtjr)
it TroAAa- 42 ei/oy 5e eVri
Mapia 8e rr/v dya6rjv
fj.epi8a e^eAe'faro, firis OVK dfiai-
OLTT O.VTTJS.
REVISED VEBSION.
'word. But Martha was "per- 40
plexed "with much serving, and
came to him and said, Lord,
dost thou not care that my sis-
ter hath left me to serve alone?
Bid her, "then, *help me. And 41
Jesus, answering, said to her,
Martha, Martha, ^thou art anx-
ious and 'troubled about many
things : but one thing is need- 42
ful ; and Mary hath chosen *the
good part, which shall not be
taken away from her.
Jesus is distinguished from the nominative only by an apostrophe,
thus, Jesus'. Many readers and speakers make an effort to enun-
ciate the possessive, so as to create a distinction, hence we have
the vulgarism, Jesus'-es.
t word ; " Myov . This term occurs so frequently (in the E.
V.) in the sense of " discourse," that I retain it here, though
" discourse," or the plural form, " words," is suggested as an alter-
native.
" perplexed ; " neqiKoxaro. Scarlett, Dick., M. Iberian
" andaba solicita." Kuincel (in loco) : "Terbum negiaitaffd'ai
A.ttici ponere consueverunt de'iis, qui cingunt aliquid, et circum-
plectuntur, sed inde detrahuntur et avelluntur. Macedones vero
hoc ipso verbo uti coeperunt de iis, qui nimis sunt in aliqua re
occupati, nimis animo in ea defixi, qui ocoupationibus atque nego-
tiis distringuutur ac distinentur, atque hoc sensu illud h. 1. legitur
de Martha, ministrante et operam dante." Bretsch. (in verbo) :
" Ex adjuncto apud serioves scriptores, aninram defigo in aliquid ;
7ts(>i.<maod;at., animo defixum esse in aliqua re, ea districtum, ea
prorsus occupari; semel Luc. 10 : 40, Tcegieoitiiro nsgl nol^v
Siaxoviav, prorsus occupabatur ministerio." As an alternative
rendering, "was distracted;" though I deem this word too
strong, to present the exact thought. The verb seems nearly
synonymous with ivqfiaKn, in v. 41 (" troubled, or disturbed").
T " with much serving ; " rtegi Tto^rjv Siay.oviav. Angus,
Thelwall, M. Wes^y, Scarlett (" with great attendance "), Penn
(" with much service"), Sawyer (" with much serving"), Wakef.
(" with much preparation "). The rendering of ne$l by " with,"
in this case, presents the thought in a form more accordant with
our usus loquendi, than " about." Belg., " met veel dienens ; "
S. Pr., " par beaucoup de soins domestiques ; " G. Fr., " par divers
soins."
* " then ; " ovv. The particle denotes mere sequence of one
clause upon another. Bob. (Lex., in verbo). In such cases, it is
properly rendered ' by " therefore, then, now." See Luke 20 : 29.
John 4 : 5 ; 19 : 40. De Wette, " nun ; " S. Fr., " done."
1 "help me;" Iva. fioi awavrdaftrirat. Here, as in many
other instances, the subjunctive can be most concisely rendered
by the Bng. infinitive. The tliought is presented in a form which,
from its frequent occurrence, is most natural to the readers of our
language. "When "bid" is followed by the infinitive, "to" is
omitted. Bullion's Eng. Gram., g 67, Rule 18. See ch. 7 : 36,
note. S. Fr., " de m'aider."
' " thou art anxious ; " fisgifivqs. Thomson, Scarlett, Penn,
Camp, Sawyer, Angus, Kend., A. Bob. (Lex., in verbo) : " !o
be anxious." " To be careful," in this sense, is obsolete.
z " troubled ; " tv$p<ir}. As this verb may be either in the
pass, or middle voice, I suggest " thou troublest thyself" as au
alternative rendering.
* " the good part ; " -djv aya&rjv fts^lSa. Kend., Cainp.,
Sharpe, Wesley, Sawyer, Angus, M. The article should have its
usual force here. In the original edition of Tyndale (1526), the
rendering is " a good part " (so Coverdale), but in that of 1534,
" that good part." This was copied by the E. V., though Gran-
mer (1539), and Geneva correctly rendered "the good part."
Though there may be a few cases where we may render the
article in the N. Test, by a pronoun for the sake Of perspicuity,
still the remark of Greene (Gram., p. 203) is correct : " The arti-
cle is never used in the New Testament as n demonstrative, of
relative pronoun." The article in the passage before us, is prop-
erly rendered " the," also, by Dick., Penn, Norton.
124
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XI.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
CHAP. XI.
AND it came to pass, that as he
* was praying in a certain place,
when he ceased, one of his disci-
ples said unto him, Lord, teach
us to pray, as John also taught
his disciples.
2 And he said unto them, When
ye pray, say, Our Father which
art in heaven, Hallowed be thy
name. Thy kingdom come. Thy
will be done, as in heaven, so in
earth.
3 Give us day by day our daily
bread.
4 And forgive us our sins ; for
we also forgive every one that is
indebted to us. And lead us not
into temptation ; but deliver us
from evil.
GEEEK TEXT.
TOV
CHAP. XI.
KAI eyeveTO iv TW dvai av-
TOTTffl TLV
toy GTravcraTO, eare TIS T>V /j.adr)-
T>V avrov Trpos O.VTOV, Kvpie,
8i8a^ov 77/uay Trpoo-fvxeo-dai, /ca-
8a>s KCU 'Icadvvrjs eSiSa^e TOVS
avTov. 2 E'are 8e av-
OTO.V Trpoo~ev)(r)o~0 ) Aeye-
re, Harep r/fj-Siv 6 iv rots ovpa-
) aytacrG^Tca TO ovop-a. aov
) j3aoriAe/a troir yevq-
dr)To> TO 0e\r//j.a crov, <ns ev ov-
pavat, KCU eVt TTJS y>?y. 3 TOV
apTov r)iJLG>v TOV iriov(nov SiSov
TO Kaff rjfj.epav 4 KCU a0ep
TO.S d/j.apTias i^cSf, /cat yap
avTol d(j)le[j.v iravrl
Kal fj.rj dcreveyKr/?
dp weipaa-jJiov, aXXa pvcrai y
REVISED. VERSION.
CHAP; xi.
AND it came to pass, that as ;
he was praying in a certain
place, when he ceased, one of
his disciples said to him, Lord,
teach us to pray, even as John
taught his, disciples. And he 2
said to them, When ye pray,
say, ["Our] Father, [who art b in
the heavens,] hallowed be, thy
name. Thy kingdom come. [Thy
will be done e on earth, as it is
in heaven.] Give us day by 3
day our d needful bread. And 4
forgive us our sins ; for we our-
selves forgive every one 'in-
debted to us. And lead us
not into f trial ; [but deliver
a The sentences rnj.tav b Iv TOTS ovqavoTs yev^&rpcoi TO &-
).r;fia aov, cos If ovgavaj, y.ai enl rtjs y>js, are rejected by Gries-
bacl), Tischendorf, Knapp, Kuinoel, Grotius, Mill, Bengel, "Wet-
stein (as quoted by Kuinoel). Kuinoel remarks: "Rectissime
igitur Grotius, Millius, Bengelius, Welstenius, Segaarius et Gries-
bachius, verba ilia pro spuriis habent, et Lucam e Matthseo iis
locopletatum esse contendunt, maxime tum, cum hsec formula
prsecandi in culto publico frequentari cospisset." (This remark of
Kuinoel applies also to .Ua $$oai rjfi&s ano TOV novqgoii, v. 4.)
Schott : " Vulgo post JIO.TCQ add. rjfiiov 6 sv TOTS ovgavois- At
T/fuov deest in cd. B. minuscc. plurr. verss., Pers. ed. Wliel., Vulg.,
3 libris lat. apud Origen., et Marcionem et vbb. b iv TOTS ovq
voTs non leg. in iisdem documentis quibus accedunt cd. L. versio
Arm. duo libri lat. scholia in nonnullis cdd. obvia Additamenta
ex Matt. 6 : 9 inserta recte censuerunt Griesb. aliisque. Post
Paodeia. aov vulgo add. yevjj&j]TO TO &e^fta aov, cos Iv ovpa-
vco, y.al Inl TTJS yijs recta omissa apud Griesb. aliosque auctori-
tate cdd. B.L. nonnullorum minuscc. verss. Arm., Vulg., 4 libro-
rum lat., Origen., Marc., Hieron., August., Bedce. Inserta ex-
Matt. 6 : 10, sub finem post iteioaffpov vulgo add. (ex Matt.
6 : 13) cMa, voat y/nas and TOV itovrjctov, omissimus cum
Griesb. aliisque praeuntibus cdd. B.L. minuscc. plurr. verss.,
Arm., Vulg., 6 libris lat. scholiis in aliquot cdd. adscriptis Marc.,
Hieron., August., Orig."
On the other hand, Tittm., Lachm., and Theile retain the three
passages. Scholz rejects only the last, alia. $va. itowjoov.
Bloomfield strenuously defends the two first readings as genuine,
but speaks doubtfully of the last, which he incloses in brackets.
On the whole, I regard the two first as doubtful, asd, therefore,
bracket them, while the third hardly merits a place in the text.
b " in the heavens." See ch. 10 : 20, note.
6 " on earth, as it is in," etc. So (B. V.) Matt. 6:10, where
the text, is precisely the same. There is no necessity for the
awkward inversion of the sentence, as in the E. V. Tyndalc,
with better taste, gave the rendering, " Thy will be fulfilled, even
in earth, as it is in heaven." So the Geneva. !EVr TIJS yijs
should be rendered not " in," but " on the earth." The E. V. con-
founds Iv (et> ovfio^-with int.
11 " needful bread ; " ibv UCITOV TOV zmovoiov. Norton.
Gosehen, " panem necessarium ; " Schott, " panem qiti ad vitam
sufficiat." Syr., iojojoj Jicu^ ("necessary bread"). Wakef.,
Bloomf., Angus, " bread sufficient for us." The most probable
derivation of emovaios is from ln\ and ovala, being, existence,
and hence the idea will be, bread sufficient, needful for sustaining
life. Origen., TOV els Trjv ovoiav ovfi/3a}.i.6fisvov SOTOV. Suidas,
6 ini Tri ovaiq ?;ftcov cto/uoScov, tj b xa&efceqtvos. Rob. (Lex.,
vTttovs.). Others, with less probability, have derived the word
(as a participle) from em-tfii. The conciseness of " our needful
bread " renders it preferable to the phrase, " bread sufficient (or
necessary) for us." As an alternative rendering, " our necessary
bread."
" indebted ; " oysiiovri. The English idiom coincides with
the Greek, so that it is unnecessary to insert " that is." So Gray
(note on Angus).
f " trial ; " Tttioaa/iov. Thomson, Scarlett, Dick., Norton,
Wakef., Sawyer. See ch. 4 : 2, note.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XL
125
KING JAMES' VERSION.
5 And he said unto them, "Which
of you shall have a friend, and
shall go unto him at midnight,
and say unto him, Friend, lend
roe three loaves :
6 For a friend of mine in his
journey is come to me, and I have
nothing to set before him ?
1 And he from within shall an-
swer and say, Trouble me not :
the door is now shut, and my
children are with me in bed ; I
cannot rise and give thee.
8 I say unto you, Though he
Trill not rise and give him, be-
cause he is his friend, yet because
of his importunity he will rise and
give him as many as he needeth.
9 And I say unto you, Ask, and
it shall be given you ; seek, and
ye shall find ; knock, and it shall
be opened unto you.
GREEK TEXT.
UTTO TOV TTOVrjpOV. 5 KtU et7T6
\ > \ r r" 'f- ' " w'f-
Trpos avrovs, J.is eg v/ncov eet
(fr'i\oi>, KOU Tropevcrerai irpos av->
TOV /JLeo-ovvKTiov, KOI e'iTrrj avT(S,
xprjarov JJLOI Tpeis aprovs,
rj (j)l\o? fiov Trapeyevero
oSov Trpos /te, /cat OVK e^ca
avT<- 7 KOLKCLVOS
mroKpiBeis ebry, Mr] JJ.QI
KOTTOVS Trapeze- rfBrj 17 dvpa /ce-
/cAeto-rat, /cat TO. irauSia fiov fJ.T
els TTJV KO'LTTJV elo~lv ov
ava.<TTas Sovvai croi.
8 Aiya) vfui/, el KOU ov Scacrei
O.VT< avaaras, Sia. TO etz/at av-
TOV 0/Aoz/, 810. ye TTJV avaiSeiav
O.VTOV, eyepdels Saxrei aura cxrcov
" Kayoa vp.lv Xeyco,
KCU So6r)o-Tat, vfj.iv
/cat
/
avoi-yrjo-erai
/cat
V/JLIV.
Kpovere,
If)
TTO.S
REVISED VERSION.
us from evil]. And he said to 5
them, g Which of you shall have
a friend, and shall go to him
at midnight, and say to him,
Friend, lend me three loaves ;
for a friend of mine hath come 6
to me h from a journey, and I
have nothing to set before him ?
And he from within shall an- 7
swer and say, 'Do not trouble
me ; - the door is now shut, and
my children are with me in "the
bed ; I can not rise Ho give
thee. I say to you, though he s
will not rise and give him, be-
cause he is his friend, yet be-
cause of his importunity 'in-
deed, he will rise, and give
him as many as he needeth.
And I say to you, Ask, and 'it 9
will be given you ; seek, and
'ye will find;, knock, and "it
will be opened to you. For 10
E " Which of you shall have," etc. ; 27s ! vfiiSv e&t, x. r. L
Bloomf. remarks on this passage : " The best commentators here
take ris for t tu, as in 1 Cor. 7 : 18, and Jas. 5 : 13, q. d.,
" should any one of you," etc. Kuincel approves this. Bloomf.,
however, inclines to regard the true import of ris as quisnam,
and he cites Pritzsche to that effect. There is a harshness in the
language of the E. V., which strikes the ear very unpleasantly,
and, yet, it seems by no means easy to avoid this difficulty, if we
give ris its usual interrogative force. I suggest, for consideration,
the rendering of Campbell, " Should one of you have a friend,
and go and he from within should answer," etc. So Iber., "Si
alguno de entre vosotros tuviere un amigo, i fuere a el a media
noche, i le dijere : 'Amigo, prestame tres panes, porque un amigo
mio ha venido de viage a mi casa, i no tengo que ponerle delan-
te.' " S. Fr., " Que 1'un d'entre vous ait un ami, et qu'il aille
vers lui a minuit, et lui dise : Ami," etc.
1 " from a journey ; " | bSov. Sharpe, Kendrick, Murdock,
Sawyer. This arrangement is adopted, that the proper connec-
tion of l| oSov with Ttageyevsro may be preserved, and because
the natural place of the English equivalent, " from a journey," is
after the verb. By substituting an idiomatic phrase as the ren-
dering of these words, we can say, " a friend of mine hath come to
me, on his journey," etc. This is submitted as an alternative. Syr.,
l*5o| _iS uZo!L 1-i| |.v"*; (" a friend hath come to me from a
journey"). Heb. N. Test, -rp;ia W IB *3- Castalio,
" venit ad me amicus meus ex via ; " S. Fr., " un de mes amis est
arrive chez moi, d'un voyage ; " Penn, " a friend of mine is come
to me in his journey," etc. ; Dan., " miu Ben er kommen til mig
af Eeisen."
I " Do not trouble me ; " My pot y.onovs jta^s^s. Thorn.,
Scarlett, Norton, "Wakef. This phrase is most accordant with
present usage. Camp., " Do not disturb me."
II "the;" mfv.
i "to give;" Sovvai. Scarlett, Dick., Norton, "Wakef., Camp.
The infinitive should be rendered as such in English. Belgic,
" om u te geven ; " S. Fr., " pour t'en donner ; " Iber., " a darte."
In the next verse, where the construction in the E. V. is the
same (" and give "), the verb is in the fut. ind., Scaoet. *
k " indeed ; " ye. Rob. (Lex., ye) : "As giving emphasis to
the less in antithesis with the greater, Luke 11 : 8, Sid ye i^v
avaiSeiav avrov, x. r. L, yet because of his importunity indeed,
lie will rise," .etc. Beza, t "at certe propter importunitatem
ejus," etc. ; Iber., " sin embargo por causa de su importunidad, se
levantara," etc. Bloomf. (N. Test.) : " The y& here ought not to
have been passed over in the versions." Goschen, " Eum impor-
tunitate certe ejus excitatum daturum ei esse," etc. ; Schott, " im-
portunitate certe excitatus dabit ei," etc.
i " it will be given ; " So&^asrai. Sharpe, Scarlett, Penn,
Norton, Wakef., SI.
m " ye will find ; " evtfocrs. Penn, Scarlett, Norton, Wakef.,
Sharpe, M.
" " it will be opened ; " avotyyaerat. Sharpe, Scarlett, Penn,
Walcef., Norton, M.
126
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP.' XI.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
10 For every one that asketh,
receiveth;. and he that seeketh,
findeth ; and to him that knock-
eth, it shall be opened.
11 If a son shall ask bread of
any of you that is a father, will
he give him a stone? or if he ask
a fish, will he for a fish give him
a serpent?
12 Or if he shall ask an egg,
will he offer him a scorpion ?
13 If ye then, being evil, know
how to give good gifts unto your
children : how much more shall
2/owr heavenly Father give the
Holy Spirit to them that ask him ?
14 And he was casting out a
devil, and it was dumb. And it
came to pass -when the devil was
GREEK TEXT.
yap o a.LTa>v Aa/x/3oVer /cat 6
eu/>cr/cer /cat rc Kpovovn
u riva Se v/j.uu>
TOV Trarepa alnjcret 6 vlos aprov,
p.rj Xi9oi> emo'oocrei ai>T(; el /cat
>/]> \ \ J /I / 3/1 9
fXavv, fj.rj O.VTL t^avos o(piv 7rt-
5> / > ~ 12 * \ >\ i/
owcret avTCp ; 77 /cat ecus aiT.rjo~r)
CDOV, p.rj emSaxrei avT< crKOp-
TT'LOV ; 13 et o&v u/xety TrovrjpoL
oiftare ayaOa 8o/j.a.Ta
rot? TSKVOIS vfj.<Zv, Trocrtp
ju.aAAoz> 6 Trarr/p o e ovpavov
Scoo-ei Uvev/j.a ' Ayiov rots at-
TOVCTLV avrov;
14 JSTat f)V KJ3dXXa>i> SaLfio-
viov, /cat auro rjv KOX^OV f-yeve-
TO 8e, TOV dat/j.oi>lov e
REVISED VERSION.
every one who asketh, rccciv-
eth ; and he who seeketh. find-
eth ; and to him who knocketh,
it will be opened. "And what u
father among you, if 'his. son
shall ask bread, will give him
a stone? or if he "shall ask a
fish, will /instead of a fish, give
him a serpent? or 'if he should 12
ask an egg, will give him a
scorpion? If ye, then, being 13
evil, 'know how to give good
gifts to your children, how
much more will "your heavenly
Father give the Holy Spirit to
those who ask him ! And he H
was casting out a "demon, and
it was dumb. And it came to
pass, when, "the demon *ha.d
" "And what father among you ; " tlva Se v/j.cov rbv nareon.
The texts of Lachm., Tisehend., Knapp. Theile, Tittm., Schott,
Seholz have tiva Se IS vfiwv. Griesbach lias noted l| v/icav as
equal, if not superior to the reading of the. Textns Receptus.
Schott says : " Prcepositionem i ante vftcuv vulgo omissam, qua;
h. 1. deesse non poterat (ad ambiguitatem structurae evitandam),
ctim Griesb. aliisque addidimus ex cdd. A.B.C.D.K.M. minnscc.
multis vss., Fesch. Philox., Pers., Arm., "Vulg., It." There is no
reasonable doubt that J| should be placed in the text. As to the
rendering of this passage (which is that of Kend., Thorn., Penn,
Norton, Wakef., Gamp., Diek., M.), the arrangement has the
advantage of perspicuity and force, while it gives the sense of the
text -with as much accuracy as the E. "V. It is true that -civa. Se
Jg vficov TOV naTega may be rendered more nearly ad verbum by
"Who of you being a father" (if his son, etc.), yet this is less
clear. The E. V. follows Tyndale. De Wette, " Welcher Vater
nnter euch wtirde ; " S. Fr., " Or quel est le pere d'entre vous ; "
Span., " T^ cual padre de entre vosotros ; " Ital., " Or qual padre
e fra voi ; " Belg., " Ende wat vader onder u."
P " his son ; " o vlos. Kend., Thorn., Norton, "Wakef., Camp.,
Dick., Sawyer, M. De Wette, " sein Solin ; " S. Fr., " son flls ; "
Span., " su hijo ; " Ital., " il figliuol sno." The article here is
used with the force of the possessive. See eh. 5 : 2, note.
" shall ask." The verb altyaei, which occurs in the first
clause of the verse, is understood here. In that clause the E. V.
properly renders it " shall ask." The supplement should, there-
%'erbe " shall ask."
r " instead of ; " avrl. Kend., Thorn., Scarlett, Penn, Norton,
Wakef. (" in its stead "), Camp., M. Bob. (Lex., in loco) : " For "
is often used to signify in " exchange for," " in requital," and this
is one of the significations of dvrl. But &vtl has also the
signification of substitution, " in place of," " instead of." This
last is its meaning here.
" instead of."
All ambiguity is removed if we use
' " if he should ask ; " ahqoy. This aor. subj. receives this
rendering in accordance with our familiar itsus loguendi. The
E. V. in the parallel, Matt. 7 : 9, where the verb is in the same
mode and tense, renders it " if he ask," but in the passage before
us, " if he shall ask," as though it were an indicative future.
" know how ; " otSare. I have retained the rendering of the
E. Y., though I deem a different one more perspicuous. A spe-
cial sense of the verb is " to be able, can." See Hob. (Lex.,
sZSco). In the E. V. we have Luke 12 : 56, o'iSare Soxtft<i&a>,
" ye can discern ; ' and Matt. 27 : 65, tag o'iSnrs, " as ye can."
The verb has this force Philip. 4:12, olSa Se nmetvovoS-ai, ol-
Sa xai ?t(>t.aoEveiv, "I am able both to be abased, and I am
able to abound." 1 Thess. 4 : 4, elSevni exaorov v/ndir -co irm-
rov oxcvos srrSafrai x. T. L, " that each one of you be able to
possess his vessel," etc. To these may be added 1 Timo. 3:5.
James 4 : 17. 2 Pet. 2 : 9. Bretsch. (m verbo) : " Scio facio
aliquid, didici, possum, vdeo, Matt. 7 : 11 ; 27 : 65, eas o'iSars,
quo modo potestis, valetis, Luc. 11 : 13; 12 : 56. Phil. 4 : 12,
etc." On these authorities, " yon can " is submitted as an alter-
native rendering. In Hebrew sis has this sense. 1 Sam. 16 : 16,
tiJsa 'jasa S^S Sept., tlSora -y&lleiv iv xivvgq, " (a man) able to
play on tie harp." See Job 32 : 22, MS3N *t\s"t^ Ji, " I cannot
flatter." -.--=.:-,..
" " your heavenly Father ; " o nar^ o If ovpavov. As the
article here has the force of a possessive pronoun, " your " should
not be italicized. See ch. 5 : 2, note.
T " demon ; " Saifiovtov. See ch. 4 : 33, note.
v " the demon ; " TOV Satfiovtov. See ch. 4 : 33, note.
1 "had gone out;" tt-shd-ovros. Norton, Sawyer. See ch.
4 : 34, note.
THE GOSPEL. ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XI.
127
KING JAMES' VERSION.
gone out, the dumb spake ; and
the people wondered.
15 But some of them said, He
casteth out devils through Beelze-
bub, the chief of the devils.
16 And others tempting Mm,
sought of him a sign from heaven.
17 But he, knowing their
thoughts, said unto them, Every
kingdom divided against itself,
is brought to desolation ; and a
house divided against a house,
fall.eth.
18 If Satan also be divided
against himself, how shall his
kingdom stand? because ye say
that I cast out devils through
Beelzebub.
19 And if I by Beelzebub cast
out devils, by whom do your sons
cast them out? therefore shall
they be your judges.
20 But if I with the finger of
God cast out devils, no doubt the
GREEK TEXT.
e\d\r}(rev o
r sr
crav
01
eirov.,
TO>V
yos' KCU e0avfj.a-
IS \ s> /-
rives .oe e
*Ey BeeX^e^ovX
ifjiovicav e/c/8aAAet
ra dai/jLovia. 1B "Mrepoi Se Tret-
pd^ovres trrj^ieifov Trap' avrov
effjTovv e ovpavov. 1 AVTOS
8e elftws avr&v TO. 8tavor//j.aTa
eiitiev aurois 1 , Hacra j3acri\eia e^>
eavrr/v StafJLepicr&elo-a eprjfj.ouTO.1.'
KCU oiKOf em OLKOV, Tr/Trret. 18 el
p\\ \ c VT ~ > is t N Sv
oe /cat o ^aravas e(p eavrov die-
fj.epicr6rj, Trcas GTa.O-rjo'eTai rj /3a-
cn.Xe.ia avrov; OTL Ae'yere, ev
_Z?eeAe/3ouA eKfidXXeiv yue ra
8a.ilJ.ovia.. 19 el Se eyco ev ReeX-
e/c/3aAAa) TO. Scu/j.6via, ol
voi V/JLOJV ev TLVL eK^aXXovcri;
TOVTO KpLTQJ. VfJLWV CLVTOL
ecrovTcu. 20 el Se ev Sa.KTV\q>
v e'/c/SaAAco ra Sa.t/J.ovia } apa,
REVISED VERSION.
gone out, ''the dumb man spoke ;
and the crowds wondered. But 15
some of them said, He casteth
out "the demons "by Beelzebub,
b prince of the demons. And 16
others "trying him, sought of
him a sign from heaven. But 17
he, knowing their thoughts, said
to them, Every kingdom divid-
ed against itself, is brought to
desolation ; and a house divid-
ed against a house, falleth.
Aiid if Satan also d is divided 18
against himself, how shall his
kingdom stand? because ye
say that I cast out 'the demons
by Beelzebub. And if I by H>
Beelzebub cast out s the demons,
by whom do your sons cast them
out? therefore fney shall be
your judges. But if I by the 20
finger of God cast out the de-
mons, h then the kingdom of
' "the dumb man;" 6 xtoyog. Penn, Thorn., Sharpe, Nor-
ton, Wakef., Kendriek, Peehy (note on Angus), M., Murdock.
Scholefield : " The dumb man spake. This is necessary to dis-
tinguish it as the action of the nan released from the power of
the dumb devil mentioned before: afab %v xtacpov." There is
another reason for inserting " man." It is this ; we use the word
" dumb " without a substantive expressed (when we speak of
men,- especially) only when it refers to the plural: But if the
reference is to a singular substantive, that substantive is always
expressed. In other words, if we say " the dumb," we are under-
stood to refer to a class of persons destitute of speech, not to an
individual.
"the demons;" T Saiftovia. Thomson, Scarlett, Norton,
Thelwall, Wakef., and Dick, ("these demons"). The article is
retained by the Belg., Luther, De Wette, G. and S. Fr., De Sacy,
Iber., Span., Diodati, Ital. Heb. N. Test., tji^ias-j. So in Revis.
of Mark 3 : 22. See Luke 9 : 1, note.
'"by;" h>. M., Kend., Thorn., Sharpe, Penn, Norton,
Camp., Sawyer, Angus. So. parallel (E, Y.) Matt. 12 : 24. It
is desirable, for the sake of uniformity in rendering, to reserve
" through " for Sia with the genitive. In this narration, there is
a great want of uniformity in the rendering of ev, in the B. V.
For example, in Matt. 12 : 24, !</ ?$ Bed&poM., " by Beelze-
bub." Luke 11 : 15, If Beefee/JoM, " through Beelzebub."
Matt. 12 : 27, lv Bee^^ovl, " by Beelzebub." Luke 11 : 19,
*" Bed&iSoM, " by Beelzebub." Matt. .12 : 2.8, lv
Qsov, " by the Spirit of God." Luke 11 : 20, lv Saxrvly
" with the finger of God." In all these cases, " by '' is the proper
term.
b " prince ; " a.qy,ovri. So (E. V.) in the parallels, Matt.
12 : 24, and Mark 3 : 22. This is a common rendering of the
word in the E. T., as in John 12 : 31 ; 14 : 30 ; 16 : 11. Eph.
2:2. So Thorn., Wesley, Scarlett, Norton, Camp., Wakefield,
Kend., Dick., Angus. In conformity with the text, the article
(" the ") of the E. V. is omitted. The article is used in the
parallel, Mark 3 : 22 (T<J> af>%ow), while the parallel, Matt.
12 : 24, is anarthrous. No article in Wiclif, Kend., or Thelwall.
It was introduced by Tyndale.
c " trying ; " nei(>dovTes. Dick., Sawyer, Kend., Wakef.
(" were trying "). Scarlett, Penu, and Camp., " to try ; " S. Fr.,
" pour 1'eprouver ; " Iber., " para, tentarlo ; " Ital., " per tentar-
lo ; " De Wette, " versuchend." See ch. 4 : 2, note.
d " is divided ; " Siefte?la&>j. Kend., Sawyer. Note in Eevis.
of Mark 3 : 24 : "It is now a settled grammatical principle, in
our language, that a conditional action, or state belonging to the
present time, must be put in the indicative." See Luke 4 : 3,
note.
" the demons." See v. 15, note. Thorn., Scarlett, Wakef.,.
Dick. (" these demons ") ; Belg. (" de Duivelen ") ; Luther and De
Wette (" die Teufel ") ; S. Fr., " les demons."
f " by ; " lv. See v. 15, note.
E " the demons." See v. 15, note.
h " then ; " Ufa. Wesley, Sharpe, Norton, Wakef., Sawyer,
128
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP, XL
KING JAMES' VERSION.
kingdom of God is come upon
you.
21 "When a strong man armed
keepeth his palace, his goods are
in peace :
22 But when a stronger than
he shall come upon him, and over-
come him, he taketh from him all
his armour wherein he trusted,
and divideth his spoils.
28 He that is not with me is
against me : and he that gather-
eth not with me scattereth.
24 When the unclean spirit is
gone out of a man, he walketh
through dry places, seeking rest :
GREEK TEXT.
- > j j <* t ?* * /
e<p Vfias rj pacriAeia
TOV Oeov. 21 OTO.V 6 io~xypos
Ka.danrXio~fJi.evo? (frvXaa-cng TTJV
eavTOv avXrjv, ei> elprfvy eori TO.
> '" 22 ' ^ fc^
avTOv ejrav oe o
VLK.T}-
crr) avTov, rrjv TravoTrXiav avTov
,i >_L> * > - //i \ v
atpei, (p y tTreTrotaei, KOC.L ra
avrov SiadlScocriv. 23 o
,<i> /AST e/JLo /car e/ioy eorr
6 fjirj crvva-ycav fj.et' e/xou
/- 24 1 s\ \ * '
L. UTO.V TO O.K.O.-
6apTov Trvevfjia ee\0r) awo TOV
avOpconrov, diepx<ETat, fit" avvdpcov
REVISED VERSION.
God 'hath already come Ho
you. When k the strong one 21
armed guar.deth his palace, his
'possessions are in peace ; but 22
"whenever, "one stronger than
he cometh upon him, and over-
come th him, -, he taketh ffrom
him all his armor in which he
trusted, and ""distributeth his
spoils. He who is not with 23
me, is against me ; and he who
gathereth not with me, scatter-
eth. When the unclean spirit 24
r hath gone out of the man, "it
walketh through dry places,
Kend., Thelwall, Rob. (Lex., in verbo). De Wette, " demnach ;
Diodati, "adunque." So parallel (B. V.) Matt. 12 : 28.
1 "hath already^ppme ; " %y>9-aoev. Iber., "ya ha llegado.'
Bob. (Lex., in verbo) : " "With iiti viva, to have already come to
or upon any one, Matt. 12 : 28, et Luke 11 : 20. 1 Thess. 2 : 16.'
Bloomf. (N. Test, on Matt. 12 : 28) : " Schmid and Fritzsche
take this to be a strong expression, signifying ' is come upon you,
before you are aware.' It rather means, ' is already come upon
you.' " See ch. 4 : 34, note.
l "to you;" ey>' vfias. Kend. De "Wette, "zu euch;" S.
IV., " jusqu'a vous ; " Iber., "a vosotros ; " Diodati and Ital.,
voi." In the parallel (B. V.) Matt. 12 : 28, " unto you."
k "the strong one;" 6 la%v!>bs. "Wesley, Thorn., Scarlett,
Dick., "Wakef., Camp. The article is retained by Kend., Angus,
Thelwall, Bheitns. De "Wette, " der Gewaltige ; " Iber. and
Span., " el fuerte." The force of the article is fully brought out
in S. Fr., " celui qui est fort ; " and Ital-, " colui ch' e forte " (" he
who is strong"). Such a rendering is, perhaps, too paraphrastic.
J " possessions ; " -co, vna^xovra. See ch. 8 : 3, note. Bob.
(Lex.) : " Things present, things in hand, possessions, etc." Nor-
ton, "Wakef., Kend., M. Tulg. and Eras., " ea quse possidet ; "
Tyndale and Bheims, " that he possesseth ; " Cran. and Geneva,
"the things that he possesseth;" Belg., " wat hij heeft;" De
"Wette, "seine Habe;" S. Fr., " ce qu'il possede ; " Iber., "lo
que tiene." This word should not be confounded by rendering it
like OV.EVI] ("goods"), in the parallels, Matt. 12 : 29, and Mark
3 : 27. It has a wider signification. Kuinosl (in loco) : " To.
supellex, utensilia, bona, opes." Heb. N. Test.,
m " whenever ; " btav. See v. 34, note.
* " one stronger ; " 6 lazvporepos. Norton, M., Techy (note
on Angus). The article here has the same force as in v. 21.
See note k. The literal rendering " the stronger than he " is not
in accordance with our idiom. The "thought is, as expressed by
De Wette, S. Fr., "he who is stronger than he." Iber., " otro
mas fuerte que el."
"him." This pronoun is a supplement, and should have been
italicized in the E.'V.
3" "from him." See last note. This supplement is, perhaps,
necessary to render the sentence more complete, according to our
idiom, hence it is retained; Nothing like " him " is found in
Mont. (" omnem armaturam ejus tollit"), Goschen (" completam
ejus aufert armaturam "), Schott (idem), Vulg. (" universa arma
ejus auferet "), Eras. (" universa arma ejus aufert "), Beza, (" totam
armaturam ejus aufert"), Belg. A supplement seems to have
been first used in Luther's version, " so nimmt er ihm seinen Har-
nisch;" hence .Tyndale's rendering, " he taketh from him his
harness," and Ooverdale's, " he taketh from him all his weapons."
suggest the propriety of dropping the supplement, as has been
done by Angus.
i " distributeth ; " SiaSiScoaiv. Penn, Dick., Sawyer, Kend.
Vulg., " distribuet ; " Mont., Eras., Beza, Castal., " distribuit."
So (E." V.) Luke 18 : 22. John 6 : 11. Acts 4 : 35. . In the
only other instance in which the word occurs, Bev. 17 : 13, the
E. V. has " shall give," though there the true reading is not Sia-
StScaaovaiv (Text. Becept), but simply SiSoaolv, pres. tense
(Griesb., Lachm., Tischend., Knapp, Theile, .Tittm., Scholz).
Bob. (Lex., in verbo) : " To deal out, to distribute, with ace. of
thing, and dat. of person, Luke 18 : 22. John 6 : 11, dat. implied
Luke 11 : 12." Bretsch. : "Distribuo. Neque aliter intelligen-
dum est Luc. 11 : 22, -co. oxvla. StaSiScaacv priedam distribuit."
The rendering of the verb should, therefore, be uniformly " dis-
tribute." Pasor's Lex. (N. Test., in loco) : " Spolia distribuit."
Belg., " deelt uit ; " De Wette, " vertheilet ; " Luther, " theilt
aus."
"hath gone out;" J!<U#0. See ch. 4 : 34, note. Thorn.,
Norton, Dick. (" has departed "), Sawyer. Tulg., Mont., Eras.,
Beza, Schott, " exierit ; " Iber. and Span., " ha salido."
"it." So (E. V.) v.14. "It" ia used for the "demon"
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XI.
129
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
and finding Done, he saith, I will
return unto my house whence I
came out.
25 And when he cometh, he
findeth it swept and garnished.
26 Then goeth he, and taketh,
to Mm seven other spirits more
wicked than himself; and they
enter in, and dwell there ; and
the last state of that man is worse
than the first.
27 And it came to pass, as he
spake these things, a certain wo-
man of the company lifted up her
voice, and said unto him, Blessed
is the womb that bare thee, and
GREEK TEXT.
TOTTCOV, fjjTovv awTTauow /cat
/j,rj evplcTKOv Ae'yet, c
elf TOV QLK.OV fj.ov odev f
OK \ Jx /i\ e / /
KOLL eActoz/ evpiCTKfi crecrapcu/ie-
vov /cat KKoa-fiT][Ji.zi>ois. 2G rare
TropeveTau /cat 7ra/3aAa/z/3aVet e?rra
eTepa TrvevfJMTo. -!rovrjpoTpa av-
TOV, /cat etcreA#oz>ra Karot/cet e/cer
KCU ytVerat ra ca^ara TOV dvdpco-
TTOU exeivov ^eipova. T>V Trpcorcov.
27 'JSyeWro Be kv T< Xeyuv
avrov TavTa, f-trapacrd TLS yvvr)
(j)ci)vr/i> IK TOV o^Aou etTrez/ aura),
Ma.Ka.pia 77 KOiXia 77 (3acrTao-acrd
REVISED VERSION.
seeking rest : and finding none,
it saith, I will return "into my
house whence I came out. And 23
when it cometh, it findeth
it swept and T adorned. Then 2G
it goeth. and "taketh with it
seven spirits worse than itself,
and they, Centering in, dwell
there; and the last state of that
man 'becometh worse than the
first. And it came to pass, as 27
he spoke 'this, a certain woman
of the crowd, 'lifting up her
voice, said to him, c Happy is
the womb that bore thee, and
" " into ; " els. The radical signification of etg is appropriate
here. So Slmrpe. G-. and S. Fr., " dans."
' " adorned ; " xtxoafujfiivov, Scarlett, Dick., Thelwall, Saw-
yer, G. Camp, ("embellished"), M. Vulg., Mont., Bras., Beza,
Oastal., Schott, Goschen, " ornatam." Bob. (Lex., xoofieco).
Liddell : "To deck, adorn, dress." Bretsch. : "Orno, exorno,
pulchrum facio ornamentis, Matt. 12 : 44. Luc. 11 : 25, olxov
quasi niminum ad excipiendum hospitem." Kuincel (Matt.
12 : 44), " exornatam." " Garnished " (first introduced by Tyn-
dsile) is obsolete. Koafieca is rendered " adorn," Luke 21 : 5.
1 Tim. 2:9. Titus a : 10. 1 Pet. 3 : 5. Rev. 21 : 2.
w " taketh with it ; " rtapaia-ufiarei. "Wakefield. As utapa,
in composition, implies nearness along side of, near, by, and
when indicating motion, to the side of, near to, by (Kobinson,
Lex.), its force here may be presented by the words " taketh to
if," or " taketh with it." The latter accords best, with our
present mode of speaking. So (E. Y.) Matt. 1 : 20, xagalafle'iv,
" to take to thee." So Matt. 1 : 24, na^la^e, " took to him."
Matt. 26 : 37, na^a.}.a^u>v tov USTQOV, " he took with him
Peter." See Luke 9 : 28, note. The verb is so rendered by
Tyndale (Edition of 1526), Scarlett, Pechy (note on Angus).
Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, " assumit ; " Schott, " adsumit ; " G6-
schen, " adducit ; " Belg., " neemt met hem ; " De Wette, "nimftit
mit ; " G. Fr., " prend avec soi ; " S. Fr., " prend avec lui ; "
Iber., "lleva confsigo];" Diodati and Ital., " prende seco;"
Dan., " tager til sig." Compare the parallel, Matt. 12 : 45,
Tin^aiafi/Sdvei psd* eavrov. In this instance it seems, from the
addition of ftslf- iavrou, that the force of napa, in composition,
is nearly equivalent to our woi'd " along," so frequently employed
where accompaniment is indicated, " he taketh along with him."
x " entering in ; " claeiS-ovra. "Wesley, M.
* " becometh ; " yivsrai. Wesley, Wakef., Dick., Camp.,
Angus, M. Goschen, " fit ; " Schott, " fiat ; " Vulg., Mont., Eras.,
" fiunt (novissima) ; " Belg., " wordt ; " De "Wette, " wird ; "
Iber., " se hace."
1 " this ; " Tavra. Kenrl., Wakef., Sharpe. Goschen, " hoc."
See ch. 5 : 27, note.
1 " of the crowd ; " lx rov o$.ov. The reason for retaining
" of," instead of rendering ix " out of," may be seen ch. 8 : 27,
note.
b " lifting up her voice ; " endgaaa yaivfjv. M., "Wesley,
Camp., Thelwall. As there is no possessive, or article before
ycavrjv, " her " is italicised, as a supplement.
c " Happy ; " MavMoia. Tyndale, Cranmer, Genera, Thorn.,
By employing this pronoun, we distinguish the demon, and ob-
viate a common mistake into which readers often fall, by suppos-
ing that " walketh " refers to the man. " It " is used by Sharpe,
Thorn., Penn, Norton, Wakef., Sawyer, Kend. This rendering is
the more exact, as itvsv/ta is neuter. Still, if it is deemed best to
retain " he," then this should be the order of the sentence, " the
unclean spirit, when he hath gone out," etc. So Camp, and Dick.
" goeth through ;" SispXerat. Kend., Penn, Wakef., Angus,
Norton and Sawyer, " passes through ; " Wiclif and Rheims,
" wandereth ; " Beza, " transit ; " Castalio, " peragat ; " Schott.
" migrat." This verb is rendered " walketh through " (E. V.)
only here and in the pai-allel, Matt. 12 : 42, although it occurs
in forty-three instances in the N. Test. The E. V. uses " to go
through," Matt. 19 : 24. Mark 10 : 25. Luke 4 : 30 ; 9:6.
John 4:4; 8:59. Acts 8:40; 13:6; 15:41, etc. It
is often rendered by "to pass through." On the other hand,
" to walk " is the representative of ne^tjtat^ca in one hundred
and three instances in the E. V. This word iteQmareco being
uniformly so translated in all cases, except Mark 12 : 38 (" to
go"), where " to walk about" is more accurate. The rendering
in the passage before us originated in that of the Vulgate, " am-
bulat," which was followed by Tyndale, Coverdale, Cranmer,
Geneva, and, lastly, by the E. V. Belg., "gaat door;" De
Wette, " durchziehet ; " Dan., " vandrer han igjenem ; " G; Fr.,
"il va par;" S. Fr., "51 parcourt;" Iber., " transita por;"
Diodati, " il va attorno per;" Ital., " esso va percorrendo."
130
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XI.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
the paps which thou hast suck-
ed.
28 But he said, Yea, rather
blessed are they that hear the
word of God, and keep it.
29 And when the people were
gathered thick together, he began
to say, This is an evil generation :
they seek a sign ; and there shall
no sign be given it, but the sign
of Jonas the prophet.
30 For as Jonas was a sign
unto the Ninevites, so shall also
the-Son of man be to this genera-
tion.
31 The queen of the south shall
rise up in the judgment with the
men of this generation, and con-
demn them : for she came from
the utmost parts of the earth, to
hear the wisdom of Solomon ; and
GREEK TEST.
ere, /cat fJiacTToi ov?
AVTOS Se etTre, Mevovvye ficc-
KOLplOL OL KKOVOVTeS TOV \O~/OV
TOV Oeov KOI (f)v\acro-ovTs av-
l 20 rn ~ c\ \ v \ t /i
TOV. JLCOV oe o^Acov eiraopoi-
ofj,evcov rjp^aro Xeyetv, 'H ytvea
wovr/pa eVrr 0-rf/j.elov eVi-
o-rj/j.elov ov Sodycrerai.
j.r) TO cr^jaetov 'Icovd
TOV Trpo(f)^TOv. 30 K.ad<as yap
eyeveTO 'lavas o"r/fj.eiov TOI? Nr
VeVLTGUf, OVTCOS (CTTai KCtt 6 VLOf
TOV avOpcoirov TTJ yevea TavTrj.
31 jBacr/Aicrcra VOTOV yep0r/o~eT<u
ev Ty Kpiarei n-f.ro, TCOV avo~pS>v
TTJS yeveas ravrr/s, KCU /carr/3i-
VL aVTOVS' OTL T/Xdev K T&V
irepaTcav TTJP yfjs aKOvcraL TTJV
REVISED VERSION.
A the breasts which thou hast
sucked ! But he said, Yea, 28
rather 'happy are those Avho
hear the word of God, and keep
it. And the crowds 'being 2p
gathered to him, he began to
say, This is an evil generation :
*it seeketh a sign ; and no sign
h will be given it 'except the
sign of Jonah.' For as Jonah 36
was a sign to the Ninevites, l so
will the Son of man be to this
generation. ^Tlie queen of the 31
South "will rise in the judg-
ment with the men of this gen-
eration, and condemn them ;
for she came from "the ends of
the earth to hear the wisdom
Scarlett, Wakef., Dick., Camp., Kend., M. Iber., " feliz." See
ch. 1 : 45, note.
4 "the breasts;" ftaaroi. Bob. (Lex.), Thomson, Scarlett,
Wakef., Norton, Camp. (" the breast"), Sawyer, M. The Heb.
Diltti (sing, ^a, which is generic, so as to include breast, and
teat) is rendered by this word in the Sept., Gen. 49 : 25. Songs
8 : 1. Isa. 28 : 9. " Paps" is obsolete. "TAe" is italicised, as
a supplement.
" happy." See v. 27, note.
f " being gathered to him ; " ina9^oit,ofiivo3v. Kob. (Lex.) :
" In composition, fort implies motion, or direction upon, to, to-
wards, against." Rob. (Lex., in verbo) : " Mid. intrans. lita&q
oficu, to gather together to, or upon." "Wakef., " were crowding
together upon him ; " Norton, " thronging about him ; " Beza,
" aggregaretur apud eum;" Iber., "estaban acudiendo a [el]."
It it obrious, that the 'gathering was to Christ ; hence " Mm " is
introduced, as a supplement.
* " it seeketh ; " InitJiTsz. "Wesley, Thorn., Scarlett, Shavpe,
Penn, "Wakef., Norton ("it would have"), Sawyer, M. As the
verb is singular, and we often . speak of a crowd, by employing
" it," the propriety of this rendering is obvious.
h " will be given ; " SO&TJOSTCU. Penn, Norton, M.
1 " except ; " el fir;. Scarlett, Norton, Dick., M.
J Tov ttpopiJTov of the Text. Recept., after Ycora, is canceled
by Griesb., Lachm., Tischend., Knapp, Theile, the Amiatan MS.
3f the Vulgate. Schott says : " Vbb. rov tr^oyjjzov post 'JcovH
vulgo addita (ex Matt. 12 : 39) plerique recentt. editt. cum
Griesb. recte delent praseuntibus cdd. B.D.L. verss. Memph.,
Arm., Syrt Hierosol., Sax., Vulg. ms., It. (excepto cd. Brix.)."
The weight of evidence is against these words.
k " so will be ; " OVTIOS Harm. OUTCOS is rendered simply by
" so " (B. V.) Matt. 5 -.12,16; 7:12; 12 : 40 ; 13 : 49 ; 18 : 35,
and in many other instances. Thus Wakef., Camp. In the
above arrangement of the words, the text is followed as affording
a form which is exact and perspicuous. " Will be " is the ren-
dering of Penn, Wakef., Norton, Dick., Kend., M.
i "The." The article is not expressed in the text, though
" queen" is definite. Hence "The" is italicized for exactness.
m " will rise ; " eysqd-fjoeTai. Scarlett, Sharpe. The adverb
" up " is superfluous. It is not used in connection with this verb
in a great number of instances in the E. V. See Matt. 27 : 52 ;
28 : 6, 7. Mark 6:10; 12 : 26. Luke 7 : 14, 22 ; 20 : 37.
John 12 : 1. There are a few cases where " rise up " has become
an idiomatic phrase, and may be properly employed. See Luke
5 : 23. " Up," in this instance, is omitted by M., Dick., Camp.,
Sawyer, Wiclif, Tyndale, Coverdale, Cramner, Geneva, Rheims.
M. remarks (as I think, correctly) that " the rendering ' rise up '
in the E. V. probably arose from taking tyaigco in a forensic
sense, in allusion to the standing of witnesses in a court of police.
And so Robinson (Lex.) and Kuincel understand it here. But
nowhere else is the verb employed in the N. Test, in such a sense,
when followed by peta ; but always has bti with the accusative
after it (Matt. -24 : 7. Mark 13 : 8). Merd has the sense of
with, togetJier with. The verb refers to the resurrection at the
day of judgment. The same remark applies to the verb avuoirf
pi, in the next verse, which is employed in the same sense."
1 " the ends of the earth ; " & TCOV Tcegarcov -r!js yf/e. Sharpe,
Wakef., Norton, Sawyer, Penn ( end of the earth"), Thelwall.
Rob. (Lex., itsyas) : "An end, extremity." Bretsch., "Finis, i. e.
de loco : extremitas, terminus." Ps. 19 : 4, Sept. (18 : 5), * &
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XI.
131
JAMES' VERSION.
behoM, a greater than Solomon is
here.
32 The men of Nineveh shall
vise up in the judgment with this
jrenerauon, and shall condemn it :
for they repented at the preaching
of Jonas; and behold, a greater
than Jonas is here.
33 No man when he hath light-
ed a candle, putteth it in a secret
place, neither under a bushel, but
on a candlestick, that they which
come in may see the light.
34 The light of the body is the
eye :~ therefore when thine eye is
GREEK TEXT.
K.a.
co
8e.
32 av-
ei> rfj
ISov,
7r\Loi>
8pes Nwevi
Kpicrei yuera rfj? "yevea?
KOU KaTdKpivovcriv avTrjv OTL
fjierevorjcrav els' TO K^pvy/j.a 'la-
va, /cat ISov, irXelov 'Itava cade,
OvSe'i? 8e Xv^yov a,\jsas elf
KpVTTTOV Tl9f)(7LV, OvSe V7TO TOV
[jioo'iov, aXX' 67rt TT/V Xv^viav,
'iva. ol el(nropev6fj.evoL TO (j)eyyos
o Xv^i/oy TOU croa-
eo~Tiv o odidaAuoy OTO,V
REVISED VERSION.
of Solomon ; and behold, a
greater than Solomon is here.
"The men of Nineveh ""will rise 32
in the judgment with this gen-
eration, and condemn it, for
they repented at 'the preach-
ing of Jonah ; and behold, a
greater than Jonah is here.
r No one 'having lighted a 33
lamp, putteth it in a secret
place, "neither 'under the bush-
el, but on w the lamp-stand, that
"those who enter may see the
light. y The lamp of thy body 3*
is thine eye ; therefore, when
ra nc^nra. TTjs nkovpevys TO. ^fiara nvrcav, " and their words
to the end of the habitable earth." This passage is quoted Rom.
10 : 18, where the E. V. has " ends of the world." In the E. V.
" the ends of the earth " is a common phrase. See Deut. 33 : 17.
1 Sam. 2 : 10. Job 38 : 13. Ps. 22 : 27 ; 48 : 10. Isa. 40 : 28.
Micah 5:4.
"The men." See v. 31, note.
P " will rise ; " avaar^aoi'ra.i. Scarlett, Sharpe. See v. 31,
note.
' " the preaching ; " TO y.fiqvyfta. The rendering of the E. V.
is retained as preferable to any other, which has been adopted.
No reader imagines that Jonali selected a text, and proceeded to
expound its thought into a formal address, and thus deliver a
sermon in modern style. In view of the definition of the verb
" to preach," such as "Webster furnishes, " to proclaim, to publish
in religious discourses," it seems that we may properly retain
" preach," and " preaching." There are two or three instances in
the N. T., where "publish" is, from the circumstances, more
appropriate than " preach." The noun xqpvyfia may be rendered
by preaching, proclamation, publication (or as part, noun, "pub-
lishing "). Of these, the first is deemed most apposite.
' " No one ; " OvMs. See ch. 1 : 61, note. Sharpe, Thorn.,
Scarlett, Perm, Wakef., Kendrick, M. So in every subsequent,
instance, in this Revision.
' " having lighted ; " ys. M., Wesley, Scarlett, Thomson,
Dick., Thelwall.
1 " a lamp ; " iv%vov. Thorn., Sharpe, Penn, "Wakef., Norton,
Dick., Camp., Angus, M. " Candles " were unknown at the era
of the Saviour's advent.
"neither;" ovSc. In ch. 8 : 16, where this passage first
occurs, the conjunction is fj, which is rendered " or " in the Revi-
sion. In the present case, where the language is slightly differ-
ent, the ordinary rendering of ovSe is retained.
v " under the bushel ; " vno TOV /toSior. Green (Gram.,
p. 142) quotes the parallel, Matt. 5 : 15, ovSs xaiovat &v%vov
*i Ti&eaovv ctvTov i-jro TOV ftoStov, aiK lyri frjv 3,v%via.v, with
the following remark : " With the idea of a house suggested by
the lighting of a candle (lamp), was necessarily associated that of
the usual single articles of furniture, the fioStos and Iv^vta." An
extract is here made from the note on the parallel, Mark 4 : 21
(Revision) : " The article is retained on the ground, that when a
well known article belonging to the ordinary furniture of every
house was spoken of, the article was employed, because the name
of that article was definite. In this respect, the idiom of the
Greek and English is the same. So we say, " the clock," " the
stove," etc. In reference to a single house, these names are view-
ed as moiwdic. On the other hand, we sometimes omit the
definite article in cases of this kind, and such is the usage in
Greek. In the parallel, Luke 8 : 16, we have ).v-/,vov zAh-qs,
without the article. In Matt. 5 : 15, both usages occur in the
same sentence, ovSe y.alovai iv%vov xal itd'saaiv miiov vnb rot-
fioSiov, at.K eni t^v Iv/fiav. In such cases, it is deemed best to
preserve the characteristic style of each writer as far as possible,
without violating the propriety of our own language." v
w " the lamp-stand ;" &ri -tr t i' l.v%viav. See ch. 8 : 16, note.
P.or the use of the article, see last note supra.
* " those who enter ; " ol da7to^euo/j.Evoi. Thelwall, Camp.
Dick. In the parallel, Luke 8 : 16, these words are rendered in
the E. V., " which enter in." As " in," with the verb " enter,"
may be regarded as tautological, it is dropped. Rob. (Lex., elo-
^voftni} : " To go in, to enter." Vulg., Beza, Eras., " qui in-
grediuntur." Euphony has occasionally induced the Reviser to
retain " into," after " enter."
y " The lamp of the body is thine eye ;" (Murd., Penn) o).v%vos
TOV atofcaros loTtv o oy&nl.fios aov. This is the reading of
Lachm., Tisch., Theile, "Scholz. Griesb. marks aov as equal or
superior to the reading of the Text. Recept. Sov is sanctioned
by the earliest MS. B, the Syriac, -^ -^ uL.&] ?^
Yulg-., " Lucerna corporis tui est oculus tuus." 'O, before
os, has the force of a possessive pronoun. See ch. 6 : 1, note.
Norton, " The lamp of your body is your eye." Schott has this
notice on the reading of the passage : "Sov ante OTO.V quod
vulgo deest (omissum propter locum Matt. 6 : 22) cum Griesb
132
THE GOSPEL ACCOKDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XI.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
single, thy whole body also is full
of light ; but when thine eye is
evil, thy body also is full of dark-
ness.
35 Take' heed therefore, that
the light which is in thee be not
darkness.
36 If thy whole body therefore
be full of light, having no part
dark, the whole shall be full of
light ; as when the bright shining
of a candle doth give thee light.
37 And as he spake, a certain
Pharisee besought him to dine
with him : and he went in. and
sat down to meat.
GREEK TEST.
ovv 6 of^daXfJios crov dirAovs 77,
KCU oXov TO (rca/jioi crov <pcoriv6v
4o~Tiv e-rrav 8e Trovrjpos y, KCU TO
crco/nd crov crKOTeivov. 35 crKOTrei
ovv //.^ TO (pay TO ev crol CTKOTTO?
ICTTLV. S6 ei ovv TO crapd crov
ff \ fl\ V ^ V ' \ f
ov, ecrTat (pcoTeivoi> oXov,
OTO.V o Xv^vos Trj do~Tpa.Trfj
l/ M? cre<
37 '77 ?^ v / ' v '\'\~ *'
JliV de TCO AaAT]o;aL, rjpcoTct
0apicrcu6s TIS OTTcas dpi-
Trap' avrcS" eicreX8a>v 8e
KEVISED VERSIO.N.
thine eye is 'sound, thy whole
body also "is enlightened ; but
"whenever thine eye~is 'diseas-
ed, thy whole body also is dark.
Take heed therefore, that the 35
light which is in thee be not
darkness. d lf, therefore, thy 36
whole body be 'enlightened,
having no part dark, the whole
will be 'enlightened, as when
B the lamp h by its brightness
'giveth thee light. And 'while 37
he was speaking, a certain
Pharisee k asked him Ho dine
with him : and lie went in, and
aliisque addidimus ex cdd. A.B.C.D.M., 2 minuscc. verss., Pescb.
Pers., Ar. pol., Memph., Vulg., It."
1 " sound ; " anlovs. "Wakef., Camp., Sawyer, Kend., M.
Kob. (Lex., in verbo} : " In N. Test., of the eye, simple, unclouded,
i. e., not affected with disease, clear, sound ; app. to novrjyos, dis-
eased." Bretseh. : " Luc, 11 : 34, de oculo sano, vitio non labc-
rante, ae proinde clare vidente, vera intelligente." Thorn., Peun,
Dick., and Norton render the word " clear."
" is enlightened ; " ycareivov lartv. Scarlett, Thorn., Wake-
field, Norton, Camp., Kend., Murdock. Bretsch. (Lex., in verbo) :
" Intransitive : luce cottustratus." Heb. N. Test, Tjxn. Syriac,
j^oiJ JoaiJ. Mont, Castalio, Schott, Goschen, " lucidum est ; "
Vulg., Eras., Beza, " lucidum erit ; " Belg., " is verlicht ; " G.
Fr., " sera eclaire ; " S. Fr., " est eelaire ; " Iber., " estara ilumi-
nado ; " Diodati, " sara alluminato ; " Ital., " sera illaminato."
b "whenever;" btav. Bob. (Lex., in verbo et loco), Liddell
(Lex.).
' "diseased;" novr/gos. Eobinson (Lex., in verbo]. Schott,
" zegrotus." Dick., Kend., M. " Disordered " is the rendering
of Norton, Wakef., Penn ; and " distempered," of Thorn., G. and
A. Camp.
d " If therefore ; " el ovv. The order of the text is preferable
to that of the E. Y. So II., Penn, Sawyer.
e " enlightened ; " ycorsivbv. See v. 34, note.
1 " enlightened ; " ycorswbv. See v. 34, note.
f " the lamp ; " H%vos. See v. 33, note on Hyvos, and same
verse, note on /uoSiov. Sharpe, M., Penn, Wakef. Heb. N.
Test., 1SS- Belg., " do kaarse ; " De Wette, " die Leuclite."
h " by its brightness ; " rg aorganfi. M., Penn (" by its bright-
ness"), Angus. The article has the force of a possessive, and is
so rendered in the above versions and also in those of Wesley,
Scarlett, Thorn., Camp., Sharpe, Dick., AVukef. Kob. (Lex., in
verbo) : " Tropically, a shining, brightness." Kuincel : " lA.ar^a-
3iJ7 v. 36 est fulgor, splendor Etiam verbum aar^omrsiv ita
legitur, ut sit fulgere f coruscare." Bretsch. : "Splendor, lux mi-
mns."
1 " giveth thee light ; " ycoti^ij. " Doth " is superfluous.
1 " while he was speaking ; " tv 3s trp la^.Tjaai. Scarlett,
Camp., Dick., Sawyer (" when," etc.), M. S. Fr., " comme il
parlait."
k " asked ; " r^cora. Wesley, Scarlett, Camp., Sharpe, Wake-
field, Norton, Sawyer, Kend., Thelwall, M. Thorn, and Dick.,
" invited." So often in E. V., as Luke 9 : 45 ; 19 : 31 ; 20 : 3.
John 1 : 25 ; 9 : 2 ; 16 : 23. Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, Castal.,
Goschen, Sehott, " rogavit ; " Iber., " rogo." The Hebraistic
sense which this word has in some parts of the N. Test., by which
it is made to possess the force of nlreea, does not seem appropri-
ate, in this instance. " Besought " .is too strong.
i " to dine ; " afiaTijcirj. The weight of evidence favors this
rendering rather than " to breakfast." Hob. (Lex., in verbo) thus
defines the noun agiatov, " breakfast " : "A morning meal at sun-
rise. Homer, II. 24 : 124. Odyss. 16:1:
'Evrvovr agiotov aft riot, xstaftsvca itvq, .)
Later, breakfast, lunch, Lat. prandium, taken about the middle of
the day ; .the principal meal being the SsKtvov, taken late in the
afternoon, or early in the evening, after the heat and business
of the day were over, etc. In N. Test., breakfast, lunch,, Luke
11 : 38 ; 14 : 12. Mutt. 22 : 4." Should it be deemed best to
retain the rendering of the E. V., then. " or to breakfast " (Saw-
yer) should be inserted in the margin. The verb has here the
generic sense of taking a meal. Thus in ch. 7 : 36, we have
'Hficora Ss res avrov i<av fpageaaiiov, tvn. yA'/Jl fiet' avrov.
Jahn, Archeol., g 145 : " Not only the inhabitants of the East,
generally, but the Greeks and Romans also were in the habit of
taking a slight dinner about ten, or eleven o'clock of our time,
which consisted chiefly of fruits, milk, cheese, etc. Their prin-
cipal meal was about, six or seven in the afternoon; their leasts
were always appointed at supper-time, for the burning heat of
noon in eastern climates diminishes the appetite for food," etc.
The signification of the word in question had been changed by
lapse of time, so that it no longer indicated a morning, but a
midday repast.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XI.
133
KING JAMES' VERSION.
38 And when the Pharisee saw
it, he marvelled that he had not
first washed before dinner.
39 And the Lord said unto
him, Now do ye Pharisees make
clean the outside of the cup and
the platter ; but your inward part
is full of ravening and wicked-
ness.
40 Ys fools, did not he that
made that which is without, make
that which is within also ?
41 But rather give alms of such
GREEK TEXT.
3S 6 5e <Pa.picra.ios
eda.vfjia.o~fv ori ov Trpwrov
/3a.7rrl0'07} vrpo TOV apicrrov.
vg 9 <x \ c -rr- r \ y \
17T O O J&VplO? TTpOf
Nvv vfj.Ls OL (Papicraioi TO
TOV TTOttJplOV KOU TOV
TO Se f.<rca6
KOU wovrjpLas-
' ' v
ov% o iroirjcra.? TO
TO
40
41 7T\rjV TO.
G/(.r]fJLO-
REVISED VERSION.
"lay down at table. And the 38
Pharisee "seeing it, "wondered
that i>he had not first immersed
himself before 'the dinner. And 39
the Lord said to him, Now ye
Pharisees cleanse the outside
of the cup and platter ; but
'your inside is full of extortion
and wilderness. 'Unwise men! 40
did not he who made the 'out-
side, make the "inside also ?
"But give "what is within them 41
m " lay down at table;" di-citfoev. Rob. (Lex.) : " In N. T.
to fall lack, to recline, to lie i:t table, upon the triclinium." The
action indicated by this verb is the same with that represented
by avaxei/tai, Mark 14 : 18. Luke 7 : 49 (see note), ava-Aivco,
Luke 7 : 36 (note). " Lay down at table" is employed to form a
verbal difference similar to that in the text, where these words
occur. See Revision of Mark, ch. 8 : 6. Sharpe, " lay down to
meat."
1 " seeing ; " I8a>v. "Wesley, Kend., Sawyer, M., Thelwali.
' " wondered ; " eS'avfiaaev. Scarlett, Penn, Sharpe, Sawyer.
Kend., M. See ch. 7 : 9, note.
v " he had not first immersed himself; " ov noatrov iftanriad'i}.
Bretsch. (in flami^co) : " 2. immerso in aquas, submerge." The
first aor. pass, often has the signification of the middle. See Hob.
(Lex.). The following note is taken from the Revision of Mark,
ch. 7:4: " ' except they immerse themselves ; ' ftr/ /Saariaconrat.
Iber., ' sin sumergirse.' The verb is rendered ' they dip ' by
"Wakef. ; Pechy, ' dip or baptise ; ' Thorn, and Camp., ' dipping ; '
S. Fr., ' c'etre baptises.' "Wakef., Thorn,, and Campbell make
' hands ' the object of the verb, though, as I think, without good
authority. The middle form of the verb determines the object as
reflexive, ' themselves.' Pritzsche says : ' Pharissei, inquit Marcus,
secundum rijs naoaSoaecos prsecepta non edunt panem, nisi, etc.
(v. 3). Et a foro quando venerint, plus etiam faciunt. Nempc,
nisi corpus laverint, cibum non capiunt.' In his note on the
entire passage, he says : ' Nudum illud eav ftr/ ftanriacovrai. non
aliter potet, qaam sic exponi : nisi se immerserint i. q. corpus
laverint.' The washing of the 'hands' is noticed in the third
verse, hence, to make 'hands' the object of this verb, is a tautolo-
gy. The literal rendering of this verb is deemed appropriate for
this reason, viz., though cleansing or purifying- may be the
result, it is not the action indicated by the verb. Bathe, wash, or
cleanse, point at an effect produced by {lamiocovrai, not to the
"rcry act from which the effect proceeds. See ch. 1 : 5, note.
Trollops (Analecta) says: 'The baptism or immersion of tliu
whole body was, for the most part, a religious rite.' " Sawyer
transfers the verb, thus, " wondered that he was not baptized."
S. Pr., " s'etonna de voir qu'il ne s'etait pas baptise ; " Iber.,
" que no se habia sumergido [en agua] antes," etc. ; Ital., " ch'
c gli non si fosse prima immerso." See ch. 3 : 7, note.
' " the dinner ; " TOV uoiarov. Sharpe, Thelwali. Belg., " het
middagmaal ; " De Wette, " dem Mittagsmahl ; " G. and S. Pr.,
" le diner." The noun is rendered definite from its reference to
the verb a^iaT^ar;. I am aware that a want of perfect harmony
with our idiom may be urged against the use of the article, here ;
still exactness, as in many other instances, may justify us in
retaining it.
r " your inside ; " TO eaiad'ev vfttSv. The correlate TO s^ia-
&ev being translated " the outside ; " to eacod'ev vfttav is prop-
erly rendered "your inside." So in the next verse, to Qio&ev
and 10 saca&cv demand a uniform rendering. Strictly speaking,
there is an omission of fieoos (part.) alter TO, in these cases. See
L. Bos., Ellip. Grtecse, p. 171. This is introduced in v. 39, in the
phraseology of the E. Y., " inward part." Siiould it be deemed
preferable to supply the ellipsis, this form migt be adopted, v. 39,
" outer part of the cup " " your inner part ; " v. 40, " the outer
part " " the inner part also."
' " Unwise men .' " ayooves. So (E. Y.) Eph. 5 : 17. Thel-
wali, " ye unwise ! " Rob. (Lex., in verbo] : " Unwise, simple^
foolish." The etymology (a priv. and y(> ijv.) favors this render-
ing. It indicates the condition of being destitute of mind, or,
more strictly according to onr idiom, " without sense ; " hence,
unwise, senseless. In eleven instances, in which this word occurs
in the N. Test., the E. Y. renders it by " fool," or " foolish," and
in one (cited above), " unwise." At the same time, "fool," and
"foolish" are made the equivalents of avoirros, aaoyos, aavve-
TOS, and fucooos. Some approximation to uniform rendering- is
demanded, in such terms, which have hitherto been treated as
though they were synonyms. "Wesley, Thorn., Camp., " unthink-
ing men ! " Scarlett, " thoughtless men .' " Penn, " Senseless ! "
Dick., " thoughtless beings ! " Por greater exactness, " men " is
italicized, as a supplement.
' " outside." Sue v. 39, note.
" inside." See v. 39, note.
v " But ; " xlrjv. The E. V, unnecessarily inserts " rather,"
after " but." It is omitted by Kend., "Wesley, Thorn., Camp.,
Shuvpe, Dick., Norton, Sawyer, M.
" " what is within them ; " ra evovra. This passage is sus-
ceptible of two interpretations. One of them appears in the
134
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XI.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
things as ye hare ; and behold, all
things arc clean unto you.
42 But wo unto you, Pharisees!
for ye tithe mint, and rue, and all
manner of herbs, and pass over
judgment and the love of God :
these ought ye to have done, and
not to leave the other undone.
43 Wo unto you, Pharisees ! for
ye love the uppermost seats in the
' synagogues, and greetings in the
markets.
44 "Wo unto you, scribes and
GREEK TEXT.
crvvr)V' KGU iSou, -jravTa Kadapd.
' ' 42 ' -\ -s > >\t~
vjj.iv CO~TIV. aAA OVO.L V/J.LV
$a.pio~cuoL? } on o
Te TO rj8voo-[j.ov KOI TO irrj-yavov
KCU TTOLV Xa^avov, /cat Trapep-^e-
o-Qe TTJV Kplcriv KCU rrjv dydirrjv
TOV 0OV' TO.VTO. e'Sei TTOLTJCTat
/ca/ceu/a
,
ovat
vfj.lv TOis $api(raioif, on dya.-
Trdre Trjv TrpcoTOKadfSplav Iv TOLLS
avvaycoyals, KOI TOVS
e TCUS yopas. oval vfj.iv,
REVISED VERSION.
"as alms ; and behold, all things
are clean to you. But "woe to 42
you, Pharisees! for ye tithe
mint, and rue, and 'every herb,
and "pass .by justice and the
love of God; these ye ought to
have done, b and not to leave
the others undone. "Woe to 43
you, Pharisees! for ye love
c the first seat in the synagogues,
and ""salutations in 'the market-
places. "Woe f to you, for ye 44
E. "V. Those who adopt it suppose that there is an ellipsis of
xara, before to. evovra (y.ara) TO. ivorra, and render the pas-
sage, " according to wha you have." It is objected to this, that
the usual classic construction in such cases is ex t&v evovrcov.
The words ra tvovra occur in no other instance in the N. Test. ;
but in 1 Maccab. 5 : 5, they are emploj'ed to indicate what was
within ; ivtnvgias TOVS nvayovs avrfjs ev nvpi avv naot TOIS
ivovai, " he burnt its towers with fire, with all who were within."
Compare the parallel, Matt. 23 : 26. The sense of the passage,
with this rendering, will be that adopted by many distinguished
interpreters, " But give what is (i. e. what belongs) within (the
cup and platter) as alms (instead of making the inside full of
extortion and wickedness) ; and (then) all things (inside and out-
side), are clean to you." See Rob. (Lex., evetftt). Kuincel (in
loco) : '-Tri tvovra nonnulli explicant : pro viribus et facultatibus
vestris, quantum res seu facultas ferunt, omissam monent prapc-
sitionem y.ata, et y.ara to. ivovra scilicet xqrjftara idem valere
prseeipiunt quod ix taiv evovrtov, quam in rem laudant He-
sychium, quod Ivbv interpretatus est hnmaQzov rj Svvarov sort.
Verum desiderantur exempla idonea, quibus comprobetur a Gra>
cis to. Ivovra. dicantur ea, qua insunt ; hac significatione scepius
hxc vox recurrit. Significari antem h. 1. per ru. evovta ea, qua:
poculis patinisque insunt, cibum et potuni, sat luculenter osten-
dunt verba3 quce leguntur Matthasi loco pai-allelb 23 : 26, xad'dgc-
aov 7tj)iaTov TO EVTOS TOV yiortjoiov stal rtjs nagoyiSos." The
following translators have adopted this view : Wesley, Thorn.,
Penn, Norton, Kend., Angus. Goschen, " qua; insunt, date bene-
ficium ; " Schott, " erogate qua? insunt [poculis et patinis] sti-
pem ; " Belg., " geeft aalmosen he gene daar in is ; " De Wette,
" gebet, was darin ist ; " Iber., " dad de limosna las cosas que
estan en [lo interior] ;" Dan., "giver dog til Almisse de Ting
som ere deri." The obscurity of this passage results from its
conciseness.
1 " as alms ; " e^.e>iftoovrr/v. Keud., M., Norton. This word
is in apposition with TK evovra. 9
* " woe ; " oval. This is according to present orthography.
1 " every herb ; " irav l&iavov. Scarlett, Sharpe, "Wakef.,
Kend., Pechy (note on Angus), M., Eheims. Syi-iac,
Heb. N. Test., sius-is Vnlg., " omne olus ; " De Wette, " jeg-
liches Kraut ; " Iberian, " toda hortaliza." Strictly speaking,
).aza.vov is a garden-herb, a cultivated edible vegetable, in distinc-
tion from a wild one, Lat. olus, olera. " Potherb " (Murdock) is
suggested as an alternative rendering. See Liddell (Lex.).
Bretsch. : "A Irty^lvco, fodio, olus, in terra natum, quod fodieudo
colitur, Garten-Kraut." . Sept., 3 Kings 21 : 2 (Heb, 1 Kings 21:2),
and Prov. 15 : 17, for ^n-j ; for ^p?, Gen. 9 : 3.
a " pass by ; " naqlotfod-e. Wesley, Scarlett, Penn, Thel-
wall. Liddell (Lex., in verbo) : "To go by, beside, or past, pass
by." Bretsch. : "Pratereo, transco, transitive : pratergredior ali-
quid ; de prsceptis ; negligo, violo Luc. 11 : 42." So (E. V.)
Mark 6 : 48. Luke 18 : 37. Acts 16 : 8. Vulg., Mont., Eras.,
Beza, " prateritis ; " Bclg., " gij gaat voorbij."
b " and the others ; " y.axsiva. Penn, Dick., M. As the
pronoun is plural, the English equivalent should be so too. A
more literal rendering would be, " and those." The change
would, perhaps, be unimportant. Sawyer has " those."
c " the first seat ; " TTJV ytfcoToaa&sSoiav. Kobinson (Lex.),
" the first scat. 1 ' Sharpe, Sawyer. Schott, " pi-imam sedem."
In the parallels, Matt. 23 : 6, and Mark 12 : 39, this word is in
the plural, itocoToxa&eSfias (so Luke 20 : 46), and is properly
rendered by the plural in the E. V. Here, however, where it is
singular, that rendering is incorrect. It was first introduced by
Tyndale. He followed the incorrect rendering of the Vulgate,
" primas cathedras." Beza, more correctly, " primum consessum."
Mont., " primam sessionem ; " Castal., " primum sedendi locum."
Scarlett, M., and Camp, have "seat." Heb. N. Test.,
d " salutations ; " aoitaoftovs. Wesley, Thorn., Penn, Dick.,
Scarlett, Camp., Norton, Sawyer, Kend., Angus, Thelwall, M.,
Rheims. So in the parallels (E. V.) Mark 12 : 38. Luke 1 : 29,
41, 44. 1 Cor. 16 : 21. Col. 4 : 18. 2 Thess. 3 : 17. The word
should be uniformly rendered thus, in the N. Test., in the only
other passages where it occurs, viz., Matt. 23 : 7. Luke 20 : 46.
" Greetings " is obsolescent.
' " the market-places ; " Tatg uyooaTs. So in the parallels
(E. V.) Mark 12 : 38. Luke 7 : 32. This word ayo?a. occurs
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XL
135
KING JAMES' VERSION.
Pharisees, hypocrites I for ye are
as graves which appear not, and
the men that -walk over them are
not aware of them.
45 Then answered one of the
lawyers, and said unto him, Mas-
ter, thus saying, thou reproachest
us also.
46 And he said, Wo unto you
also, ye lawyers ! for ye lade men
with burdens grievous to be borne,
and ye yourselves touch not the
burdens with one of your fingers.
47 Wo unto you! for ye build
the sepulchres of the prophets,
and your fathers killed them.
GEEEK TEST.
/cat CPa/)to-atbt, VTTO-
KpiTcu, on e'are toy ra fjivrj/j.e'ia.
TO. aSrjXa, /cat ot avdptmroi ol
raw OVK olSa-
criv.
rty
46
Xeyei aura, /dtfiacr/caAe,
Aeyojf /cat ^//.ay v/3pieis.
N ' 17~ ^ ' "
oe etTre, A at vfJLiv TOIS vo-
fJLlKOl? OVOU, OTt (pOpTL^ere TOVf
dvdpanrovs (popria 5i;<r/3aoTaK7-a,
/cat aurot eVt TWV SaKTvXcav vp.(av
ov Trpoo-^avere roty fyoprioLs.
4T oval vp.lv, on ot/coofietre ra
/j.vr)/j.ia, rcav TrpofprjTaur, ot Se
O.VTOVS-
EEVISED TEESION.
are "like unseen tombs : and
the men, who walk over them,
h know it not. Then one of the 45
lawyers, 'answering, saith to
him, 'Teacher, thus k speaking,
thou reproachest us also. And 46
he said, Woe to you, "lawyers !
for m ye load men with burdens
"hard to be borne, "and yet, ye
yourselves touch not the bur-
dens with one of your fingers.
Woe to you ! for ye build ^the 47
tombs of the prophets, and your
fathers killed them. 'There- 48
f " like unseen tombs ; " . cos ra (ivrj/teia ra aSr/ia. Rob.
(Lex.), " unseen ; " Sharpe, " unseen graves ; " Kend., " unseen
sepulchres ; " Dan., " ukiendelige Grave." Mvr,(ta:ov is rendered
by " tomb " (E. V.) Matt. 8 : 28 ; 27 : 60. Mark 5 : 2 ; 6 : 29.
So Pechy (note on Angus, in loco), though there is a want of
uniformity, as that version has also " sepulchre," and " grave." I
employ " tomb " as the equivalent in all cases. " Like " is more
euphonious than " as," for cas. So (E. V.) Matt. 6 : 29 ; 28 : 3.
Mark 4 : 31.
h " know it not ; " OVK o'iSaoir. Kend., M., Sawyer, Thel-
wall (" know not ") ; Murdock, " do not know it ; " Belg., " en
wcten't niet ; " De Wette, " wissen cs nicht ; " Iber., " no [lo]
saben." So this verb is rendered in all other cases in the E. V.
' " answering ; " uitoxgi&eis. Kend., "Wesley, Thelwall, M.
J " Teacher." See cli. 9 : 38, note.
k " speaking ; " faycov. Thorn., Scarlett, Camp. While this
word is equally correct, it is more easily enunciated, in this con-
nection, than " saying."
! "ye," the supplement in the E. V. before '"lawyers," is drop-
ped, as superfluous. It was introduced by Tyndale. Omitted by
Wesley, Thorn., Sharpe, Dick., Camp., Norton, Sawyer, Kend.,
Thelwall. Not in Wiclif, Kheims. No corresponding supple-
ment in Belg., De Wette, S. Fr., Iber., Ital.
ra " ye load ; " yo^tl^sre. Kend., Wesley, Tliom., Scarlett,
Penn, AVakef., Norton, Sawyer, M., Rheims. " To lade," except
as a nautical term, now signifies " to dip."
" " hard to be borne ; " SvofSaoTaxTa. Bob. (Lex., in verbo),
Thorn., Penn, Wakef., Norton.
" and yet ; " y.al. In the parallel, Matt. 23 : 4, & adversa-
tive is used, and properly rendered " but " in the E. V. In this
instance, xal is used in a sense noticed thus by Rob. (Lex., xai)
"Apparently adversative, but only where the antithesis of the
thought is clear without an adversative pai-ticle, and yet, and
nevertheless." In many cases of this kind the E. V. renders
by " but." Rob. remarks, that in such passages " the rendering
but is admissible, but not necessary." See ch. 8 : 13, note. In
this use of xal, it has the force of xairoi.
P " the tombs ;" T fimjfista. See v. 44, note. Sharpe, Scar-
lett, Dick., Wakef., Sawyer.
1 " Therefore ; " ' >. Thorn., Sawyer. De Wette, " sonach."
in the N. Test, eleven times. The E. V. renders it " market," six
times ; " market-place," four times, and once by " streets " (Mark
6 : 56). We have no generic term in English which is an equiva-
lent. It is defined by Rob. (Lex.) : "A place of public resort, in
towns and cities ; any open place where the people came together
either for business, or to sit and converse. In oriental cities such
open places were at the inside of the g"ates (see Ruth 4 : 11.
2 San?. 19:8. 2 Kings 7 : 1. Ps. 69 : 12. Prov. 1 : 21 ; 22 : 22.
Isa. 29 : 21. Amos 5 : 10. Zech. 8:16); and here public busi-
ness was transacted, and tribunals held, as also the markets."
" Hence in the N. T., a place, market-place, forum." From these
facts, some diversity, in the rendering of the word is not im-
proper
f In the Text. Recept, vff.lv (" to you ") is followed by yQ(t-
xai 4>a(>ioatot., imox^trnl. These words 'are canceled by
Griesb., Knapp, Theile, Tischend., and bracketed by Laehmann
Kuinod regards them as spurious : " Verba ygrtfifiaTeZs xal 0a^c-
oaioi, vnoxqiToi in plurifaus optimte notas codd. et verss. clesunt,
in aliis deest vocabulum vnoxqecai. Scilicet petita sunt hsec
verba a grammaticis e Matt, loco paralldo 23 : 27, unde rectissi-
me ea ex ordine ejecit Griesbachius." Schott says : " Delevimus
cum plerisque post Griesb. auctoritate cdd. B.C.L. plurium
minuscc. verss., Memph. Arm., Vulg., 9 librorum lat." Bengel :
" Illud, ygaftftarels xal fyaQiaaZoi, vnoy.^iiai, librarii quidam ex
Matthcco hue intulerunt." The words seem, beyond all reasonable
doubt, to be an interpolation.
136
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XI.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
48 Truly ye bear witness, that
ye allow the deeds of your fa-
thers : for they indeed killed them,
and ye build their sepulchres.
49 Therefore also said the wis-
dom of God, I will send them
prophets and apostles, and some
of them they shall slay and per-
secute :
50 That the blood of all the
prophets, which was shed from
the foundation of the world, may
be required of this generation ;
51 From the blood of Abel un-
to the blood of Zacharias, which
perished between the altar and
the temple : verily, I say unto
you, It shall be required of this
generation.
52 Wo unto you, lawyers ! for
ye have taken away the key of
knowledge : ye entered not in
yourselves, and them that were
entering in ye hindered.
53 And as he said these things
unto them, the scribes and the
Pharisees began to urge him ve-
GEEEK TEXT.
48 apa /JLapTvpeiTe KCU
roy epyois TWV
OTL aural
OLVTOVS, v/j.eis oe Oi/cooo/xetre av-
\ - 49 j, \
Tcav TO. /j.vr/fj.eia. OLa TOVTO
KOU 7] (ro(j)ia TOV Ozov etTrez/,
'^TrocrreAcS els OVTOVS Trpo&riTas
i r i
KOU aTTOCTToXoVf, KOU g OLVT&V
OLTTOKTeVOVCTL KOU e'/C&GJ^OUOW
50 i> > f- /i"^'? '
LVO. CK^r/Tr/ar) TO O.LVM, TTO.VTKIV
TU>V 7rpo(f)rjTa>i> TO CK^vvonevov
aTro KaTttfloXr/s KOO-/J.OV ajro Trjs
yei/ea? TavTtjy, 51 OTTO TOV a'lfj.a-
TOS '-4/8eA eco? TOV a'jfiaror Za.-
TOV dvtTLaarTijptov KOU. TOV O'I'KOV
vou, Xeyco vplv, tK(j]Tr]0r)
52 s\>
Uv
avTo OVK
O.TTO Trs yeveas TavTr/?. Uvcu
VfUV TOl? VOLlLKOlf, OTL rjpaTG TTJV
Trjy yvwcrecof
KCU
OS 8e av-
TOV TavTa. Trpos avTovs, rlp^avTO
oi aAjiaTis KOL ol <I>a.pi.cra.loi
KOU
EEVISED VERSION.
fore r ye testify that 'ye approve
the deeds of your fathers ; for
they indeed killed them, and
ye build their 'tombs. There- 49
fore also said the wisdom of
God, I will send them prophets
and apostles, and some of them .
they will kill and persecute ;
that the blood of all the proph- 50
ets, "which hath been shed from
the foundation of *tke world,
may be required of this genera-
tion ; from the blood of Abel 51
to the blood of Zachariah, who
perished between the altar and
the temple : T yea, I say to you,
it will be required of this gen-
eration. Woe to you, lawyers ! 52
for ye have taken away the key
of knowledge ; ye entered not
in yourselves, and those who
were entering in, ye hindered,
ind as he said these things to 53
them, the scribes and the Phar-
isees began "to be very angry,
and b to press him with ques-
Kob. (Lex., in verbo) : " In a direct conclusion, therefore, tlien,
now." As an alternative rendering-, " so then," as Kend
' " ye testify ; " fta^rv^eZrs. Norton, Scarlett. So (E. V.)
John 2 : 25 ; 3 : 11, 32 ; 4 : 39 ; 5 : 31, etc. In about one-half
of the instances in which the verb occurs, the E. V. renders it by
" testify." As " bearing witness " is nearly out of use, " testify,"
or "bear testimony," would be more appropriate.
* " ye approve ; " avvevSoxerre. Wesley, Thorn., Scarlett,
Dick., Penn, Sawyer, Kend., M. Eras., Beza, " comprobatis ; "
De "Wette, " billiget ihr ; " Bob. (Lex., in verbo), " to approve ; "
Kuincel, " approbatis."
4 " tombs ; " fivqpeia. See v. 44, note.
" " they will kill ; " anoxrevovot. Wesley, Thorn., Sharpe
("will .slay"), Scarlett, Dick., Penn, Wakef., Camp., Norton,
Kend. ("will slay"), M.
T " which hath been shed ; " TO Ixxvrofievov. Thorn., Dick.,
Penn, Wakef., Camp., Norton, M., Murdock. S. Fr., " qui a
ete verse ; " Iber., " la cual ha sido derramada."
" " tin." As xa-cafiolris is anarthrous, this article is italicized,
as a supplement.
1 " the." Koafiov is anarthrous. See last note. The phrase
ajtb xara/Soiiis xoouov occurs seven times, viz., Matt. 13 : 35 ;
25:34. Lukell:50. Heb. 4 :3; 9 : 26. Rev. 13 :8; 17 :8.
In all these instances, both nouns are anarthrous. Hqb
tejs xoa/tov occurs thrice, viz., John 17 : 24, Eph. 1 : 4, 1 Pet.
1 : 20, and here no article occurs.
T " yea ; " va.1. So (E. V.) Matt. 5 : 37 ; 9 : 28 ; 11 : 9 ; 13 : 51.
Luke 7 : 26, etc. In this instance, alone, the E. V. renders vat
" verily." As " verily " is obsolete, and " truly " and " surely " are
required for a/ifjv and al.rjd-ois, it is deemi'd best to give vnl its
usual rendering " yea." In the parallel, Matt. 23 : 36, aftf/v is
used, and should be rendered " truly." It is true that va.1 here is
emphatic; but so in Luke 7 : 26 ; 12 : 5. Philem. 20. Eev.
14 : 13, where the E. V. has " yea." " Tea " is the rendering of
Sharpe, Penn, Wakef., Murd., Norton, Thelwall, Eheims, Gray
(notes on Angus). Camp, and Sawyer, " yes." Eob. (Lex., in
verbo) : " Intensive, in strong affirmation, yea, verily." Greeuf.
(Lex.) : " Yes, yea." Liddell : " In strong affirmation, yea."
1 " it will be requu-ed ; " Ix^rrj&riaerai. Thorn., Sharpe,
Scarlett, Penu, Wakef., Kend., M., Murdock.
" " to be very angry ; " Ssivcas ive%eiv. So Eob. (Lex., in
loco, Ivexco). ' Wakef., " to be greatly enraged ;" Kend., " to be
greatly embittered ; " M., " to be greatly incensed ; " De Wettc,
" erbittert zu werden." The object of this verb, when it indicates
hostile feeling, is xoiov, or XOTOV, wrath, or grwlge.
b " to press with questions ; " anoaTouarl^et.v. Kend., M...
THE GOSPEL A CO CEDING- TO LUKE. CHAP. XII.
137
KING JAMES' VERSION.
hemently, and to provoke him to
speak of many things ; .
54: Laying wait for him, and
seeking to catch something out of
his mouth, that they might accuse
him.
CHAP. xn.
IK the mean time, when there
were gathered together, an innu-
merable multitude of people, inso-
much that they trode one upon
another, he began to say unto his
disciples first of all, Beware ye of
the leaven of the Pharisees, which
is hypocrisy.
GREEK TEXT.
irepi
O.VTOV, /ecu
v-
6f}pev(raL TI e/c TOV crro/iaro? au-
TOV, iva K.a.rt]yopf]<Ta>(Tiv avTov.
CHAP. XII.
os TTi(rwa)(ei(rai> T>V
[j.vpiaSeoi> TOV o^Xov, coo-re KO.TO.-
irctreiv aAA^Aow, rjp^aTQ Ae'yea/
vrpos TOVS }Jia.dr)Ta.s avrov 7rpa>Tov }
TTJ?
$api(raia)v, TJTLS eVrtz/ viroKpi-
BEVISED VERSION.
tions 'concerning many things ;
"lying in wait for him, "seeking 54
to catch something out of his
mouth, that they might .accuse
him.
CHAP. XII.
IN the mean time, "the crowd 1
b being gathered together c by
ten thousands, d so that they
trod down f one another, he be-
gan to say to his disciples;
s First, h beware of the leaven
of the Pharisees, which is hy-
Norton, /Damp., Sharpe ("-to press closely"), Angus. De
Wette, " auszufragen." Bretsch. (Lex., in verbo) : "Qutestionibus
exerceo aliquem." *
c "concerning many tilings ;" ite(>i nkeiovcov. Angus.
" lying in wait ; " IveS^svovres. So (E. V.) Acts 23 : 21.
Wakef., Angus, M. See (E. V.) Ezra 8 : 31.
8 Sal, before t^ovines, in the Text. Becept., is canceled by
Griesb., Lachm., Tisehend., Knapp, Theile, Tittm., Scholz, and
Schott, who says : " Quod vulgo ante ^rovvres additur al pleri-
que recentiorem editt. cum Griesb. recte expungunt auctoritate
plerorumque odd. (12 unc.) verss., Pesch., Pers. pol. Memph.,
Slav., It."
" the crowd ; " tov o-/,lov. See eh. 3 : 7, note. Sharpe,
Camp., Angus.
b " being gathered together ; " littovvai&EiaSv. The parti-
cipial construction is adopted by "Wesley, Thorn., Perm, Norton,
Sawyer, Kend.
" by ten thousands ; " tcov (ivgiAStav. So (E. V.) Matt.
18:24 1 Cor. 4:15; 14:19. Jude 14. Sawyer, Sharpe
("by tens of thousands"). Camp, and Dick., "in myriads;"
Angus, " myriads ; " Belgic, " viele duizenden ; " S. Fr., " par
myriades ; " Iberian, " a decenas de millares ; " De Wette,
" Tausende ; " Ital., " a migliaja ; " Montanus, " myriadibus ; "
Dan., "ved mange tusinde." Heb. N. Test., rvm^!?. If we
regard the language of the text as hyperbolical, still the render-
ing of the E. V., " innumerable " (introduced by Tyndale from
Erasmus' " innumera"), extends the hyperbole beyond the origi-
nal. Hence a more literal expression is adopted. I should have
used " myriads," which has been naturalized in our language, had
it been employed in the E. V. The phraseology might then have
been, strictly literal, thus, " the myriads of the crowd being
gathered together."
d " so that ; " COOTS. Wesley, Scarlett, Pcnn, Norton, Dick.,
Wakef., Sawyer, Kend., Rob. (Lex.). So (B. V.) Matt. 8 : 28 ;
13 : 2. Mark 3 : 20 ; 4 : 1, 32, 3V. Luke 5 : 7, etc.
"trod down;" xaranaislv. Bob. (Lex., in verbo), "to
tread down ; " Liddell, " to tread, or trample down ; " Bretsch.,
" pedibus proculco, niedertreten." So (E. V.) Luke 8 : 5. "Kara,
in composition, downwards, down," Liddell. Dick, and Angus,
" trampled ; " Iber., " se atropellaban." Th6 E. T. is deficient in
strength, and fails to bring out the full force of the text. Vulg.,
Mont., Beza, Eras., Goschen, Schott, " conculcarent."
f " one another ; " allrjlovs. See ch. 2 : 15, note. Thorn.,
Scarlett, Kend.
e "First;" itqoitov. Wesley, Sharpe, Thelwall, M. The
punctuation of Eras., Griesb., Theile, Schott, and Kuincel places
a colon after avrov, and is deemed most aecura^J. Tittmann and
Scholz follow the Text. Eecept., and place a comma after ngiS-
lov. Kuincel remarks: "Sine omni idonea ratione nonnulli
interprett. ngonov ad antecedentia referunt, hoc sensu discipulos
ante omnia ita admonit." " First of all " would require itqiS-cov
itKincov, as in 1 Tim. 2 : 1. The punctuation of Griesbach is
followed by Thorn., Scarlett, Sharpe, Norton, Dick., Wakef.,
Camp., Sawyer. So Erasmus has, " ad Discipulus suos : Primum
cavete." Beza, " discipulis suis, Inprimis cavete." Castalio, " ad
suos discipulos yerba facere : Inprimis cavete." Schott, " disci-
pulis snis : ante omnia cavete." Belg., " Discepelen : Voor eerst
wacht." Luther, " zu seinen Jungern : Zum ersten, hiitet euch."
De Wette, " za seinen Jungern zu sag-en : Vor alien Dingen hu-
tet euch." G. Fr., " disciples : Donnez-vous de garde surtout."
S. Fr., " disciples : Avant tout, guardez-vous."~ Span., " discipu-
los. Primeramente guardaos." Diodati and Ital., " a' suoi disce-
poli : Guardatevi imprima." Schott has the following note on
this passage : " Permulti cdd. (in his A.C.D.E.) verss. Memph. et
Slav. aqcuTov antecedentibus jungunt, quod interpretibus baud
paucis probatum. Parum recte patet, quare Lucas scripserit
jjgl-aTo Asyetv n^coTovl De vocula n^carov imperativum prsece-
dente conf. Luc. 9 : 61 ; 10 : 5." Should the punctuation of the
Text. Becept. be retained, then the rendering ought to be, " he
began to say first to his disciples." (Scholef.)
h " beware ; '* itgoffexere. " Ye," which follows this verb in
the E. V., is superfluous. It is omitted by Wesley, Thorn., Scar
lett, Penn, Wakef., Camp., Kend., M.
138
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XII.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
2 For there is nothing covered,
that shall not be revealed ; neither
hid, that shall not be known.
3 Therefore, -whatsoever ye have
spoken in darkness, shall be heard
in the light; and that which ye
have spoken in the ear in closets,
shall be proclaimed upon the
house-tops.
4 And I say unto you, my
friends, Be not afraid of them
that kill the body, and after that,
have no more that they can do.
5 But I will forewarn you whom
ye shall fear: Fear him, which
after he hath killed, hath power
to cast into hell ; yea, I say unto
you, Fear him.
6 Are not five sparrows .sold
for two farthings, and not one of
them is forgotten before God ?
7 But even the very hairs of
your head are all numbered. Fear
GREEK TEXT.
cris.
e'oTtz>, o OVK
Kal KpvTTTOv, o ov yvaxrdr)(re-
TO.L. 3 a.v& K>V ocra ev rfj er/cor/a
eiTraTe, ev rw (j)a>TL a/coucr^cre-
rat Kal o Trpos TO ov?
eV Tols TafieloLS,
em
Se
y rot? (j>iXois (JLOV, Mrj (j)o/3ij-
0f)Te O.TTO TWV aTroKTeivovTcoy TO
crcw/Lia, /cat jiiera raOra /J.TJ \ov-
rcov TrepLcro-.OTepov TL TroiTJo~at.
5 VTToSei^oo Se vfj.lv riva. 00/3??-
0rJTe ' (j)oj3r]0r]Te TOV yuera TO
e^ovcriav tyovra e/j,-
et? TTJV yeevvay VOL,
Xeyco vfj.lv, TOVTOV (/)of3^0rjTe.
6 Ovyi Trez/re crTpovdia. TrojAetrat
acrcraplcoj/ duo; Kal ev ft;
OVK. ZCTTIV eVtAeA^cryuez'OZ' e
TQV Oeov' 7 aAAa /cat at
TTJf K(j)a\TJS VfJ-COV TTttCTat
REVISED VERSION.
pocrisy. hh Now there is nothing 2
covered which will not be re-
vealed, 'nor hidden which will
not be known. Therefore, what- 3
ever ye have spoken j in the
dark, will be heard in the
light ; and that which k ye have
said in the ear in closets, will
be proclaimed on the house-
tops. And I say to you, my 4
friends, Fear not those who
kill the body, and after that,
have no more that they can do.
But 'I will show you whom 5
'ye should fear ; fear him who
after he hath killed, hath "au-
thority to cast into hell ; yea,
I say to you, fear him. Are 6
not five sparrows sold for "two
farthings? and p yet not one of
them is forgotten, before God.
But even the 'hairs of your head 7
are all numbered. Fear not
hb Now ; " Ss is merely .continuative.
1 " nor ; " xal. M., Thorn., Scarlett, Kend., Angus. See ch.
8:17, note,
) " in the dark ; " lv rfj axoria. Thorn., Sharpe, Camp., Mur-
dock. By using " dark," which is found in the B. V. (" in the
dark," Job 12 -. 25 ; 24 : 16. Ps. 88 : 12. Isa. 29 : 15. Ezek.
8 : 12), we can render the article, as is done with that belonging
to the next clause (& raj ycorl], and thus preserve the symmetry
of the sentence. The phrase is common in our language, especi-
ally in conversation.
* " ye have said ;" tiaAijoare. Aorist as perfect,
i " I will show ; " vitoSel^co. Tyndale, Cranmer, Kheims,
Sharpe, Wesley, Wakef.,. Camp., Sawyer, M. Syriac, 3*0*.]
(Murd., "I will show you"). Vulg., Mont, Eras., Goschen,
Schott, " ostendam." Rob. (Lex., in verbo) : " In N. Test, trop-
ically, to show by word, or example." De Wette, "Ich will
zeigen ; " S. Fr., " je montrerai ; " Diodati and Ital., " io mostre-
ro ; " Dan., " ; jeg vil vise." '.
'' a " ye should fear ; " pofiqd-rjTs. Thomson, Scarlett, Penn,
Sharpe, Dick., M.
""authority;" e*ovoiav. Thelwall. So John 5 : 27, xai
ijovalav sSeoxev cmtcy nal y.qlotv noietv, art vios av&geoirov
sari, (E. V.), "And hath given him authority to execute judgment
also, because he is the Son of man." Compare John 5 : 22, ovSs
yi> o Tta-crj^ xqlvst ovSsvct, aV.a ir,v xgiatv ytaaav StSioxs -era
vita, (E. V.), " For the Father judgeth no man ; but hath com-
mitted all judgment unto the Son." Compare Acts 17 : 31. See
Luke 4 : 6, note.
"two farthings?" aaoa^lcav Svo ; The interrogation point
is placed after farthings (or the word used as the 'equivalent of
that -word) by Tyndale, Cranmer, Thorn., Scarlett, Penn, Sharpe,
Norton, Dick., Wakef., Camp. This punctuation agrees with
Bagster's Text. Eeeept., Eras. .(Greek), Elzevir, and the. critical
Editions of Griesb., Lachm., Knapp, Theile, Tittm, Tischend.,
Goschen, Schott. So Eras., Beza, the Lat. versions of Goschen
and Schott; Belg, Luther, De Wette, G. and S. Fr., De Sacy,
Iber., Diodati, Ital., Dan., Syriac, Murdock. In the parallel,
Matt. 10 : 29, the E. V. places the interrogation point thus, " a
farthing?" . . .
P " and yet ; " nal. See ch. 8 : 13, note. Beza, " et tamen ; "
Castal. ("tamen"); Wakef. ("yet even"). Wesley, Thomson,
Scarlett, Penn, Camp, render xai adversatively by " yet." Schott,
"vero." . .... ....
1 In the E. V. " very" is inserted before " hairs." This is not
demanded by the text, which is aU.a xai ai r^t^es. In the
parallel, Matt. 10 : 30, Se xai a.t ifiy.es is rendered in the E. V-,
" but the very hairs," instead of the more correct phrase, " but
even the hairs." Wesley renders the passage before us, " but
even the hairs." So Scarlett, Sharpe, Dick., Sawyer, Kend.
Beza, " quin etiam capilli ; " Eras., " quin et capilli ; " Yulg.,
Mont., " sed et capilli ; " Goschen, " sed etiam ; " De Wette,
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XII.
139
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
not therefore : ye are of more
value than many sparrows.
8 Also I say unto you, "Who-
soever shall confess me before
men, him shall the Son of man
also confess before the angels of
God.
9 But he that denieth me be-
fore men, shall be denied before
the angels of God. '"":
10 And whosoever shall speak
a word against the Son of man, it
shall be forgiven him : but unto
him that blasphemeth against the
Holy Ghost, it shall not be for-
given.
11 And when they, bring you
unto the synagogues, and unto
magistrates, and powers, take ye
GREEK TEXT.
fj.r] ovv <j)o/Se'io-0e' TroX-
(TTpovdicov Sia<pepeTe. 8 Ae-
ya> 8e vfjuv, Has b? av o/toAoy^crp
ez/ ejjLoi e/JLTrpo^ev T>V di>9pa>-
TTCOV, KCU 6 v'lOS TOV dv0pO>7TOV
QfjioXoyr)<TL ev avTco efJLirpocrOev
T>V d-yye\coi> TOV Oeov' o 'Se
dpvrjcrafj.ei'os //.e evwinov TO>V civ-
T>V
TOV Oeov.
10
KCU
Trdf ay epel Xoyov elf TOV viov
rov di>6pa>7rov, d<j)edr)
T< de elf TO ' Ayiov
OVK
em Ta.f crvva.yu>ya.s KOU ray
KOU. Ta? e^ovcriaf, fj.rj fj,e-
REVISED VERSION.
therefore ; ye are of more value
than many sparrows. r And I 8
say to you, whoever shall con-
fess me before men, him "will the
Son of man also confess before
the angels of God : but he who 9
denieth me before men, 'will be
denied before the angels of
God. And whoever shall speak 10
a word against the Son of man,
it "will be forgiven him, but to
him who ""revileth against the
Holy Spirit, it T will not be for-
given. And when they bring n
you "before the synagogues, '
and "magistrates, and y authofi-
ties, z be not anxious how or
" aber auch die Haare ; " S. Fr., " meme aussi les clieveux ; '
Iberian, " mas aun los cabellos ; " Belgic, " ja oolc de hairen.'
" Very " was copied from Tyndale.
r "And ; " e. Wesley, Sliavpe, Penn, Norton, "VVakef., Saw-
yer, Kend. Belg., " ende ; " Iber., " 1." Were it not that the
particle " now " would be ambiguous being sometimes an ad-
verb of time, and at others, a continuative it would be preferable
to " and," in this instance. G. and S. Fr., Diodati and the Ital.
have " or " (= " now ").
" will confess ; " oftoloyrjaet. Scarlett, Sharpe, Penn, Saw-
yer, Kend., St. Wakef., Thorn., and Norton, " will acknow-
ledge."
' " will be denied ; " ana^vijd-fiacrai,. Scarlett, Penn, Wake-
field, Kend., M. The auxiliary " will " is employed also by
Norton and Dick.
u " will be forgiven ; " apsd-jasrat. Scarlett, Sharpe, Penn,
Kend., M. As an alternative rendering, "may be forgiven."
This is adopted by Wakef.. Penn, Norton. It may be maintain-
ed on the ground, that the fut. indicative is often used with the
force of the subjunctive, or English potential mode. Kiihner
(g255, 3, p. 343) says: "The Greeks very often use the fut.
indie, in subordinate clauses, even after a Historical tense, to
express that which shall, should, -must, or can be, where the Latin
employs the subjunctive." Stuart (Gram.; 136, 7, b) : "The
future often expresses obligation, necessity, duty, and may be
translated by the auxiliaries, may, must, ought, can, etc." Winer,
fi 34, 5 : " The future is sometimes employed to express the idea
which the Latins convey by the present of the subjunctive, and
the English by the potential mode; both of which, in their
nature, are closely related to the general idea of the future."
The thought obviously is not that the sin of reviling the Son
shaft, always be pardoned, but that such sin may be pardoned.
uu a r evileth ; " {tAaoptifujoavrc. See ch. 5 : 21, note.
' " will not be forgiven ; " OVK ayed-^aecat. See last note.
In case the alternative rendering- (suggested ia that note), " it
may be forgiven," is deemed appropriate, then this sentence
(" will not be forgiven ") should be rendered, " it can not be for-
given."
" " before the synagogues ; " Inl ras avvaycayas. So liti
(E. V.) Matt. 10 : 18. Mark 13 : 9. Acts 10 : 17. Bob. (Lex.,
in verbo, cum accus.} : "Also (spoken) of magistrates, judges,
tribunals, upon, unto, i. e. up before, Matt. 10 : 18. Luke 12 : 11,
58, etc." Thus Scarlett, Sharpe, Penn* Wakef., Norton, Dick.,
Camp., Kend., Angus, Thelwall, M. De Wette, " vor die Syna-
gogen ; " S. Fr., " devant les congregations." As an alternative,
'' to the synagogues." .
1 A supplementary preposition before " magistrates " (like
" unto " of the E. V.) is superfluous. Not employed by Thorn.,
Scarlett, Sharpe, Penn, Wakef., Norton, Dick., Camp., Sawyer,
Kend., Thelwall, M.
y " authorities ; " govoias. Sharpe, Penn, Angus, M. Bob.
(Lex., in verbo} : "Authorities, i. e., rulers, magistrates, Luke
12 : 11." Our idiom agrees with that of the Greek in the use of
" authorities," employing the abstract for the concrete,' i. e. " au-
thority " for those invested with " authority." " Power " is the
equivalent of Svvaftis, as in (E. V.) Matt. 24 : 29. Luke 21 :27.
Eom. 8 : 38. The proper distinction between these words is
made by the E. V., 1 Pet, 3 : 22, vitorayevrcov avrcp ayyelcov
y.al sl-ovoicov xal Sw&fiecov, " angels, and authorities, and powers
Deing made subject unto him." There is much confusion and
ooseness in the rendering of igovola and Suvafas'in the E. V.,
which has followed the earlier Eng. Versions, without making the
u-oper corrections. See ch. 4 : 6, note. : :
"be not anxious;" /oj fte^i/ivSre. See ch. 10 :41, and
140
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING- TO LUKE. CHAP. XII.
KISTG JAMES' VERSION.
no thought how or what thing ye
shall answer, or what ye shall
say :
12 For the Holy Ghost shall
teach you in the same hour what
ye ought to say.
13 And one of the company
said unto him, Master, speak to
my brother, that he divide the in-
heritance with me.
14 And he said unto him, Man,
who made me a judge, or a divider
over you ?
15 And he said unto them, Take
heed, and beware of covetousness :
for a man's life consisteth not in
the abundance of the things which
he possesseth.
16 And he spake a parable un-
to them, saying, The ground of a
certain rich man brought forth
plentifully :
17 And he thought within him-
self, saying, What shall I do, be-
s
b%Xov,
GREEK TEXT.
pi/j.vS.T TT>S rj T'L
77 T'L etTT^re- 12 ro yap " Ayiov
Uvev/j-a SiSa^et vp.as eV avrrj rrj
a.) a Sel etTreiV.
8e TLS avTco e/c TOU
17T TCp dSfX"
e/j.ov
$\ 9
Oe 17T1>
avTco AvflpcoTre, rty p.e /care'-
O~Tr)(T SlKaCTTrjV 77 fJ.eptO'TTJl' (f)'
V/JLO.S; Ehre Se irpos avrovs,
' Opare /cat (j)vXa(rcrcr6e a.7ro Trjs
OTI OVK ev T< Treptcr-
TLVL 77 ^0)77 aVTOV 6(TTLV K
Tiav VTrap^ovroov avrov. 16 Ehre
Se -Trapa^oXrjv irpos ayrouy, Ae'-
yutv, *Av&pumov TLVOS TrXovcriov
ev(poprjo~ev TJ ^capa- 17 /cat 5te-
ev tavTco, Xeyav, Ti.
REVISED VEESION.
what' b ye shall answer for
yourselves, or what ye shall say :
for the Holy Spirit 'will teach 12
you in that hour what ye oiight
to say. And one of the crowd is
said to him, Teacher, 'bid my
brother 'divide the inheritance
with me. And he said to him, 14
Man, who made me a judge, or
a divider over you? And he K
said to them, Take heed and
'keep yourselves s from h cove-
tousness ; for a man's life con-
sisteth not in the abundance
of his possessions. And he 16
spoke a parable to them, say-
ing, The ground of a certain
rich man brought forth plenti-
fully : and 'he reasoned within 17
aimself, saying, What shall I
8 : 14, notes. Thorn., Penn, "Wakef., Norton, Sawyer, Kend.
Angus, M.
* " thing " is omitted as superfluous. So M., Kend., Thorn.
"Wesley, Sharpe, Penn, Norton.
I y e s jj a n answer for yourselves ; " anoAoyijaqa&e. Rob,
(Lex., in verbd) : " Mid. dep., to plead, or answer for ones self.'
So (E. V.) Acts 25 : 8, aitohoyovfcevov avrov, " while lie an-
swered for himself ; " 26 : 1, iatoloytto, " answered for him-
self;" 26 : 2, filttcov ano).oysra&ai, "I shall answer for
myself;" 26 : 24, ainov catoloyovfikvov, "as he thus spoke
(properly, " answered ") for himself." As an alternative, " how
or what ye shall say in your defense." S. Fr., " ce qne vous
repondrez pour votre defense ; " De Wette, " wie oder was ihr zu
eurer Vertheidigung sprechen sollet ; " Iber., " por como 6 qne
en vuestra defensa respondereis."
" will teach ; " SiSajec. Thorn., Sharpe, Penn, "Wakefield,
Norton, Camp., Kend.
d " bid ; " cljif. Penn, Sharpe, "Wakef., Kend. Bob. (Lex.,
slitov} : (Spoken) " of what is said with authority, to direct, to
bid, to command." So (E. V.) Matt. 16 : 12 ; 23 : 3. Luke
10 : 40. Acts 11 : 12 ; 22 : 24.
* " divide ; " /teptoao9ae. By our idiom, " to " is omitted
after " bid." So Kend. and Scarlett.
f " keep yourselves ; " rpvldooeo&e. Rob. (Lex., in verlo) :
" Middle, and cnce reflexive, to keep oneself from, or as to any
thing." " Mid., Luke 12 : 15, often rendered by ' keep ' in E. V."
" Beware " is nearly synonymous with " take heed," and hence
there is a tautology in the rendering of the E. V.
ing.
"from;" aito (cum genit.).
Rob. (Lex., in verbo).
This is the appropriate render-
covetousness." The reading of the Textus Receptus, rijs
e, is, to say the least, dubious. Haarjs n).eove!;ia.s (" all
covetousness ") is marked by Griesbach as equal, if not superior,
while it is adopted by Lachmann, Tischendorf, Schott. Kuinoe!
says : " Pro Sato TIJS multi iidemque prcsstantissimi libri exhibeut
catb utaoys, qua? lectio omnino proeferenda videtnr." The Syriac
follows this reading (JZaJil OL^S _io) ; so the Vulg., " ab
omni avaritia." It is that of the uncial MSS. A.B.D.K.L.M.Q.X.
Sohott has this note : "Auctoritate multorum cdd. (8 nnc.) verss.,
Pesch. Philox., Memph. Sahid, Arr., Pers, MVa., Arm., Vulg.,
It., cum Lachm. et Meyero edidd. naarjs mite nliov pro vnlg.
Knapp, Theile, Tittm., and Scholz follow the Text. Recept.
The weight of authority in favor of naoijs is therefore such, that
" from all covetousness " is submi tted as an alternative render-
.
1 " of his possessions ; " J reuv vna^otniav cdrtov. See ch.
8 : 3, note. Penn, Scarlett, Wakefield, Norton, Kend. Heb.
N. Test, I'j^fp nnto Belg., " uit zijue goederen ; " De Wette,
unter seinen'Oiiterri ;" S. Fr., " ses biens." "Which he pos-
sesseth " (first used by Tyndale) is a literal translation from the
Vulgate, " qua3 possidet." It is less exact than the rendering of
lie Geneva Version, " his riches."
lie reasoned ; " Steloyigero. Thomson, Wesley, Norton,
Dick., Camp., Sawyer, Angus, Thelwall, M. This verb occurs
eventeen times in the N. Test. In twelve of these it is rendered
by "reason." Rob. (Lex.).
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XII.
141
KING JAMES' VERSION.
cause I have no room where to
bestow rny fruits ?
18 And he said, This will I
do : I will pull down my barns,
and build greater ; and there will
I bestow all my fruits and my
goods.
19 And I will say to my soul,
Soul, thou hast much goods laid
up for many years ; take thine
ease, eat, drink, and be merry.
20 But God said unto him, Thou
fool, this night thy soul shall be
required of thee : then whose shall
those things be which thou hast
provided ?
GREEK TEXT.
7TOU
1 8 \ ?
KO.I eare,
JJ.QV ray
7TOir/(ra> } OTL OVK
\ /
TOV? KapTrovy /J.DV;
TOVTO TroiTjera
a.iro@rjK.aS) KCU
Ii,r)aro3, KOLL (Tvvd^co Kt irdvra TO.
yevvrj^aTa. ftov Kai TO, dyadd
fj.ov, 19 KOU epaj rfj tyvxfj p,ov,
^v^r}, ^X eiy ' !ro ^ 1 ' dyadd Kei-
fj.eva fly err} TroXXd- dvsujravov,
I ' ' > JL ' 20'
(pays, Trie, ev(j)pcu.vov. enre
de avTco 6 0os, ' A<ppoov } recur??
(TOV a.tra.1-
d 5e
ry VVKTL TVJV
rovcnv iro crov'
cra.?, TLVL eoraty
2
ovrcas
REVISED VERSION.
"do ? for I have no iplace where
m l can gather together my
fruits. And he said, This will 18
I do; I will pull down my
barns, and build greater ; and
there "I will gather together
all my "produce and my goods.
And I will say to my soul, Soul, 19
thou hast 'many goods laid up
for many years, take thine ease,
eat, drink, 'be merry. But God 20
God said to him, 'Unwise man!
this night this soul "is required
of thee ; 'now "who will have
T what w thou hast provided?
k The interrogation point is placed after " do " by Thorn.,
Wesley, Scarlett, Norton, Dick., Gamp., Wakef. So Beza,
" Quid faciam ? " Belg., " Wat zal ik doen ? " De "Wette, " Was
Boll ich thun ? " Dan., " hvad skal jeg giore ? " Iber., " i Que
hare?"
i "place." Penn, Dick. G. Fr., "place;" De Sacy, "point
de liea." There is an ellipsis of ronov here. Kuincel (in loco) :
" OVK e%co sel. roitov." Michaelis (notes on Bos' Gr. Ellipses,
p. 301) : " Lucas in Evangel. 12 : 17, owe tyta (ronov) nov
awa^ea." Agreeably to our idiom, the ellipsis should be supplied.
Tyndale felt the necessity of this, and employed " room," which
was copied by the E. V"., though in that, the translators (or, to
speak more correctly, the revisers) did not italicize the word.
m " I can gather together ; " ovvagco. The future here may
be properly rendered by the potential. See ch. 12 : 9, note.
The proper signification of the verb is " to collect," " to gather
together." This latter is one of its ordinary renderings in the
E. V. See Matt. 13 : 2 ; 18 : 20 ; 22 : 34. Luke 15 : 13. John
11 : 52. 'So " I can gather together " is the rendering (by the
Lat. subj.) of the Vulgate and Eras., " congregem ; " Goschen,
" colligam ; " Castalio, " cogam." Penn renders this verb by the
potential, "where I can store." G. Fr., "je puisse assembler."
Bob. (Lex., awayca) : " To gather together." If, after all, the
rendering by the potential should not be deemed appropriate,
then the indicative future, " 1 shall gather together," is suggested
as an alternative. " Bestow," in the sense demanded here, is
obsolete.
" " I will gather together ; " ovvagat. See last note. So
Thelwall.
" produce ; " yevtrffiara. Norton, Camp., Wakef., Sawyer.
Castalio, Goschen, Schott, " proventus ; " Yulg. and Eras., " qu!B
nata snnt;" De Wette, " Erzeugnisse ; " S. Fr., "produits;"
Rob. (Lex., in verbo) " produce." Bretsch. : " Apud seriores, ut
t'olybium, Diodornm (dicitur) de proventu agrorum, arborum,
etc." Lidd. (Lex.) : " That which is produced." Webster (Diet.,
art. "Produce") : "That which is produced, brought forth, or
yielded, as the produce of a farm," etc. Kuineel :
sunt proventus agrorum." This word should not be confounded
with xagnovs, which occurs in v. 17.
f " many ; " nolla. So in the next member of the sentence.
" Much goods " does not accord with our present usus logiundt.
So Angus, Sawyer, Wakef., Sharpe, Scarlett, Penn, Thorn., M.
As an alternative rendering of nolla. aya&a, " many good
things." So Scarlett, Thorn., Penn, M., Sharpe.
i " and," supplementary in the E. V., is superfluous, and weak-
ens the force of the thought. Omitted by Wesley, Scarlett,
Norton, Camp., Wakef., Kend., Angus, Thelwall.
' " Unwise man .' " 'Atpgcov. Thelwall. See cli. 11 : 40, note.
Syriac, ) .1 f "-.< ^.M.^ (" inops mentis ").
" is required ; " anairovaiv. Kend. There is no necessity
for rendering the present tense here as a future. The former is
most exact and forcible. Bloomf. (in loco) : " 'Axanovat may,
with Gataker, and others, be regarded as personal for imperson-
al." Pasor (Lex., in loco) : " Hac ipsa nocte animam suam
repetunt ii te." By a common usage, especially in Scriptural
phraseology, events which are to transpire in the future, are de-
scribed by verbs in the present tense, and this is especially the
fact in the language of prediction. The certainty of the fulfill-
ment is thus made prominent. In such cases, a literal translation
is altogether preferable. Thus Matt. 3 : 10, nav ovv StvSqov fit;
notovv KKQUOV v.albv ixf.oarsrnt xal tig nvq fidU.erai. This is
properly rendered in the E. V., " is hewn (cut) down, and
cast." So Matt. 26 : 2, ftera Svo Tjfiepas TO Ttao^n yiveritt,
xal o vios rov av&Qconov XapaSlSoTai. E. V., " after two days
is the feast of the passover, and the Son of man is betrayed."
Kfilmer, 1 255, E. 3. Trollope, Gram., \ 50, Obs. 5, 3.
' " now ; " SE. This particle is simply continuative. In cases
of this kind, it is rendered (Rob., Lex.) " but, now, and further,
and the like." De Wette, " nun."
"who will have;" rift 'sarai; Sawyer, Kend. ("shall
have"). Iber., i"quien tendra?" Bob. (Lex., slfil] : " With
the dative of a noun or pronoun as predicate, to be to any one,
142
THE GOSPEL ACCOEDING TO LUKE. CHAR. XII.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
21 So is he that layeth up treas-
ures for himself, and is not rich
toward God.
22 And lie said unto his disci-
ples, Therefore I say unto you,
Take no thought for your life,
what ye shall eat ; neither for the
body, -what ye shall put on.
23 The life is more then meat,
and the body is more than rai-
ment.
24 Consider the ravens : for
they neither sow nor reap : which
neither have store-house nor barn ;
and God feedeth them. How much
more are ye better than, the fowls?
GREEK TEXT.
v ea.vT(2, KOI p.rj els
Oeov
22 ELTT 8e Trpo? rou?
avTov, A 10. TOVTO vfj.lv \e~ya>, fj.r/
fj.zpijj.va.Te rf) ^V)(rj vfj.a>v, T'L
yr)T- fJirjSe TC
o-qa-0. 23 rj faxf} TrXelov fcrri
Tpo(f)fj?, /cat TO crayita TOV
Ka.Tavoricra.Te TOVS
OTL ov (nreipovcriv. ou8e
OLS OVK ecrTL rafj.ioi>
ov8e dTrodrjKr}, /cat 6 deos rpe(f)ei
v/j.els 8ia-
REVI3ED VERSION.
"Thus ''will it be with him, who 21
layeth up treasure for himself,
and is not .rich towards God.
And he said . to his disciples, 22
Therefore I say to you, z Be not
anxious for your life, what ye
shall eat ; "nor for the body,
what ye shall put on. The life 23
is more than b the food, and the
'body, than d the raiment. Con- 24
sider the ravens ; for they nei-
ther sow nor reap ; 'they have
neither store-house nor f barn,
s and yet God feedetli them ;
h of how much more value are
* " Thus ; " ovra> ? . Thorn., Norton, Dick., Wakef., Kend.,
Thelwall.
" will it be with him." There is an ellipsis here. Tyndale
supplied it with "is it with him." In this, he was copied by
Cranmer, and the Genevan. Luther and De Wette, "'genet es"
(= our colloquial " so goes it ") ; Belg., " is het met dien ; " G.
and S. Pr., " il en est ainsi de celui ; " De Sacy, " c'cst ce qui
arrive a celui ; " Diodati, '' cosi avviene a chi ; " Italian, " cosi
avienne di colui, che." Wakef. and Norton, " Thus [it is with
Mm]." .Camp., "So [it faveth it -with him]." There is some-
thing harsh and obscure in the phrase of the E. V., " So is he."
Kuinoel (in loco) : "Ita eveniet, hcec est sors (OVTCOS sc. sartii)
hominis, qui sibi bona, caduca, et peritnra congerit, etc." Bloomf.
(in loco) : " Moaning, such is the case with."
* " Be not anxious ; " ftri fiepiftvare. See ch. 10 : 41, and
8 : 14, notes. Kend., Angus, Thorn., Penn, Scarlett, Norton,
"Wakef., Sawyer, M.
1 " nor ; " fajSe. M., Thorn., Penn, Scarlett, Sharpe, Norton,
Wakef., Camp., Kend., Thelwall. See ch. 8 : 17, note.
b " the food ; " -rjjs rQo<pf,s. The article should not be omitted
before igoprjs. The reason for retaining it before yi^J, is equal-
ly valid here. " Meat," as a generic term for whatever we eat, is
obsolete. So (E. V.) Acts 14 : 17. Jas. 2 : 15. It is rendered
" food " by Thorn., Penn, Norton, Dick., Wakef., Camp., Sawyer,
Eheims. Belg., " het voedzel ; " De Wette, " die Nahrung ; " G.
and S. Pr., " la nouriture ; " Iber., " el alimento ; " Diodati, " il
nudrimento ; " Ital., " il cibo." Heb. N. Test., iaxrt- Danish,
"Maden." .
c " The supplement of the E. V., " is more," after ". body," is
superfluous. Dropped by Camp., Thorn., Penn, Norton, Sawyer,
M., Kend., Sharpe.
d " the raiment ; " rev evSv/inros. The article is properly
retained here by Penn, Sawyer, Eheims, Belg., De Wette, G. and
S. Pr., Iber., Ital., Heb. N. Test., and Dan. See last note.
e " they ; " oi s . M., Cranmer, Kend., Thorn., Sharpe, Norton,
Wakef., Sawyer, M.
f A comma is placed after " barn," in conformity with the text.
So Penn, Sharpe, Norton.
s " and yet ; " v.a\. For this use of -/.at, see ch. 8 : 13, note.
Stuart (Gram., \ 185, Bern. p. 185) says : " The student need not
hesitate, sometimes to render y.al but, or, moreover, etc. ; but let
him remember that this liberty is due to the nature of the senti-
ment which is connected with ttal, and not to the varying signifi-
cation of the particle itself. Connecting, as it does, clauses of all
hues, either synonymous, or adversative, either parts of the same
generic sentence, or parts of the same discourse (zai continuative),
the actual relations that exist may be properly expressed in a
translation, although al, in and by itself, does not really and
properly designate them."
h " of how much more value are ye.; " n6o<>> fi.aD.ov vfieis
SiatfE^ere. " To be of value " is the rendering of this verb in
(E. V.) Matt. .10 : 31. noUcov orgovd'itov Stayi^Brs vftsTs, "ye
are of more value than many sparrows." So in the parallel
same words), Luke 12 : 7. Though I retain, " the life is more
than," in v. 23, it is on the ground that the verb there is simply
sari. (/; ynj%,li rtlaov lort). The adjunct jroarj> is in favor of this
rendering. Connecting it with the verb, we have the thought,
" how much do you surpass the birds in value," or, in other words,
implying possession, or' property." By inverting the construc-
tion, it may be rendered to have ; Luke 7 : 41, 8vo xpecoyisderai.
Tjoav Sa.vEi.aTrj rivi, " a certain creditor had two debtors " (E. V.,
"There was a certain creditor which had two debtors"). Luke
6 : 32, noia vpzv %apts sail; (E. V.), " what thank, (thanks)
have ye ? " John 18 : 39, sari SE avvrj&eia vfalv (E. V.), " but
ya have a custom." Scarlett, Dick., " shall possess."
v " what ; " a. Norton, Dick., Kend. ,Iber., " lo que." Our
idiom corresponds with the Greek in omitting the antecedent, in
cases like this. The expression is equally clear, more concise and
forcible, than it would be if " those things " should be inserted.
De Wette, " was."
w " thou hast provided ; " rrcoifiaaas. As an alternative ren-
dering, " thou hast prepared." So usually in the E. V.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XII.
143
KING JAMES' VEBSION.
25 Arid which of you with tak-
ing thouglit can add to his stature
one cubit?
26 If ye then be not able to do
GREEK TEXT.
2o
IS 8e
vwv Svi/arac
e?n. Tfjv r)\iK.i.av avrov
v 26 > 7 >' >\ '
eva; ft ovv OVTS eAa-
REVISED VERSION.
ye than 'the birds? Wow which 25
of you k by being anxious, 'can
add a cubit "to his life? If 26
then "ye can not do ""what is
"how much more valuable are ye than the birds ? " Kob. (Lex.
in verbo) : " With a geu. to differ from, to be other than ; and si
to be more, or better than, to surpass, to excel." As an alternative
rendering (as De Wette), " how much do ye surpass the birds ? '
Thorn., "of how much greater value are ye?" Scarlett am
Camp., " how much more valuable are ye ? " Iber., " Cuanto mas
valeis vosotros ! "
1 "the birds?" raw Mretvaiv; So (B. V.) Matt. 8 : 20
13 : 32. Luke 9 : 58. Bom. 1 : 23. Jas. 3 : 7. Penn, Wesley
Norton, Dick., Keud., Sawyer, Thorn.
J "Now;" Se. Wakef. Kob. (Lex., <?) : " Continuative
now."
k "by being anxious;!' /tsfi/tvtSv. Kend., M. Alternative
rendering (as De Wette, " rait seinen Sorgen "), " by his anxiety.'
See ch. 10 : 41, note.
i " can add a. cubit ; " xqood'eZvai Ttrjxuv sva. This arrange-
ment is more in accordance with our ordinary usus loquendi. So
Thorn., Penn, Wesley, Sharpe, Norton, Dick., Wakef., Sawyer,
Kend.
'" " to his life ? " ln\ rtjv rjlmiav. Rob. (Lex., in verbo) : " Spe-
cially age, life, Matt. 6 : 27, et Luke 12 : 25." Bob. remarks,
that " those who have translated the word ' stature,' in these
cases, have done it against the context." " Life " is the rendering
of Thorn., Norton, Wakefield, Camp., Kend., Pecby (note on
Angus), M. Schott and Kuincel, " vitse sure ; " De Wette, " sei-
ner Lebenslange." Wesley, Dickinson, Thelwall, " age." The
primary sense of qitxia, in classic authors, is time of life, age,
Lat. oetas, generally age, time. It has also been applied to the
body, stature, growth, as being a sign of age. Lidd. (Lex.). There
is little probability that translators would ever have thought of
rendering the word by " stature " but from the fact of its connec-
tion with nijxvv. We have an idiomatic expression of the same
kind, " a span of time." So in a well known hymn :
" My span of life will soon bo o'er."
Bloomf. (N. Test.) makes the following remark on this phrase,
which occurs in the parallel, Matt. 6 : 27: "The ancient com-
mentators, and most modern ones, assign to this term the sense
of stature; others, however, more properly (I think) interpret it
atatis mensuram ; a sense surely far more suitable; the admoni-
tion being directed against excessive anxiety as to food and
clothing ; which while they Lave a necessary connection with the
preservation of life, can have nothing in common with stature.
j According to the latter interpretation, then, the argument is most
forcible and conclusive, to show the uselessness of man's care, by
the helplessness of his condition ; because no care of man, how-
ever anxious, can materially add to the age of man. fifjxvs, like
other measures of extent, is not unfrequently applied to duration
of time." See Ps. 39 : 5, (B. V.), " Behold, thou hast made my
days as an handbreadth." Heb., ia^ fwns rTinsrs n;n Sym-
machus, ws vm.d'afias e'Sfoxas TS rjftegas fiov. Watts has
well paraphrased this metaphor :
"A span is all that we can boast,
An inch or two of time."
Trench, after remarking that Erasmus was the first who suggest-
ed the rendering of yfay.ia not by " stature," but by " length of
life," assigns the following reasons in favor of tbis interpretation :
" 1. That natural rhetoric of which our Lord was the great mas-
ter, He would have adduced some very small measure, and
reminded his hearers that they could not add even this to their
stature ; He would not have adduced a cubit, which is about a
foot and a half; but He would have demanded, 'Which of you
with all your carking and care can add an inch, or a hair's
breadth to his stature ? ' 2. Men do not practically take thought
about adding to their stature ; it is not an object of desire to one
in a thousand to be taller than God has made him ; this could
scarcely therefore be cited as one of the vain solicitudes of men.
On the other hand, every thing exactly fits, when we understand
our Lord to be asking this question about the length of life.
Hie cubit, which is much when compared with a man's stature, is
infinitesimally small, and, therefore, most appropriate, when com-
pared to his length of life," etc. Kuincel (on parallel, Matt.
3 : 27) : " Nostro loco fjltxia setatem, vite cursum notat, est
snim sermo de re, quam avide desiderare homines solent, et in
praecedentibus dictum est de cura vitis et carports; de posteriori
agit v. 28, de priori ergo v. 27, ad vitam vero sustentaudum, cor-
pus, que vestiendum, nib.il facit staturas incrementum." The E. V.
renders the word by " age," John 9 : 21, 23, and Heb. 11 Ml ;
and by " stature," Matt. 6 : 27. Luke 2 : 52 ; 12 : 25 ; 19 : 3.
Eph. 4 M3, which are the only instances in which it occurs, in
the N. T.
11 " ye can not ; " ovre SvvdoS-e. M., Kend., Thorn., Norton,
Dick., Wakef, Camp., Sawyer, Thelwall. This rendering of the
erb, before an infinitive, is more concise and accordant with our
isus loquendi, while it is equally accurate with that of the E. V.
"do." Here "do" is italicized (as by Wesley) on the ground
hat Ttoitiv is not ex-pressed, in the text, but understood. Bos
noiEiv, p. 403) : "Apud Lucam in Evang. 12 : 26, El ovv ovre
la%iotov Suva.ad-E (sc. motav). Si igitur ne minimum ijuidem
possitis (facere)." Eob. (Lex., Svvufiai) : "Absolutely, or with
,n infin. implied and readily suggested by the context, e. g. Matt.
16 : 3. Mark 6 : 19, etc."
" what is least ; " ll&^iorov. M. This word may be ren-
lered " least thing." Still, as readers would frequently emphasize
thing," rather than " least," the first rendering .is preferable, and
ias the advantage of conciseness.
144
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XII.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
that thing which is least, why take
ye thought for the rest ?
27 Consider the lilies how they
grow : they toil not, they spin
not ; and yet I say unto you, that
Solomon in all his glory was not
arrayed like one of these.
28 If then God so clothe the
grass, which is to-day in the field,
and to-morrow is cast into the
oven ; how much more will he clothe
you, ye of little faith ?
29 And seek not ye what ye
shall eat, or what ye shall drink,
neither be ye of doubtful mind.
80 For all these things do the
nations of the world seek after :
and your Father knoweth that ye
have need of these things.
31 But rather seek ye the king-
GREEK TEXT.
Svvacrde., T'L Trepl TWV Aoi-
nfj.va.Te; z7 KaTavor)(raTe
TO, Kpiva, Trots av^dvet- ov KOTTLO.,
ovde vrjdef Ae'yo) 8e vjjuv, ov8e
SoA.ofj.wv ev Trcwrrj rij So^jj au-
ToC TrepiefidXeTO <as ev TOVTWV*
28 el 8e TOV \opTOV ev T(J> dyp<
a~f]fj.epov OVTO., KOL avpipv els
KXifiavov fiaXXofJievov, 6 Oeos
OVTCOS dfj.(j)ievvvo-i } TTOCTCC [j.dXXov
vfj.ds, oAiyoTTicrroc; 29 K.CU u/xet?
\>-~ 'JL' *//
fj,rj (jrjTeiTe TL (pa'yr)T ) 77 TL 7rir)T'
Kal P.TI /j.eT(api^e<T0e. raura
yap irdvTO. TO. edvr] TOV KOCT/XOU
VfJ.cav -8e o TraTrjp oiSev
Te TovTcav. 31 TrXrjv
Tt]V /Sao-tAet'aj/ roO Oeov,
a
OTL
REVISED VERSION.
least, why q are you anxious for
the rest ? Consider the lilies 2:
how they grow : they toil not,
r nor 'spin ; yet I say to you,'
"even Solomon in all his glory
was not arrayed like one of
these. T But, if God so "cloth- 28
eth the grass which to-day is
in the field, and . to-morrow is
cast into *an oven ; how much
more will he clothe you, ye
of little faith! And "seek ye 29
not what ye shall eat, or what
ye shall drink, 'nor "be in
anxious suspense. For all these so
things the nations of the world
b are seeking after"; and your
Father knoweth that c ye need
these things. But rather 4 seek 31
the kingdom of God, and all
" are ye anxious ; " fte^ifivare. Thomson, Penn, Scarlett,
Norton, Dick., Camp., Sawyer, Kend., M. See ch. 10 : 41, note.
1 " nor ; " ovSe. Thomson, Penn, Scarlett, Sharpe. See ch.
8 : 17, note.
" " spin ; " vtfd-st. Sharpe, Scarlett. There is no necessity
for nsing " do " with this verb, as vri&ei. is no more emphatic
than
' " that." This word is unnecessarily introduced in the E. V.
before- " Solomon." In the parallel, Matt. 6 : 29, oil occurs be-
fore ovS's Solofiiuv, and is there properly represented by " that"
in the E. V.
u " even not ; " ovSe. These words, the equivalents of oi/Ss,
are separated, according to the general usage.
T "But, if;" si Ss. Gray (note on Angus), Penn, Thelwall.
" If then " is the appropriate equivalent of el ovv, as at the com-
mencement of v. 26. Bob. (Lex.,- /, III : 1, c) : "El Se, where Ss
has its usual adversative, or continuative power, but if, and if."
So (E. V.) Matt. 12 : 7, 28. Mark 11 : 26. Luke 11 : 20. John
10 : 38 ; 18 : 23. Acts 5 : 39 ; 18 : 15 ; 19 : 39. Eom. 3:5;
11 : 6, etc. Vulg., Mont, Eras., !' si autem ; " De Wette, " "Wenn
aloer."
w " clotheth ; " afitpi&wvat. See ch. 4 : 3, note.
1 "an oven;" xiiflcotov. This noun is anarthrous. So Thorn.,
Norton, "Wakef., Gray (on Angus).
i " seek ye not." This is the natural order of the sentence.
So Kend., M. The inversion of the E. V. originated in Cran-
mer's " ask not ye."
1 " nor." See ch. 8 : 17, note. Thorn., Dick., Angus, M.
" be in anxious suspense ; " ficTscopl&od-e (anaj Zeyo/f.).
Angus, M. Marg. of E. V., " live not in anxious suspense." Rob;
(Lex., in verbo) : " In N. T. pass., or mid., ' to be in suspense, to
be of doubtful mind,' fluctuating between hope and fear." "Bloomf.
(N. T., in loco] '. " Meaning, ' Be not anxiously fluctuating be-
tween hope and fear, as to the supply of your daily wants.'
MeTecoqi^. signifies properly (literally) to be lifted on high:
being used especially of vessels tossed aloft at sea, and then de-
pressed to its very depths ; an apt image of anxiety." Horace,
Ep. I : 18, 109, 110 :
" proviso; frugis in annum
Copia ; neu fluitem duliiae spe penflulus horse."
Kuincel : " (Dicitur) de flicctuatione animi, inter spent metumque
dubii aigue suspensi, de Us, qui animo sollicito, suspenso, dubio i
sunt, ut metaphora petita sit a navibus, quas vento et fluctibus in
alto jactantur."
b " are seeking after ; " Inet&ta. This rendering is a literal
expression of the 'present tense of the Greek. It brings out the
thought with proper accuracy and force. Greene (Gram;, p. 9) :
" The essential time signified by the present and imperfect tenses
is that of a continued, or habitually repeated action." j&ri, in
composition here, is intensive, hence " seeking after," not " seek-
ing."
c " ye need ; " j^gere. Wesley, Scarlett, Camp., Sawyer,
Wakef., Kend., Thelwall. " To have need " is an ordinary ren-
dering of exeiv xgelav, in the E. V. See Matt. 3 : 14. Mark
25 ; 11 : 3. Luke 9 : 11 ; 15 : 7 ; 19 : 31. John 13 : 29.
is rendered simply to need (B. T.) Luke 11 : 8. 2 Cor.
1. It should be so in Matt. 6 : 32. Eom. 16 : 2, which (with
Luke 12 : 30, and the passages already cited) comprise all the
cases where it occurs. . . '
" seek ; " fyjTeiTs. " Ye," which occurs in the E.T., is super-
fluous. It is dropped by Kend., Angus, Scarlett, Norton, Dick.,
Wakef., Sawyer, M., Thelwall. '< Ye " was copied from Wicli
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO -LUKE. CHAP. XII.
145
KINCJ JAMES' VERSION.
dom of God, and all these things
shall be added imto you.
32 Fear not, little flock ; for it
is your Father's good pleasure to
give you the kingdom.
33 Sell that ye have, and give
alms : provide yourselves bags
which wax not old, a treasure in
the heavens that faileth not, where
ao thief approacheth, neither moth
eorrupleth.
34 For where your treasure is,
there will your heart be also.
35 Let your loins be girded
about, and your lights burning ;
36 And ye yourselves like unto
men that wait for their lord, when
he will return from the wedding ;
that, when he cometh and knock-
eth, they may open unto him im-
mediately.
37 Blessed are those servants,
whom the lord when he cometh
GREEK TEXT.
V[UV.
TO.VTO. TrvTo.
32 [AT] <f)O/3oD, TO
OTI (v8oKr/crei> 6 Trarrjp
vfj.au> dovvai vfj.li> rr/is /Saa-iXttav.
ss jTa)X7/(ra.Te TO, vTra-pyovra. v/j-tav,
Kal 5ore eXer/fj-oa-vvr/v irotrjcraTG
eavrotf j3aXdvTia fj.rj 7raXaiovfj,e-
va, Orjaravpov az/e'/cAetTrrov eV rois
ovpavoiS) OTTOV KXfTrrr/s OVK eyy/-
et, ovde (rr/s Siacjjde'ipei- 3 * OTTOV
yap (<TTIV o dr)<ravpos vfj.au>,
e'/cet Kal rj Kap8ta vfj.coi> earou.
35 ' EaTcaaav vfj.a>v ai 6a-(j)vf
7repieo}(r/jLevai, KOU ol Xv^voi
ofj.otoi
TOV
Kvpiov tavTotv, Trore dvaXvo-ei e/c
rS)v ya/j.cov, iva, eXdovros Kal
Kpovcravros, evdeoos dvoi^axriv
aura. 37 iJ.aKa.pioi ol SovXot
, ovs eX0a>i> o Kvpios
REVISED VERSION.
these things 'will be added to
you. Fear not, little flock ; 32
for it is your Father's good
pleasure to give you the king-
dom. Sell your f possessions, 33
and give alms ; provide your-
selves s purses which h become
not old, 'an unfailing treasure
in the heavens, where no thief
approacheth, 'nor moth k de-
stroyeth. For where your treas- 34
ure is, there will your heart be
also. Let your loins be girded 35
about, and your 'lamps burn-
ing ; and ye "yourselves like 3fi
men waiting for their lord "to
return from the "wedding-feast ;
that when he cometh and knock-
eth, they may open to him im-
mediately. "Happy are those 37
servants, whom P their lord,
" will be added ; " TtgooTs&ijaeTcu. Thorn., Penn, Sharpe,
Norton (" will be given"), Wakef., Kend.
f " possessions ; " vitA^otna. See eh. 8 : 3, and 11 : 21, notes.
So Thorn., Dick., Kend., M.
* " purses ; " /Salavrta. So (B. V.) ch. 10 : 4. Thorn., "Wes-
ley, Penn, Norton, Dick., Camp., Wakef., Sawyer, Kend., Rob.
and Lidd. (Lexx.). Bretsch. : "Crumena, Hesych., ^akmrciov
ItaQovTcniov." In Luke 10 : 4 (E. V.) ; 22 : 35, 36, this word is
properly distinguished from nrf^a, which signifies a bag. See ch.
9 : 3, note. Beza, Kuinoel, " crumenas."
h " become not old ; " ftrj mcd.tuovft.sva. Bob. (Lex., in verbo),
Sawyer. Revision of Hebrews, 1 : 11. " Wax," in the sense of
" become," is obsolete.
1 " an unfailing treasure ; " -d-rjaav^ov arsnieiytrov. Sharpe,
Kend., Gray (note on Angus). Rob. (Lex., avixfatjtTos), "unfail-
ing." This adjective can be most appropriately rendered by the
Eng. participial adjective. This is not the case with the participle
itahaiovfteva, in the first member of the sentence, as we have no
single word corresponding to it, and must ex necessitate rei, render
it by the relative and verb.
1 " nor ; " ovB's. M., Kend., Angus, Penn, Sharpe, Scarlett,
Dick., Sawyer. See ch. 8 : 17, note.
k " destroyeth ; " Stay&elfet. So (E. V.) Rev. 8:9; 11 : 18.
Norton, Dick., Sawyer. Rob. (Lex., in verbo) : " To destroy ut-
terly." The sense is not that of corroding, or eating away gradu-
ally, but (with Sta intensive] that of ruining, or destroying.
i " lamps ; " t.v-fvoi. Thorn., Wesley, Penn, Sharpe, Scarlett,
Norton, Dick., Camp., Wakef., Angus. See ch. 11 : 33, note.
Rob. (Lex., Iv'/pos, in loco), " lamps."
11 " yourselves " is a supplement.
m " to return ; " mots dvcdvaei. Scarlett. This rendering is
adopted oa the ground that it harmonizes with our usus loquendi,
while that of the E. V. unnecessarily introduces a Greek idiom into
the text. If it is deemed important to retain that idiom, it may
be modified for the better, if we say, " when he shall return."
" Cometh " is incorrect, as " the idea of returning home is im-
plied." Rob. (Lex., &va).va>}. The phraseology of the E. T.
originated in that of the Vulgate, " quando revertatur." The
latter is, however, more correct than the first, inasmuch as rever-
tatur signifies " he may return," not, " he will come." Kuineel
(in loco) : " Dominum redeuntem."
" " wedding-feast ; " ya/j.cov. Rob. (Lex., ya/ttog) : " Specially,
the wedding-feast, marriage-festival, which continued seven days ;
see Judges 14 : 12. Tobit 11 : 19."
" Happy ; " fiaxa^ioi. See ch. 1 : 45, note. Thorn., Wes-
ley, Scarlett, Norton, Camp., Wakefield, Kendrick, M. Iber.,
" felices."
P " their lord ; " o xvpios. Kend., Sawyer, Murdock. Thorn.,
Norton, Dick., Camp., " their master." The E. V., by using the
article " the," and beginning " lord " with a capital, makes this
language refer directly to Christ ; whereas in fact the phrase is
a part of the " parable." The explanation .commences at v. 40-
146
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XII.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
shall find watching : verily, I say
unto you, that he shall gird him-
self, and make them to sit down
to meat, and will come forth and
serve them.
38 And if he shall come in the
second watch, or come in the third
watch, and find them so, blessed
are those servants.
39 And this know, that if the
good man of the house had known
what hour the thief would come,
he would have watched, and not
have suffered his house to be
broken through.
40 Be ye therefore ready also :
for the Son of man cometh at an
hour when ye think not.
41 Then Peter said unto him,
Lord, speakest thou this parable
unto us, or even to all ?
42 And the Lord said, Who
then is that faithful and wise
GREEK TEXT.
(ret yprj-yopovvTas. a.jj.r]v Ae'yct)
OTL TT pL^cdcreTcu KCU. ava-
avrovs, KCU. trapeXdcov 810.'
f 3 ~ 3Q \ ) \ JA f\
Kovr/crei avroLs. /cat eav eAar)
eV Trj SevTepa 0vAa/ci7, KCU eV rfj
773/7-77 0vAa/c?7 e'A#]7, KCU fvpy
OVTCO, fAciKapLOL eicriv ol 8ov\OL
' - 39 ~ ?>* '
KLVOi. TOVTO O yLlHOCTKeTf,
OTL ei ySei o oiKoSecrTTOTr/f irola
capo, 6 /cAeTrrT?? ep^erat, ey/JTiyo-
pr/crei' civ, /cat owe av d(j)7JKe 810-
\ ? > 40 >
pvyr/vctL TOV OLKOV avTov. /cat
u/iet? ofiv yivecrde erot/tof OTL y
copa ov 5oKetre,- 6 vios TOV a.v-
Opanrov epytTctL. 41 Elite 8e
avTca 6 TZerpor, Kvpie, Trpos
rjfjLcl? Trjv TrapafioXrjv ravTijv Ae'-
* \ v ' 42 7-1?
yets, 77 /cat 71750? TravTas; Jbnre
8e 6 KvpLOs, Tis apa ecrTiv o
TTLCTTOS o'lKOVOp-OS KCU.
REVISED VERSION.
when he cometh, shall find
watching : 'truly, I say to you,
that 'he will gird himself and
"make them recline at table,
and 'will come and serve them.*
And if he shall, come in the 38
second watch, or shall come in
the third watch, and find them
"doing thus, "happy are those
servants. And this ye know, 39
that if *the master of the house
had known what hour the thief
would come, he would have
watched, and not have suffered
his house to be broken through.
Be ye therefore ready also ; 40
y for in an hour when ye think
not, the Son of man coirieth.
'And Peter said to him. Lord, 41
speakest thou this parable to
us, or "also to all Bothers? And 42
the Lord said, Who, then, is
c the faithful and wise steward,
Hence 6 is used in place of the possessive pronoun (see ch. 6 : 1,
note), and "lord" (without a capital) conforms to that, and in
v. 36. So M. has "lord." Compare v. 43, 6 xvgtos, (B. V.),
" his lord."
" truly ; " aftrjv. See ch. 4 : 24, note.
r " he will gird ; " n^i^diaeta.!.. M., Thorn., Wesley, Penn
Scarlett, Sharpe, Norton, Dick., Camp., "Wakef., Sawyer.
1 " make them recline ; " avaxhvet. See ch. 7 : 36, note.
" will come ; " aaQtd.&a>v. Thomson, M., "Wesley, Norton,
Sawyer, Kend. As an alternative, " will draw near." See Bob.
(Lex., rtagexofiai).
" doing thus ; " OVTCO. As OVTCO refers to the act of watch-
ing (ygrjyoQovivas, v. 37), the supplement " doing" renders the
sentence complete both in form and signification. It is demanded
by our usus loquendi. OVTCO is rendered, as it usually is in the
E. V., by " thus." So in v. 43, we have itoiovtrca. OVTCOS, (E.V.),
" BO doing."
T " happy ; " fiaxayioi. See v. 37, note.
w " ye know j " ywcooxsTe. The imperative and indicative of
this verb in the second person plural have the same form. It is
rendered as an indicative by Wakef., G. and A. Camp., Penn,
Norton, M., Bengel. As an alternative rendering, " But know
this."
1 " the master of the house ; " 6 olxoSsarco-njs. So (E. V.)
Matt. 10 : 25. Luke 13 : 25 ; 14 : 21. Wesley, Penn, Scarlett,
Sharpe, Norton, Camp., Kend., Angus, Thelwall, M. Tt is to be j
regretted that the fine old Anglo-Saxon term used by Tyndale,
" the good man of the house," has become obsolete.
i " for in an hour ; " on rj cSqa. This is the order of the text,
There is no necessity for abandoning it. It is equally perspicu-
ous, and more forcible than that of Tyndale, copied by the E. V.
So Wiclif, Kheims, Syriae, Yulg., Evas., Beza, Goschen, Schott,
Thorn., Peun, Norton, Dick., Wakef., Sawyer, Murdock, M. 'Ev
is rendered literally here. See note on &, v. 46. So Wesley,
Wakef., Peun, Norton, Sawyer.
""And;" Se. Penn, Sharpe, Sawyer. Iber., "i;" Belgic,-
" ende." Heb. N. Test., T
." also ; " y.ai. Wesley, Kend., Sawyer, M., Thelwall, Murd.
De Wette, " auch ; " S. Fr., " aussi ; " Iber., " tambien ; " Dan.,
" ogsaa."
b " others ? " This supplement renders the sentence complete,
according to our usus loquendi; and brings out the thought
distinctly.
" the ; " 6. Penn, Sharpe, Thorn., Camp., Kend., Angus,
Thelwall. Greene (Gram., p. 203) : " The article is never used iu
the New Testament as a demonstrative or relative pronoun."
Scholefield, p. 7 : " Our translators appear to me to have tre-
quently erred in rendering the article by the pronoun this, or tluit.
In no case can it be accurately rendered so; 'though there are
instances in which the license may be admitted for the suke of
perspicuity." It will hardly be supposed that perspicuity de-
mands the license in the present instance. De Wette, " der ; " G>
and S. Fr., " le ; " Iber., " el ; " Belg., " de."
THE GOSPEL ACCOKDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XII.
. KING JAMES' VERSION.
steward, whom his lord shall make
ruler over his household, to give
them their portion of meat in due
season ?
* 43 Blessed that servant, whom
his lord when he cometh shall find
so doing.
44 Of a truth I say unto you,
that he will make him ruler over
all that he hath. .
45 But and if that servant say
in his heart, My lord delayeth his
coming ; and shall begin to beat
the men-servants, and maidens,
and to eat and drink, and to be
drunken ;
46 The " lord of that servant
will come in a day when he look-
etli not for him, and at an hour
when he is not aware, and will
cut him in sunder, and will ap-
point him his portion with the
unbelievers.
GREEK TEXT.
bv /caraerrTytret o Kvpiof TTL
depaTreia? aurov, TOV SiSova.1 ei>
TO
6 SovXos eKtivos, ov
o Kvptos avTOV evpr]o~ei TTOLOVVTOL
OVTOOS- aXi]6S>s Aeyo
OTL eiri Tram TOI?
avTov Karao-Tyo-et, avrov. 45
Se eiTrr) 6 SovXo? e/cetyo? eV rfj
KapSta avTov, Xpovit^i 6 Kvpio?
fjiov ep^eardaf teal apgijrai TV-
TTTtlV TOVS TTOi8aS KCU TO.? TTatSt-
cr/caf, o-0Lti> re /cat Ttivuv /cat
fj.edvo-KfO'da.r 4G rf^ei o
TOV SovXou
77 ov
/cat v capo. 17 ov yiva>-
cr/cer /cat diXpTO^rjcrei OLVTOV, /cat
TO /J.fpOS Ct.VTOV /J.TO. TCOV OLTTi-
REVISED VERSION.
whom his lord ""will set over
his household to give them their
'portion of food in due season?
f Happy is that servant, whom 43
his lord, when he cometh, shall
find g doing thus. ""Truly, I say 44
to you, that 'he will set him
over all his 'possessions. k But, 45
if that servant 'shall say in his
heart, My lord delayeth m to
come ; and shall begin to beat
the men-servants, and "maid-
servants, and to eat and drink,
and "be drunken ; the lord of 46
that servant will come in a day
when he looketh not for him,
and p in an hour 'which 'he
knoweth not, and "will cut him
in pieces, and 'appoint him his
portion with the "unfaithful.
d " will set ; " xa-raoTijaei. Peun, Sharpe, Scarlett (" shall
set"), Camp., Wakef., Kend., Angus, M. Belg., "zal zetten ;"
S. Fr., " etablira ; " Iber., " p'ondra ; " Eras., Beza, " constituet ; "
Schott, " praficiet ; " Dan., " skal sotte." Bob. (Lex., xa&iorrifit
" Uum ace. et enl cum gen., to set one over any thing." So
(E. V.) xaTeorqoas, " didst set."
" portion of food ; " airofth^iov. " Meat," in the generic
sense of victuals, is obsolete. " Food " is the rendering of Thorn.,
Wesley, Penn, Norton, Angus, Dick., Sawyer, Kend.
f " Happy ; " uaxayios. See ch. 1 : 45, note.
5 "doing thus;" noiovvra OVTCOS. Scarlett ("doing so").
The order of the. text is preferable to that of the E. V. See
v. 38, note. Wiclif's rendering (copied by Tyndale and E. V.)
originated in the language of the Vulgate, " ita faeientcm."
11 " Truly ; " aty<s. Sharpe, Camp., Sawyer, Thelwal!, M.
So (E. V.) Matt. 27': 54. Mark 15 : 39. " Verily " is obsolete.
1 " he will set ; " xaraaTijasi.. See v. 42, note.
J " possessions ; " vna^ovaiv. See ch. 8 : 3, and 11 : 21,
notes.
k "But, if;" 'Ear 8s. Thorn., Wesley, Sharpe, Penn, Scar-
lett, Wakef., Sawyer, Angus, Kend., M., Thelwall. In conformity
with the punctuation of Wakef., Penn, and Scarlett, a comma is
placed after " but."
' " shall say ; " etjtfl. Penn. This aorist subj. has the force
of the future. Kiihner, Gram., 257, 1 (a). Bob. (Lex., av).
m " to come ; " sgxeod-tu. Scarlett, Sawyer. Belgic, " te
komen ; " De Wette, " zu kommen ; " G. and S. Fr., " a veuir."
The literal rendering is preferred, as it does not violate our usus
" maid-servants ; " jtatSiaxae. Thomson, Penn, M. I copy
the note on this word from the Kevision of Mark, ch. 14 : 66 :
" of the maid-servants ; riov nmSiaxcov. Wakef., Pechy, Thorn.,
Camp., Dick. The correlative TtaZs is a common term for ' a
man-servant.' See (E. V.) Matt, 8:6, 13. Luke 7 : 7, etc.
Bretseh., ' ancitta, serai.' ' Maid ' is too general. Comp. Galat.
4 : 22, 23, 30, 31.".
" be drunken ; " fis&voxead-ai. " To," before " be," is super-
fluous. It is omitted by Wesley, Scarlett, Penn, Norton, Camp.
It may be proper to remark here, that "drunken" is no longer
used as the participle of " drink." Webster (Diet.) : " In modern
usage, drank has taken its place ; and drunk is now used chiefly
as an adjective." Though the phraseology of the E. V. is retain-
ed, I suggest as an alternative rendering, " become drunk."
P " in ; " Iv. So this preposition is properly rendered in the
preceding member of the sentence (IvTjfifya). The translation
should be uniform. So Sharpe, Wakef., Norton, Angus. Uni-
formity has been observed in G. and S. Fr., Span., Iber., Diodati,
Ital., Dan. So the parallel, Matt. 24 : 50, tv cugq % ov yivcoaxsi,
(E. V.)," in an hour," etc.
9 " which ; " I (dat. by attrac.). Thorn., M., Thelwall.
' " he knoweth ; " yivtooxei. Wesley, Penn, Angus, M.
" will cut in pieces ; " Sixorofitfaei. Bob. (Lex., in verbo) :
" In N. Test, tropically to cut in pieces, to punish severely." Com-
pare Matt. 24 : 50, 51, and 25 : 30. The reference is to a pun-
ishment among ancient nations. See 1 Sam. 15 : 33. 2 Sam.
12 : 31.
t The auxiliary "will" (before "appoint") is superfluous.
Omitted in the parallel (E. V.), Matt. 24 : 51, and by Thomson,
Wesley, Scarlett, Wakef., Penn.
" "unfaithful;" cmio-ciov. This is obviously antithetic to
148
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XII.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
47 And that servant which
knew his lord's will, and prepared
not himself, neither did according
to his will, shall be beaten with
many stripes.
48 But he that knew not, and
did commit things worthy of
stripes, shall be beaten with few
stripes. For unto whomsoever
much is- given, of liim shall be
much required ; and to whom men
have committed much, of him they
will ask the more.
49 I am come to send fire on
the earth, and what will I, if it
be already kindled ?
50 But I have a baptism to be
baptized with ; and how am I
straitened till it be accomplished !
GREEK TEXT.
drjcrei. 'Eiteivos 8$ o Sov-
Xos o yvovs TO 6eXr/[jia TOV Kvpiov
eavTOV, KOU fj.r) eVot/uacra? fJ.rjSe
Trpbs TO 6eXr//jia O.VTOV,
TToAAaf i8 o Se p.rj
yvovs, TTOi^cray Se agia TrXr/yoiv,
Sapr/o~eT(u oXiyas. iravri 8e a>
e860rj TroXv, iroXv
Trap avToi)' KOI a>
picrcroTepov a.iTr)o~ovo~iv
>q ___^ S 1 \ /i /\ \ **
llvp r/Xaov paXeiv
TTJV yrjv, Kal TI deXco; d rjSr/
50
Ka 7n?
BEVISED VERSION.
And that servant who knew 47
his lord's will, and prepared
'not, "nor did according to his
will, "will. be beaten with many
stripes. But he who knew *it 48*
not, and did things worthy of
stripes, will be beaten with
few. 1 "For from every one to
whom much is given, much will
be required ; and h from him to
whom men have committed
much, they will ask the more.
C I came to send fire on the 49
earth, and d what do I desire?
'Would that it were already
kindled ! But I have f an im- 50
mersion B to be immersed with,
h and how am I distressed till
nto*bs, in v. 42. Thorn., Wesley, Penn, Dick., Kend., Angus,
M. See Kob. (Lex., amaros).
" The supplement "himself," after "not" (E. V.), is superflu-
ous. It is omitted by M., Wesley, Penn, Dick, Angus.
w " nor ; " /njSe. Kend., M., Thorn., Thelwall, Penn, Norton,
Dick., Camp., Sawyer, Angus. See ch. 8 : 17.
* " will bo beaten ; " Sa^jasrai, Norton, Wakef., M.
y " it." There is an obvious reference to &sitjfia in yvo
and this authorizes the use of " it," as a supplement. The supple-
ment is demanded by our idiom ; the preceding verse (where
" will " is found) being closed with a period. Thus Thorn., Penn,
Camp., Norton, Dick., M. S. Fr., " 1' ; " Iber., " la."
* "stripes" (supplementary), after "few" (E. V.), is dropped
as unnecessary. So Thorn., Wesley, Norton, Wakef., Campbell,
Sawyer, Thelwall.
* " For from every one to whom much is given, much will be
required ; " navti Se y eSo&q Ttol.v, fyrijtyijoeTai Krt(> avrov,
This arrangement, while it is exact in presenting the thought of
the text, is more perspicuous than that of the E. "V. So Thorn.,
Penn, Norton, M. On nairti., Bloomfield (UT. Test.) remarks :
" This is not, as Winer imagines, a dative absolute, but is put for
navros, being accommodated, by attraction, to (]>." In other
words, it has the force of naga na.vros.
b " from him to whom men have committed much ; " <l rtage-
devto nolv. M. This member of the sentence should corre-
spond with that which precedes it. See last note. As the nomi-
native of itaged'evro is not expressed, " men " is italicized.
" I came ; " rf.S'ov. Norton, Wakef., Camp., Kend. See
ch. 4 : 34, note.
d "what do I desire?" tl &elco; Jr. This position of the
interrogation point corresponds with that of the text. Scarlett,.
" what do I wish ? " Wnkef., " what will I ? " There seems to
be no necessity for departing from the usual sense of &e).a>, in
the indicative. The verb is rendered " desire " (E. Y.) Mark
9 : 35. Luke 5 : 39 ; 8 : 20 ; 10 : 24 ; 23 : 8, etc.
" Would that it were already kindled ! " cl ijd-i;
M. Scarlett and Angus, " Oh, that it were already kindled ! "
On the entire sentence, tl &).<o; el rj&ri avfo&r}, Trollope
(Analecta) remarks : " The commentators have experienced no
little difficulty in interpreting these words." " But that a wish is
intended to be expressed is sufficiently evident from the cor-
responding clause in the very next verse ; and it is, therefore,
preferable to render the particle by utinam." " The import of tho
passage is this : ' Since the advancement of true religion must ba
attended by such unhappy divisions and persecutions, I can not
but wish that they, together with my passion, which must precede
them, had already taken place.' " On the sense of tl, in this
passage, the following extract is made from a note in the Eevis.
of Mark (16 : 44) : " Eob. (si] quotes this passage in illustration
of a peculiar usage as to el, and renders it by that." According
to this usage, " it is spoken of things not merely possible, but cer-
tain, and dependent on no condition. This is especially the case
after verbs expressing emotion. Buttm., 139, m. 60." It may
be added that Kob. quotes the passage in question as one of his
illustrations. Acts 26 : 8, tl; antarov y.giverai nag i>/iTv si
(that) 6 0sos vsxgovs cysi^si; In view of this passage from
Acts, I suggest the following alternative rendering, " What do I
wish ? that it were already kindled ! " As an illustration, el =
utinam, see Sept., Joshua 7 : 7, tl nare/tewa/iev v.al xateyxia&r]-
v, " would that we had remained and dwelt," etc., where it
is equivalent to sfc, " that, would that." Gesen. (Lex.) : " Job
6 : 2, el y ? -rts (:)," " that one."
f " an immersion ; " /Sdmtafia. See ch. 3 : 3, note. Kend.,
A. Camp. De Wette, " eine Taufe ; " Iber., " una immersion ; "
Dan., " eu Daab ; " Ital., " una immersione ; " Belg., " eenen doop."
E " to be immersed with ; " ^aniiad-T t vat. See ch. 3 : 7, note.
To obviate the use of an idiom which belongs to the Hebraistic
Greek, " to undergo" (as Kend.) may be properly substituted for
this phrase. So De Wette, " zu iiberstehen , " Iber., " de experi-
mentar."
h " and I distressed ; " ovve%a(iat.. Kend., Wakefield, Eob.
THE GOSPEL ACCOEDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XII.
149
KING JAMES' VERSION.
51 Suppose jo that I am come
to give peace on earth? I tell
you, Nay ; but rather division :
52 For from henceforth there
shall be five in one house divided,
three against two, and two against
three.
53 The father shall be divid-
ed against the son, and the son
against the father ; the mother
against the daughter, and the
daughter against the mother ;
the mother-in-law against her
daughter-in-law, and the daughter-
in-law against her mother-in-law.
54 And he said also to the peo-
ple. When ye see a cloud rise out
of the west, straightway ye say,
There cometh a shower ; and so
it is.
55 And when ye see the south
GEEEK TEXT.
ecas ov TeXecrdfj ; 51 doKelre on
eiprjvrjv 7rape-/evofjirjv Sovvai ev
rrj yfj; ov)(t, Xfyco vfj.lv, AA' T)
52 e<rovrai yap
diro TOV vvv -rrevre ev o'iK<g> evl
Siafj.e/j.e'piarfJLevot, Tpets em dvcri.,
KCU SvO Cm TpUTl. 53 SiafJ,plCT0r]-
a-erau Trarrjp e(j) via>, KCU vlo?
em Trarpi- ftr/T^p em dvyarpi,
K.ai 6v/a.Trjp em /j.rjTpi- irevOepa
em TTJV vvfj.(f)tjv avrfjs, /ecu vv/j.<prj
em rr/v irevdepav avrfjs.
54 "JS\ey de Kal roif o^Aozy,
' Orav 'iSrjre TTJV ve(f)e\rjv dva-
TeXkovaav a7ro Svcrfjuav, evdeaif
Ae'yere, ' Ofj,(Bpos ep^erai- /cat
t ff 55 \ ef /
OVTO>. K.O.I orav VOTOV
REVISED VERSION.
it is accomplished ! 'Think ye 51
that I came to give peace on
the earth ? I tell you, nay ;
but rather division : for 'hence- 52
forth there "will be five in one
house divided, three against
two, and two against three.
"Father will be divided against 53
son, and son. against father ;
mother against daughter, and
daughter against mother; moth-
er-in-law against her daugh-
ter-in-law, and daughter-in-law
against her mother-in-law. And 54
he said also to the crowds,
When ye see "the cloud "rising
"from the west, immediately ye
say, A shower q is coming ; and
so it 'eometh, to pass. And 55
when *ye perceive the south wind .
(Lex., owfyio) : " Pass., to be distressed." Lidd. (Lex.). Bretsch.
(m loco) : " Quam vehementer angor." The verb " to straiten "
is obsolete.
1 " is accomplished ! " td.eaS'fj, Kendrick. Present usage
demands " is."
' " Think ye ; " Soxstre. Sharpe, Penn, Norton, Scarlett,
Wakef., Keud., Tbelwall, M. So often in E. V. See Rob. (Lex.,
Soxeco) .
k " henceforth ; " nxo rov vvv. Thorn., Norton, "Wakefield,
Rend., Thehvall, M. " From " is useless here, and " from hence-
forth " entirely wrong. There is an ellipsis ; xgovov being under-
stood. Bob. (Lex., vvv).
i " will be ;" eaovrat. See ch. 1 : 13, note. Thorn., Sharpe,
Penn, Norton, Scarlett, Wakef., Camp., Dick., Kend., M.
" " Father ; " nati;^. This word is anarthrous, as well as the
nouns which follow it, vlru (son), vlos (son), nargl (father),
fir/Tijp (mother), \hiyaT^l (daughter), firp-gi (mother), nev&EQa
(mother-in-law), and vvfty.t/ (daughter-in-law). The insertion of
' the " before the words diminish the force of the language.
Hence a literal rendering is preferable the article of the E. V.
being dropped. So Thorn., Sharpe, Camp., Kend., M., Pechy
(note on Angus).
" the cloud ;" triv veyll.riv. Thorn., Norton, M., Gray (note
on Angus), Thelwall, M. S. Fr., " la nuee ; " Iber., " la nube ; "
Ital., " la nube ;"" De Wette, " die Wolken." Tliis language
alludes to a well known phenomenon which his hearers had often
witnessed. Hence the use of the article. See 1 Kings 18 : 43-4").
Home's Introd., Vol. 2, p. 24 : " Very small clouds are the fore-
runners of violent storms in the Enst as well as in the West ;
they rise like a man's hand (1 Kings 18 : 44) until the whijle sky
becomes blank with rain, which descends in torrents, that rush
down the steep hills, and sweep every thing before them. In our
Lord's times, this phenomenon seems to have become a certain
prognostic of wet weather." This author refers to the passage
before us. See Iliad. IV : 275-279. Greene (Greek N. Test.,
p. 148), after noticing the use of the article with " words signify-
ing objects, or phenomena of nature which exist singly, and entire
natural substances," quotes Luke 12 : 54, and says: "Ntyelrfv
has the article, because it is here used to signify the particular
cloud of singular conformation, which in those countries is the
immediate forerunner of a considerable fall of rain."
" rising : " a.vtt.riU.ovaa.v. Thorn., Wesley, Sharpe, Penn,
Norton, Wakef., Camp., Kend, Angus, M., Thelwall, Murdock,
Wiclif, Eheims.
" from ; " a.no. Thorn., Penn, Norton, Wakef., Dick., Kend.,
Wiclif, Eheims. The rendering of the E. V., " out of" (= J)
taken from Tyndale, is not exact.
^ " is coming ; " %grc. The progressive form of the Eng 1 .
verb corresponds with the radical sense of the Greek present, and
also with our usus loqitendi. Murdock, Thorn., Sharpe, Penn,
Scarlett. See v. 30, note.
r " it cometh to pass ; " yivsrai. So this verb is rendered in
the E. V., v. 55. Scarlett, Angus, Thelwall, M. Vulg., Mont.,
Eras., Beza, Casta!., Goschen, " fit ; " Belg., " het geschied ; " De
Wette, " es geschiehot ; " S. Fr., " cela arrive ; " Iber., " sucede ; "
Dan., "dot skew."
" ye perceive." Scarlett. This supplement is required by our
usus loquendi, instead of " ye see," which can not be properly used
when " wind " is the object. ISqre is supposed to be understood
here ; it may be properly represented by " ye perceive," as it is
employed to indicate perception by tJie senses, generally. Wesle?
has, " ye find."
150
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XII.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
wind blow, ye say, There will be
lieat ; and it cometh to pass.
56 Ye hypocrites, ye can dis-
cern the face of the sky, and of
the earth ; but how is it, that ye
do not discern this time?
57 Yea, and why even of your-
selves judge ye not what is right?
58 When thou goest with thine
adversary to the magistrate, as
thou art in the way, give diligence
that thou mayest be delivered
from him ; lest he hale thee to
the judge, and the judge deliver
tliee to the officer, and the officer
cast thee into prison.
59 I tell thee, thou shalt not
depart thence, till thou hast paid
the very last mite.
GREEK TEXT.
.) Aeyere, ' On Ka.vo~cav
>' \ / 56 '
ecrrar /cat -ytverai.
TOU, TO irpoarca-jrov TTJS yrjs /cat
TOV ovpavov o'lSare So/a/ia^etj/'
TOV Se tcaipov TOVTOV TT>S ov
e ; 67 T'L 8e /cat a(j)
ov Kpivere TO SiKaiov;
flS t \ t ' \ ~ >
coy -yap vTra-yei? yuera TOV O.VTL-
SLKOV <rov eV ap^ovTa, ev Trj
o8a> Sos ep-yacriav mrr/XXa^dai
a.7r avrov- [JiTjiroTe KaTao-vprj are
irpos TOV KptTrjv, /cat 6 KpiTrjs
ere 7rapa8< TO> TrpaKTOpi, /cat 6
TrpaKTcap ae j3aXXr/ els (pvXaKrjv.
59 \ ' * N3 /*'\/i s <
Aey&) crot, ou /J.TJ egeAarjf e/cet-
6ev, ecos ov KCU TO
REVISED VERSION.
'blowing, ye say, There will be
heat ; and it cometh to pass.
"Hypocrites! ye can discern the 56
face T of the earth and of the
sky ; but how is it that ye do
not discern this time? w andwhy, 57
even of yourselves, judge ye not
what is right ? When 'thou 58
art going with thiue adversary
to ?a magistrate, 1 "endeavor b on
the way e to be delivered from
him ; lest d he should drag thee
to the judge, and the judge
deliver thee up to the officer,
and the officer cast thee into
prison. I tell thee, thou f wilt 59
not come out thence, till thou .
hast paid "the very last mite.
' " blowing ; " itvsovra. Wesley, Sharpe, Perm, Scarlett,
Thelwall.
" Ye," which occurs before " hypocrites ! " in the E. V., is
superfluous. It is dropped by Thomson, Norton, Camp., Dick.,
Sawyer, Kend. The exclamation sign is placed after " hypo-
crites " by Thorn., Norton, Scarlett, Wakef., Kend., S. Fr.
T " of the earth and of the sky ; " rye yf t s y.o.1 iov ovpavov.
This is the order of the text, which was properly followed by
Tyhdale and Geneva. The Vulgate, however, having " cali et
terra," Cranmer adopted the inversion (" of the sky and of the
earth"), and was copied by the E. T. The order of the text is
adopted by Thorn., AVesley, Kend., Sharpe, Norton, Scarlett,
Dick., Sawyer, Angus, Thelwall. The reading of the Vulg. is a
corruption. The Amiatean MS. has " terra ct call,"
w " and ; " Se. Thorn., Sharpe, Penn, Camp., Dick., Sawyer,
Kend., Angus, M. " Yea " is not authorized by the text. It is
dropped in all the above cited versions, and also by Thelwall.
Nothing corresponding to it in Vulg., Mont, Eras., Beza, Castal.,
Goschen, Schott, Belg., Luther, De Wette, Dan., G. or S. Fr.,
De Sacy, Iber., Span., Diodati, Hal., Syriac, Heb. N. Test,
Eheims, "Wiclif. It was copied from Tyndale.
1 " thou art going ; " vnaysis. Thorn., Wesley, Penn, Norton,
Scarlett, Wakef., Angus, M. See v. 30, note.
i "a magistrate;" S^ovra. Norton (Sawyer, "a ruler").
A.S the noun is anarthrous, and there is nothing in the context to
make it definite, it is unnecessary to suppose that there is an
ellipsis of the article, produced by the preposition bti. Where
nouns are not linked together by conjunctions and there is no i
exigentia loci there are very few cases where we are authorized
to introduce the definite article. Jn fact, unless we translate by
an idiomatic phrase, in which " the " may be indispensable, close
adherence to the letter is preferable.
1 The supplement of the E. V.,' " as thou art," is unnecessary.
It is dropped by Thorn., Wesley, Sharpe, Penn, Scarlett, Wakef.,
Camp., Dick., Sawyer, Kendrick, Angus, Thelwall, M. It was
introduced by Tyndale.
a " endeavor ; " Sos Igyaoiav. This phrase is a Latinisra
equivalent to date operam (literally, " give labor "). See Bob.
(Lex., SiScoftt), Kuinosl (m loco}. Thorn., Scarlett, Campbell,
Kend., Angus, M.
b " on the way ; " & rJj 6Sy. Kend., Thorn., Sharpe, and
Camp. (" on the road"), Penn, Norton, Sawyer, M.
c " to be delivered ; " dityttax&at. Wesley, M., Scarlett,
Thelwall, Kend. Rendered in the ' infinitive by Sharpe, Penn,
Norton, Dick., Wakef., Angus.
d " he should drag ; " xaraovpy. Sharpe, Scarlett, Camp.,
Kend., Angus, Eobinson (Lex., in verbo). " Hale," to drag, is
superseded by " haul " in present usage. See Webster (Diet, art.
"Hale").
e " deliver thee up ; " irapaSeii. M. See ch. 9 : 44, note.
f " wilt come out ; " JleA^s. M., Sharpe, Penn, Norton,
Wakef.
E " the very last mite ; " xal TO eozarov ).eatbv. As an alter-
native rendering, the more literal expression, '' even the last mite."
So Kend., Sawyer.
THE GOSPEL AC COBBING TO LUKE. CHAP. XIIL
151
KING JAMES' VERSION.
CHAP. XIII.
THERE "were present at that
season some that told him of the
Galileans, whose blood Pilate had
mingled with their sacrifices.
2 And Jesus answering, said
unto them, Suppose ye that these
Galileans were sinners above all
the Galileans, because they suffer-
ed such things ?
3 I tell you, Nay ; but, except
ye repent, ye shall all likewise
perish.
4 Or those eighteen, upon whom
the tower in Siloam fell, and slew
them, think ye that they were sin-
ners above all men that dwelt in
Jerusalem?
5 I tell yon, Nay ; but, except
ye repent, ye shall all likewise
perish.
6 He spake also this parable :
A certain man had a fig-tree
planted in his vineyard ; and he
GREEK TEXT.
CHAP.. XIII.
HAPH2AN 8e rives ev av-
W T<5 KOLipw oara-yyeXXovTes av-
W irept T>V raXiXaicov, coi> TO
HiXaros e/ju^e /*era rS>v
vriov. 2 /cat onroKpidels
o 'Irjcrovs earev avroif, /lo/cetre,
on ol raXtXalot. ovroc.
Aoi irapa. Traz/ra? row
ovy eytvovro, on TOIO.VTO. vreTroz/-
Oacnv; 3 ov^i, Aeyo> Vfiiv aAA'
eav /AT] p.eTavor)T, Travres axrav-
TOOS aTToXeicrOe. 77 eteeti/ot o't.
p / V > \ 3 I 5 A J/ <
oe/ca KO.L OKTO, e(p ov? eTrecrev o
l> TG> SlXcoafa KOU. O.7T-
avrovf, So/cerre, on ov-
TOL ofaiXerat tyivovro Trapa TTO.V-
ras avOpasTTOvs TOVS KO.TOLKOVV-
ras ev 'lepovo-aXr//*; 5
Aeyto vfuv aAA' eav fj.r/
, TrdvTes 6/iotW arroXeio-de.
8e Tavrrjv rrjv Trapafio-
Xrji> } SVKTJV ei%e res tv rw ap.-
6 "
REVISED VERSION.
CHAP. XIII.
AND there were a some pres- l
ent, at that Hime, who told
him 'concerning the Galileans,
whose blood Pilate had ming-
led with their sacrifices. And 2
Jesus, answering, said to them,
"Think ye that these Galileans
were sinners" "above all the
Galileans, because they 'have
suffered such things? I tell 3
you, nay ; but except ye repent,
s ye will all h in like manner
perish. Or, those eighteen, on 4
whom the tower in Siloam fell,
and "killed them, think ye that
they were sinners J above all
men who dwelt in Jerusalem?
I tell you, nay ; but except ye 5
repent, ye k will all 'in like
manner perish. And he spoke
this parable : m a certain man
had a fig-tree planted in hi?.
a "some present." This is the most usual and natural arrange-
ment of the sentence, according to our usus loqucndi.
11 "time;" xcugip. Wakef., M. As the entire phrase is lv
avrcu rty xatgeji ("eo ipso tempore," Beza), it would seem that
" season " is not sufficiently definite to be the equivalent. De
Wette, " zu selbiger Zeit ; " S. Fr., " dans ce meme temps ; "
Iber., " al mismo tiempo."
c "concerning;" nepi. (cum genii.). "Wakefield. Rob. (Lex.,
xe? I) : " "When there is only a mere general reference, or allusion
to the person or thing denoted by the genitive; concerning, as to,
touching, in relation to." There is an ellipsis of the object of
- anayyeMovrss (TO n^ayfta). The idea would be expressed in
English thus, " who told him the affair (or news) concerning the
Galjieans." "Of" does not bring out the thought with proper
distinctness. Dick., " respecting."
d "Think ye;" ^oy.eire. Kend., Sharpe, Thelwall, Penn,
M., Norton, Scarlett (" do ye think"), Wakef., Camp., and Saw-
yer ( do you think"). See ch. 12 : 51, note.
" above ;" naga. (cum accus.). As an alternative rendering,
"beyond." Blooraf. (N. Test.).
* " have suffered ; " mTzovd-aaiv. Trench. Tliis author, in
Ms late work on Bible Revision, makes the following judicious
'emark on this verb : " Our Lord contemplates the memorable
catastrophe by which they perished, not as something belonging
merely to the historic past ; but as a fact reaching into the pres-
ent; still vividly presenting itself to the mind's eye of his
hearers."
E " ye will perish ; " aitofatad-e. Sharpe, Penn, M., Nor-
ton, Scarlett, Wakef., Dick., Kend., M. See ch. 1 : 13, note.
h " in like manner ; " tooavtcas. Thorn., Norton, Sawyer,
Kend., Angus, M. " Likewise" is ambiguous, as it not only signi-
fies " in like manner," but " moreover," " to." Trollope (Analect.,
'in loco) : " In like manner ; as oftoitos, in v. 5. This declaration
partakes not only of an admonition, but of a prediction which
was literally fulfilled about forty years afterward in the destruc-
tion of Jerusalem. During the siege, the temple was frequently
the seat of war, and multitudes of the priests who were offering
the sacrifices, were slain, and their blood mingled with that of the
victims." See Josephus' Jewish War, B. II, IV., V., VI.
1 " killed ; " anixrctvEv. Thorn., M., Norton, Sawyer, Angus.
i " above all men ; " Ttaqa. natnas av&^canovs. See v. 2
note e.
* " will perish ; " aTtolsZa&e. See v. 3, note g.
i " in like manner ; " bfiolcog. See v. 3, note h. Thorn., Nor-
ton, Kend., Sawyer, M., Angus.
"" " a certain man ; " rtg. As the noun is understood in the
152
THE GOSPEL AC COBBING TO LUKE. CHAP. XIII.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
came and sought fruit thereon,
and found none.
7 Then said he unto the dress-
er of his vineyard, Behold, these
three years I come seeking, fruit
on this fig-tree, and find none :
cut it down ; why cumbereth it
the ground ?
8 And he answering, said unto
him, Lord, let it alone this year
also, till I shall dig about it, and
dung it:
9 And if it bear fruit, well: and
if not, then after that thou shalt
cut it down.
10 And he was teaching in one
GREEK TEXT.
aiiTOv TretfivTev/jtevr/v /cat
r]\0e KapTrov .^TJTU>V ev avrfj, /cat
evpev. ' e'nre 8e Trpos TOV
ov, 'ISov, Tpta errj
ep-)(Ofj.at fyjTcov KapTrov tv ry
ravry, /cat ov% evpt(TKW
LVO.TL /cat rrjv
o
Xeyei avra,
/cat TOVTO TO eroy, ecoy orov ovca-
l a.vT7]v, /cat /3aA< KOirpL-
eKKO\j/ov avT-j
yr)v Ka.ra.pjii;
av 9 KO.V
et Se A"?ye, ety TO /ue'AAoz/ e/c/co-
10 '
Hv de 8i$d(TK(>v iv }ua.
REVISED VERSION.
vineyard, and he came "seeking
fruit on it, and found none.
"And "lie said q to the vine- 7
dresser, Behold, 'for three years
I come seeking fruit on this '
fig-tree, and find none : cut it
down, why 'doth it also render
the ground barren? And he, 8
answering, said to him, Lord,
let it alone this year also, till I
shall dig about it, and "manure
it: and if it beareth fruit, well 9
but if not "afterwards thou
shalt cut it down. And he 10
was teaching iu one of the
text, it is deemed most exact to italicise " man," as a supplement.
So Penn, Scarlett.
n " seeking ; " &JTIVV. So this participle is rendered in v. 7.
Wakef., Thorn., Wesley, Norton, Scarlett, Wakef., Camp., Dick.,
Sawyer, Kend., Angus, Thelwall, M.
"And ;" Se. Penn, Dick., Angus, Kend.. M.
J> " he said." This order is adopted by Thorn., Norton, Scar-
lett, Camp., Dick., Sawyer, Kend., Angus, Thehvall, M.
1 "to the vine-dresser;" ngos rbv afintkovgybv. Sharpe,
Penn, Kend., Scarlett, Camp., Thelwall.
r "for." This supplement is employed in conformity with our
idiom. There is nothing in the text corresponding to the demon-
strative " these," -which was taken from Tyndale's version, " this
three years." "Wakef., having retained the word, properly marked
it as supplementary. Though the thought would be sufficiently
obvious without the use of "for," that is, if we say, " Behold,
three years I come," still the sentence strikes the ear as something
imperfect. Wesley and Kend. have no supplement.
" doth it render the ground barren ? " -irjv yffv
Kuinoel (in loco] : "Tamen reddit sterilem, dum succos e solo
exsugit, xaragyezv respondet iaa, quod in conj. Kal, intransitive
notat otiosum esse, cessare, ut Eccles. 12 : 3, sed in conj. Piel,
transitivam signiflcationem liabente, impedire, imttilem, ineffica-
cem, otiosum reddere, id quod ariybv itocav, v. Esr. 4 : 21 ; 6:8.
Gal. 3 : 17, cum vero h. 1. de terra sermo sit, significat Karrt^ysZv
facere ut ea nihil ferat, terram reddere sterilem." 'Agybs is ap-
plied to barren, unproductive land, as in Diod. Sicul. B. 19,
cap. 42, where the historian describes the battle-field where Eu-
menes was defeated by Antigonus, Tov s itedtov nollriv evgv-
%a>(>iav etfovros, v-al ndvros vnAit-^ovros agyov SM n}t' Iv a.vr<y
Siyxovoav a).fiv(>iStt, IOOOUTOV owsfii; vnb TCOV tnne<ai> sl-aige-
ofrai Kovtogrbv . r. L As an alternative rendering, " why doth it
also render the ground useless?" as Beza, " quorsum etiam terram
inutilem reddit?" and Belg., " waar toe beslaat hij ook onnutelijk
de aarde ? " M., " has made the land unproductive ; " De Wette,
" warum macht er auch noch das Land unfruchtbar ? " S. Fr.,
" pourquoi aussi rend-il la terre inutile ? " Iber., i " para que ha
de hacer tambien el terreno infructifero ? "
' " also ; " xal. Wesley, Wakef., Kend., Thelwall, M. Vulg.,
Mont., Beza, Erasmus, Goschen, " etiam ; " Schott, " insuper ; "
Belg., " ook ; " De Wette, " auch noch ; " S. Fr., " aussi ; " Iber.,
" tambien." As the thought presented in the text is, that the
tree not only bore no fruit, bat likewise rendered the ground un-
productive, the propriety of rendering xal by " also," is obvious.
u " manure ; " /3a}.ca xongiav. Camp., M., Murdock. There
is the highest probability, that xoTtgia. (plural of xonqiov) is the
true reading. So Griesbach, Lachm., Tischend., Knapp, Theile,
Scholz, Bloomf. Kongia must, therefore, be used generically for
any articles which render a soil fertile ; in other words, it is
equivalent to " manure." A more literal rendering (though I
think not preferable to that of the text) would be, " apply
manure."
T '.' but ; " St. Wesley, Angus, Sharpe, Penn, Scarlett, Dick.,
Sawyer.
w The supplement "then" is quite unnecessary, it was copied
from Tyndale, who, however, pointed the sentence thus, " and if it
bear not then, after that, cut it down." This supplement is
omitted by Kend., Wesley, Sharpe, Penn, Scarlett, Wakef.,
Camp., Dick., Thelwall, Sawyer, M.
1 " afterwards ; " sis TO fteUof. Wakef., Camp., Kend., M.,
Penn, Scarlett. " Hereafter " can not be properly used, as it
would indicate a space of time commencing in the present ab hoc
imtanti. But the vine-dresser purposes that the experiment of
digging and manuring shall be made, and that in the result
if the tree is unfruitful then (i. e. thereafter) it shall be cut
dow'n. It may be added, that, unless in the language of juris-
prudence, " thereafter " is obsolete.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XIII.
153
KING JAMES' VERSION.
of the synagogues on. the sab-
bath.
11 And behold, there was a
woman which had a spirit of in-
firmity eighteen yeai-s, 'and was
bowed together, and could in no
wise lift up herself.
12 And when Jesus saw her, he
called her to him, and said unto
her, Woman, thou art loosed fro'm
thine infirmity.
13 And he laid his hands on
her : and immediately she was
made straight, and glorified God.
14 And the ruler of the syna-
gogue answered with indignation,
Because that Jesus had healed on
the sabbath-day, and said unto the
people, There are sis days in
which men ought to work : in
them therefore come and be heal-
ed, and not on the sabbath-day.
15 The Lord then answered
him, and said, Thou, hypocrite,
crr
GREEK TEST.
crui/aycoytoi' ev raits cr
ll /cat I8ov, yvvrj rj
a-
/cat
OKTO3
/cat rjv (Tuy/cuTrTovcra, /cat
8wa./jievr) ara/cin|rat els TO
12 IScov 5e avrrjv 6
'Iijcrovs 7rpoa-e(])c0vr)<r, /cat elirev
TVVO.I) aVoAe'Aucrat rrjs
(rov. 13 Kcu. 7re0?)Kei>
awry rap ^etpas- /cat Trapa^pTJfJLa.
dvcopdwdr), /cat e'So^a^e -TOV Oeov.
14 ' A7TOKpi.dels Se 6 apyicrvvd-
yco-yo?, a.ya.va.K.r>v on r&> <ra/3-
/3ara) edepaTrevcrev o
e'Aeye rco o^Aft),
9 \ y *F i\ ~ >>- /i
ettrty, ev aty oei epya^eaoai
rauraty odv ep^o/Jtevoi depaireve-
crde, /cat /j-r/ rij ^p-epa TOV cra/3-
lo 'ATreKpldij oiiv O,VT<
o KvpLOS, /cat iTri>, '
REVISED VERSION.
synagogues on the ''sabbath ;
And behold, there was a wo- ll
man, 'who had had a spirit of
infirmity eighteen years, and
was a bent together, and 'unable
e to raise herself up d at all. And 12
Jesus, seeing her, called her 'to
kirn, and said to her, Woman,
thou art loosed from thine in-
firmity. And he laid his hands 13
on her ; and immediately she
was made straight, and glori-
fied God. And the ruler of 1*
the - synagogue, 'being much dis-
pleased, ^because Jesus had
healed on Hhe sabbath, 'answer-
ed and said to the crowd, There
are six days in which 'it is
right to work ; in them, there-
fore, come and be healed, and
not on the sabbath-day. The 15
Lord then answered him, and
said, k Hypocrite ! doth not
J In conformity with the punctuation of the test, and the
thought which it conveys; a semicolon has been placed after
"sabbath" (Gr. odpfiaai-). Penn and Scarlett (:), Norton,
Wakef., Thorn., Camp., and Sawyer (,).
1 " who had had ; " exovaa. Wesley, Murdock, Penn (" that
had had"), Dick, ("had possessed"), Sawyer ("who had been
subject to"). Our usus loquendi demands that this participle
should be rendered by the pluperfect. We may, however (with
Kuincel), regard rp> as used for itagfjv, and modify the sentence
thus, "a woman was there (i.-e., present), who for eighteen years
had a spirit of infirmity, and was bent," etc. This is suggested
as an alternative rendering.
* " bent together ; " avyxvTtrovaa. Penn, Kend., M. Bob.
(Lex., in verbo) : "To be bent double." Bretsch. (in loco) : "^Hv
tvyxvHTovoav, intell. icarrjjv, erat prorsus incurvata, morbo."
Etymology sustains this rendering, as avv, in composition, is
often used in the sense o! quite, "wholly," prorsus. Lidd. (Lex.).
b " unable ; " fc!j Bwafisvi]. Wesley, Penn, Norton, Scarlett,
Dick., M., Angus.
" to raise herself up ; " avcocvyai. Thomson and Scarlett
("raise herself upright"), Norton and M. ("to raise tierself").
Bretsch. (in loco) : "Corpus erigo. See avto^cod-^, in v. 13.
Kuinoel: "Se erigere, caput et corpus attollere."
4 " at all ; " elg 10 itavretes. "Wakef., Angus, M., Sawyer.
So Eob. (Lex., in loco, navre^s)^ Bretsclmeider, " omnino ;"
.Kuinoel, " prorsus, omnino." This phrase is construed with ava-
mnpm, iiot with
" to Mm." See ch. 6 : 13, note.
f " being much displeased ; " ayavaxrciav. "Wesley, Scarlett,
Angus, M. So (E.T.) Matt. 21 : 15 ("sore"). Mark 10 :14, 41.
This should be the uniform rendering in the N. Test. In a
metaphorical sense, the verb signifies to be grieved, displeased,
vexed, angry. Liddell.
6 " because ; " ore. The particle " that," after " because " (in
the E. V.) is superfluous. It is dropped by Thomson, Wesley,
Sharpe, Penn, "Wakef., Camp., Dick., Angus, M.
u " the sabbath ; " rfjT aa^^dry. Sharpe, Norton, Wakef.,
Camp., Kendrick, M. The supplement " day " of the E. V. is
unnecessary here. " Day" is properly added in the next member,
where the text has ?fj i?^^ TOV oa/Spdrov. In 7. 10, lv rots
aApfSaac is rendered in the E. V., " on the sabbath." See ch.
6 : 2, note.
' " answered and said ; " axoxgtd-its eieys. This is the na-
tural order in English. It is that of Thorn., Wesley, Penn, Scar-
lett, Dick., Kend., Angus, M. The E. V. copies the arrangement
ofTyndale.
i " it is right ; " Set. Rob. (Lex., Set) ; " (Spoken) of what is
right, or prescribed by law, custom, reason it is right, or prop-
er." Bretsch. : " id quod permissum est, necessitatum incom-
pletam, indicat, et est : decet, licet." "Vulg., Mont, Beza, Eras.,
Goschen, Schott, " oportet ; " S. Fr., " il faut ; " Iber., "se debe."
The rendering of the E. V. is too loose.
* The supplement. " Thou," before " hypocrite 1 " is superfluonav
See ch. 6 : 42, note.
154
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XIII.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
doth not each one of you on the
sabbath loose his ox or his ass
from the stall, and lead kirn away
to watering ?
16 And ought not this -woman
being a daughter of Abraham
whom Satan hath bound, lo, these
eighteen years, be loosed from this
bond on the sabbath-day ?
17 And -when he had said these
things, all his adversaries were
ashamed : and all the people re-
joiced for all the glorious things
that were done by him.
18 Then said he, Unto what is
the kingdom of God like? and
whereunto shall I resemble it?
19 It is like a grain of mustard-
seed, which a man took, and cast
into his garden, and it grew, and
waxed a great tree ; and the fowls
of the air lodged in the branches
of it.
GREEK TEXT.
exaaTos v/j.iai> rw (raB/Srq) oil
Xvei TOV fiovv avrov 77 TOV ovov
diro TTJS (f)dTvi-i?, Kal oLira.ya.ywv
16 TavTTjv Se, Qvyo.re.pa.
ovo~av, rjv e'
Sa.Ta.vas, ISov, 8(Ka Kal OKTCO
err?, OVK eSei XvOrfvai diro TOV
8f.a~fi.ov TOVTOV Trj ri/j.epa. TOV
cra/3/3aTov; Kal TOMTO. Xtyov-
rof avTov, KaTr]a"xyvovTO Traj/re?
ol dvTiKi/j.evoi avT<5' Kal Iras' o
o'xAoy e^aipev eVi iracri Tots ev-
80^015 Tots -yivo/ji-IvoLf vir avTov.
18 "JSXeyc 8e, Tivi o/j-ota io~Tiv
77 /3acri\eia TOV Oeov; /cat
* ' 19 /"'
Trjv; Ufj.oia e
KOKKCO fTLva7rea)s, ov \aj3uiv av-
e/SaXev el? KTJTTOV eavTOV'
l 77U-T7cre, KOI eyeveTO els Bev-
Spov /xe'ya, Kal TO. TTfTeivd . TOV
ovpavou KaTe<TKir)va)o~ev ev rots 1
K\d8ois avTov. 20 Kal
REVISED VERSION.
'each of you, on the sabbath,
loose his ox or his ass from the
stall, and, "leading him away,
"water him? And ought not is
this woman, being a daughter
of Abraham, whom Satan hath
bound, lo, 'for eighteen years,
?to be loosed from this bond on
the sabbath? And when he 17
had said "this, all his adversaries
were ashamed, and all the crowd
rejoiced for all the glorious
things which were done by
irim. 'And 'he said, 'To what is
is the kingdom of God like?
and to what 'shall I liken it?
It is like a grain of mustard- is
seed, which a man took and
ast into his garden, and it
grew and 'became a great tree,
and the birds of tlie air lodg-
ed *among 7 its branches. And 20
] " each ; " Sxaaros. "Wesley, Sharpe, Perm, Scarlett, Sawyer,
Kend., M. ("each one"). Bob. (Lex.). The literal rendering
best accords with our present usage.
m " leading Mm away ; " oatayayaiv. The participial construc-
tion is not only literal, but best adapted to precede the verb
Jtoti^ei.
" " water him ; " moTi&i. The literal rendering of this verb
accords with the usage of our language. "We speak of watering
cattle to convey the idea of letting them drink. So (E. V.) Gen.
29 : 3, " watered the sheep," Septuag., ktorgov TO. 7tp6/3aT.
V. 10, ixoTtl'e ra if^o/Sara, E. V., " watered the flock." Exod.
2 : 17, IrtoTioe ra n^o/Sara av-ttov, E .V., " watered their flock."
"/or eighteen years;" Sena xai oxrcb ezjj. Norton. De
"Wette, " schon achtzehn Jahren." There is nothing in the text
corresponding to " these." For the insertion of the supplement
" for," in this passage, see v. 7, note.
f " to be loosed ; " Kv&rjvat. Thorn., Sharpe, Penn, "Wesley,
Angus, M. According to our idiom, " ought" is not one of these
verbs which are followed by the infinitive without the ordinary
sign of that mode, i. e., " to." Hence " be loosed " (first used by
Tyndale) is ungrammatical.
1 " this ; " tavra. Thorn., Camp., Angus. Belg., " dit." See
oh. 5 : 27, note.
' "And ; " He. " Then," in this passage, would be understood
by most readers as a particle of " time," which is not the fact in
reference to 8e. It is merely continuative, and is more properly
rendered by " and." See Kob. (Lex., in verlo).
" he said ; " 'efoye. The inversion of the E. V. (copied from
Tyndale) is unnecessary. It is not adopted by Thorn., Sharpe,
Scarlett, Penn, Norton, Camp., Angus, Kend., or Thelwall.
" To what ; " Tivi. So in first member of the sentence.-
Thorn., Sharpe, Peun, AVesley, Wakef., Scarlett, Dick., Sawyer,
Kend., Angus, 'M.
" shall I liken ; " b^ouaaoi. So E. V., v. 20. Matt. 7 : 24,
26 ; 11 : 16 ; 18 : 23 ; 25 : 1. Mark 4 : 30. Kend., Sharpe, Saw-
yer, Angus, M., Thelwall. " "Whereunto shall I resemble it ? " is
uugrammatical.
T " became ; " tyevero. Thorn., Sharpe, Penn, Wesley, Camp.,
Scarlett, Dick., Kend., Angus, M., Thelwall. The radical sense
of the verb (fieri) is entirely appropriate here. See ch. 12 : 33,
note.
* " the birds ; " ia aersiva. See ch. 12 : 24, note. Thorn.,
Penn, Norton, Wesley, Camp., Scarlett, Dick., Sawyer, Kend.,
Angus, M.
1 " among ; " Iv. Thomson. See (E. V.), Ps. 104 : 12, " the
fowls (birds) which sing among the branches." The preposition
here is equivalent to t /uaio, " in the midst of." See Bob.
(Lex., h>, I. d.). It is, therefore, properly rendered by " among."
3 " its branches ; " rots xldSois avrov. Kend., Thorn., Sharpe ;
Penn, Norton, Camp., Scarlett.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. -CHAP. XIII.
\155
KING JAMES' VERSION.
20 And again he said, Where-
unto sliall I liken tlie kingdom of
God?
21 It is like leaven, -which a
woman took and hid in three
measures of meal, till the whole
was leavened.
22 And he went through the
cities and villages, teaching, and
journeying toward Jerusalem.
23 Then said one unto him,
Lord, are there few that be sav-
ed ? And he said unto them,
24 Strive to enter in at the
strait gate : for many, I say unto
you, will seek to enter in, and
shall not be able.
25 When once the Master of
the house is risen up, and hath
shut to the door, and ye begin to
stand without, and to knock at
the door, saying, Lord, Lord, open
unto us ; and he shall answer and
say unto you, I know you not
whence ye are :
26 Tlien shall ye begin to say,
We have eaten aud drunk in thy
eort
GKEBK TEXT.
etVe, TLVL ofj-otaxrco TTJV
a.v TOV Oeov ; 21 6/Wa
^vfJifi) rji> Xafiovcra yvvrj
fyev ely a\evpov crara rpia,
ov eufjLO>0r) oAor/.
22 KAI SieTTOpeVeTO KKTO. 7TO-
Aety Kal Kc$fj.as SiSdcrKcov, /cat
iropeiav Troiov/j.evos' els 'lepovcra-
\ ' 23 9 S> ' ' " TS~ '
Arjfj,. etTre oe rt? aurro, J\.vpi.,
el oA/yot 01 (Tcoofj.evoi;. '0 8e
? * > * 2' A >5- n
etTre TT/JO? avrov?, Aycavi^eave
eitreXOelv Sia rr/s crrevr/f
oft TroAAot, Xeyca v^uv,
<TLV elcreXdeiv, Kal OVK icryytrov-
9^ ' A * "? ^ ' /I ^ (
criv. A(p ov av eye per] o
ot/co5ecr7ror?7?, /cat aVo/cAeicn? TTJV
Ovpav, Kal ap^rjaOe e^co e
Kal Kpoveiv rv]v Ovpav,
Kvpie, Kvpie, avoi^ov
/cat a.TTOKpidels' epel v/jui>, OVK
?fc C ^ //^ 5 / 2(l/
otoa vfj.a?, TTOuev ecrre. rare
ap^eade Ae'yetf, ' E(j)d-yo/j.ev evca-
TTIOV (rov KOI eTTto/uev, Kal eV rals
REVISED VERSION.
again he said, To what shall I
liken the kingdom of God ? It 21
is like leaven, which a woman
took and hid in three measures
of meal, till the whole was leav-
ened. And he went through 22
'cities and villages, teaching,
and journeying towards Jeru-
salem. "And b one said to him, 23
Lord, are there few who are
saved ? And he said to them,
Strive to enter in 'through the 24
"narrow gate ; for many, I say
to you, will seek to enter in,
and will not be able. When 25
once the 'master of the house
f hatli risen, and e shut fast the
door, and ye begin to stand
without, and h knock at the
door, saying, Lord, Lord, open
to us; and he 'will answer, and
say to you, I know you not,
whence ye are ; then J ye will 2G
begin to say, k We ate and
drank in thy presence, and
1 " cities ; " ytoisis. This noun is anarthrous. There is no
necessity for the insertion of an article in the English. No arti-
cle in Tyndale (1st Edition, 1526), Coverdale, Thomson, Sharpe,
Wesley, Camp., Kend., M., De Wette (" zog durcli Stadte und
Dorfer"), Iber. (" iba por ciudades i aldcas"), Daa. ("ban gik
igiennera Stoeder og Byer").
* " and ; " St. Thorn., Sharpe, Penn, Norton, Camp., Dick.,
Sawyer.
b " one said ; " Hits rig. This is the more appropriate order.
So Kend., Thoin., Sharpe, Penn, Norton, Scarlett, Wakef., Saw-
yer, Thelwall, M. The E. V. copied Tyndale's arrangement.
Compare ch. 13 : 18, note.
c " through;" Sta (cum genit.). Thorn., Sharpe, Penn, Nor-
ton, Wesley, Camp., Dick., Kend., Thelwall, M. Eob. (Lex.,
Sia) : " Implying motion through a place, and put after verbs of
motion." De Wette, " durch."
d " narrow ; " arsvfjs. Thorn., Sharpe, Penn, Norton, Dick.,
Sawyer, Hard. " Strait " is obsolescent. It is also objectionable
as liable to be confounded with another word (" straight "), which
has the same pronunciation.
" master ; " olxoSeoxon/s. This word is improperly made
to commence with a capital in the E. V. The capital is not em-
ployed by Thorn., Sharpe, Penn, Norton, Wesley, Wakef., Camp.,
Dick., Tyndale, Cranmer, Geneva, Coverdale, Eheims, or the E. V
of 1611.
f " hath risen ; " J/e?^. Norton, Scarlett, Wakef., Kend.,
Penn (" hath risen up"), M. (" has arisen"). See ch. 5 : 23, and
7 : 16, notes.
e " shut fast ; " anoxUiarj. Rob. (Lex., in verbo) : "In K T.
to shut fully, to shut fast." Bretsch., '^occludo." So Tyndale.
De Wette, " verschlossen hat."
h " knock ; " y.qoveiv. The close connection of this verb with
" to stand " requires (according to present usage) that " to "
should be omitted. So Thorn., Penn, Norton, Wesley, Scarlett,
Sawyer.
1 " will answer ; " omoxQid-els. Kend., Thorn., Sharpe, Nor-
ton, Wakef., Camp., Sawyer, Angus.
J " ye will begin ; " ai^rjad'e. Thorn., Sharpe (" will ye be-
gin"), Penn, Dick., Kend., M.
k " We ate and drank ; " 'Ecpayofiev y.al Iniofiev. Kend.
These aorists are properly rendered, according to their usual
force, by the English imperfect. The perfect of the E. V. was
taken from Tyndale, who followed the Vulgate, " manducavimus
et bibimus." The Latin perfect, however, has a wider range than
the English tense of the same name, being often equivalent to our
imperfect.
156
THE GOSPEL ACCOKDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XIII.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
presence, and thou hast taught in
our streets.
27 But he shall say, I tell you,
I know you not whence ye are ;
depart from me, all ye -workers of
iniquity.
28 There shall be -weeping and
gnashing of teeth, -when ye shall
see Abraham, and Isaac, and Ja-
cob, and 'all the prophets, in the
kingdom of God, and you your-
selves thrust out.
29 And they shall come from
the east, and from the west, and
from the north, and from the
south, and shall sit down in the
kingdom of God.
30 And behold, there are last,
which shall be first ; and there
are first, which shall be last.
31 The same day there came
certain of the Pharisees, saying
unto him, Get thee out, and de-
GREEK TEST.
TrAare/cuy yficov eSi8aas. ZT
(pel, Aeyco v/uv, OVK oiSa v
Trodev ecrre'' aTrocrr^re air fj.ov
TravTfs ol epyaTcu TTIS aSi/c/ay.
/ / *
28 e/cet ecrrai 6 KXavdfWf KCU o
/3pvyfj.o? T>V oSovTcov, OTO.V o\jnj-
Koi 'Io~aa.K KOU
I 7TO.VTO.S TOVS 7TpO(f)r/-
TO.S fv Trj fiacriXfta TOV Oeou,
29 \ <//- a \ j x \
/cat rj^ovcrtv airo avaroAcav Kai
8v<T[J.(6l>, KCU UTTO /SoppS. KCU VO-
TOV, Kai avaK\LdriarovTa.t, ev rfj
ia TOV Otov. 30 KOU ISou,
ecr^arot oi ecrovrai TrptSroi,
KCU fieri TiyxSroi oi kcrovrai ecr^a-
TOL.
31 '
Ev avrf) Trj
6ov Tives t&apKrcuoL, Xe-yovres
ai>ra> } ' JZ^eXde KCU. iropevov eV-
REVISED VERSION.
thou 'didst teach in our streets.
But he will say, I tell you, I 27
know you not whence ye are
depart from me, all ye workers
of iniquity. "There will be 28
weeping and gnashing of teeth,
when ye shall see Abraham, and
Isaac, and Jacob, and all the
prophets in the kingdom of
God, and "yourselves "cast out.
And they ^will come from the 29
east 'and west, and from the
north and south, and 'will re-
cline at table in the kingdom of
God. And behold, there are so
last, who will be first ; and
there are first, who will be last.
'That very day, there came 31
some Pharisees, "and said to
him, v Go out, and depart hence ;
" didst teach ; " e8intts. This aorist is rendered by the
imperfect, on the principle stated in the last note. Keudrick,
" taugLtest."
" " There will be ; " sxsT %ori. The verb is rendered " will
be " by Thorn., Shavpe, Penn, Norton, Scarlett, Wakef., Dick.,
Kend., M. The rendering of ixsz (" there ") has been retained,
and yet not without much hesitation. 'JSxcz is very generally an
adverb of time. But in the English phrases, " there will be,"
" there are," etc., the adverb is merely euphonic, and has no refer-
ence to place. To bring out that idea, the order must be chang-
ed, thus, " Weeping and gnashing of teeth will be there, when,"
etc. But it may be questioned, whether ixe t is not here used to
indicate " time " instead of " place," as we have in the apodosis,
orav Staff's x. T. L (" when ye shall see," etc.). Liddell (Lex.,
Ixel) says : " III. also, but rarely, of time = tors, then. Anec-
dota Beckeri. Schaf., Appar. Dem., p. 531." Kuincel regards
ey.a here as an adverb of time : " 'Exa, Hebr. tna h. 1. est adverb
temporis, adeoque reddi debet tune. Hebrsei enim adverbia loci
ponere solent pro advei-biis temporis, v. Hos. 2 : 16. Ps. 36 : 13 ;
132 : 17 (n\j, Sept., &.&}." Gesen. (Lex., be) : " (Spoken) of
time, then, like Gr. exsi, Lat. ibi, ittlco, Ps.'l4 : 5; 132 : 17.
Judg. 5 : 11." Henc.e the following alternative rendering is sug-
gested, "Then there will be," etc. The adverb is rendered
" then " by Norton, Camp., Gray (note on Angus, in loco). The
Vulg., Mont., Beza, and Schott have " ibi," which signifies either
ihere,"orthen."
" "yourselves;" v/tag. Tyndale, Geneva, Penn, Norton, "Wes-
ley, Wakef., Camp., Dick., Angus, M. The rendering of the
B. V. was taken from .Cranmer.
" cast out ; " exfiatto/isvovs t<a. Eob., (Lex., txpattto}.
Thomson, Penn, Sawyer, Thelwall, M. So usually in E. V. it
is rendered ; " thrust out " only here, and in oh. 4 : 29. Comp.
(E. V.) Jer. 7 : 15 ; 15 : 1 ; 16 : 13. Matt. 8 : 12, jthe children
of the kingdom shall be cast out into outer darkness : (ol viol
Tijs /Saadslas Ix^.ri^fjoovtni els to OXOTOS to e^iats$ov f ) there
shall be weeping and gnashing of teeth."
P " will come ; " f^ovoiv. Thorn., Norton, Scarlett, Wakef.,
Camp., Dick, Kend., M.
1 " and west ; " xal vofi<ni>. Angus, Kend., M., Thorn., Penn,
Wakef., Sawyer. It is unnecessary to insert the article here.
If used, it is really a supplement.
r "will recline at table;'" avaxfofrijoovTai. See ch. 7
note. So Kend., M.
' "That very day;" 'Ev avrfj 777 fjfie^tf. See ch. 7
note.
' " some Pharisees ; " tivss <f<ioianTot. Tliomson, Wakefield,
Angus. Fives is rendered " some " also by Sawyer and Murdock.
It accords better with our usus loquendi than " certain." sP^<-
aatot is incorrectly translated in the E. V, (after Tyndale) as if
it were a genitive, " of the Pharisees."
tt " and said ; " ityoinss. Tyndale, Thorn., Murdock, Wakef.,
Camp., Dick.
' " Go out ; " "&l9t. Penn, Wesley, Scarlett, M., Sawyer.
36,
21.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XIII.
157
KING JAMES' VERSION.
part hence; for Herod will kill
thee.
32 And lie said unto them, Go
ye and tell that fox, Behold, I
cast out devils, and I do cures to-
day and to-morrow, and the third
day I shall be perfected.
83 Nevertheless. I must walk
to-day and to-morrow, and the
day following : for it cannot be
that a prophet perish out of Jeru-
salem.
34 Jerusalem, Jerusalem,
which killest the prophets, and
stonest them that are sent unto
thee ; how often would I have
gathered thy children together,
as a hen doth gather her brood
under her wings, and ye would
not!
35 Behold, your house is left
GREEK TEXT.
revdev, OTL 'Jffpcadrjs $e'Aei <re
' ~ 32 1?~ ** ^ > "
ctTroKTeivai. KO.L enrev O.VTOIS,
Hopevdei/re? etWre rfj aAcoyre/a
TO.VTT], 'I8ov, e/c/3aAAft> 8a.ifj.6fia
Kai iacrei? eVtreAa) crri/j.epov, KCU
avpiov, KCU rrj Tpirrj T\iov/J.at>
JQ x \ PV ~ / \ 3f
TTMJV 061 /HE O"f]fJipOV Kttt. OLV'
piov KCU rfj ^o/j.fvr] 7ro/9euecr#ar
on OVK eVoY^erai jrpo<pr/TTjv a?ro-
\la6ai e'^-ca 'lepovcraXrj/j,, 34 '/e-
povcra\TJ/J., 'Zepovcra\T)fji,, 77 O.TTO-
/creu/oucra TOVS TrpofyrjTas, KCU
Ai$o/3oAovcra TOVS aTrecrraAjU.e-
1>OV? 7T/30? aVTTJV, TTOCTaKlS T]Qi~
Xf]<ra eirio-vvd^ou ra re/era <rou,
ov rpoTTOv bpvLS Tfjv tavTrjs voar-
cnav VTTO ra? Trrepvyas, KOU OVK.
35 iSov, a
REVISED VERSION.
for Herod w wisheth *to put thee
to death. And he said to them, 32
Go, tell that fox, Behold, I cast
out demons, and perform cures
to-day, and to-morrow, and the
third day S I finish my work.
Nevertheless, I must walk to- 33
day, and to-morrow, and the
day following- ; for it can not
be that a prophet "should perish
out of Jerusalem. Jerusa- 34
lem, Jerusalem, that killest the
prophets, and stonest those who
are sent' to thee ; how often
would I have gathered thy chil-
dren together, as a hen gathereth
her brood under her wings, and
ye would not ! Behold, your 35
Bob. (Lex., egfyy.ofiai) : " The place whence being not expressed
but implied, to go out, i. e., to go away, to depart."
" " wisheth ; " S-lht. Robinson (Lex.) : " To will, i. q., to
wish, desire, to choose." So Penn, Kendrick, M., Sawyer. The
B. V~., copying Tyndale, has " will," which, in this case, appears
to be merely a sign of the future tense. It is obvious from the
text that these Pharisees did not expect that Christ would
regard their message as a mere prediction as to the danger in
question. On the contrary, they wished to alarm him with the
intelligence that Herod was determined to put him to death.
Several late Eng. translators have used the term " intends " as
the equivalent of -D-ekc. This gives the thought, though the ex-
actness, of the rendering may be questioned. It may be remarked
here, that though there are cases where 9~t),a> serves merely as a
sign of the future, like the Bng. shall, or will, thus giving the
infinitive a future sense ; this occurs only where inanimate things
are spoken of. See Acts 2 : 12.; 17 .: 20. Bob. (Lex., &slm).
1 " to put thee io death ;'" ae aTtoxrelimi. See oh. 9 : 22,
note. Kuinoel ; (h. 1.) : " Kodem die Pharisee! nonnulli ad Jesum
accedebant, eumque monebant, ut ex ilia regione discederet, quod
Herodes vitse ipsius insidias strueret. Scilicet cum numerus
sectatorum Jesu quotidie cresceret, omnisque populus ab ore ejus
penderet ; timebat Herodes Antipas, ne populus ob interemptum
Johannera, ipsi iratus, et ad defecttonem pronus, res novas moli-
retur, atque seditionem moveret. Optabat igitur, ut Jesus quam
longissime roaioveretur, ueque tamen ei violentas manus injicire
audebat, metuens populum. Experii-i ergo volebat, an Jesum,
metu incusso, e Galilsea atque Perrna, his enim regionibus Hero-
des Antipas prajerat (lurev&ev, ex his terris) pellere posset.
Itaque subornabat Phavisreos, quos sciret .Jesu adversaries acerri-
mos, ut eum minis terrerent, eique per speciem amicitiaj consilium ,
abeundi in Judoeam darent," etc. The verb, used in this instance, "
is an appropriate term to express the thought of death inflicted
under legal forms. The eagerness of the multitude to make
Christ a king by force (John C : 15) rendered him an object of
jealous hatred to Herod, who looked only at " the things which
are seen."
y " I finish my work ; " reletovfeac. Some interpreters have
maintained that this verb is really a future; it being, as they
assert, an Attic contract from rs).eicooofi<u, that being put for
Ts).8M>&foo i u.at. Bloomf. remarks on this supposition : " Borne-
mann with reason objects that the penult of this verb is long ;
and notices similar errors in the forms of other verbs in the
j classics. Here certainly the present seems required by the cor-
respondent verbs foregoing, Iv.flaU.co, and extremes." Robinson
(Lex.) regards the verb (h. I.) as present middle with cgyov
implied, and renders it, " I finish the work." The above render-
ing, "I finish m y work," is employed from a comparison with
John 4 : 34, y.al reisicoaco avrov ro egyov, " and that I may
finish his work." John 5 : 36. John 17 : 4, lyco as l$6!-aon snl
rijs yrjs' TO egyov faeZsicooa o SeScaxds /tot tra. rtottfoco' E. V.,
" I have glorified time on the earth : I have finished the work
which thou gavest me to do." The language of Christ in these
passages, containing this verb, and referring specially to the
" work," seems decisive as to the sentence in question.
1 " should perish ; " catoUad'at. Norton, Murdock. This
rendering- accords with the present usage of our language. Beza,
Eras., " pereat." A more literal rendering would be, " for it is
not possible for a prophet to perish." This, however, is less
appropriate than that given above.
158
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XIY.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
unto you desolate. And verily, I
eay unto you, Ye shall not see me,
until the time come when ye shall
say, Blessed is he that cometh in
the name of the Lord.
CHAP. XIV.
AND it came to pass, as he went
into the house of one of the chief
Pharisees to eat bread on the
sabbath-day, that they watched
him.
GREEK TEXT.
6 QLKOS U/iCOV CpTJfJiOS'
e Ae'yw vjuv^ on ov fj.r/ fj.
ecos ai> rjgg, ore etTr^re,
/j-evos o epxpfj-eiro? ev OVOJJLO.TL
Kviov.
CHAP. XIV.
K.AI
T<
eyeero
avrov As OLKOV nvos TCOV
rcav rcav <&apicraic0i> aa.
(^ayeiv aprov, /cat
7rapa.Ti)pov/j.evoi avrov.
a.Ta:>
avroi -rjcrav
2 /cat
REVISED VERSION.
house is left to you 'desolate.
b And I say to you, Ye will not
see me, till the time 'cometh
when ye shall say, Blessed "be
he that cometh in the name of
the Lord.
CHAP. XIV.
AND it came to pass, as he i
went into the house "of one of
the rulers, 'who were Pharisees,
to eat bread on "a sabbath, that
"they were watching him. And 2
* " desolate ; " egijftos, is canceled by Griesbach, Lachmann,
Tisehendorf, Knapp, Theile, Kuincel, Scholz. This last Editor
says : " Suspeetum e^pos. Deest in cdd. A.B.K.L.S.N. minuscc.
permultis. verss., Memph. Sahidic, Arm., Sax., Vulg. ms. 6 libris
lat. Addebatur facile ad conformandum Lucam Mattheo 23 : 38,
quanquam etiam fieri potuit, ut propter similitudinem syllabarum
prsecedd. vft&v mature textu excideret." In the Amiatine MS.
of the Vulg., " deserta " is not found. On the other hand, the
various printed Editions of the Vulg. read "relinquetur vobis
* domus vestra deserta." So the Syriac translation was made
from a Greek MS. which had sfn/fios, as it reads . o -^^.d
l^fi* " - "> "-^ It is retained by Tittmann. As the sen-
tence is obviously imperfect without egrjftos, I retain it, in ren-
dering, and place this note in the margin : "'Egrj/uos (" desolate")
is wanting in several early MSS. and Versions."
b "And ; " aftqv (" verily ") of the Text. Becept. is rejected by
Griesb., Lachm., Tischend., Knapp, Theile, Kuincel, Scholz, Titt-
mann, and Schott, who -has this note : " Aeyco Ss cum Griesb.
aliisque auctoritate plerorumque cdd. (11 URC. verss., Peseh.
Philox., Pers., Memph., Sahid., Arm., Slav., Vulg., edidimus U-
yio sine de in paucis cdd. et verss.) pro vulg. A/UTJV Se Ifyia.
Additamentum a/nrjv librariis familiare." Beyond a doubt, /}"
is spurious.
c " cometh ; " av ^rj, for f&i, that is the subj. aorist instead
of the indicat. future. See Rob. (Lex., ore). In cases of this
kind, when we express the thought in our language, we can say
" cometh," or " shall come ; " though the first expression is usually
preferred for the sake of conciseness.
d " be." This supplement is used rather than is on the fol-
lowing grounds: In Ps. 118 : 26 (Sept., 117 : 26), from whence
the sentence is quoted, the Sept. has the same words, Elioyrsfis-
vos o fyyoftevos iv cvoftart Kvpiov, E. V., " Blessed be he that
cometh in the name of the Lord." In Mark 11 : 10, EiJ.oyrjfisr-q
% ty%ofiVi] ftaod.eia Iv ovofian Kvtjiov, E. V., " Blessed be the
kingdom that cometh in the name of the Lord." Luke .19 : 38,
Evioyripivos 6 ej>%6fievos ^aaiisvs h> ovoftart Kvgiov, E. V.,
" Blessed be the king that cometh in the name of the Lord." So
also Eph. 1 : 3. This supplement should be used in Matt. 21 : 9,
and John 12 : 13. " Be " is employed by Norton, Camp.
* " of one of the rulers ; " nvos raiv apxovreov. Kendrick,
Camp., Sawyer, Thomson ("of one of the chiefs"). Compare
Acts 4 : 8, %p%ovTcs TOV ).aov anl rtgeafivTsooi tov fa^afji.,
"Eulers of the people and elders of Israel." Luke 23 : 13, 35.
Acts 4 : 5. Bob. (Lex., apzcov) : " In a Jewish usage, e. g., r
ruler- of a synagogue. Luke 8 : 41. Matt. 9 : 18, 23. So of
persons of weight among the Pharisees, and other sects who were
members of the sanhedrim. Luke 14 : 1." Kuincel (h. 1.) : "Post-
quam se die sabbati contulerat ad assessorem quendam synedri e
secta Pharisaeorum, ut coena interesset."
b " who were Pharisees ; " r<3i> cpafioaiw. Thorn. Bloomf.
has this note : " By tivos Tcav a^y_6incav rcoi> <Pagcoaicav is
meant (as Grotius, Hammond, "Whitby, Pearce, and Campbell
have shown) ' one of the rulers [of a synagogue] who was a
Pharisee ; ' r<3v ^a^ioaitov being for t<uv <t>ac>iOtt.i<av, or in
apposition. Comp. John 3:1. For that such rulers were not
all Pharisees, appears from John 7 : 48." In conformity with
this view, Norton has, " of a ruler who was a Pharisee ; " Wakef.,
" of one of the rulers, a Pharisee ; " Camp., " of one of the rulers
who was a Pharisee." G. Campbell remarks that " a^ovras
properly denotes persons in authority, rulers, magistrates; and
that any other kind of eminence, or superiority would have been
distinguished by the term nqwrot, as in Luke 19 : 47. Mark
6 : 21. Acts 13 : 50 ; 17 : 4 ; 25 : 2 ; 28 : 17." Kuincel (in
loco) : " *Aqza>v indicat, vel archisynagogam, archisyuagogi eni-m
dicebantur etiam a^ovras, Matt. 9 : 18. Coll. Marc. 5 : 22, vel
assessorem synedri oppidam : cum praeterea additum legatur r<Sv
. patet euni e secta Pharis. fuisse."
a sabbath ; " aa/S^dfty. In conformity with the text,
" the " (of the E. V.) is dropped. So Tyndale, Wakef., Scarlett,
Camp., Dick., Thelwall. So " day," which occurs in the E. V.,
and is a supplement (though not italicized) is omitted as super-
fluous. See ch. 6 : 2, note.
" they were watching ; " tfaav Tta^arrj^ovftcvoi. Thomson,
Norton, "Wesley, Scarlett, Angus, Thelwall. The tense here
indicates continued action.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XIV.
159
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
2 And behold, there "was a cer-
tain man before him which had
the dropsy.
3 And Jesus answering, spake
unto the lawyers and Pharisees,
saying, Is it lawful to heal on the
sabbath-day ?
4 And they held their peace.
And he took him, and healed him,
and let him go :
5 And answered them, saying,
Which of you shall have an ass
or an ox fallen into a pit, and will
not straightway pull him out on
the sabbath-day ?
6 And they could not answer
him again to these things.
7 And he put forth a parable
to those which were bidden, when
he marked how they chose out the
chief rooms ; saying unto them,
GREEK TEST.
iSov, avdpomros TIS r/v v
avrov- 3 /cat
o 'Irjirovs (.lire. Trpoy rovs
VO/J.IKOVS KOU <fiapicraiov?, \e-ycav,
EL ^(TTL ra> cra/3/3ar< Qepa.iTe.v-
SLV; 01 8e rja-v^aarav. 4 KOU
laararo avrov, /cat
5 /cat airoKpidzis TT/JO?
CLVTOVS ebre, Tinas v^tov ovos r)
[Bov? els (j)peap e/tTrecretrai, /cat
OVK evdecoy dvacnracrei avrov ev
TOV
r
OVK
6 Kou
ai av-
ra> Trpof
7 ' JEAeye de Trpos TOV? /ce/cA?;-
irtas
/j,ei>ovs
ras TTjOwro/cAtcr/as 1
\eycoi>
8 "
Orav
BEVISED VEESION.
behold, there was a certain man
before him who had the drop-
sy. And Jesus, answering, spoke 3
to the lawyers and Pharisees,
saying, Is it lawful e to cure on
the f sabbath ? s But Hhey were 4
silent. And 'taking hold of
Mm, he healed him, and let ] him
go. And he answered them, 5
saying, fe lf an ox, or an ass of
any one of you 'shall fall into
a pit, will he not "then "imme-
diately pull it out on the sab-
bath-day ? And they could not 6
"reply against him 'as to 'this.
And he spoke a parable to "
those r who had been invited,
when he marked how 'they
were choosing out 'the first
places ; saying to them, When 8
" to cure ; " d't^a.TtEvsiv. M., Norton, Camp., Sawyer. This
rendering preserves the verbal distinction of frepcatevetv, and ld-
omo, in the next member of this verse.
f "sabbath." See v. 1, note.
k " But ; " 5i. Thorn., Scarlett, Thelwall, M., Angus, "Wesley,
1'enn.
h " they were silent ; " yav%aoav. Kend., Norton, Wakef.,
JPenn, Scarlett, Sawyer, Dick. The phrase " to hold one's peace "
is obsolete.
1 "taking hold of;" indapofievos. Kend., M., Dick., Thel-
wall. The verb " took hold of" is employed by Campbell and
Penn. Bob. (Lex., in verbo) : "To take hold upon." The ex-
pression is elliptical ; trjs x s '?$ being understood. The ellipsis
is supplied Mark 8 : 23, m?.ap6fievos fijs zctgos TOV rvyAov.
So Acts 23 : 19. Compare Matt. 9 : 25. Mark 1 : 31. Luke
8:54.
1 " Mm." This supplement is necessary to complete the sen-
tence.
k " If an ox, or an ass of any one of you ; " Tivos vfituv ovos
y /3ovs. Kuincel : " Si cujusquam vestrum asinus vel bos," etc.
This rendering is more strict than that of the E. V. (copied from
Tyndale). It 5s deemed sufficiently perspicuous in presenting the
thought of the text. As ovos and /Jot's are anarthrous, " the " is
dropped ; so Wakef. As an alternative rendering, " Who of you,
if an ox, or an ass shall fall into a pit, will not immediately," etc.
Be Wette, " Wer von euch, dessen Esel oder Ochs in die Grube
Sole, wiirde ihn nicht alsbald herausziehen ?"
1 " shall fall ; " Ifateoettni,. Penn, Sharpe, Sawyer.
native, should fail." So Norton,
Alter-
m " then ; " xai. See eh. 10 : 29, note.
" " immediately ; " ev&ecos. See ch. 5 : 39, note.
" reply against ; " avTanoy.^t&^vai. So Rom. 9 : 20, 6 uv-
Tconftvofisvos tqi Qsfy (B. V.), " that repliest against God."
Hob. (Lex., in verbo}. The verb occurs only here, and the pas-
sage cited from Romans. " Reply," or " answer again," fails to
bring out the force of the preposition avrl.
f " as to ; " irpos. Rob. (Lex., in verbo) : " Toward, i. e., in
reference to, in respect to, as to, implying the direction, or remote
object of an action." After verbs of replying, Matt. 27 : 14.
Horn. 8 : 31.
" this ; " ravra. See ch. 5 : 27, note.
r " who had been invited ; " rovs xexfojfeevovs. Penn, Norton.
Beza, " quo vocati fuerunt." Our usus loquendi demands the plu-
perfect tense here. See Trollope, g 50, 6, p. 133. " Invited "
corresponds with our present usage. Rob. (Lex., xo.).eco) : " Spe-
cially, to call, i. q., to invite." See ch. 7 : 39, note.
" they were choosing out ; " ejefayovro, Wakef. Trench,
p. 126 : " Read ' how they were choosing out ' (tgekeyoiTo) ;
the sacred historian placing the Lord's utterance of the parable
in the midst of the events which he is describing."
t " the first places ; " n^torov.halns. Rob. (Lex., in verbo} :
" The first reclining-place at table, the chief place at meals, the
middle place on each couch of the triclinium." De Wette, " die
ersten Platze ; " G. and S. Fr., " les premieres places ; " Iber.,
" los primeros puestos." This word should be distinguished from
ttfcoToy.a&eSpla, which properly signifies " first seat." See Revia
of Mark 12 : 39, where both terms occur.
160
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XIV.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
8 When thou art bidden of any
man to a wedding, sit Hot down
in the highest room, lest a more
honourable man tlian tliou be bid-
den of him ;
9 And he that bade thee and
him come and say to thee, Give
this man place ; and thou begin
with sliame to take the lowest
room.
10 But when thou art bidden,
go and sit down in the lowest
room ; that when he that bade
thee cometh, he may say unto
thee, Friend, go up higher : then
shalt thou have worship in the
presence of them that sit at meat
with thee.
11 For whosoever exalteth him-
self shall be abased, and he that
humbleth himself shall be exalted.
GREEK TEXT.
VTTO TLVOS fls ya/uour, [JLTJ
av
e? rr/v
ivTifJLOTepos crov 17
VTT avrov, 9 KOU e'A-
6a>v o ere KOI O.VTOV /cccAe'cray
eptl (rot, A))s TOVTW TOTTOV /ecu
ap^rj ^T aia~xyvr]s TOV
f f 10 > * -v >
TOTTOV Ko.Ttys.iv. aAA
OTO.V K\rjdrjf, iropevdels avdire-
crov elf TOV ea~^aToi> TOTTOV tVa,
orav e\0r] o /ce/cA^/ccoy ere,
croi
TOTE
pOV TOTf. eOTTOLL CTOL oO. (VC0-
mov T&V <TvvavaKi[jLva>v troL
v eavrov Tairei-
/cat o Ta/rreivcai' eav-
TOV vco
11 OTI Tray o
REVISED VERSION.
thou art invited "by any one to
v a inarriage-feast,' ""do not re-
cline at talk in "the first place,
lest a more honorable man than
thou ?may have been invited
'by him ; and he who "invited 9
thee and him ""should come, a,nd
say to thee, c Give place to this
man; and d then c thou wilt be-
gin with shame to take the low-
est r place. But when g thou art 10
invited, go and h lie down at table
in the lowest 'place, that when
he 'who hath invited thee Com-
eth, he may say to thee, Friend,
go up higher ; then. k thou wilt
have 'honor in the presence of
those ro who recline at table with
thee. For "every one who ex- 11
alteth himself, "will be humbled,
and. he who humbleth liimself,
" by ; " vno. See ch. 10 : 22, note.
T " a marriage-feast ; " yafiovs. Scarlett, "Wesley, "Wakefield,
Kend., M. See ch. 12 : 36, note. The plural (ydfwvg) seems to
be \ised from the fact that the entertainment continued for several
days.
w " do not recline at table ; " fif; xa.rnxii9fjs. This verb has
the same signification with avaxUvco, when the reference is to
the posture at meals. See Eob. (Lex.). Luke 7 : 36, note.
1 " the first place ; " ir,v a^carexhaiav. See v. 7, note.
> " may have been invited ; " a xatliiuivos- A literal render-
ing accords with our usus loquendi. The thought may be pre-
sented by this alternative phrase, " should have been invited."
See v. 7, note.
" by him ; " vrf nvrov. So in first member of the sentence.
See note u.
" invited." See v. 7, note.
b " should come ; " E^&fav. Sharpe. Present usage demands
this rendering.
" Give place to this man ; " ^fos fovrcti ronov. Thomson,
Norton, M., Sharpe. &. Fr., " cede a celui-ci la place." " Man,"
not represented by an equivalent in the text, is italicized.
d " then ; " -TOTS. Thorn., Scarlett, Wesley, Camp., Sawyer,
Thelwall, M.
" thou wilt begin ; " apj>]. The verb has this form both in
the 1st fut. ind. mid., and the 1st aorist subj. middle. Critics are
divided as to its classification, in this instance. Scarlett, Wesley,
Wakef., Norton, and Gray (note on Angus) render it as a 1st fut.
middle. The above rendering is made on this ground. As an
alternative (on the supposition that the verb is 1st aorist subj.),
" thou sliouldst begin." Kuincel, and some others, regard agjrj as
pleonastic.
f " place ; " ronov. So (E. V.) in the preceding member of
the sentence. Thorn., Sharpe, Penn, Wesley, Norton, Wakef.,
Camp., Sawyer, Angus, Keud., M.
e " thou art invited ; " x^S'fis. See v. 7, note.
h " lie down at talk ; " avansaov. Sharpe. See ch. 11 : 37,
note.
' " place ; " ronov. See v. 9, note f.
J " who hath invited ; " o y.eyJ.rjxcos. As the literal rendering
involves no violation of our idiom, it is preferred for the sake of
exactness. Thelwall renders this verb by the perfect.
k " thou wilt have ; " 'carat aoi. Thorn., Sharpe, Penn, Scar-
lett, Walcef., Kend., M.
i " honor ; " Soga. Penn, Thorn., Wesley, Scarlett, Kendrick,
Camp., Sawyer, Angus, M.
m " who recline at table with ; " r<3v awavaxetfieveav. See
ch. 7 : 49, note.
n "everyone;" nag. So (E.V.) ch.ll :10 ; 18 :14. Sharpe,
Penn, Wesley, Wakef., Dick., Sawyer, Kend., Gray (in Angus), .
M. Murdock (Syr., ^). Heb. N. Test, -ba. Yulg., Erasmus,
" omnis."
" will be humbled ; " raasivea&f/asrae. Sharpe, Scarlett,
Norton, Kendrick, M. The verb is rendered by " humble," by
Wesley, Thomson, Campbell, Thelwall, Sawyer, Angus, Bheims.
So in next member of the sentence, o raneivdiv (E. V.), " that
humbleth ; " and Matt. 18:4. Philip. 2 : 8. Jas. 4 : 10. 1 Pet.
5 : 6. Vulgate, Montanus, " humiliabitur ; " Iber., "sera hufflil
lado."
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XIV.
161
KING JAMES' VERSION.
12 : Then said he also to him
that bade Mm, When thou makest
a dinner or a supper, call not thy
friends, nor thy brethren, neither
thy kinsmen, nor thy rich neigh-
bours ; lest they also bid thee
again, and a recompense be made
thee.
13. But . when thou makest a
feast, call the poor, the maimed,
the lame, the blind ;
14 And thou shalt be blessed :
for they cannot recompense thee :
for thou shalt be recompensed at
the resurrection of the just.
15 And when one of them that
sat at meat with him heard these
things, he said nnto him, Blessed
is he that shall eat bread in the
kingdom of God.
16 Then said he unto him, A
certain man made a great supper,
and bade many :
17 And sent his servant at
supper-time, to say to them that
GEEEK TEXT.
12 ''
.ZJAeye 8e /ecu ra
avTov, " OTOLV -rroirjs apicrTov r)
dei-jrvov, fir] fycavet, TOVS (piXovs
<rou, /jajSe TOVS dSeXfiovs arov,
fj.rj8e TOVS (rvyyeveis aov, fj.rjSe
ytiTQvas irXovo-iovs' /i^Trore KCU
avToi ere dvTLKaXecr(oo~i ) KCU yt-
crot avTajr68ofj.a. 13 AA'
V, KCcAei TTTW^OVS,
OTdV TTOirjS
avairripovs,
KOU fJ.aKO.plOS (TTJ'
dvTaTToSovvai croi
OTl
OVK
avra-
yap crot ev Ty ava-
oracrec rSsv SiKaicov.
15 'AKOvcras 8e TIS rS>v crvv-
avaKfi^vcav ravra eiirev
MaKapios, os (frdyeTai aprov
rf) /3otcrfAe/a TOV Oeov. 16 'O
etvrej' aur&J, ' Avdpcoiros TIS e
r/o~e Searvov [J-eya, KOI e'/caAetre
TroAAoyy 17 KOL aTrecrrefAe TOV
8ov\ov avTov Trj copa TOV SeiTrvov
REVISED VERSION.
^will be exalted. 'And r he said 12
also to him 'who had invited
him, When thou makest 'a din-
ner, or a supper, call not thy
friends, "nor thy brethren, nor
thy T kindred, nor thy rich neigh-
bors, lest they also "should in-
vite thee again, and a recom-
pense be made thee. But when is
thou makest a feast, 'invite the
poor, the maimed, the lame, the
blind; and thou wilt be y happy; 14
'because they can not recom-
pense thee ; for thou "wilt be
recompensed at the resurrec-
tion b of the righteous. And 15
e one of those d who reclined at
table with him, "hearing f this,
said to him, r Happy is he who
shall eat bread in the kingdom
of God. k And 'he said to him, is
A certain man made a great
supper, and Unvited many. And 17
he sent his servant at supper-
f " will be exalted ; " vijjco&^aerat. Sharpe, Penn, Scarlett,
Norton, Wakef., Dick., Kend., M.
"And ; " Ss. Kend., Sharpe, Penn, Norton, Sawyer.
r " he said also ; " 'jEieysxal. Kend., Sharpe, Penn, Norton,
Wakef., Sawyer. This arrangement is the simplest, and from the
position of " also," no room is left for any ambiguity. The pro-
noun is placed before the verb by Thorn., Scarlett, Dick., Camp.,
Thelwall, and M.
" who had invited him ; " rcS xexhjzdn. Kend., M., Sawyer
("that had invited"). See v. 7, note.
t " a dinner, or a supper ; " a^tarov q S&nvov. See ch. 11 : 37,
note. . .
11 " nor ; " /irjSe. See ch. 8 : 17, note.
T " kindred ; " ovyysveis. M. . See ch. 1 : 58, note. Liddell
(Lex.). " Kindred," in the sense of relations, often occurs in the
E. Y.
w " should invite again ; " avrixcdeocoai. Bob. (Lex., in
uerio). Wesley, Penn, M. See v. 7, note. " Should invite
again " accords with present usage.
1 " invite ; " yMec. See v. 7, note.
* "happy;" paxaqios. Thorn., Scarlett, Wakef., Campbell,
Kend., M. See ch. 1 : 45, note.
1 " because ; " on. Scarlett, Wesley. Robinson (Lex., on) :
" Conj. causal, for that, because." This rendering is necessary to
distinguish the word from " for," the equivalent of ydq, ia the
next member of the sentence.
* " wilt be recompensed ; " a.vranoSod'rioet&c. Scarlett, Wake-
field, Kend.
b " of the righteous ; " itov Sixaicov. Thorn., Norton, Dick,,
G-. and A. Camp., Kend., M. The generic sense of dixatos is the
appropriate one here. Compare John 5 :'29: See Luke 1 : 17,
and 2 : 25, notes.
e " when " of the E. V. is omitted by Thorn., Wesley, Penn,
Scarlett, Norton, Dick., Camp., Sawyer, Kend., M., Thelwall.
d " who reclined at table with ; " -reov ovvavaxsefteviov. See
ch. 7 : 49-
" hearing ; " 'Axovaas. Penn, Thorn., Wesley, Norton, Dick.,
Camp., Kend., Sawyer, M., Thelwall.
f " this ; " ravra. Thorn., Kend., Camp., Norton, ^Tyndale,
" that." Tcnrra is rendered in the singular (E. V.) Mark 16 : 12.
Luke 12 : 4. John 5:1; 19 : 38. Acts 13 : 20 ; 15 : 16. Rev.
7 : 9. See Luke 5 : 27, note.
E " Happy ; " Maxaoios. See v. 14, and ch. 1 : 45, notes.
h "And ; " Se. Penn, Norton, Kend. Iber., " I."
' " he said ; " slnev. Thomson, Penn, Scarlett, M., Kend.,
Norton, Wakef., and Camp., "Jesus said." The inversion of the
E. V, was copied from Tyndale. See v. 12, note.
) " invited ; " Ixdleoe. See v. 7, note.
162
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XIV.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
were bidden, Come, for all things
are now ready.
18 And they all with one con-
sent began to make excuse. The
first said unto him, I have bought
a piece of ground, and I must
needs go and see it : I pray thee
have me excused.
19 And another said, I have
bought five yoke of oxen, and I
go to prove them : I pray thee
have me excused.
20 And another said, I have
married a wife : and therefore I
cannot come.
21 So that servant came, and
shewed his lord these things. Then
the master of the house being
angry, said to his servant, Go out
quickly into the streets and lanes
of the city, and bring in hither
the poor, and the maimed, and the
halt, and the blind.
22 And the servant said, Lord,
it is done as thou hast command-
ed, and yet there is room.
23 And the Lord said unto the
servant, Go out into the high-
eirev rots
GRBEK TEXT.
cA^jueWty, * Epyt-
crOe, OTI rfBr] eTOL/J.d ecrri irdvfa..
18 TS~ \ >r f- > \ "
J\.ai fjpi^a.vTO oaro fJLtas Trapcu-
Telcrdcu travres. o irpcoros
avrcS, 'A.-ypov ^yo/jacra, KCU (
dvcfyKTjv egeAdetv /cat I8elv av-
TOV epcoTCO ere, e^e /j.e TraprjTT)-
[i.evov. 19 KCU erepoy elwe, Zevyrj
jSocSi' Tjyo/jacra Trevre, KCU Tropevo-
fj.cu 8oKifj.dcrai avrd- ecoTca are
20 x ef
fie TraprjTijfJ.ei'Oi'. KOLL ere-
etvre, JTWat/ca eyrjfjia, /cat Sid
e\6etv. 21
TOVTO ov vvajJLCu eev. /cat
Trapa."/evofj.evo$ o SouAoy e/eeu>oy
aTTT^yyetAe rcS Kvpico avrou raura.
Tore op-yicrdel? 6
TCO SovAca OLVTOV,
els ray TrAare/ay KCU pv/J.a?
rfjs TToAecos, KCU rouy Trro^ow
/Cat dvCtTTTJpOVS KCU J(O)AoVf KCU
rv^Xovf eicrayaye code. 22 Kcti
elirev o SovAos, JZvpie, yeyovev
coy eVeVa^ay, KCU en roTroy ear/.
23 77" \ f ' i \ \
l\.a.L enrev o Kvpios irpos rov
8ov\oir, ' JS^eXOe els ray oSovs
REVISED VERSION.
time to say to those k who had
been invited, Come, for all
things are now ready. And is
they all with one consent began
'to excuse themselves. The first
said to him, I have bought m a
field, and "I must "go out and
see it ; I pray thee have me
excused. And another said, 1 19
have bought five yoke of oxen,
and fl am going to prove them ;
I pray thee have me excused.
And another said, I have mar- 20
ried a wife, and, therefore, I
can not come. 'And that ser- 21
vant came, and r told his lord
these things. Then the master
of the house, being angry, said
to his servant, Go out quickly
into the streets and lanes of
the city, and bring in hither the
poor, and 'maimed, and lame,
and blind. And the servant 22
said, Lord, it is done as thou
didst command, and yet there
is room. And the lord said to 23
the servant, Go out into the
k " who had been invited ; " rots xexlrtfiivois. See v. 7, note.
i " to excuse themselves ; " itagatraod-ai.. Sharpe, Penn,
"Wakef., i)ick, Sawyer, Kend., Bloomf., M. De Wette, " sich zu
entschuldigen ; " S. Fr., " a s'excuser." This is the appropriate
sense of the verb in the middle voice. Rob. (Lex.) : " Mid. spec.
to excuse oneself absol., Luke 14 : 18." Bretsch. (in verbo) :
" De excusante sese, quod invitatus ad cceham rion venerit, #-.
legitur etiam Joseph., Antiq. 7, 8, 2, itagamjaopt-vov (soil.
5" eas av ftfj fiagvs miry ysvoiro, loiis ae).<povs ano-
itayexaleae." Beza, Castal., Goschen, " se excusare."
m " a field ; " 'Aygbv. Shai-pe, Thorn., Wesley, Scarlett, Nor-
ton, Dick., Gamp., Kend., Thelwall, M. This word occurs thirty-
six times in the N. T. In twenty-two of these, it is rendered
" field " in the E. V. ; in three, " lands ; " in six, " country ; " in
one instance by " farm," and in the passage before us, only, by
" piece of ground." The earlier translators, Tyndale, Ooverdale,
Cranmer, Geneva have used " farm." Syr., ]^- r o ("field"). De
"Wette, " einen Acker ; " S. Fr., " un champ ? " "Dan., "en Ager."
n " I must ; " e'xia av&yxrfv. Thorn., Sharpe, Norton, "Wakef.,
Camp., Kend., M.
" go out ; " ld&&v. Rob. (Lex., t verbo) : " To go, or
come out of any place." Often rendered by " come out," and " go
out," in the E. V. Vulg., Mont., Beza, Eras., Goschen, "exire ;"
Belg., "dat ick uitgaa;" De Wette, " hinauszugehen ; " S. Fr.,
"de m'en aller;" Iber., "de salir;" Diodati and Ital., "audar
fuori ; " Dan., " at gaae ud."
P "I am going ;" itogevoftcu. See ch. 12 : 30, note. Sharpe,
Penn, Scarlett, Norton, "Wakef., Dick., Camp., M.
' "And ; " nal. Penn. Norton, Dickinson, Thelwall. Belg.,
ende ; " De "Wette, " und ; " Iber., " i ; " Dan., " og-."
r " told ; " an^yysdc. See ch. 7 : 18, note. So (E. T.) Matt.
14 : 12 ; 28 : 9. Mark 16 : 10. Luke 24 : 20 ; 18 : 9. Acts
5 : 22, etc. Thorn., Sharpe, Penn, Norton, Wakef., M.
" maimed ; " avanrxtovs. The three terms, avanr^ovs, xco-
icovs, and Tuyhovs have no article. Our idiom, in cases where the
conjunction closely unites nouns, is similar to that of the Greek.
When the leading word has the article, it is not expressed before
those which follow. Gray (in Angus) cancels the three latter
articles of the E. V.
' "didst command;" &rerafs. The aorist should Lave its
usual force here, both for accuracy, and ease of enunciation in the
English equivalent. So Wakef., Kend, M., Belg., De Wette.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XIV.
163
KING JAMES' VERSION.
ways and hedges, and compel them
to come in, that my house may be
filled.
24 For I say unto you, that
none of those men which were
bidden, shall taste of my supper.
25 And there went great muli-
tudes with him : and he turned,
and said unto them,
26 If any man come to me, and
hate not his father, and mother,
and wife, and children, and breth-
ren, and sisters, yea, and his own
life also, he cannot be my disci-
ple.
27 And whosoever doth not
bear his cross, and come after me,
cannot be my disciple.
28 For which of you intending
to build a tower, sitteth not down
first, and counteth the cost, wheth-
er he have sufficient to finish it ?
GREEK TEXT.
KOI
eto"eA#eti>, 'tva.
fj.ou.
8els
K.O.I avayKacrov
'efJLia-6rj o ot/co?
24 \ ' \ ' ~ </ >
Aeyco yap vu.iv, on ou-
T&V dvSptOV KlV<aV T(OV
KeKAyfizva)v yeutrerat JJ.QV TOV
SsiTTVOV,
25 SweTropevovTo 8e OUTGO 6'
Aot TroAAor /cat crTpad)eiy
\ > \ ofi 7-rv v
?r/)o? aurouy, JbtTts
irpos fj.e, /cat ou [uo-el TOV TraTepa
ectvTov, /cat r^ fj.r}Tpa, /cat rj^z/
yvvdiKa, KCU ra re/cva, /cat rovy
uy, /cat ray aSe\cha?, fTi
R\ \ \ -, \ R'
oe /cat T^V eaurou ytv'xrjv, ov ov-
z/arat ^xoy fj-adr/Tr/s elvai. KCU
os TLS ov /3aaraet TOV crTavpov
avrov, /cat ep^erdt oTricrco
ov 8vva.TCti /J.QV
28
yap e v/j.>v, eXcav irvp-
yov oiKo8ofj.rj(rai, ou^t
aBlaras fyiffyl^ei Tr/v
' TO. Trpos dTraprt.o-fj.ov;
REVISED VERSION.
highways and hedges, and "con-
strain them to come in, that my
house may be filled. For I say 24
to you, that none of those men,
T who have been invited, shall
taste of my supper. And great 25
crowds w were going with him ;
and he turned, and said to them,
If *any one ^cometh to me, and 20
"liateth not his father, and
mother, and wife, and children,
and brethren, and sisters, "and
further, even his own life, he
can not be my disciple. And 27
whoever doth not bear his
xoss, and come after me, "he
can not be my disciple. For 28
who of you 'wishing to build a
ower, 'doth not first sit down,
and count the cost, whether
he hath 'enough f to complete
" " constrain ; " avdyxaaov. Wiclif, Norton, Angus, Thelw., M.
So (E. V.) Matt. 14 : 22. Mark 6 : 45. Acts 28 : 19. Gal. 6 : 12.
Murdock (Syr., ^SX). Heb. N. Test., *tis$ {" press," " urge ").
Kuinffil: " Verbum dvayxagetv, nt-Lat. cogere, Cic. ad Div.,
v. 6 notat, rationibus et persuasionibus repetitis, aliquem permo-
vere, vid. ad Matt. 14 : 22." As an alternative, "urge." The
allusipn is to the exercise of moral force.
T " who have been invited ; " vcav xsHfyftevcov. Thorn., Nor-
ton. See v. 10, note. This rendering corresponds with our usus
loquendi.
* "were going with ; " Zweitopsvovro. Bloomf. (N. Test.),
Sharpe, Wakef., Norton, and Sawyer, Mini-dock, " were travel-
ing." By using the progressive form of the Eng. verb, we have
an exact equivalent of the Greek imperfect, implying continuance
of action. So the Vulg., Montanus, Bras., " ibant ; " Goschen,
" proficiscebantur ; " Schott, " proficiscebatur ; " S. Fr., " allai-
ent ; " Iber., " iban."
1 " any one ; " its. Bob. (Lex.), 1'liom., Sharpe, Penn, Scar-
lett, Wakef., Dick., Sawyer, Kend., Thelwall.
f " cometh ; " fy%erai. Thelwall, Penn, Murdock. The Greek
indicative is properly represented here by the same mode in
English. So the next verb, ftiast ("hateth"). See ch. 4 : 3,
note.
* " hateth ; " ftiotz. See last note. *
* " and further, even ; " Vet 8e xal. Kendrick. Vulg., Mont,
"adhuc autem et;" Goschen, " atque adeo etiam;" Sawyer,
" and still more also ; " Iber., " i aun tambien." Heb. N. Test.,
"ba C]K1.. The rendering of the B. V. was copied from Cranmer,
TyndalV, more accurately, " moreover and." Rob. (Lex., en) :
" 'En Ss xa.1, ' and further also.' "
aa ] ]e- "VVakef., Kend.
" "wishing;" d-tlan>. Sharpe, Wakefield ("that wisheth"),
Kend., Thelwall, M., Sawyer, Murdock (Syr., jjs^). The Vulg.,
Mont., Castal., " volens." Eras., Beza, Goschen, and Schott use
" volo " in some of its inflections. Belg., " willende ; " De Wette,
" will ; " G. and S, Fr., " voulant ; " Diodati and Ital., " volendo."
The E. V. has not given " intend " as the rendering of this verb
in any other instance. See ch. 13 : 31, note. Bretsch. (D-Mco) :
" Volo ex appetitu, desidero, propensione animi, desidero, cupio,
vpto, ick wunsche."
" " doth not first sit down ; " ov%i KQIOTOV xa&iaae. Thorn.,
Penn, Dick., Kend., M., Sawyer. This order of the text is
appropriate in English.
d " he hath ; " l^. Thorn., Wesley, Scarlett, Dick., M., Saw-
yer. The indicative mode should be used here, in conformity
with the text. See ch. 4 : 3, note.
"enough;" ra. Sharpe, Norton, Kendrick. De Wette,
" genng."
1 " to complete ; " ngos cma^tiofiov. Angus, Dick., Camp.
This verb is employed to make a distinction corresponding with
164
THE GOSPEL ACCOKDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XIV.
KING JAMES' TEESION.
29 Lest haply after he hath
laid the foundation, and is not
able to finish it, all that behold it
begin to mock him,
30 Saying, This man began to
build, and was not able to finish.
31 Or what king going to make
war against another king, sitteth
not down first, and consulteth
whether he be able with ten thou-
sand to meet him that cometh
against him with twenty thou-
sand ?
32 Or else, while the other is
yet a great way off, he sendeth
an ambassage, and desireth con-
ditions of peace.
33 So likewise, whosoever he
be of you that forsaketh not all
that he hath, he cannot be my dis-
ciple.
34 Salt is good : but if the salt
have lost his savour, wherewith
shall it be seasoned?
GEEEK TEXT.
29 f' / /i/ > -
LVCt. fJ.Tf}7TOT UVTOS ttVTOV
\LOV, Kai fj.rj lo")(yovTOs e/creAe-
crat, iravres ol Becapovvrey a.p^
' 't~ ' " 30
TO.L f/jarai(fiv avrca,
OTL oSroy 6 avdpamos
Ka OVK La~)(vcrev e/c-
reAe'crar 31 'Jf TIS
iropevop.vos (
/SacnAet els iroX.ep.ov ov^l Kadi-
eras' irpSiTOv fiovXeverai el Svva-
TOS GQ-TIV eV SeKa -)(iXid(riv airav-
Trjaai. T<3 /zera e'lKOcri. ^iXidScav
3 f 3 ' * ' . 32 > t^
r avrov J i oe
eri avTov "jroppco OVTOS,
7T/><r|8exi> airoarTeiXas epa>Ta TO,
33 OVTG>S ovv -jras
os OVK ewroracrcreTai
Traari TOLS eavTov VTrdp^pvcriv,
ov Svvarai /JLOV etvai fjia0r/Trjf.
KaXov TO aXas' eav Se TO
aXas [Ji&pavdfj } ev rivi dpTvdrjcre-
EEVISED VEESIOlf.
it ? r Lest perhaps, after he 29
hath. laid h a foundation, and is
not able to finish it, all who be-
hold it should begin 'to deride
him, saying, This man began to 3ft
build, and was not able to fin-
ish. Or what king, going ] to 35
encounter another king in war,
k doth not sit down first, and
'consult whether he "is able
with ten thousand to meet him
who cometh against him with
twenty thousand ? "But if not, 32
while the other is yet "far off,
he sendeth an pembassy, and
desireth conditions of peace.
So therefore r no one of you 33
who forsaketh not all his "pos-
sessions, can be my disciple.
Salt is good : but if the salt 34
becometh tasteless, "how "shall
its saltness be restored? It is 35
the text between TC^OS oma^riafiov, in this verse, and
in v. 30. So the Iber. has here, " para completar," and in v. 30,
" acabar." As an alternative rendering, " for a completion."
f " Lest perhaps ; " tva /ignore. Dick., Rob. (Lex.,
" Haply " is obsolete, and is often confounded with "happily " by
common readers.
* " a foundation ; " &e(iil.inv. As this noun is anarthrous, the
definite article of the E. V. is omitted.
1 " to deride ; " ifinai&iv. Scarlett, Dick., Eend., M., Murd.
In more modern phraseology, we might say " to ridicule," which
would express the force of the verb in this instance. " To mock "
seems often to involve the idea of injurious treatment along with
derision, as the context shows in several cases where cftnai^ca
occurs in the N. Test.
1 " to encounter another king in war ; " avft^aicTv fia
els 7t6fa/iov. Thorn. (" in battle "), Dick., M., Kob. (Lex.,
Pallto). So this verb Acts 17 : 18, avvipalov avrcp (E. V.),
" encountered him." I suggest " battle," insteed of " war."
Kuinoel : " Est autem nobe/tos, h. I. id quod pa-M, praslium."
k " doth not sit down first ; " oigl xa&iaccs it^cSrov. The
order of the text is preserved here. It is different from that of
v. 28. See note on that verse.
i " consult ; " flovleueta.1,. As this verb is connected with
" doth sit " by " and," " consult " is proper.
m " is ; " sarir. See ch. 4 : 34, note.
" But if not ; " el Se ftr/ye. See ch. 10 : 6, note.
" far off ; " nogdco. Eob. (Lex., in verbo], Wakef., Thelwall,
M. S. Pr., " loin ; " Iber., " legos ; " Belg., " verre ; " De "Wette,
" feme ; " Diodati and Ital., " lontano ; " Dan., " langt borte."
T " embassy ; " itqeapulav. Thorn., Sharpe, Penn, Scarlett,
Norton, "Wakef., Camp., Angus, Kend., Sawyer, M. "Ambas-
sage " is obsolete.
1 " therefore ; " ovv. Sharpe, Penn, Dick., Sawyer, Thelwall,
M. Eob. (Lex., in verbo) : " Denoting the consequence of one
clause upon another, as an effect from a cause, tksrefm-e, then,
consequently."
* " no one ; " nSs ovv. Kend., Norton. Our idiom demands
that the negative should be joined to n&s, in translation. If " he "
is expressed before the equivalent of Svvarai, then the equivalent
of nas is a nominative without a verb. This mistake occurs in
the E. T ., and in some later translations, where nas is rendered
"every one." If we drop "he," and render "every one can
not," the language implies, that still " some one " can.
* " possessions ; " vna^ovoiv. See ch. 8 : 3, note.
t " becometh tasteless ; " (taiqavd-fj. Angus, M. Kend., Scar-
lett, and Campbell ("became insipid"), Sharpe ("have lost its
taste"). Eob. (Lex., in verbo): "To become insipid, tasteless."
See ch. 4 : 3, note.
" " how ; " ti> rivi. Dick. Alternative, " with what ? "
T " shall its saltness be restored?" a^TuS^asrai ; The follow-
ing note from the Rev. of Mark (9 : 50), where this verb occurs,
is in point: " Season, though literal, does not give, the thought,
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XV.
165
KING JAMES' VERSION-.
35 It is neither fit for the land,
not yet for the dunghill ; but men
cast it out. He that hath ears to
hear, let him hear.
CHAP. xv.
THEN drew near unto him all
the publicans and sinners for to
hear him.
2 And the Pharisees and scribes
murmured, saying, This man re-
ceiveth sinners, and eateth with
them.
3 And he spake this parable
unto them, saying,
4 What man of you having an
hundred sheep, if he lose one of
them, doth not leave the ninety
and nine in the -wilderness, and
go after that which is lost, until
he find it?
5 And when he hath found it,
he layeth it on his shoulders, re-
joicing.
6 And when he cometh home,
he calleth together his friends and
neighbours, saying unto them, Re-
joice with me ; for I have found
my sheep which was lost.
GREEK TEXT.
TOLL
ety 717^, oure et?
KOTrpiav tvOerov earTLv eo> /3A-
Xovaiv OLVTO. '0 e'cov U.TOL OLKOV-
eiv
CHAP. XV.
avT(
ol Te\)va.L KCU ol a/j.ap-
TcoXol, aKoveiv CLVTOV. ital Sie-
yoyyvfyv ol ^apKTaiot, KCU ol
ypap.fJLO.Tets, Aeyoi/rey, OTL ov-
TOS OLLLccpTtaXovs 7r^ocrSej(ra,
KCU. o-vvecr0lei avTols- 3 Ehre 8e
Trpos avTovs TTJV TrapafioXtjv TO.V-
TTJV, Xe-ycojf, ^ Tis oivOparrros e
V/JLCOV )(COV 6KO.TOV 7T pbfiaTO., KCU
cmoXeo-as ev e O.VT>V, ov KOLTOL-
Aewret TO. vvevrjKOVTa.vvla eV Trj
eprjfj.cS) KCU Tropevercu em TO OLTTO-
\ ^ \ tr ef > f 5 \
AcoAoy, eco? tvpr) avTO ; KLU
evpav eiriri6r]<Tiv eirl TOVS wfJLOvs
eavTov -^aipatV) G /cat eXdcav eiy
TOV OLKOV, crvyKaXei TOVS
KCU TOVS y^LTOvas, Xeyav
[tot, OTL evpov TO
LLOV TO
REVISED VERSION.
fit neither for the land, nor yet
for "the manure-heap ; they cast
it out. He who hath ears to
hear, let him hear.
CHAP. XV.
"Ann all the 'tax-gatherers l
and 'the sinners 'were drawing
near to him, 'to hear him. And 2
the Pharisees and f the scribes
murmured, saying, This s man
receiveth sinners, and eateth
with them. And he spoke this 3
parable to them, saying, What *
man of you, having a hundred
sheep, h and losing one of them,
doth not leave the 'ninety-nine
in the J desert, and go after that
which is lost, until l he findeth
it? And when he hath found 5
it, he layeth it on 'his own
shoulders, rejoicing. And when 6
he cometh home, he calleth to-
gether m his friends and neigh-
bors, saying, Rejoice with me ;
for I have found my sheep
which is that of restoring the quality (saltness) which had been
lost."
* " the mannre-heap ; " xoxgtav. This euphemism is no depar-
ture from the thought presented in the text ; the word (xoitqia)
being used generically for all articles employed to fertilize land,
like the Latin stercus and fimus. See ch. 13 : 8, note.
11 "And ;" Se. Kend., Penn, Norton, Angus, Sawyer, Murd.,
Wiclif, Eheims.
b " tax-gatherers." See ch. 3 : 12, note. Sharpe, Scarlett,
Norton, "Wakef.
c " the ; " ol. The article should be expressed here, as it is
before " tax-gatherers." The two classes are specified by it.
d " were drawing near ; " iyyit,qvreg. The progressive form
of the verb has been adopted by Thorn., Norton, Wakef., Angus,
Thelwall, and M. As " to draw near," or " nigh," occurs so fre-
quently in the E. V. in the sense of our modern term " approach,"
it is preferred to " come." The nominative is.placed before the
verb, as being the simplest and most usual arrangement in de-
clarative sentences. So Norton and Penn.
" for," which occurs in the B. V., is dropped by all later Eng.
translators. It is now nngrammatical.
' " the ; " ol. The article is retained before " scribes" for the
reason stated in note c.
s " man." As this word has no expressed equivalent in the
text, it is italicized. So Wakef.
h "and losing;" wtoUoas. Sharpe, Wesley, Scarlett, Sawyer,
Angus, Thelwall, M. Belgic, " ende verliezende ; " Iberian, " i
habiendo perdido."
' " ninety-nine ; " Iwcvrixoirtaewea. See v. 7, note p.
J " desert ; " fyqfttp. See eh. 3 : 2, note. Scarlett, Sharpe,
Dick., Camp., M.
k " he findeth ;" <%>?. Sawyer ("finds"). So N. Webster
(Bible with Amendments). See ch. 4 : 3, note.
i " his own shoulders ; " TOVS alftovs eavrov. Thelwall, Angus,
M. Vulg., JMontanus, Beza, Eras., " humeros suos ; " Goschen,
Schott, " humeris suis."
m " his ; " rovs. This being one of the cases where the article
is used with the force of the possessive (see ch. 5 : 3, note), it is
not italicized.
166
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XV.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
7 I say unto you, that likewise
joy shall be in heaven over one
sinner that repenteth, more than
over ninety and nine just persons
which need no repentance.
8 Either what woman having
ten pieces of silver, if she lose
one piece, doth -not light a candle,
and sweep the house, and seek
diligently till she find it?
9 And when she hath found it,
she calleth Iier friends and her
neighbours together, saying, Re-
joice with me ; for I have found
the piece which I had lost.
10 Likewise, I say unto you,
There is joy in the presence of
the angels of God over one sinner
that repenteth.
11 And he said, A certain man
had two sons :
12 And the younger of them
said to his father, Father, give me
the portion of goods that falleth
to me. And he divided unto them
his living.
13 And not many days after,
the younger son gathered all to-
gether, and took his journey into
a far country, and there wasted
GrKEEK TEXT.
OTI ovrco
ev TO> ovpavw eVi v\
/JLTavOOVVTL } 7} CTTt
fvvea SiKaiois, ot rives ov
eypvcri /uera^o/as 1 . 8 '\ff rty yvvTj
e^ova-a 5e/ca, eav diro-
10 -P
ourw
Ka <rapo rr/v otKiav,
KOU {rjTei ewip-eXStf, IW OTOV
evpy; 9 Kal fvpovcra cryy/caAet-
TO.L roc? (j&tAay KOU ray yetrovcK^
Xeyovcra, SvyxdpTjre /ULOI, OTI
evpov rt]v SpayjAyv rjv aTrcoAecra.
\ ' r ~ \ /
Aeyw vp.iv, x a P a ywe.Ta.i
T>V ayyeXav row Oeov
6ft a.fj.a.pT(0X< /xerai/oouvTi.
11 JE'nre 8e, ' Av6pa>7ros TLS
ft ' - ' > 12 - \ 9 <
duo VLOvy /cat etTrev o
O-VTOiV T< TTdTpl, JTa-
, 80$ (jLOt, TO liri^aXXov p.fpo$
ovcrias. KOU 8if.lX.ev O.VTOIS
TOV /3tW. 13 /Cat fJLfT OV TToXXa?
<Tvva.yayaiv a-rravTO. o
vecorepoy vios a.ir8rj[J!.r)o-v ety
v fj.a.Kpai>, /cat e/cet 8ieo~Kop- \
REVISED VERSION.
wliich was lost. I say to j'ou, 7
that "thus there "will be joy in
heaven over one sinner who
repenteth, more than over
''ninety-nine 'righteous ^persons
who need no repentance. 'Or, 8
what woman, having ten pieces
of silver, if she 'loseth one
piece, doth not light a lamp,
and sweep the house, and seek
"carefully till Y she findeth it?
And having found it, she call- 9
eth together -her friends and
neighbors, saying, Rejoice with
me, for I have found the piece
wliich I had lost. "Thus, I say 10
to you, There is joy in the pres-
ence of the angels of God over
one ^sinner who repenteth.
And he said, A certain man ll
had two sons ; and the younger 12
of them said to his father, Fa-
ther, give me the portion *of
property which falleth to me.
And he divided z his living "be-
tween them. And not many 13
days after, the younger son
athered all together, and
went abroad into c a distant
country, and there wasted his
" " thus ; " ovrta. Sharpe, Wesley, Thorn., Norton, Gamp.,
Kend., Gray (in Angus), Thelwall, M.
"will be;" carat. Kend., Penn, Scarlett, Thorn., Dick.,
Sharpe, M.
* " and" (B. V). There is nothing in the text corresponding
to "and." It is omitted by Thorn., Scarlett, Norton, Dick.,
Camp., Sawyer, M., Kend.
' " righteous ; " Stxaiotg. See ch. 14 : 14, note. So Thorn.,
Scarlett, Norton, Wakef., Dick., Campbell, Sawyer, Gray (in
Angus). Compare ch. 5 : 32, xaMaat Sacaiovs, aUa a/ea^Tta-
. Aois sis fisravotav (E. V.), " to call tfie righteous, but sinners to
repentance."
r "persons." As the equivalent of this word is not in the text,
it is italicized. So Wakef.
" Or ; " "H. Thorn., Sharpe, Wesley, Penn, Norton, Camp.,
Kend., Angus, Thelwall, M.
" loseth ; " anoUarj. See v. 4, note k.
11 " carefully ; " imfieKias. Sharpe, Norton, Dick., Campbell,
Sawyer, Angus, Keud, M., Thelwall, Bob. (Lex., in verlo).
T " she findeth ; " etgovoa. See v. 4, note k.
w " Thus ; " ovrco. See v. 7, note n.
1 " sinner who repenteth ; " a/ea^reo?.rS petnvoovvri. Alter-
native rendering, " repenting sinner." So Sharpe, Scarlett.
* " of property ; " rijs ovalas. The article should not be
disregarded. It is retained in' Belg., De Wette, G. Fr., Dan.,
Camp., Dick., Scarlett, Sharpe, Thorn., Sawyer, Tyndale, Cran.,
Genevan, Thelwall. " Property " is the rendering of Norton,
Wakef., Kend., M. Robinson (Lex., in verbo) : "In N. T., and
usually, what is to any one, what he has, i. e., substance, properly."
Liddell, " one's property."
* " his living ; " rov jiiov. Scarlett, Dick. This is the more
familiar and natural arrangement in English. It is that of Thorn.,
Sharpe, Norton, Wakef.
a " between them ; " avrozs. Thorn., Scarlett, Wakef., Dick.,
Angus, M. Our idiom demands " between " after " divided."
We say " allotted," " apportioned," or " distributed to," but not
" divided to." Angus remarks : " ' Divided, and gave them ' is
the full idea."
b "went abroad;" ansSij/ajafv. M., Sawyer. Liddell (in
verbo}: "To go abroad." So the adjective aitodijftos (anb and
Srjfiog) signifies away from one's own people, or country, from
hence, abroad. Liddell. Bretsch., "peregere, prqficiscor."
' " a distant country ; " %i6f>m> (taxgav. Thorn.,. Penn; -Scar-
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XY.
167
KING JAMES' VEESION.
his substance with riotous liv-
ing.
14 And when he had spent all,
there arose a mighty famine in
tbat land ; and he began to be in
want.
15 And he went and joined
himself to a citizen of that coun-
try ; and he sent him into his
fields to feed swine.
16 And he would fain have
filled his belly with the husks
GEBBK TEXT.
TTtcre rrjv ovcriav ayrov, coi> dcrco-
Tcof. 14 8(nravrj(ravros Sf avrov
TTO.VTO., eyevero At/uoy iayypos
Kara ryv ^copav Kivr)i> } /cat av-
ros
vcrrepi(rda.i. 15 /cat
evl rcav TTO
TTJS ^capas eKetvr/s' /cat
i> avrov els rovs aypovs
avrov fiocrKeiv xpipovs. ls /cat
eiredv/jLei ytp-icrai rr/v KoiXiav
avrov OLTTO rav /cepartW a>v
EEVISED VERSION. .
^property e by dissolute living.
And when he had spent all, it
there 'rose a mighty famine
e throughout that h country, and
he began to be in want. And 15
he went and joined himself to
a citizen of that country, and he
sent him into his fields to feed
swine. And he 'longed to fill 16
his 'stomach with the k pods
lett, Gamp., Sawyer, Kend., M. Vulg., Mont., Erasmus, Beza,
Castalio, " regionem longiuquam ; " G. Fr., " un pays eloigne ; "
Iber., " un pais lejano ; " Diodati, " paese lontano ; " Bretsch.
(fiaxoos), " longe remotus, dissitus." ,
<i "property;" ovaiav. See v. 12, note y.
" by dissolute living ; " <Sv aoiatcos. Norton. " Riotous,"
in the sense required by the text, is obsolete. Bloomfield has
this note on aocoicos " i. e., rffOTtip aoiorov. Meaning, one who
can, not lie saved, a prodigal, a dissolute person, one of whom
Alexis in Athenseus says, ' the goddess of salvation herself could
not save.' " Bretsch. (in verbo, eodem), " dissolute, hixuriose."
The term is explained by the language of v. 30 (E. V.), " which
hath devoured thy living with harlots." So 2 Maocab. 6 : 4
(where the noun aocoria occurs), To [&v ya^ Isoov aaorlas v.ai
xcofiiav in).fii>caTo vnb rcav e9"j'cav ycfd'v/iovv' fied* haiocov, xccl
Iv roTs Isools rteoifiolois yvvail nfajata^ovrcav. De Wette,
" er tippig lebte ; " S. Fr., " en vivarit avec dissolution ; " Dio-
dati, " viviendo dissolutamente." Kuincal (in loco) : " Hocorcas
proprie est id. qd. fiatoros qui servari nequit hinc sensu latiori
aacoros adhibetur de-eo qui turpiter vivit, et aootla. est vita ad
omnem turpitudinem projecta, ut Eph. 5 : 18. Tit. 1 : 6. Lex.
Cyrilli Brera. aacoria, moyveia. Deylingius Obss. Sacr., P. 3,
341, et Kypius ad h. 1. posteriori sensu in hac verborum com-
plexione capiendnm est, nam infra v. 30, legitur 6 xarayaycov
aov rov piov fisra motwcov." As an alternative rendering, the
literal one, " living dissolutely."
t "rose." This word is preferred to "arose," as being now
in general use. Both are found in various parts of the E. V.
See ch 8 : 54, note.
g " throughout that country ; " xara TTJV %co$ar. Wakefield.
Rob. (Lex., T cum accus.) : "Of place, or of motion or exten-
sion, out over, through, throughout a place." So Luke 8 : 39, y.a.&
olrp< irri' itohv (E. V.), "throughout the whole city;" 8:1,
y-ftra. no'uv (B. V.), " throughout every city." So 23 : 5. Acts
24 : 5, xara -njv olxovfttvrjv (E. V.), "throughout the world."
Mont, and Schott, " per regionem illam."
h A comma is placed after "country," in conformity with the
text.
' " longed ; " ixs&vfcec. Penn, M., Norton, Murdock. Rob.
(Lex., in verbo} : " To long for." Lidd., " to long after." " Fain"
is obsolete. The simple verb " desire " is not sufficiently strong,
to bring out the meaning, which is that of " desiring earnestly."
Heb. N. Test., wwrn. So 2 Sam. 23 : 15, 15-1 njKnx Sept.,
lned"vfi.rjae 4nv\$ . r. L (E. V.), " David longed, and said, Oh
that one would give me drink of the water of the well of Beth-
lehem." Ps. 119 : 40 (Sept. 118), 'I8ov, eTtsd-vftrjOK ras fvra-
Aas aov (E. V.), " BehoJd, I Lave longed after thy command-
ments." Gen. 31 : 30, sjtt&v/tla yao iited-vftijaas aitel&av els
rov olxov rov maToos aov (E. V.), " because thou sore longedst
after thy father's house." The preposition eni is often intensive.
As entno&eto is translated by " long," Rom. 1 : 11. 2 Cor. 9 : 14.
Phil. 1 : 8 ; 2 : 26, 1 submit " eagerly desired," as an alternative
rendering.
] " stomach ; " xodlav. Sawyer. The following note on this
word is copied from the Revis. of Mark (7 : 19) : " The stomach ;
tr t v xotilav. Dick., A. Camp., ' his stomach.' Rob. (xotiia) :
' Often as in English, for the stomach, either in men, or animals.
Mark 7 : 19. Luke 15 : 16, yepioat tfjv xodiav avrov.' Liter-
ally, the word signifies ' a hollow ' of any kind, ' a cavity,' cavum.
Bretsch., ' venter quum superior turn inferior.' As an anatomical
term, it is applied to any ventricle, or chamber, as xodia eyxeyd-
).ov, x(>Sias, etc. Liddell. So the Latin venter is the cavity
containing the stomach and intestines. Leverett (Lat. Diet.)."
k " pods ; " xeoaricov. Eendrick, Norton. Murdock (Syriac,
)^)o-fl). G. and S. Fr., " gousses ; " Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza,
Castal., Goschen, Schott, " siliquis." This word is applied to the
fruit of the carob-tree. Leverett (Lat. Diet.). So Horace,
Ep. II., 1, 123 "Vivit siliquis et pane secundo." Gesner has
this note on the passage : " Immaturis leguminum siliquis aquae
incoctis vescebantur." Anthon (Horace, note in loco) : " By sili-
quis are here meant the pods of the carob-tree, which in times of
scarcity supplied the poor with food." Rob. (Lex., in xegdrtov) :
"In N. Test, a pod, carob-pod, Luke 15 : 16, i.e., the fruit -of the
carob-tree, the ceratonia siliqua of Linnosus. These pods are
sometimes eight or ten inches long, and a finger broad. They are
eaten with relish by the poorer classes in the East; and swine, are
often fed with them."
168
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING- TO LUKE. CHAP. XV.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
that the swine did eat ; and no
man gave unto him.
17 And when he came to him-
self, he said, How many hired
servants of my father's have bread
enough and to spare, and I perish
with hunger !
18 I will arise and go to my
father, and will say unto him,
Father, I have sinned against
heaven, and before thee,
19 And am no more worthy to
be called thy son : make me as
one of thy hired servants.
20 And he arose, and came to
his father. But when he was yet
a great way off, his father saw
lumTTtntt'ihad compassion, and ran,
and fell on his neck, and kissed
him.
21 And the son said unto him,
Father, I have sinned against
heaven, and in thy sight, and am
no more worthy to be called thy
son.
22 But the father said to his
servants, Bring forth the best
robe, and put it on him ; and put
a ring on his hand, and shoes on
his feet ;
GREEK TEXT.
ol yotpor /cat ov8eis e8t-
dov ai>T<. 1T Elf eavrov Se
eX0a)v elire, TTocrot p.io~6LOi TOV
JJ.OV Trepi<rcrevov<nv ap-
, eyeb Se XIJJL<J> oaroXXvfjLai ;
18 avacrras jropevo-o/j.ai -rrpof TOV
iraTepa fj.ov, Kal epco aura, Ud-
Tep, rj/J-apTOV elf TOV OVpCWOV
\ > / / 1Q\ > '
/cat evoomov crov /cat oy/cert
el/j.1 a^LOf KXrjdrjvai vlof croir
7TOLTf](TOV p.e CO? eVO. TCOV fUCrdlCOV
CJ-QV. 20 /cat avaoTas fjX6e Trpof
TOV Tra.Te.pa. eavTOV. ' ETL Se av-
TOV fj.aKpav mriyovTos, eldev av-
TOV o TraTrjp avTOv, /cat e&vrXa'yxvi-
o-drj, /cat 8pa.fj.cov eVeVecrei' em
TOV TpayijXov O.VTOV, /cat /care^t-
\ t r 01 -y ^\
Xrj&ev avTov. eiire be avTa>
6 VLQSy IZaTep, TjfjLapTOv els TOV
ovpavov Kal evcamov trou, /cat
OVKCTI elfu a^tof K\rj&fjvai vios
crov. 22 Mitre. 8e o TraTrjp irpo?
TOVS SovXovs avTov, 'E^eveyKaTe
Tr]v (rro\r}v Trjv TrpQTrjv, /cat ev-
Sv<ra.Te avTov, /cat SOTC SO.KTV-
Xiov els TTJV x e V a avTov, /cat
elf Tovf TroSay 23 /cat
EEVISED VERSION.
which the swine 'ate ; "and yet
no one gave "any thing to him.
And when he came to himself, 17
he said, How many hired ser-
vants of my father have bread
and to spare, but I am perish-
ing with hunger ! I will mse 18
and go to my father, and will
say to him, Father, I have
sinned against heaven, and be-
fore thee, and am 'no longer 19
worthy to be called thy son ;
make me as one of thy hired
servants. And he 'rose, and 20
"went to his father. But 'while
he was yet a great way off, his
father saw him, and had com-
passion "on him, and ran and
fell on his neck, and kissed
him. And the son said to him, 2J
Father, I have sinned against
heaven, and T before thee, and
am '"no longer worthy to be
called thy son. But the father 22
said to the servants, Bring
forth the best robe, and put it
on him ; and put a ring on his
hand, and shoes on his feet ;
i "ate;" rjoSiov. "Did" is superfluous with this verb, as
there is nothing emphatic. It is dropped by Sharpe, "Wesley,
Norton, Sawyer, Eend., M. As an alternative rendering 1 , " were
eating." So Thorn., Sharpe, Walcef., Camp., Thelwall.
m " and yet ; " Kal. So B. V., John 9 : 30. Luke 8 : 13, note.
Kal has this force in Matt 6:26; 10 : 29 ; 12 : 5. John 1 : 10 ;
6 : 70 ; 17 : 25. Stuart (Gram.), 125, 4, 2, Bern., p. 285.
" any thing." There is an ellipsis of rt here. The sentence
is obviously imperfect in English, without a supplement. The
object of the verb, " gave," is expressed according to our usus
loquendi.
"I am perishing;" aTtMvftac. See oh.. 12 : 30, note. So
Thorn., Wesley, Peon, Scarlett, Norton, Wakef., Dick.,.M.
P "rise." See v. 14, note. So Scarlett. Thelwall ("rise
up").
" no longer ; " ovxcrt. Scarlett, Norton, Wakef., Camp.,
Sawyer, Kend. So (E. V.) Gal. 3 : 25. Bob. (Lex.)., Liddel,
Grove's Lex.
r " rose." Thelwall. See v. 18, note.
1 " went ; " %&d-e.. M., Gray (in Angus), Thorn., Pean, Dick.,
Camp.
" while he was yet far off;" Sn Ss airov /taxpav cme%ov-
ros. " While" signifies " during the time that." Webster (Diet).
Sharpe, Scarlett, Norton, Thelwall, Wakefield, Dick., Sawyer,
while." " Far off" {/laxficf) is the rendering of Thelwall and
Sawyer. Bob. (Lex.). So (E. Y.) Eph. 2 : 13.
"on him." Tyndale (1st Edition), Wakef., Sawyer, Penn.
This supplement is properly inserted Lube 10 : 33, where the text
is the same (l<mA.ayxvio&T/) E. V., " had compassion on him."
So Matt. 20 : 34, Znlayxvtad-els Ss o 'Irjaovs (E. Y.), " So Jesus
had compassion cm them." The sentence is harsh and imperfect
without a supplement, as it does not accord with, our idiom. If
no supplement is used, the verb should be rendered " was moved
with compassion," as in (E. Y.) Matt. 18 : 27. Mark 1 : 41.
' " before ; " ivtamov. So (E. Y.), v. 18.
w " no longer ;" ovxen. So v. 19. See note.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XV.
169
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
23 And bring hither the fatted
calf, and kill it; and let us eat,
and be merry:
24 For this my son was dead,
and is alive again ; he was lost,
and is found. And they began to
be merry.
26 Now his elder son was in
the field : and as he came and
drew nigh to the house, he heard
music and dancing.
26 And he called one of the
servants and asked what these
things meant.
27 And he said unto him, Thy
brother is come ; and thy father
hath killed the fatted calf, be-
cause he hath received him safe
and sound.
28 And he was angry, and
would not go in ; therefore came
his father out, and entreated him.
29 And he answering said to
his father, Lo, these many years
do I serve thee, neither trans-
gressed I at any time thy com-
mandment ; and yet thou never
gavest me a kid, that I might
make merry with my friends :
30 But as soon as this thy son
was come, which hath devoured
thy living with harlots, thou hast
killed for him the fatted calf.
31 And he said unto him, Son,
thou art ever with me ; and all
that I have is thine.
GREEK TEXT.
eWy/cavrey TOV fJLocr^ov TOV cn-
TSVTOV dvcraTe, /cat (payovTes ev-
24 f ? tit
OTI OVT05 O VLOS
ye/cpoy TJV, /cat dvefacre' /cat
a7ToAft)Acoy 97 v, /cat evpeOq. Kai
fie 6 utoy avTOv 6 TrpecrfivTepos
ev dypco' /cat coy e/j^o/iewy 17774-
cre riy ot/cta, rjKovcre
/cat
26
/cat 7r/>ooYcaAe<ra-
fj.evos era Ttav Tratficof avrov,
Trvv0aveTO rl eiij raura. 2T 6 fie
avTcS, ' OTI 6 dfieA0oy crov
KCU e'Ovcrev o
crov
TOV fJLOCr^OV TOV CTITCVTOV, OTI
' ' * ' '\ r> 28 > x-
aivovTa O.VTOV cnreXapev. j 2p-
yicrdrj fie, /cat OVK rjdfXev etcreA-
delv. 6 ofiv TraT-rjp avTOv eeX-
dcav Trape/caAet O.VTOV. 29 6 Se
s ITT TO) TTCtTpi, 'ISoV,
Tocravra errj SovXeuco crot, KCU ou-
SeVore evToXyv crov TrapfjXdov, /cat
/jLol ovSeiroTe eSco/cay tpxpov, 'iva
j.eTa TCOV (j)iXcav pov ev<hpav6>.
30 " > ' ?
ore oe o utoy <rov OVTOS o /cara-
(paycov crov TOV fiiov /iera TTO/J-
vOov rjXdfv, edvcras avTco TOV
TOV oTreuroV. 31 6 fie
avTtS, TEKVOV, crv Travrore
p.T fJ.OV ft, KCU TTcivTCt TO. fJ.CC
REVISED VERSION.
and bring 1 the fatted calf, and 23
kill it; and let us eat and be
merry ; for this my son was 24
dead and is alive again ; he was
lost, and is found. And they
began to be merry. Now his 25
elder son was in the field. And
as he came and r drew near'
the house, he heard music and
dancing. And lie called one 26
of the servants, and asked him
what these things meant. And 27
he said to him, Thy brother is
come ; and thy father hath kill-
ed the fatted calf, because he
hath received him safe and
sound. And he was angry, and 28
would not go in ; therefore his
father a went out, and entreated
him. And he, answering, said 29
to his father, b Behold, c so many
years do I serve thee, and
d never transgressed thy com-
mandment ; and yet thou never
gavest me a kid, that "I might
be merry with my friends ; but so
when this thy son came, who
hath devoured thy living with
harlots, thou hast killed B the
fatted calf for him. And he 31
said to him, h Child, thou art
ever with me, and all which I
1 " hither," which occurs in the E. V., is not warranted by the
text. In (E. V.) Matt. 17 : 17, " bring hither " is the equivalent
of rfyeze caSe. So code occurs Matt. 14 : 18. "Hither" is
dropped by Norton, "Wakef., Camp., Sawyer, Kend., Thelwall.
Nothing corresponding to it in Belg., De "Wette, S. Fr., Iber.,
Ital.
* " drew near ; " yyytoe. Thorn., Penn. " Near " is prefera-
ble for the sake of euphony.
1 ," to," in the E. V., is superfluous according to present usage.
It is dropped by Norton, Wakef.> Camp., Kend.
* " went out ; " ^eid-cav. Thorn., Norton, Penn, &L, Murd.
Vulg., Mont, Eras., Beza, Castal., Goschen, Schott, " egressns ; "
Belg., " ging ; " De "Wette, " ging ; " Iber., " salio."
b " Behold ; " 'ISov. Thorn., Dick., Angus, Thelwall, M. See
ch. 1 : 44, note.
c " so many ; " Toaavra. Kend., Angus, Wesley, Penn, Nor-
ton, "Wakef., Sawyer, Thelwall.
d "never transgressed;" ovS&itors na^ffl.9ov. Kend. OiiSe-
Ttore is rendered " never " by Camp., Sawyer, M., Norton.
" I might be merry ; " svy^ar&eo. This word should be
rendered as in v. 23. So M., Thorn.
f " when ; " ore. Kend., Sawyer, Thelwall. Eob. (Lex.).
e " the fatted calf." This change in the order of the sentence
gives it a construction more familiar and natural, harmonizing
with our conversational style.
h " Child ; " Ttxvov. Sharpe. Eob. (Lex., in verbo) : "As a
term of endearing address in the vocative, like English my child.''
See ch. 2 : 48, note.
170
THE GOSPEL ACCOEDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XVI.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
32 It was meet that we should
make merry, and be glad : for
this thy brother was dead, and is
alive again ; and was lost, and is
found.
CHAP. XVI.
AND he said also unto his disci-
ples, There was a certain rich
man which had a steward ; and
the same was accused unto him
that he had wasted his goods.
2 And he called him, and said
unto him, How is it that I hear
this of thee? give an account of
thy stewardship : for thou mayest
be no longer steward.
3 Then the steward said with-
in himself, What shall I do ? for
my lord taketh away from me the
stewardship : I cannot dig ; to
beg I am ashamed.
era.
GREEK TEXT.
32
KCLL 'xaprjv.at e'Set, on 6 aeA<j>oy
(rev OVTOS veKpos Tjv, KCU av4-
fycre' /cat aTToAcaAcoy rjv, /cat eu-
CHAP. XVI.
' EAEFE 8e /cat jrpos TOVS
fj,a0r)Tas O.VTOV, 'Avdpco-iros TIS
f)v TrAoucrtoy, oy efyev olKOvofjiov
Kai OVTOS SiefiXr/dr) avrw coy 8ia-
crKopTritjov TO. VTrdpytivTa. avToVi,
2 /cat (f)cavrjcras OVTOV eiTrev aurcp,
Tl TOVTO O.KOVCO TTCpl (TOV / aTTO-
5oy TOV Xo-yov rrjs oiKOvofJiias
crov ov 'yap 8uvr)(rr) en QIKOVO-
3 .EiTre 5e eV eavrw 6 OIKO-
TL Troirjo-ca, OTI o Kvpios
P.OV d<f)aipCTat Trjv olKovo^iav
air fj.ov; (TKaiTTeiv OVK ia~)(y<a,
aior)(yvop.a.i. 4 eyvoov TL
REVISED VERSION.
have is thine. 'It was right Ho 32
be merry and be glad ; for this
thy brother was dead, and is
alive again, k he was lost; and is
found.
CHAP. XVI.
AND he said also to his disci- 1
pies, There was a certain rich
man who had a steward ; and
he was accused to him ^of
wasting his "possessions. And 2
he called him, and said to him,
What is this, that I hear of
thee? 'render f an account of
thy stewardship; for thou s canst
be ""steward no longer. And 3
the steward said within him-
self, What shall I do? for my
lord 'taketh away the steward-
ship from me ; I can not dig, to
beg I am ; ashamed. ] I know 4
1 " It was right ;" eSsi. M. Eob. (Lex., Set) : " Spoken of
what is right in itself, or prescribed by law, custom, reason, it is
riglit, or proper." " Meet " is obsolete.
5 "to be merry and be glad;" EvyQavfrrjvai. y.ai %ai!>rjva.i.
This literal rendering presents all that the text contains. Should
it be deemed advisable to introduce the subjects, this phrase
might be employed (for eSec evcpqav. H. r. L), " We ought to be
merry and be glad." *ESei has :been paraphrased, " We ought,"
by Angus, and some later translators. Eras., " Loetari autem et
gaudere." Beza, " Exhilerari vero et gaudere." Mont., " Ob-
lectari autem et gaudere oportebat." Goschen, " Lsetari autem
et oblectari decebat."
k " he was lost ; " anoleoiais yv. Camp. So (E. Y.) in v. 24.
Thorn. (" he was indeed lost").
" he ; " ovros. Kendrick, Wesley, Dick., Sawyer. See ch.
9 : 24, note. In such constructions, " the same " is not in use, at
present.
b " of wasting ; " cos SiaLoxo^ni^oiv. Angus, Kend., Sharpe,
Penn, Wakef., Camp., Sawyer, M. The more literal reading, " as
wasting," is less proper, according to our usus loquendi.
' " possessions ; " vna^ovra. M. See ch. 8 : 3, note.
* " What is this ; " 27 TOVTO. Thorn., Sharpe, Penn, Scar-
lett, Norton, Wakef., Dick., Camp., Kend., Angus, M., Sawyer,
Murdock. Schott, " Quid hoc est ; " G. and S. Pr., De Sacy,
" Qu' est-ce." This is an elliptical phrase for Tl icrct -rovro;
Eob. (Lex., T). Compare Mark 1 : 27.
" render ; " caioSos. Kend., Camp., Thelwall, Murdock,
Sawyer. Bob. (Lex., in verbo) : "'AnoSiSovai ).6yov, to give
account, to render an account for. Luke 16:2." Bretscli.,
" rationem reddere." So (E. V.) Matt. 22 : 41 ; 22 : 21. Luke
20 : 25. Kom. 13 : 7, etc.
f " an account ; " TOV ).6yot>. As an alternative rendering,
"the account." So De Wette, "die Bechnung;" Iber., "la
cuenta." To say the least, this is fully, as accurate, as " an
account."
s " canst be ; " Sw^ar;. Thorn., Sharpe, Wesley, Penn, Scar-
lett, Sawyer, Angus, Kend., M., Thelwall.
k " steward no longer ; " ert olxovofierv. So Camp. This
arrangement is more natural than that of the E. V., as the auxili-
ary is not separated from the principal verb. In point of enphon-
ny, it is decidedly preferable.
' " taketh' away ; " aycuq&rai. As an alternative, " is taking
away." So Bloomflcld (N. Test.). Wakefield (" is taking from
me"). M.
' " I know ; " eyvtov. Wesley, Sharpe, Angus, M., Thelwall,
Penn, Scarlett, and Sawyer. Murdock (Syr., &,!). So Tyn-
dale, Cranmer, Geneva render this verb " I wot " (= " I know ") ;
Bheims, " I know ; " Vulg., Mont., Eras., Castal., " scio ; " Beza,
Goschen, Schott, " novi ; " Belg., " Ik weet ; " De Wette, " Ich
weiss ; " G. and S. Fr., " je sais ; " Iber., " To se ; " Dan., " jeg
veed." Heb. N. Test., six. This verb is not rendered by
resolve, in any other instance in the E. Y. ; nor does " resolve "
occur except here.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XVI.
171
KING JAMES' VERSION.
4 I am resolved what to do,
that when I am put out of the
stewardship, they may receive me
.into their houses.
5 So he called every, one of his
lord's debtors unto him, and said
unto the first, How much owest
thou unto my lord ?
6 And he said, An hundred
measures of oil. And he said
unto him, Take thy bill, and sit
down quickly, and write fifty.
7 Then said he to another, And
how much owest thou? And he
said, An hundred measures of
wheat. And he said unto him,
Take thy bill, and write four-
score.
8 And the lord commended the
unjust steward, because he had
done wisely : for the children of
this world are in their generation
wiser than the children of light.
GREEK TEXT.
iva
orav
rfjy oiK.ovofj.las, Se^covrai yue el?
5
TOVS OIKOVS OLVTCOV
era e/cacrror' TV
Xpe(X>(j)l\TciJl> TOV KVplOV eCLVTOV,
eAeye TW TrpooTco, Uoo~ov 6(pel-
Aet? T(S Kvpiw P.OV; 6 '0 Se el-
irev, 'EK.O.TQV ftdrovs eAatou.
Kai ebrev CLVTCO, Atj^ai crov TO
ypdfj-fJLa, /cat Kadlcras
ypd\jsov TrevrrjKOVTa. 7
, Sv Be TTOCTOV o(pei-
Aetp; '0 8e eiVev, 'EKO.TOV KO-
povs CT'LTOV. Kcu Aeyet avra,
<rov TO ypd/j.fJLa, /cat ypd-
8
KVplOS TQV OIKOVO/JLOV TTJS
ias, OTL (j)povi/j.cos eTroir/crev
OTI 01 v'io\ TOV alcavos TOVTOV
<[)povifjt.oc>Tepoi virep TOVS viovs
TOV <f)(0Tos ety TTJV yei/edi/ rrjv
REVISED VERSION.
what l l will do, that when I am
put out of the stewardship,
they may receive me into their
houses. And 'calling "each one
of his 'lord's debtors to him, he
said to the first. How much
owst thou to my lord? And
he said, A hundred measures of
oil. And he said to him, Take
thy bill, and sit down quickly,
and write fifty. Then he said
to another, And how much
owest thou ? And he said, A
hundred measures of wheat.
And "he saith to him, Take thy
bill, and write "eighty. And
the lord 'praised the unjust
steward, because r he had done
'prudently; for 'the children
of this world are a more prudent
'with respect to "'their own gen-
eration, than the children of
' " I will do ; " notqaeo. Gray and Pechy (in Angus), Penn,
Scarlett, Sawyer, Thelwall, M. Belg., " ik doen zal ; " S. Fr.,
"je ferai;" Iber., "hare." "Will" is here expressive of deter-
mination, not simply a sign of future action. Gray (on Angus).
i " calling to him ; " mgooxaAeaaftevos. See ch. 7 : 19, note.
So Penn.
m " each one ; " JW exaarov. Bloomf. (Annot.), Kendrick,
Thelwall, Sawyer. Murdock (Syr., fl ^). Mont, " unumquem-
que ; " Belg., " een iegelijk ; " De Wette, " einen jeglichen ; "
Iber., " cada uno."
n _^." When words commence with consonant sounds, " an "
is improper.
" he saith ; " Uym. Sharpe, Wesley, Wakef., Dick., Thel-
wall. "Vulg., Mont., Erasmus, Castalio, " inquit ; " Goschen and
Schott, " dicit." The B. V., following Tyndale, uses the imper-
fect instead of the present tense.
P " eighty ; " oySo^xovra. Thomson, Norton, Dick., Sawyer,
Camp., Kend., Angus, M. " Four-score " is obsolete.
"'praised;" ejirfveaer. Sharpe, Sawyer, Thelwall, Eheims.
Bengel, " laudavit." Kob. (Lex., in verbo) : " To praise much, to
applaud." Lidd. and Greenfield, " to praise ; " Bretsch., " laudo."
This verb occurs six times in the E. V. It is rendered " praise,"
1 Cor. 11 : 2, 17, 22 (bis) ; in Bom. 15 : 11, "laud ;" and only
in the present instance " commend." The noun enatvos occurs
eleven times in the Greek text. In all these cases, the E. V. ren-
ders it by the equivalent noun " praise." On the other hand
(with the exception occurring' here), " commend " is the rendering
of itttQa-c&iifu, Luke 23 : 46. Acts 14 : 23 ; 20 : 32 ; of na.qi-
atri/u, 1 Cor. 8 : 8 ; of avvumivca, 2 Cor. 3:1; 5 : 12 ; 10 : 12 ;
of aweardaj, Bom. 3 : 5 ; 5 : 8 ; 16 : 1. 2 Cor. 4:2; 10 : 18
(bis) ; 12 : 11.
r " he had done ; " eTtolrjaev. Alternative, " he had acted."
So Scarlett, Pechy (on Angus).
"prudently ;" ypoviftcos (axat; fay.). Sharpe, Penn, Kend.,
Scarlett, Camp., Thelwall, M., Angus, Wiclif, Robinson (Lex., in
verbo). De Wette, " kluglich ; " G. and S. Fr., " prudemment ; "
Iber., " prudentement ; " Kuincel, "prudenter." The Belg. has
happily expressed the thought by " voorzichtelijk " (" with fore-
sight"). So Norton, " with forethought." The following render-
ing is suggested for consideration, " he had acted with forethought
have more forethought than," etc.
1 " the children ; " ol viol. As an alternative rendering here,
and in the next member of the sentence, " sons." So Thelwall.
" more prudent ; " ygovtftcoTe/joc. See note supra, on this
verse. This arrangement of the sentence is most simple and
perspicuous. So Sharpe, Wakef., Wesley, Scarlett, Pent).
T " with respect to ; " sis. M., Angus. So Eobinson (Lex.,
yeped, in loco) : " In respect to their own generation, those with
whom they live, and have to do." One of the significations of els
Bob. (Lex.) is " as to, in respect to." (More correctly, " with
respect to.") Greswell (quoted by Bloomf., N. Test.), " unto, or
for their own generation."
w " their own ; " iavrcSv. Thelwall, Angus, Eobinson (Lex.,
1T2
THE GOSPEL ACCOEDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XVI.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
9 And I say unto you, Make to
yourselves friends of the mammon
of unrighteousness ; that when ye
fail, they, may receive you into
everlasting habitations.
10 He that is faithful in that
which is least, is faithful also in
aauch ; and he that is unjust in the
least, is unjust also in much.
11 If therefore ye have not
been faithful in the unrighteous
mammon, who will commit to
your trust the true riches ?
12 And if ye have not been
faithful in that which is another
man's, who shall give you that
which is your own ?
13 No servant can serve two
masters : for either he will hate
GREEK TEXT.
eavrcov elcri. 9 Kayw vfj.lv Ae'-
yo), UoLTfjcrare eauroty (jfr/Aouy e/c
rov fj.afj.cava rijy a&/aay, a/a,
orav e/cA/7r??re, Se^cavrat, u/tay eiy
\ / / in < r\
ray cuamovy ovc^ray. U m-
a-TOs eV eXa^lcrrca KOI eV TroAAaJ
7TK7TOS i<TTl. KOtl O tV fAa^iCTTG)
aStKO? Kai ev TToXXS dBiKO? ecmv.
1 el oiiv ev TCO dSl/cca fj.aiJ.cava
TTifTTol OVK eyevecrde, TO a\rj0i-
vov T'LS v[J.lv mcrrevcrei; 12 KOL
el ev TCO dXXoTpicp TTLCTTOL OVK
eyevecrde, TO vfj-trepov r/y vfj.lv
dcocret; ls OvSeis oi/ceV^y Bvva-
rai Svcrl Kvpiois SovXevetv 77
EBVISED VERSION.
light. And I say to you, Malce 9
'for yourselves friends y with
"the unrighteous mammon ; that
when ye fail, "they may receive
you into b the everlasting habi-
tations. He who is faithful 10
c in the least, is faithful also in
much, and he who is unjust in
the least, is unjust also in much.
If, thererefore, ye have not been 11
faithful in the unrighteous mam-
mon, d who 'will entrust 'to you
the true riches ? And if ye have 12
not been faithful in that which
is ^anothers, who h will give
you that which is your own ?
No servant can serve two mas- is
ters ; for he will 'either hate
yereA, in loco}. S. Fr., " leur propre generation ; " Ital., " lor
propria generazione."
* "for yourselves;" lavrots (dativus commodi). Thomson,
Penn. " For " accords with present usage, when the preposition
is expressed. We often omit it, in this construction. Such
omission here would be attended with some obscurity to common
readers.
r " with ; " lv.. Thorn., Penn, Scarlett, Camp., M., Murdock.
Iber., " con." One of the significations of IK is that of " the
instrument or means, from, by, with which any thing is done."
Hob. (Lex., in verbo et loco}. Compare Rev. 3 : 18 ; 17 : 2, 6 ;
18 : 3, 19.
* " the unrighteous mammon ; " rov ftaftcava -rfjs aStaias.
This is a Hebraism for fiaptcova aSlaov, and should be rendered
as in (B. V.) v. 11. Compare tbv olxovoftov rfjs aSutlas, v. 8,
and o x^nrjs rjjs aSmias, ch. 18 : 6. So Cramner, Kend., M.
De "Wette, " dem ungerechten Mammon ; " Iber., " las riquezas
injustas ; " Belg., " onrechtvaardigen Mammon."
* " they may receive you ; " Ssgcovrat -upas. As an alternative
rendering, " ye may be received." So Thorn., Wakef., Dick., M.
In this case, the verb is regarded as impersonal. In point of
fact, as Kuinoel observes, " In sterna autem domicilia recipit
non nisi Deus." Verbal exactness demands the rendering " they
may receive you," while the thought designed to be conveyed is,
" ye may be received." Kuinosl : " Pluralis legitur, quoniam
prsecepit y&ovs ad quod referri debet, unde non necesse est, ut
Segavrat cum aliis impersonaliter positum paternus, hoc sensu ut
recipiamini." Yulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, Schott, Goschen, "reci-
piant vos ; " Costal., " admittant vos ; " Belg., " zij u mogen ent-
fangen;" De Wette, "sie euch aufuehmen;" S. Fr., "ils vous
re50ivent ; " Iber., " os reciban ; " Ital., " vi ricevano."
b " the everlasting habitations ; " rag altovlovs axiivds. Thorn.,
Sharpe, Wesley. The article is retained on the ground that exqvds
is contrasted with rovs otxovs avrtSr, in v. 4. In other words, the
steward expected that his lord's debtors would receive him in their
houses. These houses were earthly, temporal. But the mansions
into which those who obeyed the Saviour's command, would be re-
ceived, were heavenly, eternal The distinction is brought out with
more force by the article ias. The article is retained by Norton,
"the eternal habitations ;" Sawyer and Bheims, "the eternal taber-
nacles ;" Camp., " t je eternal mansions ;" Belg., " de eeuwige taber-
nakelen *" Luther and De Wette, " die ewigen Hutten ; " G. Fr.,
" les tabernacles eternels ; " S. Fr., " 3es tentes eternels ; " Iber.,
" las habitationes eternas ; " Diodati, " ne' tabernacnli eterni ; "
Dan., " de evige Boliger." G. Campbell remarks on this passage :
" The article has been very improperly, in this passage, overlook-
ed by our translators. It adds to the precision, and, consequently,
to the perspicuity of the application."
" " in the least ; " ev IAa//or^. So (B. V.) in the next mem-
ber of the sentence. Wesley, Kend., Tyndale, Cranmer, Geneva,
Eheims. Vulg., Mont., Eras., Goschen, " in minimo ; " Castalio
and Schott, " in re minima ; " Belg., " in't minste." Alternative
rendering, " in a very little," as (B. V.) Luke 19 : 17 (ev slttii-
arca). 1 Cor. 4:3. So Angus and M.
A " who will entrust ; " tit TtioTevoet. Sharpe, Thorn., Wes-
ley, Penn, Norton, Camp., M.
" will entrust ; " rtwieiosi. Kend., Angus, Thom., Sharpe,
Wesley, Penn, Norton, Camp., Thelwall, M.
f " to you ; " vfiTv. Kend., Thom, Sharpe. Perhaps the
phrase " entrust you with the true riches " would be preferable, as
more idiomatic. So Wesley.
e " anothers ; " ailorqUff. Thom., Sharpe, Wesley, Sawyer,
Kend., Angus, M. Compare Matt. 25 : 14-29.
11 " will give ; " Stooei. Wesley, Scarlett, Norton, Wakefield,
Dick., Camp., Kend., M.
1 " either ; " ^. This is the appropriate place for the conjunc-
tion, according to our usus loquendi, as well as for euphony. So
Kend., M., Thom., Dick., Sawyer.
THE GOSPEL ACCOKDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XYI.
173
KING JAMES' VERSION.
the one, and love the other ; or
else he will hold to the one, and
despise the other. Ye cannot
serve God and mammon.
14 And the Pharisees also, who
were covetous, -heard all these
things, and they derided him.
15 And he said unto them, Ye
are they which justify yourselves
before men; but God knoweth
your hearts : for that which is
highly esteemed among men, is
abomination in the sight of God.
16 The law and the prophets
were until John : since that time
the kingdom of God is preached,
and every man presseth into it.
17 And it is easier for heaven
and earth to pass, than one tittle
of the law to fail.
GEEEK TEXT.
yap TOV era /jucrrjcrei, KCU. TOV
erepov d-yctTrrjcrei' r/ eVoy
Tcti, KCU. TOV erepov
cret. ov 8vvacr0e Oeco SovXeveiv
"HKOVOV 8e TO.VTO.
KCU. ol $apio~dioi (j)iXdpyvpoi
KCU
avTov. 15 KOU tlirev avros,
'l^iety core ol BiKaiovvTes eav-
TOVS evcoiriov TCOV dvdpcoTTCov, 6
8e Oeof ytvcocrKei ray /ca/oS/ay
vp.S>v' OTI TO ev dvdpcoTrois v'^nrj-
Xov ft8eXv/p.a evcomov TOV 0eov
9 Ifi*/-*/ \f
ecrTLv. U vofjios KCU. OL irpo-
<f)f)Tai ecay ' Iccidvvov diro Tore 77
fiacriXeia TOV Oeov cvayyeXi^e-
TCU, KCU. Tray ely avTrjv /3iaerat.
17 77 > ' ^>' J v >
JZVKOTTa>TpOV O O~Tl TOV 0V-
pavov Kal Tr]v yrjv irapeXdeiv, 77
REVISED VERSION.
the one, and love the other;
J or he will hold to the one, and
despise the other. Ye can not
serve God and mammon. And 1*
the Pharisees, 'being 'lovers of
money, m also heard all these
things, and "they scoffed at him.
And he said to them, Ye are 15
"those who justify yourselves
before men ; but God knoweth
your hearts ; for that which is
highly esteemed among men, is
pan abomination in the sight of
God. The law and the proph- 16
ets were until John ; since that
time the kingdom of God is
preached, and 'every one .press-
eth into it. And it is easier 17
for heaven and earth r to pass
away, 'than for one tittle of the
l " or'; " rj. " Else " (copied by E. V. from Tyndale) is super-
fluous. It is omitted by Kend., Thorn., Thelwall, M., Sharpe,
Wesley, Norton, Wakef., Sawyer.
k " being ; " vnagiovrss. Thelwall. The participial construc-
tion is retained, as the phrase " who were lovers of money " is
ambiguous. It may imply that a certain portion of the Pharisees
were lovers of money, when in fact, the charge by the use of the
participle is made general against the sect. Comp. Matt. 23 : 14.
Scarlett has " being."
i "lovers of money;" yv}.a^yv^ot. Norton, Wakef., M.
Thorn, and Camp., " who loved money ; " Murdoclr, " they loved
money." Syr., \l* 00 oi ^PLi. Heb. N. Test., qoa iniik.
Bob. (Lex., in verbo), " money-loving ; " Bretschneider, " argenti
amans." In 2 Tim. 6 : 10, the noun ydn^yv^ia. is rendered in
the E. V. " love of money." $da$yvqos occurs only here, and
2 Tim. 3 : 2, where it is rendered " covetous." In all other cases
where "covetous" occurs (1 Cor. 5 : 10, 11 ; 6 : 10. Eph. 5 : 5),
the Greek word is itleovexrijs. By rendering 2 Tim. (as above
" lovers of money "), we have a uniform translation. De Wette,
" welche das Geld liebten ; " S. Fr., " amateurs d'argent ; " Iber.,
" amadores del dinero."
m " also ; " xal. Numerous mistakes occur in the E. V. from
giving " also " a wrong position. The correct rule is to bring 1 it
as near as possible to that word, whose signification it modifies.
In the case before us, the word is " heard ; " i. c., " the Pharisees
also heard," etc. S. Fr., " entendaient aussi ; " Diodati, " udivano
anche ; " Dan., " horte ogsaa."
" they scoffed at ; " ^sfcvartj^or. Norton, Wakef. ( "scoff-
ing at"), M. Bob. (Lex., in verbo) : " To scoff at." This verb
occurs in one other instance, viz., Luke 23 : 35, where it should
receive the same translation. The preposition (c) is intensive.
Liddell (fivxrtjgi'Gco). The simple form fivxTtjpl&fiai occurs but
once, Gal. 6:7. As the simple verb has the etymological force
of turning up the nose at (deriding), or, in modern parlance, sneer-
ing at one, exfivxrr;$ico is most properly rendered by a stronger
expression, " scoff at." Bretsch. (in verbo) : "Naso adunco suspen-
do, irrideo, adjuncta notione contemptus." Heb. N. Test., sissi\
Belg., " zij beschimpten ; " De Wette, " verhohneten ; " Iber.,
" escarnecian."
" those who justify ; " ol Sixaiovvres. Present usage requires
" those" rather than " they," before the relative. So Kendrick,
Wakef.
P " an abomination ; " pdefoyfta. Thorn., Sharpe, Wesley,
Scarlett, Norton, M., Sawyer. Belgic, " een grouwel;" De
Wette, " ein Grauel ; " S. Fr., " une abomination ; " Ital., " nn'
abbominazione."
q " every one ; " nas. Thorn., Sharpe, Scarlett, Penn, Norton,
Wakef., Sawyer, Kend., M., Murdock. See ch. 14 : 11, note, and
E.Y., 6 -.40; 11:10.
r " to pass away ; " na^d-sZv. So (E. V.) Matt. 24 : 35.
Mark 13 : 31 (bis). Luke 21 : 32, 33. 2 Cor. 5:17. Jas. 1:10.
2 Pet. 3 : 10. Eev. 21 : 1. Scarlett, Penn, Norton, Wakef.,
Dick., Sawyer, Angus, Thelwall, M., Rob. (Lex.).
" than for;" rj. Wesley, M., Penn, Dick., Sawyer, Angus.
174
THE GOSPEL ACCOEDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XVI.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
18 Whosoever putteth away
his wife, and marrieth another,
comraitteth adultery ; and who-
soever marrieth her that is put
away from her husband, commit-
teth adultery.
19 There was a certain rich
man, which was clothed in purple
and fine linen, and fared sumptu-
ously every day :
20 And there was a certain
beggar named Lazarus, which was
laid at his gate, Ml of sores.
21 And desiring to be fed with
the crumbs which fell from the
rich man's table : moreover, the
dogs came and licked his sores.
22 And it came to pass, that
GREEK TEXT.
TOV vofjiov fi'iav Kepalav Treo'elv.
18 Has o aTToXvcov Trjv
avTov KCU yct/ucoz/ ereoaz' fj.oi)(fV6f
Tray
O.TTO <v-
REVISED VERSION.
law to fail. 'Every one who 18
putteth away his wife, and niar-
rieth another, committeth adul-
tery ; and every one who mar-
rieth her "who hath been put
away from her husband, com-
mitteth adultery. 'Now, there 19
was a certain rich man who
was clothed in purple and fine
linen, and fared sumptuously
every day. And there was a 2b
certain w poor man, named Laz-
arus, *who was laid at his gate,,
full of sores, and ^longing to be 21
fed with the crumbs which fell
from the rich "man's table ; "but
even the dogs came, and licked
TOV. 22 eyeVero Se ouroOavelv his sores. And it came to pass, 22
8pos yafiaw fjiot^evei. w *Av-
Opcotros Se Tts T)v TrAovcTioy, KOL
iropfyvpav KOL /3vcr-
KO.& rjfi.epav
20
7T/D09
fJ.fVO? }
TOV
21
5 /
oe
b? ej3
avrov
TIS r)v
?}A/ca)-
KOL
i \
GOTO
TOOV
TTLTTTOVTUlV O.TTO TTS
TrAoucr/oy aAAa KO\
TOW
TOV
o
TO. eXicr) aii-
The fact that almost every one who attempts to quote this pas-
sage as it stands in the E. V., supplies the word "for," shows
that our idiom demands it. It should be inserted, and italicized.
" Every one ; " Has. So (E. V.) Luke 6 : 40 ; 11 : 10. See
ch. 14 : 11, note. So Wakef., M., Dick., Sawyer, Angus, Thel-
wall. Rob., Lex., nag (2).
" "who bath been put away;" &.nofa),-v/ji&ip> (perf. part.).
Angus, M. Thomson and Wakef. ("who hath been divorced"),
Norton ("has been separated"). Vulg., Eras., Beza, Goschen,
" dimissam ; " Mont, and Schott, " repudiatam ; " G. and S. JY.,
" qui a ete repudiee ; " ItaL, " ch' e stata ripudiata."
" " Now ; " St. Wakef., Angus, M., Thelwall. G. Fr., " or ; "
Diodati, " or." This particle connects the illustration with the
subject of the preceding 1 context the abuse of wealth vv. 11, 15,
etc. See Bloomfield (N. Test., in loco). Tyndale followed the
Vulg., and dropped the particle. He was copied by the E. V.
It is retained by Beza, Oastalio, Syriac (^), Heb. N. Test.
(irrjt), Belg.
w "poor man;" ntto^be. Thorn., Kend., Sharpe, Wakefield,
Dick., Camp., Sawyer, Murdock, M. Mont., Oastal., Goschen,
Schott, " pauper ; " S. Fr., " un pauvre ; " Iber., " un pobre ; "
De Wette, "Armer." Bloomf. (N. Test.) says : " Bender, not a
beggar, but a poor destitute person, as the usus loquendi and the
contest require." The proper term for " beggar " is ^oaodnjg.
So the participle ^oaanoiv, John 9 : 8, " begged," where the
critical Editions have itgooaiTtis- Heb. N. Test., 133. Syriac,
|I'^M^ IFcca%bs, (properly an adjective) occurs thirty-four
times in the N. Test. Twice (in this passage) it is rendered
" beggar ; " once, Gal. 4:9, " beggarly ; " in all other cases,
" poor." I Lave italicized " man." The rendering of the E. V.
originated from that of the Vulg., " mendicus." Compare Luke
18 : 35, -zvylos TIS ixa&ijto nafta. ifjv bSbv TrgoaaiTcuv (E. V.),
" a certain blind man sat by the way-side begging."
1 " who was laid ; " c/3e/3).-r/To (pluperf.). The rendering of
this verb by the imperfect is retained on the ground, that !/?&
^Irjto is used for that tense, denoting continued action. So
Kuinoel (in loco) : " Bum (i. e. pauperem) autem quotidie ad
vestibulum illius jacuisse exinde patet, quoniam v. 19, prcecepit
formula v.aff -fififyav quoniam epuloni, coll. v. 23, ejusque cani-
bus domesticis notns erat, ita, nt hi ad eum accederent, et dolo-
rem, quo ulcera eum cruciarent, blande lingendo mitigarent ;
ipsum etiam lfteft}.rfio continuationem actiouis indicat v. Er.
Schmiddins ad h. 1. et ad Matt. 8 : 6." Some translators, how-
ever, render the verb " had been laid." This conveys the thought
that the poor man was placed at the gate once. See Bloomf. (MI
loco}. For the pluperfect as an imperfect, see Trollope (Gram.,
1 50, 7, p. 133).
y "longing;" iitifhifuov. See ch. 15 : 16, note. "Desire"
is not sufficiently strong to express the thought. Belg., " be-
geerde" (coveted). While Beza has desiderans, the Vulg., Eras.,
Montanus, Castalio, Goschen, and Schott render the word by
" cupiens." *Eitid-v[<.<3v does not imply the act of requesting
aid, as our word " desire " often does, and as it is here understood
by most English readers ; but it describes the sensation of hunger
felt by Lazarus. Heb. N. Test., i-j
1 " man's." This word should be italicized, as a supplement.
Compare 'A.V&QCOTCOS nhcrvoios, v. 19.
1 " but even ; " atta . Scarlett, -Kend., and Gray (in
Angus), " Nay, even ; " Goschen and Schott, " sed etiam ; "
Kuincel, " quin etiam ; " S. Fr., " rnais memes ; " De Wette,
"Aber auch." So (E. V.) Luke 12 : 7. Hoogeveen (aU& xai),
p. 7.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XVI.
175
KING JAMES' VERSION.
the beggar died, and was carried
by the angels into Abraham's bo-
som. The rich man also died,
and was buried :
28 And in heir he lifted up his
eyes, being in torments, and seeth
Abraham afar off, and Lazarus in
his bosom.
24 And he crieth and said, Fa-
ther Abraham, have mercy on me,
and send Lazarus, that he may
dip the tip of his finger in water,
and cool my tongue : for I am
tormented in this flame.
25 But Abraham said, Son, re-
member that thou in thy lifetime
receivedst thy good things, and
likewise Lazarus evil things : but
now he is comforted, and thou art
tormented.
26 And: besides all this, be-
TOV
GREEK TEXT.
/cat
a.v-
fy
TOV V7TO ra>v
KoX-jrov TOV 'Aftpaafj.' oare
5e KCU 6 TrXovcnos, /cat eVad)??.
23 V' n a^ t r \
/cat v TO> aoy eirapas row
6(f)0a\fj.ovs avTov, VTrdp^cav ev
fiacrctvois, opa TOV 'Afipaafj. oVo
/jiaKpodev, KCU. Ad^apov fv rot?
/ \ 5 rt 24 \>^j
KOMTOLS avTOV /cat auro$^0a>-
vr/o-a? etTre, HaTep '
iXsrjo-ov /j.e, /cat
pov, "LVO. /3d\jsr) TO aKpov TOV
8a.KT.vAov avTOv vSctTO?, /cat
KaTa^v^rj TTJV yX>(ro~av
OTI odwiofiai ei> Tr
25 Elire Se 'Afipaa/j.,
IJLVYjo-0rjTL OTI aTreAapep crv TO.
a. crov ev Trj ^cafj crow, /cat
bp.OLO>S TO. KUKOL' VVV
Se ode 7ra/)a/caAetraf, o~v 5e 6Sv-
vacrai, 26 KCU eVi Traan
REVISED VERSION.
that b the poor man died, and
"was carried away by the angels
into Abraham's bosom : d the
rich man also died, and was
buried. And in c the under- 23
world lie lifted up his eyes, be-
ing in torments, and seeth Abra-
ham f far off, and Lazarus in
his bosom. And E crying out, 24
he said, Father Abraham, b have
pity on me, and send Lazarus^
that he may dip the tip of his
finger in water, and; cool my
tongue ; for I am tormented in
this flame. But Abraham said, 25
' Child, remember that thou in
thy lifetime 'didst receive thy
good, things, and ''Lazarus, in
like manner, 'his evil things;
but now "here he is comforted,
and thou art tormented. And 26
besides all this, between us and
b " the poor man , " TOV ittco^ov. See v. 20, note.
c "was carried away;" ajierex&^vai. Thelwall, Sawyer.
Erasmus, Schotty " defortaretur ; " Castal., " auferretur." Bob
(Lex., anoyegto) : "To bear, or carry away from one p)ace or
person to another." Bretsch. : "Ablatum ad alios perfero, per-
fero, deduco. Luc. 16 : 22." So (B. V.) Mark 15 : 1. Eev.
17 : 3 ; 21 : 10. The word occurs in only one other instance,
1 Cor. 16 : 3, where " carry away " (instead of " bring ") would
have been appropriate.
d " the rich man ;" 6 Tthovotos. "Man " is a supplement.
Oomp. v. 19.
" the under-world ; " icy a8rj. See ch. 10 : 15, note. " Place
of the dead " is suggested as an alternative rendering of iiSijs, in
all cases. It occurs (B. V.) Ecclesiasticus 48 : 5.
r " far off; " /taxgo&cv. Unless in poetry, " far " is now used
for "afar."
e " crying out ; " ycav^aag. "Wesley, Scarlett, Thelwall, M.
Eob. (Lex., in verbo) : " (Spoken) of persons, to cry out." Sharpe
(" cried out "). See ch. 8 : 8, note.
h "have pity on me;" ttfyoov fie. Thorn., Sharpe, Norton,
Scarlett, Camp., M. Bob.. (Lex., in verbo), " to pity." This ren-
dering is deemed most appropriate, in view of the context.
1 " Child ; " Ttxvov. Sharpe, Thelwall. There is no necessi-
ty for abandoning the literal sense of this noun. See ch. 2 : 48,
note. So Belg., Kend. De Wette, " Kind ; " S. Pr., " Mon en-
fant."
J " didst receive ; " aniiapeg. The harsh sound of " receiv-
edst," and the difficulty with which it is enunciated, furnish
reasons for changing the form of the word. So Norton, Sharpe,
Watef., M.
1 " Lazarus, in like manner ; " Aa&gos 6/ioicos. This arrange-
ment is most perspicuous. It gives " Lazarus " (the nominative) a
place corresponding with "thou," in the first clause. So Thorn.,
Wakef., Sawyer, Kend. 'Oftotcos is more accurately rendered by
" in like manner," than " likewise." The latter is now usually
employed to signify lr also." " In like manner " is the rendering
of Thorn., Sawyer, Kend., M. So in Revision of Mark 4 : 16 ;
15 : 31.
1 " his evil things ; " ra xaxd. The article -to. is used here in
the sense of the possessive pronoun. See ch. 6 : 1, note. So
Thorn., Penn, Kend., Thelwall. Syriac, + y''^ . (Murdock, " his
evil things "). G. Fr., " ses maux."
" " here." Instead of oSe (Text. Recept), caSs is the reading
adopted by Lachmann, Tischendorf, Theile, Schott. So in the
Tatican MS. (B), the oldest extant. Schott says : " Post vSv Se
vulgo oSe. Edidimus eoSs cum Scholzio, Meyero, Lachm. (oppo-
situm verbis lv rfj a>fj aov) auctoritate 10 codd. unc. mnltorum
minuscc. verss., Pesch., Philox., Arr., Pers., Memph., Sahid.,
th., Slav. Illud oSs librariis in promptu fuit oppos." Bloomf.
(N. Test.) who contends that " propriety " demands 5Se, still ad-
mits that " very many MSS. Versions, Fathers, and early Editions
bave caSe. Griesbach has noted toSe as equal, if not superior to
176
THE GOSPEL ACCOEDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XVI.
JAMES' VERSION.
tween us and.-y.ou there is a great
gulf fixed: so that they which
would pass from hence to you,
cannot ; neither can they pass to
us, that would come from thence.
27 Then he said, I pray thee
therefore, father, that thou would-
est send him to my father's house:
28 For I have five brethren ;
that he may testify unto them, lest
they also come into this place of
torment.
29 Abraham saith unto Mm,
They have Moses and the proph-
ets ; let them hear them.
30 And he said, Nay, father
Abraham : but if one went unto
them from the dead, they will re-
pent.
31 And he said unto Mm, If
they hear not Moses and the
prophets, neither will they be
persuaded, though one rose from
the dead.
GREEK TEXT.
/cat
jaeya .firrypiKTcu, OTTCOS oi BeXov-
Tey Biaftr/voLi evrevdzv irpos u/uay,
jj.r) Swcovrai, fj.rj8e oi
\ ~ r "
irpos rifJ-as oia.7repa>criv.
e, *Epa>TK>
ere, -jrarep, va.
avrov fly rov OLKOV rov
28 " ' / ,
irarpos (J.ov, eyco yap Trews,
adeX<povs' OTTCOS Sia/j.aprvpr)Tai
avfoLS, tva. fir) KCU' avroi eXBoocriv
el? rr/v roTrov TOVTOV rrjs /Sacrd-
29 Xe-yet aura 'A/Spaajj.,
Maxrea KCU TOVS irpo-
<j)rjras' OLKOva-arasfrav avrav.
30 ' S~l S\ 9 ' ' /^l'\ '
U oe emev, Uyx i > troiTep
dXX' eav TIS OLTTO ve-
irpos O.VTOVS, ftTa-
31 Ehre 8e
Kpfav
Ei MoHretos KCU rwv 7rpo(j)r)T(av
OVK aKOVOVcriV) ovde, edv TI? IK
avacrrfj, Treur6r)<TOVTai.
BETISED VERSION.
you, there is a great gulf fixed;
so that' they who would "pass
OTer "hence to you, can not ;
Pnor r can they who would, cross
over 'thence to us. .Then he 27
said, I pray thee, 'then, father,
that thou wouldst send him to
my father's house ; for I have 28
five brethren ; that he may tes-
tify to them, lest they also
should come' into this place of
torment. Abraham saith to 29
him, They have Moses and the
prophets : let them hear them.
And he said, Nay, father Abra- so
ham; but if one "should go
to them from the dead, they
will repent. And he said to si
him, If they hear not Moses
and the prophets, neither will
they be persuaded, though one
"should rise from the dead.
" pass over ; " 8ea/3ijvc. Norton, Thelwall. Vulg., Mont.,
Beza, Eras., Goschen, Scliott, " transire." Bob. (Lex., in verbo) :
" Intrans., to pass through, or over to a place sr^os c. ace., Luke
16 : 26." So Sept., 1 Sam. 26 : 13, y.ai Sclfa 4avl$ els -co
\ nfyav, Heb. nasrt 1W "OSU (E- "V".), " Then David -went over
to the other siSe." 1 Sam. 14 : 8, fiftets Siapa.lvoft.Ev els, Heb..
-ii* di'iais* WftSX (B. V.), ""We will, pass over unto.". Bretsch.
(in verbo), " transeo." Joseph., Antiq. Til., 9, \ 1, StafHjvat tov
iv (Whiston's Tr. of Josephus), " to pass over Jordan."
vcu is rendered in the Heb. N. Test. I'asi. - Syr., ^;^S1
(Jnnnius, " transire"). Belg., " overgaan."
" hence ; " Ivrev&sv (critic. Edd. EV&CV). " From " is super-
fluous, as "hence," alone, signifies "from here." Omitted by
Thorn., Camp., Kend., Angus, Thelwall, M., Dick.
P " nor ; " fa;8s. Thorn., Sharpe, Penn, Scarlett, Dick., Kend.,
Thelwall. See ch. 8 : 17, note.
" can." As the sentence is elliptical, &uva>vrnt being under-
load (not expressed), in this member of the sentence, "can" is
a supplement.
'"can crossover;" Stanc^coaiv. Thorn. Kob. (Lex., in
verbo) : " To cross over." By this rendering, the translation is
brought nearer to the text, which has two verbs, diapfjvcu, and
, nearly, or quite synonymous.'
"thence;" ixsrd-cv. "From" is superfluous here. Sec
note o. Several translators render this passage, "nor those
from thence pass," etc. This would be correct, if the adverb
sxsz there, in that place, had been used. However, as in the first
member Ivrcv&ev is construed with StafKjvat, so in this, txa&tv
belongs to Siaite^ vaiv. I suggest as an alternative rendering
of the passage the more concise form, " nor can they cross over
thence to us."
i "then;" ow. Penn, Norton, Camp., Sawyer, Kend., M.
S. Fr., " done." See ch. -7 : 42, note. Bloomf. (in loco) : " Bender
' then,' denoting a consequence of what has preceded ; q. d., Then
if that is impossible, etc."
" should go ; " itoqeudfi. Bloomf. (N. Test.), Nortbn, Scar-
lett, Dick., M. The full expression "should go" accords with
present usage; as in " should come," v. 29.
T "should rise;" avaorfi. Scarlett, Dick., Camp., Murdock
See last note.
THE GOSPEL ACCOEDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XVII.
177
KING JAMES' VERSION.
CHAP. XVII.
THEN said he unto the disciples,
It is impossible but that offences
will come : but wo unto him
through whom they come !
2 It were better for him that a
millstone were hanged about, his
neck, and he cast into the sea,
than that he should offend one of
these little ones.
3 Take heed to yourselves : If
thy brother tresspass against thee,
rebuke him ; and if he repent,
forgive him.
4 And if he tresspass against
GREEK TEXT.
CHAP. XVII.
EIIIE 8e Trpos TOU?
ras, 'AvevSeKTov e'crri fjurj
TO, cr/coV&xAcr oval fie Si
2 AucrtreAet
ov
d
fj.vXos OVLKOS TrepiKeLTai. Trepl TOV
Tpa^r/Xov O.VTOV, KCU eppnrrai.
elf TTJV OaXacra-av, rj 'iva O-KO.V-
eva TOOV fUKpwv rovrcav
3 7r/)ocre^ere eavTOif. ecu* Se
JiapTy els ere o <%<5eAf/>oy <fov,
7riTi(j.r](rov aura* Kai eav fj.era-
rjo-r], a'0ey aura). 4 Kai lav
era/ap rrjs rj/j.epas d/jLaprrj els
REVISED VERSION.
CHAP. XVII.
AND he said to the disciples,
It is impossible for * b the 'occa-
sions of sin not to come ; but
woe to him through whom they
come ! d lt would be better for
him, e if f an upper-millstone
s shold be hung about his neck,
and he ""should be thrown into
the sea, than that 'he should
cause one of these little ones to
sin. Take heed to yourselves.
If thy brother J trespasseth
against thee, rebuke him ; and
if he repenteth, forgive him.
And if he 'trespasseth against
" the occasions come ; " ($ ildrtiv. Bloomf. (N. Test., in
loco) : " The TOV inserted before fir; ei&eiv from many MSS.
Fathers, and early editions, by Matthsei, Griesbach, Vater, and
Scholz, is probably genuine, being quite agreeable to the usage
of St. Luke. And thus we may render literally, ' It is impossible
for offenses not to come.' " On this reading, it may be remarked,
that it is adopted by Griesbach, Knapp. Theile. Laelim., Scholz,
Tischend. (who, however, place TOV before ra axavSaia). Schott
says : " Voculam TOV post eariv vulgo omissam (vel quod super-
vacuana habereter, vel collate loco Matt. 18 : 7) cum Griesb.
aliisque inseruimus ex cdd. A.B.D.E.L.S.V. et permultis minuscc."
As an alternative rendering, " that the occasions of sin should
not come." So Penn.
b " the ; " T. The article should not be dropped. " The,"
m this case, gives definiteness to its noun (oxdvSaAa), and is in
harmony with our wus loquendi. So Thelwall.
" occasions of sin ; " ay.Av8a.la. Kend. De "Wette, " Yer-
fiihrungen" ("enticements"). Bob. (Lex., in verbo) : "Gener.
a cause of stumbling, falling, ruin, morally and spiritually." "As
a cause or occasion of sinning, or falling away from the truth."
For the signification of this word, see ch. 7 : 23, note n.
d " It would be better ; " kvoitekez. The following note on
the parallel, Mark 9 : 42, is quoted from the Revision : " It
would be better ; y.alov lariv. From the force of the condi-
tional oxm'Sal.ioTj, at the commencement of the sentence, it is
necessary to render lanv in a conditional form. ' Would be ' is
now the usual phrase instead of ' were.' Beza, ' bonum esset ; '
Eras.. ' melius foret ; ' S. Fr., ' il serait rnieux.' " In the passage
before ns, oxavSaliag is placed in the subsequent clause. " Would
be " is employed by Camp., Dick., and Sawyer. The expression
accords with present usage.
"if;" el. Tyndale (Edit. 1526), Sawyer, Thelwall, Wiclif,
Eheims, Murdock (Syr., o^). Vulg., Mont., Eras., Beza, "si;"
De Wette, " wenn ; " Dan., " om."
f "an upper-millstone;" /oilos .owxos. Dick., Camp. Bob.
(Lex.) : "A millstone, the upper one, or rider." " Larger mills
(i. e., than those used in the -family residences, moved by hand)
were turned by an ass ; whence the upper-millstone was called
ovixos." Hesych. (quoted by JBretscli.), JlfvAy OVTIO Xcyerai not
o netted rfjs /iviijs ).i9~os, TO S's area >.ovos. This corresponds
with the Heb. san Deut. 24 : 6, " No man shall take a hand-
mill (enrn) or the upper-millstone (^s~\) to pledge." Sept.,
pAlos ovS'e iniftvhov. In the parallel, Mark 9 : 42, the term is
simply ii&os (ivfaxbs (B. V.), " a millstone." This rendering is
correct ;' but as in the passage before us, the text has ftvlos on.
nog, the rendering" should correspond. De Wette, " Eselsmiihl-
stein."
should be hung
See note d. This form of
the verb presents the thought with exactness, and ;s the ordinary
one in conversation and writing.
b " should be thrown ; " eggaiTat. In the parallel, Mark 9 : 42,
the verb is fte^).rjTai. To distinguish these verbs in the Revi-
sion, " thrown " is used here. So Thorn., Scarlett, Kend., M.,
Thelwall. Rob. (Lex., (jinno), " 1o throw." For the use of this
form of the Eng. verb, see last note.
1 " he should cause to sin ; " axavSaUar;. The following
note on this verb is copied from the Kevision of Mark (9 : 42) :
Shall cause to sin ; axarSallag. Sharpe, ' make to sin ; '
Wakef., ' shall lead into sin.' SxavSali^co sometimes has the
force of the Hiphil conj. in Hebrew. ' Thus Kob. : ' Causative, to
cause to offend, to lead astray, to lead into sin.' Bretsch. : ' [Di-
citur] de iis, per quos, aliquo modo accidit, ut alter judicando
erret agendove peccet.' If a literal rendering is deemed prefer-
able, we might say, ' shall cause to stumble.' So Thorn. In the
case before us, ' offend ' misleads common readers, who understand
it as equivalent to ' making angry.' See Luke 7 : 23, note."
i " trespasseth ; " a/iagTg. According to present usage, the
indicative form of the verb, in the present tense, is used with
' if," or any other conjunction. See ch. 4 : 3, note.
" trespasseth ; " aftd^rrj. See last note.
178
THE GOSPEL ACCOBDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XVII.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
thee seven times in a day, and
even times in a day turn again to
thee, saying, I repent ; tliou shalt
forgive him.
5 And the apostles said unto
the Lord, Increase our faith.
6 And the Lord said, If ye had
faith as a grain of mustard-seed,
ye might say unto this sycamine-
tree, Be thou plucked up by the
root, and be thou planted in the
sea ; and it s-hould obey you.
7 But which of you having a
servant ploughing, or feeding cat-
tle, will say unto him by and by,
when he is come from the field,
Go and sit down to meat?
8 And will not rather say unto
him, Make ready wherewith I may
sup, and gird thyself, and serve
me, till I have.eaten and drunken ;
and afterward thou shalt eat and
drink ?
9 Doth he thank that servant,
because he did the things that
GKEEK TEXT.
ere, KDU CTTTaKis rrf rj(j.epa? G.ITL-
o-rptyr) eVl ae, Xeycov, Mera-
z/ocS, a.<prj(ri$ ayra.
5 Kcu. zbrov oi cbroGrToAoi rw
KvpiKt, Hpocrfle? rjjjuv Tricmv.
6 JEme 8e 6 Kvpios, El e'/^ere
TriiTTLV) ca$ KOKKOV criva.7recoF, e'Ae-
yere av rfj crvKa/jtivq> ravrrf,
'JSKpi^cad.rjTi., Kai (j)vrevdr]TL iv
rfj daXacrfrr]' KCU VTrr^KOvcrev av
VJJLLV. 7 TLS Se i^ vfj-wv SovXov
e-^cav aporpitovra 77 7roifj.ali>ovTa,
Of eicreXOovTL CK roi) dypov epet
evdecoy, JlapeXdcois avairecra.1.'
8 >1 -\> J \ " y ~
aAA ou^t e/jet avrw,
crov TL dzLirvfja-to, KCU,
fjLevof SiaKovei fiot, eco?
Kai TTLCC' Kai [j,eTa ravra (paye-
arai Kai Triecrai crv ; 9 Mr] "X&pt-v
w 8ovXa> Keiva>, OTL eiroi-
EEVISED VERSION.
tliee seven times in a day, and
seven times in a day 'tnrncth
to thee again, saying, I repent;
thou shalt forgive him. And 5
the apostles said to the Lord,
Increase our faith. And the 6
Lord said, If ye had faith as a
grain of mustard-seed, ye might
say to this sycamine-tree, m Be
thou uprooted and "planted in
the sea ; and "it would obey
you. But which of you liav- 7
ing a servant ploughing, or
feeding cattle, 'will say to him
immediately, "as he cometh in
r out of the field, "Come, and
'recline at table? "But 'will he a
not rather say to him, Make
ready w my supper, and gird
thyself, and serve me, till I
shall have eaten and "drunk ;
and 'afterwards thou shalt eat
and drink ? Doth he thank 9
that servant, because ho did
m it
wall.
i " turneth ; " fmorfcyfi. See v. 3, note j.
" Be thou uprooted ; " 'ExfiZcofrrjri. Penn, Norton, Thel-
n " planted ; " yvrEv&rjrc. The pronoun " thou " is superflu-
ous before this imperative. It is omitted by Thomson, Peun,
Norton, Scarlett, Walcef., Dick., Sawyer, Angus, M.
Thorn., Sharpe, Norton,
" it would obey ; " vnfjxovasv av.
Scarlett, Dick., Sawyer, Angus, M.
P " will say immediately ; " Iget cvS-ecag. See ch. 5
note. The Textus Beceptus places the comma after
According to the punctuation (which has been followed here),
this word qualifies tyei. But Griesbach, Knapp, Theile, Trollope
(N. Test.), Goschen, Kuinoel, and Schott place the comma after
tyeT, thus joining it to Tca^e^cav, so that the translation would
be, " Come immediately," etc., confestim accede et accnmbe. I
prefer the punctuation of the Text. Eecept., as most agreeable to
the thought presented by the contest, but would place in the
margin, " or, according to some, Come immediately." De Wette,
" -wird alsbald sagen : Komm her."
" as he Cometh in ; '' slas^&orrt. Sharpe, Kend. (" as he
cometh "), Penn (" as soon as he cometh in "), Sawyer (" when he
comes in"). The force of els should not be disregarded. Ttjv
olxtav is understood after the participle. Bretsch. (sloefxofiac) :
" Luc. 17 : 7, ubi elaei, Ix rov ayyov non est redire ex agro, sed
tngredi domum (ijjv olxiav quod saepissime omittitur ut Luc.
11 :37;15 :28; 24:29)."
' " out of ; " lx. The preposition has its radical force, and
should not be confounded with duo, " from."
" Come;" JTa^&eav. Thorn. (" Come in"), Wesley, Nor-
ton, Scarlett, M., Wakef. (" Come hither"), Dick., Camp., Saw-
yer. Mont., " adveniens ; " Beza and Schott, " accede ; " Bengel,
" accedens." Eob. (Lex., in verbo) : " To come near to any person
or thing, to draw near, to come." So Luke 12 : 37, naftAd-cov
(E. V.), " come forth." Bretschneider (nagfy., in loco), " ac-
cede."
' " recline at table ; " avaxeaca. See ch. 11 : 37, note.
" But ; " alX. Sharpe, Kendrick, Penn, Sawyer, Thelwall,
Murdock. Belgic, " maar ; " De Wette, " sondern ; " Iberian,
" mas."
v " -will he not rather say ; " ov%l fyez. Scarlett, Wakefield,
Sawyer ("will he not say"), Eob. (Lex., ov%l, in loco). The
pronoun contributes to perspicuity and force.
w " my supper ; " il Stmvf,oto. Kend., Thorn., Norton, Dick,
Camp., M. Schott, " para mihi ccenam ; " Iber., " mi cena ; "
Italian, "apprestami la cena." "Sup" is obsolete except in
poeiry.
" drunk ; " niia. This is the proper form of the English
participle. Thelwall, M., Angus.
y " afterwards ; " ftsra. This orthography is now usual. It
is found in the E. V,, Exod. 11 : 1. 1 Sam. 9 : 13. Job 18 : 2
Prov. 20 : 17 ; 24 : 27 ; 28 : 23 ; 29 : 11. Gal. 3 : 23.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XVII.
179
KING JAMES' VERSION.
were commanded him? I trow
not.
10 So likewise ye, when ye
shall have done all those things
which are commanded you, say,
We are unprofitable servants : we
have done that -which was our
duty to do.
11 And it came to pass, as he
went to Jerusalem, that he passed
through the midst of Samaria and
Galilee.
12 And as he entered into a
certain village, there met him ten
men that 'were lepers, which stood
afar off:
13 And they lifted up their
voices, and said, Jesus, Master,
have mercy on us.
14 And when he saw them, he
said unto them, Go shew your-
selves unto the priests. And it
came to pass, that, as they went,
they were cleansed.
GEEEK TEXT.
TO. ia.Ta.'xei'Ta avrt / ov
S> ~ 10 v \ ' " a
OOKCO. OVTW KO.I VfJieif, OTCLV
Trotrio"r/T iravra. ra Stara
vfj.iv, Ae'yere, ' On SovXot d
OTI o 6)(j)eiXo/j.ev iroiTJcrai
11 KAI eyevero ev TO> Tropeve-
ar6ai avrov els 'lepovcraXr//*., KCLL
O.VTOS
8ia
p.apeta? KOU raXiXalas. /cat
avrov els nva KO>-
aurw 5e/ca Ae-
Trpol avdpes, ol ecrTrjcrav Troppco-
6ev KOLL OLVTol rjpav <j)ioi>r)v,
Xeyovres, 'Irjcrov, eVio-rara, eXe-
rjcrov rj[j.ds. 14 Ka
avroLs, JJopevBevres e
eavrovs TOIS lepevcrt. Iou eye-
rq> virayeiv avTovs, e/ca-
eiirev
HEVISED VERSION.
"what was commanded"? b l
think not. So "also ye, when 10
ye shall have done d all that
was commanded you, say, We
are unprofitable servants ; we
have done "what f it was our
duty to do. And it came to H
pass, as e he was going to Jeru-
salem, that he passed through
the midst of Samaria and Gali-
lee. And h as he was entering 12
a certain village, there met him
'ten lepers, who stood 'far off;
and they lifted up their 'voice, 13
'saying, Jesus, Master, have
mercy on us! And ""seeing 14
them, he said to them, Go, show
yourselves to the priests. And
it came to pass, that as they
were going, they were cleans-
1 " what was commanded ; " ra Siaraz&tvTa. M., Sharpe,
Dick., Kend., Murdock. Tyndale and Geneva, " that which was
commanded ; " Belg., " 'fc gene bevolen was." See eh. 5 : 27,
note.
The Textus Eeceptus has UVTIU after Siaraz&evra. This i:
canceled by Griesb., Knapp, Theile, Tittm., Lachm., Tischend.,
Goschen, Schott, Scholz. Bloomfield (N. Test.) : " Tliis, not
found in nearly all the best MSS., and several Fathers, and early
Editions, is, with reason, canceled by almost every Editor, from
Bengel to Scholz." Kuinoel says: " Avicy post Siara^d-sv
plures codices pmittunt, additum videtur a gramtnatieis vel per-
spicuitatis caussa, quoniam v. 10, legitur to. Starnxd-svTa iifj.lv."
b " I think ; " Sox<5. Thorn., Sharpe, Wesley, Norton, Scar-
lett, Wakef., Kendrick, Angus, Thelwall, M. De Wette, " Ich
meine ; " S. Fr., " je pense ; " Iber., ^pieuso." " Trow " (copied
by E. "V. from Tyndale) is obsolete.
"also;" y.al. Thelwall, Kend., Angus, Sharpe, Sawyer.
S. Fr., " aussi ; " Iber., " tambien."
d " all that was commanded ; " nd-vra TO. Scarax&evra. See
note z.
" what ; " S. Sharpe, Wesley, Norton, Wakef., Dickinson,
Camp., Sawyer, Kend., Angus, M.
' " it was our duty ; " cocpei!.o/iEv. Angus, M. Our idiom
demands " it," before " was." Alternative, " were bound." So
Thorn., Penn, Keud., Camp.
" he was going ; " lv -1$ nopevcad-at. Thomson, Scarlett,
Sawyer, Kend., Thelwall (" while he was going"). There can be
no question that the thought is, " while lie was on his journey to
Jerusalem." This is most correctly expressed by the participial
construction, or the English progressive form of the verb.
h " as he was entering ; " eiasyjiofievov nvrov. Thom., Wakef.,
M., Thelwall. The, S. Fr. renders " il entrait " (equivalent to " he
was entering "). The preposition " into " is superfluous. It is
dropped by Thom., Sharpe, Penn, Norton, Wakefield, Kendrick.
As this participle sometimes has a future sense (Acts 18 : 21.
So verb Luke 23 : 29), the alternative rendering is suggested,
" as lie was about entering." So Norton, Bbomf. (N. Test.).
See last note. Ryr.,.^. vC^S uSuj.js ,jo (" and when he drew
near to enter").
1 " ten lepers ; " Stan faitpol m>8(>es. Thom., Wesley, Nor-
ton, Wakef., Camp., Sawyer, Kend., M. 'AvSges may be regarded
as pleonastic. Compare Matt. 18 : 23. A literal rendering is,
" leprous men."
i "-far off;" no^tod-sr. This orthography is uniformly em-
ployed in the Bcvision.
k " voice ; " ycovriv (sing.) Thom., Wesley, Dick., M., Angus,
Thelwall, Sawyer.
i " saying ; " Uyovres. Thelwall, Kend., Thom., Sharpe, Nor-
ton, Wakef., Sawyer,' M.
m "seeing;" iScbv. Wesley, Kend, Thelwall, M. S. Fr.,
ayant vu ; " Iber., " habiendo [los] visto."
" as they were going ; " Iv icy vitayetv avrovs. Scarlett,
Thom., Wakef., Sawyer, Kend., M., Thelwall ("as they were
going"), Murdock. Erasmus, Beza, Gosclien, " inter eundum ;"
Schott, " inter discendum. See v. 11, note.
180
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XVII.
KING JAMES VERSION.
15 And one of them, when he
saw that he -was healed, turned
back, and with a loud voice glori-
fied God,
16 And fell down on. his face
at his feet, giving him thanks :
and he was a Samaritan.
17 And Jesus answering, said,
Were there not ten cleansed ? but
where are the nine ?
18 There are not found that
returned to give glory to God,
save this stranger.
19 And he said unto him, Arise,
go thy way : thy faith hath made
thee whole.
20 And when he was demand-
ed of the Pharisees, when the
kingdom of God should come,
he answered them and said, The
GREEK TEXT.
15 T \ if- > -
fts oe e avT&v
OTI ia.6r), VTreo-Tpeijse, /Lterc
p.eyaXr)s Bo&fav TOV
d ' IB v "
tteov KO.L 7recrei/
TTOV Trapa. TOVS Troo~a$ O.VTOV, ev-
vapLcrTtav avTOf KCU. avros fiv
"\*1 s \
TT/S. (tTTOKplUtlS 06 O
dire]/, Ov^i, ol cV/ccc e/c-
ada.pio-0r)(rav ; ol 8e ivvia. TTOV;
ov% vpf6f)o~av v7roo~Tpe"d
Sovvat 8oai> TW 0e< } el
aAAoyez/j)? OVTOS; 19 Kai
aurro, ' AvaaTas iropevov -rj TT'L-
(rov areo~<oKe ere.
20 ' -[? /j,v g\
VTTO T>V
, rrore ep-^rat rj (3a-
ovAe/a rov Oeov, aireKpiOr] av-
EEVISBD VERSION.
ed. And one of them, 'seeing is
that he was healed, turned
back, and with a loud voice
glorified God, and ""fell on his ~
face at his feet, giving him
thanks ; and he was a Samari-
tan. And Jesus, answering, 17
said, "Were not 'the ten cleans-
ed? but where are the nine?
"Were there none found 'to re- 18
turn, and give glory to God,
"except this stranger ? And he 19
said to him, 'Rise, and "depart ;
thy faith *hath saved thee. And 20
being asked by the Pharisees,
when the kingdom of God
would come, he answered them,
"seeing;" I8m>. As in v. 14. So Kend., M., Sharpe,
Perm, Sawyer, Thelwall. Tlie participial construction is used by
Thom., Scarlett, Norton, Wakef., Dick., and Camp. (i. e., " per-
ceiving").
P " fell ; " ertsasv. " Down " is superfluous. Omitted by
Kend., Thetwall, Sharpe, Penn, Norton, Wesley, Sawyer.
"the ten;" ol B&.. Scholefield, Sharpe, Penn, Norton,
Wakef., Kendrick, Angus, Thelwall, M. Belg., " de tien ; " De
Wette, " die zehn ; " G. and S. Fr., " les dix ; " Iber., " los diez ; "
Italian, " i dieci ; " Danish, " de ti." The euphonic adverb after
" were," of E. V., is superfluous.
r Were found ; " evgefrijifav. It is not necessary to regard
this aorist as a substitute for the present. It refers to tlte time
of the -return (vnoor^sfnvTes) which was past. So Sharpe,
Norton, Kend. Vulg., " est inventus ; " Mont., " sunt invent! ; "
Eras., Beza, " sunt reperti ; " Goschen, Schott, " apparuprunt."
The whole verse is interrogative, according to the punctuation of
the Text. Eecept. of Bagster. So Erasmus (Gr. text), Griesb.,
Tisch., Lachm., Knapp, Theile, Tittm., Scholz, Schott, Trollope
(Gr. text), Kuincel. So in the versions, Vulgate, Erasmus,
Castalio, Goschen, Schott, Belgic, Luther, De Wette, S. Fr.,
Iber., Ital., Danish, Junius and Murdock (from Syriac), Thorn.,
Sharpe, Penn, Norton, Kend., Camp., Angus. The punctuation
of the E. V. was copied from Wiclif, or Tyndale.
" were there none found ; " ov% evgedyaav. Kendrick, M.,
Thorn., Scarlett, Sharpe, Penn, Dick.; Kend., Angus. The aorist
here is rendered as above. See last note.
t " to return ; " imoar^i\fnvTss. Kend., Sharpe. The literal
rendering " returning" would not accord with our usus loquendi.
"The participle is very often put for the infinitive." Matthasi
(Gram., g 550, obs. 4). See ch. 10 : 25, note.
M.
' except ; " si fifj. Kend., Scarlett, Norton, Dick., Camp..
" Save " is obsolete.
v " Else ; " 'Avaoras. See ch. 8 : 54, note.
w " depart ; " noQsvov. So (E. T.) Luke 4 : 42. John 16 : 7.
Acts 5 : 41 ; 22 : 21. 2 Tim. 4 : 10. Bob. (Lex., iriverbo) : " To
pass on, to go away, to depart." The phrase " to go one's way "
is obsolete.
* " hath saved ;" aeacaxe. So E. V., Luke 7 : 50 (acacaxe) ;
18 : 42. Thelwall, M., Wesley, Norton. From the fact that the
Samaritan received a marked commendation from Christ, because
he returned and gave him thanks, while there is a tacit reproof
of " the nine," it would seem that acocaxe has a force beyond
that implied in " hath made thee whole," or " healed thee." The
nine were made whole or healed, as well as the Samaritan.
Hence a literal rendering of the verb by " saved," is deemed
deemed most appropriate. To this may be added, that the heal-
ing of the Samaritan is represented in v. 15 by IO.&TJ.
* " being asked ; " 'Emsymiid'sis. Thorn., Scarlett, Sharpe,
Kendrick, Wesley, Norton, Wakef., M., Thelwall (" being ques-
tioned").
z " would come ; " l'^r. M., Wakef., Murdock. " Would,"
instead of " should," is employed by Thomson, and several later
translators. I suggest as an alternative rendering, " When doth
the kingdom of God come ? " and in the answer, " The kingdom
of God doth not come." By this, I^STK* has its literal render-
ing in the present, in both instances. So Wesley, " AVhen cometh
the kingdom of God ? The kingdom of God cometh." Wiclif,
Rheims, Kend., and Thelwall, <' When the kingdom of God com-
eth The kingdom of God eometh not." Luther, " Wann kommt
das Reich Gottes? Das Eeioh Gottes kommt." The rendering
of the E. V. probably originated in that of Erasmus, " quando
THE GOSPEL ACCOEDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XVII.
181
KING JAMES' TEESION.
kingdom of God cometh not with
observation :
21 Neither shall they say, Lo
here! or, Lo thei'e! for behold,
the kingdom of God is within
you.
22 And he said unto the disci-
ples, The days will come, when 3 T e
shall desire to see one of the days
of the Son of man, and ye shall
not see it.
23 And they shall say to you,
See here! or, See there! go not
after them, nor follow them.
24 For as the lightning that
lighteneth out of the one part un-
der heaven, shineth unto the other
part under heaven ; so shall also
the Son of man be in his day.
GKEEK TEXT.
5
roiy, KOU etirev, OVK epxerac r\
(3a<nXela TOV Oeov ;uera irapa.-
Tr)prjO"cos~ 21 ovSe epovo-iv, 'ISov
a. Be, r), ISov e/ce?. I8ov yap, 77
la, rov Oeov evros vp.Siv
22 Tft s> ' ' v N
Jbnre oe irpof TOVS
/j.adr/Tas, ' EXevcrovrai r)[j.epatj
ore eTTi6vfj,r}o-Te [J,iav TWV ijjue-
pS>v TOV vlov TOV avdpomov iSeiv,
\ 9 tf I /I 23 V J ~
KO.I OVK oyecrc'e. /cat epovanv
vfj.lv, 'ISov cade, rj, ISov e/cer
IJ.TJ aTreXdrjTe, /jtrjde Sica^rjre.
24 axnrep yap rj aa-Tponrr) r/
acrrpaTTTOVcra GK TTJS VTT' ovpa-
vov els' TTj v VTT ovpavov Xa.fj.7rei,
ecrrat /cat utoy TOV av-
et/ rrj rjfj.pa avrov.
EETISED VERSION.
and said, The kingdom of God
cometh not with observation ;
nor will they say, "Behold, 21
here! or, Behold, there! for,
behold, the kingdom of God is
"among you. And he said to 22
the disciples, 'Days will come,
when ye d will desire to see one
of the days of the Son of man,
and ye e will not see it. And 23
they f will say to you, ^Behold,
here! or, behold, there! go not
after them, nor follow them.
For as, the lightning h flashing 24
out of the 'one part under
heaven, shineth to the other
part under heaven, so Jk will
the Son of man be in his day.
venturum esset regnum Dei ? " He, however, translated
in the second instance, in the future, " veniet." On the contrary,
the Vulg. and Mont, have " venii," in both cases. The Heb.
N. Test, has the future, Kinn sinn, which presents the thought
with exactness.
" Behold ;" 'ISov (bis). See ch. 1 : 44, note z. So ia the
next member of the sentence, and in E. V. The word is a de-
monstrative particle. The imperative (of aor. mid. elSouriv) is
ISov.
b " among ; " Irros. M., Dick., Eend. Schott, " intei vos."
Bloomfield says : " The present context requires us to take the
words in the natural sense, for in the midst of, ivTos vficSv being,
for iv vfiiv, q. d., the kingdom of God has even commenced
among you, is in the midst of you (eyfraaev it/? ifwe, as it is
said 11 : 20), though you do not see it," Kmticel : " ISov yn(>,
rj /iaaifaia, TOU &eov svrbs vfj.t5i> iarlv, scitote cnim jam inter
vos (in regions et populo vestro) illud ipsum constitutum, initium
cepisse vobis non opinantibus, nee cvedentibus, cum praeconcepti-
bus opinionibus capti teneamini. Quse vos adhuc exspectatis, ea
jam evenerunt, attamen non ita ut vos sperastis et adhuc speratis';
ego, Messias, veni conditurus regnum, sive soeietatem eoriim, qui
ob virtutis doctrinceque mea3 stadium hac invita. exercitum, felici-
tate post mortem fruituri sint summa et perpetua." He adds :
"jE-vros haud raro est idem quod li>, inter, ut ap. Xenoph. Ana-
basis 1:19, 2, ubi ta SVTOS avrcav dicuntur, quaj apnd se in
castris habebant. In versione Alexandrina respondet Heb. aipa
quod eodem modo adhiberi solet." Compare Heb., Sept., and
E. V., Numb. 11 : 20, 21. Heb. N. Test., msi?; eafipa. Ibcr.
(note), " esta en medio de." Bloomfiiild (Aunotut.) says :
* 'Among' is adopted by the best critics ancient and modern."
" Days ; " fjfeaoai. As this noun is anarthrous, the article
of the E. V. is omitted. So Sbarpe, Norton, Wakef., Thelwall.
This use of ^fieoai is Hebraistic, equivalent to &IKI , " time."
Bob. (Lex., in verbo et. loco}. Compare Acts 15 : V, ay fiftcodJv
a^altav (E. Y.), " a good while ago." Gesen. (Lex.). As an
alternative, "a time." So Wakef. and Norton. Kuincel (in
loco) : " Erit temporis."
d "will 'long;" eni&vfajasTe. See ch. 15 : 16, note. "Will"
is most appropriate in indicating the future.
" will not see ; " ow. oytaSe. See last note.
f " will say ; " saovacv. Scarlett, Sharpe, Norton, Kend., M.
The language is that of prediction.
e " Behold ; " ISov. Thelwall. See ch. 1 : 44, note. So in
next member of the sentence.
h "flashing;" fj aoTpditTovoa. Scarlett, Sawyer. Rob. (Lex.,
in verbo}, " to flash." Alternative rendering, " the flashing light-
ning." Keudrick. The thought might be expressed more freely
thus, " as a flash of lightning."
' " one." This word is strictly supplementary. So the word
" other," in the subsequent member of the sentence. Hence both
are italicised.
J In -the Textus Keceptus, xtti follows 'eorat. It is canceled by
Griesb., Tischend., Knapp, Theile, Scliolz, Goschcn, Kuincel, and
bracketed by Tittni., Laehm., and Bloomf. Schott says: "A~i
vulgo post ovrias eorm additum ex v. 2G, vcl c textn Yiilg.,
Miitth. 24 : 27. Griesb. aliique rectc omittunt auetoritate cdd.
permultorum (9 uuc.) versa., Pesch., Philox., Pers., AIT., Slav.,
Goth., Vulg."
' " will be ; " eorai. Thomson, M., Pcnn, Scarlett, Sharpe,
Norton, Wakef., Dick., Camp., 7Cend., M, See v. 23, note.
182
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XVII.
KING JAMES' VERSIOK.
25 But first must he suffer many
things, and be rejected of this
generation.
26 And as it was in the days
of Noe, so shall it be also in the
days of the Son of man.
27 They did eat, they drank,
they married wives, they were
given in marriage, until the day
that Noe entered into the ark,
and the flood came, and destroyed
them all.
28 Likewise also as it was in
the days of Lot : they did eat,
they drank, they bought, they
sold, they planted, they builded ;
29 But the same day that Lot
went out of Sodom, it rained fire
and brimstone from heaven, and
destroyed them all :
30 Even thus shall it be in the
day when the Son of man is re-
vealed.
31 In that day, he which shall
be upon the house-top, and his
stuff in the house, let him not
come down to take it awav : and
GREEK TEXT.
25 TrpcoTov 8e Set avrov TroAAa
jraOelv, KOI d.TroSoKifJLacrdrji'ai dtro
TTJS yevecif ravrr]?. 26 KCU Kct6a>s
eV rat? rj/jiepcus TOV Ntae,
ecTTat KCU eV TOUS r/fj-epats
TOV V'LOV TOV dvOpcoTTOv. 27
ov, ejTLVov, tya.fj.ovv,
TO, OL^pc }}$ rj/Jipa.<r eicrf)\0e Niae
els TJ]V Ki/3coTOv } KCU fjX9ev o Kara-
KX.vcrfJ.of, KCU. cbnAecrej> tt.ira.v-
9R e / \ J /
ray. ofJLOicos KCU &s eyez/ero
ei> Teds Tjjue/jaj? A.CCT rjcrdiov,
einvov, yyopa^ov, eVajAow, l(f)v~
TCVOV, fj.KoSofJ.ovv fj Se r]fJ.e-
pa e^ijXde AWT diro
TTVp KCU deWlS COT
vov, KCU dirco\e(rei> avraz/ray
-!0 \ " f * * '
Kara ravrcc ecrrai rj rjfj.pa o
vlos TOV dv6pa>Trov aTro/caAuTrre-
31 ' ' ' " ' ' .v
rai. ev fKewg Ty tj^epa, os
eCTTCU fTTi TOV ScOfJLCtTOS, KCU. TO.
crKevrj avrov tv Ty OIKIO., fj,rj
Ka.Ta(3a.T(o dpai aura* KOL 6 ei>
REVISED TERSION.
But first he must suffer many 26
things, and be rejected "by this
generation. And as it was in 26
the days of Noah, so m will it be
also in the days of the Son of
man. They "were eating, they 27
were drinking, they were mar-
rying wives, they were given
in marriage, till the day that
Noah "entered the ark, and the
flood came, and destroyed f tkem
all. 9 In like manner also as it 28
was in the days of Lot : they
were eating, they were drink-
ing, 'they were buying, they
were selling, they were plant-
ing, they were building ; but 29
r on the day when Lot went out
"from Sodom, l the Lord rained
fire and brimstone from heaven,
and destroyed them all : "Thus so
T will it be in the day when the
Son of man is revealed. In 3:
that day, he who shall be on
the house-top, and his "goods
in the house, let him not come
down "to take them away; and
i " by ; " JTO. So (B. V.) Matt. 7 : 16. See Luke 9 -. 22. So
Thorn., M., Penn, Scarlett, Sharpe, Kend., Angus, Norton, "Wes-
ley, Dick., Sawyer, Thehvall.
m " will it be ; " EOTCU. See v. 24, note k.
" were eating ; " Tjad-iov. This verb, with, those -which follow
it, tmvov, iydftovv, e^eyafii^ovTo, and those in v. 28, ijad'iov,
entvov, r)y6j>ac', ejtiol.o-uv , Icpvrevov, cuxoSofiovv, is put in the
imperfect, because continued action is described. Hence the ap-
propriate rendering- is by the Eng. progressive form. So Norton,
Wakef., Kend., Thehvall, M., Buttmann (Gram., g!37, 4), Stuart
(Gram., p. 217, 1 136).
"entered;" slarjl&e. See v. 12, note. "Enter" of itself
signifies " to go into ; " hence " into " with " enter " is superfluous.
There may, however, be oases, where, for the sake of euphony,
" into " should be retained. The present is not one of that class.
So Thorn., Sharpe, Norton, Camp., Dick.
i" " them." This word is a supplement, and should have been
italicized (as at the close of v. 29), in the E. V. So "Wakefield.
Iber. ["los"].
" In like manner ; " o/iolias. Kend., Thelwall, M. Rob.
(Lex.). " Likewise " is often used in the sense of " also," " too,"
and is, therefore, ambiguous.
r " on the day when ; " yqfiE$a. Scarlett, Dick., Norton,
Camp., Sawyer, Sharpe (' on the day that").
"from;" aieo. Thelwall, Scarlett. Vulg., Mont., "exiit
Lot a Sodomis." See Gen. 19 : 10-22. Lot came out of the
city, and went from it, before the Lord destroyed Sodom.
' " the Lord." This is the proper nominative of s^agf. Com-
pare Gen. 19 : 24. Sept. xiipios efips&v. Heb. T2i:ii fiini.
Rob. (Lex., p?s%<o) quotes this passage, and supplies (though in-
accurately) 6 Qsbs, as the nominative. So Bloomf. (N. Test.).
Kuincel : " "Ep^e nempe o 0eog."
" " Thus ; " xara ravra. Angus, M., Sharpe. See Eob.
(Lex., OVTOS). So with irpoaqvxero (E. V.) Luke 18 : 11.
v " will it be ; " %a-tai. See v. 26, note.
w " goods ; " OMVIJ. So (E. V.) Mark 3 : 27. Rob. (Lex.).
Thorn., Penn, Scarlett, vShavpe, M., Wesley, Angus. " Staff," in
the sense of moveables, or furniture, is obsolete.
x " to take them away ; " (> avid. This verb properly
signifies " to take up." Hence the idea of carrying away that
which is lifted up has been associated with it. It is deemed most
accurate to use "away" as a supplement. As alia, refers to
ay.eiir;, the literal rendering " them " is appropriate. See Eob.
(Lex., in verbo), Dnnnbar's Lex.
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING- TO LUKE. CHAP. XVII.
183
KING JAMES' VERSION.
he that is in the field, let him like-
wise not return back.
32 Remember Lot's wife.
33 Whosoever shall seek to
save his life, shall lose it ; and
whosoever shall lost his life, shall
preserve it.
34 I tell you, in that night
there shall be two men in one
bed ; the one shall be taken, and
the other shall be left.
35 Two women shall be grind-
ing together; the one shall be
taken, and the other left.
36 Two men shall be in the
field ; the one shall be taken, and
the other left.
37 And they answered and said
unto him, Where. Lord ? And he
said unto them, Wheresoever the
body is, thither will the eagles be
gathered together.
GREEK TEXT.
rep
TCO es TO. OTTLcrca.
/J.TJ
32
fJU>rj/j.oi>eveTe
^ A ' S3 * *
ywaiKos A.COT. os eav
Trjcrr) rrjv vxyv .avrov crcocrai,
OTroAecra avrrju' Kai b? eav mro-
Xecry avTrjv, ^cooyoz^cret avrrjv.
>/ e / ~ \v
Aey<H vfitv, ravrrj TTJ VVKTI eirov-
Vi KXivrfs jUta? 6 ely Trapa-
Xrjfydr)(TTa.i, Kal o e'repof afaBrj-
85 / v > > / n
creroct. ovo ecrovTou aMjuovcrai
em TO avTo~ rj fj.la Trct.paXr)<f)dr)-
(rerca, /cat 77 erepa. a.<pe6rj(reTcu.
36 Ecu a-TTOKpidevres Xeyovcnv
OLVTCO, Hov, Kvpte; '0 8e el-rev
OTTOV
TO cra/za,
O'L aero/.
e/cei
KEVISED VERSION.
y in like manner, he who 'shall
Je'in the field, "let him not turn
back. Remember Lot's wife. 32
Whoever shall seek to save his 33
life, b will lose it, and whoever
shall lose his life, "will pre-
serve it. I tell you, in that 34
night there d will be 'two f ou
one bed ; E one h will be taken,
and the other 'left. Two women 35
'will be grinding together; one
will be taken, and the other left.
And they answered, and said 36
to him, Where, Lord ? And
he said to them. Wherever the
body is, 'there will the eagles
be gathered together.
y " in like manner ; " ofioicas. Thorn., Scarlett, Sharpe, M
See v. 28, note.
1 " shall be." As !Vz-t occurs in the preceding clause, and is
rendered by " shall be," the supplement here should conform to
that rendering. So Thorn., Dick.
* " let turn back ; " lyiiurfsyarca sis TO. onlaca. Penn,
Sharpe, "Wakef., Sawyer. " Return back " is tautological. The
literal rendering is that of Eras., "non redeat ad relicta," or
more exactly, of Mont., " non redeat in qute retvo." Bob. (Lex.,
in IxiaTpeyxo, et h. loco] : " Spec, to turn back upon, to return
pr. and with oniaco." In the para'lel, Mark 13 : 16, the E. V.
has " turn back again." By an oversight in correcting the proof,
the Rev. of Mark has " return " instead of " turn."
* "will lose;" fatoUaca. Peun, Scarlett, Sharpe, Norton,
"Wakef., Dick., Kend., M.
" will preserve ; " gcaoyoi-qoei. " Will " is the auxiliary em-
ployed by Penn, Sharpe, Norton, Kend., M. See v. 23, note.
* " will be ; " 'eaovrm. Penn, M., Norton. See v. 23. note.
' " two ; " duo. No supplementary word is used here. It
does not seem advisable to render the translation more explicit
than the text, when there is no cxigentia loci. So in E. V. of
Matt. 24 : 40, Svo eaovrai sv -tqi ny^cy is rendered simply, " two
shall be in the field." In the pa&suge before us, no supplement is
employed by Kend., Norton, Thorn., Scarlett, Sawyer, Murdock,
Belg., De Wette, S. FT., Iber.
f " on one bed ; " Im xtiwis (teas. Penn, Sharpe, Norton
(" on the same bed "), Sawyer, Thehvall. As ulivt? may be used
here for the couch, or table-seat, on which it was customary to
recline at meals, " couch " should be placed in the margin. Rob.
(Lex., in verbo) supposes that this is its meaning in this passage.
It, ia rendered " couch " by "WakeBeld, Thorn., M., and Sawyer.
Kuinosl remarks : "Kiaij non tantum significat lettnan cubicuta-
rcm, sed et ledum tridinarem." Iber. has this marginal note:
"Acaso reclinados a la mesa." '
* " one ; " 6 els. Kend., Thorn., Sharpe, "Wesley, Wakefield,
Camp., Dick., M. Thehvall. In conformity with our idiom, o is
not translated. In such a phrase, we omit the article before the
first subject, and use it before the second, as here, " one will be
taken, and the other left." See ch. 7 : 41, note.
11 " will be taken." See v. 23, note.
1 "left ;" dys&ijaerac." From the connection of " left" with
" will be taken," it is unnecessary to insert the auxiliary " will
be." So Kend., Thorn. (" dismissed"), Scarlett, Wesley, Wakef.,
Camp., Sawyer. In the next verse, the E. V. properly omits the
auxiliary where the construction is precisely the same and has,
" the one shall be taken, and the other left."
1 " will be grinding." See v. 23, note. Norton, Kend., M.,
etc., have " will be."
k The clause Svo Jsoovrta Iv -tcy aygtp x. r. L, which forms the
thirty-sixth verse E. V., " Two men shall be in the field," etc.,
has been properly thrown into the margin by Bagster. It is
canceled by Griesb., Lachm., Tischend., bracketed by Knapp,
Theile, Tittmann, Goschen. Though found in the Elzevir text, it
is not in that of Stephens. It is not in the Vat. B. Kuinoel
says : " Multi diversarum familiarum codd. optimi hunc versum
omittunt, neque adeo ab ofioiote'Uvrov omissus videtur, sed
probabilius est, verba hujus versus e Matt, loco parallelo 24 : 40,
in hunc locum esse translata." Schott : " Desunt (i. e. Svo eaov
rat a. i. L) in cdd. permultis (11 unc.) in quibus A.B.E.G.H.
verss. Memph., JEth., Goth., Slav. MS. Plerique recentiorum
cdd. recte omittunt cum Griesb." Though Bloomf. would retain
Jiis reading, he furnishes no satisfactory reason for disregarding
;he evidence, whieh weighs so heavily against its authenticity.
i " there ; " ex*z. Thorn., Norton, Sharpe, Wesley, Penn,
Wakef., Camp., Dick., Sawyer, Kend., Thelwall, M.
184
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XVIII.
KING JAMBS' VERSION.
CHAP. XVIII.
AND he spake a parable unto
them to this end, that men ought
always to pray, and not to faint ;
2 Saying, There was in a city
a judge, which feared not God,
neither regarded man.
3 And there was a widow in
that city ; and she came unto him,
saying, Avenge me of mine adver-
sary.
4 And he would not for a while :
but afterward he said within him-
self, Though I fear not God, nor
regard man ;
5 Yet, because this widow trou-
bleth me, I will avenge her, lest
by her continual coming she weary
me.
6 And the Lord said, Hear
what the unjust judge saith.
7 And shall not God avenge
GREEK TEXT.
CHAP. XVIII.
"EAEFE Se K<U -i
irpos
TO
8eiv
/ecu fj.rj e/c/ccc/cetj',
I$ rv ev TLVI
, TOV Oeov /J.TJ (f)o/3ov/j.vo$,
KOI av6po)7rov pj] vrpe7ro/Jt.i>o?.
3 / p*\ 3 1 ^ /^ >/
XnP ' oe TJV ev rrj TroAei CKftvr],
KOLI rfp^ero Trpos O.VTOV, Xeyovcra,
j. GOTO TOV ai>TlSl-
KOV fj,ov. a OVK
em xpovov {JLCTO. Se TavTa ehrev
li> eaurro, El /cat TOV Oeov ov
<jfro/3ou/iac, KCU. avdpwirov OVK ev-
TpeTro/J.a.1.- Sia ye TO Trapevew
i \ i / >
fJ,Ol KOTTOV TT)V J(T]paV TaVTfJV, K-
avTrjv, 'Lva. /J.TJ ety re'Ao?
-nunria.^ /j.e. 6 Elire
8e 6 Kvptos, 'd.Kovcra.Te TL o Kpi-
TTJS Trj? aSiKias Xe-yer 7 6 8e
OV /J.TJ TTOLrjCTfL TT/V flcSlKr)-
TO)V CKXeKTCOV aVTOV TO>V
REVISED VERSION.
CHAP. XVIII.
. AND he also spake a parable l
to them, "to the end, b that they
ought always to pray, and not
to faint ; saying, There was in 2
a city a judge who feared not
God, e nor ""regarded man. And 3
there was a widow in that city;
and "she went to him, saying,
'Do me justice on mine adver-
sary. And he would not for a i
while ; but afterwards he said
within himself, Though I fear
not God, nor regard man, yet, 5
"because indeed this widow
troubleth me, S I will do her jus-
tice, lest by her continual coin-
ing h she should weary me. And 6
the Lord said, Hear what the
unjust judge saith ; and 'will 7
not God do 'justice to k his
* " to the end ; " xpos TO. Penn, Wesley (" to this eud ").
b " that they." This supplementary nominative is drawn from
the object avrois. So Thorn., Sharpe, Wakef., Norton, Camp.,
Dick., Kend. Or we may use this language, " that one ought,"
etc., though, perhaps, nothing would be gained by the change.
The scope of the passage shows, that the importance of prayer by
the elect, is the topic.
" " nor ; " fir;. See ch. 8 : 17, note. Thorn., Sharpe, Scarlett,
Wesley, Wakef., Norton, Camp., Angus, Kend., M.
d " regarded ; " IvrgsTtofitvos. As an alternative rendering,
" reverenced," as in Matt. 21 : 37. Luke 20 : 13. Heb. 12 : 9.
So Wesley.
" " she went ; " rf^eto. Comparing this verb with tva ftrj
tls rsiog fyxofterri, it seems clear that it is put in the imperfect
tense to mark continued, or repeated, action. See ch. 7 : 11, note.
The difficulty is to express the thought in English without em-
ploying a phrase which will be criticized as too colloquial. Two
forms are submitted for consideration, " she used to go to him ; "
or, " she continued going to him."
f " Do me justice on ; " 'ExSixrjoov. As there is nothing in
the narrative which restricts the thought to penal satisfaction
for. crime, the radical sense of the verb, " to carry out right and
instice," may properly be expressed as above. Bob. (Lex.) : "To
do ju&tici, to maintain the right or coiise of any one, to vindicate.
Luke 18 : 5." So Kendrick, Angus, Thorn., Scarlett, Wesley,
Wakef. ("Do me justice against"), Norton ("against him"),
Camp., M. De Wette, " Schaffe mir Eeeht gegen ; " Belgic,
" Doet mij recht tegen ; " Iber., " Hazme justieia ; " Dan.,
" Skaf rnig Eet ; " Diodati, " Pammi ragione del ."
ff " because indeed ; " Sia ye. Eob. (Lex., yt).
g " I will do justice ; " ixSix^aco. See last note. Diodati,
" io faro ragione ; " Dan., " vil jeg skafie Eet ; " Belg., " zoo
zal ik recht doen ; " De Wette, " so will ich Eecht schaflFen ; "
Iber., " hare justieia."
h " she should weary ; " vncanea^rj. This full expression for
the verb is deemed accordant with present usage. " Weary " is
hardly strong enough to be the.equivalent of a word which signi-
fies primarily " to strike so as to blacken the eyes," and, in a
secondary sense, " to treat with great severity." " To beat out "
would be deemed too much of an approach to common language.
" Should weary me out " is, therefore, suggested as an alternative.
' will do ; " notqaet. The auxiliary " will " is employed
by Thorn., Sharpe, Scarlett, Penn, Wakef., Norton, Camp., Saw-
yer, Keud., M.
i " justice ; " rr,v IxSixriotv. See v. 3, note. Bretschneider :
" Sensu forensi, vindicatio ab injuria ulat.a." - Dunbar (Lex.),
" justice awarded." So Scarlett, Wakef., Norton, Di<* "" '
" recht."
k " his ; " ni-rov, Tyndale, Cranmer, Ge
Wakef., Norton, Camp., Dick., Sawyer. S. :
THE GOSPEL ACCOKDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XVIII.
185
KING JAMES' VERSION.
Ids own elect, which cry day and
night unto him, though he bear
long with them?
8 I tell you that he will avenge
them speedily. Nevertheless, when
the Son of man cometh, shall he
find faith on the earth?
9 And he spake this parable
unto certain which trusted in
themselves that they were right-
eous, and despised others :
1.0 Two men went up into .the
temple to pray ; the one a Phari-
see, and the other a publican.
11 The Pharisee stood and
prayed thus with himself, God,
I thank thce, that I am not as
other men are, extortioners, un-
GREEK TEXT.
POO>VTCOI> Trpof O.VTOV rjfj.epa? KOU
VVKTOS, Kal fj.aKpo0vfJi.QJi> eV av-
TOIS; 8 Ae'yo) V/MV, OTL
eK8tKir)(ni> OLVT&V ev
6 vlos TOV dvdpanrov i\6cav
apa evprjcret TTJV TTLCTTLV eVi rrjs
Ehre 8e Kal irpos rii/a? TOVS
eavTot? on elcrl
, Kal f^ovdfvovvTas TOV?
vs, TTJV 7rapaj3pXrji> ravrrjv
10 ' ' AvQpamoi 8vo ave/Sr/o-av els
TO iepov 7Tpoo~evao~dai' 6 eip
, Kal 6 erepoy
irpos eavTov TO.VTO.
'0 0eof, ev)(apio-Ta> o~oi, OTL OVK
lfjl ajcnrep ol Xonrol TCOV avdpco-
7r(ov, apTra-yes, adiKoi, LLOL^OL, rj
EBVISED VERSION.
elect 'who cry m to him day and
night, though "he beareth long
"in respect to them ? I tell you 8
that phe will do them justice
speedily. Nevertheless, when
the Son of man cometh, will he
find faith on the earth? And 9
he spoke this parable to "some
who trusted r in themselves that
they were righteous, and des-
pised others. Two men went 10
up into the temple to pray ; the
one a Pharisee, and the other
a tax-gatherer. The Pharisee U
'stood, and prayed thus with
himself, "0 God ! I thank thee
that I am not ""like other men,
extortioners, unjust, adulterers,
"who cry;" rcSv POCOVTWV. Alternative, "who are cry-
ing." So Wakef., Scarlett.
10 " to him ; " ytgbs avrbv. The order of the text is retained
here, as entirely appropriate. So Thorn., Sharps, Scarlett, Wes-
ley, Penn, Norton, Camp., Sawyer, Kend. S. Fr., " a lui jour et
suit."
" he beareth long ; " fiax^o&v/ialv. The form of the subj.
and indie, present is the same in modern usage. See ch. 4 : 3, note.
"in respect to them?" sit avrois; Kend. This pronoun
refers to IxkexcSv. Hence, as the scope of the passage shows,
the forbearance of God (bearing long) has reference to the claims
which his people have on his compassion. Kob. (Lex., im cum
(to.) : " (Spoken) of the ground, or motive, the exciting cause of
any action upon, af,i. e., on account of, because of. So of the
incidental cause, upon, at, by reason of, on account of." Brescli.
(in verbo) : " /3. de quo aliquid dictum est." John 12 : 16, ravra
?/v In faiTcy ysyga/fffeva (E. V:), " these things were written of
(i. e., concerning) him." Matth. 13 : 14, xai a.va.nlijQovtai, In
avrois (concerning tliem, as to them) 17 n^oyijrcia 'Hoatov.
Dunbar (Lex.), "TO en sftol, 'as it respects me.'" Bloomfield
(N. T.) : " We may render literally, though he be lorig suffering
[as it regards the injurious] in their behalf, long in interposing
for their succor." Compare Ecclus. 32 : 22 (E. V..35 : 18), ovSe
fa; (laxgo&vfiqast Irf avroTs, " Neither will (the Mighty) be
patient towards (i. e., in respect to, concerning) them."
f "he will do them justice;" xoiqaet. if/v IxSixtjaiv. See
5. 6. note.
" some ; " was. Thorn., Sharpe, Scarlett, Norton, Camp.,
Diclc., Kend., M.
r " in themselves ; " ly emiroTs. The rendering of the E. V.
is retained here, though it is perhaps less exact than " in respect
to themselves." However, as the thought is sufficiently clear, it
is deemed best not to change the phraseology.
* " a tax-gatherer ; " rslcuvqs. See ch. 3 : 12, note.
' " stood, and prayed thus, etc ;" orafreis raura n^oarjv^ero,
. r. L As some adopt the rendering, " The Pharisee, standing
by himself, prayed thus," this may be placed in the margin. I
prefer the rendering of the E. "V. Kuincel assigns the following
reason for construing itgbs eavrbv with ttgooyvxcTo : "Phariscna
stabat, et secum tacitus hunc in modum precabatur. Plures
quidem interpretum ngbs eitvfbv referunt ad participium araSeis
atque explicant vel, seorsim solus stabat, vel, loco suo, pracipuo
aliquo, ubi conspiciretur procul a vectigalium exactore. Hunc
vero interpretanti rationem non admittit usus loquendi. Etenim
Hebraicum fab ab interpretibus Alexandrinis explicatur per
y.ad-' eavrbv, velut Zacb. 12 : 12, h. e. seorsim, nunquam vero per
legos eavtbv, nee ullibi ha?c ipsa vox nqbs SUVTOV hoc sensu legi-
tur, sed respondet lv ictxtqi h. e. secum, tacite, ut Marc. 11 : 31 ;
coll. 12 : 7 ; 10 : 26 ; 16 : 3. Luc. 20 : 5, 14; coll. 12 : 17."
So (in substance) Bloomf. (N. T.). De Wette, " betete bei sich
selber."
"0 God!" '0 Qcbs. Bloomf. (N. Test:), Thorn., Scarlett,
Wakef., Norton, Camp., Dick., M. Trollops (Gram., p. 13) :
" In the flection of nouns, the remains of the ancient dialects
which occur in the N. Test, are exclusively Attic ; in accordance
with which the nominative Qsbs is always, and with a single
exception, for the vocative." Green (Gram., pp. 252, 253).
"" like;" caans^. 'See next-note.
186
THE GOSPEL AC CORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XVIII.
KING JAMES' VERSION.
just, adulterers, or even as this
publican.
12 I fast twice in the week, I
give tithes of all that I possess.
13 And the publican, standing
afar off, would not lift up so much
as his eyes unto heaven, but smote
upon his breast, saving, God be
merciful to me a sinner.
14 I tell you, this man went
down to his house justified rather
than the other : for every one
that exalteth. himself shall be
abased ; and he that humbleth
himself shall be exalted.
15 And they brought unto him
also infants, that he would touch
them : but when his disciples saw
it, they rebuked them.
16 But Jesus called them unto
him, and said, Suffer little chil-
dren to come unto me, and forbid
them not : for of such is the king-
dom of God.
IT Verily, I,say unto you, Who-
12
GREEK TEXT.
KOL as OVTOS o Te\(ovr]s.
crTtvco 8ly TOV cra/3/3aroi>, onrode-
K.O.TU) TTOLVTO. ocra /crayiat. 13 Kca
6 TeXoovr/s jJ.a.Kpo9ev eVrwr OVK
rjdeXev ovSe TOVS o0$aA/*ovy elf
TOV ovpavov eVapar aAA' e'ru-
TTTev els TO o~Tr)dos avTov, \-ycav,
' Oeos, i\ao-8r/Ti JJLOL T< afj.ct.p-
ra>A<. 14 Ae-yca Vfuv, KO.T/3r/
os fls TOV O'LKOV
on Tray o ir^wv
Ta.7rfiva>8r/o~eTcu' 6 Sc ra.-
eavTov u^w^^crerai.
15 Jlpoa-cfapov de OLVTW KOL
TO. flpe(pr/ } IVOL avTcav
IdovTes 8e ol fj.a6r)Tai
- ' 16 > $\ T -
aav avTOis. o oe Irjrrovs
TT/joovcaAeo-a/iej/o? aura ehrev,
' AfyeTe TO. iraiSia ep^ecrSai Trpos
fj.e, Kal pr/ KcoXveTe aura 1 Ttov
yap TOiovTcov caTiv TJ /3ao~iXia
TOV 0ov. 1 afM^v Xe-yco
OVTOS
avTov, 7) e/cetf oy
VERSION.
or even "like this "tax-gatherer.
I fast twice in the week, I give 12
tithes of all which 'I acquire.
And the 'tax-gatherer, standing 13
"far off, 'would not even lift up
his eyes to heaven, but smote
on his breast, saying, b O God!
be merciful to me a sinner. I 14
tell you, this 'man went down
to his house justified rather
than the other ; for every one
who exalteth himself "will be
humbled ; but he who humbleth
himself will be exalted. And 15
they brought to him 'their in-
fants f also, that he might touch
them ; but his disciples, ^seeing
it, rebuked them. But Jesus, 16
"calling them to him, said, Suf-
fer 'the little children to come
to me, and forbid them not ;
for of such is the kingdom of
God. ^Truly, I say to you, IT
T " like ; " cos. Scarlett, Norton, Dick. So (B. V.) Matt.
6 : 29 ; 28 : 3. John 7 : 46. Acts 8 : 32. This rendering pre-
sents the thought, and is more euphonious than " as."
w " tax-gatherer ; " ?e).<6vr}s. Norton, "Wakef., Sharpe. See
ch. 3 : 12, note.
1 " I acquire ; " xtiSftat. Penn, Dicltinson, Sawyer, Angus
("gain"), M. De Wette, "ich erwerbe;" Schott, "acquire."
Green (Gram., in loco, p. 28) : " I pay tithes of all my gains, oaa
xzcoficu, ' whatever I am from time to time acquiring.' 'All that
I possess ' -would require xexrqftac." Trench (on Bib. Revision,
p. 125) : ""Oaa xtaft.ni is not ' all that I possess,' but ' all that
I acquire' (' quse mihi acquire, qtue mini redeunt')." In the per-
fect xixrrifia, the -word first obtains the force of " I possess," or,
in other words, " I have acquired." Compare Deut. 14 : 22.
y " tax-gatherer." See v. 10, note.
1 " far off; " (tctx$6&Ev. See chap. 16 : 23, note.
. " would not even ; " ovx yS-sfav ovS's. Penn, Wakef., Nor-
ton, Sharpe, Kend. Ebb. (Lex., ov) : "Oiix ovde, not even, Luke
18 : 13."
" God ! " 'O 0cos. See v. 11, note.
" " man." This word is italicised, as a supplement.
d " will be bumbled ; " rcatctvca&^aerat. " Will" is employed
as the sign of the future by Scarlett, Penn, Wakef., Norton,
Sharpe, Kend., M. So in the rendering of vycu&qasTai, at close
of verse. Uniformity requires that ianeivioQ'f l aeini should be
rendered by " humbled " here, as its participle is in the next
member of the sentence. See ch. 14 : 11, note.
" their infants ; " ra Ppfyy. The article is retained in the
Belg., Luther, De Wette. It is used here for the possessive pro-
noun. Bloomf. (N. Test.) : "To, p^tyrj, ' the children,' i. e., ' their
children.' " Thelwall. See ch. 5 : 2, note. As an alternative
rendering of the noun, " young children." Wakef., " little chil-
dren ; " S. Fr., " petits enfans."
f " also ; " xal. This position of the word is demanded on the
principle noticed ch. 16 : 14, note. So Angus.
e " seeing ; " iSovrcs. Kend., Scarlett, M., Wesley, Norton,
Sharpe, Thelwall.
h "calling to;" ngooxafaadfceros. Kend, Scarlett, Wesley,
Norton, Camp., M. See ch. 6 : 13, note.
1 " the little children ; " -co. naidict. Scarlett, Penn, Dick.,
Kendriek. TJhe article is rendered by Norton, and Campbell.
Pechy (note in Angus) says : "The little children ; i.e., clearly tha
ones now present, saying nothing (only impliedly) about little
children generally." The article is retained by Wiclif, Belgic,
Luther, De Wette, G. and S. Fr., Span., Iber., Diodati, Ital,
Dan.
' " Truly ; "
See ch. 4 : 24,
THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO LUKE. CHAP. XVIII.
187
KING JAMES' VERSION.
soever shall not receive the king-
dom of God as a little child, shall
in no wise enter therein.
18 And a certain ruler -asked
him, saying, Good Master, what
shall I do to inherit eternal life ?
19 And Jesus said unto him,
Why callesfc thou me good ? none
is good, save one, that is God.
20 Thou knowest the command-
ments, Do not commit adultery,
Do not kill, Do not steal, Do not
bear false witness, Honour thy
father and thy mother.
21 And he said, All these have
I kept from my youth up.
22 Now when Jesus heard these
things, lie said unto him, Yet lack*
est thou one thing: sell all that
thou hast, and distribute unto the
poor, and thou shalt have treasure
in heaven : and come, follow me.
23 And when he heard this, he
was very sorrowful; for he was
very rich.
24 And when Jesus saw that
he was very sorrowful, he said,
How hardly shall they that have
09 edi>
GREEK TEXT.
Se^rjrai rr/v fiacriXeiav
TOV Oeov d>$ iraiSiov, ov fj.rj elar-
els
18
eTrrjpaTTjcre TLS avrov
, Xeycov, AiSdcrKaXe dyade,
TL TrotTjcra? ^corjv aidwiov KXrjpo-
' 19 ~ 
TVNews
OpenLibrary